Bergen PDF

M3nd
~,-~ ;'(',,: . :.'~ . ~ ~~:~~/~~j ~d~:'~;{~~

:bii·..'tecas
Power Systems Analysis
Second Edition
ARTHUR R. BERGEN
Department of Electrical Engineering

and Computer Sciences
University of California, Berkeley
VIJAYVITIAL
Department of Electrical
and Computer Engineering
Iowa State University,Ames
PRENTICE HALL,
Upper Saddle River,New Jersey 07458
,
I _~~~ M! m\lr;rv~r
Siacen,"
Ubrary o(Congress Cataloging·ln·Publication Data
Bergen,Arthur R.
Power ')"tems a.al)"i, I Arthur R. Bergen, Vijay Vittal.-2nd
ed.
p. em.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 0-13-{;91990-1
1. Electric power systems 2. System analysis. 1. Vittal,
Vij.y. II. Title.
TKlOO1.B44 2000
621.31-<1c21 99--20875
CIP
Publisher: Tom Robbins

Associate Editor: Alice Dworkin
EditoriallProduction Supervisor: Rose Kernan
Copy Editor: Pat Daly
Cover Designer: Bruce Kensaleer
Manufacturing Buyer: Pat Brown
Editorial Assistant: Dan DePasquale
Marketing Manager: Danny Hoyt
©1986, 2000 by Prentice·Hall, Inc.

Upper Saddle River, New Jersey 07458
The author and publisher of this book have used their best efforts in preparing this book. These efforts include the
development, research, and testing of the theories and programs to determine their effectiveness. The author and
publisher shall not be liable in any event for incidental or consequential damages in connection with, or arising out
o~ the furnishing, performance, or use of these programs.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, in any form or by any means, without permission in
writing from the publisher.
Printed in the United States of America
10 9 8
ISBN 0-13-691990-1
PRENTICE·HALL INTERNATIONAL (UK) LIMITED, London TRADEMARK INFORMATION

PRENTICE·HALL OF AUSTRALIA PrY. LIMITED, Sydney
PRENTICE·HALL OF CANADA, INC., Toronto MATLAB is a registered
PRENTICE·HALL HlSPANOAMERICANA, &A, Mexico trademark of
PRENTICE·HALL OF INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED, New Delhi The .MathWorks, Inc.
PRENTICE·HALL Of JAPAN, INC., Tokyo
PRENTICE·HALL (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD., Singapore
EDITORA PRENTICE·HALL DO BRASIL, LTDA., Rio de Janeiro
To Jane Bergen and Sunanda Vittal
tA
r,,:U,?;JC('\
Contents
PREFACE xi
1 BACKGROUND 1
1.0 Introduction 1
1.1 Electric Energy
1,2 Fossil-Fuel Plant 5
1.3 Nuclear Power Plant 10
1.4 Hydroelectric Power Plant 11
1.5 Other Energy Sources 12
1.6 Transmission and Distribution Systems 13
1.7 The Deregulated Electric Power Industry 18
2 BASIC PRINCIPLES 22
2.0 Introduction 22
2.1 Phasor Representation 22
2.2 Complex Power Supplied to a One-Port 23
2.3 Conservation of Complex Power 30
2.4 Balanced Three-Phase 35
2.5 Per Phase Analysis 43
2.6 Balanced Three-Phase Power 46
2.7 Summary 47
3 TRANSMISSION·LINE PARAMETERS 53
3.0 Introduction 53
3.1 Review of Magnetics 54
v
3.2 Flux Linkages of Infinite Straight Wire 57
3.3 Flux Linkages; Many-Conductor Case 60
3.4 Conductor Bundling 64
3.5 Transposition 67
3.6 Impedance of Three Phase Lines Including Ground Return 71
3.7 Review of Electric Fields 75
3.8 Line Capacitance 76
3.9 Determination of Line Parameters Using Tables 81
3.10 Typical Parameter Values 84
3.11 Summary 85
4 TRANSMISSION·LINE MODELING 90
4.0 Introduction 90
4.1 Derivation of Terminal V, I Relations 90
4.2 Waves on Transmission Lines 97
4.3 Transmission Matrix 98
4.4 Lumped-Circuit Equivalent 99
4.5 Simplified Models 101
4.6 Complex Power Transmission (Short Line) 103
4.7 Complex Power Transmission (Radial Line) 110
4.8 Complex Power Transmission (Long or Medium Lines) 112
4.9 Power-Handling Capability of Lines 113
4.10 Summary 116
5 TRANSFORMER MODELING AND THE PER UNIT

SYSTEM 127
5.0 Introduction 127
5.1 Single-Phase Transformer Model 127
5.2 Three-Phase Transformer Connections 136
5.3 Per Phase Analysis 142
5.4 Normal Systems 150
5.5 Per Unit Normalization 157
5.6 Per Unit Three-Phase Quantities 160
5.7 Change of Base 163
5.8 Per Unit Analysis of Normal System 164
5.9 Regulating Transformers for Voltage and Phase Angle Control 170
5.10 Autotransformers 175
5.11 Transmission Line and Transformers 177
5.12 Summary 179
Contents vii
6 GENERATOR MODELING I (MACHINE VIEWPOINT) 187

6.1 Classical Machine Description 187
6.2 Voltage Generation 189
6.3 Open-Circuit Voltage 190
6.4 Armature Reaction 193
6.5 Terminal Voltage 196
6.6 Power Delivered by Generator 205
6.7 Synchronizing Generator to an Infinite Bus 208
6.8 Synchronous Condensor 211
6.9 Role of Synchronous Machine Excitation in Controlling Reactive Power 211
6.10 Summary 212
7 GENERATOR MODELING II (CIRCUIT VIEWPOINT) 215

7.1 Energy Conversion 215
7.2 Application to Synchronous Machine 221
7.3 The Park Transformation 226
7.4 Park's Voltage Equation 229
7.5 Park's Mechanical Equation 231
7.6 Circuit Model 232
7.7 Instantaneous Power Output 235
7.8 Applications 235
7.9 Synchronous Operation 250
7.10 Steady-State Model 255
7.11 Simplified Dynamic Model 256
7.12 Generator Connected to Infinite Bus (Linear Model) 265
7.13 Summary 269
,
8 VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM 273 I
~
8.0 Introduction 273 ,-

!
8.1 Exciter System Block Diagram 274
8.2 Generator Models 277
8.3 Stability of Excitation System 280
8.4 Voltage Regulation 281
8.5 Generator Connected to Infinite Bus 284
8.6 Summary 292
i
viii
Contents
9 NETWORK MATRICES 294

9.1 Bus Admittance Matrix 294
9.2 Network Solution 303
9.3 Network Reduction (Kron Reduction) 309
9.4 f BUS Structure and Manipulation 311
9.5 Bus Impedance Matrix 311
9.6 Inverse Elements to Determine Columns of ZBUS 317
9.7 Summary 319
10 POWER FLOW ANALYSIS 323

10.1 Power Flow Equations 325
10.2 The Power Flow Problem 327
10.3 Solution by Gauss Iteration 330
lOA More General Iteration Scheme 336
10.5 Newton-Raphson Iteration 339
10.6 Application to Power Flow Equations 343
10.7 Decoupled Power Flow 352
10.8 Control Implications 356
10.9 Regulating Transformers in Power Flow Analysis 360
10.10 Power Flow Solutions for Large Power Systems 364
10.11 Summary 366
11 AUTOMATIC GENERATION CONTROL AND THE NEW

MARKET ENVIRONMENT 375
11.1 Power Control System Modeling 377
11.2 Application to Single Machine-Infinite Bus System 384
11.3 Simplified Analysis of Power Control System 385
11.4 Power Control, Multigenerator Case. 388
11.5 Special Case: Two Generating Units 391
11.6 Division of Power Into Control Areas 395
11.7 Formulation of the Economic Dispatch Problem 400
11.8 Classical Economic Dispatch (Line Losses Neglected) 405
11.9 Generator Limits Included 411
11.10 Line Losses Considered 416
11.11 Calculation of Penalty Factors 421
Contents ix
11.12 Economic Issues and Mechanisms in the New Market Environment 429
11.13 Transmission Issues and Effects in the New Market Environment 433
11.14 Summary 441
12 UNBALANCED SYSTEM OPERATION 445

12.1 Symmetrical Components 446
12.2 Use of Symmetrical Components for Fault Analysis 451
12.3 Sequence Network Connections for Different Types of Faults 455
12.4 More General Fault Circuit Ai:talysis 461
12.5 Power from Sequence Variables 462
12.6 Sequence Representation ofY and t:. Connected Circuit 463
12.7 Generator Models for Sequence Networks 466
12.8 Transformer Models for Sequence Networks 469
12.9 Sequence Representation of Transmission Lines 471
12.10 Assembly of Sequence Networks 475
12.11 Fault Analysis for Realistic Power System Model 477
12.12 Matrix Methods 482
12.13 Summary 486
13 SYSTEM PROTECTION 495

13.1 Protection of Radial Systems 497
13.2 System with Two Sources 504
13.3 Impedance (Distance) Relays 508
13.4 Modified Impedance Relays 512
13.5 Differential Protection of Generators 514
13.6 Differential Protection ofTransformers 516
13.7 Differential Protection of Buses and Lines 518
13.8 Overlapping Zones of Protection 519 .
13.9 Sequence Filters 520
13.10 Computer Relaying 522
13.11 Summary 525
14 POWER SYSTEM STABILITY 528

14.1 Model 529
14.2 Energy Balance 532
r
14.3 Linearization of Swing Equation 536
14.4 Solution of Nonlinear Swing Equation 538
14.5 Other Applications 549
14.6 Extension to Two-Machine Case 554
14.7 Multimachine Application 556
14.8 Multimachine Stability Studies 563
14.9 Summary 575
APPENDICES 580
Appendix 1: Reluctance 580
Appendix 2: Force Generation in a Solenoid 581
Appendix 3: Method of Lagrange Multipliers 584
Appendix 4: Root-Locus Method 586
Appendix 5: Negative- and Zero-Sequence Impedances of Synchronous Machines 593
Appendix 6: Inversion Formula 599
Appendix 7: Modification of Impedance Matrices 601
Appendix 8: Data for Transmission Line Parameters 605
SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY 612
INDEX 614
Preface
To the second edition
Much has changed since the first edition of this book went to press in 1986. The elec-
tric utility industry in the United States has undergone major changes in its structure
and operating practices. In many parts of the country, the monopolistic and regu-
lated vertically integrated utility system is being replaced by a (partially) deregu-
lated multi-layered system open to competition and other market forces. The
second edition includes material which reflects these changes and deals with issues re-
lated to the new environment.
In addition, a number of thoughtful suggestions by professors and students who
have used the first edition have been incorporated. While continuing to stress fun-
damentals, there is somewhat more emphasis on industry practice and on computer
applications.
The many changes in the second edition include the following: The chapters
have been reordered to provide a more systematic development of the material. A
new section on determining transmission line parameters from manufacturers' ta-
bles has been introduced in Chapter 3. In the same chapter, a more complete and ac-
curate description of transmission line impedance parameters of transmission lines
with ground returns has been provided. Chapter 9 is an entirely new chapter on the
subject of network matrices. The topic of matrix factorization and its applications to
matrix inversion is included. Also included is the modern approach of determining
only needed elements of the impedance matrix. Chapter 10 on power flow solutions
has been expanded to describe the modifications needed when practical limits are
encountered. In Chapter 11, titled "Automatic Generation Control and the New
Market Environment", some ideas currently being utilized for power system opera-
tion and control are introduced. Chapter 12 on unbalanced system operation and
fault analysis has been substantially r!!vised and includes new material describing in-
dustry practice.
A salient feature of the second edition is a running design problem that is first I·
introduced in Chapter 3 and continues in each successive chapter as relevant new I
concepts are presented. The design problem is computer oriented; the student may
use available software, or may develop software using MATLAB®. These design ex-
amples are involved and are ideally suited for group projects.
xi
xii Preface
The material in the text has expanded to the point where it seems clear that
two semesters would be required to cover the material. If this much time is not avail-
able, however, there are alternative pathways through the text. Chapters 7,8, and 11
might be left out without seriously affecting the coherency of the remaining materi-
al. For the student with some background in energy conversion and electrical ma-
chines, Chapters 1,2, the first part of Chapter 5, and Chapter 6 might be excluded. If
pressed for time, Chapter 10 and much of the material at the ends of Chapters 11,12,
13, and 14 could be left out without affecting continuity.
For updates, information regarding available Web sites related to power sys-
tem analysis and power issues, as well as additional resources please visit out Web site
at http://www.prenhall.comlbergenlvittal.
We would like to express our appreciation and thanks to the following review-
ers for their helpful comments and suggestions: Professor Ali Abur, Texas A&M Uni-
versity, Professor Miroslav Begovic, Georgia Institute ofTechnology, Professor Brian
K. Johnson, University of Idaho, and Professor Arun G. Phadke, Virginia Polytechnic
Institute and State University.
There are many others whose contributions we would like to acknowledge.
Among these we would particularly like to thank our colleagues Professors M. A.
Pai, S. S. Venkata, G. B. Sheble, K. C. Kruempel, and J. D. McCalley for their valuable
advice and comments. We would also like to recognize our students who helped in de-
veloping some of the new examples.
Finally, we would like to express our sincere thanks to Sunanda Vittal for her
careful proofreading of the book.
•
- CHAPTER 1 ' '
Background
1.0 INTRODUCTION
In this chapter we give a simplified description of a power system. The system con-
sists of power sources, called generating plants (or generators), power end users, called
loads, and a transmission and distribution network that connects them. Most com-
monly the generating plants convert energy from fossil or nuclear fuels, or from falling
water, into electrical energy.
1.1 ELECTRIC ENERGY
Electricity is only one of many forms of energy used in industry, homes, businesses, and
transportation. It has many desirable features; it is clean (particularly at the point of
use), convenient, relatively easy to transfer from point of source to point of use, and
highly flexible in its use. In some cases it is an irreplaceable source of energy.
Figure 1.1 is a useful summary of electric energy sources and their transition to
end uses for the United States in 1996. The basic energy sources are shown on the
left. The end uses of the electricity are shown on the right. Only about one-third of
the resource energy is converted into electricity; about two-thirds is lost as "waste
heat." In some cases this heat is not wasted. It can be used for heating homes and
offices or for some industrial processes.
In Figure 1.1, the T & D losses are transmission and distribution losses (almost
10% of the net generation of electricity). Also, note the significant amount of non-
utility energy generated in 1996. Changes in government energy policy have en-
couraged this growth. In the period from 1990 to 1995, non utility power generation
grew by 47%. '
Figure 1.2 provides more detail regarding the major sources of utility-
generated electrical energy and some trends in their relative importance. It can be
seen that most of the production has been in conventional steam plants. Conven-
tional steam refers to steam generation by burning coal, petroleum, or gas. In 1996
approximately 3000 billion kilowatthours of electricity were produced. Of this, coal
1
if'
I
2 Background Chap, 1
Electric utilities
U.S. electricity flow, 1996
(quadrillion Btu)
Conversion Plant use T & D

Energy losses
consumed 21.08
Natural gas to generate
__ ~.~~ _ _ electricity Residential
Petroleum 0.73 32.13 3.68
N~cie~-e"je~iric + ~,~~----~-'r----
Gross Net generatIOn ...,.,:::;:::;':..0-:-:-;:'
'p~~e.:~. ~7_ generation of of electricity
Hydroelectric electricity 11.05 10,50
power 3.39
Geothermal
and other
0.13
"eo
Nonutility power producers 1S\0'(\ \0, a\
;--~:"":"-'---:"'C""""-;::Co'(\~e ~...s'S\ Deliveries to other end users 0.06
Energy consumed for ~~ \1'"e"
'Ind ' l
ustna processes l'ilioee>
\,1
products and to produce ~--"----'
steam to generate electricity """'''-----------------''\
Facility use (including losses) 0,88
Figure 1.1 U,S, electricity supply and demand, (From Annual Energy
Review 1996, U,S, Department of Energy,]
accounted for approximately 56%, petroleum 2%, natural gas 8% (totaling 66% for
conventional steam), hydropower 11 %, nuclear power 22%, and others, including gas
turbines, about 2%, Note that nuclear and geothermal power plants also generate
steam but not by burning fossil fuels,
The units used in Figure 1.1 are quadrillion Btu (1015 , or quads), while those in
Figure 1.2 are in billion kilowatthours (or 109 watthours or g~watthours), In at-
tempting to align the figures, we can use the conversion factor l""att = 3.413 Btu/hr,
Turning to the growth in utility electricity production, we see in Figure 1.2 an
almost exponential growth rate until about 1973. Until that time electricity use dou-
bled every 10 years or so, Subsequently, the growth rate dropped, at first reflecting
the general slowdown of worldwide economic growth precipitated in large part by the
oil crisis of 1973 and later by an increasing awareness of the cost-effectiveness of en-
ergy conservation,
Figure 1.3 shows the growth in installed utility-generating capability in the Unit-
ed States, In 1996, of the total installed generating capability of approximately 710
million kilowatts, some 63% was conventional (fossil fuel) steam, 14% was hy-
dropower, 14% was nuclear, 8% was gas turbine, and others totaled about 1%, Com-
paring these with the production figures given earlier, we see great differences in the
utilization rates of the various sources, Nuclear power has the highest rate, Gas
Sec, 1.1 Electric Energy 3
Bllion kilowatthours BlIion kilowatthours
3000 3000
2500
2000
1500 1500
1000 Conventional steam 1000
500
'49 '55 '50 '65 '70 '75 '80 '85 '90 '96
Figure 1.2 Electric utility energy production (United States]. (From

Annual Energy Review 188B, U,S. Department of Energy,]
turbines and internal combustion engines are among the lowest in the rate of uti-
lization. We will discuss the reasons in a moment.
First, it is interesting to calculate an overall utilization factor for 1996. Sup-
pose that it had been possible to utilize the 710 million kilowatt capability full time.
Then the plants would have produced 710 X 109 X 8760 = 6220 X 1012 watthours
in 1996. They actually produced 3078 X 1012 watthours. Thus the annual capabili-
ty factor or load factor was 3078/6220 = 0.49 or 49%. Why isn't the figure higher?
There are two main reasons. The first is that generating units are not always
available for service. There is downtime because of maintenance and other sched-
uled outages; there are also forced outages because of equipment failures. The avail-
ability of fossil-fuel steam turbine units ranges from about 80% to about 92%.
The second reason involves a characteristic of the load. While there must be
enough generating capability availaole to meet the requirements of the peak -load
demand, the load is variable, with daily, weekly, and seasonal variations, and thus has
a lower average value. The daily variations are roughly cyclic with a minimum value
(the base load) typically less than one-half of the peak value. A typical daily load
curve for a utility is shown in Figure 1.4. The (weekly) capability factor for this par-
ticular utility is seen to be approximately 65%.
4 Background Chap. 1
Million kilowatts Million kilowatts
700 Internal combustion, 700

gas turbine,
geothermal,
wind and solar, etc.
600 600
500 500
400 400
300 300
Conventional stearn
200 200
100
_--------1 100
Hydropower
'55 '60 '65 '70 '75 '80 '85 '90 '96
Figure 1.3 Electric utility generating capability in the United States in the
summer. (From Annual Energy Review, 1996, U.S. Department of Energy.)
In meeting the varying load requirements, economic considerations make it de-

sirable to utilize plants fully with low (incremental) fuel costs while avoiding the use
of plants with high fuel costs. This, in part, explains the use of nuclear plants for base-
load service and gas turbines for peaking-power service; ~ different rates of uti-
lization of these sources were noted earlier.
Finally, it is interesting to reduce the enormous numbers describing produc-
tion and generating capability to human terms. In 1996 the u.s. popUlation was
'>.
~ 100~--------------------~
1
...."
80
o
~
Figure 1.4 Daily load output

Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Fri. Sat. Sun. (typical week).
Sec. 1.2 Fossil-Fuel Plant 5
approximately 265 million. Thus, there was a generating capability of approximate-

ly 710/265 == 2.68 kW per person. Using the figure 0.49 for the capability (or load)
factor, this translates into an average use of energy at the rate 1.3 kW per person.
The latter figure is easy to remember and gives an appreciation of the rate of elec-
tricity consumption in the United States.
In the next few sections we consider some typical power plant sources of ener-
gy: fossil-fuel steam plants, nuclear plants, and hydroelectric plants. Space does
not permit a detailed physical description. For more details, see a standard
reference such as the McGraw-Hill Encyclopedia of Energy. The Web site www.
powerlearn.ee.iastate.edu offers pictures of various items of power equipment. If
you can arrange it, there is nothing better than a visit to a power plant.
1.2 FOSSIL·FUEL PLANT
In a fossil-fuel plant, coal, oil, or natural gas is burned in a furnace. The combustion
produces hot water, which is converted to steam,and the steam drives a turbine, which
is mechanically coupled to an electric generator. A schematic diagram of a typical
coal-fired plant is shown in Figure 1.5. In brief, the operation of the plant is as fol-
lows: Coal is taken from storage and fed to a pulverizer (or mill), mixed with pre-
heated air, and blown into the furnace, where it is burned.
The furnace contains a complex of tubes and drums, called a boiler, through
which water is pumped; the temperature of the water rises in the process until the
Combustion gases
to precipitator
and stack
Stop
valve
Furnace
Preheated
air
Feed water
pump
Figure 1.5 Coal-fired power station (schematic).

~.
I
6 Background, Chap. 1
water evaporates into steam. The steam passes on to the turbine, while the combus-
tion gases (flue gases) are passed through mechanical and electrostatic precipitators,
which remove upward of99% of the solid particles (ash) before being released to the
chimney or stack.
The unit just described, with pulverized coal, air, and water as an input and
steam as a useful output, is variously called a steam-generating unit, or furnace, or boil-
er. When the combustion process is under consideration, the term furnace is usual-
ly used, while the term boiler is more frequently used when the water-steam cycle is
under consideration. The steam, at a typical pressure of 3500 psi and a temperature
of 1050°F, is supplied through control and stop (shutoff) valves to the steam turbine.
The control valve permits the output of the turbine-generator unit (or turbogenera-
tor) to be varied by adjusting steam flow. The stop valve has a protective function;
it is normaIIy fuIIy open but can be "tripped" shut to prevent overspeed of the
turbine-generator unit if the electrical output drops suddenly (due to circuit-
breaker action) and the control valve does not close.
Figure 1.5 suggests a single-stage turbine, but in practice a more complex multi-
stage arrangement is used to achieve relatively high thermal efficiencies. A repre-
sentative arrangement is shown in Figure 1.6. Here, four turbines are mechanically
coupled in tandem and the steam cycle is complex. In rough outline, high-pressure
steam from the boiler (superheater) enters the high-pressure (HP) turbine. Upon
leaving the HP turbine, the steam is returned to a section of the boiler (reheater) and
. then directed to the intermediate-pressure (IP) turbine. Leaving the IP turbine,
steam (at lower pressure and much expanded) is directed to the two low-pressure
(LP) turbines. The exhaust steam from the LP turbines is cooled in a heat exchang-
er called a condenser and, as feedwater, is reheated (with steam extracted from the
turbines) and pumped back to the boiler.
Finally, we get to the electric generator itself. The turbine turns the rotor of
the electric generator in whose stator are embedded three (phase) windings. In the
process mechanical power from the turbine drive is converted to three-phase alter-
nating current at voltages in the range from 11 to 30 kV line to line at a frequency of
60 Hz in the United States. The voltage is usually "stepped up~y transformers for
efficient transmission to remote load centers.
A generator (also called an alternator or synchronous generator) is shown in
longitudinal cross section in Figure 1.7; the transverse cross section is approximate-
ly round. The rotor is called round or cylindrical or smooth. We note that steam-
driven turbine generators are usuaIIy two pole or four pole, turning at 3600 rpm or
1800 rpm, respectively, corresponding to 60 Hz. The high speeds are needed to
achieve high steam turbine efficiencies. At these rotation rates, high centrifugal forces
limit rotor diameters to about 3.5 ft for two-pole and 7 ft for four-pole machines.
The average power ratings of the turbine-generator units we have been de-
scribing have been increasing, since the 1960s, from about 300 MW to about 600 MW,
with maximum sizes up to about 1300 MW. Increased ratings are accompanied by in-
creased rotor and stator size, and with rotor diameters limited by centrifugal forces,
the rotor lengths have been increasing. Thus, in the larger sizes, the rotor lengths
144K#
150P
Boiler, resuperheater 1378H
3035 K#
From boiler 490P
3390 K# IOOOF
2415P 1520H 2603 K#
IOOOF 1378H
1461H
section IP section
""':;:;
0
:q""' 0..
:;::
::c
""
~
3031 K#
..."" ~
~ ;!
3493 K#
475F
459h
To boiler - ......- - - ¥............rt-~=-+r-..
Note: Steam tlows through seals not shown Symbol Quantity U.S. customary unit
K# Mass flow 10 3 Ib/hr
F Temperature OF
H Enthalpy, steam Btu/lb
h Enthalpy, water Btu/lb
p Pressure psia
Figure 1.6 Thermodynamic cycle diagram. (Adapted from McGraw-Hili

Encyclopedia of Energy, 2nd ed .. Sybil P. Parker. ed .. © 1977. Courtesy of
McGraw-Hili Book Company. New York.)
•••• • • -_._._ - - - --=--.=.-
. --~~-------
--
.. ----------_
-
..- - - - - - -
-- - ---- - - - - - .. -- -
Cooling water connections Stator housing

~~==~~~~--~~~=======7~1
View is partially sectional

Stator winding end turns Terminal bushings
o 20 ft
I .1
o 6m
Figure 1.7 An 18OG-MVA four-pole (operating at 1800 rpm) synchro-

nous generator; it has a water-cooled stator and rotor windings, and brush-
less excitation equipment. (Courtesy Utility Power Corporation.)
Sec. 1.2 Fossil-Fuel Plant 9
may be five to six times the diameters. These slender rotors resonate at critical speeds
below their rated speeds, and care is required in operation to avoid sustained oper-
ation at these speeds. .
We will consider next the overall efficiency available from a coal-fired power
plant. As an example we can use a unit at the Paradise power plant of the Ten-
nessee Valley Authority, with a capability of 1150 MW. The net efficiency deter-
mined experimentally is about 39% (i.e., 39% of the chemical energy in the coal
is converted into electrical energy). This figure compares favorably with the in-
dustry average of approximately 30%. Although improved technology can raise
the efficiency beyond 39%, there are inherent theoretical limitations (based on
thermodynamic considerations) in the conversion process in the turbine. An
upper bound is found by considering the maximum efficiency as given by the
Carnot cycle efficiency (T[ - Tz)/T I , where TI is the temperature in degrees
Kelvin of the heat source (superheated steam in our case) available to an ideal
heat engine (at constant temperature), and T2 is the corresponding temperature
of the heat sink (the temperature of the cooling water in the condenser in our
case). For the Paradise plant these temperatures are approximately 812°K
(1003°F) and 311 OK (100°F), respectively. Thus, the Carnot efficiency is about
62%. In fact, the heat cannot be supplied at 1003°F to all the turbine blades of
even just the high-pressure turbine, and for this and other reasons the theoreti-
cal efficiency drops to about 53%. Taking practical imperfections into account,
the actual turbine efficiency drops to about 89% of the theoretical value, or ap-
proximately 47%. Considering, then, typical boiler efficiencies of 88% (for con-
version of chemical energy to heat) and generator efficiencies of 99%, we get an
overall fractional efficiency of 1) = 0.47 X 0.88 X 0.99 = 0.41, which, considering
the crudeness of the calculations, is a reasonable check of the experimental fig-
ure of 0.39. Note the fact that 61 % of the fossil-fuel chemical energy is convert-
ed to waste heat. The best hope for increased thermodynamic efficiency is to
raise the steam temperature, but there are some practical difficulties here.
When we consider the tremendous quantities of waste heat generated in the
production of electricity, it is apparent that there is an opportunity to save fuel by
the simultaneous generation of electricity and steam (or hot water) for industrial use
or space heating. Called cogeneration, such systems have long been common here and
abroad. Currently, there is renewed interest' in them because the overall energy ef-
ficiencies are claimed to be as high as 60 to 65%.
There are different types of cogeneration systems. In a topping system elec-
tricity is delivered at the "head. end" of the cycle and the heat exhaust is a useful by-
product. In a bottoming system the head end of the cycle is an industrial process in
which waste heat is a by-product; this waste heat is then used to drive a turbogener-
ator. There are variations of these basic schemes as welL
Finally, we note some problems associated with the use of coal-fired power
plants. Mining and transportation of coal, present safety hazards and other social
costs. Coal-fired plants share environmental problems with some other types of
fossil-fuel plants; these include acid rain and the greenhouse effect.
10 Background Chap. 1
1.3 NUCLEAR POWER PLANT
Controlled nuclear fission is the source of energy in a nuclear power plant. In the
process of fission, heat is generated that is transferred to a coolant flowing through
the reactor. Water is the most common coolant, but gases, organic compounds, liq-
uid metals, and molten salts have also been used.
In the United States the two most common types of nuclear plants, collective-
ly called light-water reactors, are the boiling-water reactor (BWR) and the pressurized-
water reactor (PWR), and both use water as coolant.
In the BWR the water is allowed to boil in the reactor core; the steam is then
directed to the turbine. In the PWR there may be two or more cycles or loops linked
by heat exchangers but otherwise isolated from each other. In all but the last stage
(the secondary of which carries steam to the turbine) the water is pressurized to
prevent steam generation. A schematic diagram of a two-loop system with a single
heat exchanger (called the steam generator) is shown in Figure 1.8. The pressuriz-
er is not shown.
Although it might appear that the only difference between a nuclear plant and
a fossil-fuel plant is the way the steam is produced (i.e., by nuclear reactor/steam gen-
erator rather than furnacelboiler), there are some other differences. For example,nu-
clear steam generators are presently limited in their temperature output to about
600°F (compared with about 1000°F for a fossil-fuel plant). This has a negative im-
pact on thermal efficiency (30% instead of 40%) and on steam conditions in the
turbine
_alor
condenser
cooling
waler
Figure 1.8 Pressurized-water reactor. (Courtesy of Atomic In-

dustrial Forum.)
Sec. 1.4 Hydroelectric Power Plant 11
turbines. There are, of course, major differences in the fuel cycle (supply and dis-
posal) and in requirements for plant safety.
1.4 HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANT
Hydroelectric generation is an important source of power in the United States, ac-

counting for approximately 14 % of the installed generating capability and 11 % of the
energy production in 1996. Hydroplants are classified as high head (over 100 ft) or
low head. The term head refers to the difference of elevation between the upper
reservoir above the turbine and the tail race or discharge point just below the turbine.
For very high heads (600 to 6000 ft) Pelton wheels or impulse turbines are used; these
consist of a bucket wheel rotor with one or more nozzles directed at the periphery.
For medium-high heads (120 to 1600 ft) Francis turbines are used. These turn on a
vertical axis, with the water entering through a spiral casing and then inward through
adjustable gates (i.e., valves) to a runner (i.e., turbine wheel) with fixed blades. The
low-head Kaplan-type turbine is similar but has adjustable blades in the runner. The
efficiency of these turbines is fairly high, in the neighborhood of 88 to 93 % when op-
erating at their most efficient points.
Figure 1.9 shows a cross section through a hydroelectric plant with a Kaplan tur-
bine. Some of the generator features should be noted. The rotation axis is vertical.
With a speed of 144 rpm we would have 50 poles to generate 60 Hz. These poles are
mounted on the periphery of a spoked wheel called a spider. There is space between
the poles to accommodate the pole windings. The rotor is called by the descriptive
title salient pole. .
We note a highly desirable feature of hydropower plants: the speed with which
they may be started up, brought up to speed, connected to the power network, and
loaded up. This process can be done in under five minuteS, in contrast to many hours
in the case of thermal plants; the job is also much simpler and adaptable to remote
control. Thus, hydropower is well suited for turning on and off at a dispatcher's com-
mand to meet changing power needs. When water is in short supply, it is desirable to
use the limited available potential energy sparingly, for periods of short duration, to
meet the peak-load demands. When water is plentiful, with the excess flowing over
the spillway of the dam, base-loading use is indicated.
Hydropower can effectively meet peak demand in locations without suitable
water flows by using pumped storage. In this scheme water is pumped from a lower
reservoir to a higher one during off-peak times (generally at night) and the water is
allowed to flow downhill in the conventional hydroelectric mode during times of
peak demand. Off peak, the generators, operating as motors, drive the turbines in re-
verse in a pumping mode. The overall efficiency is only about 65 to 70%, but the
economics are frequently favorable when one considers the economics of the over-
all system, including the thermal units. Consider the following. It is not practical
to shut down the largest and most efficient thermal units at night, so they are kept
online, supplying relatively small (light) loads. When operating in this mode the
12 Backgr~und Chap. 1
(,;!;]!"'W~JF'~
-'1_ -
50,000 Hp (112 MW[J
Turbine
~
a 10
,!!
20 30 40
I! [! ! I
Draft tube-+
ft Bedrock
1 ! !
o m
10 15
Figure 1.9 Cross section through powerhouse and dam. Grand

Coulee plant (Kaplan turbine). (From McGraw-Hili Encyclopedia
of Energy, 2nd ed .• Sybil P. Parker. ed., © 1977. c:.l.Jrtesyof
McGraw-Hili Book Company. New York.)
pumping power may be supplied at low incremental costs. On the other hand, at the
time of peak demand the pumped storage scheme provides power that would other-
wise have to be supplied by less efficient (older) plants. In a sense, from the point of
view of the thermal part of the system, the pumped storage scheme "shaves the peaks"
and "fills the troughs" of the daily load-demand curve.
1.5 OTHER ENERGY SOURCES
There are additional energy sources currently used or under development. These
include the following: gas turbines, biomass, geothermal, photovoltaic, solar thermal,
wind power, wastes as fuel, tidal power, ocean thermal energy conversion (OTEC),
Sec. 1.6 Transmission and Distribution Systems 13
magnetohydrodynainic generation, generators driven by diesel engines, fuel cells,

wave power, nuclear fusion, and the breeder reactor.
It is in the nature of some of these new sources (for example, photovoltaic and
wind power) that they are of small size and widely dispersed geographically. To ob-
tain the benefits of backup power and full utilization of the locally generated power
and to eliminate the need for expensive local storage schemes, these small sources are
best integrated into the utility network if feasible.
1.6 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
The sources of electric power described in the preceding sections are usually inter-
connected by a transmission system or network that distributes the power to the var-
ious load points or load centers. A small portion of a transmission system that suggests
the interconnections is shown as a one-line diagram in Figure 1.10. Various symbols
~"m."
Transfonners
22
Station buses ...,......,...,
To the
rest of
system
Transmission
line
-+-""'-"""'-'-.,-- Substation
bus
S"~~""T TT m
w,d, ooT Load
Figure 1.10 One-line diagram.

14 Backgrou~d Chap. 1
for generators, transformers, circuit breakers, loads, and the points of connection
(nodes), called buses, are identified in the figure. Figure 1.11 shows a portion of a
300-bus system. The section shown has 69 buses and 15 generators; the circuit break-
ers and loads are not shown. Figure 1.11 uses a transformer symbol different from
the one used in Figure 1.10. On a very different scale, Figure 1.12 suggests the net-
work of major transmission lines spanning the United States.
The generator voltages are in the range of 11 to 30 kV; higher generator volt-
ages are difficult to obtain because of insulation problems in the narrow confines of
the generator stator. Transformers are then used to step up the voltages to the range
of 110 to 765 kV. In California the backbone of the transmission system is composed
mainly of 500-kV, 345-kV, and 230-kV three-phase lines. The voltages refer to volt-
ages from line to line.
One reason for using high transmission-line voltages is to improve energy
transmission efficiency. Basically, transmission of a given amount of power (at
specified power factor) requires a fixed product of voltage and line current. Thus,
the higher the voltage, the lower the current can be. Lower line currents are as-
sociated with lower resistive losses (PR) in the line. Another reason for high-
er voltages is the enhancement of stability. This will be discussed in later chapters.
A comment is in order about the loads shown in Figure 1.10. The loads
referred to here represent bulk loads, such as the distribution system of a town,
city, or large industrial plant. Such distribution systems provide power at various
voltage levels. Large industrial consumers or railroads might accept power
directly at voltage levels of 23 to 138 kV; they would then step down the voltages
further. Smaller industrial or commercial consumers typically accept power at
voltage levels of 4.16 to 34.5 kV. Residential consumers normally receive single-
phase power from pole-mounted distribution transformers at voltage levels of
120/240 V.
Although the transmission-distribution system is actually one interconnect-
ed system, it is convenient to separate out the transmission system, as we have done
in Figure 1.10. A similar diagram for the distribution system can be drawn with
bulk substations replacing the generators as the sources of AflIwer and with lower-
level loads replacing the bulk power loads shown in Figure 1.10. Henceforth, we
will be discussing power systems at the transmission system level; most of the
techniques we develop are directly applicable to the distribution system as well.
The transmission systems of most electric utilities in the contiguous United
States are interconnected and the systems operate as members of power pools.
For example, the utilities in the western United States and Canada belong to the
Western Systems Coordinating Council (WSCC). In addition, the power pools
are themselves interconnected in a system known as the North American Power
Systems Interconnection. The primary objective of the interconnection is im-
proved service reliability; a loss of generation in one area can be made up by uti-
lizing spare capacity in another area. Improved system economy is also achieved
along the lines of the earlier discussion concerning the advantages of intercon-
necting hydro with thermal sources.
I ~
281
Figure 1.11 One-line diagram of 69-bus system. [Courtesy of

EPRI © 1970, On-Line Stability Analysis Study RP90-1.]
15
I:'
,
To Vancllver Stations Owned

By B,C, Hydro & Power Authority
._'_.-.
r-
/
/
Legend
Operating Voltage-kilovolts (kV)
- 345 or 500 or 765 AC
·_·-·1610r230AC
- - - ±500, ±450,±400, ±250 DC
City
" Substation
• Generating plant
Partial representation of cities,

substations, generating stations,
and transmission lines. 161 and 230 kV lines
are shown only to suggest
the interconnections between
the higher voltage lines.
Line locations are approximate.
Figure 1.12 Major transmission facilities in service. (Courtesy of the De-

partment of Energy and the North American Electric Reliability Council.)
16
Adapted from
Department of Energy map
Energy
Information Administration
DOEIEIA-OI65(78)
Major extra high voltage
transmission lines
December 31. 1978
and updated from the
North American Electric
Reliability Council (NERC)
02550 100 200 300 400 Miles Transmission Lines Map
-'TII..!"I -L''I-,..,'L"'i_iL,.i--'i..Ji
1-1
January I, 1997
o 50100 200 300 400 500 600 Kilometers
Figure1.12 (cant.)
17
18 Backgrou~d Chap. 1
1.7 THE DEREGULATED ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY
Sections 1.2 through 1.6 provide an overview of the main components of the electric
power industry. These components include the generation subsystem, the transmis-
sion subsystem, and the distribution subsystem. Prior to about 1992, within a partic-
ular geographic area, a single company owned and operated all of the subcomponents
of this system. This company was a vertically integrated monopoly that was regulated
by a state utilities commission or another appropriate regulatory authority, and it
had an obligation to serve all of its customers. The customers were captive to the local
company, and the electricity rates were set by the regulating entity in each state. The
rates included the generation operating cost, which consists of fuel and maintenance
costs. In addition, the costs of construction, operation, and maintenance of the trans-
mission system and the distribution system were included in the customer rate. In this
environment, large customers had some negotiating ability, but small businesses and
residential customers were left with the sole option of appealing to the regulating
entities for lower rates.
In 1992 important federal legislation fundamentally changed all this. To fa-
cilitate the growth of a free market electricity supply and to stimulate competition,
the U.S. Senate passed a comprehensive National Energy Policy Act (NEPA). A
brief description of the important elements of the new energy policy and its impact
is given below.
The act includes 30 Titles. Among these, Title I and Title VII are the most sig-
nificant. Energy efficiency issues are the focus ofTitle I of the Act, which encourages
integrated resource planning (IRP) and demand-side management (DSM). A new set
of rate-making standards is introduced by the Act, requiring state utility commissions
to assess the economic impact of bulk power electric transactions under the proposed
rate-making standards. There is a great emphasis on reducing the costs of efficien-
cy improvements for generation, transmission, and distribution facilities.
In Title VII, exempt wholesale generators (EWGs) are defined as any company
owning or operating all or part of an eligible facility and selling electricity at whole-
sale cost. Utilities are permitted to purchase from an affiliafjtl. EWG under the ju-
risdiction of a state commission. The Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC)
is given authority to mandate contract signing as long as such contracts were for the
benefit of the public. This is the first step toward requiring open transmission access.
A major focus of the changing policies is competition as a replacement for reg-
ulation in order to achieve economic efficiency. This change in the fundamental phi-
losophy of transacting business will result in a number of changes in the structure,
planning, and operations of the existing power system. In 1993 the FERC issued an
electric industry restructuring notice of proposed rulemaking (NOPR). The NOPR
proposed the functional unbundling of the vertically integrated structure of the elec-
tric utility companies into three parts:
• GENCO (generation company). The GENCOs are responsible for provid-

ing (selling) electric generation according to contracts together with needed
Sec. 1.7 The Deregulated Electric Power Industry 19
auxiliary or so-called ancillary services, which enhance reliability and quality of

the power delivered to the customer or the transmission grid .
• TRANS CO (transmission company). The TRANSCOs are responsible for
maintaining all transmission equipment to facilitate the transport of electricity
via the transmission grid according to prearranged schedules together with any
needed auxiliary or ancillary services .
• DISTCO (distribution company). The DISTCOs are responsible for provid-
ing the physical wire system to connect the end users (customers) to the bulk
transmission system.
It is envisioned that these three companies would be horizontally integrated
and would be the market players in the new competitive environment. They would
also be coordinated by a central coordinator, or an independent contract administra-
tor (ICA). The regulated ICA would act as an agent between the producers and the
consumers. It would handle monetary transactions for the sale and purchase of en-
ergy and would be rewarded by a margin of the profit from such operations. The
ICA would coordinate the operation of the transmission network. The ICA might
be independently owned, with a regulated rate of return, or be a joint venture of all
players (an exchange). The producers and consumers would generate bids (sell and
buy) to the ICA. The ICA would match the bids subject to all operational constraints.
It would also be the responsibility of the ICA to ensure that the energy transactions
resulting from matched bids would not overload or render the electrical transmis-
sion system insecure. The GENCOs and DISTCOs would coordinate only via the
prices transmitted to a central coordinator.
The ICA could be implemented as two distinct entities, as in California, where
a power exchange (which is a competitive wholesale spot power market) and an
independent system operator (ISO) coexist. In all regions of the United States, a
regional transmission group (RTG) is presently being envisioned as a means of
coordinating system planning. The ICA would, however, be responsible for main-
taining the security and reliability of the system. The ICA would monitor and re-
spond appropriately in order to remain within power system limits and
transmission capacities. The GENCOs and DISTCOs would be required to co-
operate with the ICA in maintaining system reliability. Supplying crucial gener-
ator operating parameters to the ICA during the bidding process would certainly
be part of this cooperation.
The aforementioned structure is in the process of evolution. There could be
changes in the structure in the final implementation. In March 1995, the FERC is-
sued the ancillary services NOPR, representing policy on unbundling and pricing of
ancillary services. Under this NOPR, the ancillary service would be procured by the
ISO. The ancillary or support services could be provided by a third party, referred
to as an ancillary services company (ANCILCO). The provider of ancillary services
would be regulated, and the cost for the services would be set by state utility com-
mission3 or other appropriate regulatory authorities. Emerging players in this new
environment are the energy services companies (ESCOs). These may be large
2D Backgro,und Chap. 1
industrial customers or customer pools. These companies would purchase power at

the least cost from GENCOs when needed by consumers. The ESCOs would also
· , contract with DISTCOs to obtain the distribution path to serve their customers. Fig-
I'
ure 1.13 shows this framework.
The consequences of restructuring the electric industry can be summarized as
follows: Generation, transmission, and distribution would be owned by private com-
panies. Customers, both large and small, would purchase electric energy from any
generation company. The generation company, in turn, would have to set the price
of electricity based on a competitive market environment. The transmission system
within a particular geographic area would still be a monopoly. Generation compa-
nies would have to pay a fee to the appropriate transmission company or companies
to deliver their energy.
The rates for delivering energy would be set by state utility commissions or
other appropriate regulatory authorities. The distribution system would also be
owned by a separate company (typically the original utility) and would charge a de-
livery fee. The rates for delivery would again be set by a state utility commission or
other regulatory authority. The goal of the generation company would be to maxi-
mize profits by increasing sales and service, while minimizing operating and mainte-
nance costs. The transmission and distribution companies would attempt to minimize
costs because they are regulated entities and need to justify delivery fees. The cus-
tomers, in turn, would have to learn to minimize the cost of electric energy by care-
fully evaluating the offers of competing electricity suppliers. This new environment
would increase competition among GENCOs. The cost of generation would pro-
vide the most flexibility in playing the market. This flexibility would be provided by
the fuel contracts and the labor market. Competition would also be increased among
ESCOs to attract more customers and to deal for better contracts with GENCOs.
The competitive market environment would result in the price of energy being in-
dependent of local regulating agencies. In addition, the increase in competition
among GENCOs would result in reduced prices to customers.
This changed market structure would have a major impact on power system op-
eration and planning. Traditionally, vertically integrated utilt$Fs have placed great em-
phasis on reliability and service quality. In addition, the North American Electric
Reliability (NERC) council sets strict reliability and adequacy criteria. As a result,
ICA - Independent Contract Administrator

ISO - Independent System Operator
'----_..,--_..J RTG· Regional Transmission Group
Figure 1.13 Electric utility industry structure in deregulated

environment.
Sec. 1.7 The Deregulated Electric Power Industry 21
so-called ancillary services (which maintained or improved reliability and quality of

delivered power) were an integral part of the service provided. In the competitive
market environment, the generating company would only have the obligation to serve
the stipulations in a contract. In this case, ancillary services typically will also have to
be contracted. A customer might choose to accept less reliable service or less regu-
lated voltage and frequency or a less pure sinusoidal waveshape in exchange for a
lower price. Hence, the constraints and variables involved in operating the power
system increase tremendously. If services are purchased from different entities, the
need for metering also increases significantly. Some of these issues are addressed in
later chapters.
CHAPTER 2
•
Basic Principles
2.0 INTRODUCTION
In the steady state, most power system voltages and currents are (at least approxi-
mately) sinusoidal functions of time all with the same frequency. We are therefore
very interested in sinusoidal steady-state analysis using phasors, impedances, admit-
tances, and complex power. As we will see in later chapters, some of these sinusoidal
steady-state relations extend to an important class of transients as well.
We assume that the reader has some familiarity with the basic ideas from cir-
cuit theory. In this chapter we first review phasor representation and complex power,
then introduce the theorem of conservation of complex power. Next, we consider
three-phase circuits, balanced three-phase circuits, and per phase analysis.
--\
2.1 PHASOR ~JRESENTATION
At the nodes of a power system, the voltage waveform frequently can be assumed to
be purely sinusoidal and of constant frequency. The same is true of line currents. In
most of the analytical development in this book, we deal with the phasor represen-
tation of sinusoidal voltages and currents, and we use the quantity V and I to indicate
these phasors. IVI and III designate the magnitudes of the phasors, and 8v and 8, des-
ignate their angles.
A phasor is a complex number that contains the amplitude and phase angle in-
formation of a sinusoidal function. The concept of a phasor can be developed using
Euler's identity, which relates the exponential function to the trigonometric functions.
e±jB = cos 8 ± j sin 8 (2.1) .
Equation (2.1) provides us an alternative means of expressing the cosine and sine
function. The cosine function can be represented as the real part of the exponential
22
Sec. 2.2 Complex Power Supplied to a One-Port 23
function, and the sine function can be represented as the imaginary part of the ex-
ponential function as follows: .
cos 0 = Re (e ie ) (2.2)
and
sinO = 1m (e ie ) (2.3)
where Re represents the real part of and 1m represents the imaginary part of
A sinusoidal voltage function (it is conventional to use the cosine function in an-
alyzing the sinusoidal steady state) can be written in the form suggested by Eq. (2.2):
v(t) = Vmax cos (wt + Ov)
= Vmax Re (e i(wt+8 v)} (2.4)
= Vmax Re (e/ wt e/ev)
We can move the coefficient Vmax inside the argument and reverse the order of the
two exponential functions inside the argument without altering the result:
v(t) = Re (Vmaxe/ev e/wt ) (2.5)
In Eq. (2.5) Vmaxeiev is a complex number that carries the amplitude and phase
angle of the given sinusoidal function. This complex number is by definition the con-
ventional circuit theory phasor representation of the given sinusoidal function. This
is the representation used in circuit theory textbooks. In power systems applications,
however, a small modification is always used. We define an effective phasor repre-
sentation:
(2.6)
Thus, the effective phasor representation differs from the conventional circuit theo-
ry phasor representation by the factor v2. The reason for choosing this definition
will be presented in the next section. In all that follows, when we use the term pha-
sor we will mean "effective phasor."
Equation (2.6) is the polar representation of a phasor. We can also obtain its
rectangular representation as
V= (Vmax cos Ov + jVmax sin Ov)/,Ii
(2.7)
= IVI cos Ov + j IVI sin Ov
2.2 COMPLEX POWER SUPPLIED TO A ONE·PORT
We continue by reviewing some additional results from elementary circuit theory.

Using associated reference directions, as shown in Figure 2.1, the instantaneous power
supplied to a one-port N is p(t) = v(t)i(t). We now assume that the voltage and cur-
rent are both sinusoids of angular frequency w,
24 Basic Principles Chap. 2
Figure 2.1 Power into a one-

port.
v(t) = Vmax cos (wt + Bv) (2.8)

i(t) = Imax cos(wt + B/) (2.9)
Vmax and Imax are real numbers called the amplitudes, and Bv and B/ are called the
phases of the voltage and current, respectively. Sometimes it is convenient to use
~ for Bv and il for B/. We now calculate p(t) using identities from trigonometry.
p(t) = Vmaxlmaxcos(wt + Bv)cos(wt + B/) (2.10)

= ~ Vmaimax[ cos (Bv - B/) + cos (2wt + Bv + B/)]
We see that p(t) is composed of two parts; there is a constant (average) component
and a sinusoidal component of frequency 2w. An example illustrating the relation-
ship between p, v, and i is shown in Figure 2.2. We note that p(t) is zero whenever
either v(t) or i(t) is zero. Thus, unless v and i are in phase (or 180 0 out of phase)
there will be twice as many zero crossings of p(t) as of v(t) or i(t). The component
in (2.10) of frequency 2w is consistent with this observed behavior. In the case shown
in Figure 2.2, the average power is positive, but in general the average p(t) can be
positive, negative, or zero. We next define the power factor angle:
(2.11)
and P, the average power over one period, T = 27T/W. ~om (2.10) we get
Figure 2.2 Instantaneous

power.
P == -1 j'T p(t)dt
T 0
(2.12)
== ~ Vrnax l max cos cP
In applications one is normally concerned with P rather than p(t).

It is frequently convenient to calculate P using the phasor representations of v(t)
and i(t). Using the (effective) phasors described in Section 2.1,
Vrnax '8
v(t) == Vrnax cos (wt + /Iv) {:} V == V2 e' v (2.13)
Hence
v(t) = Re V2 Ve iwt (2.14)
We note that IVI == vrnax/V2 is the root-mean-square (rms) value of v(t) and hence
the value read by the usual ac voltmeter. Suppose that we calculate the average
power dissipated in a resistor with resistance R connected to a sinusoidal source of
effective voltage V.
2
1 IT 1 IT v (t) 1V12
P=- p(t)dt=- - d t = -
To To R R
This is the same formula we get with dc. Thus, if the effective voltage is 120 V, we
get the same average heat energy out of the resistor as if the voltage were 120 V dc.
This motivates the terminology effective. A similar discussion holds for effective cur-
rent through R. Thus, we get the simple result
P == III2R == IW = IVIIII
R
This simplification extends to more general cases. Thus, substituting (effec-

tive) phasors in (2.12), we get
P = ~ VrnaJrnax cos cP == IVIIII cos cP

== Re IVI eiLl: III e- iLl. == Re V 1*
(2.15)
where * designates the complex conjugate. As may be seen, the factor ~, which
would otherwise appear in (2.15), is eliminated. Since the variable, power, is so ex-
tensively used, the simplification is worthwhile and is universally used in power sys-
tem analysis.
The quantity cos cP that occurs in (2.15) is known as the power factor (PF).
PF ~ cos cP (2.16)
,
Figure2.3 Complex power into N.
Unlike the case of dc, the product of voltage and current does not give the power. To
find the power we need to multiply the product of voltage and current by the power
factor.
Power engineers frequently use the terminology lagging or leading power fac-
tor, as in the following description. "A load draws 200 kW at a power factor of 0.707
lagging." The term lagging means that I lags V. Thus, we deduce that cP == 45°.
In (2.15) we see that P = Re VI*. This raises the question of the significance
of 1m VI *and of V1* itself. In fact, these quantities are just as important as P, as we
will attempt to show. First, let us define complex power S and reactive power Q:
S! VI*
11
(2.17)
Q == 1m VI*
Thus,
S == VI* == IVIIII eN = P + jQ (2.18)
In (2.18) S is described in both polar and rectangular forms and it is seen that i.§. == cPo
It may be helpful to summarize the results, as shown in Figure 2.3. Using associated
reference directions for V and I, S is the complex power into N. If V leads I as shown,
both P and Q (delivered to N) are positive.
What is the physical significance of Q? We may gain,ili appreciation for what
Q means physically by considering the following cases. V(l"e start with the case in
which N is an inductor.
Example 2.1
For Z = jlJ)L
(a) Calculate Q.
(b) Calculate the instantaneous power into L.
(c) Compare.
Solution (a) Using (2.18), we have

= ZII* == ZIN = jlJ)LIII 2
S == Vl*
Q = ImS = IJ)LIII 2
(b) Suppose that the current is given by itt) = v'ZIII cos (WI + 6);then
v(t) =L i =-
d'
v'Z wLIII sin (WI + 6)
p(l) = v(t)i(l) = -2wL 1/12 sin (WI + 6) cos (wi + 6)

=-wL1112 sin 2(wt + 6)
(c) Comparing the results in parts (a) and (b), we find
p(t) = -Q sin 2(wt + 6)
Thus, Qis the amplitude or maximum value of the instantaneous power into N.
In this example we see that although the average power P supplied to the in-
ductor is zero, there is still an instantaneous power supplied (to sustain the changing
energy in the magnetic field) whose maximum value is Q.
Exercise 1. Repeat Example 2.1 in the case of a capacitor (i.e., Z = l/jwC ).
We consider next a more general example.
Example 2.2
Consider a network with a driving-point impedance 2.
(a) Find expressions for P and Q.

(b) Find p(l) in terms of P and Q.
(c) Suppose that the network is a series RLC. Interpret the result in part (b).
Solution (a) S = VI* = 211* = Re 21112 + jIm 2 1/12 = P + jQ. Thus

P = Re 2 1/1 2 = 1211/12 cos !!:..
Q = 1m 2 1112 = 1211112 sin il
(b) It is convenient to choose itt) =' v'Z III cos wi; then V(I) = v'Z 121111
cos (wt + il). Using trigonometric identities, we have
p(t) (wt + il) cos wi
= v(t)i(l) = 1211112 cos
=1211J12(cos il + cos (2wl + il))
= IZIIII2(cos il + cos 2wt cos il- sin 2wt sin il)
= P(l + cos 2wl) - Q sin 2wt
(c) In this case Z = R + jwL + l/jwC. From part (a) we find that P = R 1112
and Q = QL + Qc, where QL ~ wL IWandQ £ -(l/wC) 1/12are the reactive
powers into Land C, respectively. Thus, we can write .
p(l) = P(l + cos 2wt) - QL sin 2wt - Qc sin 2wt
28 Basic PriFiciples Chap. 2
The first term is the instantaneous power into R (with average value P). The sec-
ond and third terms are the instantaneous powers into Land C, respectively. It
is interesting to note that Q = QL + Qc = 0 if w2LC = 1 (i.e., in the case where
the inductive and capacitive reactances cancel).
Suppose that we have a more general RLC network. We find, as in Example

2.2(c), that the complex power supplied to the network at its terminals equals the
sum of complex powers consumed by the individual elements of the network. An ex-
tension of this idea will be discussed in Section 2.3.
We turn next to the importance of Q. Power system planners and operators
are interested in Q, as well as P, generation, and flow. The reactive-power compo-
nent of a customer's load as well as the average power must be supplied, and there
is a cost associated with this supply. From Figure 2.3 we can see that for a given IVI
and P, III increases with IQI. Increased III means increased heating losses in gener-
ators, transformers, and transmission lines, and also increased cost of equipment ca-
pable of supplying the higher currents. There is also a cost associated with the
maintenance of voltage within acceptable limits at the terminals of transmission lines
supplying relatively large IQI. We will return to this matter in Chapter 4.
In addition to its importance in system planning and operation, the variable Q
is essential in power systems analysis. In circuits we deal primarily with the complex
numbers V and I. In power systems, whose function is to deliver power at acceptable
voltages, we deal instead with the complex numbers V and S.
Finally, we consider terminology and descriptive units (Table 2.1). It should
be noted that, strictly speaking, the units in each case are watts. However, it reduces
confusion and is extremely convenient to use the descriptive units to designate the
quantity. For example, we speak of supplying a load of 10 kW or 15 MVA. By this
we mean that P = 10 kW or lSI = 15 MYA. Note that the expression "a load draws
or absorbs 200 kW at a power factor of 0.707 lagging" completely specifies S, since
we deduce that P = 200 kW and cp = 45°; thus S = 200 t. j200 kVA.
ii The term load is also used to indicate the connectetf device. For example, we
speak of a motor load or a load Z = 1.0 + j2.0.
TABLE 2.1 TERMINOLOGY AND DESCRIPTIVE UNITS
QUantity Terminology Descriptive units

S Complex power Voltamperes:VA,kVA,MVA
lSI Apparent power Voltamperes: VA, kVA, MVA
P Average or real or active power Watts: W, kW, MW
Q Reactive power Voltamperes reactive:VAr,kVAr,
MVAr
Equation (2.18) has several useful variations. These variations arise from the
representation of a load as impedance elements. In power system analysis, we
commonly switch between specification of loads in terms of real and reactive
power or in terms of impedance quantities. In order to demonstrate these vari-
ations, we first replace, the circuit in the box in Figure 2.3 by an equivalent im-
pedance Z such that
v = ZI (2.19)
Substituting (2.19) into (2.18) yields
S = ZII*
= 11I 2Z
(2.20)
= III2(R + jX)
= III2R + jl11 2X = P + jQ
from which
(2.21)
and
(2.22)
In (2.22), X is the reactance of either the equivalentinductance or the equivalent ca-

pacitance of the circuit; it is positive for inductive circuits and negative for capacitive
circuits.
Another useful variation of (2.18) is obtained by replacing the current with the
voltage divided by the impedance:
S =V (ZV)* = Z*
lVe = P + jQ (2.23)
If Z is a purely resistive element,
IVI 2
P=- (2.24)
R
and if Z is a purely reactive element;
IW
Q=- (2.25)
X
In (2.25), X is positive for an inductor and negative for a capacitor.

30 Basic Principles Chap, 2
Example 2.3
Three loads are connected in parallel across a 480 V (rms) line as shown in Fig-
ure E2.3, Load 1 absorbs 12 kW and 6.667 kVAr. Load 2 absorbs 4 kVA at 0.96 PF
leading. Load 3 absorbs 15 kWat unity powerfactor. Find the impedance that is equiv-
alent to the three parallel loads.
+
480 V (rms)
Figure E2.3
Solution
SI = 12 + j6,667 kVA
S2 = 4(0.96) - j4(sin(cos- l (0.96)) kVA = 3.84 - j1.12kVA
S3 = 15 + jOkVA
STatal = SI + S2 + S3 = 30,84 + j5.547 kVA
The equivalent impedance can be found as a series combination of R and X or as a par-
allel combination of R and X.
Series Combination ofR and X in Impedance Z
From Eq. (2,23),
(480j2 X 10- 3
Z*=----
30.84 + j 5.547
= 7.237 - j1.3016 n
Therefore Z = 7.237 + j1.3016 n.
Parallel Combination ofR and X in Impedance Z
(480j2 ':/'
R = 30840 = 7.47080
(480)2
X = 5547 = 41.535 n
Z = 7.470811 j41.535 n
2.3 CONSERVATION OF COMPLEX POWER
In working with complex power, we make extensive use of the theorem of conserva-
tion of complex power. A statement of the theorem follows,
Sec. 2.3 Conservation of Complex Power 31
Theorem of Conservation of Complex Power. For a network supplied by in-

dependent sources all at the same frequency, the sum of the complex power supplied
by the independent sources equals the sum of the complex power received by all the
other branches of the network.
Implicit in the preceding statement is the assumption that all the voltages and
currents are sinusoids.
For a single source with elements in series, the proof of the theorem is imme-
diate by using Kirchhoff's voltage law (KVL). The same is true for elements in par-
allel by use of Kirchoff's current law (KCL). In the general case the most direct
proof uses Tellegen's theorem and may be found in circuit theory textbooks. We em-
phasize that the theorem states that conservation applies to reactive power as well as
to active power.
In applying the theorem we frequently find it convenient to replace part of the
network by an equivalent independent source. For example, in Figure 2.4, assuming
no coupling between NI and N2 except through the terminals, as shown, we replace
NI by a source. The source is either the voltage VI or the current II at the terminal
interface. Then, applying the theorem to N2 , we get
(2.26)
where on the right side of (2.26) we sum all the complex powers delivered to the in-
dividual branches inside N2 •
This replacement of a network or branch by a source equal to either the
voltage or current the network or branch supplies is physically very reasonable
(under the conditions assumed). In circuit theory textbooks the replacement is
the subject of the so-called substitution theorem, and it will be convenient to refer
to it by that name.
+
Figure 2.4 Application of con-
servation of complex power.
Example 2.4
For the circuit shown in Figure E2.4, find Sz in terms of SI , C, and V.
N Figure E2.4
Solution Using the theorem of conservation of complex power, we have
SI - Sz = S3
where
S3 = VI* = Vy* V* = - jwCIVI Z
Thus
Sz = SI + jwCIVI Z
Pz = PI
Qz = QI + wClVl z
We note that Qz > QI; thus, it is reasonable and convenient to consider C as a source
of reactive power!
Example 2.5
Consider the circuit shown in Figure E2.5. Assume that IVzl = IVII and show that
Sz = -Sf,
II tv- 12
'm'
t I L t
VI v1
- -
N Figure E2.S
Solution Using the theorem of complex power, the complex power into the inductor is
SI + Sz = VI* = jwLIII Z
Thus
PI + Pz = 0
QI + Qz = wLIIIz
Sec. 2.3 Conservation of Complex Power 33
Now using IV21= lVII, we find
SI = V1I*} IS I - IS I 2 2_ 2 2
S2=-V I* => 1 - 2=>PI+QI- P2+Q2
2
But since IP21 = IFrI, we get IQ21 = IQII. As a consequence, Ql = Q2 = !wLIII2. We
have finally
Exercise 2. What if the inductor L is replaced by a more general two-terminal re-

active network? Is the result in Example 2.5 still true?
In the next example we show one form of one-line diagram showing generators,
loads, and transmission lines and the points of interconnection, called buses. Some
of the complex powers are specified; others are to be determined. We use a double-
subscript notation S'i to indicate complex power leaving bus i and entering the trans-
mission line connected to bus j. SCi and SDi are the complex powers from the ith
generator and to the ith load, respectively.
Example 2.6
In Figure E2.6, assume that Sij = -Sf;. This is consistent with modeling the trans-
mission lines as inductors, as in Example 2.5. Find S13, S31 , S2J, S32, and SG3'
Generator
symbol
Bus
Bussymbol-
S13 Transmission~line
symbol
Figure E2.&
r
M,
;1'1
Solution Considering each bus as a network with no internal branches, we get com-
plex power balance for each bus. Thus, the complex powers at each bus satisfy KCL.
We get
S13 = (1 + j1) - (1 - j1) - (0.5 + jO.2) = -0.5 + j1.8
S31 = -S;3 = 0.5 + j1.8
Similarly,
S23 = (0.5 + jO.5) - (1 + j1 - (-0.5 + jO.2) = - jO.7
S32 = - jO.7
Finally,
SG3 = (0.5 + j1.8) - jO.7 - j1 = 0.5 + jO.l
Example 2.7
Calculate the complex power S transferred from N1 to N2 assuming that the only cou-
pling is through the terminals, as shown in Figure E2.7(a).
Arbitrary
datum node Figure E2. 7(aJ
Solution Pick any datum node in N2 and letthe Vi be the voltages with respect to this
node. In the spirit of the substitution theorem we replace N1 !$the sources in Figure
E2.7(b). Using the theorem of conservation of complex power, it is clear that
5
S= 2: VJ1
i=1
+
+
Figure E2.7(bJ
Sec. 2.4 Balanced Three-Phase 35
Example 2.8
In Figure E2.8, calculate an expression for the complex power transferred to Nz.
Figure E2.S
Solution Any node in N2 can be used as a datum node. If we pick n' as the datum
node, then using the result in Example 2.7, we get
On the other hand, if we pick b as the datum node, we get

S = VabI: + VbbI; + VcbI; = VabI: + V;bI;
This latter result is the basis for the "two-wattmeter method" for reading three-phase
power. The reader may check that the two expressions for S yield identical results.
2.4 BALANCED THREE·PHASE
Power is supplied by three-phase generators. It is then transferred and distributed

in the form of three-phase power except at the lowest voltage levels of the distribu-
tion system, where single phase is used.
Figure E2.8 illustrates a three-phase (34)) circuit. The circuit is a balanced 34>
circuit if the impedances are equal and the three voltage source phasors differ only
in their angles, with 120 0 angle differences between any pair.
There are a number of reasons for the popularity of (balanced) three-phase
over single-phase supply. Among these we note that three-phase equipment is more
efficient and makes more effective 'use of material (conductors andlor iron), and
hence costs less, than single-phase equipment of the same total power-handling ca-
pability. As an illustration we can consider the saving in conductor material in a 34>
transmission line as compared with an equivalent set of three 14> transmission lines.
Three 14> circuits are shown in Figure 2.5. Six conductors are required to carry the
current. Suppose now that Vaa" Vbb , and v"e' form a balanced 34> set. In this case I.,
Ib , and Ie will also be a balanced 34> set with Ia + Ib + Ie = 0, and there is a way to
36 Basic Prir.lciples Chap. 2
I,
Return
wires
Ie
Figure 2.5 Balanced three-phase and single-phase compared.
eliminate the return wires. We connect points a', b' , and c' (to a "neutral" point n);
the sources are said to be connected in wye. We also connect the impedances in wye.
The return wires are now in parallel carrying a current!a + h + / e = O. Since they
are carrying no current, they are redundant and may be removed. We now have a 34>
transmission line with the same current-handling capacity but with only half as many
conductors as in the original configuration of 1cp circuits. The saving in /2 R line loss-
es should also be noted. An additional advantage of 3cp over 1cp supply will be noted
in Section 2.6.
Let us consider next a more general balanced three-phase system. For sim-
plicity we will consider a model consisting only of impedances and ideal sources. A
balanced three-phase system is made up of balanced three-phase sources of the same
phase sequence and a network with three-phase symmetry. A three-phase source is
balanced if it is composed of three individual sources in rflrye or delta configuration
and the source voltages (or currents) differ only in their angles with 120 0 angle dif-
ferences between any pair. For example, in Figure 2.6, case I, line-neutral voltages
Ean = 1 ~,Ebn = 1/-120 and Een = 1/120 are a balanced three-phase source.
0
,
0
In case II, line-line voltages Eab = 100 /10 0 , Ebe = 100 /-110 0 , and Eea =
100 /130 0 are also a balanced three-phase source.
Note that if one observes the instantaneous line-neutral voltages associated
with the phasors, then for the choice of phasors in case I the voltages reach their max-
imum values in the order abc; in case II the line-line voltages eab(t), ebe(t), and eea(t)
also reach their maximum values in the order abc. In either case, we say the phase
sequence is an abc or positive sequence.
Balanced voltages may also have a phase sequence acb or negative sequence. For
example, in case I, the voltages may be Ean = 1 LQ:, Ebn = 1/120°, and
Een = 1/-120°. It is important that all the sources connected to the same network
Case I Case II
Figure 2.8 Wye and delta sources.
have the same phase sequence, and special care is taken when connecting a new
source to an existing network to match the phase sequence.
Given an actual system, whether the sequence is abc or acb depends on noth-
ing more than how one labels the wires. To avoid confusion, unless stated to the con-
trary, we will always assume a labeling such that under the balanced conditions we are
describing the sequence is abc or positive sequence.
We point out that the connection of ideal sources shown in Figure 2.6, case II,
is clearly inappropriate unless, as in the balanced case, Eab + Ebe + Eea = O. This is
because with zero series resistance (as implied in the figure), the circulating current
would be infinite. In the case shown, with Eab + Ebe + Eea = 0, although the circu-
lating current is indeterminate (i.e., 0/0), we will assume that it is zero.
A symmetric three-phase network is shown in Figure 2.7. We have labeled the
phases a, b, and c, but because of the symmetry the labeling is purely arbitrary. The
~~Mr--------~--------~---------T--------~1'
Zn
Zl
~~~--~--------------~--~--------------~C'
Figure 2.7 Symmetric three-phase network.
grouping of elements in phases a, b, and c into triples of equal impedances is the im-
portant feature.
From the point of view of analysis, balanced three-phase has a desirable feature:
It is possible to carry out the analysis using a much simpler "per phase" circuit with
one-third or fewer elements than in the original Circuit.
As a preliminary to introducing per phase analysis, consider Example 2.9.
Example 2.9 Calculation of Neutral-Neutral Voltage

Given the balanced circuit shown in Figure E2.9, calculate Vn'n .
Ia
Ie Figure E2.9
Solution Using the admittance Y = I/Z, we have

Ia = Y(Ean - v,;'n)
Ib = Y(Ebn - v,;'n)
Ie = Y(Een - v,;'n)
Adding the equations, we have
Ia + Ib + Ie = Y(Ean + Ebn + Een) - 3~'n
Now applying KCL to node n or n', we get! a + Ib + Ie = O. Since Ean , Ebn , and Een
are a balanced set of sources, they sum to zero. Therefore, Vn'n = O.
Note 1: The condition Ean + Ebn + Een = 0 is less stringent than the assumed con-
ditions (i.e., we do not require Ean , Ebn , and Een to be balanced).
Note 2: With Vn'n = Owe can calculate Ia = YE .. ,lb = YE bn , and Ie = Y Een. Thus,
the phases are completely decoupled.
Example 2.10
Repeat Example 2.9 when there is an impedance Zn connected between neutrals n
and n'. Assume that Zn + Z/3 *- O.
Solution If Zn = 0, then obviously Vn'n = O. If Zn "* 0, we can calculate Y n = l/Z n

and we can repeat the calculation in Example 2.9 as follows. We get
Ia = Y(Ean - Vn'n)
where Inn' is the current into the node n'. Adding the four equations and using KCL
at node n', we get
0= -(3Y + Yn)Vn'n
Thus, since 3Y + Y n "* 0, Vn'n = 0 and Inn' = O. Note: Since the result holds for
Zn = 00 and Zn = 0, we can replace Zn by an open circuit or short circuit as convenient.
Usually, we use a short circuit since it makes explicit the useful condition Vnn , ::: 0,
Suppose that we consider a more complicated balanced 34> network: for exam-
ple, the one in Figure 2,8. It is still true that the neutrals are at the same potential,
with zero neutral currents, and that we may replace Zn and Zn' by short circuits. We
will show this by an alternative to the direct calculation used in Examples 2.9 and
2.10. In Figure 2.8 assume that
1. El + Ez + E3 ::: O.
2. The network has three-phase symmetry.
We will now show that Vn'n ::: Vn"n ::: 0 (i.e., all the neutral points are at the
same voltage).
Proof The circuit in Figure 2.8 has Ean ::: E1 , Ebn ::: E2 , and Een ::: E3 • As-
sume that with this 34> input the calculated voltage is Vn'n '" Vo. Next, shift the
sources E1 ,Ez ,andE3 so thatE bn = El,Een::: Ez,andEan ::: E3 • With this 34> input
a' ZJ
Zl Z4
Zn'
c' b'
ZJ
ZJ
Figure 2.8 Balanced three-phase network.

~ ..
40 Basic Pri~ciples Chap. 2
E~r f ~l'
n n'
Z
'
n" Figure 2.9 Phase a circuit.
and taking into account the three-phase network symmetry, we get the same values
of voltages and currents in the network as before but shifted with respect to the phas-
es. However, the neutral voltages do not change. We still get Vn'n = 16. Next, let
Een = E), Eon = Ez,Ebn = E3 ,andonceagainVn'n = Vo. Finally,letthe34>inputbe
the sum of the previous three 34> inputs (i.e., Eon = Ebn = Een = E) + Ez + E3); by
assumption 1 this input is zero. Considering the previous results, by application of the
principle of superposition we get Vn'n = 3'6 But since the 34> input is zero, we know
that Vn'n == 0 in this case. Thus Vo = 0 and the calculated voltage Vn'n for the given set
of sources is Vn'n = 16 = O. Clearly, the same argument shows that Vn"n = 0 as well.
We note that with all neutrals at the same potential, the solution of the network
is greatly simplified. For example, in Figure 2.8 we can solve for Ia by considering only
phase a quantities. This is shown in Figure 2.9. h and Ie may be found by consider-
ing similar phase b and phase c circuits. The three circuits are effectively decoupled;
the only connection between them is their common neutral, where the phase a, b,
and c neutral current contributions sum to zero. We note, finally, that we can be ef-
ficient about calculating h and Ie once Ia is known. If E), E2 , and E3 are a positive
I (negative) sequence set, then la' Ib , and Ie have the same property.
r Note that in Figure 2.8 the sources and loads are wye connected. If the Z4loads
were connected in delta, nand n' would still be at the same potential but the decou-
piing (as in Figure 2.9) would not occur. The same problem arises if the sources were
connected in delta. ~.
Fortunately, we can replace the deltas by equivalent wyes. Consider first the
delta-wye transformation of loads, which replaces a given delta by a wye that is equiv-
alent in its terminal behavior.
Delta·Wye Load Transformation [Symmetrical Case). Given a delta with

impedances ZIl, a wye with impedances ZA = Z1l/3 has the same terminal behavior.
Proof See Figure 2.10. Because of symmetry, it suffices to show the equivalence
for Ia in terms of Vab and Vae. For the delta,
(2.27)
Sec, 2,4 Balanced Three-Phase 41
I,
b c
Figure 2.10 Ll-Y transformation,
For the wye,

Vab = Z,(Ia - Ib)
Vae = Z,(Ia - Ie)
+ Vae == Z,(2Ia - (Ib + Ie))
Vab
But KCL at node n gives Ia = -(Ib + Ic);hence
Vab + Vac = 3Z,~ (2.28)
Comparing (2.27) and (2.28), we find that Z, == ZI:./3.
Note 1: The equivalence of the delta and the wye is only external to the
terminals a, b, and c. If internal behavior is of interest, one must not forget to go
back to the delta, to complete the calculation.
Note 2: We emphasize that the relationship Z, == ZI:./3 only holds in the

symmetric case, the case we are considering now.
We next develop the relationship between line-neutral and line-line voltages

in balanced systems. This will permit us to replace delta-connected (line-line) sources
with equivalent wye-connected (line-neutral) sources. Since the results apply to gen-
eral voltages (not just source voltages), we Will use the V notation rather than the E
notation.
Delta·Wye Source Transformation. Starting with the general relationship be-

tween line-netural and line-line voltages, we have
Vab == Van - Vbn

Vbe = Vbn - Van (2.29)
42 Basic Principleq Chap, 2
Figure 2.11 Line-neutral volt-

b ages in terms of line-line voltages,
If we now introduce the constraint that Van, Vbn , and v"n are a positive-sequence set,
'
then, f or arbItrary Van' we get V;bn -- Vane -j21T/3 and Ven -- Vane j21T/3 , SUbSt'Itutmg
, m,
(2.29), we find that V.b, Vbe> and Vea are also a positive-sequence set. We can relate
the "leading" terms Vab and v.n. We get
(2.30)
The transformation also works in the other direction; if Vab , Vbe> and v"a are positive
sequence, so are V.n, Vbn , and v"., with
(2.31)
and we can thus find the equivalent wye voltages.

The relationships (2.29) to (2.31) can also be expressed graphically. Draw the
line-line voltage phasors Vab , Vbe , and v"a in an equilateral triangle, as shown in Fig-
ure 2.11. Label the vertices a, b, and c. Find the center of the triangle and label it n,
Draw the inscribed set of line-neutral voltages Van, Vbn , and v"n, as shown.
If the voltages are negative sequence, the relationship is found to be
Vab = V3 e- i1T/6Van (2.32)
and
V = _1_
an V3 ej1T/6Vab f1 (2.33)
Note 1: In either the positive-sequence or negative-sequence case, the

line-line voltage magnitudes are V3 times the line-neutral voltage magnitudes.
Note 2: The term line voltage instead of line-line voltage is also used. The
term phase voltage instead of line-neutral voltage is also used.
Example 2.11
Suppose that there are a set of (balanced) positive-sequence line voltages with
Vab = 1 L!r,. Find Van, Vbn , and Ven ,
Solution The relationship between balanced line and phase voltages is shown in fig-
ure 2.11. We then find that
Sec. 2.5 Per Phase Analysis 43
Van = ~ /-30 0
Vbn = ~ /-150 0
1
~n= V3~
Exercise 3. Suppose that in (2.29), Yab, Vbe , and Yra are a (balanced) positive-
sequence set and we try to solve for Van, Vbn , and Yrn without the constraint that they
also are a (balanced) positive-sequence set. What goes wrong mathematically? How
do you interpret the difficulty physically?
2.5 PER PHASE ANALYSIS
The stage has now been set to introduce the powerful method of per phase analysis.
The justification for the method follows directly from the following theorem.
Balanced Three-Phase Theorem. Assume that we are given a
1. balanced three-phase (connected) system with

2. all loads and sources wye connected, and
3. in the circuit model there is no mutual inductance between phases.
Then
(a) all the neutrals are at the same potential,

(b) the phases are completely decoupled, and
(c) all corresponding network variables occur in balanced sets of the same sequence
as the sources.
Outline of Proof The fact that the neutrals are at the same potential and
the network phases are decoupled follows just as in the case discussed following Fig-
ure 2.8; using superposition, the number of sources can be arbitrary. Without mutu-
al inductance between the phases, they are completely decoupled and with balanced
(positive-sequence) sources it is clear that the responses in phases band c lag the
corresponding responses in phase a by 120 0 and 240 0 , respectively. The net result is
that corresponding responses occur in balanced (positive-sequence) sets. The same
idea holds in the case of negative-sequence sources.
"r ,i('
i
44 Basic Prinpiples Chap. 2
!
Method: Per Phase Analysis. We next turn to the method of per phase analy-
sis. Given a balanced three-phase (connected) network with no mutual inductance
between phases,
1. Convert all delta-connected sources and loads into equivalent wye connections.
2. Solve for the desired phase avariables using the phase a circuit with all neutrals
connected.
3. The phase b and phase c variables can then be determined by inspection; sub-
tract 1200 and 240 0 , respectively, from the phase angles found in step 2, in the
usual case of positive-sequence sources. Add 120 0 and 240 0 in the case of
negative-sequence sources.
4. If necessary, go back to the original circuit to find line-line variables or vari-
ables internal to delta connections.
Note: In using per phase analysis, we always pick the neutral as datum. In
this case it is simpler to use a single-subscript notation for phase voltages. We will use
Va rather than Van, etc.
Example 2.12
Given the balanced three-phase system shown in Figure E2.12(a), find Vj(t) and i2(t).
;0.1
a'
+
Ul jl.O
~______~~____~~n,'
b' c'f-_-I b'
Figure E2.12(aJ
Solution Replace delta by the equivaientwye,ZA = - j2/3. Using per phase analy-
sis, we consider the per phase (phase a) circuit shown in Figure E2.12(b). Note that
while Vl appears in the per phase circuit, 12 has been suppressed in the process of the
fJ.-y conversion. Carrying out the calculation to find VI, we note that the equivalent
parallel impedance from a' to n' is - j2. Using the voltage-divider law,
- j2 368
'0 1 E. = 1.05E. = , ;;: ~
VI = -]'2 +]. v2
a'
n Figure E2.12(b)
The phasor VI represents the sinusoid vI(I) = 368 cos (WI + 45°). From the original
circuit we see that to find iz(t), we need to find Va•b•• Thus
II:a'b' -- v:a'n' - T! ej1t 6 v:
Yb'n' --';;:;3 /
V jai n'
Then, using the impedance of the capacitor, we find that
and it follows that the corresponding sinusoidal function is

iz(t) = 319 cos (wt + lW)
In the next example we consider a balanced three-phase system in which one

of the 3cf> loads is described in terms of impedance and two of the 3cf> loads are de-
scribed in terms of complex power absorbed.
Example2J3
A three-phase line has an impedance of 0.6 + j3.0 ON. The line feeds three bal-
anced three-phase loads that are connected in parallel. The fIrst load is absorbing a
total of 156 kWand 117 kVAI' inagnetizing voitamperes. The second load is Il con-
nected and has an impedance of 144 - j42 ON. The third load is 115 kVA at 0.6 PF
leading. The line to neutral voltage at the load end of the line is 2400 V. What is the
magnitude of the line voltage at the source end of the line?
Solution
Sl~ = 52 + j39kVA
52,000 - j39,000 .
II = 2600 = 20 - J15 A
46 Basic Principles, Chap. 2
Converting the Aload to an equivalent Y-connected load,
Z2Y~ = j(144 - j42) = 48 - j14 n

2600~ .
12 = 48 _ j14 = 49.92 + J14.56 A
S3~ = j[115 X 0.6 - j115 sin (cos- 1 (0.6))] =23 - j30.667kVA
Note that the negative sign accounts for the leading power factor.
23,000 - j30,667 .
13 = 2600 = 8.846 - ]11.795 A
The total current drawn by the three parallel loads is given by

Ie = 11 + 12 + 13 = 78.766 - j12.235 A
The voltage at the sending end of the line is given by
Van = 2600~ + (78.766 - j12.235)(0.6 + j3.0)
= 2683.96 + j228.95 = 2693.71/4.87° V
The magnitude of the line-to-line voltage at the sending end is then
lVabl = Y3(2693.71) = 4665.64 V
2.6 BALANCED THREE·PHASE POWER
One of the important advantages of balanced three-phase operation is that the in-
stantaneous power delivered to a load is a constant. We will show this in a moment.
First, referring to Example 2.8 with the neutral point as the dat~, we get, using our
single-subscript notation,
(2.34)
Since we are assuming that Va, Vb, v.: and la, h, Ie occur in balanced sets, we can
write for the positive-sequence case, .
53</> = Vi: + v"e-j21r/3I:ej21r/3 + Vaei21r/3 I:e- j21r/3 (2.35)
S3</> = 3 Val: = 3S (2.36)
where 5 is the per phase complex power. The negative-sequence case gives the same
result. Thus to calculate the total three-phase power we can find the phase a power
(by per phase analysis) and simply multiply by 3. Next, we calculate the instanta-
neous three-phase power, using (2.10) and (2.11).
Sec. 2.7 Summary 47
PJq,(t) = va(t)ia(t) + vb(t)ib(t) + vc(t)ic!t)

= IVIIII [cos 4J + cos (2wt + L!::': + in 1
+ IVlllI [ cos 4J + cos (2wt + L! + !l. - 4;)] (2.37)
~ IVlllI [ cos 4J + cos (2wt + L!::': + !l. + 4;)]

= 3 IVIIII cos 4J
= 3P
The easiest way to check that the double-frequency terms cancel is to add the pha-
sor representations.
The fact that the instantaneous power delivered to the load is constant should
be contrasted with the case of single-phase power illustrated in Figure 2.2. An ad-
vantage of constant power for supplying ac motors is that it is consistent with constant
speed and torque. With single-phase motors there are torque pulsations accompa-
nying the power pulsations that can be troublesome in some applications. Thus we
have yet another advantage of 34J supply over 14J supply.
, , '
2.7 SUMMARY " , ,: ',: <, :,' "" _",: " ,';;-~. '_'
The basic objective of this chapter was to give the reader an appreciation for com-
plex power as a variable and develop some essential analytical tools. The material
covered included the definitions of instantaneous power; complex, active, and reac-
tive power; and the relations between them. Effective phasors were introduced and
used to calculate complex power. Reactive power was related to peak instantaneous
power into the reactive elements and thereby a physical interpretation was provid-
ed. The theorem of conservation of complex power was given with some applications.
The capacitor as a source of reactive power was described. An expression for the
complex power delivered to an n-port was derived.
Balanced three-phase power systems were defined and some advantages of
their use were indicated. Per phase analysis as a simplifying tool was introduced.
Delta-wye transformations of balanced three-phase sources and symmetric loads
were derived.
Problems
2.1. In Figure 2.1, v(t) = Vz X 120 cos (wt + 30°), i(t) = Vz X 10 cos (wt - 30°).
(a) Find p(t), S, P, and Q into the network.
(b) Find a simple (two-element) series circuit consistent with the prescribed terminal
behavior as described in this problem.
48 Basic PrinciHles Chap. 2
2.2 With IVI = 100 V, the instantaneous power into a network Nhas a maximum value 1707
Wand a minimum value -293 W.
(a) Find a possible series RL circuit equivalent to N.
(b) Find S = P + jQ into N.
(c) Find the maximum instantaneous power into L and compare with Q.
2.3. A certain 1t/J load draws 5 MW at 0.7 power factor lagging. Determine the reactive
power required from a parallel capacitor to bring the power factor of the parallel com-
bination up to 0.9.
2.4. A 3t/J load draws 200 kW at a PF of 0.707 lagging from a 440-V line. In parallel is a 3t/J
capacitor bank that supplies 50 kVAr. Find the resultant power factor and current (mag-
nitude) into the parallel combination.
2.5. A 1t/J load draws 10 kW from a 416-V line at a powerfactor of 0.9 lagging.
(a) FindS = P + jQ.
(b) Find III.
(c) Assume that!l.. = 0 and find p(t).
2.6. The system shown in Figure P2.6 is balanced (and positive sequence). Assume that
Z = 10 /-15 0
l!;,a = 208 /-1200
Find V.b, "be> Van, "bn, v." la, Ib, Ie> and S3~'
fa
Figure P2.S
2.7. In Figure P2.?, find the total complex power delivered to th~ad. Assume that
Zc = - jO.2
ZL = jO.1
R=lO
r-------------
I
l~
IL ____________ _
s Load Figure P2.7
Problems 49
2.8. In the system shown in Figure P2.S, find la, Ib , and Ie if

(a) Za = Zb = jl.O, Ze = jO.9
(b) Za = Zb = Ze = j1.0
Hint: Use per phase analysis in part (b).
I, jO,!
Figure P2,S
2,9, The system shown in Figure P2.9 is balanced 4rjJ. Use per phase analysis to find
la, Ib , leo and Id • Note: We need to find a "star" equivalent for the set of
voltages.
j\ I,
0qq'
-,.5
-jO.5
n
,
-jO, 5
I,
j\ Id
Figure P2,9
2.10. The system shown in Figure P2.10 is balanced. Assume that

C = 10- 3 F
R = 1D
lVabl = 240 V
w = 21T" 60
Find lVa'b,l, Ihl, and Slt.d' Hint: Use per. phase analysis,
50 Basic Principles , Chap. 2
R a' r-------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b R I
b' I
I
R Ib c' I
L _____________ ..lI
Load Figure P2.10

2.11 The system shown in Figure P2.l1 is balanced. Find Va'n' Vb'n, v;,'m and Va'b"
;0.1 ;0.1
Figure P2.11
2.12. The system shown in Figure P2.12 is balanced. Assume that

load inductors, ZL = jl0
load capacitors, Zi; = - jlO
Find fa ,leap, and S i!ad'

;1 ,-------------l
I
I
;1 I
I
L _____________ J
Load Figure P2.12
Problems 51
2.13. Refer to Figure PZ.B and assume that
z z
Figure P2.13
2=100M
Vab =208.&.
(a) If the circuit is balanced positive sequence (abc), find Vb" Yea,Ia,Ib' and Ie.
(b) If the circuit is balanced negative sequence (acb), find Vb" Vea,Ia,Ib' and Ie.
2.14. The system shown in Figure P2.14 is balanced. Specify Z so that IVa'b,1 > IVabl. Hint: Use
per phase analysis and experiment with the element 2 a resistance, as inductance, or a
capacitance.
il a'
l@ _
+
c' b'
i1
Figure P2.14
2.15. In Figure PZ.1S, assume that

Ea = v'2~
Eb = 1 /-90°
Ee = 1 /180°
fa = 1 /-10°
r 52 Basic Principle,s Chap. 2
r----------------l
I I
fa I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IL ________________ JI
Load
Figure P2-15
The load is symmetrical and Z is not given. The sources are not balanced, but we note
that Eo + Eb + Ec = O. Find Sftad'
•
Transmission-Line Parameters
3.0 INTRODUCTION
In Chapters 3 and 4 we consider the modeling of transmission lines and develop use-
fullumped-circuit models. In these models a line is characterized by four distrib-
uted parameters: series resistance, series inductance, shunt conductance, and shunt
capacitance. The series inductance and shunt capacitance represent the effects of
the magnetic and electric fields around the conductors. The shunt conductance ac-
counts for leakage currents along insulator strings and ionized pathways in the air; this
leakage is usually a small effect and is frequently ignored. The remaining parame-
ters, however, are needed to develop a useful transmission-line model for use in gen-
eral power system studies.
We are interested in two kinds of questions. The first is descriptive: How are
the parameters, particularly inductance and capacitance, related to line geometry
(i.e., wire size and configuration)? Systems designers have some choice in the selec-
tion of this geometry. One way the selection affects system performance is through
the parameter values. We are, therefore, interested in how inductance and capacitance
depend on the line geometry.
A second question concerns modeling. In Chapter 2 the advantages of per
phase analysis of balanced three-phase circuits were emphasized, the expectation
being that this useful tool would be applicable to practical systems, including three-
phase transmission lines. This implies that in the circuit model there is no mutual
inductance between phases. If one considers the physical three-phase transmission
line, there clearly is magnetic coupling between the phases. How, then, does one get
rid of the mutual inductance in the circuit model? Similar questions can be asked
about the shunt capacitances. '
For the reader who has studied transmission lines solely from a field point of
view, we note that the circuits approach we will adopt is equivalent for a lossless line,
For the practical case of lines with small losses and operating at low frequencies, the
use of the circuits approach is completely justifiable.
In the following sections we derive expressions for inductance and capacitance
of three-phase lines in terms of line geometry.
53
54 Transmission-Line Parameters Chap. 3
3.1 REVIEW OF MAGNETICS
We start by recalling some basic facts from physics.
Ampere's circuital law
F= i H· dl = ie (3.1)
where
F = magnetomotive force (mmf), ampere-turns
H = magnetic field intensity, ampere-turns/meter
dl = differential path length, meters
ie = total instantaneous current linked by the closed path r
Hand dI are vectors in space. In (3.1) we can replace the dot product:
H . dl = H dl cos e (3.2)
where eis the angle between Hand d1, and we drop the vector notation to indicate
scalar quantities. The reference direction for ie is related to the reference direction
for r by the familiar right -hand rule.
In words, (3.1) states that the line integral of H around a closed path r is equal
to the total current linked. The total current linked may be found unambiguously by
considering the algebraic sum (or integral) of the currents crossing any surface, or cap,
bounded by the closed path r; such a surface is called a Gaussian surface.
Even though (3.1) is an implicit relation in H, it is useful for actually calculat-
ing H in special cases where we have symmetry. Such a case will be considered in
Section 3.2. We note that there is an explicit expression for H, one'..)Jrm, known as
the Biot-Savart law, which shows that at any given point H is a linear function of all
the differential current elements of the circuit. Thus, we can calculate H using su-
perposition.
Magnetic flux cp. If a linear relationship between flux density and magnetic
field intensity is assumed,
(3.3)
where
B = flux density, webers/meter2
JL = permeability of medium
Sec. 3.1 Review of Magnetics 55
The total flux through a surface area A is the surface integral of the normal compo-
nent of B; that is,
cp = f B· da
A
(3.4)
where da is a vector with direction normal to the surface element da and with mag-
nitude equal to da. If B is perpendicular to, and uniform over an area A, (3.4)
simplifies to
cp = BA (3.5)
where the quantities B and A are scalars.
Flux linkages A. The use of flux linkages is very familiar to electrical en-
gineers. Faraday's law gives the relationship between generated electromotive force
(emf) in a loop and the time rate of change of flux linkages. The intuitive notion of
flux linkages is very simple and can be illustrated by considering Figure 3.1. Some
of the flux links all the turns; t/12 is a flux line illustrating this case. Some of the flux,
called leakage flux, links only some of the turns; t/1) and t/13 illustrate these components.
If all the flux cp links all the N turns of the coil, then
A = Ncp (3.6)
where A= flux linkages, in weber turns. If, as in the figure, there is leakage flux, we
add the flux linkage contributions turn by turn. In this case
N
A = ~ cp; (3.7)
;=)
where cp; is the flux linking the ith turn of the coil.
>/11
Figure 3.1 Flux linkages.

Inductance. Assuming (3.3) to be true, the relationship between flux link-

ages and current is linear and the constant of proportionality is called the inductance.
A= Li (3.8)
Example 3.1
Calculate the inductance of a coil wound closely on a toroidal iron core (Figure
E3.1). Assume
1. Small cross-sectional area.

2. All the flux links all the turns.
Cross-sectional area
A
Centerline
of coil
N turns
Figure E3.1
Solution This is a classic example the reader may recall from physics. From physics
we can assume that the flux is inside the core and the flux lines form concentric circles.
For the choice of reference direction for current shown and using the right-hand rule,
we find that the associated reference direction for flux is counterclockwise. Taking a
counterclockwise path r, aligned with one of the flux lines at a radius r, and applying
Ampere's circuital law (3.1), we get
F=Hf.=Ni
where e= 21rr is the length of the path r. The magnetomotive force (mmf) is N times
i because the Gaussian surface bounded by r is crossed N times by the multiturn
winding. Using (3.3) in the preceding expression,
. Ni
B=p.H=p.e
From this expression and assumption 1, we can see that B does not vary much across
the cross-sectional area, and using a value of B corresponding to e= 21r R gives a very
good approximation. Then
A N'
4> = BA = ~Ni = _"_I_
e e/p.A
Sec. 3.2 Flux Linkages of Infinite Straight Wire 57
We note that cjJ is proportional to F = Ni and inversely proportional to a quantity

e/{.LA involving only the geometry and material of the core. This quantity is called re-
luctance. In Appendix 1 the reader will find a short introduction to the more general
use of this quantity.
Returning to our calculation of inductance, we have, finally, using the assump-
tion that all the flux rjJ links all N turns,
A NcjJ {.LAN2 {.LAN 2
L=-=-=--=--
i i e 27TR
3.2 FLUX LINKAGES OF INFINITE STRAIGHT WIRE
We next consider a case of great interest to us in modeling transmission lines. This

is the case of the flux linkages of an infinite straight wire. The infinite wire is an ap-
proximation of a reasonably long wire and is simpler to consider for the calculation
of parameters. We should note at the outset that a single infinite wire is certainly
not an approximation of a practical transmission line but its consideration is impor-
tant to us as a step in using superposition to find inductance parameters for realistic
multiconductor lines.
The notion of flux linkages for a single straight wire needs some justification.
More commonly, flux linkages are defined for a coil where the interlocking of the
turns of the coil and the lines of flux are easy to visualize. The present case is less fa-
miliar but the interlocking is also clear; there is no way to visualize how the lines of
flux may be detached from the infinite wire. Alternatively, and consistent with this,
we may imagine the wire to close at infinity (-00 arid +00 the same point), thus es-
tablishing a kind of "one-turn coil" with the return path at infinity.
Assume then a
L Straight infinitely long wire of radius r.

2. Uniform current density in the wire. Total current is i.
In the case of dc or low-frequency ac, assumption 2 is justified in practice.

From elementary physics we know that the flux lines form concentric circles
(i.e., H is tangential). Assume the current in the wire is coming out of the page. Then
the associated reference direction for the flux is shown in Figure 3.2. Because of an-
gular symmetry it suffices to consider H(x).
Case 1: Assume that x > r (i.e., points outside the conductor). Ampere's cir-
cuital law applied to the path r)' gives
1 H·dl = H·27TX = i
hi (3.9a)
i
H=-
27TX
....
x
Figure 3.2 Wire carrying cur-

rent i.
We note that for current out of the page, H is directed upward for x positive.
Case 2: Assume that x :5 r (i.e., points inside the conductor). Ampere's law
applied to r 2 gives
'frX2
H '2'frX = ie ='frr2
-i
where we have used the assumption of uniform current density. Then

x
H=-i (3.9b)
2'frr2
To find the flux density we use (3.3) but write J.L = J.LrJ.Lo, where in the SI system
of units, J.Lo = 47T X 10 -7 is the permeability of free space and J.Lr is the relative per-
meability. Thus
(3.10)
~
Outside the conductor, in air, J.Lr "" 1, and inside J.Lr "" 1, if the conductor is nonmag-
netic (e.g., copper or aluminum). In most cases, however, steel strands are included
for strength and J.Lr > 1.
We next consider the flux linkages associated with the infinite wire. It is evident
that the flux linkages of the infinite wire are infinite, and we are led to consider, in-
stead, the flux linkages of the wire per meter of length and consider only the flux
within a finite radius R. To find these flux linkages, consider Figure 3.3. The flux
per meter surrounding the wire out to a radius R is the same as the flux crossing the
1 meter X R meter rectangle. For convenience the rectangle is taken to be in the
horizontal plane.
There are two components to the flux linkages. They are the linkages due to
the flux outside the wire and some additional linkages due to flux inside the wire.
We consider the two cases separately and then add the results.
Sec. 3.2 Flux Linkages of Infinite Straight Wire 59
I B
I
Infinite wire
of
radius r
R
x
Figure 3.3 Flux crossing rectangle.
1. Flux linkages outside the wire: Because each line of flux interlocks with the wire
only once, the total flux linkages are numerically the same as the total flux cross-
ing the rectangle in Figure 3.3 from the radius r to R. Thus, using the subscript
1 for the external flux contributions,
i
Al = CPl = J B·da = fR B(x)dx = /Lo JR_- dx
A r r 21TX (3.11)
/Loi R
=-In-
21T r
Here, we have integrated over the differential areas da = 1 . dx shown in Fig-
ure 3.3, with B found from (3.9a) by using B = /LoH.
2. Flux linkages inside the wire: This portion of the flux links only part of the wire,
and it would not be reasonable to assign it full weight in calculating flux link-
ages. A careful analysis based on energy justifies the idea that each flux con-
tribution to the flux linkages should be weighted by the fraction of the total
current linked. The result, although intuitively reasonable, is by no means ob-
vious. Then using (3.9b), (3.10), and the assumption of uniform current densi-
ty, an integration over the rectangle inside the wire yields
r
A2 = J.Lr/Lo
/Lr/Lo i
i
0,2m
x 1TX2
--2 - 2 i
1Tr
dx
(3.12)
=--
81T
The result is independen.t of ~ire radius. Adding (3.11) and (3.12), the total
flux linkages per meter are
(3.13)
60 Transmission-Line Parameters" Chap. 3
In the second line we have substituted the numerical value of iJ..o to get a fonn
more useful for calculations. We will freely exchange between the two fonns
but prefer the first fonn for development of the theory. Regarding (3.13),
note that Aincreases without bound as R goes to infinity. This is a difficulty
we will dispose of when the practical multiconductor case is considered.
3.3 FLUX LINKAGES; MANY-CONDUCTOR CASE
We turn now to the practical case. Suppose that instead of one conductor we have n
round conductors as suggested by Figure 3.4. Some of these conductors are the "re-
turn" conductors for the rest, but it is equivalent and more convenient to think of
each wire as having its return path at infinity (i.e., the case we considered in the pre-
ceding section). Strictly speaking, the assumption ofunifonn current density in each
inductor needs to be justified once the fields and currents interact. However, if the
distance between conductors is fairly large compared with their radii, the assump-
tion is justified and is convenient because we can then use superposition.
We are still interested in calculating the flux linkages of conductor 1 up to a
radius RJ from the origin, but now we add the contributions due to conductors
2,3, ... ,n. We use superposition. Consider the contribution of the kth conductor
current as shown in Figure 3.5. Assume that all other currents are zero. The flux
lines due to ik are concentric circles, as shown in Figure 3.5. The flux line 1/11 does
not link conductor 1. The flux line 1/13 does. The flux line 1/15 links conductor 1 but is
beyond the radius R1; it does not qualify. The flux lines 1/12 and 1/14 mark the approx-
imate extremes of flux lines that qualify. Thus, we are interested in all the flux gen-
erated by ik that passes between the points band c on the x axis. The calculation is
much simpler, however, if we find the flux crossing the surface defined by the points
a and c because then the flux and surface are perpendicular. Defining the distance
from the center of the kth conductor to the point c as Rb the flux to be calculated is
simply that between a radius dlk and Rk • But this calculation was already done ear-
lier; the result given in (3.11) is directly applicable to the radii QIIesently under con-
sideration. We get as the contribution of ik to the flux linkages of coil 1,
Figure 3.4 Many conductors.

Sec. 3.3 Flux Linkages; Many-Conductor Case 61
>/IJ
Conductor
I
Figure 3.5 Contribution of ik •
A - ,uoikl Rk (3.14)
lk - 2 nd
1T' lk
In the calculation we make a reasonable approximation about the partial flux link-
ages of conductor 1.
We sum the remaining contributions similarlY to get the total flux linkage of
coil 1 up to a radius R1 from conductor 1.
A1 = ;;[i1(~ + In ~11) + i21n ~: + ... + in In ~:] (3.15)
We note that in general Al ~ 00 as Rl ~ 00, but in the practical case we make a key
assumption regarding the instantaneous currents in the wires. Assume that
(3.16)
in which case we can show that (3.15) does not diverge as Rl ~ 00. The assumption
(3.16) is reasonable for a transmission line under normal operating conditions. It is
certainly the intention of the system designers that all the currents should flow in the
wires of the transmission line. This condition, which may be violated under abnor-
mal (fault) conditions, is reconsidered in Section 3.6.
Rewriting (3.15) in a way that permits the assumption (3.16) to be introduced,
(3.17)
To the second part of (3.17) add
This is legitimate since, by (3.16), we have added zero. Then the second part of
(3.17) becomes
The first term is zero and in the limit as Rl ~ 00, each other term Rd Rl tends to
1, and each logarithmic term then tends to zero. Thus in the limit as Rl ~ 00,
(3.17) reduces to
Al - + In -1 ) + ... + In. In1]

= -/Lo [.11 (/Lr - (3.18)
21T 4'1 dIn
Equation (3.18) can be made more symmetrical by noting the identity
/Lr = In e/J.,/4 (3.19)

4
Thus
where
Then (3.18) becomes
For a nonmagnetic wire, /Lr = 1, and'l = 'le-l/4 = 0.7788'1 ,., 0.78'1' Interpreted
physicallY'1 is the radius of an equivalent hollow conductor with the same flux link-
ages as the solid conductor of radius '1' Ampere's circuital law makes it clear that
the hollow conductor has no internal flux. However, since '1 is less than '1, the ex-
ternal flux is increased to compensate for this lack.
Sec. 3.3 Flux Linkages; Many-Conductor Case 63
Note that the flux linkages of conductor 1 depend on all the currents ii,
The equation thus is in the form Al == llli l + 112i2 + ... + linin' where
i 2 , . • . ,in'
the inductance parameters Iii depend on geometry. Similarly, with obvious modifi-
cations, the flux linkages per meter of the general kth conductor are
\
Ilk == -!La (.11 In - 1 + ... + Ik. In --;1 + . . . + In. In1)
- (3.22)
21T dk1 rk dkn
in the form Ak == lklil + Ikzi2 + ... + lknin. Thus, it is clear that there is mutual in-
ductance in the circuit description.
Example 3.2
Calculate the inductance per meter of each phase of a three-phase transmission line
(Figure E3.2). Assume that
Figure E3.2
1. Conductors are equally spaced, D, and have equal radii ,.

2. ia + ib + ie == O.
Solution Using (3.21) for phase a, we have

1 1 1
\
I\a IJ-O('ln
= 27T la 'ln D+ Ie'1n 15)
-;; + Ib
IJ-O(.
=-lln--Iln-
27T a "
1 . 1)
a D
IJ-O. D
=-1 In-
27T a "
Thus,
AatLoD JD
I =-=-In-=2XlO- In- (3.23)
a . ia 27T " "
In the derivation use has been made of the equilateral spacing and the fact that
ia = -(ib + ie) Because of symmetry we get the same results for Ab and Ae. Thus, we
get the self-inductances la = Ib = Ie = (tLo/27T) In (DI") henrys per meter. We also
note that Aa depends on ia alone (i.e., there are no mutual inductance terms in this par-
ticular description). The same is true for band c phases.
r
64 Transmission-Line Parameters, Chap. 3
The preceding example illustrates some important points:
1. Although physically there is magnetic coupling between phases, if

ia + ib + ic = 0 and with equilateral spacing, we can model the magnetic effect
using only self-inductances. The self-inductances are equal. This then permits
the use of per phase analysis.
2. To reduce the inductance per meter we can try to reduce the spacing between
conductors and increase their radii. Reducing spacing can only go so far because
of considerations of voltage flashover. On the other hand, there are cost and
weight problems associated with increasing the radii of solid conductors and
problems of flexibility and ease of handling as well as cost in the case of hollow
conductors. The problem is neatly solved by the practice of conductor
"bundling," which is considered next.
3.4 CONDUCTOR BUNDLING
Suppose that instead of one conductor per phase there are b conductors in close prox-
imity as compared with the spacing between phases. Such a composite conductor is
said to be made up of bundled conductors. The conductors within a bundle are sup-
ported at frequent intervals by a conducting frame, as suggested in Figure 3.6, and thus
these conductors are effectively in paralleL In the figure is shown an equilaterally
spaced set of phase conductors each composed of four bundled conductors. Typically,
two, three, or four conductors per bundle are used.
We will now consider the configuration of Figure 3.6 in more detaiL Suppose
that the spacing between bundle centers is D, where D is large relative to the spac-
ing between the conductors of the same phase. Assume that all the conductors have
the same radius r.
Consider the flux linkages of conductor 1 in the phase a bundle. Assume for
simplicity that the current in each phase splits equally among the~ur parallel branch-
es. We can use (3.21) and get the flux linkages of conductor 1,
7 Conducting frame
J\
Phase b supporting
5 6 conductors
1*,-~10
4 ( D ") 11
Phase a Phase c Figure 3.6 Bundled conductors.

Sec. 3.4 Conductor Bundling 65
- In -1
Al = -}Lo [ia( + In -1 + In - 1 + In-
1)
21T 4 r' d12 d13 d14
1 + In-
+ -ib(In- 1 + In-
1 + In-
1)
4 dl5 d16 d17 diS
where we have introduced the definitions

Rb ~ (r'd 12d13d1d/ 4
= geometric mean radius (GMR) of bundle
Dlb ~ (d15d16d17dlS)I/4
= geometric mean distance (GMD) from conductor 1 to phase b
DIe ~ (d I9 dl,lod1,lldl,ld/4
= GMD from conductor 1 to phase c
Noting that D1b "" Die"" D, and assuming that ia + ib + ie = 0, we get, approxi-
mately,
(3.25)
Comparing (3.25) with (3.23), we see that the only difference is that r' is replaced by
the (much larger) geometric mean radius of the bundle, Rb .
In calculating the inductance per meter of phase a, we can proceed intuitively.
First, calculate the inductance per meter of conductor 1. Noting that the current in
conductor 1 is ial4, we are led to
(3.26)
Next, calculating Az, we find the same value of Rb as previously; the reason is the
symmetrical spacing of conduct·ors. In calculating GMDs from conductor 2 to phas-
es band c, we find that DZb "" Dze "" D because of the large spacing between phases.
Thus, fz "" fl. In this manner we find that 11 "" fz "" 13 "" 14. Then, since we have four
approximately equal inductors (/1, fz, 13,/4) in parallel,
I ",,!J. = }Lo In E.. = 2 X 10- 7 In E.. (3.27)

a 4 21T Rb Rb
66 Transmission-Line Parameters Ohap. 3
Checking the steps in the calculation, we see also that la = Ib = Ic.

We have been considering the case of four bundled conductors per phase. The
reader should check that (3.27) holds also for any other bundled configuration in
which the bundled conductors are symmetrically spaced around a circle and the dis-
tances between phases are equal and large compared with the spacing of conductors
within each phase. Of course, the GMR must be defined appropriately; with b con-
ductors we get
Rb !- (, 'd 12,···, dIb )I/b b2!2 (3.28)
Note: We can define Rb = " if b = 1 (i.e., the nonbundled case), and then
(3.27) includes (3.23) as a special case.
Example 3.3
Find the GMR of three symmetrically spaced conductors (Figure E3.3). Assume that
r = 2 em and r' = 2e- 1/4 = 1.56 cm.
Figure E3.3
Solution
Rb = (1.56 X 50 X 50)1/3 = 15.7 cm
Example 3.4
Find the GMR of four symmetrically spaced subconductors (Figure E3.4Jr Assume that
r = 2 cm and r' = 1.56 cm. '
cr---50 em -----i Figure E3.4
Solution
Rb = (1.56 X 50 X 50 X 50 Vz )1/4 = 22.9 cm
Sec. 3.5 Transposition 67
In Example 3.4 the inductance of the line has been reduced by a factor 2.69
compared with a line with single conductors of the same radius or by afactor 1.44 com-
pared with single conductors with the same amount of material as in the bundles.
Three additional comments about bundling are as follows:
1. If we view the buridle as an approximation of a hollow conductor, the reason

for the increased "radius" is intuitively clear.
2. The larger "radius" helps in another respect. At high voltages, above approx-
imately 230 kV, the electric field strength near conductors is sufficiently high to
ionize the air nearby. This phenomenon, called corona, has an undesirable ef-
fect since it is associated with line losses, radio interference, and audible noise.
All other things being equal, the larger the conductor radius, the less the elec-
tric field strength at the surface of the conductor. Bundling is beneficial since
it effectively increases the conductor radius.
3. Compared with a single conductor of the same cross-sectional area, bundled
conductors, having a larger surface area exposed to the air, are better cooled.
Thus, higher currents may be carried without exceeding thermal limits. More
on this point later.
Exercise 1. In checking the validity of comment 1, consider the GMR of a

sequence of b symmetrically spaced subconductors all at a fixed radius 1 (Figure
EX 1). As b ---HXJ the spacing between conductors necessarily tends to zero (as
does r') and the configuration looks like a hollow conductor of radius 1. In this case
we get I = (/LO/21T) In (D/1), and we expect that R; = 1. Do you believe it? As a
check, pick r = 0.1, pick b = 31, obtain the values of dij graphically, and calculate Rb •
Note that for b = 31 we approximate a hollow conductor.
o0 0 ~""EX1
The simple result of Example 3.2 has been extended in one direction; with mul-
tiple conductors per phase instead of a single conductor, we use the GMR, Rb in-
stead of r'. In Section 3.5 we extend the result in another direction.
3.5 TRANSPOSITION
In practice the equilateral arrangement of phases discussed in the preceding two sec-
tions is usually not convenient. It is usually more convenient to arrange the phases
in a horizontal or vertical configuration.
In this case symmetry is lost. One way to regain the symmetry and restore
balanced conditions is to use the method of transposition of lines. This is illustrated
Position
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3
Figure 3.7 Transposed lines.
in Figure 3.7. We can think of this as a top view of three conductors in the same hor-
izontal plane. Equally well, it could be a side view of three conductors in the same
vertical plane or even a view of three conductors not in the same plane. In this case,
to visualize the transposition, think of a line crew that sets out the insulators on the
poles or towers in an arbitrary but fixed configuration labeled 1,2,3 on every pole.
Another crew then strings the wires, rotating each phase, at intervals, through each
insulator position. For example, phase a starts in position 1, gets rotated to position
2, then position 3, and then the cycle repeats.
From the way the line is constructed it seems physically reasonable that the
average inductance of each phase will be the same. We now wish to calculate that
inductance.
Assume that
1. Each phase occupies each position for the same fraction of the total length of line.
2. Each phase is a single (nonbundled) conductor of radius r.
3. ia + ib + ie = O.
Next, we calculate the average flux linkages per meter of phase a. This is
Aa = 3l(A(I)a + A(2)a + A(3))
a (3.29)
where A~ is the flux linkage per meter in the ith section, i = 1, ~3. Substituting in
(3.29) from (3.21) and using the transposition cycle in Figure 3.7, we get
- 1 /-Lo(.
Aa = - X - lain, + lbln-d
1 . 1 . 1
+ leln-
3 21T' r 12 d13
(3.30)
1 1
n -d + Ie'1n -d + la'1n, + ib In -1 + ie In -1)
+ ia 1n,1 + lb'11
r n n r ~ ~
Each of the rows in (3.30) is the application of (3.21) to conductor a as it finds itself
successively in positions 1,2, and 3. We can group terms, as follows:
\"/\a = -/-Lo(.la 1n,

1 + lb. 1n - 1 + Ie. In - 1 )
21T' r Dm Dm
(3.31)
= /-Lo i In Dm
21T' a "
Sec. 3.5 Transposition 89
where Dm ~ (d12d23 d13)1/3 = geometric mean of the distances between positions 1,2,
and 3. Thus we get the average inductance per meter:
I = /-La I Dm
(3.32)
a 27T n r I
The formula is the same as (3.23) except that D is replaced by Dm' It is clear, because
of the transposition, that la = h = IC' We note that this result is consistent with the
use of per phase analysis.
Suppose now that instead of being single round conductors, the conductors are
bundled. How does this affect (3.32)7 Comparing (3.27) and (3.23), we can guess that
the result will be
- - - - /-La D Dm
I = lb = Ie = I = -In~ = 2 X 1O- 7 In- (3.33)
a 27T Rb Rb
which, in fact, is correct. This can be shown as follows. If we consider section 1 of

the transposed line [using appropriate notational and other modifications of (3.24)
to accommodate the unequal spacing of phases], we get the approximate formula for
the flux linkages of conductor 1:
(1) _
Ala - 2
/-Lo(.la In ~ . I _1 . I _1)
R + lb n (1) + Ie n (1) (3.34)
7T b d a6 d ae
where d~~ and d~~ are the section 1 spacings between phases a and b, and a and c, re-
spectively. Equation (3.34) corresponds to (3.24) with the approximations d~~ "" D1b ,
d~~ "" DlC' We next calculate
Ala = l[A\l)
3 a
+ A(2)la + A(3)]
la
and get
(3.35)
Equation (3.35) corresponds to (3.30) with appropriate changes in notation. Re-

grouping terms gives us
- /La (.
Ala = - la ln -
1+ lb.ln -1+ leln-D
. 1) =
/-La. Dm
-2 laln-R (3.36)
27T Rb Dm m 7T b
where Dm ~ [d~~d~~d~6P/3 = [d~1d~~d~1P/3· The notation obscures the equality of
the two bracketed terms; the reader should check that they are equal because of the
transposition of phases. By exactly the same technique l!,sed ip. go~ng from (3.25) to
(3.27), we go from (3.36) to (3.33). It is again evident that la = Ib = Ie in this case also.
We note that in practice, even when the lines are not consistently transposed,
it is convenient and causes little error to calculate the inductance as if they were
transposed. Note also that with the definition Rb = r', for b = 1, (3.33) covers all
combinations of cases we have considered.
Example 3.5
Find the inductance per meter of the 3t{J line shown in Figure E3.S. The conductors
are aluminum (IL, == 1), with radius r == 0.5 in.
~:Ollf: 20ft :1
o 0 0 0 0 0
-1 r- 18in. Figure E3.5
Solution Although for simplicity the problem is stated without precision, it is generally
understood that what is required is the average inductance of the transposed line. Thus
Dm == (20 ft X 20 ft X 40 ft)l/3 == 25.2 ft
Rb == (0.78 X 0.5 X 18)1/2 == 2.65 in. == 0.22 ft
I == ILo I Dm == 2 X 10-71n 25.2 == 947 X 10- 7HI

a 2'7T n Rb 0.22' m
Note: Although line dimensions are in feet, the result of the calculation is in
henrys per meter. We have used ILo == 4'7T X 10- 7•
In introducing the calculation of inductance, we have simplified matters by mak-

ing some reasonable assumptions and approximations. In most cases we can extend
the analysis and obtain more accurate results without undue extra labor. A case in
point is the calculation of the geometric mean radius (GMR) for sti«nded conduc-
tors. This is an important practical case since almost invariably conductors are strand-
ed rather than solid. The method used to calculate the GMR for bundled conductors
extends easily to this application. For example, for the stranded conductor, labeled
"Bluejay," with 7 (central) strands of steel and 45 strands of aluminum, the outside
diameter is 1.259 in. and the GMR is 0.4992 in. * For stranded conductors we get
more accurate results by substituting the conductor GMR in place of,' in all our for-
mulas. However, even if we ignore the stranding, our results are usually quite accu-
rate. In the Bluejay example just quoted, if we neglect the stranding (and the presence
of iron) and assume a solid round aluminum conductor of the same outside diame-
ter, we get " = 0.7788 X 1.259/2 = 0.4903 in., compared with the GMR of 0.4992.
This small error is typical for ACSR conductors.
• See Table A8.1 in Appendix 8.

Sec. 3.6 Impedance of Three Phase Lines Including Ground Return 71
A similar extension permits the use of an exact geometric mean distance (GMD)
between phases instead of the approximation used here. For the details of these
calculations, the reader is referred to Anderson (Chapter 4), and Grainger and
Stevenson (Chapter 4).
3.6 IMPEDANCE OF THREE PHASE LINES INCLUDING

GROUND RETURN
In some cases we cannot assume balanced operation. There may be lack of

transmission-line transposition or of load balance. More extreme cases of unbalance
are treated in Chapter 12, where we analyze the steady-state performance of power
systems during faulted conditions. We consider, for example, single phase to ground
faults. The current now flows in the neutral conductor (if present) and the ground
(or earth) return as well as in the phase a, b, and c transmission-line conductors. As
a result, we will need to model the effect of earth and neutral return on the imped-
ance of a transmission line.
In this section, we present the essential features of the approach. In a land-
mark paper in 1923, J. R. Carson developed a procedure to describe the imped-
ances of overhead conductors with an earth return. This paper, with certain
modifications, has served as the basis for transmission-line impedance calcu-
lations in such cases. The matrix equation (3.37) is used to relate the volt-
age drop from one end of each line to the other end of the line in terms of
line and neutral currents. The model also assumes a single isolated neutral
conductor.
(3.37)
where
Vi = phasor voltage drop of phase i, i = a, b, c, n
Ii = phasor current flowing in phase i

lii = self-impedance of conductor'i including the effect of ground return
= Zii X f
f = length of transmission line in meters
ri = resistance of phase i in njm

rd = 9.869 X 10-71 is the earth resistance in njm
1 = operating frequency in hertz
De = 658.368.Jf m
p = resistivity of the earth in nom

GMRi = geometric mean radius of conductor i in meters
Zij = Zij X eis the mutual impedance between conductor i and conductor j
including the effect of the ground return
D
Zij = rd + jw2 X 10- 7 In de njm
II
d ij = distance between conductors i and j in meters
Some additional points follow:
1. Carson determined that the earth resistance rd is a function of the frequency and
derived the given empirical formula.
2. In the formula for De' if the actual earth resistance is unknown, it is common
to assume p to be 100 nom.
3. D" GMRi , and dij are only involved as ratios in the formulas for Zu and Zij'
As long as the units are consistent, either feet or meters can be used.
4. For further details on the evaluation of self-impedances and mutual imped-
ances, see Anderson, Chapter 4, pages 78-83.
In (3.37), the effect of the neutral conductor is included.:jIowever, if In = 0

(i.e., neutral conductor is open circuited), or Vn = 0 (e.g., neutral conductor imped-
ance is zero), (3.37) may be simplified. Consider the case In = O. In this case we
may solve for Va, Vb, Vc in terms Ofla,!b,!c alone. In matrix terms we may eliminate
the right hand column and bottom row of the Z matrix in (3.37).
Next, consider the case Vn = O. Then.
(3.38)
which implies
(3.39)
Sec. 3.6 Impedance of Three Phase Lines Including Ground Return 73
Substituting (3.39) in the first three equations of (3.37) yields
(3.40)
where
Z~. = z _ ZinZni. i = a, b, c (3.41)

II II Znn'
ZZ
Z~=Z-~' i, j = a, b, c (3.42)
IJ IJ Znn'
Under additional assumptions equation (3.40) includes as a special case that of
a balanced and completely transposed line connected to a symmetrical load. In this
case (3.40) reduces to that given by (3.33). See Anderson, Chapter 4, for details.
Example 3.6
Compute the phase self- and mutual impedances of the 161 kV line shown in Figure
E3.6. The conductors are "Hawk" ACSR 26m, with a resistance of 0.1931 Wmi
and a GMR of 0.0289 ft. Assume that the frequency is 60 Hz (w = 377), that the
neutral current is zero (i.e., the ground wires are open circuited), and that the
phase wires have the configuration shown in Figure E3.6 for the entire length of
the line. Assume that the earth resistivity p is 100 D-m and that the line is 60
miles long.
161 kV Figure E3.S
t See Table A8.l in Appendix 8.

Solution
Ta = Tb = Te = O.l931fl/mi
GMR a = GMRb = GMR e = 0.0289 ft
De = 2160 ~ ft = 2160 j¥o. = 2790 ft

At 60 Hz, Td = 9.869 X 10- 7f fl/m = 592.1 X 10- 7 fl/m.
Using the conversion factor 1 mile = 1.609 kilometers, we get
Td = 0.09528 fl/mi
Then
= (0.1931 + 0.09528) + j(377 X 2 X W-7) In ~~:~9 X 1.609 X 103 fl/mi

=0.2884 + j1.3927 fl/mi
The mutual impedances are computed as follows:
2790
= 0.09528 + j(377 X 2 X 10- 7) 1n 186/12 X 1.609 X 10-3
= 0.09528 + jO.6301fl/mi
It is important to note that, as suggested earlier, in calculating the natural logarithm,

we have converted the spacing between conductors a and b into fe~ Thus,
Zbc = Zab = 0.09528 + jO.6301fl/mi

Finally, we calculate Zae, noting that all quantities except for dae are the same;
dae = 372 inches = 31 feet.
Zae = 0.09528 + j0.546 fl/mi
For 60 miles of line, we multiply the foregoing values by 60 to write, in matrix notation,
(17.304 + j83.562) (5.717 + j37.81) (5.717 + j32.76) ]

Zabe = (5.717 + j37.81) (17.304 + j83.562) (5.717 + j37.81) n
[
(5.717 + j32.76) (5.717 + j37.81) (17.304 + jS3.562)
Sec. 3.7 Review of Electric Fields 75
Until now we have been considering magnetic effects, line inductance in Sections
3.1 through 3.5, and series impedance (series resistance and series inductive reac-
tance) in Section 3.6. We turn next to the calculation of (shunt) capacitance, anoth-
er important transmission-line parameter.
3.7 REVIEW OF ELECTRIC FIELDS
We start with some basic facts from physics.
Gauss's law. Gauss's law states that
JD· da = q,
A
(3.43)
where
D:::;; electric flux density vector, coulombs/m2
da:::;; differential area da with direction normal to the surface, m2
A = total closed surface area, m2
qe = algebraic sum of all charges enclosed by A, coulombs
As in the case of Ampere's circuital law, Gauss's law is implicit in D, the variable of
interest, but can be usefully applied when symmetries are present, as in the follow-
ing example.
Example 3.7
Find the field of an infinite uniformly charged straight round wire.
Solution Draw a cylindrical Gaussian surface concentric with the wire and h meters
long (Figure E3.7, where the charge on the wire is q dm oflength). Considerations of
symmetry indicate that D is radial and constant in magnitude over the curved portion
of the cylinder (it is zero on the end caps). Thus, using Gauss's law,
Figure E3.7
f D· da = D2nRh = qh
A
Then
D=-q- R? r (3.44)
27TR
where D is the scalar version of D. Knowing that D is directed radially, we also have
q
D = a'27TR (3.45)
where a, is a radially directed unit vector.
Electric field E. In a homogeneous medium the electric field intensity E is

related to D by
D = "E (3.46)
where the units of E are volts per meter, and in free space, in the SI system of units,
" = "0 = 8.854 X 10- 12 farads per meter. In other media we may write" = "r"O,
where Er is called the relative permittivity. The relative permittivity for dry air may
be taken to be 1.0 with negligible error.
Voltage difference. We can next find the voltage difference between any
two points Pa and P~ by integrating E (in volts per meter) along any path joining the
two points. From physics,
V~a ~ vp~ - VPa = - (p E . dl (3.47)

p.
We will now apply the result in Example 3.7 to find an expression for line capaci-
tance.
3.8 LINE CAPACITANCE
Roughly speaking, capacitance relates charge to voltage, and hence we consider next
the voltage differences associated with the infinite charged line ofExample 3.7. Since
the electric field is radial, we can think of a path in which we get from Pa to P~ by first
moving parallel to the wire and then at a fixed radius until we can reach P{3 by a pure-
ly radial path. The integrand in (3.47) will be zero for the first two segments, and for
the third segment we get
RP q R
v{3a = vp~ - VPa = - - - dR = ...!L In --'!. (3.48)
JR. 27TER 27TE Rf3
T,
Sec. 3.8 Line Capacitance 77
where Ro is the (radial) distance of Po from the wire and R~ is the (radial) distance
of P~ from the wire. Note that if q is positive and P~ is closer to the wire than Po,
its potential will be higher than that of Po. Note that we have not yet considered the
"voltage" of the line. To do this we could let P~ be a point on the line and let Po be
the reference point (i.e., the point whose voltage is the datum or reference voltage).
An attractive reference point would be the point at an infinite radius. Unfortunate-
ly, in this case Ro -+ co and from (3.48) we see that the voltage diverges. This diffi-
culty, similar to the one discussed in Section 3.2 in connection with flux linkages, has
the same resolution; in the many-conductor case, under reasonable assumptions, the
line-to-datum voltages are well defined, even if the datum point is at infinity.
Consider next the multiconductor case illustrated in Figure 3.8. Shown here
are cross sections of an infinite line with n conductors, the charges per meter of these
conductors, and a possible path of integration to evaluate the potential of P~ relative
to po. With conductor radii small compared with the spacing between conductors, we
can assume that the effect of the interaction between the charges on different con-
ductors is negligible. In this case we can evaluate (3.47) using superposition. We are
thus led to the multiconductor version of (3.48):
1 ~ Ro;
v~a = vp~ - VPa = - £J q;ln- (3.49)
27TE i=1 R~i
We next make a key assumption regarding the instantaneous charge densities
in any cross section of the line. Assume that
(3.50)
which is analogous to (3.16). Proceeding as in the development following (3.16), we

then rewrite (3.49) in a way that facilitates the introduction of (3.50):
1 n 1 1 n
v~a = -2 2: qi ln -RW+ -27T€ i=1
7TE i=1
2: qilnRoi (3.51)
Possible path of
integration Figure 3.S Conductor cross
ofE sections.
r
!
i
To the second part of (3.51) add

1 n
- -2- 2: qjln Ral
7TE j=1
(3.52)
Because of (3.50) we have added zero. On the other hand, the second part of (3.51)
now becomes
(3.53)
Now we are in a position to pick point Fa as reference and move it out toward infin-
ity. As we do this, all the ratios RaJ Ral -t 1 and each logarithmic term individually
tends toward zero. In the limit (3.53) becomes zero. We can use the notation v~ to
indicate voltage at any point ~ with respect to the reference.
1 n 1
v/l=- 2: q)n-
27TE j=1 Rf3i
(3.54)
We note that the formula holds for an arbitrary point ~ as long as it is not inside a
wire. Rf3j is the distance between the (otherwise) arbitrary point ~ and the center
of the ith conductor. If the point f3 is on the ith conductor surface, then R{3j, the dis-
tance between the surface of the ith conductor and its center, reduces to the radius.
The main application of (3.54) is to relate transmission-line voltages and
charges. For example, we find the voltage at a point on the surface of conductor 1
in Figure 3.8.
(3.55)
where Rll is the radius of conductor 1, R12 the distance from the point to the center
of conductor 2, and so on. Now while physical considerations indicate that the sur-
face of conductor 1 is an equipotential surface, application of (3.55) g~s slightly dif-
ferent results for different choices of points on the surface. This discrepancy is
expected in the light of the approximations made in the derivation. A more detailed
investigation of the potential fields indicates that Rjj should be replaced by dij , the
spacing between centers of conductors. With small radii compared with intercon-
ductor spacings, the differences are insignificant.
Thus we have
VI = 1( 1+ 1+ ... + 1)
-2- qlln -
7TE rl
q2ln -
d12
qn In-
dIn
(3.56)
With obvious modifications the equation for the kth conductor voltage is
Vk = -
21TE
1( In -1+ . . . + In -1+ . . . + In -1)
ql
dk1
qk
rk
qn
dkn
(3.57)
Sec. 3.8 Line Capacitance 79
In matrix notation
v = Fq (3.58)
where v is an n-vector with components VI, V2, ••. Vn , q is an n-vector with com-
ponents ql, q2, ... , qn, and F is an n X n matrix with typical element
hj = (lj21TE) In (1/ dij )· To find the capacitance parameters, we need the inverse re-
lationship,
q = Cv (3.59)
where C = F- 1.
Note that, in general, there is mutual capacitance between conductors; that is,
the charges depend on all the voltages, and vice versa. However, in an important
special case we can model with only self-capacitances.
Example 3.8
Calculate an expression for the capacitance per meter of a three-phase transmission
line [Figure E3.8(a)]. Assume that
Figure E3.8(a)
1. Conductors are equally spaced, D, and have equal radii r.

2. qa + qb + q, = O.
Solution Using a, b, c notation instead of 1,2,3, we find Va by using (3.56):
Va =
1(qa In ~1 + qb In D
21T€ 1 + q, In D
1)
(3.60)
=~lnQ
21T€ r
where we have used the assumption qa + qb + q, = O. In the same way we find iden-
tical relationships between Vb and qln and between V, and qt. We are now ready to cal-
culate the three capacitances. To interpret the result physically, however, we digress
briefly. Consider the potential of a point p equidistant from the conductors a, b, and
c. Using (3.54) gives us
Thus the point p is at the same potential as the point at infinity and may be taken as
the datum point. In fact, construct an imaginary geometric line parallel to the con-
ductors passing through the point P. Every point on this line is at the datum poten-
tial. Picking this also to be the neutral potential, we get the relationships between
phase-to-neutral voltages and phase charges via three equal phase-neutral (distrib-
uted) capacitances:
21TE
Ca = Cb = Cc = C = In (D/r) F/m to neutral (3.61)
arranged as shown in Figure E3.8(b). This symmetric circuit may also be taken to be
a representation of the physical cross section of the transmission line.
Figura E3.8(bJ
In the more general case of unequal interphase spacings and bundled subcon-
ductors as described in Section 3.4, we assume that the lines are transposed and get
_ _ _ _ 21TE /
C a= Cb = Cc = C = In (Dm/ Rg) F m to neutral (3.62)
where Dm is the GMD between phases and
b?2 (3.63)
We note that the only difference between (3.63) and (3.28) is that r is used instead of
r'. If b = 1, it is convenient to define R); = r so that we can use (3.6f) to cover the non-
bundled case.
Example 3.9
Find phase-neutral capacitance and capacitive reactance per mile for a three-phase
line with Dm = 35.3 ft. Conductor diameter = 1.25 in.
Solution Inair,E = EroO = 1.0.0 = 8.854 X 10- 12• Using this value in (3.62),we have
C= ~ = 271' X 8.854 X 10- 12 _ -12
In (Dm/ r ) In [(35.3 x 12)/(1.25/2)] - 8.53 x 10 F/m
r Sec. 3.9 Determination of Line Parameters Using Tables 81
I We next calculate the susceptance.

Be = we = 21T X 60 x 8.53 X 10- 12 = 3.216 X 10- 9 mho/m
I = 3.216 X 10- 9 x 1609.34 = 5.175 x 10- 6 mho/mi
Finally, we have the phase-neutral reactance in fl-mi.

1 1
IX I = - = = 0.193 Mfl-mi
e Be 5.175 X 10- 6
Exercise 2. Comparing I in (3.33) and c in (3.62), we see that there is an ap-

proximately inverse relationship. Assume that b = 2, f.Lr = 1, Dml Rb = 15, and
show that Ie '" f.LoEo. We note that (JLoEor 1/2 = 2.998 X 108m/sec is the velocity of
light in a vacuum (i.e., a universal constant.)
Before leaving the subject of line capacitance, it should be noted that we are ne-
glecting the effect of the (conducting) earth under the transmission line. Charges
are induced in the earth, and these have some effect on the calculated values of ca-
pacitance. To study this effect further, see Anderson (Chapter 5) and Grainger and
Stevenson (Chapter 5). The effect is usually quite small for lines of reasonable height
operating under normal nonfault conditions.
3.9 DETERMINATION OF LINE PARAMETERS USING TABLES
Values of GMR for the important case of stranded conductors without bundling
are available in tables provided by manufacturers. The tables given in Appendix
8 also provide values of inductive reactance, shunt capacitive reactance, and resis-
tance. These tables continue to use units of inches, feet, and miles based on the
practice in the electric utility industry in North America.
In much of the analysis using line parameters, we utilize the values of inductive
reactance and shunt capacitive reactance rather than the values of inductance and
shunt capacitance.
Using (3.32) the per phase inductive reactance for a single solid conductor of
radius, is given by
7 Dm
XL = 21f/1= 41f/ X 10- In ----;- !lIm
r
D (3.64)
= 2.022 X 10-3 X / In -'f- !l/mi
r
where,' = re- w/4. In the case of stranded conductors we would use the GMR rather
than " although, as pointed out on page 70, the use of " provides a good approxi-
mation for the GMR. Using the GMR rather than r' we get
D
XL = 2.022 X 10- 3 X f In G~R O/mi (3.65)
Finding the GMR by using Table AS.1 in Appendix S we can solve for XL using
(3.65). There is another way to find XL directly from the tables in Appendix S. Be-
cause of a logarithmic property we can replace (3.65) as follows:
XL =2.022 x 10-3 xfIn G~R + ,2.022 X10-3 xfln Dm) Q/mi

, ) y (3.66)
Y Xd
Xa
If the units of GMR and Dm are in feet, the first term in (3.66) represents the in~
ductive reactance per phase of a line having a distance of 1 ft between the conduc-
tors. This term, Xa , is referred to as the inductive reactance at 1 ft spacing. It is a
function of the frequency and the GMR. The second term in (3.66) is called the in-
ductive reactance spacing factor Xd • This term is independent of the type of con-
ductor and is a function of the frequency and spacing between conductors. The
values of Xa are given in Tables AS.l and the values of Xd are given in Table AS.2
(both in Appendix S).
In a similar fashion, we can also obtain the shunt capacitive reactance to neu-
tral using tables.
Using (3.62) as it applies to the nonbundled case, we can calculate the shunt ca-
pacitive reactance to neutral as
1
Xc = 2TrfC O-m to neutral (3.67)
where
C = 2m:
Dm
In-
r
As a result,
Xc = f1 X 1.779 X 10 In 7Dm O-mi to neutral

6
(3.6S)
Following the procedure applied in the case of inductive reactance, we can rewrite
(3.68) in the form
Y
J
XC =J x 1.779 x 106 ln (~ + x 1.799 x 1061n(Dm~ Q-mi to neutral
y
(3.69)
X~ Xa
For a line with one stranded conductor per phase, X~ and Xd can be found directly
from Table AS.l and AS.3, respectively.
Sec. 3.9 Determination of Line Parameters Using Tables 83
Example 3.10
Find the inductive reactance per phase in ohms per mile, and the capacitive reactance
to neutral in ohm-miles for a three-phase line that has three equilaterally spaced con-
ductors of ACSR Dove. The conductors are 10 ft apart, and the operating frequency
is 60 Hz.
Solution We will solve this example using both the approximate expressions derived
in the chapter for a single solid conductor of radius r and the method using the tables
described in this section.
Dove GMR = 0.0313 ft, D = 10 ft, r = 0.4635 inches
r = 0.4635 = 0.0386 ft
12
Inductive Reactance Calculation From (3.65),
XL = 2.022 X 10- 3 X fin G~R !1jmi
= 2.022 X 10- 3 X 60InC.~~14) = 0.699Wjmi

From Table A8.l, we have for the Dove conductor
Xa = 0.420 !1jmi
From Table A8.2 for a spacing of 10 ft, we have
Xd = 0.2794 !1jmi
From (3.65), XL = Xa + Xd = 0.420 + 0.2794 = 0.6994 njmi, which is very close to
the value obtained previously using the expression for a single solid conductor of ra-
dius r.
Shunt Capacitive Reactance Calculation
From (3.68),
Xc = 7 1.779
X X
6
10 In ( ~m )
= f1 X 1.779 X 106 1n ( 0.0386
10 ') = 0.1648 M!1-mi to neutral
From Table A8.l, we have for the Dove conductor

X;·= 0.0965 M!1-mi
From Table A8.3, we have for a lO-ft spacing
Xd = 0.0683 M!1-mi
From (3.68), Xc = X; + Xd = 0.0965 + 0.0683 = 0.1648 M!1-mi. which is the same
value obtained using the expression for a single solid conductor.
3.10 TYPICAL PARAMETER VALUES
In this section we provide some parameter values for high-voltage lines. Consider the
three lines in Figure 3.9. Some typical data concerning the lines are given in Table
3.1. A few comments on the tabulated values follow.
1. The spacing between the phases increases with the voltage rating. However, by
increasing the number of conductors per bundle, the inductance actually de-
creases with voltage rating.
2. Line resistance increases with temperature and with frequency. In Table 3.1
are shown the line resistance for dc and 60 Hz. At dc the distribution of cur-
rent across each conductor cross section is uniform. Because of inductive effects,
the current distribution changes as the frequency is increased, with higher cur-
rent densities at the surface. Although the current averaged over the cross sec-
tion remains the same, the PR losses increase, and this may be viewed as the
reason for the increased R.
Checking the table, we see that the resistance at 60 Hz is only 5% higher
than at dc. This is evidence that there is only a slight departure from the uni-
form current distribution assumed in our calculation of inductance.
3. The resistance is relatively small compared with the inductive reactance. In
calculating power flows, voltages, and currents, the resistances have a minor ef-
fect compared with the inductive reactances. In some calculations they are ne-
glected. However, in other calculations they are of vital importance. Examples
are the calculation of line thermal limits considered in Chapter 4, and problems
of economic operation considered in Chapter 11 .
L [!j .1 , ,
L C;J~
18' /
9110)/
I~
T~
6'8'
T1
50'
: 5'
'T 55'8'
,'
Figure 3.9 Typical high-voltage transmission lines. Copyright ©
1977, Electric Power Research Institute. EPRI-EM-285, Synthetic
Electric Utility Systems for Evaluating Advances Technologies.
Reprinted with permission.
Sec. 3.11 Summary 85
TABLE3.1·UNEOATA ,', ~< ..-,

... ~ -
"-'<,>;
I ~ •
::;;"'':_'~
~ ~__ ." •
Line voltage (kV)
138 345 765
Conductors per phase (18-in. spacing) 1 2 4

Number of strands aluminum/steel 5417 4517 54/19
Diameter (in.) 0.977 1.165 1.424
Conductor GMR (ft) 0.0329 0.0386 0.0479
Current-carrying capacity per conductor (A) 770 1010 1250
Bundle GMR-Rb (ft) 0.0329 0.2406 0.6916
Flat phase spacing (ft) 17.5 26.0 45.0
GMD phase spacing (ft) 22.05 32.76 56.70
Inductance (Him x 10 -7) 13.02 9.83 8.81
XL (O/mi) 0.789 0.596 0.535
Capacitance (F/m x 10- 12) 8.84 11.59 12.78
1Xcl (MO-mi to neutral) 0.186 0.142 0.129
Resistance (O/mi), dc, 50°C 0.1618 0.0539 0.0190
Resistance (O/mi) 60 Hz, 50°C 0.1688 0.0564 0.0201
Surge impedance loading (MVA) 50 415 2268
4. For future reference we list surge impedance loading for the three lines. This
is a measure of line power-handling capability considered in Chapter 4.
5. On each transmission tower in Figure 3.9 the reader may have noticed two tri-
angular structures above the horizontal cross member. These structures sup-
port "ground" wires, which are electrically connected to ground or to each tower
and thereby to ground. The purpose of these wires is to shield the phase con-
ductors in the event of lightning strikes and to provide a low-impedance path
in the event of a phase-to-ground fault.
In Chapter 4 we consider the modeling of transmission lines using the distrib-

uted parameters described in this chapter.
, .
3.11 SUMMARY~. .: . ,'.. _ , '. ': .:, -),<.". -
~. ,~ " ". ~ ~
For a three-phase line with transposition and bundling, the average per phase in-
ductance is given by
I = /Lo In Dm = 2 X 10- 7 In Dm = Him (3.33)

21T' Rb Rb
where for convenience we have dropped the I notation. Dm is the GMD between
phases [i.e., Dm = (dabdbcdca)1/3). Rb is the GMR of each phase bundle given by
r!
Rb = (r 'd12 • •• d1b )l /b, where r' = r exp (- ,urI4) and dij is the distance between con-
ductors i and j. We are assuming that each phase has the same symmetrical arrange-
ment of bundled conductors all of the same radius r. If there is no bundling, Rb = r'.
If the GMR of the (stranded) conductors is given, it should be used in the formulas
in place of r' .
The formula for average capacitance to neutral is
2'lTE
c=---- F1m to neutral (3.62)
In (DmIRb)
where E = ErEO = l.OEo = 8.854 X 10- 12 in air, Dm has already been defined, and
Rb == (rd 12 • •. d1b )l/b is the same as Rb except r is used instead of r'. We are again as-
suming a symmetrical arrangement of bundled subconductors all of the same radius
r. Without bundling Rb == r.
Equations (3.33) and (3.62) make the dependence of I and c on geometry
quite clear. In this connection the approximately inverse relationship of I and c
should be noted.
In this chapter we have also provided a description of the series impedance, in-
cluding the effect of ground return using the classical approach of Carson. An al-
ternate approach to calculating both inductive reactance and capacitive shunt
reactance using tables is also given.
Note Regarding the Problem Set
With the proliferation of digital computers in power system analysis, the expression
for the calculation of line parameters can be directly and conveniently programmed.
To this effect, in the following problem section, there is a special design exercise using
MATLAB to develop a program to calculate the line parameters.
This design exercise will continue through the various chapters as w1;Jconsic\er dif-
ferent topics.
Problems
3.1. Suppose that a 60-Hz single-phase powerline and an open-wire telephone line are par-
allel to each other and in the same horizontal plane. The power line spacing is 5 ft;
the telephone wire spacing is 12 in. The nearest conductors of the two lines are 20 ft
apart. The power line current is 100 A. Find the magnitude of the induced "loop"
or "round-trip" voltage per mile in the telephone line. Hint: Following the approach
in (3.11), find the flux linkages ofthe telephone wire pair due to the power line cur-
rents. Use Faraday's law to find the loop voltage. Assume that the telephone wire
radius is negligible.
3.2. Repeat Problem 3.1 but assume that the telephone line has been displaced vertically by
10 ft [i.e., the nearest conductors of the two Jines are now (202 + 102)1/2 ft apart].
Problems 87
3.3. Repeat Problem 3.1 but now assume a three-phase power line with a flat horizontal
spacing of 5 ft between phases. The power line currents are balanced three-phase each
of magnitude 100 A. Hint: Use phasors to add the flux contributions.
3.4. Suppose that in Problem 3.1 the telephone wires are transposed every 1000 ft. Calcu-
late the induced loop voltage in a 1-mile length of telephone wire.
3.5. Justify the formula (= 4 X 1O- 7 1n(D/r') henrys per meter for the round-trip induc-
tance of a single-phase line made up of round wires of radius r separated by a distance
D between centers. For simplicity, assume that D » r and make reasonable simplifi-
cations. Note that the inductance "per conductor" is the same as the per phase induc-
tance of a three-phase line, but the inductance is doubled because there are two
conductors.
3.6. Reconsider Example 3.2 but assume that each of the conductors is hollow. Find an ex-
pression for the inductance I in this case.
3.7. Reconsider Example 3.2 but assume that each of the conductors is stranded with a cen-
tral wire of radius r surrounded by six wires each of the same radius. Assume that
D » r and justify the approximateformula
D
1=2 X 1O- 71n -
R,
where
R, = [(d nd12' .. d17f7(d21d22' .. d27?17 . .. (d 71 dn · .. d77 )1 /7j1/7
and where du g, r' and dij is the distance between centers of the ith and jth strands. R,
is called the geometric mean radius (GMR) of the stranded conductor. Hint: Notice
the similarity with Figure 3.6 and proceed by analogy with the derivation of (3.27). The
only difference is that since the seven inductances 11,12 , .•. , 17 are not all equal, we
need to use the more general rule for combining parallel inductors: namely,
I-I = 11- 1 + 12- 1 + ... + 17 1•
3.8. Given an aluminum 52,620-circular mil conductor composed of seven strands, each strand
with a diameter of 0.0867 in. and an outside diameter of 0.2601 in., find R" the GMR,
using the formula in Problem 3.7 and compare with the manufacturer's figure of
0.00787 ft.
3.9. Calculate the per phase inductance (per meter) of the 765-kV line described in Section
3.10. Note the flat horizontal spacing of 45 ft between phases. Assume that four con-
ductors per bundle are placed at the corners of a square (with 18 in. on a side). Use the
values of GMR specified in place of r'.
3.10. Repeat Problem 3.9, neglecting the stranding and using the specified (outside) diame-
ter of 1.424 in. as if each individual conductor were solid aluminum. What is the percent
error compared with the result in Problem 3.9?
3.11. Calculate the per phase inductive reactance of the line in Example 3.5 in ohms per mile.
3.12. Repeat Problem 3.9 for the 345-kV line in Section 3.10.
3.13. Repeat Problem 3.12, neglecting the stranding (i.e., using r' instead of the GMR).
3.14. Calculate the per phase inductive reactance of the line in Problem 3.12 in ohms per mile.
3.15. Calculate the phase-neutral capacitance per meter of the 765-kV line described in
Section 3.10.
•
ss Transmission-Line Parameters Chap. 3
3.16. Calculate the capacitive reactance of the line in Problem 3.15 in megohm-miles. Hint:
First calculate the susceptance per mile and then take the reciprocal to find IX ,I.
3.17. Calculate the phase-neutral capacitance per meter of the 34S-kV line described in
Section 3.10.
3.18. Calculate the capacitive reactance of the line in Problem 3.17 in megohm-miles.
3.19. Calculate the product of inductance and capacitance values found for the 765-kV line
in Problems 3.9 and 3.15 and compare with the value of fLofo.
3.20. Repeat Problem 3.19 for the 34S-kV line using the results of Problems 3.12 and 3.17.
3.21. Compute the phase impedance matrix Zab' for the line described in Figure P3.21. As-
sume that the line is 30 miles long. The conductors used are Grosbeak, and the pa-
rameters for this conductor are given in Table A8.1.
30'
Figure P3.21
3.22. Compute the phase impedance matrix Zab, for the line described in Figure P3.22. As-
sume that the line is 40 miles long. The conductors used are Ostrich, and the parame-
ters for this conductor are given in Table A8.1.
:J
b
t
1.5'
8,~r
a
30'
Figure P3.22
Sec. 03.1 Design Exercise 89
03.1 DESIGN EXERCISE

Develop a MATLAB program to determine the per phase series impedance and the
shunt capacitance of a given transmission line configuration in an appropriate set of
units. Assume that the program input will consist of the following:
• Radius or diameter of the conductor in appropriate units

• Bundling information if the conductor is bundled
• Conductor configuration in terms of distances dab, dac , and dba
• Conductor resistance per unit length
~
•
CHAPTER 4 -
Transmission-Line Modeling
11.0 INTRODUCTION
In Chapter 3 the distributed per phase inductance and capacitance of a transmission

line was related to line geometry. Some typical values of distributed series reactance,
series resistance, and shunt (capacitive) reactance were given. These elements may
be used in the per phase equivalent circuit of a three-phase line operating under bal-
anced conditions. We now use this per phase model to derive the relationship between
voltages and currents at the terminals of the transmission line.
4.1 DERIVATION OF TERMINAL I/, I RELATIONS
We consider the transmission line in the sinusoidal steady state. Thus we may use pha- I
sors and impedances. Assume that
z = r + j wI = series impedance per meter .:tJ.

y = g + j we = shunt admittance per meter to neutral
The lowercase letters are used for the distributed parameters; we will reserve up-
percase letters for lumped (total) impedances and admittances. The per phase cir-
cuit is shown in Figure 4.1. The per phase terminal voltages and currents are V1 and
11 at the left end and V2 and 12 at the right end. With the given reference directions
for current it is useful to think of the left side (side 1) as the sending end of the line
and the right side (side 2) as the receiving end.
A typical differential section of line length dx is shown in Figure 4.1. The se-
ries impedance of the differential section is then z dx. The shunt admittance is y dx;
its location within the differential section is of no consequence. Note that the re-
ceiving end is located at x = 0; the sending end is at x = f.
90
Sec. 4.1 Derivation of Terminal V, I Relations 91
I
I+d/l zdx 12
---l~~_ _~NIv-/'ffl\"---+--+--· . '----.0
+ + +
o~-----o
I~._e.~--=-_x=:1
Figure 4-1 Transmission line.
Applying Kirchhoff's voltage law (KVL) and Kirchhoff's current law (KCL) to
the section, we get
dV==Izdx
(4.1)
dI == (V + dV)ydx "" Vydx
where we neglect the products of differential quantities. Thus, we get two first-order
linear differential equations,
dV
-==zI
dx
(4.2)
dI
-==yV
dx
or one second-order linear equation, either

d 2V
-d2 == yzV =:' 'Y2V (4.3)
x.
or
(4.4)
where 'Y ~ vYz'is called the propagation constant. Without resistance (i.e., if
z == jwl and y == j we), 'Y == V-w2[c == j W vfc, which is purely imaginary. If
resistance is included, 'Y is complex, in the form 'Y == a + j {3. In either case with 'Y
complex we do not expect real solutions for (4.3), (4.4).
f'
92 Transmission-Line Modeling Chap. 4
Using the standard method of solving linear ordinary differential equations, we

determine that the characteristic equation is s 2 - ')' 2 = 0, and the characteristic roots
are thus Sl, S2 = ±')'. The general solution for V is then
V = k1eYx + k2e- Yx (4.5)
eYX + e-YX eYX _ e- YX
= (kl + k2) 2 + (k1 - k2) 2
= Kl cosh)'x + K2 sinh ')'x (4.6)
where K1 = kl + k2' K2 = kl - k2. Equation (4.6) is convenient for introducing the

boundary conditions. We note that the solution of (4.4) for 1 also is in the form (4.5)
or (4.6).
From Figure 4.1 we see when x = 0, V = V2, which implies that K 1 = V2• Also,
when x = 0,1 = 12, Thus from (4.2),
dV (0)
- - = Z12 (4.7)
dx
The notation dV (O)/dx means dV (x)/dx evaluated at x = 0. From (4.6)
~: = - KI )' sinh)'x + K2')' cosh)'x (4.8)
Using (4.7) in (4.8), we get, using the definition of )"
K2
Z Z
= ~12 = v;yI 2 = yy12 = Zc12
rz
where Zc ~ VziY is called the characteristic impedance of the line. We can now
eliminate Kl and K2 in (4.6). A similar development for the solution of I is left for
the reader. Then, we get the pair of equations
V = V2 cosh ')'X + Zc12 sinh ')'X

(4.9)
V2.
1 = 12 cosh ')'X + Z SInh ')'x
c
We are particularly interested in the terminal conditions (i.e., V and 1 when

x = C). In this case
\{ = ~ cosh ')'C + ZJ2 sinh ')'C
{4.10)
11 = 12 cosh ')'C + I sinh ')'C
Zc
Equation (4.10) is the desired relationship between the per phase voltages and cur-
rents at the two ends of the transmission line. The relationship is specified by the
r1
!
Sec. 4.1 Derivation of Terminal V, I Relations 93
series impedance z and shunt admittance y in combination in their effect on the prop-
agation constant y = YzY and the characteristic impedance Zc =. VJY.
The reader may wonder why the problem was set up so that the result in (4.10)
gives Vj and 11 explicitly in terms of V2 and I z, rather than the other way around. The
reason can be stated clearly in the case of a radial transmission line. Ordinarily, it is
the load (its voltage and complex power) that is specified, and we wish to calculate
the supply-side variables needed to satisfy the load requirements. This is another
~anifestation2f th~l1otiQIl, thi!!J1J:lQ~IJ!QII):!'!Lgp~rating conditions a power sY~~!!l__
is "dnven"1Jy t.he Pil\VerAe~~Il~(!g_QYJlldQ<!9~ However, the Inversereiation is eas- -
~ily fourid forthose occasions when we seek V2 and 12 in terms of Vj and I l'
Example 4.1
A 60-Hz 138-kV 3cf> transmission line is 225 mi long. The distributed line parameters
are
r = 0.169 fl/mi I = 2.093 mH/mi c = 0.01427 p.F/mi g=O

The transmission line delivers 40 MW at 132 kV with 95% power factor lagging. Find
the sending-end voltage and current. Find the transmission-line efficiency.
Solution We first find z and y for w = 27T . 60.
z = 0.169 + j0.789 = 0.807 /77.9° !1/mi

y = j5.38 X 10- 6 = 5.38 X 10- 6 /90° mho/mi
We then calculate Z, and yC.
Z, = If = 387.3 /-6.05°!1
yf. = 225 YzY = 0.4688/83.95° = 0.0494 + j0.466

In (4.10) we need sinh yC and cosh ye. We calculate these quantities next.
2 sinh ye ~ e yl - e - yl = eO.0494 e j 0.466 - e - 0.0494 e - j0.466
= 1.051 /0.466 rad -0.952 /-0.466 rad
Thus
sinh yC = 0.452 /84.4°
In the preceding calculation it is important to note that in the formula ej8 = cos 8 +
j sin 8 = 1/!!.., 8 is in radians. Thus ejO.466 = 1 /0.466 rad. Continuing the calculation
gives us
2 cosh yC = eyl + e -yl = 1.790 /1.42°
cosh yC = 0.8950 /1.42°
We now have all the transmission-line quantities needed in (4.1 0). It remains to find
J,j and 12, The quantities in the statement of the problem refer to 3<fJ and line-line
quantities. Thus
IV2 1= 132 X 10 3 /\13 = 76.2kV .

It is convenient to pick & = O,in which case we get V2 = 76.2 ~ kV. We next find
the per phase power supplied to the load.
40
110ad = "3 = 13.33 MW
Since we are also given the power factor (0.95 lagging), we can find 12, We have
Pload = 0.95 IV2 11121

Thus 1121 =184.1. Since 12 lags J,j by COS-I 0.95 := 18.195°,
12 = 184.1 ! -18.195°
Finally, plugging all these values into (4.10) gives us
l--1 = V2 cosh 1'£ + ZJ2 sinh 1'£

= 76.2 X 1tP X 0.8950 /1.42°+ 387.3 /-6.05°
X 184.1/-18.195° + 0.452 /84.4°
= 68.20 X 103 /1.42° + 32.23 X 1tP /60.155°
=89.28 /19.39° kV
Multiplying by \13, we find that the sending-end line-line voltage has magnitude
154.64 kY. We next use (4.10) to find 11'
\12.
II = 12 cosh 1'£ + Z, smh 1'£
= 162.42 /14.76°
Thus, the magnitude of the sending-end current is 162.42 A. We now can calculate
the efficiency of transmission. Since the per phase output power is 13.33 MW while
the corresponding input power is
ll.2 = Re l--1It = 89.28 X 103X 162.42 cos (19.39° - 14.76°)

= 14.45MW .
we have
13.33
'T/ = 14.45 = 0.92
That is, the efficiency of transmission is 92 %.

Sec. 4.1 Derivation of Terminal V. I Relations 95
Example 4.2
Suppose that a radial line is terminated in its characteristic impedance Ze' Find the
driving-point impedance Vd II, the voltage "gain" 1Y;1/1V1 1, the current gain IINIIII,
the complex power gain -5 2d5 12 , and the real power efficienCY-P21/ P12 .
Solution If the line is terminated in Z" then V2 = Z,12 and (4.10) becomes
Yj = Y;( cosh yf + sinh yf) = V2erl = V2eal ej~1
II = licosh yf + sinh yf) = herl = 12eolej~1
Thus
VJ Y;
I; = 1; = Z,
and we see that the driving-point impedance is ZC' From the first equation we can
calculate
IY;I
1"\1,1
1
= IVI2 eae => -IYjI = e- ae
From the second equation we find that

1121 = e- ol
1111
Noting the reference direction for 12, the complex power gain may be calculat-
ed as follows:
-521 = Y;/f = Vle-aee-~IIte-aeej~e
= S12 e - 201
Thus
-521 -2al
-=e
512
Alternatively, we may observe that
VI = Zefl => V1!t = Z,III12
while
Thus
Finally, since a is real, we have

p
Example 4.3
Repeat Example 4.2 for the case of a lossless line. In addition, find Z" 'Y, and P12'
Solution In a lossless line r = g = O. Thus we find that .
where
L= et = total inductance of the line

c = Cc = total capacitance of the line
Z, is seen to be a real quantity. Next, we find that
'Y = VzY = V jwljwc = jwYk

This is a purely imaginary number. We see that in the description 'Y = a + j (3,
a = 0, and (3 = wVlc. Since a = 0, all the ratios calculated in Example 4.2
are unity. Thus
Finally, liz = Re V; Ii' = Re Z,11112 = Z,11112 since Z, in this case is purely real. An al-
ternate expression based on 11 = V;/ Z, is frequently more useful:
A comment on this last result in Example 4.3: Frequently, in the case of

a lossless line, the terminology surge impedance is used for Z, instead of char-
acteristic impedance. A lossless line operating at its nominal voltage, terminated
in its surge impedance Ze, is said to be surge impedance loaded (SIL). The trans-
mitted per phase power in this case is designated PS1L ' Using this notation, we see
that the per phase power transmitted under surge impedance loading is
(4.11)
Multiplying by 3, the corresponding three-phase power is given bya similar expres-

sion, P§fL :: IVPI2jZ" where Ivi11is the line-line voltage magnitude.
Sec. 4.2 Waves on Transmission Lines 97
4.2 WAVES ON TRANSMISSION LINES
The terms propagation constant and characteristic impedance are part of a very use-
ful description of the transmission line in terms of incident and reflected waves. We
can introduce the idea by looking at kje1X and k 2e- 1X , the two voltage components in
(4.5), whose sum is the phasor V evaluated x meters from the right terminal of the line.
These voltage components have the following interpretation. The first term describes
a voltage wave traveling to the right (incident wave); the second term describes a
voltage wave traveling to the left (reflected wave). We may see this by writing
'Y ~ a + j f3, where a ;::: 0 is called the attenuation constant and f3 is called the phase
constant. Substituting for 'Y in (4.5) and finding the instantaneous voltage as a func-
tion of t and x gives us
v(t, x) == V2 Re k eax ei(wt+flx) + V2 Re k2e- ax ei(wt-flx)
j
(4.12)
== Vj(t, x) + V2(t, x)
Neglecting a for the moment (small in any case) and considering V2(t, x), we see that
for fixed x, V2 is a sinusoidal function of t; for fixed t, Vz is a sinusoidal function of x.
Suppose that as t increases we look at (scan) the voltage V2 at points x that also
increase in accordance with the formula
wt - f3x = constant
In this case Vz remains constant! We are thus looking at a fixed point on a voltage
wave that is traveling to the left with a velocity
dx w w
dt f3 1m v;y
The reason the wave is traveling to the left is that, from Figure 4.1, increasing x means
moving from right to left. The effect of the neglected term e- ax is to attenuate the
wave as it moves to the left. This wave is called the reflected wave.
A similar interpretation holds for Vj(x) as an incident wave moving to the right.
From (4.12) we can deduce that if the line is of infinite length, and a > 0, there is no
reflected wave. For an infinite line, from (4.10) we can verify that the driving-point
impedance of the line is Ze- We can deduce that a line of finite length terminated in
Zc also has a driving-point impedance Zc and no reflected wave.
The importance of the interpretation of (4.5) in terms of incident and re-
flected waves lies in the application to electromagnetic transients arising from
lightning strokes and switching. Although this case is more complicated than the
steady-state case (we must deal with partial rather than ordinary differential equa-
tions), the results can be interpreted once again in terms of incident and reflect-
ed waves.
We mention one result of such a treatment. If an incident lightning voltage
pulse (or surge) traveling down a line hits the open-circuited end of the line (or
an open switch), there will be a reflected wave generated such that the voltage at
the line termination will approximately double. In designing the insulation for
transmission lines and equipment connected to it (such as transformers), it is vitally
important to take this doubling into account!
l.3 TRANSMISSION MATRIX
Section 4.2 was a digression from our main interest in the relationships between steady-
state terminal voltages and currents. Considering (4.10), we note that it is in the form
VI = AVi + BI2
(4.13)
where
A = coshyf B == Zc sinh 'Yf
C ~ sinh'Yf D = cosh 'Yf

(4.14)
c
Note: If 'Y is complex, A, B, C, and D also are complex.

The A, B, C, D parameters are called transmission parameters. The matrix
T [~ ~] (4.15)
is called a transmission matrix or chain matrix. By direct calculation det

T == AD - BC == cosh2 'Yf - sinh 2 'Yf == 1. Thus, the inverse exists and in fact is
T- 1 == [_~ -~] (4.16)
The advantage of the transmission-matrix description is that the T matrix for a

cascade of two-ports is the product of individual T matrices. For exa)l.ple, in Figure
4.2 we find that
which indicates that the correct transmission matrix for the cascade is
(4.17)
II 12 I)
+ +
+
TI V1 12
- Figure 4.2 Cascade con-
"
nection.
r!
I Sec. 4.4 Lumped-Circuit Equivalent 99
The result, that det T :: 1, holds in general for two-port networks composed of
(linear time-invariant) resistors, capacitors, inductors, coupled inductors, and trans-
formers. This provides a useful check of analytical or numerical work.
4.4 LUMPED·CIRCUIT EQUIVALENT
We next wish to derive a lumped-circuit equivalent for the transmission line. We will
find a TI-equivalent circuit that has the same A, B, C, D parameters as the transmis-
sion line [i.e., the A, B, C, D parameters given in (4.14)]. We note that aT-equivalent
circuit may also be derived. In either case, for electrical engineers there are many ad-
vantages to the circuit representation. Among these is a better sense of the physical
behavior of the line.
We want to pick Z' and Y' so that the circuit in Figure 4.3 has the same T ma-
trix as in (4.15). To find the T matrix for the circuit we can write KVL and KCL
equations attempting ultimately to relate VI and I j to Vi and 12 , This is illustrated
in the following calculation.
VI :: V2 + Z'(I2 + ~'v2)
(4.18)
Z'Y') V + Z'I
:: ( 1 + -2- 2 2
(4.19)
Z'Y') V + ( 1 + -2-
= Y' ( 1 + -4- Z'Y') 12
2
In (4.19) we used (4.18) to eliminate Vj • From (4.18) and (4.19) we see that the A,
B, C, and D parameters for the circuit are
Z'Y'
A =1+ B =Z'
2
(4.20)
C Y'(l +Z:') D =1 +
Z'Y'
2
II
+ +
Figure 4.3 ll-equivalent circuit.

p
Equating the B parameters in (4.20) and (4.14) and making some substitutions, we get
Z' = Z sinhyf =
C Ii Y
sinh yf
-sinhyf = z f - -
yf
=
sinh yf
Z--
yf
(4.21)
where Z g, zf is the total series impedance of line. We note that for Iyl « 1, which
is often the case for power lines, (sinh yf)/'Yf '" 1, and in this case it is useful to view
(sinh yf)hf as a correction factor that multiplies the total series impedance of the line
to give Z' exactly. If the exact value is not needed, we may use Z' '" Z.
Equating the A parameters in (4.20) and (4.14), we get
Z'y'
1 + -2- "" coshyf (4.22)
Using (4.21) and solving for Y'/2, we get

cosh yf - 1 1
Y'
-.-:...-- =- tanh -yf (4.23)
2 Zc sinh yf Zc 2
The trigonometric identity in (4.23) can be checked as follows:
cosh ye - 1 e1C + e- 1C - 2 (e ye/2 - e- yC /2)?
sinh yf . eye - e -ye (e 1e/2 + e-yC/2)(eye/2 - e -ye/2)
e1e/2 - e- ye/2 yf
----=tanh-
e1e/2 + e- 1e/2 2
I We can derive an alternative expression for (4.23) as follows:
"
1 1 y yf Y
Zc = VJY = v;y = yf = yf (4.24)
where Y g, yf is the total line-neutral admittance of line. Then

Y' = l:: tanh( yf/2) (4.25)
2 2 yf/2
Note that for lye I « 1, (tanh yf/2)/(ye/2) '" 1 => Y'/2 '" Y/2. As in the case of
(4.21), it is useful to think of (tanh yf/2)/( yf/2) as a correction factor (close to 1) that
multiplies the total line-neutral admittance of the line to give Y' exactly. And Y' '" Y.
Now that Z and Y have been defined, it is useful to note the following alterna-
tive expressions for Zc and yf.
Zc=Ji=J¥e=~ (4.26)
and
yf = vrye = Vzf yf = vZY (4.27)

Sec. 4.5 Simplified Models 101
Example 4.4
Find the TI-equivalent circuit for the transmission line described in Example 4.1.
Solution In Example 4.1 we have already calculated Z, and sinh "If; thus from (4.21),
Z' = Z, sinh "If = 387.3 /-6.04° X 0.452 /84.4° = 175.06 /78.35°
To emphasize the point concerning correction factors, we can also use an alternative
calculation:
sinh "If
Z' = Z -----::;e = 181.57 /77.9° X 0.9642 /0.45° = 175.07 /78.35°
Here the correction factor is 0.9642 /O.4SO, which is reasonably close to 1.0. Similar-
ly, using (4.23) we get
Y'
2" 6
= 614.57 X 10- /89.8° mho
For comparison we note that
"2Y = 605.25 X 10- 6 L2! mho

is a reasonably good approximation to Y'/2. Now that we have calculated Z' and Y'/2,
the TI-equivalent circuit is specified.
Example 4.4 indicates the possibility of simplifying the transmission-line model

by using Z instead of Z' and Y/2 instead of Y'/2. We consider this question in the next
section.
4.5 SIMPLIFIED MODELS
The circuit in Figure 4.3 is equivalent to the equations given in (4.10). Sometimes it
is more convenient to use one representation over the other, but either may be used
to give the exact relationships between the terminal voltages and currents of a trans-
mission line. For a long line the use of the exact circuit and/or equations is indicat-
ed. However, for medium-length lines, it turns out that the circuit and equations may
be greatly simplified. Thus, from (421) and (425) we can see that if Iyfl « 1, we can
replace Z' by Z, and Y' by Y In this case the circuit elements in Figure 4.3 may be
found without the calculation of the correction factors. For so-called short lines, with
Y small, we can even leave out the shunting elements; thus, we obtain a very simple
model.
Experience indicates the following classification of lines to be reasonable.
Long line (f > 150 mi, approximately): Use the TI-equivalent circuit model
with Z' and Y'/2 given by (421) and (4.23). Of course, instead of the circuit
model we can use (4.10).
Medium-length line (50 < e < 150 mi, approximately): Use the circuit model
with Z and Y/2 instead of Z' and Y'/2, where Z = ze and Y = yeo This is called
the nominal IT-equivalent circuit. This means that Z = R + jwL = total series
impedance of the line, where R = the total per phase resistance of the line, and
L = the total per phase inductance of the line calculated using the equations de-
rived in Chapter 3. Y = - jwC = total shunt admittance of the line, where
C = the total per phase shunt capacitance to neutral of the line calculated using
the equations derived in Chapter 3. The IT-equivalent circuit consists of half the
shunt admittance Y/2, at each end, and the series impedance Z in the center.
Short line (e < 50 mi, approximately): Same as the medium-length line except
that we neglect Y/2.
Example 4.5
Consider the receiving-end voltage of a lossless open-circuited line and compare the
results by use of the three models. Vi is a fixed voltage.
Solution By "open circuited" we mean 12 = O. By "lossless" we mean a = 0, or equiv-
alently,), = j {J.
Modell: Long-line model. It is easiest to use (4.10) rather than the circuit model,
and we find that
V] = V2 cosh ')'e = V2 cos {Jf
Model 2: Medium-length line model. Using the nominal n-equivalent circuit,
we get
The terms in parentheses are seen to be the first two terms in the series expan-
~~~~ ~
Model 3: Short-line model. We get
VI = V2
Thus, it appears we have retained only the first term in the series expansion of
cos {Je and have completely lost the property observed in the first two models-that
the voltage at the (open) receiving end is higher than at the sending end, for small {Je.
Let us compare these models as they predict Vi for different length lines. A fig-
ure of {3 = 0.002 radlmi is representative for a 60-Hz open-wire line. For a 50-mi line,
{3C "" 0.1 rad and thus
Modell::} V\ = 0.995004V2
Model 2::} V] = 0.995000Vz
Model 3::} VI = V2
Sec. 4.6 Complex Power Transmission (Short Line) 103
The errors in calculating V2 are certainly negligible in using the simpler models.
But consider a 200-mi line, f3f! "" 0.4. .
Modell=} VI = 0.921 V1
Model 2 =} VI = 0.920Vl
Model 3 =} V\ = V1
The differences between models 1 and 2 are still negligible, but there is about an 8%
error in using the short-line model.
Finally, consider a 600-mi line, f3f! "" 1.2.
Modell=} VI = 0.362V2
Model 2 =} VI = 0.280V2
Model 3 =} VI = Vz
The difference between the exact (long-line) model and the nominal rT-equivalent
model is significant. The short-line model is totally inaccurate.
4.6 COMPLEX POWER TRANSMISSION (SHORT LINE)
In this section we consider the problem of complex power transmission using the
short-line model. As seen in this section, the derivation of the complex power ex-
pression involves an application of the method of per phase analysis introduced in
Chapter 2. We consider the simple 3<jJ balanced system shown in Figure 4.4
We wish to consider only the power transferred by the transmission line. As-
sume that the generators maintain certain 3<jJ voltages at buses 1 and 2, and these are
known. In our analysis we can replace these voltages by sources. We model each
phase of the short transmission line by a series RL circuit. We are then led to the cir-
cuit model in Figure 4.5. Since the system is balanced, we can use per phase analy-
sis. Figure 4.6 shows the per phase circuit and labels certain quantities of interest. To
simplify the notation the phase a subscript has been dropped. S12 is the (phase a)
complex power from bus 1 to the transmission line connected to bus 2. A similar
definition holds for S21' We note that the corresponding three-phase quantities may
Bus 1 Bus 2
Short
transmission
line Figure 4.4 One·line diagram.
104 Transmission·Line Modeling Chap, 4
b'
R L
Figure 4.5 Circuit model.
be obtained by simply multiplying by 3. We next obtain expressions for Sl2 and SZI
in terms of VI ,v2, and Z = R + j wL. Assume thefollowing notation.
VI = IVjlei8, l{ = IVzle i8,
(4.28)
Z = IZle ill 812 ~ 81 - 8z
(4.29)
and
Iv;t2 '/2 - --elu,.e
S = -elu,. IVzlIVjI '12 -8112
(4.30)
21 IZI IZI
Although there is perfect symmetry between (4.29) and (4.30), it is helpful to de·
scribe bus 1 as sending power to bus 2. The power sent by VI (or bus 1) is given by
(4.29). The power received by Vz (or bus 2) is given by
:jf
IVSl z '/2 IVSIIVjI, 12 -8
-S = --elL!=. + --elL!=.e 112 (4.31)
21 IZI IZI
For a given transmission line (Z fixed) the complex power sent or received de·
pends on IVjI, IV21, and 812, From the point of view of control, IVjI is affected most di·
rectly by the field current in generator 1, IVSI by the field current in generator 2, and
Figure 4.6 Per phase circuit.

Sec. 4.6 Complex Power Transmission (Short line) 105
812 by the difference in mechanical power inputs to the two generators. To increase
812 we can increase the mechanical power into generator 1 while decreasing the me-
chanical power into generator 2.
Under normal operation IViI and IV21are kept within fairly strict limits at gen-
erator buses while 812 varies considerably. It is of interest, therefore, to consider
(4.29) and (4.31) as a function of 812 with lVII, IVzI, and Z fixed as parameters. With
this objective in mind we get (4.29) and (4.31) in the form
S12 = CI - Be j012 (4.32)
-521 = C2 + Be- jOll
(4.33)
where
C2 = Ivi
--eJu"
'IZ
IZI
It is useful to graph the dependence of 512 and -521 on 812 , As 812 is varied,
(4.32) and (4.33) show that 512 and -521 trace out circles in the complex plane. These
S12 and - S21 circles are called sending-end circles and receiving-end circles, respec-
tively. The center of the sending-end circle is CI and that of the receiving-end circle
is C2 . Both circles have the same radius IBI. If 812 = 0, then, in the complex plane,
CI, C2 , and B are collinear. These considerations indicate the construction shown in
Figure 4.7. Concerning the graphs, we make the following comments:
1. The circles do not intersect if IVi I 1V21.*'

2. As 812 increases from zero, the active power sent and received increases. (The
active power sent is greater than that received by the amount of the losses in the
transmission line.) From the geometry of the graphs we note there is an "ulti-
mate" limit to the active power received, which occurs for 812 = !!:., and a sim-
ilar limit for the active power sent, which occurs for 812 = 180 0 - !!:.. These
ultimate active powers depend on Z, lVii, and IV21. In fact, as we will see in
Section 4.9, more restrictive limits prevail under normal operating conditions.
3. For most lines the resistance is small compared to the inductance. Assume,
then, as an approximation, that R = 0 and Z = jX. In this case there are no
transmission-line losses, and the active power sent equals the active power re-
ceived. In fact, from (4.29), (4.30), or Figure 4.7,
IVIIIV21 .
112 = :- PzI = -X sm 812 (4.34)
IVI12 IVIIIVzI
Q12 = X - -X cos8J2 (4.35)
IVzl2 1V 1ViI
Q21 == X - X2 cos 812 (4.36)
In this case the ultimate transmission capability is IVillVzV X.

T
I
I
Complex plane
Both circles have radius

I Vll I v2 1
IHI = -I-Z-I-
Figure 4.7 Power circle diagram.
4. If an attempt is made to increase 812 beyond the ultimate trans'llission capabil-

ity, "synchronism" between the two generators is lost; we will be discussing this
phenomenon in Chapter 14. If the two generators lose synchronism or "fall
out of step," they no longer generate voltages of the same frequency. Although
the generators are physically connected by the transmission line, effective ex-
change of power ceases. We will consider a case in Example 4.6.
5. How can the ultimate transmission capability be increased in an effort to
strengthen the tie between buses 1 and 2? The answer may be inferred from
(4.34). We can increase the voltage levels (i.e., 1V1 and IVzl) and decrease X In
1
Chapter 3 we have considered ways to decrease the line inductance by careful

line design. Another method is to decrease the series reactance by insertion of
series capacitors. This latter process is called series compensation.
6. Under normal operating conditions for high voltage lines, IV11 "'" IV;I ,
I!:.. "'" 90°, and e12 typically is small, less than approximately 10°. In that case
Sec. 4.6 Complex Power Transmission [Short Line) 107
there is reasonably good decoupling between the control of the flow of ac-
tive versus reactive power; active-power flow couples strongly with 812 , and
reactive-power flow couples strongly with IVII - IV21. The easiest way to
see this is to do a sensitivity analysis using (4.34) to (4.36). Evaluate the
various partial derivatives with respect to 812 and lVII, IV21to establish the
result claimed.
Exercise 1. Suppose in Figure 4.4 that the bus 2 voltages are zero because of a 3cfJ
short circuit. Find S12 using the power circle diagram. Does the result make sense
physically?
Exercise 2. Prove the statement made in comment 1. Hint: If IV!I '* IV;I, then
(IV!I - IV21f > O.
Example 4.6
Suppose that the two 3¢ generators in Figure 4.5 are "out of step." Assume that the
voltages at buses 1 and 2 are balanced with the phase a voltages given by
VI(I) = Yz IVII cos (Wit + en

V2(t) = Yz IV21cos (wat + e~)
Assume that WI '" Wa and find an expression for the active power transmitted down an
approximately lossless line.
Solntion With WI '" Wa it is useful to write
VI(I) = YzIViI cos [(wal + e~ + (WI - wo)t]
and to consider VI(I) to be a sinusoid of frequency Wo and a slowly varying phase
8~ + (WI - wo)t. Assuming that the phase varies slowly enough, we can still use sinu-
soidal steady-state analysis as an approximation, treating the phase as a parameter.
As the phase varies, we move along a continuum of steady-state solution values. This
is an example of so-called pseudo-steady-state analysis. Applied to our problem we use
(4.34) with el2 = el - 82 = e~ + (WI - Walt - e~ and get a short-term active power
that varies with time.
We note that the long-term average of active power is zero. This mode of opera-
tion is not only ineffective but is highly undesirable since it is accompanied by very
large line currents. In practice, protective devices would remove the "out of step"
generator.
10S Transmission-Une Modeling Chap. 4
Example 4.7
For a balanced three-phase transmission line with Z = 1 ~,II12 = 10°,find S!2 and
-S2! for
(a) IV!I = IV21= 1.0

(b) IV!I = 1.1, IV2 1 = 0.9
We note that the use of voltages with numerical values such as 1.0,1.1, or 0.9 anticipates
a normalization or scaling, to be introduced in Chapter 5.
Solution In getting numerical results it is generally easier to use (4.29) and (4.31)
rather than the power circle diagram. Using the formulas, we find the following results.
(a) With IV)I = 1V21= L

S12 = 1 L§r - 1/95° = 0.1743
-52) = -1/85° + 1 L7r = 0.1717 - jO.0303
In particular, we note that Q12 = 0 and -Q2) = -0.0303.
(b) With IV)I = 1.1, 1V21 = 0.9,
512 = 1.21 ~ - 0.99/95° = 0.1917 + jO.2192
-521 = -0.81 L§r + 0.99 /75° = 0.1856 + j0.1493
We note that P)2 has not changed much but Q12 and -Q2) have changed con-
siderably from the values in part (a).
Exampie4.8
For the system shown in Figure E4.8(a), all quantities are per phase values.
I
I,
SDl =I Figure E4.S(aJ
(a) Pick QG2 so that IV21= 1.

(b) In this case, what is LJ0?
(c) If QG2 = 0, can we supply the load 5D2 ?
(d) If yes, what is V1?
r Sec. 4.6 Complex Power Transmission (Short Line) 109
Solution In parts (a) and (b) we can use (4.34) to (4.36) or the power circle diagram
I shown in Figure 4.7. We will use the equations. Since SD2 = 1 isreal while Qcz is
purely imaginary, it is clear that P1Z = - P21 = 1. Then, using (4.34),
I
1 Thus 012 = 30° and L!]= -30°. Using (4.36), we obtain
I
Ivi IVi IIV11
Qcz = Q2! = X - ------x- cos 012 = 2 - 2 cos 30° = 0.268
Note that QC2 > 0 is consistent with a capacitor source.

For parts (c) and (d), Figure 4.7 offers some advantages over using equations.
If Qcz = 0, then -S2! = SD2 = 1. The question is, can we find a IViI such that the
receiving-end circle passes through the point -SZI = 1 in the complex plane for some
012? In geometric terms the requirements are as shown in Figure E4.8(b). It may
be seen that a solution can be found if
Figure E4.8(bJ
has a real solution for IV21. Let x ~ 1V21z; then 4xz - 4x + 1 = 0 has a real solution
x = 1/2. Thus IVzl = l/Yz. From the geometry of the figure we also find that
e12 = 45°. Hence, we can supply the load at a voltage V2 = 0.707 /-45°.
We notice the improvement in voltage magnitude in (a) versus (c), which can be
attributed to the injection of reactive power by the capacitor source at bus 2. In fact,
capacitors are frequently used to boost voltage.
'~" " ".f"" " "
Transmission-Line Modeling Chap. 4 1f
110
4.7 COMPLEX POWER TRANSMISSION [SHORT

RADIAL LINE)
In Section 4.6 we considered the case of a line with generators at both ends. In this case
we can assume voltage maintenance or "support" at both ends. Now we will consider
the case of a radial line; at the near end there is voltage support, but at the far end of
the line there is a complex power load without a generator or capacitor bank to help
maintain the voltage. We wish to study how the voltage at the far end of the line varies
with load. The per phase diagram for the case to be considered is shown in Figure 4.8.
We will assume that the load "draws" complex power at a fixed power factor.
In this case it is convenient to express SD as follows:
SD = "2/* = 1V211/1ei <j>
= 1V211/1 (cos c/> + j sin c/» (4.37)

=PD(l + jf3)
Here c/> = L!:1 - !l.., f3 = tan C/>, and PF = cos c/>. Thus, as we vary the load, PD
varies, with f3 a parameter.
Next, we use (4.34) and (4.36):
IV) 11"21 .
PD = 112 = Xsmli12 (4.38)
1"212 1"211V)1
QD = -Q21 = -- + --cos Ii12 (4.39)
X X
We next eliminate 1i12 by using COS2 1i 12 + sin2 1i 12 = 1 and get
(f3Eb + li7 = (IV2~V)7 - pb (4.40)
A rearrangement gives the quadratic equation in Ivi.

Ivl + (2f3PDX - 1V112)1"212 + (1 + f3 2)P'8X2 = 0 (4.41)
(4.42)
We note the presence of multiple solutions.
Z = jX
Figure 4.8 Per phase circuit.

Sec. 4.7 Complex Power Transmission (Short Radial Line) 111
Example 4.9
For the system of Figure 4.8 assume that IV!I = 1 and X = 0.5. Use (4.42) to find IV'; I
as a function of PD for load power factors of 1.0, 0.97 leading and 0.97 lagging.
Solution Using the,values provided, we get
2 1 - {3PD ± [1 - PD(PD+ 2{3)j1/2

IV';I = 2
With PF = 1 we get ¢ = 0, {3 = tan ¢ = O. With PF = 0.97 leading,

¢ = -14.07°,{3 = -0.25. With PF = 0.97 lagging, ¢ = 14.07",{3 = 0.25. Plots of
IV';I versus PD are given in Figure E4.9 for the three power factors. We note the
beneficial effect of a leading power factor load in maintaining the voltage. In all cases,
however, there is a point at which voltage "collapse" occurs. For lagging power factor
loads this may occur for power levels within normal operating limits of the transmis-
sion line.
l.0r-~~==------
0.8
~ 0.6
0.4
0.2
Figure E4.9
Example 4.9 emphasizes the importance of supplying reactive power at the con-
sumer's location rather than attempting to supply from a great distance.
4.8 COMPLEX POWER TRANSMISSION (LONG OR

MEDIUM LINE)
In Section 4.6 we considered the problem of complex power transmission using

a short line model. Let us see what modifications are necessary in the analysis
using the long- or medium-length line model of Section 4.5. We consider the
n-equivalent circuit in Figure 4.9.
The easiest way to find S)2 is to observe the following fact, based on conserva-
tion of power. The sending-end power, S12, is equal to the power consumed in Y,/2
plus the power supplied to the rest of the network through the terminals a' n. This lat-
ter power depends only on the current and voltage at the terminals a'n, and therefore
on V;, V;, and 2'. In fact, we have already considered this case in Section 4.6 and can
use (4.29) with only the substitution of 2' for Z. Thus adding the contributions,
Y'*
S2 = -IV;)I
2 1\I;l 1V;1IV;1
+ - - - - ei 8 12 (4.43)
1 2 2'* 2'*
where the first term is the power consumed in Y'/2 and the last two terms are from
(4.29). By the same technique, the received power, -S2), is equal to the power re-
ceived from the network through the terminals a"n minus the power consumed in
(the right hand) Y,/2. Using (4.31), we get for the received power
Y'* 2 Ivi IVlIIV;I_8

-s21 = --IV
2 2
1- -
2'*
+- -e J
2'*
12 (4.44)
We see that, except for the additional constant terms, (4.43) has the same form as
(4.29), and (4.44) has the same form as (4.31). The additional constant terms are rel-
atively small in the usual case.
+ +
Figure 4.9 Complex power transmission.

Sec. 4.9 Power-Handling Capability of Lines 113
Q
t
I
I
Complex plane
y'* 1
- -,' I V1 I - ~-----o..ll iVdlV,1
radii=-
Iz'l
Figure 4.10 Power circle diagram.
Thus, the appearance of the power circle diagram usually changes only a little.
The new power circle diagram is shown in Figure 4.10. The main change is that the
centers of the circles are shifted as shown. Note: With Y' almost purely reactive, the
shift is approximately vertical; thus the active power transfer is unaffected. This con-
clusion is consistent with the physical setup as well. It appears that the general con-
clusions based on the simpler model are still valid, although we can expect some
numerical discrepancies.
Exercise 3. Using the short-line approximation, we showed that for IViI '* IV;I
the power circles do not intersect. Is this also true in the present case?
4.9 POWER·HANDLING CAPABILITY OF LINES
Power lines are limited in their ability to deliver power. The two most important
limits can be understood by considering thermal effects and stability.
When current flows in conductors, there are ]2R losses and heat is generated.
This loss of power reduces transmission efficiency, a factor we consider in Chapter 11.
Of more consequence to the present discussion, the heat generated by line losses also
causes a temperature rise. Since line temperature of overhead lines must be kept
within safe limits to prevent excessive line sag between transmission towers (minimum
ground clearances must be maintained) and to prevent irreversible stretching (at
around 1000 q, this imposes limitations on the maximum safe current a line can carry.
Clearly, this limit depends on the line design (conductor size and geometry, spacing
between towers, etc.) and operating conditions (ambierit temperature, wind velocity,
etc.). The technique of bundling, which we discussed in Chapter 3 as a means of re-
ducing line inductance and electrostatic stress, also has a beneficial effect here. The
greater spacing between subconductors and the increased surface area help in heat
dissipation with an accompanying improvement in allowable safe current levels.
We note that for cables there are even more stringent therrnallimits because of
the more limited possibilities for heat transfer. If the cable gets too hot, the insula-
tion will begin to deteriorate and may fail in time.
In either case thermal considerations impose a current-handling limitation for
a given line. A line has a current "rating," which provides for safe operation. Oper-
ation above the line rating (particularly for an extended period of time) is not rec-
ommended.
We also find that lines are designed for operation at a given voltage level.
The choice of conductor size and geometry, spacing between phases, and selection
of insulations all are appropriate for the intended voltage level. In addition, the
transmission system is operated so as to keep transmission-line voltages reason-
ably close to the nominal values; the reason for this is the desirability (and statu-
tory requirement) that the voltage at the consumer's location be held within
reasonable bounds.
With limitations on maximum current and voltage there is a corresponding
limitation on the MVA that can safely be transmitted, and hence on the MW as
well. Thus we might have a 345-kV transmission line (345-kV line-line) with a
thermal rating of 1600 MVA (three-phase). At 100% power factor it could trans-
mit 1600 MW as well; since at other power factors its MW capability is reduced,
the 1600-MW figure stands as a uniform limitation on active power transmission.
Finally, it should be pointed out that the thermal limitations on tenpinating equip-
ment (such as transformers) may be more restrictive than those p~taining to the
line itself.
The reader may recall that we discussed another limitation on power-handling
capability in Section 4.6. In the case of a short lossless line with voltage support at
both ends, we found an ultimate transmission capability corresponding to a power
angle 812 = 90°. In fact, to have reasonable expectations of maintaining synchronism
(i.e., stability), 812 should be more strictly limited to maximum values in the neigh-
borhood of 40° to 50°. In this case the "stability" limit is perhaps 65 to 75% of the
ultimate transmission capability. It turns out that for short lines the power-handling
capability is set by thermal limits rather than the stability limit.
For long lines the reverse is true. We will now consider the stability limit for long
lines. For simplicity assume a lossless line with equal voltage magnitudes at each
end. In the lossless case, as was shown in Example 4.3, Zc = VLjC is real
Sec. 4.9 Power-Handling Capability of Lines 115
and y = a + jf3 = jf3 is a purely imaginary number. We also calculate Y' and Z'
for this case.
, tanh (yf/2) . tan f3f/2

Y = Y yf/2 = ]We !3i72 (4.45)
Z' = Zc sinh yf = j Zc sin f3f (4.46)
Thus, we see that Y' is the admittance of a pure capacitance and Z' is the impedance
of a pure inductance. It makes sense since the line is assumed lossless!
Next, we calculate the active power transmitted. From (4.43) and (4.44), we
find that P12 = - P21 and
1 IV 12 sin 8
12
lh = ---'-----'- (4.47)
Zc sin f3f
where we have used the fact that Y' and Z' are purely imaginary.
Using the definition of PSIL from (4.11) in (4.47), we get
sin 812
112 = PsIL--:--f3 0 (4.48)
sm ~
We note that, for fixed 812 , as line length is increased, f3f increases and P12 decreas-
es. A particularly severe restriction occurs for very long lines with f3f = 11"/2. In this
case even if we maximize active power flow by picking 812 = 11"/2, we cannot exceed
P12 = PS1L ' In practice we can only realize a fraction of the PSIL value if 812 is kept
within safe limits. The reader should now be in a position to interpret the P~tL fig-
ures given in the last line ofTable 3.1 in Section 3.10.
Finally, we note that in the lossless case, as shown in Example 4.3, f3 = w'\lk.
As noted in Section 3.8 Exercise 2, the product Ie is virtually constant for the (open-
wire) transmission lines we have been considering. Thus in (4.48), for fixed 812 , the
"drop off" of P12/ PSIL with length f is virtually the same for all (open-wire) trans-
mission lines.
Example 4.10
Assume that (3 = 0.002 rad/mil and e12 = 45°. Find PIZ/PSIL as a function of line
length.
Solution In (4.48), f3C is in radians. We will convert to degrees. Thus f3C =
O.ooze rad = 0.1146Co.
I?2
PslL = 0.707 sin 0.1146C
The stability limit is shown in Figure E4.l0. For comparison, a typical thermal
limit is also shown. We see that for short lines the thermal limit governs, whereas for
long lines the stability limit prevails.
I
,
I
Typical
. / thennallimit
--~--------------
Stability limit
(0 12 = 45°)
o
Line length (mi)
Figure E4.10
4.10 SUMMARY
We may summarize the results of the analysis by discussing the three IT-equivalent
circuits. The most accurate circuit involving the use of the elements Z' and Y,/2 is
recommended when dealing with (long) transmission lines of lengths greater than
approximately 150 mi; Z' is specified in (4.21) and Y,/2 is specified in (4.25). For
medium-length lines in the range of approximately 50 to 150 mi the simpler nominal
IT-equivalent circuit may be used instead. Here we replace Z' and Y,/2 by Z and
Y/2, where Z is the total series impedance (Z = zC) and Y is the total shunt admit-
tance (Y = yC). For a short line of length under about 50 mi, the shunt elements
may be neglected, making the circuit even simpler. We would like to draw attentioh
to the very simple final results of the analysis. Although we started with a complicated
,,"
~,
:
...•. ........................••...•.•....
Problems 117
circuit with distributed parameters (the 3rf> line), we were able to model this for per
phase analysis by one of three very simple IT-equivalent lumped circuits!
Alternatively, equations may be used. In particular, the long-line equation
(4.10) is frequently used. In working with networks in cascade, matrix operations in-
volving the ABeD param.eters (or transmission matrices) are very useful.
Finally, we note that thermal effects limit the power-handling capability of short-
and medium-length lines, whereas stability requirements impose the limitations on
1 long lines.
i
Problems
4.1. Given a 138-kV three-phase line with series impedance z = 0.17 + jO.790/mi and
shunt admittance y = j 5.4 X 10- 6 mho/mi, find the characteristic impedance Z" the
propagation constant y, the attenuation constant (I, and the phase constant {3.
4.2. Repeat Problem 4.1 for a 765 kV 34> line with series impedance 0.02 + )0.54 O/mi and
shunt admittance y = j7.8 X 10- 6 mho/mi. Compare with the values found in Problem
4.l.
4.3. Given a transmission line described by (4.10), we perform two tests and obtain the fol-
lowing results.
1. Open-circuit test (I2 = 0):
2. Short-circuit test (V2 = 0):
Find the characteristic impedance Zc and find yC.

4.4. Jack and Jill measure Zoe and Z" as in Problem 4.3. Jill says: "With this information
we can now calculate V; and 1[ in terms of V2 and 12 for any termination." Agree or
disagree with Jill and give your reasons.
4.5. Given a transmission line described by a total series impedance Z = zC = 20 + )80 and
a total shunt admittance Y = yf = j5 X 10-4 , find Z" ye, eyl, sinh ye, and cosh ye.
4.6. Suppose that the line in Problem 4.5 is terminated in its characteristic impedance (i.e.,
Vi 12 = Zc)· Find the efficiency of transmission in this case (i.e., find 1) = - P21/ P12 ).
4.7. Show that the driving-point impedance of an infinite transmission line is Zc, independent
of termination ZD' Assume that r, /, g, c > O. Note: The result also holds under the
weaker conditions r, /, c > 0, g = O.
4.8. The 138-kV 34> line described in Problem 4.1 is 150 mi long and is delivering 15 MW at
132 kV at a 100% power factor. Find the sending-end voltage and current, the power
angle 811 (i.e., & - &), and the transmission efficiency. Use the long-line model.
4.9. Specify the IT-equivalent circuit corresponding to the line in Problem 4.8.
118 Transmission-Line Modeling Chap. 4 1
4.10. Repeat Problem 4.8 when the power factor is 90% lagging.
4.11. Suppose that in Problem 4.8 the load is removed while the sending-end voltage magni-
tude is held constant at the value determined in the problem. Find the new receiving-
end voltage. Find the new sending-end current.
4.12. Repeat Problem 4.8 using the nominal D-equivalent circuit (i.e., the medium-length line
model).
4.13. Repeat Problem 4.8 using the short-line model.
4.14. Given a 200-mi transmission line with r = 0.1 !1jmi, I = 2.0 mHjmi, c = 0.01 JLF jmi,
and g = O,find D-equivalent circuits using (a) the long-line model, (b) the medium-line
(nominal D) model, and (c) the short-line model.
4.15. The 765-kV 3<jJ line described in Problem 4.2 is 400 mi long and delivers 100 MW at 750
kV at 95% power factor lagging. Find the sending-end voltage and current and the trans-
mission efficiency. Use the long-line model.
4.16. Suppose that the load in Problem 4.15 is removed while the sending-end voltage mag-
nitude is held constant. Find the receiving-end voltage and the sending-end current and
complex power into the transmission line.
4.17. Repeat Problem 4.15 using the nominal D-equivalent circuit.
4.18. Find the ABCD constants of the 150-mi line in Problem 4.8.
4.19. Find the ABCD constants of the 150-mi line in cascade with another identical 150-mil
line by using the transmission matrices of the 150-mi lines.
4.20. Using the nominal D-equivalent circuit, find an expression for the per phase complex
power consumed by the line in terms of VI> V2, Y, and Z.
4.21. To maintain a safe "margin" of stability, system designers have decided that the power
angle 1i12 for a particular transmission line can be no greater than 45°. We wish to trans-
mit 500 MW down a 300-mi line and need to pick a transmission-line voltage level. Con-
sider 138-,345-, and 765-kV lines. Which voltage level(s) would be suitable? As a first
approximation assume that IVII = IV; I and the lines are lossless. You can assume that
f3 = 0.002 radjmi in all three cases.
4.22. Neglect g and show that for r « wi the phase constant f3 "" wYk. This helps explain
the remarkable constancy of f3 for lines of varying geometry.
4.23. In Figure 4.23, assume that (I
IYjI = IVzI = 1
(a) For what nonzero 1i12 is S12 purely real?

(b) What is the maximum power, - PzI, that can be received by V2, and at what el2 does
this occur?
(c) When 1i12 = 85°, what is the active power loss in the line?
(d) For what 1i12 is - P21 = I?
-5 21 Figure P4.23
Problems 119
4.24 Suppose that we "compensate" the line in Problem 4.23 by inserting series capacitance.
The intent is to increase the ultimate power transmission capability. Suppose that
Zc = - jO.05. Repeat Problem 4.23(b) and compare results.
4.25 Suppose that we "overcompensate" the line in Problem 4.23 and make the total series re-
actance negative (capacitive). To be specific, suppose that Zc = - jO.2.
(a) Draw the power circle diagram in this case, labeling it carefully.
(b) For what 1112 is the received power - P21 = 1?
(c) Compare the result with that obtained in Problem 4.23( d). How do you explain the
(qualitative) difference?
4.26 Draw the power circle diagram in the case IVII = 1.05, 1V21= 0.95, Zline = 0.1 /85 0. Find
(a) P12max
(b) 1112 at which we get PI2max
(c) - P21max
(d) il I2 at which we get -P2lmax
(e) Active power loss in the line when 1112 = 100
4.27 In Figure P4.27, assume that
\-j=1[Q:
Zllne
Figure P4.27
Zline = 0.01 + j 0.1

SOl = 0.5 + jO.5
S02 = 0.5 + jO.5
Pick QG2 so that IVll = 1. In this case what are QGl, Sm, and LJ:1?
4.28 Repeat Example 4.9 for the case IVII = 1, load powerfactor = 1.0, and X = 0.4. Find IV21
versus PD'
4.29 Suppose that we describe the load in Figure 4.8 as an impedance ZL of variable magni-
tude IZLI but fixed&; in other words, a variable load of fixed power factor. For ex-
ample, we could be switching on electric lights. We are interested in how IV2 behaves as
1
we change IZLI. Assume that IVII = I, X = 0.1, and that ZL = (l/fL)Z2 for 0 ::; fL::; 1,
and plot IV 21 versus fL for three cases:
(a) Z 2= j 1.0 (inductive load)
(b) Z 2 = - j 1.0 (capacitive load)
(c) z2 = 1.0 (resistive load)
If we wish to maintain load voltages within narrow limits, are variable reactive loads a
problem?
4.30 A 3¢ transmission line connects buses 1 and 2. Model the line as shown in Figure 4.5 but
with R = O. Measurements at the bus 1 end indicate that the 3¢ line is carrying 500 MW
of active power and 50 MVA of reactive power. The volt~e magnitudes (line-line) are
500 kV at both buses. Assume that at bus 1, VI, = 500/V3 kV (i.e., phase angle is zero)
and find
(a) The magnitude and phase of Ila (see Figure 4.5)
(b) The phase difference between VI, and VZa
(c) The per phase reactance of the line
(d) The per phase (phase a) instantaneous power from bus 1 into line
(e) The per phase (phase a) instantaneous power from bus 2 into line
(f) The total three-phase instantaneous power into line from bus 1

This problem introduces a design exercise that wiLl be developed in steps through
the various chapters of this text book. The basic problem introduced in this chapter
consists of an existing transmission system that contains 161 kV and 69 kV trans-
mission lines which run through both urban and rural service territory. The existing
load at the various buses in the system is specified. The parameters of the existing
transmission lines in the system are also provided. The problem posed is to design
the transmission system to serve a new steel mill load and also determine if the ex-
isting transmission system needs to be upgraded to handle a 30% growth in the ex-
isting load. In the first step in the design, the only requirement is to s:ll9.Qs.~
appropria!~ condUctors-ano-coiioilclorspa0i-ngrtor11nmvo\iolfilgeTeve1s:an_cL.deo..~
.termIne the. corresporidinilirieirrfRe.cl~am~ters.--Inoolnfso;it·is··con-;enient
to use the MATLAB program developed i~"iJesign1Jfoblem D3ol. The problem in-
volves a cost analysis of the design. Hence, students and their instructors are en-
couraged to contact local electric utilities to obtain appropriate transmission-line
specifications and cost information. A sample of the costs and some transmission-line
configurations are provided in the statement of the problem.
l~~.d centers and the power sources of the Eagle PO'(1r System are~h9'TIl\
irFig. D4.l.L The figure is scaled based on the distances given in Tabl~D 4.1.2.
Note-the urban area of the system. Assume all roads run north-south or east-west.
System Bus Names and Loads
Buses 1-3 are power sources at 161 kV

Buses 4-8 are urban load buses
Buses 9-15 are rural load buses
Buses with loads under 30 MVA should be served at 69 kV and buses with loads
over SO MYA should be served at 161 kYo Other buses can be served at either voltage.
A base case system is provided. The details of the base case system are as follows.
There are 69kV-161kV 60MVA transformers at the Siskin and Crow buses.
Each of the buses is split into two parts. At Siskin, the high voltage side is labeled bus
r
I
Sec. 04.1 Design Exercise
I Owl o
121
Steel mill
14 Gull
Scale 1" =10.38 miles

--16IkV
----69kV 2 Swift
II Quail I
9 Siskin (161 kV)
: 17 (69 kV)
I ~
12 Heron
4 Lark [,----0--
8 Robin
~
10 Junco 0
I
I
I
I
d
7 Wren
SJay
6 Raven
I
I
I
I Urban area
I
I
I
CllS c,r,ow (,161 kV)
: 16 (69 kV) '--------,
I
I I 3 Parrot
1 I
0---------------- 1
13 Egret
Figure 04.1.1 Eagle Power System Transmission Map
9, while the low voltage side is labeled bus 17. At Crow, the high voltage side is
labeled bus 15, while the low voltage side is labeled bus 16. For future reference
~ecify that the transformers have leakage reactances of 34:5611 referre_dtothe
161kV side.--- ----.:----~--'
Task
You are asked to upgrade this base system design and obtain a minimum transmis-
sion system to serve the load and generation subject to the following specifications:
a. Provide sufficient capacity in the transmission lines and transformers for a 30%
growth in existing load.
122 Transmission-Line Modeling Chap. 4 T
TABLE D4.1.1 EXISTING LOADS AT
VARIOUS BUSES
Bus # Bus Name Load-MW Load-MVAr I
1 Owl
2 Swift
3 Parrot
4 Lark 60 10
5 Jay 100 30
6 Raven 80 15
7 Wren 90 20
8 Robin 40 5
9 Siskin 10 5
10 Junco 15 10
11 Quail 75 15
12 Heron 40 15
13 Egret 30 10
14 Gull 35 10
15 Crow .lQ 0
585 145
;I). A new steel mill with an estimated load of 40 MW at unity power factor is to
. be located as shown in Figure D4.1.1. Design a suitable transmission configu-
i ration to supply this new load.
! c. Transmission voltages of161 kV or 69 kV can be used. Bundled conductors are
i not to be used at these voltages.
i d. In the event of a single failure of a line, a transformer, or a power source, the sys-
I tern should continue to supply all the loads.
\ e. Calculate impedances of all the new transmission lines using the program de-
\ veloped in D3.l. The resistance of the lines should be calculat~ at 50°C. It is
\ common in several power flow programs to represent the line capacitance in
\ terms of the megavolt-amperes-reactive (MVAr) generated by the total capac-
\ itance or susceptance at rated voltage as shown in Table D4.1.2. This quantity
\.§hould be calculated for all new transmission lines.
f. Each power source (generator) should be connected to the rest of the system
by at least three 161 kV lines. Even if one line fails, the remaining two should
be capable of carrying the required load.
g. Seek a minimum cost design. Do not oversize conductors without justification.
h. The maximum number of available transformers is six.
Ii. It is unlikely that you can justify using the same conductor size at both 161 kV
i and 69 kY.
I
i j. Line routes should follow transmission line routing regulations (road right-of-
~ way).
TABLE D4.1.2 EXISTING TRANSMiSsioN LINE, PARAMETERS~ - . ~.,

- <- ~ .;,
,~ .:. ,-:;.
• - --
Bus# Bus# Bus Name Bus Name Miles Conductor R-fl X-fl BMVA1
1 9 Owl 161 Siskin 161 24.0 Drake 3.085 17.47 3.629

1 11 Owl 161 Quail 161 36.7 Drake 4.718 26.70 5.550
1 14 Owl 161 Gull 161 28.2 Drake 3.629 20.53 4.264
2 11 Swift 161 Quail 161 21.5 Drake 2.774 15.66 3.251
2 12 Swift 161 Heron 19L. 20.3 Drake 2.618 14.78 3.070
-I4~'-S-wifiI6i .
'.
2 (Jull161 24.0 Drake 3.085 17.47 3.629

3 6 Parrot 161 Raven 161 27.6 Drake 3.551 20.09 4.174
3 12 Parrot 161 Heron 161 27.6 Drake 3.551 20.09 4.174
3 15 Parrot 161 Crow 161 23.6 Drake 3.033 17.16 3.569
5 Lark 161 Jay 161
r.-4
14 9 Lark 161 Siskin 161
8.4
18.8
Dove
Drake
1.529
2.411
6.30
13.69
1.232
2.843 \
•5 6 Jay 161 Raven 161 10.8 Dove 1.970 8.09 1.584 ,
:5 7 Jay 161 Wren 161 6.0 Dove 1.089 4.48 .880 !
5 8 Jay 161 Robin 161 10.9 Dove 1.996 8.17 1.599
7 15 Wren 161 Crow 161 14.6 Drake 1.866 10.63 2.208
8 12 Robin 161 Heron 161 9.8 Drake 1.270 7.13 1.482
5 11 Jay 161 Quail 161 19.5 Drake 2.514 14.18 2.949
10 13 Junco 69 Egret 69 14.3 Hawk 3.033 10.15 .408
10 17 Junco 69 Siskin 69 16.2 Hawk 3.433 11.49 .462
13 16 Egret 69 Crow.69 21.9 Hawk 4.642 15.54 .624
IB MVA is the volt-amperes reactive generated by the total susceptance corresponding to line charg-
ing of the transmission line at the rated voltage.
In performing the above steps, the student will need to verify that the trans-
mission lines and transformers have sufficient current carrying capacity even under
various failure conditions. This can be done accurately using power flow calcula-
tions (programs) which will be introduced in Chapter 10. For now we will need to set-
tie for estimates. We will now consider a basis for making these estimates.
Since we are given the existing voltages and loads at each bus, we can easily
find the corresponding load currents. Increasing the loads by 30% increases the cur-
rents proportionally. With a particular bus current determined, the question is how
much of this current is supplied by each of the transmission lines connected to the bus.
We proceed intuitively. If bus 11, say, is dose to generator bus 1 and far from
generator bus 3, we expect more of the current to come from bus 1 than from bus 3.
Of course, by closeness we mean electrical.EQ~~n~~s(lowjmped.ans:e) rather than
geographical closeness, although the tw~~e related.
To quantify this idea, consider a particular bus. Suppose, in the case of bus 11, we cal-
culate the impedance, for all possible transmission paths between bus 11 and gener-
ator bus 1. This would include the paths (1-11), (1-14-2-11), (1-9-4-5-11), etc. We
then find the lowest impedance path. In practice some paths (with many segments)
can be quickly eliminated. If we end up with a relatively low impedance, bus 11 is
"close" to generator bus 1. Similarly, we find the lowest impedance path from gen-
erator bus 2 to bus 11, and from generator bus 3 to bus 11. As an approximation we
assume that the currents to bus 11 only flow in these three lowest impedance paths
and that they divide according to the parallel current rule. Thus, the lower the path
impedance the greater the fraction of the total load current that flows in that path.
The result seems reasonable at least qualitatively.
We do this for all the load buses. It may turn out that a particular transmission
line, say, (1-11) is also a segment of a lowest impedance path, say, from generator bus
1 to bus 5. In this case we add the two contributions (as scalars) to find the total cur-
rent in (1-11).
Data
A. Conductors available: the following conductors from Table AS.l in Appendix

S: Partridge, Hawk, Dove, Drake, and Cardinal.
B. Line costs (including the conductors, right-of-way, structures, shield wire, etc)
cost in $/mi.
161 kV 69kV
Conductor size Urban Rural Urban Rural
Partridge 109,000 75,000
Hawk 113,000 83,000
Dove 243,000 106,000 115,000 85,000
Drake 257,000 115,000 126,000 92,000
Cardinal 264,000 120,000
C. Substation costs: You may assume that the basic substation site exists at each bus
1-15. If you add a substation, then you must add to your costs the basic site
cost for the new substation. Do not add the site cost for buses 1-15.
Basic site cost: Land, fence, grading, structures $300,000 :I
Each line breaker and line termination: every line must have a circuit breaker
at each end of the line.
161 kV $95,000 per three-phase breaker

69 kV $48,000 per three-phase breaker
Transformer and associated equipment including circuit breakers 161169 kV:
60 MVA $900,000
120 MVA $1,000,000
180 MVA $1,100,000
L .......•.
:.-~'
T Sec. 04.1 Design Exercise
D. Capacitor costs:
125
Installation, associated equipment $60,000 per bank

Capacitors $300 f 100 kVAr
E. Each power source is rated 490 MW, with a minimum voltampere reactive limit
of -100 MVAr and a maximum volt ampere reactive limit of 250 MVAr.
F. The maximum current carrying capacity (or ampacity) of the allowable con-
ductors (see item A.) are: P.artridge-475A, Hawk-659A, Dove-726 A, Drake-
907 A, Cardinal-996A.
Some typical transmission line configurations at the 161 kV and at the 69 kV levels
are given in Figure D4.1.2. These are provided only as representative data. Stu-
dents and instructors are encouraged to get data for transmission line configurations
from electric utility companies in their geographical area.
-186"~-186"~
• •
1 96"
~
!= • •-
'1
55"
1- 78 .5"-
38'
69 kV 161kV
Figure D4.1.2 Typical transmission tower structures [69 kV and

161 kV)
Report Requirements
a. An executive summary: important information about the project that execu-

tives would want to know without reading the complete report. Include the
total number of lines at each voltage level, total line miles and cost at each volt-
age level, the total number of transformers and cost, the total number of new
substations and cost, and the total project cost. Add a brief summary of changes
from the base case system design. Make the executive summary a separate
document from the main report. Include project title and the names of all mem-
bers in your group.
"
·1··'<'················
128 Transmission-Line Modeling ehap. 4
b. Title page and table of contents.

c. A transmission map of the system with modifications showing the line routes
I
and voltages.
d. A one-line diagram of the system showing the bus, line, transformer, and load
connections.
e. Specifications of a representative transmission structure for each voltage level
to be used for conductor spacings and impedance calculation for the modified
transmission structures. Include a drawing of each structure. Cite the source
of the information about the structures.
f. Specifications of each line in the system: connection between which two buses,
voltage, length, conductor size, cost estimate, series impedance and shunt ca-
pacitive susceptance, and megavoltampere and current ratings. For the addition
of lines to supply the new steel mill load, show a sample impedance and sus-
ceptance calculation in an appendix.
g. Specification of each transformer in the system: location, size, cost.
b. Specification of each added substation: location, cost.
i. Number and title alI figures.
j. Number and title all tables.
k. Documentation of all changes made in the base case design.
I. Specification of the current cost estimate including all system changes.
m. List of references.
r
I
•
Transformer Modeling
and the Per Unit System
5.0 INTRODUCTION
The generation of power in large generating stations is at line voltages typically in the
range of 11 to 30 kY. Efficient and effective transmission over long distances re-
quires much higher voltages, typically line voltages of 138,230, or 345 kV, with a trend
toward higher voltages (765 kV) for really long distance transmission. Distribution
of power takes place at much lower voltages, typically at 2400 or 4160 V, which is
usually "stepped down" further to voltages of 440 V for typical industrial use or
240/120 V for commercial or residential use.
Power transformers provide a trouble-free and efficient means of shifting from
one voltage level to another. For this application they normally have a fixed voltage
ratio. Transformers can also be used for controlling voltage and/or power flow under
varying operating conditions. For this application they have a voltage ratio that can
be changed in small increments, on command. These transformers are called regu-
lating transformers.
In this chapter we consider the modeling of transformers for use in system stud-
ies. We then consider a normalization of system variables that greatly simplifies the
consideration of large systems in which there are many voltage levels. This normal-
ization is called per unit (p.u.) normalization, or conversion to the per unit system. We
start by considering a linear model of a single-phase transformer.
5.1 SINGLE·PHASE TRANSFORMER MODEL
A two-winding transformer is shown schematically in Figure 5.1. The diagram is in-

tended to illustrate the working principle of a transformer. In the actual physical
layout certain steps are taken to increase the magnetic coupling between the prima-
ry and secondary coils; the windings are either wound concentrically or are section-
alized and interleaved.
127
!,
128 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System' Chap. 5
Core
,..-------+---- ---".
I \
(-- -I i (- ---, 1 l - - 0 HI
J.-...;.I...;.I..;.I--I-----..;..I__i..
XI o---li....
+
1 --"!--HI...,I,-J14 i
I
i
I
+
: I
tCP/l CPI2 +
I I
I I
X2 0----1----4 I I I I I
t---
J I
- I
t
~
I
__",I
I
, __ _
,
I
\ I
.... -----~-------
Primary Secondary
winding winding
NI turns N2 turns
Figure 5.1 Transformer.
We assume that the magnetic fluxes can be split into three distinct com-
ponents. There is a mutual flux <Pm contained within the magnetic core that
links all the turns of the primary and secondary windings. There is a leakage
flux <Pll that is assumed to link only the primary circuit and, similarly, a sec-
ondary leakage flux <Pf2. These components of flux are shown schematically in
Figure 5.1.
We pick the reference direction for i l arbitrarily, then assign the reference di-
rection for i'z so that with i l and iz both positive the resultant mutual fluxes tend to
add. In the usual way, the reference directions for the mutual P;x <P m and the leak-
age fluxes <Pll and <P12 are found by the right-hand rule. The rei"erence directions for
voltages are associated reference directions as shown in Figure 5.1. We also (redun-
dantly in this case) mark the terminals using the dot notation, and also show the stan-
dard marking of power transformers using Xl and X2 for low-voltage winding and HI
and H2 for high-voltage winding.
We remind the reader that the dot notation indicates that the mutual flux com-
ponents, due to the currents i l and i'z, tend to add when these currents both enter (or
leave) the dotted terminals. The reader can check that the dots are correctly placed
in Figure 5.1 by using the right -hand rule.
It is convenient to start the mathematical modeling by describing that version
of Figure 5.1 called an ideal transformer. Later, using the ideal transformer as the key
element we will add a few series and parallel elements to obtain a more realistic
model of a physical transformer.
Sec, 5.1 Single-Phase Transformer Model 129
An ideal transformer has the following physical properties:
I 1. No losses.
2. No leakage fluxes.
3. Magnetic core has· infinite permeability,
I,
From a modeling point of view, a physical power transformer is reasonably close
I to an ideal transformer, with losses on the order of 0.5% (of the transformer power
rating), leakage fluxes on the order of 5% of the mutual flux, and the high permeability
of special alloy steels.
The assumption of no losses implies that there is no resistance in the circuit
model corresponding to Figure 5.1. The assumption of no leakage fluxes <PI! and <P/2
means that the same flux <Pm links both primary and secondary windings. Thus, we
have Al = NI <Pm' and A2 = Nz<P mas the flux linkages of the primary and secondary
circuits, respectively. The terminal voltages are then given by
dAI d<P",
VI = - = NI- -
dt dt
(5.1)
dA 2 d<P m
v, = - = N2- -
- dt dt
and the voltage gain is
V2 Nz
-=-=n (5.2)
VI NI
where n is the ratio of secondary turns to primary turns. Frequently, it is also con-
venient to work with the reciprocal of n. This is called the transformer turns ratio and
is designated a = NI/ Nz = 1/ n.
Continuing with our discussion of the ideal transformer, we note that with the
assumed reference directions for current (see Figure 5.1), the primary and secondary
magnetomotive forces (mmfs) tend to add, and the total mmf is
(5.3)
where R is the reluctance of the core. Now since the core is assumed to have infinite
permeability, the reluctance is zero. Thus
F = Nli l + N2i z = 0 (5.4)

and as a consequence, from (5.3),
i NI 1
-z = -- = -- =-a (5.5)
il N2 n
130 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System t:hap,5
Figure 5.2 Ideal trans-

former,
To eliminate the minus sign it is convenient to define i2 = -i z, and we then get the
circuit model with reference directions as shown in Figure 5,2, Correspondingly, in-
stead of (5,5) we get
i2 NJ 1
-=-=-=a (5,6)
iJ N2 n
with the advantage that we get a positive current gain,
We consider next an example illustrating the impedance transformation prop-
erties of ideal transformers,
ExampleS.!
Consider the circuits shown in Figure ES,l, We wish to pick ZI (in terms of Zz) so
that the terminal behavior of the two circuits is identical. The transformer turns ra-
tios, a = Nd N2 , are the same in both c~rcuits,
Solution The terminal behavior will be identical if the two circuits have the same
two-port parameters, The transmission matrices used in Chapter 4 are convenient to
use, Using the ABeD parameters defined in (4.13), we have
T
III
= [10 ZI]'
1
1-------1 r-----.,
I I
r-~-lI__1 : 12
II I I 12
I +
+ + I
I
V2 VI I V2
I
I
I
I I
: NI N2 : I : NI N21
L _____ .J L _______ JI L ______ J
Ideal Ideal
XI
Figure ES.1
Sec. 5.1 Single-Phase Transformer Model 131
for the transmission matrices of ideal transformer, network .N'I and network .N'2, re-
spectively. For equivalent terminal behavior, using (4.17), we require that
a 0][1 Z2] [1 zll[a 0]

T= 0 [ ~ 0 1 = 0 1 0 ~
Carrying out the matrix multiplications, we get
Thus if Z1 = a' Z2 , the terminal behavior of the two circuits will be identical.
Note 1: Replacing Z2 in the secondary of the ideal transformer by

2
ZI = a Z2 in the primary is sometimes called "referring" 22 to the primary.
Note 2: We can equally well refer the primary impedance into the sec-
ondary; replace Z1 in the primary by 22 = n22 1 in the secondary.
Exercise 1
(a) Show that the result of Example 5.1 is still true if instead of a series impedance
there is a shunt impedance (i.e., we replace the secondary shunt impedance 22
with an equivalent primary shunt impedance 21 = a22 z).
(b) Now show that we can refer a ladder network (in the secondary side) to the
primary simply by multiplying every impedance by a2• Hint: Do it step by step,
shifting one element at a time.
(c) Do you believe it is true that any two-port (not just a ladder) can be referred
to the primary by multiplying each impedance by a2?
We next consider a more realistic model for a physical transformer. With leak-
age fluxes present, instead of Ai = N1,<P m,A2 = N2<P m , we have
A[ = All + N[<pm
(5.7)
A2 = A/2 + N2<P m
<P m is the mutual flux that links all the turns of the primary and secondary coils.
All and A/2 are the flux linkages (including partial flux linkages) of the fluxes <Pil
and <P/2, which link the primary and secondary coils individually. As shown
132 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System Chap. 5
schematically in Figure 5.1, the paths for the leakage flux, largely in air, have high
reluctance, and hence the leakage fluxes (and flux linkages) are relatively small in
magnitude.
Assuming linearity of the magnetic core, All = Llli l and A/2 = L1ziz. Including
the effects of series resistance, we then get .
. dA 1 • di] dtP m
VI = rIll + dt = rll] + LI1 dt + NI dt
(5.8)
The reader should compare (5.8) and (5.1) and note that if we add appropriate se"
ries resistance and leakage inductance to the primary and secondary circuits of an
ideal transformer, the voltage relations in (5.8) will be satisfied.
We next consider the effect of finite permeability. With finite permeability the
core mmf is no longer zero, and thus we cannot use (5.4) to relate i l and iz. Neglect-
ing the small leakage fluxes, however, we can still use (5.3). First, consider the fol-
lowing application of (5.3). Suppose that iz = 0 (i.e., the transformer secondary is
open circuited). In the case of an ideal transformer the primary current would then
be zero, but in the more practical case now under consideration some current would
still flow to sustain the magnetic field. This current, i m , is called primary magnetiza-
tion current and its value, from (5.3), is
. RtP
lm=Mm (5.9)
Thus Nli m = RtP mand we can introduce this in (5.3). Dividing by N I, we get
. .
II = 1m - -
N2 ., .
12 = 1m
+ -N2 12. (5.10)
Nj NI
Finally, using (5.9), we can replace the voltage ej ~ NMtPm/dt'fiy
dtP dim
= NI - dt m = L m-dt
A
el (5.11)
where Lm ~ Nil R. Using (5.8), (5.10), and (5.11), we then get the circuit model in
Figure 5.3. In the model we have replaced iz (with reference direction inward) by its
negative, i2 (with reference direction outward).
The circuit model in Figure 5.3 has the desirable feature that its elements close-
ly match those of the physical model. This helps in understanding and improving
the model. For example, LI/1 represents the (assumed) linear relationship between the
mutual flux tP m and the core mmf; if a more accurate nonlinear model is desired. a
nonlinear inductor may be substituted. Also, in the model, conductor (copper) lo~s
es have been accounted for (by rl and r2), but core losses have not. The reader may
recall from physics the phenomena of hysteresis and eddy currents, which in the en-
l'
,
!
'
Sec, 5,1 Single·Phase Transformer Model 133
+ +
Uz
I'
I : NI
L _____ .J
Nz :
Ideal
Figure 5.3 Transformer equivalent circuit.
vironment of the cyclic flux variation in the iron core are responsible for these core
losses. These losses may be accounted for in the circuit model by paralleling Lm with
a resistor. We will not, however, undertake the improvements just indicated. Cer·
tainly, a transformer designer needs an improved model, but for our uses, consider·
ing the larger system, the simple model in Figure 5.3 is usually adequate.
In fact, we will now consider a simplification. We can refer the secondary ele·
ments to the primary side of the ideal transformer as described in Example 5.1. We
then have a so·called T·equivalent circuit on the primary side. In fact, in practice,
the element values are such (low series, high shunt impedances) that the magnetiz·
ing reactance and referred secondary impedances may be interchanged, resulting in
the circuit model shown in Figure 5.4.
For most systems studies the model may be even further simplified. The series
resistance r is much smaller than the leakage reactance Xi = wL" and may usually
be neglected (i.e., shorted out); the shunt magnetizing inductance Lm is much greater
than Li and may frequently be neglected (i.e., open circuited).
The model in Figure 5.4 makes it quite simple to discuss the behavior of the
transformer in terms of the physical parameters. For simplicity, suppose that we
r----- l
iI I /z I '
o-~~r_~~--~--_'~I~• •r-~I--~--~
+ +
'='I+az,z
Uz
L, = Lil + al L,z
: NI Nz :
L _____ ....J
Ideal
Figure 5.4 Simplified equivalent circuit.

134 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System Cl'1ap. 5 1
!
Figure 5.5 Phasor diagram for

transformer.
neglect r in the following discussion. The fact that Lm is large and LI is small makes
the operation of the power transformer quite understandable in terms of Figure 5.4.
For example, suppose that the transformer is supplying a lagging load (current lags
voltage). Suppose that the voltage gain n = N 2/ Nl = 1. Then from Figure 5.4 we get
a relationship between phasors similar to that shown in Figure 5.5. In this figure we
arbitrarily pick Vi and 12 and "work back" to Vi and II' More specifically, starting
with V2 and 12 , we can find 1m == V2/ j Xm, then II = 1m + 12 , then Vi = V2 + jXII 1 .
We note that if 1m is small (Xm large), then II "" 12, If XI is small, then V2 "" Vi, We
note that if the supply voltage IVi I is fixed, the effect of increasing 1121 (while main-
taining the lagging load PF) is to cause IV21to drop. If we neglect the parallel mag-
netizing inductance (i.e., open circuit it), then 11 == 12, If we neglect the series leakage
inductance (i.e., short circuit it), then VI == V2•
An additional advantage of the model is that L[, L m , and N2! Nl may be direct-
ly determined by a test. This is illustrated in the following example.
Example 5.2
A single-phase transformer has the following ratings: 200 MVA, 200/400 kV. Assume
that the primary voltage is 200 kV (and the secondary voltage is 400 kV). Two tests
are performed: an open-circuit test and a short-circuit test. In the open-circuit test
the secondary is left open and the rated primary voltage is applied. T~ causes 10 A
to flow in the primary. In the short-circuit test the secondary terminals are connect-
ed (short circuited) and a reduced voltage applied to the primary until rated primary
current flows. The required voltage is found to be 21.0 kY. Find an equivalent circuit
for the transformer, neglecting resistance.
Solution Rated primary current = (200 .X 106)/(200 X 10l) = 1000 A. From Fig-
ure 5.4 we note that in the short-circuit test Lm is effectively short circuited,leaving only
Ll in the circuit. Thus
21 X 103
X I =--=21fl
1000
In the open-circuit test the total reactance seen at the primary terminals is
200 X 103
Xl + X", = = 20000n
10 '
Sec. 5.1 Single-Phase Transformer Model 135
Thus
Xm = 20,000 - 21 = 19,979 "" 20,000 fl
We next pick Nl/NI so that the open-circuit voltages are in the ratio 400:200.
Strictly speaking, weshould use the formula (based on the voltage-division law)
~=Nl~ (5.12)
VI NI Xm + XI
But since Xm » XI, as a practical matter we can take
N2=~=400
NI VI 200
Thus, we get the circuit shown in Figure E5.2.
r------,
x, = 21 I I
I 12
II
' 000
I • •
I
+
I
I
I
I
I
J
I
I
I
+
xm = 20,000 ~ ~ ~
r
I
VI I V2
I
I
I
- I -
I I
200:400 JI
IL _____
Ideal Figure E5.2
Note: If the transformer is operating under rated conditions (1111 = 1000 A,

IVII = 200 kV), the voltage drop in XI is 21 kV, which is about 10% of the rated volt-
age. Thus, we get an idea of the significance of XI' Similarly, the current through Xm
is approximately 200 kV/20 kfl = 10 A, which is only about 1% of the rated current.
This is thus seen to be a fairly negligible current; for this reason in most systems ap-
plications we would neglect Xm (i.e., we replace it by an open circuit).
It is interesting to compare the model in Figure 5.4 with the L 1 , L 2 , M model

familiar from circuit theory. We consider this briefly in the next example.
Example 5.3
For the transformer of Example 5.2, find XI = wLj, Xl = wLl , and Xm = wM, of the
LI ,L 2 ,Mmodel.
Solution Using the equations familiar from circuit theory,
Vi = jXIII + jXml z
(5.13)
. .J
136 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System, Chap. 5
it is easy to find the values of Xl, X2 , and Xm using the test data. For example, in the
open-circuittestwegetlVII = XIIIII => Xl = 200 x 10)/10 = 20,000. Other values
are X2 "" 80,000 and Xm = 40,000. Although certainly useful for calculations, the pa-
rameters do not give nearly as good a grasp of the physical behavior of the transformer
as the model in Figure 5.4. .
5.2 THREE·PHASE TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS
There are basically four different ways in which single-phase transformers are con-
nected into so-called three-phase banks. They may be connected wye-wye, delta-
delta, wye-delta, or delta-wye, as shown in Figure 5.6. All the connections are shown
with primary (low voltage) on the left and secondary (high voltage) on the right.
The favored connection is the delta-wye with the wye on the high-voltage side.
The advantages of this connection include the following. There is a neutral on the
high-voltage side that may be grounded; the effect of this ground will be considered
in Chapter 12 when short circuits are considered. There is a voltage gain of v3 just
by virtue of the connection, in addition to the voltage gain due to the turns ratio of
the individual single-phase transformers. The delta connection on the primary side
serves a useful function as well, with respect to unbalanced operation and/or in the
presence of nonsinusoidal current or voltage waveforms.
Considering now some of the other connections, the delta-delta connection of-
fers the possibility of operating, at least on an emergency basis, with one (single-
phase) transformer removed. This is called the open-delta connection. The wye-wye
connection is seldom used because of problems with unbalanced operation and har-
monics. The advantages and disadvantages of the different connections are fully dis-
cussed in standard references on transformers. We will simply recognize the presence
of all four types of connections and consider the modeling thereof. We note that
there are also three-phase transformers in which the three sets of phase coils share
the core material. Two types are shown in Figure 5.7.
The advantage of a three-phase transformer is that it is pos~e to save core ma-
terial and get a cheaper and more efficient transformer. It is exactly analogous to the
saving of wire and energy in a three-phase transmission line versus three single-phase
transmission lines. There are, however, some practical disadvantages as well. A fault
in any phase of the transformer would normally require the entire unit to be removed
from service, whereas a similar fault in a single-phase transformer would only require
that unit to be replaced. Also, there may be some difficulties in shipping the larger
units. In any case the theory of the three-phase transformers is virtually the same as
for three-phase banks made up of single-phase units, and we will not consider them
separately.
Rather than draw the connections in detail as in Figure 5.6, it is more convenient
to use a schematic as illustrated Figure 5.8 for the case of the wye-wye connection.
Windings drawn in parallel directions are primary and secondary windings of the
Sec. 5.2 Three-Phase Transformer Connections 137
fa XI HI l'a , I, XI HI f',
a a
Xl Hl Xl Hl
Ib l'b Ib l'b
b' b'
(. I:. I,. I:.

c' c'
n'
Y-Y Connection A-A Connection
f, l', fe l',
HI , XI HI ,
a c
Xl Hl Xl Hl
fb I'b fb I'b
b' b'
f, I;
H--+--.--:-';'--o c' H-'+---+---<l a'
t!.-Y Connection Y-t!. Connection
Figure 5,6 Standard transformer connections for three phase.
same single-phase transformer. Thus, the dots indicate that Va,/!· and Van are (approx-
imately) in phase. We will occasionally use the even simpler schematic diagram of Fig-
ure 5.9 drawn for the case of a delta-wye connection. In this figure the transformer
windings are indicated by heavy lines. Parallel lines indicate correspondingly pri-
mary and secondary windings. Although the polarity dots are not shown explicitly,
138 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System
Primary and
Claap. 5
·1,· ·
': "Jc,
secondary coils
of phase a I
Core Core
Core type Shell type
Figure 5.7 Three-phase transformers.
they are assumed to be at the same ends of the corresponding lines. Thus, V;z'n' and
Yab are approximately in phase. Using this kind of representation, we can replace
Figure 5.6 by Figure 5.10.
We will also frequently use a one-line diagram to indicate the transformer con-
nection. Figure 5.11 is a one-line-diagram representation of the transformer con-
nection in Figure 5.9. Of course, the wye-wye or delta-delta connection may be
indicated similarly.
In the next section we are going to simplify the descriptions of these three-
phase transformer banks, for the case of a balanced system, by introducing their per
phase representations. As a preliminary we would like to consider the approximate
behavior of the three-phase banks by assuming that each single-phase transformer is
ideal.
In the case of the wye-wye and delta-delta banks, we find that only the voltage
and current levels are changed. For example, in Figure 5.10, Va·b, = nVab and
:I'
.----------<> a'
b~-r----------- __-J b'
'------------------0 c'
Figure 5.8 Schematic connection diagram.
Sec, 5,2 Three-Phase Transformer Connections 139
a'r------
~:
n'
c'
Figure 5.9 Schematic
connection diagram.
I~ = I a/ n, where n is the voltage gain of the single-phase transformer. In the case of

the wye-delta connection, if we compare either line-line or phase-neutral voltages,
there is a phase shift as well as a voltage- and current-level change. For example, for
the delta-wye connection shown in Figure 5.10, assuming positive-sequence voltages
for Van, Vbn , and v;,n, we get Va'n' = nVab = n(Yan - Vbn ) = v3ne irr/6 Van· Thus Va'/!' is
related to Va" by the complex gain K1 ~ V3ne i1T/6• We get identical relation-
ships for the remaining phases, Thus
(5.14)
and identical relationships hold for the line voltages as well. Thus, there is a voltage
(magnitude) gain of v3n and a phase advance or lead of 30° of the secondary volt-
ages relative to the corresponding primary voltages, Note the v3 step-up ratio be-
fa I'a f '
a I'a ,
a' a
,
n
b' b'
, ,
c e
Y-Y Connection 1:..1:. Connection
f' fa
fa
a , I'a
a
fab
n
,
b'
c'
C?:' b'
e'
I:.-Y Connection Y-I:. Connection
Figure 5.10 Standard transformer connections,

A Y Figure 5.11 One-line diagram.
yond the step-up ratio of the single-phase transformers. If for the same connection
(see Figure 5.10) we now consider the current relationships, we get, again assuming
positive-sequence conditions,
Ia = lab - lea = n(I~ - I~)
= V3ne-i1T/6I~ (5.15)
= KrI~
where Kr is the complex conjugate of KJ • A similar result holds for phases band c.
Thus
I'a = ~
Kr
l'
b =
h
Kr
l' =
e
~
Ki
(5.16)
Thus, there is a current (magnitude) gain of (V3ntJ and a phase advance of 30° of
'i, the secondary currents relative to the corresponding primary currents.
Note that the per phase complex power gain of the transformer bank is unity.
We can see this as follows. Let S' and S be the per phase complex power output and
input, respectively. Using (5.14) and (5.16), we get
, i
,
= Va'n,(I~)' = KJVan (~ai)* = VanI: = S
,
S' (5.17)
This is entirely consistent with the model of the ideal transformer as a device that nei-
ther stores nor dissipates any energy. In fact, the relationship between currents in
(5.16) could have been derived, alternatively, by utilizing this physical property.
Exercise 2. If we assume that Van, Vbn , and Vcn, are a negati'tsequence set, show
that (5.14) and (5.16) still hold, with a gain change K = K2 = V3ne- J1T/6. Note
that K2 = Kr.
Exercise 3. Show that if we assume positive-sequence voltages and consider the

wye-delta connection in Figure 5.10 (again with ideal transformers), then (5.14) and
(5.16) still hold,with K = K3 = (n/V3)e i1T /6. What is the gainifVan,vbn andVcn are
a negative-sequence set?
Exercise 4. Show that, in general, if the positive-sequence voltage gain is K, the

negative-sequence gain will be its complex conjugate K*. Hint: Note that taking the
complex conjugate transforms a positive-sequence set into a negative-sequence set.
Sec. 5.2 Three-Phase Transformer Connections 141
, . ,
TABLE 5.1 TRANSFORMER PROPERTIES _
Complex ideal transformer Ideal transformer
Voltage gain K=IKI~ n

1 1
Current gain
K* =1Ki~ n
Complex power gain
_l_Z 1
Secondary impedance ZL ZZL
IKI2 L n
referred to primary
In all the cases we have been considering the indicated relationships between
primary and secondary voltages and primary and secondary currents are very simi-
lar to those of an ideal transformer. It will therefore be convenient to extend the
notion of an ideal transformer to cover this case. We will define a complex ideal
transformer with complex voltage gain K and complex current gain 1/ K*. The com- .
plex power gain is K(1/ K*)* = 1. The impedance transformation properties are the
following: When terminated in a symmetric wye-connected load, the per phase
driving-point impedance on the primary side is
.... -
Van Va'n'; K 1
I: = K*I;, = IKI2ZL (5.18)
where ZL is the load impedance in the secondary.

These properties are summarized in Table 5.1 and compared with those of an
ideal transformer. We see that the two types of ideal transformers have many prop-
erties in common. In particular we note that the complex power gain, the imped-
ance transformation properties, and the ratios of secondary to primary voltage
magnitudes and current magnitudes are independent of the phase angle I..!i and the
dependence on IKI and n are identical. Note that in cases where I..!i is involved, it
shifts the phase angle of the voltage and current the same amount in going from pri-
mary to secondary.
While we have been considering standard three-phase transfonner connections,
many other connections are possible. In the clelta-wye, for example, we could change
the labeling of the conductors a', b', e' to e', a', b'. We would then find the (positive-
sequence) voltage gain to be K = - j Y3n. Or, in the wye-wye case, we could change
the labeling of the conductors a', b', e' to b', e', a' and find the (positive-sequence)
voltage gain K = ne j27r / 3• In these nonstandard cases all the properties in Table 5.1
still hold.
We will follow the industry practice and assume the use of the standard
connections shown in Figure 5.10 unless stated to the contrary.t For convenience the
t The ANSI/IEEE Standard specifies a 30' phase advance of the phase-neutral voltages in going
from the low-voltage sides to the corresponding high-voltage side. This is true for both d· Y and Y-d con-
nections.
TABLE 5.2 VOLTAGE GAIN, K, OF COMPLEX IDEAL

TRANSFORMER
Standard connection Positive-sequence gain Negative-sequence gain
Delta-wye V3nej~/6 V3ne-j~/6
Wye-delta .!!..- ej~/6 .!!..-e- M6

v'3 v'3
n is the voltage gain of the ideal transformer in the single-phase transformer
model.
various gains of the standard connections are tabulated in Table 5.2. We note that for
both delta-wye and wye-delta connections, the secondary (high side) voltages (and
currents) lead the corresponding primary (low side) voltages (and currents) by 30°.
Finally, we note that while the complex ideal transformer may be viewed as a
generalization of the ideal transformer, it must be remembered that its use is limit-
ed to the case of balanced three-phase sinusoids, while the gain of an ideal trans-
former is valid for any waveform.
This concludes our discussion of three-phase ideal transformer interconnec-
tions. We turn next to practical cases in which the leakage and magnetizing reac-
tances appear in the model of the single-phase transformers.
5.3 PER PHASE ANALYSIS
With transformers in the network there is the possibility that a simplified model of
the power system network is not (conductively) connected. In this case there does
not seem to be any reason to assume that the neutrals of the separate parts are at the
same potential. In fact, when more complete modeling is considered, including the
grounding of neutrals andlor capacitance to ground, it appears that \fIh balanced in-
puts and a symmetric network, all the neutrals are at the same potential and all the
currents and voltages also occur in balanced three-phase sets. Under these conditions,
in Figure 5.12, for example, we can assume that n' and n are at the same potential.
Figure 5.12 Illustrating separate parts.

b'
c'
,
Ideal
Figure 5.13 Three-phase wye-wye connection.
In the following we will frequently show the assumption that the neutrals are
at the same potential (under balanced conditions) by showing a connection between
neutrals in the per phase diagram.
We now consider the per phase modeling of the four types of transformer con-
nections given in Section 5.2. For simplicity, we will be neglecting resistance. It can
always be reintroduced later in series with the leakage reactance LI •
Per Phase Diagram [Wye·Wye)

Using the equivalent circuit of each single-phase transformer shown in Figure 5.4,
we get the following three-phase connection. In Figure 5.13 we observe a symmet-
ric network composed of LIs and Lms in cascade with a Y-Y interconnection of ideal
transformers. Assuming balanced conditions, we then get the per phase circuit shown
in Figure 5.14, where we explicitly show our assumption that n' and n are at the same
potential. It is instructive to compare Figures 5.14 and 5.4.
Ideal
r-----l
1a LI I I la'
I I a'
I
I +
I
I
Van I
Va'n'
I
I
I
n : NJ N2.J: n'
L _____
l:n=N2IN J
Figure 5.14 Per phase equivalent circuit (wye-wye).

f,
c'
Figure 5.15 Three-phase delta-delta connection.
Per Phase Diagram [Delta-DeltaJ

The three-phase circuit is shown in Figure 5.15. The primaries and secondaries of the
ideal transformers are the windings identified with the dots with Nj turns in the pri-
mary and N2 turns in the secondary.
We are now going to show that for balanced conditions the circuit in Figure
5.15 is equivalent to that in Figure 5.16. We can show the equivalence by writing an
equation for each of the circuits, but it is less tedious to compare behavior under
open-circuit and short-circuit conditions. We will effectively be demonstrating that
the two circuits have the same ABeD parameters (for the per phase two-port), and
hence are equivalent.
I,. a'
c'
,
Ideal
Figure 5.16 Circuit equivalent to Figure 5.15.

Secondaries open circuited. In this case there is zero current in the ideal
transformers. From the primary side of Figure 5.15 we see a delta with L, + Lm in
each branch. In Figure 5.16 we see an equivalent wye with (L( + Lm)/3 in each
branch. Thus, for the (balanced) input voltages we get the same input currents in
both cases. Comparing output voltages, the same voltage-divider ratio assures that
they will also be the same.
Secondaries short circuited. In this case the secondary voltages of the

ideal transformers are zero, and thus the primary voltages are zero as well. In effect,
Lm in Figure 5.15 and Lm/3 in Figure 5.16 are shorted out and the currents through
them are therefore zero. From the primary sides we see a delta of L( and a wye of
L(/3. Therefore, for a given set of (balanced) input voltages, the input currents are
equal. Checking the output currents, in the case of Figure 5.15 we get a current gain
of 1/n in the ideal transformers, which translates into a line current gain of 1/n, while
in the case of Figure 5.16 we get the same result.
On the basis of the equivalence of Figures 5.15 and 5.16, we can now use the per
phase equivalent circuit in Figure 5.17. This circuit should be compared with Figure
5.14. The only difference is that L( and Lm of the single-phase transformers are di- .
vided by 3.
Per Phase Diagram [Delta-Wye)

If we repeat the calculations just concluded for the case where the secondary in Fig-
ure 5.15 is connected in a wye (as shown in Figure 5.10), we find that the primary-side
driving-point impedances are the same for the open-circuited and short-circuited sec-
ondaries. However, there are changes in the open-circuit voltage gain and short-
circuit current gain. In the open circuit, for positive-sequence inputs, the voltage gain
is KILm/(L( + Lm), where Kl is the complex voltage gain of the ideal-transformer
delta-wye connection. This is to be contrasted with nLm{L, + Lm) as the gain in the
delta-delta connection. In the short-circuit case the line current gain is 1/ Kf rather
than l/n. Thus, it appears that in the equivalent circuit corresponding to Figure 5.17,
the complex gain Kl should be used instead of n. We are then led to the per phase
Ideal
!i r-----l
fa 3 I I fa'
a I • • I a'
I
I +
I
I
I Vain'
Van
I
I
I
n :LNl N2.J: n'

_____
1: n=N21N1
Figure 5.17 Per phase equivalent circuit (delta-delta).

' ,
'1"'\'
"

I
1
la' a'
Ia,=I~
+ Complex +
ideal
V transformer Va'n,=K1V
K1
n n'
K1 =-f3neJitJ6
Figure 5.18 Per phase equivalent circuit (delta-wye).
equivalent circuit shown in Figure 5.18. Comparing with Figure 5.17, we see the
change to a complex ideal transformer. Note the block diagram representation of the
complex ideal transformer. Using the standard block diagram convention, the arrow
directed toward the block designates the input side. Thus, V and I are inputs and
Va'n' = K] V and I~ = 1/ Kf are outputs.
Sometimes it is convenient to represent the complex ideal transformer more
explicitly. We can then replace Figure 5.18 with Figure 5.19. In Figure 5.19, n is the
voltage gain of each 1¢> transformer in the 3cfJ bank. Note that in Figure 5.19 we have
the cascade of a conventional ideal transformer (with voltage gain V3n) and a phase
shifter (which advances the phase by 30°). It is convenient to refer to the voltage
gain as a "connection-induced voltage gain" and to the phase shift as a "connection-
induced phase shift." The phase shifter is represented in block diagram form with the
arrow indicating the input side.
Per Phase Diagram [Wye.Delta)

Finally, we consider the wye-delta connection shown in Figure 5.10. Using the equiv-
alent circuit for each single-phase transformer, we get Figure 5.20, in which a sym-
metric network of LIS and Lms is in cascade with a Y-d interconnection of ideal
transformers. As summarized in Table 5.2, with positive-sequence ,riables, the gain
of the bank of ideal transformers is K3 ~ (n/v3)e irr/6, The per phase equivalent cir-
Ideal
LI r-----,
3 I 1 I' I" a' I, = e)./6f'
+ +1 1+ + '
Lm I .I
Van Vi lV' ein/ 6 V,'n' = eln/6 V'
3 I I
I I
-I I-
,
IL _____ J I n
1:v'3n
Connection- Connection-
induced induced
voltage gain phase shift
Figure 5.19 Alternate circuit (delta-wye).

Nl'~' .' b
c'
T
Ideal
Figure 5.20 Three-phase wye-delta connection.

,
I I, a
la' = I/Kj
+ + +
Complex
V ideal Va' .' = K3 V
transformer
- K3 -
n
Figure 5.21 Per phase equivalent circuit [wye-deltaJ.
cuit is shown in Figure 5.21. The complex ideal transformer may also be replaced by
a more explicit circuit similar to Figure 5.19, but with the connection-induced volt-
age gain equal to n/V3.
All the per phase equivalent circuits are similar, being the cascade of a (voltage-
divider) network and of an ideal or complex ideal transformer. This similarity will
be enhanced further by developments to be introduced in Section 5.4.
Finally, we note that in all these models the series resistance r may be includ-
ed. With Y-connected primaries we add r in series with L,. With Ll-connected pri-
maries we add r/3 in series with Ltl3. We conclude this section with two examples.
Example 5.4
We are given a system involving a step-up transformer with the one-line diagram shown
in Figure E5.4(a). The transformer bank is made up ofidentical1¢ transformers each
specified by XI = 0.21 n, n = N2 / N[ = 10. Each generator phase is modeled by a
Thevenin equivalent circuit. The transformer bank is delivering 100 MW at 0.9 PF
lagging to a substation bus whose voltage is 230 kV.
Oi------CII~ ~ } .l~~:.
Generator A Y 230-kV
bus Figure E5.4(a)
148 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System , Chap. 5
3cp complex power

(a) Find the primary current, primary voltage (line-line), and
supplied by the generator.
(b) Find the phase shift between the primary and secondary voltages.
Solution Assuming positive-sequence operation and the standard 6.-Y connection, we

can use Figure 5.19 [see Figure E5.4(b)]. Since resistance and magnetizing reactance
are not given, we assume that they may be neglected.
iX, l',
+ iO.07
E,. v,. e'·/6 Vatu'
n IL _____ J I n'
I:IOy'3
J\ J\
t
Generator Transfonner Bus
Figure E5.4(b)
(a) Fromthedatagiven,wehavelVo'n·1 = 230kVjV3 = 132.8kV. The phase angle

is not given. For convenience in calculations we can choose /Vo'n' = O. Then
'il
Va'n' = 132.8 ~ kV. The 3cp power delivered to the bus is specified. Thus, we
can calculate the per phase complex power into the bus:
1_100X106 0_ 0
S - 0.9X3 ~-37.04~MVA
Next, we calculate l~ from

S' 37.04 X 106 ~
l~* = - = 3 = 278.9 /25.84° A
Vo'n' 132.8 X 10
Thus I~ = 278.9/-25.84° A. We next find 10 , ':J
10 = 1OV3 e-i"/61~ = 4830.6/-55.84° A
Recalling that the phase angle of \I;"n' was not given (an angle of zero was arbi-
trarily chosen), only the primary current magnitude can be determined, In this
case we take the assignment "find the primary current" to mean "fmd the pri-
mary current magnitude," and this magnitude is 4830.6 A.
We are now in a position to calculate Van.
Von = V + jO,0710
= ~ ;: 132.8 X 103 /-30° + jO.07 X 4830.6 /-55.84°

10 v3
= 7667.2 /-30° + 338.1 /34.16°
= 7820.5/-27.77° V
Just as in the case of the current Ia, only the voltage magnitude can be deter-
mined. Thus, we have the primary voltage (line-line), v3 x 7820.5 = 13.55 kV.
Next, we can calculate the per phase complex power into the transformer:
5 = v"nI: = 7820.5 /-27.77° x 4830.6 /55.84°
. = 37.778 /28.07° MV A
To find the 3¢ power delivered by the generator, we mUltiply by 3.

53.. = 35 = 113.33 /28.07° MVA
Since the complex power depends on the difference in the phase angles between
Van and fa (and not on their individual values), the arbitrary choice of phase
angle for Vo' n' is of no consequence. This then completes part (a).
(b) The phase shift between primary and secondary voltages (either phase-neutral
or line-line) may now be determined. Thus, the secondary phase leads the pri-
marybyO° - (-27.77°) = 27.77°.
Some comments on Example 5.4 follow.

1. If the transformers were ideal, the angle difference calculated in part (b) would
be 30° rather than 27.77 0 • Also, the transformer input and output complex pow-
ers would be identical.
2. In part (b) it is essential to model the phase shift in the complex ideal trans-
former. In part (a), however, the phase shift could have been left out without
affecting the calculation of voltage magnitude, current magnitude, and complex
power.
Example 5.5
Suppose that we are given a system with the one-line diagram shown in Figure E5.5(a).
We have in cascade, the following: a source, a step-up transformer bank (primary on
the left), a transmission line, a step-down transformer bank (primary on the right), and
an impedance load. The transformer banks are the same as in Example 5.4. Assume
that the generator terminal voltage (line-line) is 13.8 kV and find the generator cur-
rent, the transmission-line current, the load current, the load voltage, and the complex
power delivered to the load.
Tl Tl
f \ _~ ~ Zline=il OO 9 L-.....
v--, e:>1Q-----C(. , ~ . ~ Zlu.d = 4 + i1
A Y Y A Figure E5.5(a)
Solution Using Figure 5.19, we have the circuit diagram shown in Figure E5.5(b).
From the problem specification we have 1\111 = 13.8 kVj v3 = 7.97 kV. For conve-
nience we may choose \II = 7.97 LQ: kV. The easiest way to calculate the generator
current II is to find the driving-point impedance to the right of the terminals identi-
fied by the voltage VI'
r-----' r-----:--,
a I, ;0.07 I I j100 jO.07
I I I • • :
.---11--., r-l--.rllOO"----Cl.
+ I +
I
I
I:.~II VI 4 +;1
I
I
I
I I I I I
I
II I
I
1:10-/3 -'I
IL _____
: L!.~~.:.I_J I I
I
I I
I
I I I i
~Gcnerator • I" Transformer. T, - - - - - - - I.....,~ Transmission 1
.....- - - - - - Transformer, T 2 ------.~-;:~.t_Load ~
I I I line 1 I I
Figure E5.5[b)
Starting from the load, we have ZJ ~ Ztoad + jO.07 = 4 + j1.07 n. Referring this
impedance to the secondary side of the ideal complex transformer, we get
(1OY3)2ZJ = 1200 + j321 n. Then adding Zline, we get Z2 ~ Zline + 1200 +
j321 = 1200 + j421 n. Referred to the primary side of TI> we get Zz/(10Y3)2 =
4.00 + j 1.4033. Finally, we get the driving-point impedance ZI ~ 4.00 + j 1.4733 =
4.263 /20.22°. Thus we get
V
I[ = Z: = 1869.1 /-20.22° A
12 = : r: ej1rj6I[ = 107.9 /9.78° A

10 v3
IJ = 1OY3e- ill'/612 = 1869.1 /-20.22° A
I{ = Zioadh = 7.71 / -6.18° kV
Sioad = \{lj = Zioad IIJI2 = 14.4 /14.0° MV A
The relative phase angles of the voltages and currents are significant, but as in
Example 5.4, the individual values depend completely on our (arbitrary) selection of
L!J: Thus, we can only specify voltage and current magnitudes. Thus we have
generator current = 11[1 = 1869.1 A
transmission-line current = IIzI = 107.9 A
load current = IIJI = 1869.1 A
load voltage (line-line) = Y31~1 = 13.35 kV
3¢ complex power = 3SIoad = 43.21 /14.0° MVA
Exercise 5. Show that the 30 phase shifts can be ignored and all the results con-
0
cerning voltage and current magnitudes and complex power will be obtained.
Note: In Examples 5.4 and 5.5 we have so-called radial systems, in which
none of the transmission lines andlor transformers are in parallel. In these cases as
we have seen we can ignore the connection-induced phase shifts of the 3¢ t:.-Y or
Y-/). transformer banks. This may still be possible under certain conditions to be de-
scribed next, even if there are parallel Jines.
5.4 NORMAL SYSTEMS
Typical power transmission systems are richly interconnected, with many loops
and parallel paths in the one-line diagrams. There are many advantages to this
arrangement in terms of reliability and operating flexibility. Aside from this rationale,
there are also historical factors; transmission-line voltages and power-handling
152 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System ,Chap. 5
capabilties have increased over the years, with the modern additions overlaying the
existing network. Where these loops or parallel paths include transformers, special
care must be exercised in system design to avoid large "circulating" currents. The fol-
lowing examples illustrate the nature of the problem.
Example 5.6
We are given a one-line diagram for two transformer banks in parallel [Figure E5.6(a)].
The 1r/> transformers in the two banks are specified as follows:
Y-Ybank: n = 10, Xi = 0.05
Y-A bank: n= v3 X 10, Xi = 0.05
The line-neutral voltage at bus 1 has magnitude 8 kYo The load at bus 2 is Y con-
nected; each impedance, Z'oad = 100 I!!... Find 11;1, 1121, and II,oadi.
y y
~
~ Y Il Figure E5.B(a)
Solution Using Figures 5.14 and 5.21, and assuming the phase of Vi is zero, we get the
per phase equivalent circuit shown in Figure E5.6(b). Writing KVL for the i,loop, we get
r-----l
II ;0.05 I
, l'I
I
+1
I
VI
I
-I
IL _____ JI ,
a
1:10 +
V2
n'
ei./6
,L _____ .JI
l:n/V3= 10
Figure E5.6(b)
,
I;
......•...•.......•...•.
I
j
Sec. 5.4 Normal Systems 153
VI = jO.05/1+ V
= jO.05/1+ 1~ x 100(1; + I;)

Replacing II by 10/;, w~ get
VI = (10 + j0.5)1'1 + 101; = 8000 (1)
Similarly, writing KVL for the 12 loop, we get
VI = jO.05/2 + ~e-j~/6 X 100(1; + I;)
Replacing 12 by 101;e-j~/6, we get
VI = 101; e-j1r/6 + (10 + jO.5)/;e-j~/6
MUltiplying by ej~16, we can simplify and we get
101; + (10 + jO.5)/; = 8000 ~ (2)
Solving (1) and (2) for 1'1 and I;, we get
= 3755.0 /-164.85' A
/'1
I; = 4527.2 /14.88° A
Iload = I; + I; = 772.5 /13.57° A
Notice that 1/;1 and 11;1 are much larger than I/loadl. The physical interpretation is that
there is a large component of the current that circulates from one transformer bank
to the other without entering the load. This circulating current serves no useful pur-
pose. In fact, it is harmful, wasting energy and possibly overheating the transformers.
Note: Even if Zioad is removed and Iload = 0, we still get a large circulating current.
The basic problem is that the connection-induced phase shifts in the two parallel trans-
former banks are different. In practice we would not parallel these transformers.
Example 5.7
Repeat Example 5.6 but replace the Y-A transformer bank with a Y-Y transformer
bank with n = 20.
Solution In this case both transformer banks have the same connection-induced
phase shifts (zero), but the open-circuit secondary voltages are different. Paralleling
the steps in Example 5.6, we get
(10 + jO.5)l; + 101; = 8000 (1)
51; +(5 + j I)I; = 8000 (2)
Solving for I; and I;, we get
Ii = 3,260.76 /76.40°
I; = 3,213.39 /-86.58°
Iload = I; + I; = 959.23 /-2.29°
11
154 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System C~ap. 5 r
i
Once again, as in Example 5.6, we get a very large circulating current. The problem
this time is the mismatch in the turns ratios of the transformers, and in normal prac-
tice we would not parallel these transformers.
ExampleS.8
Repeat Example 5.7 but with n = 10 for both banks of transformers.
Solution By symmetry 12 = I; and we get
(20 + jO.5)Ii = 8000
Then
Ii 12 = 399.9/-1.43°
IJoad = Ii + 12 799.8/-1.43°
We see an equal load division in this case without circulating current.
The examples illustrate the need for care in paralleling transformers. The nor· .!
mal arrangement is to parallel transformer banks that have the same (connection-
induced) phase shift and the same open-circuit step-up or step-down voltage ratio. We
want to avoid inadvertent mismatches in (connection-induced) phase shifts and volt-
age ratios. This same idea extends to more general parallel paths. It is to be noted,
however, that occasionally we deliberately introduce phase shift andlor turns ratio
anomalies for complex power flow control; we will consider some examples later.
Considering these cases to be exceptional, it is useful to define a "normal" system as
follows.
Definition. A system is normal if, in the per phase equivalent circuit, the prod-
uct of the (complex) ideal transformer gains around very loop is 1. Equivalently,
under the conditions just described, for every pair of parallel paths ~ have the same
product of (complex) ideal transformer gains.
Concerning this latter condition, we note that it breaks down into two parts.
For each parallel path
1. the product of ideal transformer gain magnitudes is the same, and
2. the sum of ideal transformer phase shifts is the same.
We note that the open-circuit line voltage magnitudes for three-phase transformer
banks are usually specified in the transformer ratings. From these we can calculate
the voltage magnitude ratios (primary to secondary, for example), which are indis-
tinguishable from the ideal transformer gain magnitudes referred to previously. This
gives a convenient way to check condition 1.
We consider an example of a normal system in Figure 5.22. The three-phase
transformer bank (open-circuit) line-line voltage magnitude ratings are given. Thus,
l
!
I
Sec. 5.4 Normal Systems 155
TI : 13.2Y - 132Y kV LI and L2 are transmission lines

Tl : 13.BY 138YkV
Tl , T4 : 11.2A - 230Y kV
Figure 5.22 Normal system.
in the top path we step up by a factor of 10 and down by the same factor; the prod-
uct of voltage gains is 10 x 0.1 = 1. Similarly, for the bottom path we get
(230/11.2) X (11.2/230) = 1. We assume also that T3 and T4 have been wired
with the same phase-shift advance (say 30°) from primary to secondary. Thus, the
connection-induced phase shifts cancel along the bottom path. The rest of the sys-
., tern does not have parallel paths (i.e., is "radial") and need not be considered in this
I connection.
Example 5.9
Suppose that in Figure 5.22 the wiring of the A-Y banks is uniform, with IJ the phase
advance from primary to secondary. Show that in the per phase equivalent circuit of
the transmission link consisting of T), L2 , and T4 , the ephase shifts cancel (and may
be left out) if we are considering terminal behavior.
Solution Representing the 6,- Y banks by Figure 5.19 and the transmission line by
ABCD parameters, we get the circuit shown in Figure E5.9. Using the ABCD para-
meters, we get
v; ei9 = AV zei8 BIze j !
Ite i! CV zeJ9 D1 zejO

Multiplying by e- j9 , we get
v; AVl BIz
Ij = CV l - DI;
Thus, as long as the connection-induced phase shifts are equal (from primary to sec-
ondary), as we have assumed, they do not enter in the relation between V;, I; and
V], 12, It follows that if we are relating VI, II and V2, 12 , we can leave out the phase-
shifting blocks.
Note: After finding V;, r;, Vl , 11,we can then find the transmission-line currents
and voltages by advancing the phases by &.
I,
'UVV
.. I', Ji ejB li e /B Ii .. vvv
12
I
~
~ ~ ~
~ ~1
+ + + + + +
A
~
B
v, v'1 e iB Viels Vie io e/B Vi V
- f I 1
1:v'3n
- -
c D
- - -
v'3n2: I
Figure E5.9
Sec. 5.5 Per Unit Normalization 157
Leaving out the phase-shifting blocks in the per phase diagram is a worthwhile sim-
plification. It is natural to designate this diagram as follows: .
Terminology. A simplified per phase diagram is a per phase diagram in which

all the connection-induced phase shifts (i.e., the phase shifters) have been left out.
Suppose we have a normal system. For the usual power system problem (where
the phases of the voltage sources are not specified), we can find the complex power
flows and the voltage and current magnitudes by using the simplified per phase dia-
gram. Although we will not offer a proof, we draw attention to the results in Exam-
ples 5.4,5.5,5.7, and 5.9, and to related comments following the examples. Thus we
can say that one advantage of a normal system, from an analysis point of view, is that
we can use a simplified per phase diagram.
We tum now to a second advantage of a normal system, from an analysis point
of view. It permits the unambiguous introduction of a useful normalization called per
unit normalization.
5.5 PER UNIT NORMALIZATION
In power system calculations a normalization of variables called per unit normaliza-

tion is almost always used. It is especially convenient if many transformers and volt-
age levels are involved.
The idea is to pick base values for quantities such as voltages, currents, imped-
ances, power, and so on, and to define the quantity in per unit as follows.
.. . actual quantity
quantIty III per umt = b If'
ase va ue 0 quantIty
A vital point is that the base variables are picked to satisfy the same kind of rela-
tionship as the actual variables. For example, corresponding to the equation between
actual variables (complex numbers),
v = ZI (5.19)
we have the equation for base quantities (real numbers),
VB = ZBIB (5.20)
Dividing (5.19) by (5.20), we get
V Z I
(5.21)
or
vp.ll. = Zp.ll.Ip.ll
; }
'1'"'"
Equation (5.21) has the same form as (5.19), which implies that we can do circuit
analysis using (5.21) exactly as with (5.19). The p.u. subscript indicates per unit and
is read "per unit."
Example 5.10
Given the circuit shown in Figure E5.10(a), pick VB = 100 and ZB = 0.01, and find
Zp,u" Ip,u" and 1.
I B, Vp,u"
0.01
v = 100 i0,Ol vp•u• = 1 i1
Figure E5.10(a) Figure E5.10(b)
Solution IB = VBIZB = 104 • Then

100
Vp.u, = 100 = 1
0.01 + jO.01
Zpu. = 0.01 =1 + j 1
Vp,u, 1
Ip,u = Z = 1+1 = 0.707 /-45°
p,u, ]
I = Ip,u, X Is = (0.707 /-45°) X 10-4 = 7070 /-45°

Note: In solving for Ip.u. we can also use the original circuit with all quantities replaced
by per unit quantities. This is shown in Figure E5.10(b). f#
What we have done for Ohm's law can also be done in the case of power cal-
culations. For example, corresponding to
S = VI* (5.22)
we have
(5.23)
and
Sp.u, = Vp,u,1*p.ll (5.24)
Note that since the two equations (5.20) and (5.23) involve four base quantities VB,
I B, ZB' and SB, specifying any two base quantities determines the remaining two base
r
I Sec. 5.5 Per Unit Normalization 159
quantIties. For example, if we pick Va, Sa, we can solve for Ia = Sa/VB and
ZB = VB/IB = VJjSB' .
The extension to other related variables is routine. For example,
Sp.ll. = pp.ll . + Qp.ll.
where
p
p.ll.
=.f
SB
In the case of impedance we have

Zp.ll = Rp.ll + j Xpll.
where
Rp.ll. =!i
ZB
x =~
ZB p.ll.
We note that
~ IB 1
YB =-=-
VB ZB
If the network includes transformers, there is an advantage to picking differ-
ent bases for the two sides of the transformer. Suppose that we make the ratio of
voltage bases equal to the connection-induced voltage ratio in the per phase equiv-
alent circuit, or what we will take to be equivalent, the ratio of secondary and pri-
mary (open-circuit) voltage ratings of the three-phase banks. Let SB be the same on
both sides. For example, consider a transformer bank connected wye-wye. Using
Figure 5.14 with a slight change in notation, we have Figure 5.23. Pick convenient
bases VIB , Sa, lIB' and ZIB, for side 1. Then, we get for the corresponding quanti-
ties on side 2,
1
V2B =nVIB , SB' I?B
- =-lIB'
n Z2B =n2ZIB
r-----l ,
jXj I I 12 a
+ + +
VI jX m V v1
,
I NI Nli Ii
L _____ J
l: Ii =N/N I
Figure 5.23 Per phase equivalent circuit (wye-wyeJ.

160 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System' Chap. 5
All quantities on the left side are now normalized with respect to the bases sub 1; all
on the right side with respect to the bases sub 2. In particular, we get
v2p.u. = VV2 = nV
T'
= Vp.1l (5.25)
2B nY1B
and
I = .i = (1In)1 = 1 (5.26)
2p.u. hB (11 n)11B p.u.
In consideration of (5.25) and (5.26), we can redraw Figure 5.23 to show relations
between per unit quantities, without an ideal transformer.
Consider next the case of a wye-delta transformer bank. Assume that the sys-
tem is normal and we are able to use the simplified per phase diagram. In this case
in Figure 5.21 we discard the 30° phase shift. Relating the bases as described previ-
ously (by 1K31 = nlV3), we again get Figure 5.24.
Consider the delta-delta case given in Figure 5.17. Again, relating bases by n,
we get Figure 5.24 except that X/ p.u. = ~ (Xt/Z1B) and Xmp .u. = ~ (XmIZ 1B ). For the
delta-wye case, using the simplified per phase diagram and relating the bases by
IKll = \.I3n, we get Figure 5.24, with the same values of X/ p.u. and Xmp.u. as in the
delta-delta case.
The very interesting result is that for a normal per phase system, using the sim-
plified per phase diagram and per unit normalization, we can dispense with all the
ideal transformers and all the phase shifters. We call the simplified per phase per
unit diagram an impedance diagram.
5.S PER UNIT THREE·PHASE QUANTITIES
Three-phase quantities may also be normalized by picking app~priate three-phase

bases. In a very natural way we define
s1'" £ 3SB (5.27)

vlk £ V3 Y:B (5.28)
+ +
Figure 5.24 Transformer im-

pedance diagram.
Sec. 5.6 Per Unit Three-Phase Quantities 161
where Ss and Vis are the per phase quantities discussed earlier, and the vl~ refer to
the line-line voltages. Since
(5.29)
and
II lVill V3 IViI
IVip.u.1 = - I I = -:-;;;-= IVip.u.! (5.30)
ViB v3Vis
we see that numerically, the distinction between per phase and three-phase quanti-
ties expressed in per unit may be unimportant. Power engineers sometimes need not
specify whether a per unit voltage is line-line or line-neutral. For example, if we say
that the voltage (magnitude) is 1 p.u., this means that the line-line voltage (magnitude)
is 1 p.u. (i.e., equal to its base value) and that the line-neutral voltage (magnitude) is
also 1 p.u. (i.e., equal to its base value). A similar vagueness is permissible relative
to three-phase and single-phase power. Consider also the formula for Zs. We can
calculate ZB using either single-phase or three-phase quantities.
V~ (V3 Vis? (V)~f
ZiS = S;; = 3S
s
= S~4> (5.31)
Example 5.11
Given three single-phase transformers with the following nameplate ratings, find the
impedance diagram for the wye-wye, wye-delta, delta-delta, and delta-wye connec-
tions, picking the voltage and power bases for the three-phase bank "induced" by the
nameplate ratings. What is meant by "induced" will be clearer from the example.
Nameplate ratings (1<fJ transformers) 1000 kVA

13.2-66 kV
Xl = 0.1 p.u.
Xm = 100p.u.
Solution The significance of the per unit reactances specified in the nameplate rat-
ings is the following. The manufacturer has picked impedance bases in accordance
with the nameplate voltampere and voltage ratings. Thus for the 1<fJ transformers,
we have
.
Chap. 5
where the tilda indicates the nameplate ratings. We have been using models in which
the reactances are in the primary. Thus, the "actual" reactances (referred to the pri- j
mary) are
Xl = 0.1 X 174 = 17.4 n (actual)
Xm = 100 X 174 = 17,400 n (actual) I
I
Now consider the three-phase interconnections of these single-phase trans- 1
formers. If we connect the primaries in wye (the secondaries can be wye or delta) and
pick s1~ and VilB induced by the nameplate ratings, we get S~~ = 3 X 1000 kVA and
VilB = Y313.2 kV (so that 1 p.u. of line voltage corresponds to rated voltage on the
transformer primary). Then, using (5.31), we find that lIB = 174 n. Then
17.4
Xlp.u. = 174 = 0.1 p.u.
17,400
Xmp.u = 174' = 100 p.u.
in the impedance diagram. Of course, these are just the per unit values supplied by the
manufacturer.
If the primaries of the single-phase transformers are connected in delta
and we pick s1¢ = 3 X 1000 kVA and V~B = 13.2 kV (so that 1 p.u. of the line
voltage corresponds to rated voltages on the transformer primary), then
ZIB = (13.2 X 1tPj2/(3 X 1000 x 10 ) = 174/3 = 2B/3. In the simplified circuit dia-
3
gram for the delta-delta and delta-wye connections, we find that the per unit reac-
tances are Xi/3Z IB and Xm/3Z 1B and thus
Xl Xl
Xl p.ll. = 32B/3 = 2B = 0.1 p.u.
Xmp.ll. = 100p.u.
Thus we get, in every case, the same per unit values for Xl and Xm a~ in the case of the
single-phase transformer. In all four cases we have the impedance'liagram shown in
Figure E5.11. Since an impedance diagram is understood to be a per unit diagram, we
have abandoned the cumbersome p.ll. notation.
+ +
ilOO~
Figure E5.11
The interesting result of Example 5.11 is that, provided that we use the bases
induced by the nameplate ratings, the per unit reactances have the same numerical
,:.'
•..........•.....•..!
I Sec. 5.7 Change of Base
values in the wye-wye, wye-delta, delta-wye, and delta-delta connections, as in the

163
single phase case.

I Example5.U
II A three-phase transformer bank rated at 5000 kYA, 13.8~ - 138Y kY, has
Xl = 0.1 p.u.. Find Xl (actual) referred to the low-voltage (i_e., delta) side.
1 Solution Power and voltage ratings of three-phase equipment are always given in
three-phase, line-line terms. Using (5.31), we have
(13.8 x 1Ql )2
ZIB = 5000 X 103 = 38.09 n
Then referred to the low-voltage side
Xl = Xl p.ll. X ZIB = 3.809 n (actual)
5.7 CHANGE OF BASE
With several items of equipment, with different ratings, it is not usually possible to pick
base values so that they are always the same as the nameplate ratings. It is then nec-
essary to recalculate the per unit values on the new basis. The key idea is that Zp.ll.
depends on ZB, but, of course, Zactllal does not. We note the relationship between old
and new values:
Z
actllal
= zald zald = znewznew
p.ll. B p.ll. B (5.32)
Then
zald
znew _ zald B
p.u. - p.u. Z'lr
void ]2 Snew
_ zald _8_ _8_
- p.ll. [ v~ew S'Bld
(5.33)
Note.- In applying (5.33), we can substitute three-phase and/or line-line values.
Example 5.13
A three-phase generator has TMvenin output reactance X = 0.2 p.u. based on a gen-
erator nameplate rating of 13.2 kY, 30,000 kYA. The new base is 13.8 kY, 50,000 kYA.
Find new X in p.u.
Solution Using (5.33) with three-phase quantities,
13.2)2 50,000
x~e: = 0.2 ( 13.8 30,000 = 0.305 p.u.
164 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System ' Chap. 5
S.B. PER UNIT ANALYSIS OF NORMAL SYSTEM
If we have a normal system, we can greatly simplify the solution of the usual power
system problem by using an impedance diagram. The rationale was described in Sec-
tion 5.5 and the procedure is summarized as follows.
Procedure for a per unit analysis
1. Pick a voltampere base for the whole system.

2. Pick one base voltage arbitrarily. Relate all the others by the ratio of the mag-
nitudes of the open-circuit line voltages of each transformer bank.
3. Find the impedance bases in the different sections and express all impedances
in consistent per unit terms.
4. Draw the impedance diagram for the entire system, and solve for desired per
unit quantities.
5. Convert back to actual quantities if desired.
In step 1 it is convenient to pick the three-phase voltampere rating of one of the

generators or transformer banks. In step 2 it is convenient to pick as a base voltage
the rated voltage of the unit picked in step 1. In this case in step 3, the manufactur-
er's specification of impedance in per unit may be used directly. If not, in step 3 use
(5.33). In step 4 we note that the impedance diagram will not have phase shifters or
ideal transformers. Finally, we note that for a normal system the procedure described
in step 2 is feasible; we get a consistent set of base voltages.
The procedure is illustrated in the next two examples.
Example 5.14
Consider a system with the one-line diagram shown in Figure EQ;l4(a). The three-
phase transformer nameplate ratings are listed. The transformer reactances are given
in percent; 10% = 0.1 p.u. The transmission line and load impedances are in actual
ohms. The generator terminal voltage (magnitude) is 13.2 kV (line-line). Find the
generator current, the transmission-line current, the load current, the load voltage, and
the power delivered to the load.
o CD. ~ ~. ® ~l ~ ~ tv 0) •
; Zioad = 300
13.2 kV K L
ZL = 10 + jIOO
5 MVA IOMVA
13.2<1 - 132Y kV 138Y - 69<1 kV
XII = 10%
Figure E5.14(al
~""'
(
,
.. '."'.'
Sec, 5.8 Per Unit Analysis of Normal System 165
Solution The system is normal, and we can ignore transformation,induced phase

shifts. We wish to derive an impedance diagram. In Figure E5.l4(a), three sections
(1,2, and 3) are identified. We will need to pick appropriate bases for these three
sections.
Step 1: Pick a' common 53J for the entire system; for example, pick
51'" = lOMVA.
Step 2: Pick one voltage base: for example, V~B = 138 kY. Relate the other
voltage bases by ratios of transformer (line-line) voltage ratings:
V~B = 13,8 kY, V~B = 69 kY. Here the subscripts refer to the labeled sec-
tions, 1,2, and 3.
Step 3: Find the impedance bases for the three sections using (5.31), and calcu-
late the per unit line and load impedance values.
(69 X 103)2 300
l38 = 10 X 106 = 476 =i' lload = 476 = 0.63 p.u.
_ (138 X 103)2 _ _ -3'
Z'B - 6 - 1904,* Zline - 5.25 X 10 (1 + ] 10) p.u,
- 10 X 10
Using (5.33), we can express XI! relative to the new base values.
We do not have to recalculateX/2, because the base values are the same as the
nameplate values. Thus
XI2 = 0,08 p.u.
Finally, we express the source (line-line) voltage ih per unit.

13.2
IEsl = 13.8 = 0.96 p.u.
To do the circuit analysis it is convenient to pick Es = 0.96 L2.: p.u., but since
this choice is arbitrary, there is no significance to the absolute phases of the
quantities resulting from the analysis.
Step 4: We are now able to draw the impedance diagram [Figure E5.l4(b)]. The
points labeled KLMN correspond to the points similarly labeled on the one-
line diagram. The element values shown are expressed in per unit. We next
find Ipu. by circuit analysis.
0.96 0.96
Ip.u = ltot.l = 0.709 /26.4° = 1.35 /-26.4°
Note that the same Ipu. represents different actual currents in sections 1,2, and
3 because the base values are different. Calculating the load voltage,
Vip.u. = 0.63Ipu = 0.8505 /-26.4°
Example 5.16
Prepare a per phase schematic of the system shown in Figure E5.16 and show all
impedances in p.u. on a 100-MVA, 132-kV base in the transmission-line circuit. The
necessary data for this problem are as follows:
GI : 50 MYA, 12.2 kV, X = 0.15 p.u.

G2: 20 MY A, 13.8 kV, X = 0.15 p.u.
TI : 80 MYA, 12.2/ 16lkV, X = 0.10 p.u.

T2: 40 MYA, 13.8/161 kV, X = 0.10 p.u.
Load: 50 MVA, 0.80 PF lagging, operating at 154 kV
Determine the p.u. impedance of the load for the following cases:
a. Load modeled as a series combination of resistance and inductance

h. Load modeled as a parallel combination of resistance and inductance
\ 4O.jloon
20 +j800 I 20 +j800
r T2
~~
~Load
Figure E5.1S(a)
Solution This example illustrates the various steps in deriving the p.u. representation
of the system. Note that the data presented are in p.u. on a base specified for each com-
ponent. This would be typically provided by the manufacturer. In the following analy-
sis, we will convert all these quantities to a common system base that ,has been specified
in the transmission circuit. fJ
Base kV in the transmission line = 132 kV
Base kV in the generator circuit GI = 132 X ~!.~ = 10.002 kV
Base kV in the generator circuit G2 = 132 X ~~.: = 11.31 kV

Note: Once the base voltage is specified in the transmission-line circuit, the base volt-
age in all other circuits is determined by the ratio of the magnitudes of the open-
circuit line voltages of the appropriate transformer bank connecting the circuits. This
is step 2 in the procedure described earlier.
·"l. r.<
( Sec. 5.8 Per Unit Analysis of Normal System 169
I We now proceed to convert all the parameter values to p.u. on the common base
specified.
100 (12.2)2
GI : X = 0.15 X 50 X 10.002 = 0.4463 p.u.
100 ( 13.8 )2
G2 : X = 0.15 X 20 X 11.31 = 1.1166 p.u.
100 (12.2)2 100 (161)2

T I : X = 0.1 X 80 X 10.002 = 0.1 X 80 X 132 = 0.18596 p.u.
T : X = 0.1 X 100 X ( 13.8)2 = 0.1 X 100 X (161)2 = 0.3719 ..

2 40 11.31 40 132 Pu
(132?
The base impedance in the transmission-line circuit = -iOQ = 174.24 n.
40 + j160 .
ZTrans.line = 174.24 = 0.2296 + JO.9183 p.u.
The p.ll. impedance of the transmission lines connecting the load bus to the high-
voltage buses is given by
20 + j80 .
Z = 174.24 = 0.1148 + J0.4591 p.u.
The base impedance in the load circuit is the same as the base impedance in the trans-
mission-line circuit.
The load is specified as 50(0.8 + jO.6) = 40 + j30 MYA.
(a) Series Combination of Resistance and Inductance. From Eq. (2.23),

(154)2
zSeries*
Load
=- - - = 379.456 - ,'284.592 n
40 + j30
ZI;;;:~s = 379.456 + j284.529 n

Series _ 379.456 + j284.592 _ .
ZLoad - 174.24 - 2.18 + ,1.63 p.u.
(b) Parallel Combination of Resistance and Inductance

From Example 2.3 we note that
(154? 592.9
RParallel
Load
= -40- = 592.9 n = - - = 3 402 P u.
174.24"
(154)2 790.53
RParallel
Load
= -30- = 790.53 n = - - = 4537
174.24 .
Pu
..
.~-.""..
<f""

f
The impedance diagram showing all the parameters in p.ll. on the selected base for the
case where the load is represented as a combination of Rand L in parallel is shown in
Figure E5 .16(b).
0.2296 jO.9183
0.1148 j0.4591 j0.4591 0.1148
Load
j4.537
Figure E5.1B(b) Impedance diagram with per unit representation.
We conclude this section with a summary of some of the advantages of the per
unit system for analysis.
1. The system is simplified by elimination of transformers in the per phase diagram.

2. Constants are more uniform. Actual ohmic values differ widely for equipment
of different sizes (ratings) but are fairly constant when expressed in per unit.
This makes it possible to estimate unknown per unit impedances and/or spot ob-
vious data errors.
3. The numbers coming out of the analysis are more easily interpreted physical-
ly. For example, suppose that there is a line drop of 50 V (actual). The num-
ber in itself does not have much significance.. Relative to a 50-kV base it is
negligible, but on a 500-V base it is excessive. Expressed in pelQlnit we see its
relative size.
Finally, we note that for simplicity, we have described the procedure for per
unit normalization of normal systems; however, the normalization may be applied
more generally. In this case, although it is not possible to eliminate all the ideal trans-
formers and/or phase shifters, the per unit normalization still offers many advantages.
5.9 REGULATING TRANSFORMERS FOR VOLTAGE

AND PHASE ANGLE CONTROL
We wish to consider briefly the use of so-called regulating transformers to adjust volt-
age magnitude and/or phase. These transformers add a small component of voltage,
typically less than 0.1 p.u., to the line or phase voltages. In the case of voltage mag-
Sec. 5.9 Regulating Transformers for Voltage and Phase Angle Control 171
Series transformers
A Van
( ~
C>------t------.. r-'-----{)a' Va'n = Van +A Van
Exciting
transformer
Figure 5.25 Regulating transformer for voltage control.
nitude control a setup similar to Figure 5.25 is employed, An adjustable portion of

the voltage V;m is fed into the primary of the series transformer whose secondary is
in series with phase a, Similarly we add voltages to Vbn and Ycn. Assuming ideal
transformers, it is easy to grasp the basic voltage-boosting mechanism. This device
is used to maintain voltage automatically on radial feeders under varying load con-
ditions. In loop systems it is also used to control reactive power flow.
We note that voltage magnitude may also be controlled by using so-called tap
changing transformers. Several steps of secondary voltage ranging from ± 10 % of the
nominal secondary voltage may be obtained.
Voltage phase angle may be adjusted by the system of Figure 5.26. Windings
shown in parallel are the primary and secondary of the same single-phase trans-
former. We can best understand the operation by assuming ideal transformers. Then
Ycc' = PV.b, Vaa' = PVbe> Vw = pYca, where p is a small positive number. Noting that
Va'b"= Va'q + Vab + Vbb,

Vab + p( Vca - Vbc)
and assuming a positive-sequence set of voltages V.b, Vbc' and Yc.. we find
Va'b' = Vab + p( ej2rr/ 3 - e - j21r/3) Vab

Vab(l + jpV3)
,.....--t-------o a'
'----ob'
'--+-----0 c' Figure 5.26 Regulating trans-

former for phase angle control.
Thus Va'b' leads Yah' The phases of the remaining voltages are similarly advanced.
By adjusting p (i.e., the taps on the secondaries), the phase advance is adjustable.
For small p the voltage magnitude is relatively unaffected.
We next consider an application. Suppose that there are two transmission links
in parallel and that their reactances are the same. Then they will share the trans-
mitted power equally since they both have the same power angle. On the other hand,
it may be that their thermal limits are different and we would like to load them in-
dependently. This is where the phase-angle control we have been describing can be
used effectively, to increase the power angle of the link with the higher thermal limit.
We note that if regulating transformers are used, the system in general is no
longer normal. In that case the impedance diagram has real or complex ideal trans-
formers even after the per unit normalization.
We will now illustrate the functions of regulating transformers by means of ex-
amples. Figure 5.27(a) shows two transformer banks in parallel. This is similar to the
ll'J-TlIi
o-C 12
I: n'
(a)
Tz Ii
Vz
Load
I I:ii = n'lnl Figure 5.27 Parallel trans-
• L ideal I
I _____
(b)
former banks with different volt-
age ratios.
Sec. 5.9 Regulating Transformers for Voltage and Phase Angle Control 173
arrangement in Example 5.6 but in the present case there is a mismatch in turns ratio
(rather than in connection-induced phase shift). Suppose the first transformer bank
(T 1) has an open-circuit voltage ratio of n that is the same as the base voltage ratio
across the transformer bank. Then, after per unit normalization, the ideal trans-
former in the per phase transformer model disappears, leaving only the per unit se-
ries reactance Xl .
Suppose the second transformer bank (T2) has an open-circuit voltage ratio of
n'. What happens in the per unit normalization of this transformer (in which the base
voltage ratio is n)? To see what happens, consider the replacement of the ideal trans-
former (with a voltage ratio n') by an equivalent connection consisting of the cas-
cade of an ideal transformer with voltage ratio n and an ideal transformer with voltage
ratio n= n'/ n. After per unit normalization the transformer with voltage ratio n dis-
appears, leaving the ideal transformer with voltage ratio n= n' / n in series with the
per unit reactance X2 • This is shown in Figure 5.27(b). Note: Figure 5.27(b) can also
be viewed as a model for two transmission lines in parallel with a regulating trans-
former in one of the lines.
We will now consider in more detail two examples which demonstrate the ef-
fect of regulating transformers.
Example 5.17
Buses 1 and 2 are connected through parallel transformer TI with XI = jO.2 , and Tz
with X2 = j 004. Bus 2 is a load bus supplying a current Iload = 1.05/-45°.
Vi = 1~. Find the complex power transmitted to the load through each transformer
if Tz is a regulating transformer providing a 5% voltage magnitude boost (i.e.,
Ii = 1.05).
Solution Putting the specified values into Figure 5.27(b), we get Figure E5.l7.
jO.2
Figure ES.17 Equivalent circuit

for Example 5.17.
Using KCL and KVL, we get

1'1 + I; = 1.05/-45° (1)
1
VI = Ii! + jO.2Ii = 1.05 ~ + jOA X 1.051; (2)
Simplifying the second equation, we get

- jO.2Ii + jO.42I; = 0.0476 (3)
174 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System Chap. 5 l
Solving (1) and (3), we get
Ii = 0.5030 - j0.4262 (4)
I; = 0.2395 - j0.3163 (5)
Since V; = 1 ~,it is simple to specify the power supplied by each transformer bank:
Sri = 1{Ii* = 0.5030 + j0.4262 (6)
Sr, = VzN = 0.2395 + j0.3163 (7)
Suppose both transformers had the same turns ration n. Then Ii = 1, and a simple cal-
culation yields
Sri = 0.4950 + j 0.4950 (8)
Sr, = 0.2475 + jO.2475 (9)
Comparing (6) and (7) to (8) and (9), we observe that in the case where the regulat-
ing transformer boosted the voltage, the reactive powers delivered to the load were sig-
nificantly different from the case without the voltage boost. The active powers were
not significantly changed. This example illustrates that a regulating transformer that
affects voltage magnitude can be used to control reactive power flows in power systems.
Stated differently, we observe the close "coupling" between voltage magnitude changes
and reactive power flows. We will address this issue again in Chapter 10.
In the following example we will consider the effect of a phase-shifting regu-

lating transformer and examine the effects of phase shifting on complex power flows.
Example 5.18
Consider a setup similar to the one in Example 5.17. This time, however, instead of
boosting the voltage magnitude oftransformer T2 , we advance its phase by 3°, leaving
its voltage gain at unity. Assume VI is adjusted so that VI remains constant at a value
Vz = 1~. As in Example 5.17, the load current is 1.05 /-45°. We leave the modi-
fication of Figure E5.l7 in the present case to the reader. (The only#1ange needed
is to replace the ideal transformer with a phase shifter that advances the voltage phase
angle by 3°.)
Solution We have
Ii + I; = 1.05 /-45° (1)
VI = 1 ~ + jO.21Ii = 1 /-3° + jO.4I; /-3° (2)
Simplifying (2), we have
Ii - 2.01; /-3° = -0.2617 + jO.0069 (3)
Solving (1) and (3), we get
Ii = 0.3991 - j0.5044 (4)
I; = 0.3434 - j0.2381 (5)
Sec. 5.10 Autotransformers 175
and the power supplied by each transformer is

Sr, = V1I'I* = 0.3991 + j0.5044 (6)
Sr, = V1I2* = 0.3434 + jO.2381 (7)
Suppose we didn't have the 3° phase advance (i.e., the voltage regulator Tzhad a phase
advance of 0°) (and the turns ratio was still n). It is very easy to calculate Ii and 12 in
this case. In fact, we have already done so at the end of Example 5.l7. The result is
repeated here.
Sr, = 0.4950 + j0.4950 (8)
Sr, = 0.2475 + j0.2475 (9)
Comparing (6) and (7) to (8) and (9), we see that the regulator phase shift has signif-
icantly affected the active power flow through the transformers but has left the reac-
tive power flow relatively unchanged. The results indicate that the phase-shifting
transformer can be used to control active power flow. Stated differently, this example
illustrates the close coupling between phase angle changes and active power flows.
We will address this issue again in Chapter 10.
5.10 AUTOTRANSFORMERS
Autotransformers are ordinary transformers connected in a special manner. The pri-

mary and secondary windings are electrically connected and also mutually coupled.
This type of a connection results in lower cost, smaller size and weight, improved
voltage regulation, and higher efficiency. The performance of such a device is in-
vestigated using a conventional two-winding ideal transformer. Figure 5.28( a) shows
an ideal transformer. The two windings in the ideal transformer are connected elec-
trically as shown in Figure 5.28(b) to form an autotransformer. In the connection
shown the voltages of the two windings add up. The winding could also be connect-
ed such that the voltages oppose each other.
Iz
+
:J[J NI Nz
(a)
+
(b)
Figure 5.28 [a] Two-winding
transformer compared with
[b) autotransformer.
176 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit SysterT} Chap. 5
Example 5.19
A 60-kVA single-phase transformer rated 2400/240 V is connected as an autotrans-
former as shown in Figure 5.28(b). Rated voltage IV]I = 2400 V is applied to the high-
voltage winding of the transformer.
a) Compute the voltage rating VOUI of the high voltage when the transformer is
connected as an autotransformer.
b) Compute the kVA rating of the autotransformer.
c) If the losses in the winding at rated load are given to be 1004 W, determine the
full-load efficiency as an autotransformer at 0.80 power factor.
Solution
60,000
a) 11]1 = 2400 = 25 A
60,000
1121 = 240 = 250 A
IVaul1 = 240 + 2400 = 2640 V

b) The input current is
IIinl = 11]1 + 1121 = 25 + 250 = 275 A

The input kVArating is
IIinl X IV] I = 275 X 2400 = 660 kVA
The output kVA rating is
1121 X IVourl = 250 X 2640 = 660 kVA
c) When connected as an autotransformer as shown in Figure 5.28(b), we note that
the same current that flows through the individual windings of the two-winding
transformer flows through the windings of the autotra~former. Hence, the
losses are the same as for the two-winding transforme~ This is given to be
1004 W. The output of the autotransformer at 0.80 power factor is
(0.80)(660,000) = 528,000 W. The efficiency is therefore
output 528,000
'1/ = output + losses = 528,000 + 1004 = 0.9981
The increase in the kilovoltampere rating from 60 kVA to 660 kVA and in the output
voltage from 240 V to 2640 V demonstrates the advantage of the autotransformer. We
also note that the efficiency of the autotransformer is so high because the losses are
those corresponding to transforming only 60 kVA.
Three-phase autotransformers for Y-Y operation can be built using three

single-phase transformers connected as described in Section 5.2, or a three-phase
unit can be constructed. These transformers are used to connect transmission lines
~......•
r~·
J Sec. 5.11 Transmission Line and Transformers 177
operating at different voltage levels. The rating of a three-phase Y-Y autotrans-

former constructed using three of the single-phase transformers used in Example
5.19 would be 1.98 MVA, 4157/4572 V.
5.11 TRANSMISSION LINE AND TRANSFORMERS
We conclude this chapter by joining the transmission-line model developed in Chap-

ter 4 with the transformer model. Consider one particular transmission link joining
two buses, as shown in Figure 5.29.
I I
I I
vITI ,(2
! ~~~____L_in_e____~~~ i
t. y Y t. Figure 5.29 Transmission link.
Assuming a normal system and per phase, per unit analysis, we may use the
simplified circuit diagram in Figure 5.24 for the transformers and the circuit in Fig-
ure 4.3 for the transmission line. The most detailed description, including transformer
resistances, gives us the circuit shown in Figure 5.30.
In almost all cases we can simplify this circuit. The transformer resistances and
magnetizing reactances are usually neglected; for short lines the other shunt elements
are also neglected. In this case we end up with a very simple series RL circuit join-
ing buses 1 and 2.
In any case we are usually only interested in terminal (two-port) behavior and
can calculate whichever two-port parameters are desired from Figure 5.30. In Chap-
ter 9 we will be interested in the two-port admittance parameters. These may be cal-
culated by doing circuit analysis on Figure 5.30. The following example illustrates one
among several techniques for accomplishing this.
+ +
Transformer Transmission line Transformer
Figure 5.30 Impedance diagram for line section.

T
l
Example 5.20
Given the circuit of Figure 5.30, find an expression for the two-port admittance param-
eters.
Solution Using nodal analysis, we find that
We next suppress VJ and ~. This is conveniently done by matrix algebra. The pre-
ceding is in the form
where I and V are the terminal quantities of interest and we seek to eliminate V. Thus
we get two matrix equations:
1= AuV + A12 V'

0= A21 V + A22V'
Using the second equation, we solve for V' in terms of V and then substitute in the first
equation. The result is
where Y is the desired 2 X 2 matrix of two-port admittance parameters. We assume

that A22 has the required inverse.
Example 5.21
Suppose that we neglect resistances in the circuit in Figure 5.30 and assume that
ZI = ZJ = Z5 = jO.1 and 12 = Y4 = jO.Ol. Thus, we are assuming inductive series
elements and (net) capacitive shunt elements.
(a) Find the two-port admittance parameters.

(b) Find a n-equivalent circuit having the same two-port admittance parameters.
Solution (a) Using results of Example 5.20, we have All = - jl0 X 1 and
AI2 = A21 = jl0 x 1, where 1 is the 2 X 2 identity matrix. Also,
A _ .[-19.99 10 ]
22 - J 10 -19.99
with inverse
A-I _ 1 [-19.99 -10 ]

22 - j299.6 -10 -19.99
Performing the indicated matrix operations, we get the two-port admittance matrix
Y - A - A A -IA _ [- j3.328 j3338]

- II 12 22 21 - j3.338 - j3328
This completes part (a).

(b) The reader should check that the D-equivalent circuit with the same two-
port admittance matrix is as shown in Figure ES.21. We note that
Y '" Y2 = Y4 = jO.Ol and Z "" ZI + 23 + Z5 = jOJOOO. This suggests some sim-
plifications in deriving the D-equivalent circuit.
Z = jO.2996
O>--I--''m''~-I'''--O
Y.:.OI I r:'01 Figure ES.21
In any case, for a normal system we can always find a D-equivalent circuit for a
transmission link, given the two-port admittance parameters. In this way we model a
transmission link by a very simple circuit composed of three elements.
Our system model is now complete enough to consider a very basic and im-
portant problem called the problem of power (or load) flow analysis. We will do this
in Chapter to.
5.12 SUMMARY -
In this chapter we have derived per phase models for the four most common types
of interconnections of let> transformers to make up 3et> banks. The model consists of
the cascade of a network of reactances and either a conventional ideal transformer
(in the case of the Y-Y or Ll-Ll connection) or a complex ideal transformer (in the
case of the Ll-Y or Y-Ll connection). For the conventional ideal transformer, in going
from primary to secondary the voltage gain is n, the current gain is lin, the (complex)
power gain is 1, and any secondary impedance referred to the primary is multiplied
by lln 2• In the case of the complex ideal transformer, we get, corresponding to the
foregoing,K, 1/K*, 1, and 1/IKI2, where the voltage gain K is a complex number that
depends on the turns ratio of the Ie/> transformers, the type of interconnection, and
on whether we are operating in a positive- or negative-sequence mode.
There are some simplifications and other advantages to introducing the per
unit normalization. In this case, in the usual type of analysis problem involving a
normal system, all ideal and complex ideal transformers may be eliminated from the
circuit diagram.
The impedance diagram for a transmission link composed of a transmission
line terminated at both ends by 3e/> transformer banks may be further simplified.
Using circuit analysis, we obtain a TI-equivalent circuit with only three impedances.
PROBLEMS
5.1. An ideal1r/J transformer has a voltage gain of 10. The secondary is terminated in a load
impedance ZL = 30 + j40 n.
(a) Find the (primary) driving-point impedance.
(b) If the primary voltage is 120 V, find the primary current, secondary current, complex
power into the load, and complex power into the transformer primary.
5.2. In Figure P5.2, the transformer is ideal. Find the (primary) driving-point impedance (at
the terminals a-n) for the circuit.
(a) As shown.
(b) With nand n' solidly connected.
Hint: In part (b) assume that Van = 1 V and find the current fa.
4.5 n
1,
a 0-_-4---,
+
Ion
1:10 n' Figure P5 .•
5.3. A 120/240-V 1r/J transformer is connected as an "autotransformer" (Figure P5.3). Sup-

pose that VI = 12012: and the transformer is ideal. Find "2, f 2, and fl'
JC 1:2
Ratings: primary, 120 V
secondary, 240 V
+
7n
j8 n
Autotransformer connection
Figure P5.3
Chap 5 Problems 181
5.4. A 1rjJ transformer has the following ratings: 10 kVA, 240/2400 V. In the open-circuit test
with rated primary voltage (240 V), the primary current is 0.85 A and the secondary volt-
age is 2400 V. A short-circuit test is performed as follows: The primary is short circuit-
ed and a reduced secondary voltage is applied. Rated secondary current is achieved
with a secondary voltage of 121 V. Neglect resistance and find XI, XIII' and n = N2/ NI
(i.e., the circuit elements in Figure 5.4).
5.5. A 24-kV feeder (line) supplies a 1rjJ load through a step-down transformer. The feeder
impedance is 50 + j400 fl, the transformer voltage rating is 24/2.4kV, and the (series)
impedance is 0.2 + j 1.0 fl referred to the low-voltage side. The feeder sending-end
voltage, IV; I, is adjusted so that at full load, 200 kW at 0.9 PF lagging is supplied to the
load at a voltage IVLlfullload = 2300 V.
(a) Find 1\1,1.
(b) Find IVRI, the feeder receiving-end voltage.
(c) Find the overall transmission efficiency [i.e., 7j = Pload/(Pload + Plosses)]'
(d) Suppose that the load is now removed while IV,I remains unchanged at its value
found in part (a). We then find IVLlnoload = 0.11\1, I. Find the "percent voltage reg-
ulation," where
. IVL1no load - IVLlfullload
percent voltage regulatIOn = IV 1 X 100
L full load
5.6. To see the effect of variations in power factor on efficiency and voltage regulation, re-
peat parts (a), (c), and (d) in Problem 5.5 with PF = 0.7 lagging. Is the regulation bet-
ter or worse? Better means less variation between no-load and full-load voltage
magnitude. Is the efficiency better or worse?
5.7. In Figure P5.7, the voltages at a, b, and c are balanced 3rjJ. Transformers are ideal and
have the same turns ratio. Find the voltages Va'd, VH(, , and Ve'a' in terms of Vab , Vbe ,
and Vew
(a) Are they balanced 3rjJ?
(b) If not, how would you reconnect the transformers to obtain balanced 3rjJ?
('
• '--ill..V'-~
Figure PS.7
5.S. The transformers shown in Figure P5.8 are labeled in a nonstandard manner. Assume
that the 1rjJ transformers are ideal (each with voltage gain n) and find the positive-
sequence per phase equivalent circuit relating Va'j(" to \1,,, .
182 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System Ct"\ilp. 5
d--!---_-<lC'
H:----t--<la'
H:----t--<lb'
n
Figure PS.S
5.9. Given the strange connection of 14> transformers shown in Figure PS.9, assume
E. = Eb = Ec = 1LQ: and find f•.
1,
a'
n = Nl/NI = 2
c' Xj=O.!
R = O.!
b'
Figure PS.9
5.10. A 10-MVA 34> load is to be served by a 34> transformer bank at a (line-line) voltage of
13.8 kV. The supply-side (line-line) voltage is 138 kV. Various 14> transformers are avail-
able in the warehouse but all have windings with voltage ratings under 100 kV and cur-
rent ratings under 250 A.
(a) Is it possible to serve the load using only three 14> transformers?
(b) If so, specify the 34> connection and the low- and high-voltage ratings ofthe 14> trans-
formers.
5.11. We are given the connection of 14> transformers shown in Figure P5.11. The primaries
are on the left. For each 14> transformer, n = 1, XI = 150 flo The voltage sources are
positive-sequence with Va" = Va·,,· = 8.0 kV ~. Use the per phase circuit in Figure 5.18
and find fa and f;.
Chap 5 Problems 183
I, l',
c' b'
Figure PS.11
5.12. We are given the standard step-down connection shown in Figure P5.12. The primary
is on the right side. Assume that the voltage sources are positive-sequence with i-
Vab = 13.8 kV LQ:. The transformer banks are made up of l¢ transformers:
Xl = 1.0 n, n = NJ Nl = 10.
(a) Find lao I~, V,.&, and sitad using the per phase equivalent circuit of Figure 5.18. Note:
The diagram needs to be reversed.
(b) Repeat part (a) but neglect the connection-induced phase shifts in Figure 5.18.
(c) Compare the results in parts (a) and (b).
I, I',
R = 2n
R II'
c'
Figure PS.12
5.13. (a) Repeat Example 5.6 with Zload removed. Compare the circulating current with the
result in the text.
(b) Repeat part (a) with the leakage reactances reduced by a factor of 2. How does
this affect the size of the circulating current?
5.14. A l¢ generator is represented by a Thevenin equivalent circuit: 1320 V in series with
Z, = 2 M n. A load, ZL = 50 M n, is connected across the terminals. Draw per I·
I
unit diagrams for the following choices of bases.
(a) VB = 1000 V, SB = 100 kVA
(b) VB = 1320V,SB = 50kVA
I
Using the per unit diagrams, do circuit analysis to find the per unit load voltage, current,
and complex power in each case. Convert per unit quantities to actual quantities and
show they are the same in both cases.
.
Chap. 5
5.15. Draw an impedance diagram for the system whose one-line diagram is shown in Figure
P5.l5. The 3c/J and line-line ratings are as follows:
Generator: 30 MVA, 13.8 kV, Xs = 0.10 p.u.
Motor: 20 MVA, 13.8 kV, Xs = 0.08 p.u.
T): 20 MVA, 13.2-132 kV, XI = 0.10 p.u.
T2: 15 MVA, 13.8-138 kV, XI = 0.12 p.u.
Line: 20 + j100!1(actual)
Pick the generator ratings for the bases in the generator section.
TI ~
Generator O-i ~~---------~~ ~ Motor

t,. y y t,.
Figure PS.1S
5.16. Using the impedance diagram in Problem 5.15, assume that the motor voltage is 13.2
kV when the motor draws 15 MW at a power factor of 0.85 leading.
(a) Find the following quantities in per unit: motor current, transmission-line current,
generator current, generator terminal voltage, sending-end transmission-line volt-
age, and complex power supplied by generator.
(b) Convert the per unit quantities found in part (a) into actual units (i.e., amperes, volts,
and voltamperes).
5.17. Using the impedance diagram in Problem 5.15, assume that the motor is replaced by a
wye-connected load impedance with ZL = 20 ~ !1 in each leg. The generator ter-
minal voltage is 13.2 kV. Find the voltage and current at the load in per unit and actu-
al units.
5.18 Draw an impedance diagram for the system whose one-line diagram is shown in Figure
P5.18. The 3c/J and line-line ratings are as follows:
Generator G: 15 MVA, 13.8 kV, X = 0.15 p.u.
Motor M1: 5 MVA, 13.8 kV, X = 0.15 p.u.
Motor M2: 5 MVA, 14.4 kV, X = 0.15 p.u.
T): 25 MVA, 13.2 - 161 kV, X = 0.1 p.u.
T2 : 15 MVA, 13.8 -161 kV, X = 0.1 p.u.
Line: j100!1 (actual)
Select a base of 100 MVA and 161 kV in the transmission line.
Figure PS.18
Chap 5 Problems 185
5.19 Draw an impedance diagram for the system whose one-line diagram is shown in Figure
P5.19. The 3<jJ and line-line ratings are as follows:
Generator Gj : 50 MVA, 13.8 kV, X = 0.15 p.u.
Generator Gz: 20 MVA, 14.4 kV, X = 0.15 p.u.
Motor M: 20 MVA, 14.4 kV, X == 0.15 p.u.
TI : 60 MVA, 13.2 - 161 kV, X == 0.10 p.u.
Tz: 25 MVA, 13.2 - 161 kV, X == 0.10 p.u.
T3: 25 MVA, 13.2 - 161 kV, X = 0.10 p.u.
Line1: 20 + j80 n (actual)
Line2: 10 + j40n (actual)
Line3: 10 + j 40 n (actual)
Load: 20 + j15 MVA at 12.63 kV
TI T,
~~---=~~~
Figure P5.19
5.20 In the circuit shown in Figure P5.20 the two transformers have the following reactances
on a 100-MVA base: XI = 0.10 p.u., X2 == 0.14 p.u. Transformer Tz is equipped with a tap
changer. It is required to adjust the tap on Tz so that the flow through Tz is reduced by
12 MVAr, which is to be picked up by TI • Find the tap position for T2 needed to obtain
the desired flow. Assume a load current of 0.8 - jO.6 p.u. (Note: Assume nominal volt-
age in the circuit.)
Ptb T2 ' Figure PS.20
5.21 Two transformers are connected in parallel to supply a load with impedance to neutral
per phase of 0.6 + jO.8 per unit at a voltage of V, == 1.025LQ::per unit. One of the trans-
formers has a voltage ratio equal to the ratio of the base voltages on the two sides of the
transformer. This transformer has an impedance ofjO.2 per unit on the appropriate base.
The other transformer also has an impedance of jO.2 per unit on the same base but has a
186 Transformer Modeling and the Per Unit System Chep. 5
secondary winding tap setting of 1.06 times that of the first transformer. Find the com-
plex power transmitted to the load through each transformer.
5.22 A 11,500/2300-Vtwo-winding transformer is rated at 100 kVA. If this transformer is con-
nected as an autotransformer, what will be the new voltage ratio and output?
5.23 A load of 100 kVA is to be supplied at 460 V from a 2300-V supply by an autotrans-
former. Determine the current and voltage rating for each of the two windings. What
would be the kVA rating of the transformer if it were used as a two-winding transformer?

This problem continues to build on the design exercise D4.l introduced in Chap-
ter 4.
In the Report Requirements, item (e), the actual impedances of all the trans-
mission lines in the system were calculated. In addition, the data provided the re-
actances of the transformers. For the system you designed in Problem D4.l
calculate all the impedances on a 100-MVA base, with a voltage base of161 kV or
69 kV as appropriate. Transformer reactance (neglect resistance) is 0.08 p.u. on·
the transformer base. Create a table showing all the parameters in p.ll.
-
•
CHAPTER 6- _- -
Generator Modeling I
(Machine Viewpoint)
6.0 INTRODUCTION
We now wish to turn our attention to the generators that supply complex power to
the loads through the transmission system. We will consider the means by which the
active and reactive power supplied to each generator bus may be adjusted and gain
an appreciation for the limitations on the available complex power. For this purpose
it is appropriate to consider a steady-state model of the generator.
In this chapter we derive a steady-state generator model based on considera-
tion of the rotating fields in the generator due to field and stator currents. This em-
phasis on the fields is the heart of the classical machine viewpoint and is very
successful in giving clear physical descriptions of the basic voltage generation mech-
anism, of armature reaction, and of the physical significance of direct-axis and
quadrature-axis reactances.
The machine viewpoint is not quite as clear when transients or non positive-
sequence operating conditions are considered. In Chapter 7, therefore, when we con-
sider these more general cases, we will adopt a circuit point of view as an alternative.
This provides an easier development of a more general generator model.
We limit our discussion to ac generators (synchronous generators, alternators)
driven by steam, hydro, or gas turbines or possibly diesel engines. At this time these
are the only significant sources of electrical energy supplied to power systems.
It should be noted that the theory of synchronous generators and synchronous
motors is the same. For this reason we sometimes use the terminology synchronous
machine to cover both motors and generators.
6.1 CLASSICAL MACHINE DESCRIPTION
The single-phase ac generator described in elementary physics textbooks consists of

a coil (loop of wire) rotating in a uniform field. The ac voltage is brought out through
slip rings. In practical large ac generators the field rotates and the ac coils are
187
188 Generator Modeling I (Machine Viewpoint] Chap. 6
stationary. A consideration of the higher currents, voltages, and winding complexity

on the ac side makes this the more feasible arrangement. Thus, we have a rotating
part called a rotor or field and a stationary part called a stator. A schematic of the cross
section of such a machine is shown in Figure 6.1. In the figure the two sides of each
coil are designated by a letter and its prime. For example, the a phase coil in the hor-
izontal plane is designated by the letters a and a' . The reference directions for the
currents are indicated in the usual way by arrows. In this case, in cross section we see
the point of the arrow coming out of the page, and the feathers of the arrow going into
the page. We may then find the associated reference directions for voltage and flux.
The rotor and stator are made of high-permeability iron to achieve a high ratio
of flux density to mmf. The figure is highly schematic. We show each phase winding
as if it were a single turn (the wires aa ' , bb ' , cc' are connected at the back) placed
in a single pair of stator slots. Actually, it is a multiturn coil physically distributed in
a number of stator slots. Similarly, the field winding mounted on the rotor is a mul-
titurn winding.
The two-pole rotor shown rotates at 3600 revolutions per minute to generate
60 Hz. At this speed the surface speed of a 3.5-ft-diameter rotor is about 450 mi/hr
and the wind resistance is significant even in the low-density hydrogen-gas atmos-
phere that is used. For this reason (among others), in practice, a two-pole rotor
would have a circular cross section. Such a rotor is called a smooth or round or cylin-
drical rotor.
Reference
+ axis
Rotor
axis ~
Air gap ':I
Plane of
coil
aa'
Rotor
Stator
Figure 6.1 Generator cross section.

Sec. 6.2 Voltage Generation 189
The rotor shown in Figure 6.1 is far from smooth. It is of the salient pole type,
a type that is used in lower-speed multipole generators (for example, those driven by
water turbines). Since multipole machines may be analyzed using a two-pole model,
while even smooth rotor two-pole machines have slightly different magnetic prop-
erties in the rotor axis versus cross rotor axis directions (because of the presence of
the field windings), we may take the rotor in Figure 6.1 as the generic rotor.
6.2 VOLTAGE GENERATION
We next wish to consider the generator terminal voltages. Neglecting resistances for
the moment, the terminal voltages depend on the time rate of change of the corre-
sponding flux linkages. Almost all of the flux linking each coil crosses the air gap, from
rotor to stator and back again from stator to rotor; we call this the air-gap flux and
the corresponding voltage is called the air-gap voltage. There is also a small leakage
flux, which does not cross the air gap; the flux surrounding the end turns (i.e., the
connections at the back of the conductors) is a part of this leakage flux. We can use
a leakage inductance to model the effect of the leakage flux.
Considering only the air-gap flux for now, we note that this flux depends col-
lectively on the field current iF and the stator currents ia , ib, and ie • We now make
some assumptions that greatly simplify the analysis.
Assumptions
1. Magnetic circuit is linear.

2. Flux density, B, in the air gap, due to iF alone, is radial and has a spatial distri-
bution as a function of angle given by
B = Bm• x cos (a - 0) (6.1)
where B is the scalar flux density directed outward. The angles a and 0 are de-
fined in Figure 6.1.
3. Each coil consists of N turns concentrated in a single slot.
Assumption 1 is crucial. It permits us to use superposition to find the total air-

gap flux linkages by considering separately the flux linkages due to iF alone (i.e., with
ia = ib = ie = 0), and oUa, ib, and iealone (i.e., with iF = 0). Corresponding to these
two flux linkage components there are two voltage components. The first is the open-
circuit voltage. The second voltage is, less familiar; it is called the armature reaction
voltage. The sum of these two voltages gives the air -gap voltage due to the total air-
gap flux.
Assumption 2 provides for a spatial distribution of flux density, which is a max-
imum (outward) along the rotor axis (i.e., with a = 0) and drops off in a sinusoidal
fashion with angle a - 8. This condition is an objective in generator design and can
be approximated closely by distributing the field windings appropriately and/or by
190 Generator Modeling I [Machine Viewpoint] Chap .• 6
shaping the pole faces. Note the distinction between the angles eand a. eis the
angle the rotor axis (north pole) is "looking" at; a is the more general angle we are
looking at.
Assumption 3 is a step in the direction of considering the realistic case of N
turns per phase winding. For simplicity we assume that all N turns are in the same
slot. This assumption can be relaxed in a more detailed treatment, to account for a
more realistic spatial distribution of conductors.
In Section 6.3 we find the open-circuit flux linkages and voltages. In Section 6.4
we find the effect of the stator currents. In Section 6.5 we find the combined effect
and then finally the generator terminal voltages.
3 OPEN-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
We assume that ia = ib = ic = 0, and consider the flux linkages Aaa, in coil aa' due to
iF alone. From Figure 6.1, using the right-hand rule, we see that Aaa' is positive if the
flux is upward through the coil aa'. Next, using the flux density pattern given in (6.1)
we draw a half-cylindrical Gaussian surface in the air gap and integrate B to find the
total flux <p crossing the surface. This is shown in Figure 6.2.
The flux in the crosshatched rectangular slot at an angle a is
d<p = frBmax cos (a - e) da
Thus, over the whole Gaussian surface,
rT/2
<p = B· ds = fr cos (a - e) da
f f-rT/2
Bmax
= Ur Bmax cos e (6.2)

= <Pmax cos e
t Refer.ence
I aXIs
I
a'
Figure 6.2 Gaussian surface.
Sec. 6.3 Open-Circuit Voltage 191
where rPmax g, Ur Bmax. This confirms the physically obvious fact that the maximum
flux crossing the surface will occur for IJ = 0 (i.e., with the rotor in Figure 6.1 point-
ed straight up).
For this angle Aaa' will also be a maximum. For an N-turn concentrated coil (as-
sumption 3), the expres~ion for flux linkages of coil aa' is
Aaa' = N rPmax cos IJ = Am.x cos IJ (6.3a)
6
where Amax = N rPm.x.
We next find Abb' and Ace' by noting that the flux linkages of coil bb' are a max-
imum when IJ = 120 0 , while coil ee' reaches its maximum at an angle of 240 0 or equiv-
alently -120 0 • Thus
Aw = Amax cos (IJ _ 2;) (6.3b)
Acc' = Amax cos (IJ + 2;) (6.3c)
Returning to consider coil aa' and assuming a uniform rate of rotation of the rotor
(i.e., IJ = wot + lJo), we get
(6.4)
Using the circuits convention on associated reference directions, we find the voltage
dAaa' .
ea'a = -;[I = -wOAm.x sm (wot + lJo) (6.5)
by use of (6.4). The reader may recall from circuit theory that in dealing with gen-
erators or sources it is conventional to define the reference direction for the sources
differently. Accordingly we use eaa' = -ea'a> and instead of (6.5) we get
dAaa' I
eaa, = --;[I I
= woAmax sin (wot + lJo) (6.6)
= Emax cos ( wot + lJo - f)

where Em•x g, woAm.x. The assumption of linearity (assumption 1) implies that Em•x
is proportional to iF' We also note that the voltage eaa'(t) reaches its maximum value
when IJ = wot + lJo = 90 0 (i.e., at the instant the rotor axis in Figure 6.1 is pointed to
the left). We can infer the same result from the phasor diagram relating the (effec-
tive) phasor representations of Aaa,(t) and eaa.(t). Using capital letters for effective
phasors, from (6.4) and (6.6) we have
(6.7)
192 Generator Modeling I (Machine Viewpoint) , Chap. 6
Ead -- Emax j(Oo-7T/2) - _ .woAmax jOo - -' A (6.8)

v2 e - J v2 e - JWo aa'
Thus the phasor Eaa, lags Aaa , by 90°. From this it is clear that eaa , reaches its maxi-
mum value ~ cycle after Aaa, has reached its maximum (i.e., with the rotor pointed
straight up). But in ~ cycle the rotor turns ~ revolution; hence we get the same result
as before.
Example 6.1
Suppose that 90 = 7r/4. Show the directions of Aaa,, Ea." and the rotor position at
t = O.
Solution Using (6.7), (6.8), and IJ = wot + 90, we get the results shown in Figure E6.1.
Note: To obtain the instantaneous eaa,(t) and Aaa,t, we multiply the correspond-
ing phasors by V2ejw~ [which sets them into a counterclockwise (CCW) rotation with
angular velocity wol and take the real parts. Thus, corresponding to the CCW rotation
of the rotor (with angular velocity wo), we have the CCW rotation of the "activated"
phasors. Figure E6.l can then be viewed as the motion frozen at t = O.
Figure EB.1
Exercise 1. To establish firmly the connection between field (rotor) rotation, field
flux linkages, and open-circuit voltage, consider several values of 90 (in 9 = wot + 90)
and sketch the sinusoidal waveforms of Aaa.(t) and eaa.(t).
Returning to the main development, if we now consider the voltages Ebb' and
Eee,, then as a consequence of (6.3) we get a balanced (positive-sequence) set of volt-
ages. We assume that a', b', c' are always connected to a neutral point n and then can
dispense with the double-subscript notation. Thus we will use the single-subscript no-
tation Ea, Eb , Ee.
Exercise 2. Suppose that the rotor is turning clockwise. Show that the voltages
E•. Eb , Ee are now a negative sequence set.
Sec. 6.4 Armature Reaction 193
6.4 ARMATURE REACTION
In the preceding section we assumed that ia = ib = ie = O. In this case the (open-

circuit) terminal voltages are Ea, Eb , and E" where Ea = Eaa' is given by (6.8). If
stator currents flow, they will modify the flux linkages and consequently the ter-
minal voltages will no ronger be Ea, Eb , and Ee. As a step in finding the air-gap
voltage in this case, we consider the effect of armature reaction (i.e., the effect of
these stator currents, acting alone). Thus, suppose that ia,ib,and ie are a balanced
(positive-sequence) set of sinusoidal currents and iF = O. Our initial objective is
to find the air-gap flux and the flux linkages of coil ad associated with these cur-
rents. To simplify the preliminary discussion, assume a round rotor. In this case,
since iF = 0,0 does not matter (i.e., it does not matter in which direction the rotor
is pointed).
Consider the flux due to ia alone. The coil aa' and typical flux lines are shown
in Figure 6.3. The flux lines are symmetrical with respect to the plane of aa'. First
let us find the air-gap flux density B as a function of a. Using Ampere's circuital law,
with the path r coinciding with a flux line as shown, we get
F= ir
H· dl = _1_ J
J.LrJ.Lo r,lO"
B· dl +l J
/.La r,u
B· dl = Nia (6.9)
In (6.9) the closed path r has been separated into the iron and air-gap portions.
The relative permeability in iron is very high, on the order of 1000, and as an ap-
proximation we will therefore neglect the integral representing the mmi drop in
the iron. In evaluating the air-gap contribution we make use of the fact that the
Ct t Reference
aX1S
\~
\ I
I
I
Plane of QQ'
Figure 6.3 Air-gap flux due

to ia•
194 Generator Modeling I (Machine Viewpoint) Chap. B
vector flux density in the air gap is approximately radial. Then over the small air-
gap distances we get
-1 I B . dl "" 2-
Bd. = N1a (6.10)
/-to r." /-to
where d is the air-gap width, and there is a factor of 2 because of the two symmetri-
cally disposed air-gap crossings. Solving for B in (6.10), we get
N'1a
B = /-t;d = Kia (6.11)
as the (radially outward) scalar flux density in the air gap above the coil aa/ and the
(radially inward) scalar flux density in the air gap below the coil. We note that B is
proportional to ia with K ~ /LoN /2d as the (positive) constant of proportionality.
Note also that, atleast for 0 < a < 'IT/2,B does not depend on a (i.e., on which par-
ticular flux line coincides with the path f). Checking further, as a function of a, we
get the spatial flux distribution shown in Figure 6.4. Positive (negative) values of B
correspond to radially outward (inward) flux density. The waveform is (approxi-
mately) a square wave. Also shown in Figure 6.4 is the fundamental component ob-
tained by Fourier analysis. This component is given by
4 .
Ba = -Kl
7r a
cos a (6.12)
We have assumed a concentrated coil. If, as in the realistic case, the coil is dis-
tributed, the flux density wave more nearly approximates a truncated triangular
wave with maximum at a = O. In either case, in a simplified analysis, we will con-
sider only the fundamental component of the spatial flux density wave, as indicated
in Figure 6.4.
Now consider (6.12) with ia a sinusoidal function of t. We may assume that
ia{t) = V2lIal cos (wott L1) (6.13)
(j
Bt
:;Ki,
, ,
I
I
I
\ \
- • I \ •
2\/
0
'-Vi"
I \ a---
I \
I \
I \
I
\
, I
I
-Kia \
',_I
Figure 6.4 Spacial flux density
'- due to ia•
r~
Sec. 6.4 Armature Reaction 195 [-'

Then using (6.12) we get r-',
(6.14)
r-'-
== B~ax cos a cos (wot + !J.g,) f"-
B~ax absorbs many constants; we note that it is proportional to II). Equation (6.14)
gives both the spatial and temporal distribution of Ba' We note that the Ba distrib-
r--
ution is stationary in space (with the centerline straight up) and varies sinusoidally
with t. r
If we now repeat the calculation to get the contributions of the remaining two
phases (i.e., of ib and icl, we get a result similar to (6.14) but with appropriate shifts r
in the spatial and time arguments. Because of the placement of the coils bb' and ee',
the spatial distributions of Bb and Be are shifted by 120° and 240°, respectively; be- f'
cause i a , i b , and i, are assumed to be a positive sequence, there are corresponding
displacements of 1200 and 240 0 in the time behavior as well. ["
Consider next the flux density with all three (positive sequence) currents ia , ib ,
and i, present simultaneously. Using superposition and (6.14) but taking the spatial
[ --',
and temporal shifts into account, we get
['~'
Bah, == B~ax[ cos a cos (WO + !J.g,) + cos (a - 2;) cos (wot + !J.g, _ 2;) r-',
+ cos (a + 2;) cos (wot + !J.g, + 2;)] (6.15) r'
== ~B~ax cos (a - wot - !J.g,) r--'
Physically, this represents a sinusuoidal traveling wave in the air gap rotating in a
CCW direction at an angular velocity Wo. We note that the ability to generate such r i
rotating fields is a valuable additional advantage to the use of three-phase (over

single-phase) supply. 1"-
Thus, to reiterate, we find that positive-sequence stator currents of frequency
Wo give rise to a spatial armature reaction flux wave rotating in the air gap with the I
same angular velocity as the rotor. Note that at t == 0, the maximum of the flux den-
sity wave occurs for a == !J.g,. Thus, at t == 0, t!i.e centerline or north pole of the wave r-
is at an angle !J.g, with respect to the reference axis in Figure 6.1. We will make fre-
quent use of this result in Section 6.5. r i
In describing the rotating fluxes in the air gap it is frequently useful to imagine
that we are viewing the fluxes from a synchronously rotating reference frame. Sup- [--
pose that the reference frame angle is wot and we are observing the air-gap fluxes rel-
ative to the frame. In the steady-state case we have been considering, the rotor angle f-'
(relative to the synchronously rotating reference frame) is eo, a constant; the center-
line of the armature reaction flux is also at a fixed angle!J.g,. The merits of using the !
synchronously rotating reference frame will be clearer in the context of the applica-
tion to rotor angle transients to be considered in Chapter 14. I
[
196 Generator Modeling I [Machine Viewpoint), Chap. 6
Exercise 3. We can get a good feeling for the rotating armature reaction flux by
sketching the centerlines of flux directions at different times. Suppose that ia , ib , and
i, form a positive-sequence set, with ia(t) = 10 cos wot. Use the right-hand rule, and
symmetry, to show the flux directions at wot = 0, wot = 2'lT/3, and wot = 4'lT/3. What
happens if the currents form a negative-sequence set?
We have been considering the rotating armature reaction air-gap flux wave
due to the currents ia, ib, and i,. We next consider the corresponding flux linkages
with coil aa ' . Let these armature reaction flux linkages be designated by Aar . We use
the same Gaussian surface used earlier to calculate Aaa' (see Figure 6.2), and find,
using (6.15),
Aar(t) = N<p(t) = Ner r~B~ax

/2
-,,/2
cos (a - wot - fL)da
=3Ner B~ax cos (Wot + fL) (6.16)

= V2 LsdIal cos (Wot + fL)
= Ls1ia(t)
In going from line 2 to line 3 in the preceding equations, we make use of the fact that
B~ax is proportional to IIal and we absorb many constants into LsI' The interesting
result in (6.16) is that instantaneously Aar is proportional to ia just as if ib and i, were
not present. Their presence changes only the constant of proportionality. Since ia
is a sinusoid, we can also represent Aar and ia by phasors. We get
(6.17)
Equation (6.16) or (6.17) gives us the armature reaction effect for phase a. Similar-
ly, the flux linkages of coils bb I and ee' are related to ib and i" respectively, by the same
constant LsI'
6.5 TERMINAL VOLTAGE
We now use superposition to combine the results of Sections 6.3 and 6.4. We assume
that all the currents are present. The total air-gap flux wave then consists of the sum
of field flux wave plus armature reaction flux wave. At t = 0, the centerline of the
field flux wave is at an angle 80 , while that of the armature reaction flux wave is at
an angle fL. Both angles are measured with respect to the reference direction in Fig-
ure 6.1. Since we assume sinusoidal distribution in space for both flux densities, we
can add them (as we add phasors) to find a single resultant air-gap flux wave. This
resultant flux wave rotates in the air gap at an angular rate Wo radians per second.
The flux linkages also add. Defining Aag as the total air-gap flux linkages of
coil aa', we have
(6.18)
Sec. 6.5 Terminal Voltage 197
Since these are sinusoidal functions of time, we also get the corresponding relation
between phasors: .
(6.19)
The actual generated v9ltage (the air-gap voltage) is
dAag
v =-- (6.20)
ag dt
or in terms of phasors,
(6.21)
The reason for the minus sign was discussed just after (6.5). Differentiating (6.18) and
using (6.6) and (6.16), we get successively
dAag dA aa' dA a,
--=----
dt dt dt (6.22)
Using phasors, we can replace (6,22) by

(6.23)
It is remarkable that we are able to account for the difference between the open-
circuit voltage Ea and the actual generated voltage Vag by the voltage drop across a
fictitious inductance Lsi'
Vag is not quite the terminal voltage. It would be if there were no resistance or
leakage reactance in the windings. We account for these effects by adding circuit el-
ements r and XI and obtain the per phase equivalent circuit in Figure 6.5. The added
elements are relatively small. XI is on the order of 10% of XsI ;r is less than 1% of
Xs1 ' As indicated in the figure, we define the synchronous reactance Xs ~ Xs1 + XI
and get
Va == Ea - rIa - jX,Ia (6.24)
iX,
fa
+
Rest of
Ea Va system
Figure 6.5 Per phase circuit di-

agram (round-rotor machine).
198 Generator Modeling I (Machine Viewpoint) Chap. 6
E
Q
Figure 6.6 Phasor diagram cor-

responding to (6.24).
The relationships between various voltage and the current may be seen in the pha-
sor diagram in Figure 6.6. We identify a power angle Om = I.L - L!::'a. Later we
will discuss the physical significance of this angle.
Example 6.2
Given a round-rotor generator with V, = 1.0, X, = 1.6, r = 0.004, and 1, = 1/-600
find E" draw a phasor diagram.

Solution The problem reduces to a simple circuits problem.
E, = V, + rIa + jX,l,
= 1 + 0.004 /-60 + 1.6 flQ:
0
= 2.517 /18,45 0
If we had neglected r, the result would have been E, = 2.516 /18.W, which is close
enough.
The phasor diagram is shown in Figure E6.2. The voltage drop in r is exagger-
ated to make it visible.
Figure E6.2
Example 6.3
Suppose that in Example 6.2 there is a symmetric 3</J short circuit at the generator ter-
minals. Find the steady-state short-circuit current magnitude assuming that iF does
not change from its prefault value.
Solution If iF does'not change, neither does lEal, which is proportional to it. Then, [
in the steady state,
Eo 2.517
[
10 = r + j X, =} 1101= 1.6000 = 1.573
fa lags Eo by 89.86 0 , which we may approximate by 90 0 •
Example 6.4 r~
Suppose that in Example 6.3, in the steady state, the rotor is turning at a uniform rate
with 8 = wot + 80, Assume that f, lags Eo by 900 • Consider the rotating fluxes in the r
air gap and show that the armature reaction flux and the flux due to iF are oppositely
directed.
Solution From (6.6) or (6.8) we see that ~ = 80 - 900 • Then, since fa lags Eo by 90 0 ,
we have L1 = 80 - 900 - 90 0 = 80 - 1800 • Then, as discussed in Section 6.4, aU = 0, [~
the centerline of the armature reaction flux wave is at an angle 80 - 1800 • Thus, the
two components of the air-gap flux are oppositely directed.
In describing the effect of the short-circuit currents, we say they set up a "de-
I
magnetizing" flux that opposes the flux due to iF'
[
[~
So far we have been considering the round-rotor case. It remains to consider

the salient-pole case. In this case L1relative to 80 must be considered. We now con- 1-
sider some possibilities. Suppose that L1 = 80, Then the armature reaction flux is
aligned with the rotor. If L1 = 80 - 180°, as in Example 6.4, the flux is in the op-
posite direction (in the "demagnetizing" direction). In either case the air gap "seen"
by most of the armature reaction flux is a small one, and by an analysis similar to that
in Section 6.4, we can expect to get a relatively large inductance parameter relating
flux linkages of coil aa' and ia • On the other hand, suppose that L1 = 80 ± 90 0 •
Then the armature reaction flux is pointed in a direction perpendicular to the rotor
r
axis. The important point is this. Since the air gap seen by most of the armature re- r -
action flux is bigger in this case, we expect in, ib , and ie to be less effective in produc-
ing the flux; equivalently, after a development like that in Section 6.4, we will get a r --
smaller inductance parameter in (6.16).
In the general case we resolve the phasors la, Ib , and Ie into two groups of com-
ponents. One set of components lad, I hd , and led sets up a rotating flux with center- r
line aligned with the direct axis of the rotor. The other set of components Iaq, Ibq ,and
Ieq sets up a rotating flux with centerline in the quadrature axis direction. We can
[
find the armature reaction flux wave by superposition considering the contributions
of direct axis and quadrature axis currents separately. A similar statement can be
200 Generator Modeling I (Machine Viewpoint) C,hap. 6
made about the corresponding flux linkages of coil aa'. Thus, in terms of phasors,
we have
(6.25)
where the d refers to the direct axis component and the q to the quadrature axis com-
ponent. Just as in Section 6.4,Aad (which depends on Iad,Ibd, and led) is proportion-
al to lad and, similarly, Aaq is proportional to Iaq. The constants of proportionality
are different for lad and Iaq. The situation is as shown in Figure 6.7 for the case
eo = 90 0 • As shown in the figure, Ia is resolved into two components Iaq and lad that
(in this case) are equal in magnitude. However, since Iaq is less effective in produc-
ing flux linkages than is lad' the magnitude of Aaq is much less than that of Aad .
If we define fictitious inductance parameters such that
Aad = LdJIlid (6.26a)

Aaq = LqJlaq (6.26b)
then we can eliminate the flux linkages and obtain expressions involving only volt-
ages,currents, and impedances. We can start by substituting (6.25) in (6.19). We get
(6.27)
Multiplying by - jwo, we get
Using (6.8), (6.21), and (6.26), we can evaluate Vag:
v"g = Ea - jWOLdJlad - jwOLqJ1aq (6.28)

=Ea - jXdJ l ad - jXqJlaq
Ea
Figure 6.7 Flux linkages.

TABLE 6.1 TYPICAL VALUES OF Xd

AND Xq
Turbine generators* Salient-pole machines
(two-pole) (with dampers)
1.20 1.25
1.16 0.70
* Values for air cooled and hydrogen conventionally

cooled generators.
where Xdl = WOLdl and Xql = WOLql' To get the terminal voltage, we subtract the
voltage drops in r and Xl:
Va = Vag - rIa - jXJa (6.29)

= Vag - rIa - jXtUad + Iaq)
Substituting for Vag from (6.28), we get
Va = Ea - rIa - j(XI + Xdl)Iad - j(XI + Xql)Iaq (6.30)

= Ea - rIa - jXdlad - jXqIaq
where Xd ~ Xdl + XI and Xq ~ Xql + XI' Xd is called the direct axis reactance. Xq
is called the quadrature axis reactance. The generator model using Xd and Xq is called
the two-reaction model.
In per unit, typical values of Xii and Xq are given in Table 6.1. We note that for
the two-pole round-rotor machines, there is a small difference between Xd and Xq ,
although as an approximation we can take X, = Xd ", Xq • Making this approxi-
mation, (6.30) reduces to (6.24).
Unfortunately, we do not get a simple circuit model from (6.30), but we do get
the simple phasor diagram in Figure 6.8. Figures 6.8 and 6.6 should be compared. In
particular, note that in the round-rotor case, with Xd = Xq = X" the voltage
jXdlad + jXqIaq in Figure 6.8 reduces to the voltage jX,Ia in Figure 6.6.
Ea
Figure S.8 Phasor diagram

corresponding to [6.30).
202 Generator Modeling I (Machine Viewpoint) Chap.. 6
Figure B.9 Augmented phasor

diagram.
Consider next the addition to Figure 6.8 shown in Figure 6.9. In Figure 6.9 we
show the result of addingjXqIa to Va + rIa; we claim we get to a point a' in the same
direction as Ea.
Proof The point labeled a' is a complex number described as follows:
Consider also the point Ea'
If we now take the difference, we get
fI
From the geometry of Figure 6.9,jlad, and thus Ea - a', is parallel to Ea, which im·
plies that Ea and a' are collinear.
With the addition of the point a' to Figure 6.8, we are in a position to solve ei·
ther of the following two problems.
Problem 1: Given Ea and la, find Va'

Problem 2: Given Va and la, find Ea.
We next consider two examples that illustrate the methods of solution. The
first example is an illustration of Problem 1; the second illustrates Problem 2.
Example 6.5
Given Ea = 1.5 fl2:,la = 0.5/-30°,Xd = 1.0, and Xq = 0.6, find Va' Neglect r.
Solution We need to resolve Ia into lad and Iaq. This can be done most easily by
sketching fa and Ea (Figure E6.5). From the sketch by using simple trigonometry, we
find
Figure E6.5
lad = 0.433 /-60°

Then, using (6.30),
Va = Ea - jXdlad - jXq1aq
= 1.5 fl2: - j 1.0 X 0.433 /-60° - jO.6 X 0.25 fl2:
= 1.077 /22.00°
As a check, in the phasor diagram, we also show the various voltages that add up to Ea.
Example 6.6
Given Va = 1.0 ~,fa '" 1/-45°, Xd = 1.0, and Xq = 0.6, find Ea. Neglect r.
Solution Before we can resolve Ia into components, we need to know the direction
of Ea. Thus we find the point a' as shown in Figure 6.9.
a' = Va + jXqIa ~ 1 + jO.6 Xl/-45° = 1.486/16.59°
This point is shown in Figure E6.6 together with the resolution of Ia into Iaq and lad'
From the s ketch, by using trigonometry, we find
Iaq = 0.476/16.59° lad = 0.880 /-73.41°
Then, using (6.30), we find that
Ea = Va + jXdiad + jXqIaq
= 1 + j1.0 X 0.880 /-73.41° + jO.6 X 0.476/16.59°
= 1.838 /16.59°
204 Generator Modeling I (Machine Viewpoint) phap. 6
As a check we also show in the phasor diagram the various voltages that add up to Ea .
Direction
of Ea
~~~
\,./
E,
Figure ES.S
Example 6.7
Suppose that in Example 6.5 there is a symmetric three-phase short circuit. Find the
steady-state short-circuit current magnitude assuming that iF (in the steady state) is
unchanged from its prefault value.
Solution The assumption regarding iF implies that lEal = 1.5 is unchanged. With
Va = 0, we have
Ea = jXdlad + jXqIaq
From Figure 6.8 we can see that jXiad is parallel to Ea, while jXiaq is perpendicular.
From this we can conclude thatlaq = 0while lad = Ea / jXd· Thus Ia (lad + Iaq = lad
and fa = Ea/JXd' Thus we get Ilal = IEal/Xd = 1.5. .
We emphasize that the short -circuit current does not depend on Xq at all.
Exercise 4. In Example 6.7 in modeling the generator assume that we include a

small resistance r. Show that for small r, IIal ,,; IEal/Xd' Hint: In using (6.30),
r1. = r(Iad + laq). Note that r1aq is parallel to Ea and rlad is perpendicular to Ea.
Finally, before leaving these generator models, either the round-rotor or two-
reaction models, we should note the following about Figures 6.6 and 6.8.
1. Ea is the internal, or open circuit, or Thevenin equivalent voltage. lEal is pro-

portional to the rotor (field) current iF'
Sec. B.B Power Delivered by Generator 205
Figure 6.10 Physical signifi-

cance of Om.
2. In both cases there is a power angle Om between the internal voltage and the ter-
minal voltage. As an approximation, if we neglect both r and XI so that v;, = Vag'
we get a nice physical interpretation of Om' Om can be shown to be the angle be-
tween the rotor centerline (north pole) and the rotating air-gap flux centerline
(north pole). This is suggested in Figure 6.10 for the salient-pole case. To check
the assertion we note that, with our approximation, Vag = Va lags ea by the angle
8m• In terms of the flux linkages of the coil aa' there must be a similar lag of Aag
compared with the open circuit Aaa,. As a consequence, the centerline of the spa-
tial air-gap flux wave (which fills the coil aa') must lag the rotor north pole by
the angle 8m , as indicated in Figure 6.10.
3. We can easily extend the use of both models to the case of a generator con-
nected to a bus through a (short) transmission line, by absorbing the (series)
line impedance RL + jXL into the generator model. Let Va be the genera-
tor terminal voltage and It; be the receiving-end voltage of the transmission
line. Then
(6.31 )
Using (6.30) and Ia = lad + Iaq , we get
v, = Ea - rIa - jXd1ad - jXqIaq - RJa - jXL(Jad + Iaq) (6.32)
Grouping terms, we get
v, = Ea - na - jXd1ad - jXq1aq (6.33)

where i' = r + RL , Xd = Xd + XL' and Xq = Xq + XL' Equation (6.33)
is in the same form as (6.30) with the line impedances absorbed into the gen-
erator model and with It; as the generator terminal voltage.
6.6 POWER DELIVERED BY GENERATOR
With the generator models deriv:d in Section 6.5 we may determine the complex
power Sc delivered by a generator III terms of its internal voltage Ea and terminal volt-
age Va' We consider the round-rotor case first.
206 Generator Modeling I [Machine Viewpoint] Chap .. 6
Case I: Round rotor. Using the per phase equivalent circuit in Figure 6.5,
we have
SG '" Val~ '" Va (E°ZG- V)*

a (6.34)
where Ze '" r + jX,. This is exactly the problem considered in Section 4.6-that of
power transmitted between two buses. Thus we can use the power circle diagram to
find 5e '" - 521 , This makes it clear that there is an ultimate active power limit just
like for a transmission line!
If the generator resistance is neglected, then using (4.34) and (4.36), we get the
simple results
(6.35)
(6.36)
Case II: Salient-pole generator. For simplicity we will consider only the
case r = O. Also, to simplify the derivation we will assume that
Eo = lEal LQ: = lEal (6.37)

Va = IV.! i..=.§..m = IVai e- j6
", = IVai cos 8m- jlVal sin 8m (6.38)
This amounts to no more than choosing the time we call t = 0 to be the time the
rotor angle 0 = 90 (i.e., 00 = 90 The formulas we derive depend on the angle dif-
0 0
).
ference Om' not the individual angles. Using 10 = lad + Iaq , we get
5c = Volt = Va(Iad + Iaq)* (6.39)
We first determine lad and Ioq as follows using (6.30), (6.37), and (6.38):
:J.
lEal = Va + jXd1ad + jXq1aq
(6.40)
= IVai cos 8m- jlVal sin 8m+ jXdlad + jXqIaq
Since, by (6.37), Eo is purely real, so is I.q and jXdlad . Also,jXqIaq is purely imaginary.
Separating (6.40) into real and imaginary parts, we get two equations:
lEal= 1\1;,1 cos Om + jXd1ad (6.41)

o= -IVai sin Om + XqIoq (6.42)
Solving, we get
(6.43)
Sec. 6.6 Power Delivered by Generator 207
We next substitute lad and laq into (6.39):

-'0 (.IEal - IVai cos Om IVai sin Om)
Sc = !VIe
a
J", J X + -------
X
d q (6.44)
_ ( . _.. (I"VII sin Om .IE.I - I"V,I cos Om)
- IVai cos Om J sm 8",) +J X
Xq d
We next find Pc and Qc. Taking real parts, we get

_ ~ IVai sin Om . lEal - I"V,I cos 8m)
Pc -IVai cos 8m + sm8 m X
Xq d
IEallVal . 2 (cos 8msin 8m cos 8msin 8m)

= - X sm 8m + IVai - X (6.45)
d ~ d
IEal IV", .
= - - sm 8 +- IVl(-1 - ~
1).
sm 28
Xd m 2 Xq Xd m
Note: If Xd = Xq = X" (6.45) reduces to (6.35).

Next, we equate the imaginary parts of (6.44) and after some algebra we get
2 2
_ IEall Val _ 2(COS 8m Sin 8m)
Qc - X cos Om IVai X + X (6.46)
d d q
If Xd = Xq = Xg, (6.46) reduces to (6.36).

Suppose that with lEal and IVai fixed, we consider the effect of saliency on the
curve of Pc versus 8m • Since we have Xd > Xq, then 1/ Xq - 1/ Xd is positive. Thus,
sketching (6.45) as in Figure 6.11, we see that the effect of saliency is to cause the
maximum Pc to occur at an angle 8m < 90 0 •
PCmax
I £,1 I V,I .
--smOm
Xu
Figure 6.11 Effect of saliency on PeWm].

208 Generator Modeling I (Machine Viewpoint) G:hap. 6
S.7 SYNCHRONIZING GENERATOR TO AN INFINITE BUS
As another application of our model, we consider the problem of connecting or syn-

chronizing a generator to a particular power system bus (generator bus) and then
making the necessary adjustments to deliver a specified complex power. To simpli-
fy the discussion we will assume that the MVA rating of our generator is relatively
small so that we do not expect to affect significantly the voltage and frequency of the
larger system. In this case, as an approximation, we can assume that the (complex)
generator bus voltage is independent of how our generator is adjusted (i.e., it is an
ideal voltage source). We call such a source an infinite bus. In mechanics an infinite
inertia plays an analogous role and this suggests the terminology. Thus, we have the
definition.
Definition. An infinite bus is an ideal voltage source.

Consider the system shown in Figure 6.12, in which we will synchronize and
then deliver complex power to a large system modeled by an infinite bus. Initially,
the circuit breaker is open. We wish to close the breaker and deliver power to the (in-
finite) bus. First, to effect a smooth transition, we must satisfy the following syn-
chronizing conditions regarding the voltages Va and VOO' We note that before
synchronization, Va = Ea, because fa = O.
1. Frequency is the same.

2. Phase sequence is the same.
3. Phase is the same.
4. IVai = lEal::: IVool.
r
Steam
Generator ~.
c b a
1----+--+-..... V_
1, Circuit
breaker
Figure 6.12 Generator to be synchronized.

Sec. 6.7 Synchronizing Generator to an Infinite Bus 209
Ea
Ia = Eai;,~-/\a -V
.
. ~ &m
Figure 6.13 Mechanical power
changes; iF fixed.
Note 1: Conditions 3 and 4 may be combined: Va = Ea = Voo'

Note 2: The turbine is providing very little power, only enough to overcome
rotation losses.
With these conditions satisfied the breaker may be closed. The generator is
now synchronized to the power system. It is in a condition known as "floating";
Ia = 0 (because Ea = Voo ) and So = O. Suppose that we now slowly open the steam
valve. The mechanical power driving the generator increases. The coupled gener-
ator and turbine rotors tend to accelerate. As we will discuss in Chapter 14, the net
effect is for the power angle 8m = & - & to increase (Voo is the infinite bus volt-
age and is fixed). Thus Po (8 m ) increases. Assuming that a steady state is reached,
and neglecting the losses, we get, eventually, a balance between the mechanical power
input and electrical power output. If iF is not changed from its value at synchro-
nization, then lEal does not change either. The effect of applying mechanical power,
therefore, is to increase /.J:.g while leaving lEal unchanged. We get a phasor diagram
something like that shown in Figure 6.13. Here we have assumed a round-rotor
model and r = 0 for simplicity.
Continuing with this simplified model, suppose that we consider the effects of
changing iF' If we change iF, we change lEal by the same proportion. If at the same
time we keep the mechanical power constant, then Po (8 m) = (IEallVool/ Xs) sin 8mre-
mains constant. Thus lEal sin 8m remains fixed. This is suggested in Figure 6.14 by
drawing a (dashed) line parallel to Voo (i.e., the locus of points Ea satisfying
lEal sin 8m = constant). For example, E~) might be the value corresponding to iF at
synchronization. E~2) corresponds to an increased value of iF, while E~1) corresponds
to a decreased value of iF'
From Figure 6.14 we can deduce how Ia is affected by changes in iF' Thus if lEal
is increased beyond the value IE~)I, we would [md that IIal increases beyond the value
II~)I; at the same time the power factor decreases so that Po = IV"",I!) cos i/J remains
Figure 6.14 iF changes; me-

Ill)
a chanical power fixed.
210 Generator Modeling I (Machine Viewpoint) Chap.'6
constant. In this case the phasor fa varies so that its tip is always on a vertical line
through f~).
Exercise 5. With constant mechanical power, sketch the locus of fa as iF is varied.

Show that there is a minimum lIal.
Note 1: If our generator is salient pole and/or if resistance is considered, we get

results that differ only slightly from the foregoing. For a qualitative under-
standing it is far simpler to use the round-rotor model!
Note 2: Clearly, we can synchronize to a noninfinite bus. The conditions for
smooth synchronization remain the same. The discussion of what happens after
synchronization is more complicated because the generator bus voltage will
vary as a function of the injected bus power SG'
Example 6.8
A generator is synchronized to an infinite bus. iF = 1000 A (actual) at synchroniza-
tion. Voe = 1 i!, and X, = 1.5. With iF unchanged the stearn valves at the turbine
are adjusted until PG = 0.2.
(a) Find la.

(b) With PGunchanged, iF is increased to 1600 A (actual). Find la.
Solution (a) At synchronization Ea = Va = V", = Ii!,. Thus IE,I = 1 corresponds

to iF = 1000 A. Then
IE,IIV",I 1
p.G = 0.2 = - - sin 8 = - sin 8
X, m 1.5' m
Thus Om = 17.46' and Ea = 1 /17.46'. Then

Ea - V", 1 /17.46' - 1
fa = ----:-x
] ,
= '15
] . = 0.202 /8.73'
(b) Increasing iF by a factor 1.6 also increases IE,I by the same factor. Then we have
p.G =. 1.6.
0 2 =-smo
1.5 m
Thus Om = 10.81' and E, = 1.6LI0.81'. Then
1.6L!Q&r - 1
I, = j1.5 = 0.430 /-62.31'
As a check we note that 0.430 cos (-62.31') = 0.200.

Sec. 6.9 Role of Synchronous Machine Excitation 211
6.8 SYNCHRONOUS CONDENSOR
As an additional application of our model we consider a type of synchronous ma-

chine called a synchronous condensor. Consider the case of a round-rotor machine
with r = O. The power delivered by the machine to a bus with voltage Va is given by
(6.35) and is repeated here for convenience.
lEal IVai .
PG = Re Val: = - - sm 8m (6.35)
Xs
From (6.35) we can see
8m > 0 => PG > 0 (generator)
8m < 0 => PG < 0 (motor)
8m = 0 => PG = 0 (unloaded)
We get similar results if r 1= 0 and/or the synchronous machine is salient pole. Con-
sider the case when Om = 0 (i.e., the synchronous machine is unloaded). Can such a
machine serve a useful purpose?
The answer is yes, if it delivers reactive power. From (6.36), with 8m = 0, the re-
active power is
IVai (lEal - IVai)
QG=---- (6.47)
XS
Thus if lEal is greater than IVai, the generator supplies reactive power. Since this is also
the action of a capacitor bank connected to the bus, a generator specifically built to
operate in this mode is called a synchronous condensor. Physically, a synchronous
condensor of large MVA rating is large; it looks like a generator without a turbine!
In large sizes, synchronous condensors are cheaper than capacitor banks and provide
a very convenient and continuous control of reactive power by adjusting the field
current iF'
We note that if the synchronous machine is salient pole, the formula for QG,
given by (6.46), reduces to (6.47) with Xs replaced by Xd • Finally, we remind the
reader that injected reactive power at the receiving end of a long transmission line
can be very necessary and very effective in maintaining the receiving-end voltage.
6.9 ROLE OF SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE EXCITATION IN

CONTROLLING REACTIVE POWER
The change in the excitation of synchronous machines plays a key role in controlling
the reactive power output of the machine. This in turn affects the ability to maintain
the terminal voltages of the machines, and as a result the voltage profile in the power
system. There are physical constraints that establish a lower and upper limit for the
exciter output. Consequently, the reactive power output of a synchronous generator
212 Generator Modeling I [Machine Viewpoint] • Chap. 6
is also limited. This limit will be used later in Chapter 10 when we discuss power
flows and present the material related to the power flow solutions. The limit on re-
active power output of a synchronous machine plays an integral role in the repre-
sentation of voltage controlled buses. In order to characterize the t':ffect of excitation
on the reactive power output of the synchronous machine, we can review the results
in Section 6.6-in particular, (6.35) and (6.36). Under the assumptions of a round
rotor and zero resistance, we get
IEallv,,1
PG = IValllal cos 4> = X sin ~m (6.48)
s
. IEaliVal
QG = IValllal sm 4> = X, cos ~m -
1v,,1 2
x: (6.49)
We note that QGcan be positive, zero, or negative. It is highly desirable that it be pos-
itive, and this can be assured if
lEal cos ~m > 1v,,1 (6.50)
As mentioned earlier in this section, however, the amount of reactive power that can
be delivered is subject to upper and lower limits. We will return to this consideration
in Chapter 10.
6.10 SUMMARY
For steady-state positive-sequence operation, a useful two-reaction synchronous ma-

chine model may be derived by considering the various flux components making up
the rotating air-gap flux wave. In this way we get an understanding of the physical
bases of armature reaction and of direct-axis and quadrature-axis reactances. With
the model we can determine the effects of varying the turbine power and field cur-
rent on the generator terminal voltage and complex power outptl
Problems
6.1. A generator delivers PG = 1.0 at 0.8 PF lagging to a bus with voltage IVai = 1.0. Sketch a
phasor diagram and calculate lEal for
(a) A round rotor: X, = 1.0, r = °
(b) A salient-pole rotor: Xd = 1.0, Xq = 0.6, r = °
6.2. A generato~ with :eactances Xd = 1.6 and Xq = 0.9 delivers SG = 1 ~ to a bus with
voltage Va - 1 LQ::. Fmd 1" lad '/aq , Ea> and the rotor angle IJdi.e., the rotor angle eat
t = 0).
6.3. Suppose th~t in Problem 6.2 there is a symmetric 3¢ short circuit (fault) at the generator
termmals. Fmd the steady-state values of la, lad, and Ia assuming that Ea does not change
from its prefault value. q
06.1 Design Exercise 213
6.4. Givena generator with Va = 1 LQ:, 1a = 1 ~, Xd = 1.0, Xq = 0.6, and r = 0.1, find SG,
1adJaq, and Ea.
6,5. A round-rotor generator (X, = 1.0, r = 0.1) is synchronized to a bus whose voltage is
1~. At synchronization iF = 1000 A (actual). The generator is then adjusted until
SG = 0.8 + jO.6. (SG = power supplied to the generator bus.)
(a) Find iF and the generator efficiency (assuming no generator losses except 12 R
losses).
(b) With the same iF, what is the ultimate (maximum) active power the generator can
deliver?
6.6. A round-rotor generator (X, = 1.0, r = 0) is synchronized to a bus whose voltage is 1~.
At synchronization iF = 1000 A (actual). The mechanical power is then increased until
PG = 0.8. Now iF is adjusted.
(a) Plot a curve of lIal versus iF'
(b) Plot a curve of QG versus iF'
(c) When Iial is a minimum, what is Ia?
6.7. For a salient-pole generator (with Xd > Xq) show that maximum PG occurs for 8 < 1T/2.
Assume that r = O.
6.8. Consider a salient-pole generatoTdelivering power through a short transmission line to
an infinite bus. Voo = 1 ~, IE,I = 1.4. The active power delivered to the infinite bus is
0.6. We are given the generator reactances Xd = 1.6 and Xq = 1.0 and the line reactance
XL = 0.4. Neglect resistances and find Ea and f,.
6.9. Refer to Figure P6.9 and assume that
X, = 1.0
r = 0.1
Figure P6.9

The Eagle Power System introduced in Chapters 4 and 5 has three generators lo-
cated at Bus 1 (Owl), Bus 2 (Swift), and Bus 3 (Parrot). Assume that these three
generators have a rating of 550 MVA each. For the steady-state generator model
derived in Section 6.2, specify all the machine parameters required. This activity
involves a search of the literature for typical synchronous machine parameters.
1
l
I
214 Generator Modeling I (Machine Viewpoint) Chap, 6' ll.·'
1 f
I, !
There are excellent references that provide a wide variety of data, The student is
expected to research these references, make appropriate assumptions regarding the
type of machine being considered (e,g" fossil-fired steam unit, hydro unit), and
obtain all the required machine constants on the machine MVA base, Convert
Jl
I
all the machine parameters to a common system base of 100 MVA and the ap-
propriate base voltages,
~
.1
I
l
1
I ! '....
1
!-j
11
•
rJ j
j
Generator Modeling" j
t (Circuit Viewpoint)
j
III.'.i
" .
1.·
j
j
1.0 INTRODUCTION j
The generator model developed in Chapter 6 is a steady-state modeL More pre-
cisely, it is a positive-sequence steady-state model, since we assumed that the gener- j
ator emfs and stator currents were both positive sequence. Although the model is
used to good effect for a transient analysis in Chapter 14, in many cases a more ac- j
, curate model is essential. For some transients (for example, those accompanying
short circuits at the generator terminals), the steady-state model gives completely er-
roneous results. The steady-state model is inapplicable even in certain cases of steady- j
state operation-for example, if the (positive-sequence) generator is subjected to
negative-sequence currents; this is a case we will consider in Chapter 12, j
In this chapter we develop a more general model of the generator. The model
reduces to the steady-state model derived in Chapter 6as a special case, Acircuit the-
ory viewpoint is used in the development. j
j
7.1 ENERGY CONVERSION
We start by considering the general case of a set of coupled coils in which one or j
more of the coils is mounted on a shaft and can rotale. Thus, there is one mechani-
cal degree of freedom. The other coils are fixed. The situation is shown schemati- j
cally in Figure 7.L
In Figure 7.1 we see that some of the mutual inductances may vary with e. In
Section 7.2 we will be interested in the specific coupling configuration of a three- j
phase machine, but for now we proceed in general terms.
Assume associated reference directions for the v, i, A. For example, pick a j
reference direction for i1, find the associated reference direction for Vj as in circuit
215
j
j
216 Generator Modeling II (Circuit Viewpoint) Chap. 7
Figure 7,1 Coupled coils.
theory, and also find the associated reference direction for flux by the right-hand rule;
the flux linkages and the flux have the. same sign. Assume that for any fixed 8 there
is a linear relationship between Aand i. Then we get the relationship
A = L(8)i (7.1)
where, in the case of Figure 7.1, i and Aare 4-vectors, and L is a symmetric 4 X 4 ma-
trix. The fact that the matrix is symmetric is known from circuit theory. Applica-
tion of KVL to the circuit in Figure 7.1 and use of (7.1) give
p = Ri + dA
dt
(7.2)
dL (8)
d'
= Ri + L(8)~ + - - i
dt dt
where p = col [Vj, V2, V3, V4] and R = diag [R;J. If 8 is constant with Utne (i.e., the
coils are fixed), then L (8) is a constant matrix; the flux changes are then due only to
transformer action. On the other hand, if i does not change with time (i.e., i is dc),
the flux changes are due entirely to the motion (or speed) of the coils relative to each
other. For this reason the terms transformer voltage and speed voltage are used to des-
ignate the second and third terms on the right side of (7.2).
We are interested in the case where 8 can change (i.e., the shaft can rotate). To
investigate the behavior of 8, we need a mechanical equation. Then, assuming a rigid
shaft with total coupled inertia J and linear friction, the equation will be
(7.3)
where T is total applied torque in the positive 8 direction. T is the sum of an exter-
nally applied mechanical torque TM and an electrical torque TE due to interactions
of magnetic fields.
Sec. 7.1 Energy Conversion 217
We next derive an expression for TE by use of the principle of conservation of

instantaneous power. It is helpful to take a "motor" point of view; regarding the de-
vice in Figure 7.1 as one that converts electrical power to mechanical power. Let p
be the instantaneous electrical power into the coupled coils. Using (7.2),
p .= 'T
1V = 1
'TR'1 + 1.TL ()di dL-(e)I.
e- + 1'T - (7.4)
dt dt
where iT is the transpose of i (i.e., iT is a row vector). In the present case,
jIv = ijvj + i2v2 + i3V3 + i4V4' We also note that since R is a diagonal matrix,
jIRi = Rjii + Rzi~ + RJi~ + R4i~ is the instantaneous power dissipated in the
resistances.
From elementary circuit theory we also have an expression for the instanta-
neous stored magnetic energy of coupled coils.
Wmag = ~jTL (e)i (7.5)
By differentiating we get the power supplied to the magnetic field.

dW 1 d' 1 doJ 1 dL (e)
-_- IoJL (e) -I
mag
-- - (e)'1+-1oJ - - I'
+l-L
dt 2 dt 2 dt 2 dt
(7.6)
= iTL (0) di + ljT dL (e) i
dt 2 dt
In deriving (7.6) we have used the fact that the transpose of a scalar is the same scalar
[each product of terms in (7.6) is a scalar], that the transpose of a product of matri-
ces is the product of the transposed matrices in reverse order, and that L(0) is a sym-
metric matrix. Thus
1 d'T 1 di
-~L(O)i =-h(O)-
2 ~ 2 ~
and the two terms may be combined. Using (7.6) in (7.4), we have
dW . 1 dL (e)
P=I'rR'1 +. - -
mag +'T
- I - - I• (7.7)
dt 2 dt
Considering all the mechanisms allowed for in our model, we obtain, by conservation
of instantaneous power,
electric.al) = (?owe~ diSSiPated) + (power s,up?lied to) +(power converted into)

( power III III resIstances magne!lc fIelds mechalllcal form
Comparing this with (7.7), we can identify the right-hand term in (7.7) as the
electrical power converted into the mechanical form. Finally, using the chain rule
of differentiation, we get dL (e)/dt = (dL (O)/de)(dO/dt), where dO/dt is the
218 Generator Modeling II [Circuit Viewpoint] Chap. 7
(scalar) angular velocity. Thus, the electrical power converted into the mechanical
form is
(7.8)
where w = dO/ dt is the shaft angular velocity and we can identify

T =!jTdL(O)j (7.9)
E 2 dO
as the mechanical torque on the shaft in the direction of increasing 0 due to the in-
teraction of the magnetic fields set up by the electrical currents. Substituting (7.9) in
(7.3), we get
" . 1 dL(O)
IO + De - - jT - - j = T (7.10)
2 dO M
We can call (7.10) the mechanical equation. With (7.2) and (7.10), we get the inter-
action of the mechanical and electrical variables.
In the derivation of (7.9) we assumed that only rotational motion was possible.
Suppose that we had considered a different case, the case of a single translational de-
gree of freedom. Suppose that L depends on x, for example. The reader should
check that we still get (7.9) with 0 replaced by x, and torque replaced by force.
Example 7.1
Calculate average torque of a reluctance motor (Figure E7.1). (This is a very simple
synchronous motor used in clocks.) Assume that i(t) = Will cos wol. As an ap-
proximation assume that L (0) = L, + Lm cos 20, Ls > Lm > O. Also assume thatthe
rotor moment of inertia is reasonably high.
r--, ~.,...y~--,
I I
I I
I I
I I Centerline of
I I
flux ¢
I I
I I
I ¢ I
~---- -----)
+ Figure E7.1
Sec. 7.1 Energy Conversion 219
Solution We note that in this case Figure 7.1 reduces to a single coil whose self-
inductance is L (8). We can first check the physical basis for the assumed form of L
(8). When 8 = n7r, with n an integer, the average air-gap distance is a minimum (re-
luctance also is a minimum), so L(8) must be a maximum. (See Appendix 1.) When
8 = n7r + 1T/2, L(8) must be a minimum (but still positive). We see that L(8) goes
through two cycles of variation when 8 increases from 0 to 21T. Thus the assumed
value L(8) = L, + Lm cos 28, L, > Lm > 0, seems to be a reasonable simplification.
Then using (7.9),
Using (7.10), we get

ie + DO + LmP sin 28 = 0
Note: With i = constant, this is the equation of a pendulum, not a motor! Alterna-
tively, we may note that as 8 increases uniformly (as it would for a motor with a very
large moment of inertia), the average torque is zero. This is not consistent with motor
behavior; in order to get motor action we need a nonzero (positive) average torque.
In our case, itt) = '12111 cos wot, and we will get a nonzero average torque.
The mechanical equation is nonlinear and we will not attempt an exact solution. In-
stead, as an approximation, we will calculate the average value of T£ assuming a uni-
form rate of rotation in the steady state. Assume, then, that in the steady state,
8(t) = wot + 8, where Wo corresponds to synchronous speed and 8 is a constant. Then
TE = -2Lm1112 cos 2wot sin 2(wot + 8)
= -LmW(l + cos2wot)sin2(wot + 8)
= -~ LmW[sin 28 + 2 sin (2wot+ 28) + sin (4wot + 28)]
From this, averaging over time, we get
TEav = -! Lm IW sin 28
and thus with -1T/2 < 8 < 0 we develop a positive average torque that is consistent
with the rotation.
As may be seen from the preceding, there are sinusoidal torque pulsations (of
frequency 2wo and 4wo) superimposed on the average torque. However, we assumed
a reasonably high moment of inertia J and thus we do not expect these pulsations to
alter significantly the assumed uniform rotation rate. Thus, the analysis is consistent,
and we have found at least an approximate value for the average torque.
We turn next to an example that will be helpful in understanding the calcula-

tion of inductance parameters for synchronous machines.
Example 7.2
Consider the machine sketched in Figure E7.2(a). Sketch L11(8) and Ld8) as a func-
tion of 8. Neglect all but the dc and the lowest frequency components (in the Fourier
series) of the periodic variations.
Solution As seen in the figure, the reference directions for currents, voltages, and
fluxes (flux linkages) are picked in associated reference directions. LI1(9) and L12(9)
are the inductance parameters relating A[ to i[ and izas follows.
r--"
I
-"--,I
I I
I I
I Centerline
I I of flux
I I
I I
I 91 _____ .JI
\._----
Figure E7.2(a)
A1 = LI1 (9)i1 + L12( 9)iz
A1 is the flux linkages of coil 1; A[ has the same sign as (Pt. To find L11 we set iz = O.
Then
We get a maximum (air-gap) reluctance when 9 = mr, and a minimum when

0= Mr + 1r/2. Thus, L11 will depend on 9 somewhat as sketched in Figure E7.2(b).
Thus, discarding higher harmonics,Lu is in the form L11(9) = L, - Lm cos 20. To find
L12 we set i[ = O. Then
Figure E7.2(b)
Sec. 7.2 Application to Synchronous Machine 221
¢I is the flux linking coil 1 due to i2. LIl is sketched in Figure E7.2( c).
Figure E7.2(c)
We can verify the general shape as follows. For convenience assume that i2 > 0,
so ri>2 is in its positive reference direction. When e = 0, none of rP2 links coil 1;
L12(O) = 0. When e = 7T/2, ri>2 reaches its maximum value (minimum reluctance) and
most of it threads coil 1 from left to right. Thus ¢I and LIl reach minimum (negative)
°
values. When e = 7T, L12 = again. When e = 37T/2, ¢2 again reaches a maximum
value and most of it threads coil 1 from right to left (i.e., ¢I is in its positive reference
(
I direction). Thus LI2 reaches a maximum. Neglecting harmonics, we get LI2 in the
form LI2 = - M sin e. The reader should compare Lll and L12 and note that they ex-
,)
,
hibit very different behavior as a function of 8.
Exercise 1. Sketch L22 and L21 by repeating the steps in Example 7.2. As a check,
note the result from circuit theory: L21(8) = L12(8).
Some readers may wish to examine additional examples in Appendix 2. These

are derivations of force equations for solenoids or relays and are needed for later
use in Chapter 13.
7.2 APPLICATION TO SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE
We will now develop (7.2) and (7.10) for a three-phase machine. In the process we
introduce the Park (Blondel) transformation.
Assume that the machine consists of three phase-windings mounted on the sta-
tor or stationary part of the machine, a field winding mounted on the rotating part (the
222 Generator Modeling \I [Circuit Viewpoint) Chap. 7
rotor), and two additional fictitious windings on the rotor that model the short-
circuited paths of the damper windings and/or solid-iron rotor. These two windings
are assumed aligned with the direct axis and quadrature axis of the rotor.
The six windings, represented by one-turn coils, are shown schematically in Fig-
ure 7.2. Compared with Figure 6.1, we note the addition of the two fictitious coils and
the introduction of the direct-axis and quadrature-axis reference directions.
The six currents are i a, i b , ie> iF, iD and i Q. Lowercase letters indicate stator
quantities. Uppercase letters indicate rotor quantities. iF is the field current and is
subject to control through an excitation control system. iD and iQ are the currents in
the fictitious rotor coils.
Using the circuits convention on associated reference directions, we get the
usual relationship between voltages, currents, and flux linkages.
Va'a
, ia Aaa'
Vb'b
, 0 ib Abb'
Ve'c
, ie d Ace'
+- (7.11)
VFF' 'F iF dt AFF'
VDD' 0 'D iD ADD'

VQQ' 'Q iQ AQQ'
= Ri + dA
dt
~
t Re~~I~nce
e I
~
Quadrature
axis
Direct :
aXIs " i
"" b' I
Figure 7.2 Machine schematic.

The matrix and vector quantities are defined by comparing the two lines in the pre-
ceding equation. For example, R = diag(r, r, r, rF, rD, rQ}, where r is the resistance
of each phase winding, rFis the resistance of the field winding, and rD and rQ are the
resistances of the fictitious rotor coils modeling the short-circuited paths. The flux
linkage terms are identified by the subscripts; they agree in sign with their corre-
sponding fluxes, which in turn agree, by the right-hand rule, with their associated cur-
rents. For example, Aaa' is positive if the flux links the coil aa' in the upward direction.
AFP is positive if the flux links the coil FF' in the direct axis direction. Note that al-
though we have defined R, i, and A, we have not yet defined a voltage vector v.
We wish first to introduce the generator convention on reference directions for
the stator coil voltages; we remind the reader that the voltages in (7.11) follow the cir-
cuits convention on reference directions. Earlier, in Section 6.3, with the same ob-
jective in mind, we introduced the (open-circuit) voltage eaa, rather than ea'a' Similarly,
we now adopt the generator convention for stator voltages and deal with Vaa" Vw,
and Vee' instead of Va'a, Vb'b, and Vc'c' The notation for the remaining voltages is not
changed. As in Section 6.3 we also simplify by using a single-subscript notation to in-
dicate the voltage of the unprimed subscript with respect to the primed subscript.
For example, Va ~ V aa, = -Va'a, VF ~ VFP, and so on. Now we define a voltage vec-
tor v as follows:
Va
Vb
Vc
v= " -VF
-VD
-VQ
Using this definition in (7.11), we get

. dA
V=-Ri-- ,.(7.12)
dt
It is to be noted that VD and vQ are actually zero because in our model the fictiti-
ous rotor coils are short circuited. It is convenient to call (7.12) the electrical
equation.
We next relate Ato i through A = L(8)i assuming a linear relationship. L(8) is
a 6 X 6 matrix relating six flux linkages to the six currents, Just as in Example 7.2,
we can find the element Lij by finding the flux linkages of the ith coil after setting all
currents equal to zero except the current in the jth coil. We will also simplify, just as
we did in Example 7.2, by considering only dc and the lowest harmonic terms.
We now consider the calculation of some of the terms. It is simplest in the fol-
lowing to use actual rather than per unit quantities. Thus, the inductances are in hen-
rys. In all the definitions of inductance to follow, to simplify the notation, we will
leave out the proviso "all other currents equal zero." We will start by specifying the
stator self-inductances.
224 Generator Modeling II (Circuit Viewpoint] Ch?p. 7
Self-inductances of stator coils
t:
Lbb = Aw = L, t Lm cos 2 ( 8 - 321T)
Lec Ace' = L, t
=-:- Lm cos 2 ( 8 t -21T)
~ 3
The form of Laa may be explained as follows. Referring to Figure 7.2, the mmf
due to the current in coil aa' is effective in the vertical direction. The resulting flux,
with centerline in the vertical direction, is maximum when 8 = 0 or 1T, and minimum
when 8 = 1T/2 or 31T/2. The variation of Laa (8) is 1T-periodic; by taking only dc and
fundamental terms, we get the result claimed. Note that with a round rotor,
Laa (8) = L, is constant.
Lbb may be similarly explained. Here we note that the mmf due to the current
in coil bb' is effective for producing flux along an axis at an angle of 21T/3 rather than
O. Thus 8 = h/3 results in a maximum flux rather than 8 = O. This explains the
shift in argument in Lbb compared with Laa. In Lbb we replace 8 by 8 - 21T/3, so that
the maximum occurs when 8 = 21T/3 rather than 8 = 0. In the case of LcC! similar
considerations lead to a replacement of 8 by 8 t 21T/3, or equivalently, 8 - 4rr/3.
We note that these replacements or shifts will occur frequently as the theory is
developed, and occasionally it is convenient to introduce a shift operator ~ to simplify
the notation. Let ~Laa indicate Laa with 8shifted (delayed) by 21T/3 (i.e., 8 replaced
by 8 - 21T/3). Then we have Lbb = naa and Lce = ~L bb = ~2Laa.
We turn next to some mutual inductances.
Mutual Inductances Between Stator Coils
Lab = t:
Aaa' = - [ M, t Lm cos 2 (1T)]
8 t "6
- = - [ M tL cos2 (51T)]
Lca =Ace' 8 t6
- ,
ia s m
Intuitively, we may justify the first of these results as follows. Consider a round
rotor first, in which case Lm = 0. Noting the reference directions for cPaa' and ib , we
see that Lab must be negative as shown. Now consider the salient-pole case. Lab will
still be negative but now depends on 8. We want to make it plausible that ILabl is
maximum for 8 = -1T/6. If 8 = -1T/3 the mmf due to ib is most effective in gener-
ating flux, but the flux is misdirected as far as linkages of coil aa' are concerned. On
the other hand, if 8 = 0, the flux is most effectively directed but there is less of it. A
quantitative analysis indicates that -1T/6, the average value of -1T/3 and 0, is the
compromise that gives the "best" result. We note that Lbc = ?JLab and
Lea = ?JL bc = ?J2 Lab, where ?J is the shift operator; examination of the coil geome-
try in Figure 7.2 provides the physical basis for this reslilt.
Other inductances. We will list and indicate the derivation of only a few
more of the remaining terms.
AFF ,
LFQ = -.- = 0
lQ
The first result is implied by a sinusoidal distribution of field flux; this condition
is an objective of generator design and was discussed in Section 6.2; the expression
for (the open circuit) Aaa', given in (6.3a),is in the form LaFi F. The second result may
be inferred by noting that the magnetic circuit "seen" from the rotor is the same for
all e. The last result follows because the two coils involved are perpendicular.
We will not continue further with this list. We note that in the 6 X 6 induc-
tance matrix, because of symmetry, there are 21 elements to be determined, of which
we have listed and attempted to justify 9. Completing the process, we finally get the
symmetric matrix
(7.13)
whose submatrices are as follows:
L, + Lm cos 2f1 -M,-r L

n cos 2(8+ 2:.)
6 -M' -m
L cos2(e + 57T)
6
-M,-L
m COS2(8+2:.)
6 L, + Lmcos2(e _ 2;) L COS2(e
-M ,-m - 2:.)
2
L cos 2(e
-M,-m + 57T)
6 L CO~ 2(0 - 2:.)
-M,-m 2 L, + LmCOS2(fI + 2;)
MF cos e MD cos e MQ sin e
2
L12 = LII = MFcos. (e.:...""3
21T) MD cos (e _ 2;) MQ Si n(e- ;)
MF cos (e + 2;) MDcos(e + 2;) MQsin(e + 2;)

(7.14)
226 Generator Modeling 1\ [Circuit Viewpoint) Chap. 7
All constants in (7.14) are nonnegative. We can think of their values as being deter-
mined experimentally. Note that Ln relates stator flux linkages to stator currents, L22
relates rotor flux linkages to rotor currents, while L12 gives the flux linkages of the sta-
tor coils in terms of the currents in the fotor coils.
It may be seen that L(O) depends on 0 in a complicated way. The generator
voltage-current relation reflects that complication. From (7.12),
using A=L(O)i,
we get
. dL(O). di
v=-Ri---I-L(IJ)- (7.15)
dt dt
Hence even in the simplest case with uniform shaft rotation, where IJ wot + 00 , the
form of (7.14) indicates that we get linear differential equations with periodically
time-varying coefficients. It is hard to understand the general nature of system be-
havior in this case.
'.3 THE PARK TRANSFORMATION
To simplify the equations and in some important cases obtain linear time-invariant
equations, we use a Park transformation (also called a Blondel transformation, or
Odq transformation, or transformation to rotor coordinates) of the stator abc quan-
tities. We transform abc voltages, currents, and flux linkages. The transformation, in
the case of currents, yields
1 1 1
Vi v2 v2
[t]=~ cos IJ cos(1J _ 2;) cos(e + 2;)

m (7.16)
sin IJ .(
sm e- 2~) .(
sm e+ 2~)
3
3 (It
or, using matrix notation,
iOdq Pi.be (7.17)
which defines the P matrix and the abc and Odq vectors. Similarly, for voltages and
flux linkages, we get
VOdq = PVabe (7.18)
Aodq = PAabc (7.19)
The new Odq variables are also called Park's variables, or, for reasons we will indi-
cate in the next paragraph, rotor-based variables. Note that the transformation P de-
pends one.
Physically, id and iq have an interpretation as currents in a fictitious pair of ro-
tating windings "fixed in the rotor." id flows in a fictitious coil whose axis is aligned
Sec. 7.3 The Park Transformation 227
with the direct or d axis; iq flows in a fictitious coil whose axis is aligned with the
quadrature or q axis. These currents produce the same flux components as do the ac-
tual abc currents.
Recalling from Chapter 6 that in the steady state with balanced (positive-
sequence) abc currents we got a synchronously rotating flux (i.e., constant when
viewed from the rotor), it is understandable that we can generate this constant rotating
flux with constant currents in the fictitious rotating coils. Hence the inductance ma-
trix relating these transformed quantities should be a constant matrix.
In fact, we now show this mathematically. Note first that P is nonsingular;
in fact, p-l pT.
1
cos 0 sin e
Y2
p-l = pT = ~ 1
cos (0 _ 2;) . (
Sill 2~)
0-"3 (7.20)
Y2
cos (0 + 2;) sin (0 + 2;)
The reader may check this by multiplying Pinto pT to get the identity matrix. Since
the rows of P are the same as the columns of pT, we find that the columns of pT are
orthonormal (I.e., if U; designates a column of P, then ufuj = 0, i *" j, uTu; = 1).
We need to consider all six components of each current, voltage, or flux linkage
vector. While we wish to transform the stator-based (abc) variables into rotor-based
(Odq) variables, we wish to leave the original rotor quantities unaffected. With this
objective we define the 6-vector iB and the 6 X 6 matrix B as follows:
I
io I
I
ia
id P: I
0 ib
iq I ie
11 I
iB = ... .. 1......
I
= Bi (7.21)
iF iF
iD 0 1 iD
iQ iQ
where 1 is the 3 X 3 identity matrix and 0 is the 3 x 3 zero matrix. Similarly, We define
VB Bv (7.22)
AB = BA (7.23)
The reader can easily check that
B- = Br [P; ~J
1
(7.24)
Now we wish to find the relationship between the rotor-based variables AB and i B .
Starting with (7.1) and using (7.21) and (7.23), we get, successively,
A = Li
B-1A B= LB-1i B (7.25)
AB = BLB-1i B = LBiB
1
where LB ! BLB- . Using the rule for finding the transpose of'a product of matri-
ces (product of transposes in reverse order), wefind that L~ = (BLBTf = BeB T=
BLBT = LB' Thus LB is symmetric because L is symmetric. By premultiplying by B- 1
and postmultiplying by Bwe also find the relationship L = B-1LBB. Next, we can cal-
culate LB using (7.13) and (7.24):
T
[P OJ [Lll LJ [P OJ
12
LB =
° 1 Lzl L22
T
° 1 (7.26)
=[PLnPT PL12]
L21 P L22
Consider now the terms in (7.26). As expected, Ln is unchanged. Bya tedious but
straightforward calculation, we can show that
PL"P' = [! ~, 1.1 (7.27)
where
~
Lo = L, - 2M,
6 3
Ld = L, + M, + 2Lm
6 3
Lq = L, + M, - 2Lm
With a knowledge oflinear algebra we can show that this simplification occurs because
the columns of pT are (orthonormal) eigenvectors of Lll ,and hence the similarity trans-
formation yields a diagonal matrix of eigenvalues. Note: Ld and Lq are the inductances
associated with Xd and Xq in the two-reaction model derived in Cbapter 6.
Exercise 2. Show that the first column of pT[i.e., (1/V3)(1, 1, 1n is an eigen-

vector OfLll corresponding to the eigenvalue Lo = L, - 2M,.
Consider next the off-diagonal submatrix L21 PT = (PL12 f Using (7.14),

1
MFcosO MFCOS(O - 2;) Mr cos (0 + 2;) V2
cos 0 sin 0
L11PT = MDcosO MD cos (0 - 2;) MDCOS(O + 2;) ~ ~ COS(O-~) sin (0 _2;)
MQsinO MQSin(O - 2371') M~Sin(o + 2;) ~ COS (0 + 2;) Sin(Ot 2;)

(7.28)
Sec. 7.4 Park's Voltage Equation 229
Here we recognize that the first two rows of L21 are proportional to the second col-
umn of pT, which we previously indicated was orthogonal to the remaining two
columns of pT. The third row of L21 is proportional to the third column of pT.
Thus, multiplying rows into columns, it is easy to evaluate the product of the two
matrices. We get
0 ~MF 0
L21 PT = 0 ~Mv 0 (7.29)
0 0 ~MQ
To simplify the notation, let k ~ v3j2; then, from (7.14), (7.26), (7.27), and (7.29),
we get
I
Lo 0 0: 0 0 0
o Ld 0: kMF kMv 0
o 0 Lq i 0 0 kMQ
LB = -----------------:------------------- (7.30)
o kMF 0 : LF MR 0
o kMv 0: MR Lv 0
o 0 kMQ i 0 0 LQ
Note that the matrix LB is simple, sparse, symmetric, and constant. The reader should
compare it with the more complicated L in (7.13) and (7.14).
7.4 PARK'S VOLTAGE EQUATION
We next derive the voltage-current relations using Park's variables. Starting with
(7.12), which is repeated here,
. dA
v=-Ri-- (7.12)
dt
and using (7.21) to (7.23), we find that
B- 1VB -- - RB-1'IB - did (B- 1AB)

Premultiplying on the left by B, we get
(7.31 )
230 Generator Modeling II [Circuit Viewpoint) Chap, 7
Using the identity

I I
I I
I I I
P : 0
I
r I
I
I
o p-l: 0
I
I r I I
BRB- 1 = --~---I
---------~------------
I
----~---
I
=R (7.32)
I
: : rF I
o: 1 0 :I o: 1
: rQ
we can simplify (7.31) by replacing BRB- 1

by R. Continuing, and using the rule for
differentiating a product, we get
dB- 1 dA
v = -Ri -B-A __B (7.33)
B B dt B dt
Thus, just as in (7.2), we get speed voltages and transformer voltages.

Next, we wish to obtain a more explicit expression for the matrix B(dB- 1
/ dt) in
(7.33). We first calculate B(dB-1/dB). Using(7.21) and (7.24), we get
BdB-1 = [p 0] [d:;l 0] = [pd:;l 0]

(7.34)
dB 0 1 0 0 0 0
where
[~
1
V2
p-
dP-l =V3(i cosO ;1" cos 0
dB 3 sin 0 ;1" sin 0
- sin 0 cos 0 ]
-;1" sin 0 ;1" cos 0 (7.35)
_;1"2 sin 0 ;1"2 c~O
To simplify the notation, we have introduced the shift operator. Using the orthogo-
nality properties of the rows and columns in (7.35), we get
p dP-1 = ~ [~ ~~] [~ -1~~]0

= (7.36)
dO 3 0 -~ 0 0
Then, using (7.36) in (7.34), we get

I
0 0 0 I
I
0 0 1 I
I 0
0 -1 0 I
I
I
dB- 1 I (7.37)
B-= -------------1----- I
dO
0 0
Sec. 7.5 Park's Mechanical Equation 231
a 6 X 6 matrix with only two nonzero elements! Finally, noting that B(dB-1jdt) =
B(dB-1/de)(de/dt) and substituting (7.37) in (7.33), we get the electrical equation:
o
Aq
-Ad dAB
VB = -RiB - e o (7.38)
dt
o
o
Note 1: If the shaft rotation is uniform (Le., e= del dt = constant), (7.38) is lin-
ear a.nd time invariant! Very often as a good approximation we can assume
that 0 = constant.
Note 2: Although, superficially, (7.38) looks very much like (7.12), it is impor-
tant to note that (7.38) is basically much simpler. In (7.38), As = LsiB' where
LB is the constant matrix in (7.30), while in (7.12), A = Li, where L = L(e) is the
very complicated matrix in (7.13) and (7.14).
Equation (7.38) is the electrical equation in terms of the transformed variables

iB, VB, and As. To study dynamic behavior we need a companion mechanical equa-
tion. Thus, we next find the mechanical torque TE, in terms of L8 and i8 and AB, for
use in the mechanical equation (7.10).
7.5 PARK'S MECHANICAL EQUATION

I·
We start by deriving an expression for the electrical torque in terms of Park's vari-
ables. The original expression (7.9) repeated here is
_loJdL(el.
TE - 21 -----;JO I (7.9)
We wish to replace Land i with L8 and i e. We can use i = B- 1i8 = BTi e and
L = B-1LeB. Thus
(7.39)
We note again that Le is not a function of e, but B and B- 1 are. Differentiating with
respect to e, we get ,_.
_ l'T dB T' 1.y dB- 1 •
TE - ll8 LS de B 18 + 218B dO L818 (7.40)
where we have freely interchanged BT and B- 1. We now will show that the two prod-
ucts of terms in (7.40) are equal. The product of terms on the left, a scalar, is re-
placed by its transpose, the same scalar. Then we get
(7.41)
Since the operations of differentiation and transposition commute, (dBldW =

dBTlde, and the two products are equal. Thus taking twice the.second (right-hand)
term, we get
(7.42)
Finally, using (7.37) and AB = LBiB, we get

I
0 0 0 I
I
0 0 1 I
I 0
0 -1 0 I
I
I
I
TE = i~ -------------,-----
I AB
I
0 I
I
0
(7.43)
which is a very compact expression for the torque. Using (7.30) to relate flux link-
ages to currents, we may obtain an expression entirely in terms of currents. Note
that Aq is related to iq and iQ, while Ad depends on id , iF, and iD • Note that io does not
enter into the torque equation at all.
Substituting (7.43) in (7.3), we get a mechanical equation
(7.44)
in addition to the electrical equation (7.38). Note that both eqU!$ons are in terms of
the Park variables.
7.6 CIRCUIT MODEL
A close examination of LB, (7.30), which relates AB to iB, reveals a useful property.
1..0 depends only on io; Ad, AF, and AD depend only on id, iF, and iD; Aq and AQ depend
only on iq and iQ• The decoupling of the direct-axis and quadrature-axis circuits may
be understood by noting the orientations of the physical andlor fictitious coils.
We can take advantage of this decoupling by grouping the scalar equations that
make up the components of vector equation (7.38). The groupings are into zero-
sequence, direct-axis, and quadrature-axis equations as follows:
Sec.7.B Circuit Model 233
Zero sequence:
. dAQ
Vo = -rio - --:it (7.45)
Direct axis:
(7.46)
Quadrature axis:
(7.47)
Note that except for the BA q and BAd terms, the three groups of equations are com-
pletely decoupled.
We also have the completely decoupled equations relating flux linkages to cur-
rents as follows:
Zero sequence:
(7.48)
Direct axis:
(7.49)
Quadrature axis:
(7.50)
Since the matrix (7.30) is symmetric, we can find a circuit model for the preceding
equations, and this is shown in Figure 7.3.
By writing KVL for each circuit, the preceding circuit model may be checked.
The advantage of a circuit diagram is that we can use our experience with other
234 Generator Modeling II (Circuit Viewpoint] Chap. 7
...-..J..Mfv---_--o +
Zero sequence
Direct axis
Quadrature axis
Figure 7.3 Equivalent-circuit model.
circuits to understand, at least qualitatively, the behavior of the circuit. For example,
the time constants of the "damper" circuits (in which iD and iQ flow) are very low,
even taking the coupling into account. In this case, in many transients, iD and iQ decay
very rapidly to zero, and, except for a very short initial interval in the transient, we
expect little error if we neglect iD and iQ (i.e., set ihem equal to zero). This discus-
sion will be clearer in the context of specific applications.
ill
We should note that a normalization of rotor-based quantities is possible (an

extension of the per unit system) such that simpler equivalent circuits are obtained
for the direct-axis and quadrature-axis circuits. This is analogous to the elimina-
tion of the ideal transformers in the transformer per phase equivalent circuits in
Chapter 5.
Sec. 7.8 Applications 235
7.7 INSTANTANEOUS POWER OUTPUT
Before going to some applications, we consider an additional useful result. We cal-

culate the instantaneous three-phase power output of the generator in terms of Odq
variables. We start with
(7.51)
where we are using the notation introduced in (7.17). Thus, using pT = p-l,
(7.52)
The important result is that we can calculate instantaneous three-phase power using
Odq variables, without converting back to abc variables.
7.8 APPLICATIONS
We next turn to three applications that illustrate the use of the Park transformation
and equations. The general procedure follows:
General procedure
1. The problem as usually stated includes references to abc (stator) voltage and/or
current variables. We transform these variables to Odq variables using (7.17)
and/or (7.18).
2. The problem is then solved using th,e mechanical equation (7.44) and/or the
electrical equation (7.38) together with (7.30). Frequently, it is simpler to use
the electrical equations (7.45) to (7.47) instead, together with (7.48) to (7.50).
Note: If 0 = constant, the equations are linear and time invariant and may be
solved conveniently using th~ Laplace transform.
3. We can then transform back to abc variables using the inverse Park transfor-
mation (7.20).
The reader may recognize the parallel between these steps and those in any
transformation technique. We now consider the first of our three applications.
Example 7.3 Application 1: Voltage Buildup

We are given the system schematic shown in Figure E7.3. Assume
1. The generator is rotating at synchronous speed with

1r
9=wol+-+/J /J = constant
2
2. The stator is open circuited (Le., ia = ib = i, "" 0).
3. The initial field current iF(O) = o.
4. At t = 0, a step function of constant voltage v~ is applied.
Ref.
/'"'"-__ i, = 0
' - - -__ i,=O
Figure E7.3
Neglect the damper circuits (i.e., set iD = iQ = 0) and derive an expression for the
open-circuit terminal voltages v" Vb, and V, for t ;::: O.
Note the following:
1. The assumptions imply that the generator is initially at "rest" electrically (i.e.,
in equilibrium), with all currents, fluxes, and voltages equal to zero. We wish
to see how the generator terminal voltages come to life upon application of
the field voltage.
2. Inclusion of the 1r12 in the expression for 9 seems awkward at first but leads
to simpler expressions for voltage in terms of /J. Henc.rth, we will rou-
tinely include the 1r12.
3. We expect the errors caused by neglecting the damper circuits to be confined
to a very short initial interval.
Solution From (7.17) iabc "" 0 implies that iOdq = O. Since we are neglecting the
damper circuits, iD = iQ = O. Thus the only nonzero current is iF' From (7.48) to
(7.50), we find that
Ao =0
Ad = kMFi F
AF = LFiF
Aq = 0
t
Since we are neglecting the damper circuits, we do not need to c.alculate AD and AQ•
Using (7.45) to (7.50), we get, for t ==: 0,
Vo =0
= wOAd = wokMFiF
Vq
Solving the third equation with iF(O) = 0, we get
vO
iF(t) = ..!.. (1 - e~(rFILF)I) t==:O
rF
With no armature reaction (iab, == 0) this is exactly what we expect! Using this result
in the fourth equation, we get
, wokMFV~
v (t) = - - (1 - e~(rrlLF)I)
q rF
and from the second equation, we get
kMFV~
Vd(t) = - - - e~(rFILF)1
LF
Going back to abc variables, Vab, = P~IVOdq; thus, using (7.20),
va(t) = i-(~vo + Vd cos e + vqsine)

MFV~
('L)
=---e~rF' FICOS ( wt+-+8
7T )
LF 0 2
WOMFV~
+- -(1- .1
e~(rf,LF)I)sin (
wot + -7T + i5 )
rF 2
From (7.20) we can see that the only change required for the calculation of Vb and V,
is the appropriate shift in argument of the sine and cosine by 27Tt3. In fact, Vb(t) and
v,(t) are identical to va(t) except for a phase shift of -120° and - 240°, respectively.
As a practical matter, WOLF» rF, so that very early in the transient the second
term dominates. Then
Thus the "envelope" of voltage "builds up" to its steady-state value with the buildup
having a time constant Tdo ~ LF/rF' Tdo is called the (direct-axis) transient open-cir-
cuit time constant. Open circuit here refers to the stator circuit. The value of Tdo is
typically in the range 2 to 9 sec.
I,
"
238 Generator Modeling II [Circuit Viewpoint) Chap. 7
In the steady state we get the (open-circuit) voltage

WoMFV} ,Pi
va(t) "" - - cos (wat + 8) = v21Eal cos (wat + 8)
'F
which matches the result found earlier in (6.6). We note that the open-circuit voltage
magnitude is lEal = WoMFV}rfi 'F, a result we will be using in the next example. Fi-
nally, we note that the phase of the (steady-state) open-circuit voltage is 8; the reason
we chose to include the 1T12 in e = wat + 1T/2 + 8 was to obtain this simple result.
Example 7.4 Application 2: Symmetrical Short Circuit

Suppose that in Application 1, after the voltage has reached its steady-state value, we
have a "solid" three-phase short circuit or "fault" at the stator terminals of the ma-
chine. This is the simplest case of a short circuit we can consider. It is important to
determine the short-circuit current in order to pick circuit breakers and relay settings
to protect the generator. We note that initially these currents can be as much as 10
times the steady-state short-circuit currents! An introduction to the subject of gener-
ator protection, the location of circuit breakers and relays, is considered in Chapter 13.
Since this application yields results of great practical interest, we will consider
it in more detail than necessary simply to illustrate the use of Park's transformations.
Consider the system shown in Figure E7.4(a). Assume that
1. Generator is open circuited for t < 0 and short circuited for t ~ O.

2. e = wat + (1T/2) + 0,8 = constant.
3. VF = v~ = constant. iF is in the steady state at t = 0 [i.e., i F(O) = v~hl.
4. The effect of damper windings is neglected.
i,
v,
Figure E7.4(a)
Find i., ib, i" and iF for t ~ 0, concentrating on the behavior at the beginning of
the transient.
Note: At the beginning of our analysis we will include the damper circuits. We will
drop them later.
Solution. We make the following observations.

1. For t < 0, iabe = 0 =} iOdq = O.
2. Fort;::: 0, vabe = O=}VOdq = O.
From what we know about inductive circuits with (finite) voltage sources, the cur-
rents will not change instantaneously. Thus, we may assume for the circuit established
aU = 0,
3. iOdq(O) = O.
For t ;::: 0 we have the short circuit, so from the preceding observations and (7.45) to (7.47),
. dio
0= -no - L0d! zero sequence
o . dAF
VF = rFIF +-
dt
direct axis
I
. dAD
0= rolo + dt
o= -n.q + WOAd - -dAq

dt
quadrature axis
. dAQ
0= rQIQ + dt
The zero-sequence equation describes an RL circuit without a source and with
a zero initial condition. Thus io{t) '" 0 and need not be considered further.
In the remaining equations we may express flux linkages in terms of currents; we
get five linear constant coefficient differential equations in the current variables
id, iF' io, iq , and iQ . In principle the solution is straightforward but requires numeri-
cal data. Later we will simplify by neglecting the damper circuits. First, however, let
us digress to obtain the steady-state solution.
Steady-State Solution. The only source is.the constant voltage, v~, and with resistance,
all variables tend to constant values in the steady state. Thus dAd/ dt ~ 0, ... ,
dAQ/dt ~O, and then, from the equations, it may be seen that io ~O, iQ ~O, and
iF ~ v~/ rF' We get the following steady-state relations:
rid + woLi. = 0
.
Tlq - Wo
(.
Lh + -r-F-
kMFV~) = 0
The second of these equations may be simplified by notigg that the pre fault open-
circuit voltage magnitude (at t = 0) is IE.(O)I = WOMFV~/V2 rF; this was shown at the
end of Application 1. Then we can write
240 Generator Modeling II (Circuit Viewpoint)., Chap. 7
r
[ -WOLd WOLqJ[~dJ
r lq
= [OJ Y2 k lEa (0)1
1
Solving for id and iq and using p-l, we get the steady state ia(t).
i.(t) = ,z~ I:~~~J sin (wot + %+0) -woLq cos(wol +%+0)]

We get the same result by using the two-reaction model of Chapter 6. Finally, ne-
glecting r, we get the simple result,
Y2IEa (0)1 ( 71' ) Y2IEa (0)1
ia(t) = cos wot + -2 + 8 = X sin (wot + 8)
WOLd d
This matches the result obtained in Example 6.7.
We return now to a consideration of the transient.
Solution for Transient. To avoid the necessity of using numerical data, we will sim-
plify the system of differential equations by neglecting the damper circuits. In this case
we assume that iD = iQ = 0 and eliminate two differential equations. We note that
neglecting the damper circuit is equivalent to ignoring the very first part of the tran-
sient (one or two cycles in duration). We are then left with three linear constant co-
efficient differential equations. Using (7.49) and (7.50), we can express the flux
linkages directly in terms of currents. Changing sign where convenient,
we get
(7.53)
II
il l ,1
The most convenient way to get a solution (in closed form) is to u§e the Laplace trans-
form. We remind the reader that the Laplace transform of dxilr is sX(s) - x(O-),
whereX(s) is the Laplace transform of x(t). We use this result in (7 .53), noting the ini-
tial conditions, id(O-) = iq(O-) = 0 and iF(O-) = i~ = v~/rF' Introducing matrix nota-
tion,we get
[
S:~~d r::~~F W~Lq ][::] = [LFk:;F/S] i~
r (7.54)
-woLd -wokMF r + sL q lq 0
Here we are using the notation .t for the Laplace transform of x(t) to save the nota-
tion Id and Iq for a different use.
Now we can solve for id ,IF,and lq, using Cramer's rule. For example,in the case
ofid,we get
kMF skMF woLq

rF
S+LF rF + SLF 0
0 -wokMF r + sLq
fd = '0
IF
~(S)
where the characteristic polynomial ~(s) is the determinant of the matrix in (7.54).
The location of the zeros of ~(s) are important in specifying the transient be-
havior of id, iF, and iq. By a routine but tedious calculation, we get a characteristic
polynomial in the form
~(s) = as l + bs 2 + cs + d
where
a = LdLFLq
b = (Ld + Lq)LFr + LaLqTF
c = w6LdLFLq + LFr2 + (Ld + Lq)rrF
d = (w6LdLq + r2Jrr
and Ld ~ Ld - (kMd/ LF. Ld is called the direct-axis transient inductance; its phys-
ical significance will be discussed later. Ld can be shown to be always positive. A typ-
ical value is Ld "" 0.2Ld' Thus, all the coefficients of the characteristic polynomial
~(s) are positive.
In fact, we can show more. We can show that all the zeros of ~(s) lie in the open
left half-plane. The reader who knows the Routh-Hurwitz test can easily verify that
result. In practice because the resistance values rand rF are relatively small, the zeros
of ~(s) are not very different from the values found by setting them equal to zero. In
this case we get the very simple result
and thus the zeros of ~(s) are on the jw axis at SI = 0, S2 = j Wo, and SJ = - j w00 The
effect of including the resistance is to move the zeros of ~(s) slightly into the left
half-plane.
As an approximation we will assume that r = rF = O. This will not significant-
ly affect behavior for the first few cycles. The main effect is to eliminate damping in
the solution of the differential equation; later we will reintroduce the damping (in a
qualitative way) to explain the transition to the steady-state condition.
Now we return to the solution for fd • Evaluating the numerator determinant
(with r = rF = 0), we get -w6kMFLFLq. Thus
•
Id=-------
kMFiJ w6
Ld S(S2 + W6)
Now, after partial fraction expansion, we can write
Taking inverse Laplace transforms,

kMFi~
id(t) = Il; (cos wat - 1)
Defining Xd = woLd, called the direct axis transient reactance, and using quantities
previously defined [i.e., Y2IEa(O)1 = WaMFv~/rF = WOMFi~ and k = V3;2], we get
id (t) in the simplest terms.
"v'3 lEa (0)1
id(t) = Xd (cos wat - 1)
where IEa(O)1 is the prefault open-circuit voltage we calculated in Application 1.

Returning to (7.54), by similar calculations the reader may verify the follow-
ing results:
. "v'3 lEa (0)1 .
Iq(t) = X sm wot
q
iF(t) = [1 + Xd ;dXd (1 - cos wot)] i~

= [~:- [~: -1]coswot]i~
While id and iq are intermediate results (we still need to calculate iabe), the calculation
of the (approximate) iF is complete and we can discuss the result. Because Xd/ Xd is
large, typically in the range 4 to 8, we get a large average (dc) component and a large
sinusoidal component. This is shown in Figure E7 .4(b) on the left.
I
I
T
f __
f--
iAr) Theoretical iF(t) Experimental

(neglecting resistance)
Figure E7.4(b) Field current during transient.

Figure E7.4(b) on the right indicates an experimentally determined field tran-

sient. From this we can infer the effect of including resistance in the model; we ob-
serve the damping and the return of iF(t) to the steady-state value i~. Note that iF is
far from constant during this transient, with or without resistance. Note also that
for the initial part of the transient (say the first cycle) the effect of neglecting resis-
tance does not lead to serious errors; the two waveforms in Figure E7.4(b) are rea-
sonably close.
Now we use the inverse Park transformation to find ia , ib , and ie .
Then, noting that io(t) == 0, we get
iit) =
V2
V3 [ cos ( wot + "211' + 0) V3 Xd
IE, (0)1
(cos wot - 1)
11' ) V3IEa (0)1 ]

+ sin ( wot + "2 + 0 Xq sin wot
Using trigonometric identities for the various products, we separate the terms of fre-
quency 0, Wo and 2wo.
VilE, (0)1 ( 11' )

iit) = - Xd cos wot + "2 + 0
[1 ( 11') + -cos (11'

+ V2IEa (0)1 -cos 2wot+-+o ---0 )] 1
Xd 2 2 2 2
[1
+ VilE, (0)1 -cos (11'
---0 ) --cos 2wt+-+o
11')] 1 (
Xq 2 2 2 0 2
Vi lEa (0)1
= Xd sin (wot + 0) (7.55a)
_ IE, (0)1 [~+~] sin 5 (7.55b)

Vi Xd Xq
lEa (0)1 [ 1 1]
- - - --; - - sin (2wot + 5) (7.55c)
V2 Xd Xq .
The first term, (7.55a), is the fundamental or 60-Hz component. Thesecond term,
(7.55b), is the dc or offset or unidirectional component. The third term, (7.55c), is the
second harmonic or 120-Hz component. It should be recalled that in the derivation
of these results, resistance was neglected. Thus, these results are only valid during the
initial portion of the transient before the damping due to resistance has had a signifi-
cant effect.
The reader should check that ib and ie can be found from (7.55) by replacing 5
by 5 - 211'/3 and 0 + 211'/3, respectively. We note that while the change in 5 only
changes the phase of the Wo and 2wo terms in (7.55a) and (7.55c), it changes the mag-
nitude of the unidirectional term in (7.55b).
This completes the solution of Application 2. We now make some additional obser-
vations about the solutions just obtained.
1. We previously digressed to calculate the steady-state short-circuit current ne-

glecting resistance. The result was
v2 lEa (0)1
ia(t) = Xd sin (wot + 8)
Now we note from (7.55a) that the initial behavior of the 60-Hz component is
given by the foregoing with Xd replaced by X d. When (small) resistance is in-
cluded in the analysis, we get a smooth transition from the initial to the steady-
state behavior. The approximate transient is given by
i~(t) = v2IEa (0)1 [~d + (1 d - ~J e- Td ] sin (wot + 8)

t
/
where i~ designates the 60-Hz component. The time constant describing the
transition is Yd, called the direct-axis transient short-circuit time constant, with
numerical values of 0.5 to 3 sec for large machines.
I
;1 2. When the resistance is included, the unidirectional term in (7.55b) is no longer
constant but decays rapidly (exponentially) to zero (8 to 10 cycles). Similarly,
the phase b and phase c terms decay exponentially. Fast-acting circuit break-
ers can operate in 1 to 2 cycles and thus must "interrupt" currents that include
these unidirectional components.
3. To compare the initial values of these unidirectional components for the dif-
ferent phases, we may use Figure 7.4. We draw three "phasors" of magnitUde
[IE a(O)I/v2](l/ Xd + 1/ Xq) and phase angles 8, 8 - 120 and 8 - 240 cor-
0
,
0
,
I
I
I
I
UnidireCtional---1
phase b I
component I
Figure 7.4 Unidirectional components.

responding to the unidirectional components of phases a, b, and c, respective-

ly. Then we take the negative of the vertical components of these "phasors" as
shown in Figure 7.4. Thus, for this particular 15, the biggest unidirectional com-
ponent (it is positive) occurs in phase b.
In the derivation we have assumed that the short circuit occurs at t = O.
Physically, applYIng the short circuit at t = 0 is equivalent to applying the short
circuit when the rotor angle e = (7r/2) + 15. Thus from Figure 7.4 we can esti-
mate that the short occurred when the rotor direct axis was at an angle of about
110°. Using this point of view, one can determine the effect of a short circuit oc-
curring at different times. For example, if e = 90° when the short occurs
(15 = 0), the unidirectional component in ia is zero. If e = 0° or 180° (maximum
flux linkages of coil aa') when the short occurs, the phase a unidirectional com-
ponent has a maximum magnitude.
4. The 120-Hz term (7.55c) also decays to zero when resistance is included. When
this relatively small term is added to the 60-Hz term in (7.55a), we get the non-
sinusoidal wave shape observable in practice. The effect, however, is considered
insignificant and the 120-Hz component is usually ignored when calculating
short-circuit currents.
5. Suppose that a short occurs for e = 0 (i.e., when i5 = 90°). Then the phase a uni-
directional component is zero, the phase b component is positive, and the phase
c component (equal in magnitude) is negative. Each of the three components
decays rapidly to zero. A crude sketch of the three-phase currents including the
unidirectional offsets is shown in Figure 7.5.
6. If the damper windings are included in the analysis, we get a larger 60-Hz
component during the first few cycles. Thus we get, approximately, for the 60-
Hz component.
x;; is called the direct-axis sub transient reactance with a typical value
X;; = O.lXd (for large turbine generators). T;; is called the direct-axis subtran-
sient short-circuit time constant with a typical value of less than 0.035 sec (two
cycles). By comparison, Td is typically in the order of 1 sec. Within the brack-
ets, from right to left, we find terms identified with the subtransient component
(with time constant T;;), the transient component (with Td)' and the steady-
state component. It is mstructive to sketch the envelope of this waveform as in
Figure 7.6. Because T;;« Td, the transient and subtransient components show
up as distinct components and are easily identified.
Before continuing with another application, it may be of interest to try to un-

derstand physically why the initial60-Hz short-circuit currents are so much bigger than
the steady-state values. A highly simplified answer follows. For simplicity we will
i,U)
t-
t-
Figure 7.5 Short-circuit currents.
neglect the effect of the damper winding circuits, and also assume that the small re-
sistances , and 'F are negligible. ':JI
In the steady state, before the short circuit occurs, there is a constant field cur-
rent i~ and corresponding constant flux linkages A~ = LA of the field winding. The
stator currents are zero and do not contribute to the field flux linkages. This is no
longer true once stator currents begin to flow during the short circuit. The short-
circuit currents lag the internal voltages by 90°; thus, as was shown in Chapter 6, they
tend to set up a demagnetizing armature reaction flux in the field winding, which op-
poses the flux due to the field current. Equivalently, in the notation of this chapter,
id is negative. Thus AF now has two components, one due to iF and the other due to
the stator currents.
Now with 'F = 0 we get a remarkable result: No matter what the variation of
iF and the stator currents, AF remains constant. For example, in Application 2 just
concluded, although id(t) and iF(t) were each highly variable [see iF in Figure
E7.4(b)], a calculation of Ar(t) shows it to be constant! We note that the constancy
Steady
state
1--"
----------~-~-------
Figure 7. B Short-circuit current components.
of AF follows from a particular application of the so-called principle of conservation

of flux linkages.
With AF constant, and in the face of the demagnetizing component due to the
stator currents, iF must increase. In fact, in Figure E7.4(b) we did observe an increase
(on average) of iF during the transient. This increase in iF may be viewed as the rea-
son for the larger short-circuit current.
Suppose that rF is not equal to zero but is small in value. Then AF changes slow-
ly from its initial value. For an initial interval we can assume that it is almost constant.
We can carry the consequences of constant (or almost constant) AF a step fur-
ther. Neglecting damper windings, we can use (7.49) to relate Ad, AF, id, and iF more
succinctly, by using the "hybrid" form. Picking id and AF as independent variables, we
solve for Ad and iF and after carrying out simple algebra, we get
[~:J [-kl~~/LF k~1~FJ[~~J

= (7.56)
where Ld = Ld - (kMd/ LF is the previously defined direct-axis transient reac-
tance. With AF constant, we get dAd/ dt = Lddid/ dt [i.e., Ld (rather than Ld) appears
to be the appropriate inductance parameter when there is a constraint:
AF = constant]. This may help explain the frequent occurrence of Ld in the short-
circuit derivations.
Although we will not pursue this development in detail, it is interesting to con-
sider the extension of these results to the case where the damping circuits are in-
cluded in the analysis. Once again assuming field and damper resistances negligible
and using the principle of conservation of flux linkages, we find AF , AD, and AQ
all constant. Consider the implications with respect to the direct-axis equations.
"",'1
I
Writing hybrid equations in the form (7.56), instead of (7.49), we find Ad, iF, and iD
in terms of id, AF, and AD' We find, after simple matrix algebra, that
Ad = L'did + 'hAF + '12AD (7.57)
where L'd = Ld - k2(M}L D+ LDMb - 2MDMRMF)/(LFL~ - M~) and '11 and '12
are constants. We mentioned Xd £ woLd earlier in Note 6 following Application 2.
Since only id is variable on the right side of the equation, L'd is the appropriate
inductance parameter describing the initial interval of the short circuit. We note that
taking the constancy of AQ into account, there is also a new L; to be introduced. Of
course, with resistance in the damper circuit, AD and AQ can be assumed to be constant
in only a very short interval. In fact, they quickly decay from their initial values, and
there is a smooth transition to a transient dominated by the effects of field flux decay.
Exercise 3. Verify the expression for L'd by writing (7.49) in the suggested hybrid
form and doing the matrix algebra. Hint: Partition (7.49) with Ad and id as i-vector
partitions and solve for Ad in terms of id and A2 = [AF' ADt
We turn now to a somewhat different application. In the two applications con-

sidered so far, we have assumed synchronous operation (i.e., a rotor angle 8 that in-
creases at a uniform rate wo). We next wish to consider what happens when the
rotation rate is not necessarily Wo.
Example 7.5 Application 3: Nonsynchronous Operation

Suppose that we connect a generator to an infinite bus that imposes a set of positive-
sequence (balanced) terminal voltages with va(t) = V21V1 cos (wot + ~). The rota-
tion ofthe generatorrotor is described by e = w1t + (7T/2) + 5. In general, WI Woo '*
In fact, WI may even be negative, in which case the rotor is turning clockwise instead
of counterclockwise! Find Vo, Vd, and vq .
I I
'"
Solution Using the Park transformation as specified by (7.16),
-1 -1 -1 2
Vo 21VI v2 v2 v2 cos cos'"
- .!!...
Vd] = v'3 cos e '!] cos e '!]l cos e (1/1 3 )
[ Vq 3[ sin e '!] sin e '!]2 sin e ( 47T)
cos 1/1--
3
where '" ~ wot + ~. Thus we have
Vo =0
'IIII,
I
Vd -_ 21V1 - 27T)
v'3 [ cos ecos'" + '!] cos ecos ('"- 3 - + '!]l cos ecos ('"- 3
- 47T)]
-
21V1 [1
= Y3 2cos(8-~)+2COS(et~)
1
1
+2COS(I1-~)+2COS
1 (11 +~ -
3
47T)
+ ~ cos (11 - ~) + ~ cos (e + ~4 - 47T) ]
= Y31V1 cos (e - ~) = Y31V1 cos (~ - (1)

Substituting for ~ and e, we get
Vd = Y3IVI cos [(WO - WI)t + L1:: - ~ - 8] (7.58)

= Y31V1 sin [(wo - WI)t + L1:: - 8]
By a similar development, we get
Vq = - Y3 IVI sin [(wo - WI)t + L1:: - ~ - 8] (7.59)

= Y31V1 cos [(wo - WI)t + Lt: - 5]
This completes the application. We would now like to discuss the result briefly.
1. We invite the reader to check the derivation of (7.58) and (7.59) without as-
suming that lVI, ~, and 0 are constant. The reader will find that (7.58) and
(7.59) hold even if lVI, ~, and 0 are time varying. We still require the positive-
sequence relation between the voltages in phases a, b, and c (i.e., whatever the
voltage variation in phase a, that in phases band c must be identical except for
lags of 120 0 and 240 0 , respectively). We will still use the term positive sequence
to describe this condition.
2. The result in (7.58) and (7.59) applies equally well to the calculation of id and
iq or Ad and Aq with obvious substitutions in the formulas.
3. Returning to the case of constant Va and 0, notice the interesting fact that we get
sinusoids of frequency Wo - WI' We claim that from a physical point of view it
makes sense. We may see this more clearly by considering current instead of
voltage. Replacing voltage sources by current sources, we get currents id and iq
of frequency Wo - WI' This is the frequency of the currents in the fictitious coils
on the rotor that generate the armature reaction flux in the air gap. Since the
sinusoidal currents in the fictitious coils are appropriately shifted in space and
time (90 0 in each case), they set up a rotating flux in the air gap. Relative to the
rotor, this rotating field has an angular velocity Wo - w!> but since the rotor an-
gular velocity is w!> the rotating flux in the air gap (relative to a stationary ref-
erence frame) is (wo - WI) + w) = Wo, which checks (i.e., it is thefrequency of
the current sources).
250 Generator Modeling II [Circuit Viewpoint) Chap, 7
4. Note that at synchronous speed (WI = Wo) Vd and Vq (or id and iq) are at zero
frequency (dc), At standstill (WI = 0) the frequency of Vd and Vq is Woo For
those familiar with induction motor operation, it is helpful to note that the fre-
quency of Vd and Vq is the slip frequency.
5. We note the possibility of calculating the quasi-steady-state torque of a syn-
chronous motor during startup (i.e., during the time the motor is being brought
up to speed). We will not attempt the calculation since it is lengthy and not
central to our subject. In principle, however, we may proceed as follows. Sup-
pose that the motor is turning at an angular velocity WI' Then Vd and Vq are si-
nusoids of frequency Wo - WI and may be represented by phasors, for
quasi-steady-state analysis. Using our synchronous machine model (7.45) to
(7.50), we can then solve for the currents and flux linkages using impedances
(calculated for the frequency Wo - WI)' The average steady-state torque may
then be calculated using (7.43). The analysis is simplified if we assume that the
field circuit is open circuited (iF = 0) during startup. It is necessary, however,
to retain the damper circuits in the analysis.
This completes the discussion of Application 3. We conclude this section by

suggesting that the three applications just considered demonstrate the great power
and flexibility of the synchronous machine model presented in (7.45) to (7.50).
Adding the physical insight we get from the simpler but more restricted model of
Chapter 6, we can develop a good grasp of synchronous machine behavior.
7.9 SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION
The results of Application 3 can be used to obtain a very nice result of use in the ex-
tremey important case of synchronous operation. Suppose that the generator ter-
minal voltages are a set of positive-sequence voltages with
va(t) = V2IVI cos (wot + ~) '.I
and the generatorrotor is turning at synchronous speed [i.e.,6 = wot + ('f(' /2) + oj.
For now we will assume that lVI, L!:::, and 0 are constants. Since WI = Wo, (7.58) and
(7.59) in Application 3 reduce to
Vq = V3IVI cos (L!::: - 0)
Vd = V31V1 sin (L!::: - 0)
Note that Vd and Vq are now constants (dc). We next consider a simple relation between
the phasor Va, the angle 8, and Vd and vq. Consider the following complex quantity.
vq+ jVd=V3IVI[cos(~-o)+ jsin(~-o)l
= V3IVI ej(ti.- li)
= V3Vae- jli
Sec. 7. 9 Synchronous Operation 251
Imaginary
axis
d axis
___ ~ q axis
---
Figure 7.7 Geometry of
_ _ _ _....111!:'--_......._ _ _ Real axis Va = (Vq + jVd)ei'.
where Va == IVleiL!': is the (complex) voltage phasor. Rearranging, we get
Va == ( ~ + j ~) eiD
Let Vq ~ vl\fj and Vd ~ v[V3; then
(7.60)
Note that Vq and Vd are purely real. Equation (7.60) gives the simple connection
between Va, 0, and Vq and Yd' Suppose that we are given Va and o. By an algebra-
ic or geometric calculation, we then find Vq and Yd' Finally, we find Vq and Vd by the
formulas Vq == Y3Vq and Vd == Y3Vd • Consider how very much simpler this is than
using the Park transformation, (7.16), to find these same quantities. We caution
the reader, however, that (7.60) applies only to synchronous (positive-sequence)
operation.
In solving (7.60) geometrically, we can use Figure 7.7. The figure is drawn for
Vq and Vd positive. It is useful to think of eiD and j eiD as unit vectors of a new coor-
dinate system at an angle 0 with respect to the real axis and imaginary axis; we label
the new axes q axis and d axis. Thus, the task of finding Vq and Vd is simply that of
resolving Va into components with respect to the new coordinate system.
Example 7.6
Find Vq and Vd corresponding to synchronous operation with Va = '12m.. and
o= 30°.
Solution In the complex plane we sketch Va = '12m.. and the new coordinate
frame (the q axis and d axis) at an angle of 30'. From the sketch Va is at an angle of
75° - 30° = 45' with respect to the q axis. Then resolving into components we get
Vq = Vd = 1. Then Vd = Vq = Vi We can also solve the problem algebraically
using (7.60).
Example 7.7
For synchronous operation, {j = 90', Vq = V3, and Vd = - V3. Find v..
Solution First we find Vq = 1 and Vd = -1. Using (7.60), we find that
V. = (1 - j1)e i1r/2 = V2 ~
We can also solve the problem geometrically using Figure 7.7.
Note: What has been done for V. holds as well for 10 or Aa.
Example 7.8
Synchronous operation again. 0 = 0° and 10 = - j 1. Find id and iq.
Solution 15 = 0°, so the "new" and "old" coordinate systems are aligned. Iq = 0 and
Id = -1. Then iq = 0 and id = - Vi
Example 7.9
A synchronous machine is in steady-state operation. The rotor angle l1(t) = wot + Tr/3.
va(t) = Vz 100 cos (wot + Tr/6) volts and ia(t) = - Vz 100 cos wot amperes. Find
io, id, iq, Vo, Vd, vq, andp3<1>(t). Is the machine a generator or a motor?
Solution l1(t) = wot + Tr/2 + 15 = wot + Tr/3 implies that 15 = -Tr/6 = -3D'. Un-
less stated to the contrary, we assume synchronous operation. Thus the voltages and
currents are in positive-sequence sets with V. = 100~ and 10 = -100. Since
om = 15 - E = -30° -30° = -60° is negative, we have a motor. Since the currents
and voltages are in balanced sets, io = Vo = O. We next resolve Va and la into com-
ponents along the q axis and d axis, as in Figure 7.7. This is shown in Figure E7.9.
We find Yq = 50, Vd = 86.6, Iq = -86.6, and Id = -50. Trln Vq = V3 X 50 =
86.6, Vd = 150, iq = -150, and id = -86.6. The units are volts and amperes.
We can calculate P3¢ (t) using (7.52):
Pl¢(t) = iovo + idVd + iqvq

= 0 + (-86.6)(15) + (-150)(86.6) = -25,981 W
which checks that the synchronous machine is a motor.
Alternatively, we can calculate P3~(t) using Va and 10 , We get
Pl¢(t) = 3P = 3 1V.lllal cos ¢
= 3 X 100 X 100 X cos (30° - 180°)
= -25,981 W
which checks.
Sec. 7. 9 Synchronous Operation 253
I d axis
/
Va = IOOQQ'
/
/
/
"-
"-
"-
"-
"q axis
Figure E7.9
While sketches give the most insight into the relations between the phasors, 13,
and direct and quadrature components, it is frequently more convenient in cal-
culations to use algebra relating real numbers. Thus we note, taking Va as an exam-
ple, that Va = Re Va + j 1m Va' Then, using (7.60), Va = Re Va + j 1m Va =
(Vq + jVd)( cos 13 + j sin 13). Thus, equating real parts and equating imaginary parts,
we get
Re Va] = [C?S 0 -sin 0] [Vq]

[ 1m Va sm 0 cos 0 Vd
Also, taking the inverse,
[~J=[-~~:; ~~~~J[~ i,J

We note that the terminology machine reference frame for the d-q axes, and the
network, common, or system reference frame for the real and imaginary axes, is fre-
quently used in the literature. The two reference frames and the relationship be-
tween components in the two reference frames are shown in Figure 7.8. We note
again that a given phasor Va distributes itself into very different components Vq and
Vd, depending on the angle 13 of the machine reference frame.
We note that the relationships we have derived also apply to the case where Va
and 13 are (slowly varying) functions oftime. In this case (7.60) and Figure 7.8 describe
a dynamic situation in which 13 and/or Va can vary. In general, then, Vd and Vq will also
be varying.
Finally, let us consider the case 'of m machines connected by a transmission sys-
tem. In this case there are m internal voltages with angles Ill, Il z, ... , Ilm to consider;
until now we have considered only a single angle Il. To help fix ideas, we will very
briefly consider the solution of the Park equations in the m-machine case. As in
Chapter 10, we assume n buses linked by a transmission system. To simplify, assume
that there are no loads at generator buses. The system interconnection is then given
by the mixed circuit/block diagram shown in Figure 7.9.
imaginary
axis
d axis 1m V,
\
\
\ Kqaxis
Figure 7.S Va resolved into

components in machine refer-
-----S-....- - - ' - - - _ R e a l axis ence frame and common
Re v, reference frame.
We assume positive-sequence voltages and currents with the amplitude and

phase of Ii and V; changing slowly enough to use quasi-steady-state analysis. In this
case we can use the relation Ibus = Ybus Vbus , where Ybus is a constant matrix relating
the slowly varying Ibus and Vbus'
For each generator model we can use (7.44) to (7.50), which involve the Park
voltages and currents. These variables after scaling by the factor v3 give the
Vdi , Vqi , h, and Iqi • These variables, in machine or d-q reference frames, must be
converted into a common reference frame by axis transformations. After axis trans-
formations we get the phasors Ii and V;. This collection of voltage and current ph a-
sors must satisfy the constraint Ibus = Ybus Vbus ' We will not be able to pursue the
interesting problem of the numerical integration of the equations beyond these
"setup" considerations.
(/ql,lal ) II 1111+1
+ + +
Generator
model
(Vql' Vdl)
Axis
transfonnation
VI ~+l ZDm+1
°1
Y bus
1m + + In
Vm Vn lDn
Generators Axis Transmission Loads

transfonnations system
Figure 7.9 m Machine interconnection.

Sec. 7.10 Steady-State Model 255
We return now to the case of a single machine and consider the Park equations
for steady-state analysis. We show that we get the same model as in Chapter 6.
7.10 STEADY·STATE MOD~L
Assume synchronous, positive-sequence, steady-state operation. In that case, Vo = 0

and, as we have seen in Section 7.9, Vel and Vq are constants. With VF also constant,
all the left sides of (7.45) to (7.47) are constants. Then in the steady state all the cur-
rents and flux linkages are constants. In particular, io = 0 and the rotor damper cur-
rents iD = iQ = O. We note also that e= Wo0 Then (7.45) to (7.50) reduce to
Vd = -rid - woAq (7.61)
Vq = -riq + WOAd (7.62)
vF = rFi F (7.63)
where
(7.64)
AF = kMFi d + LFiF (7.65)
Aq = Lqiq (7.66)
We want to show that the first two equations (7.61) and (7.62) are equivalent to the
generator model in.Chapter 6..U~i?g (7.64) andJ7.66) to replace A? and Af-in (7.61)
and (7.62) and usmg the defmltlOns Vd = \/3 V.I, Vq = V3 Vq, ld = V3 lei, and
iq = V3Iq, we can form the following single complex equation:
(Vq + j Vd)e jo = - r(lq + jId)e jo + WOLdldejo - jwoLqliO + ~ ~ woMFi Fe jo

Using (7.60) as it applies to voltage and current, and introducing jXd = jWOLd
and jXq = jwoLq, we get
v., = -rIa - jXdjlde jo - jXqlqei° + Ea
where we have defined Y2 Ea = woMFiFejo·. Since Va = Ea when Ia = 0, Ea is the
open-circuit voltage. Rearranging the equation, we get
f
Ea= Va.tra+] dide jo + i'Xqqe
'X'I f jo
(7.67)
= Va + rI;+ jXdlad + jXqlaq
where lad £ jlde jo and faq £ Iio. The relations in (7.67), and the fact that
fa = (lq + jld)e jo = Iaq + lad, are shown in Figure 7.10. In the case illustrated in the
figure,Iq is positive and Id is negative. Comparing with Figure 6.8, or (6.30), we see
that we get the same steady-state model as in Chapter 6. Iaq and lad are the same
complex quantities that we used in Chapter 6. The quantities Iq and Id are simply the
representations of Iaq and lad in the d-q reference frame. Regarding the use of the
~
I
Figure 7.10 Phasor dia-

gram.
quantities lad and laq versus ld and Iq, we note that we get more compact expressions
using the complex quantities lad and laq' but in analytical work it is frequently easier
to use the real quantities ld and lq. We will take (7.67) to mean the equation in
either form.
It is clearly much simpler to use (7.67) or the equivalent phasor diagram, Fig-
ure 7.10, than to use the general three-stage process involving the Park transforma-
tions and variables. We next consider a dynamic model that has similar advantages.
7.11 SIMPLIFIED DYNAMIC MODEL
Frequently, it is possible to simplify the differential equations (7.44) to (7.47). This

is particularly true if we are considering transients in which the terminal voltages and
currents are sinusoids with slowly varying amplitude and phase. One such case is
that of electromechanical transients considered in Chapter 14, but the applicability
is much more general.
We make the following assumptions regarding the generator, which are fre-
quently justified in practice. r
1. Positive-sequence, synchronous operation.

2. 0 = wof + (rr/2) + 8, with 181« woo
3. Ad and Aq are small compared with woA q and woAd'
~i
4. The effect of damper circuits is negligible (i.e., we can set iD = iQ = 0).
In assumption 1 we are referring to positive-sequence operation in the broad sense;

that is, we will allow the waveform of phase a to change but whatever that waveform,
the waveform in phases band c are identical except for a phase shift -120 0 and
~
0
- 240 respectively. In this case, as mentioned earlier, we can use (7.60) to relate
,
time-varying qu~n.tities. I,n some respect, assumptions 2 and 3 approximate steady-

J! state behavior; 8, Ad. and Aq are not zero, but they are relatively small. Assumption
II 4 is consistent with assumptions 2 and 3 and is reasonable provided that we neglect
a very short interval at the very beginning of the transient.
i
'Ir l,
' ~
I .
1../
Sec. 7.11 Simplified Dynamic Model 257
Assumption 1 implies that Vo = io == 0; using assumption 3, the remaining elec-

trical equations may be approximated by .
Vd = -rid - eA q (7.68)
Vq = -ri q - eAd (7.69)
. dAF
VF = rFIF + dt (7.70)
where the flux linkages are related to currents by (7.64) to (7.66). Note the very
great simplification in these equations compared with (7.45) to (7.47)1
We note that by assumption 2, e"" Wo and thus, if we compare these equations
with the steady-state equations, (7.61) to (7.63), we may take the first two equations
in each set to be the same. Therefore, by the same development using (7.60), as it
applies to voltage and current, we are led to (7.67) and the associated phasor diagram
in Figure 7.1 0
The quantities in (7.67) and the associated Figure 7.10 are not necessarily con-
stant. For example, suppose that i.(t) = V2lIal cos (wot + i.!.J is varying in amplitude
and phase. Then 1a = 11al0. is a phasor that is also varying in time. In Figure 7.10
we would see 1a moving around the complex plane. Thus even with 8 constant, we
would expect 1q and 1d (the projections of 1a on the q axis and d axis) to vary in time.
With 1a fixed and 8 variable, the projections 1q and fd vary again. In the general case
fa' Va, Ea, and 8 all can vary, but they must vary in such a way that the algebraic con-
straint specified by (7.67) or Figure 7.10 is satisfied.
We note that, so far, we have been able to preserve the simplicity of the steady-
state model. In particular, we do not need to calculate the rotor-based terms
iF, iq, id, vq, and Vd, but can work with the stator-based terms Ea , fa' and Va directly.
Turning to the differential equation (7.70), we see that this involves a rotor-
based quantity, the state AF. We would like to express AF in stator terms. Starting with
(7.65), repeated here for convenience,
(7.65)
we next define a stator voltage E~ g, (woMdV2 LF) ejo Ap. The magnitude of E~ is
proportional to AF just as the magnitude of Ea is proportional to iF' Using (7.65) in
the definition, we get
. woMp·o wokM}o. WOMFo.

E~ = ~el AF = ~elld + .;;:;l
e IF (7.71)
v2 LF . v2 LF v2
We can very effectively simplify and reduce (7.m by using a number of pre-
viously defined quantities: id = v3fd, k = V3/2, Ea = wOMFe 10ipfV2, and
Ld = Ld - (kMp?/LF.We get
E~ = wO(Ld - Ld)fi O + Ea
(7.72)
= j(Xd - Xd) j1dej8 + Ea
E,
IE, I aiF
I E; I a 'F
rl,
Figure 7.11 Phasor diagram showing E~ and Ea.
Using (7.67) to replace Eo in (7.72), we get

E'a = 'II:a+ rIa
+d dej~ + ]'Xqq
]'X']'I I ej~
(7.73)
= Va + rIa + jXd1ad + jXqIaq
which is in the same form as (7.67) except that Xd replaces Xd and E~ replaces Ea·
Furthermore, E~ and Ea both have the same phase 8.
It is thus a simple matter to draw the phasor diagram that is associated with
(7.73). Instead, we will draw a more useful phasor diagram with both Eo and E~
shown. Thus we have Figure 7.11. In the figure we remind the reader of the pro-
portionality of lEal with iF and that of IE~I with A.F. The voltage E~ is not as easy to
describe physically as is Ea. While, physically, Eo is the open-circuit voltage, E~ can
only be described as an internal voltage whose magnitude is proportional to ft.F' Fig-
ure 7.11 shows the relationships between Ea, E~, Va, and la, and thereby the rela-
tionships between iF' A.F , 8, Va, and 1a.
We next consider the differential equation, (7.70), and rewrite to introduce the
notation lEal and IE~I. Multiply each term in (7.70) by wOMF/V2rF' We get
'./I
(7.74)
Next we define
WoMF
Efd = .;;;;
v2rF
. VF
Thus Efd is proportional to VF' Then using the definitions of lEal, IE~I, and Tda ,
(7.74) reduces to
LF dlE~1 dlE~1
Efd = lEal +--d-
r t
= lEal + Tdo - d-t (7.75)
F
Efd may be viewed as VF in equivalent stator terms; one unit of Efd is as "effective"
as one unit of lEal. In using the per unit system we can pick the same voltage base for
Efd and lEal and relate the bases of vF and Efd Gust as we do for transformers), so that
VF and Efd have the same per unit value. In that case no distinction peed be made be-
tween VF and Efd . However, in what follows, we prefer to use the Efd notation.
Finally, to complete the simplified synchronous machine model, we consider
the mechanical equation, repeated here for convenience.
Ie' + De + iqAd - idAq = TM (7.44)
Multiplying bye, we get
(7.76)
The first term in (7.76) is the derivative with respect to t of the kinetic energy of the
(coupled) rotating turbine and generator rotors. The second term is the power as-
sociated with mechanical friction of the coupled rotors. The term to the right of the
equals sign is the mechanical power applied to the (coupled) turbine and generator
rotors. Introducing notation appropriate to these physical (mechanical) quantities,
we can write (7.76) as
(7.77)
We next examine the electrical terms in (7.77). Using (7.68) and (7.69), we find that
8(V'd - idAq) = iqvq+ idVd + r(i~ + i;)
=3(IqVq + IdVd) + 3r(I~ + n) (7.78)
=3ReV.I~ + 3rllol2
=3PG + 3rlIl
In going from the second to the third line, we have used (7.60) as it applies to both la
and Va' The right side of (7.78) may be seen to be the instantaneous three-phase gen-
erated electrical power before resistance losses in the generator. These [2R losses are
very small, and as an approximation we are going to neglect them. In this case (7.77)
reduces to (14.11) and, as discussed in Section 14.2, we end up with
(7.79)
Equation (7.79) is the desired simplified mechanical equation. Equation (7.75)
is the simplified electrical equation subject to the algebraic constraints (7.67) and
(7.73). We summarize these results next and at the same time return to the use of the
per unit system of units.
Summary: Simplified dynamic model {per unit}, With the assumptions

stated at the beginning of this section, we get two differential equations:
Mo + DO + PG = PM (7.79)
I dlE~1
Tda dt + lEal = Efd (7.75)
and two algebraic equations

Ea = Va + rIa + jXdlad + jXqIaq (7.67)
E~ = Va + rIa + jXdlad + jXqIaq (7.73)
In (7.67) and (7.73) it may be convenient to substitute lad ,,;, jldej~ and Iaq = li~. In
(7.79), in general,PG = Re Val~. If r = 0 (or as an approximation), we may use the
following expressions instead:
2
lEal IVai IVal ( 1
P. =--sin8 +- - - - sm28
1) .
(7.80)
G Xd m 2 Xq Xd m
or
IE~IIVal . Ivi ( 1 1 )
P. =--sm8 +- - - - sin28 (7.81)
G X'd m 2 Xq X'd m
where 8m ~ i.§ - ~ = i.E - ~ = 8 - ~.

Note: Equation (7.80) is the same as (6.45). In the derivation,in Section 6.6,Jad
and laq were expressed in terms of Ea and Va' I~ instead, lad and laq are expressed in
terms of E~ and Va, using (7.73), then by exactly the same algebraic steps we get (7.81).
i There is no need to carry out the algebra; noting the similarity of (7.67) and (7.73),
we need only change Ea to E~ and Xd to Xd to go from (7.80) to (7.81). Note that even
in the case of a round-rotor machine (Xq = Xd), we get a "saliency" effect in (7.81).
We should also point out that since Xd < Xq, then 1/Xq - 1/ Xd is negative! Thus, the
shapes of the PG versus Om curves are quite different, when plotted for constant lEal, IVai
or constant IE~I, IVaI. However, if we introduce the constraint between lEal and IE~I,
the two formulas must give identical results (for the same 8m ) since they describe the
power output of the same generator under the same conditions!
Exercise 4. Can you prove the result just stated?
We conclude this section with some examples using thfjimplified model.
'.(
J i Example 7.10 Voltage Buildup
"
Solve the problem in Application 1 using the simplified synchronous machine model.
Solution Since fa = 0, from (7.67) and (7.7~) we see that E~(t) = E.(t) = Vit). Also,
IE~(O)I = 0, because we start from rest with zero field flux. Using (7.75), in which we
can replace Ea with E~,
dlE~1 0
Tda --:it + lEal - Efd
I I _
IE~ (0)1 =0
where E~d is constant. Solving, we get
IE~ (t)1 = (1 - e-t/T"')EJd t~0
Since 1v,,(t)1 = IE~(t)l, while /Va(t) = /E~(t) = 8, we get

Vit) = (1 - e-tjT'd')E~deJ5
Here we get a phasor with a magnitude that varies with time. The corresponding in-
stantaneous voltag~ is
vit) = v2 E~d(l - e- tjT ,,) cos (wot + 0)
which, noting the definition of Efd just after (7.74), is the same as the end result in Ap-
plication 1. This calculation is much simpler.
Example 7.11 Symmetrical Short Circuit

For the problem in Application 2, neglect the stator resistance rand the damper wind-
ings, and find the short-circuit current.
Solution Consider first the prefault steady-state condition. IE;I is constant. Thus from
(7.75) (with dlE;ljdt = 0), IEa(O)1 = EJd' Also, with Ia = 0, we have from (7.67) and
(7.73), E;(O) = Va(O) = E.(O). Putting these two results together, we have the initial con-
dition IE;(O)I = IEa(O)1 = EJd to use in solving (7.75) in the "fault on" period,t ~ O.
For t ~ 0 we have the fault with Va '" O. Thus, with r = 0, we get from (7.67)
and (7.73),
Ea = jXiad + jXqIaq
E~ = jXdiad + jXq1aq
From the associated phasor diagram geometry, I dq = 0, and also, therefore, Ia = lad'
Thus we can simplify. We get
Ea = jXdia
E~ = jXdla
We digress from the calculation of the transient to consider the initial sinu-
soidal current. Since AF cannot change instantaneously when the fault occurs, nei-
ther can IE;1. Thus using E; = j XdI., we can calculate the current during the initial
part of the transient:
v2IE~(O)1
ia(t)"" Xd sin (wot + 0)
Noting that E;(O) = E(O), this is the same as the 60-Hz component in (7.55a).
Returning now to the solution for the transient, we express Ea in terms of E; and get
Xd I
Ea = Xd Ea
We next use this result in (7.75). We get
, dlE;1 Xd 0I
rda dt + Xd lEal = Efd IE; (0)1 = EJd

We can write in time-constant form. Defining Td = (Xd/ Xd) Tda =

(Ld/ Ld) Tdo , we get
dlE'1 X'
T' - ' + IE'I = -.!. EO IE~ (0)1 = EJd
d dt 'Xd fd
with solution
IE~ (t)1 = X'X: EJd + (X')

1 - X: EJd e-
tT
/ ,
We getE~ = IE;I ,1 as a time-varyingphasor. SinceE; = j Xd1a> we can solvefor i,(t).
i,(t) = v1EJd[~d +(;d -~Je-t/T']sin(wotH)

Noting that EJd = IE.(O)I, this result is the same as that given in Note 1 following Ap-
plication 2. Furthermore, in the present case (r = 0) we get an explicit formula for Td.
In summary, we get the same 60-Hz component as in Application 2, and with
much less work, but lose the unidirectional and 120-Hz components.
Note: Suppose that in Example 7.11 instead of an open circuit at t = 0, there is

'*
a nonzero initial stator current 1.(0). This time E~(O) Eo(O), but we can calculate
it using (7.67) and (7.73) and then proceed with the calculation in Example 7.11.
In the examples considered so far in this section, it was reasonable to assume
that 8 remained fixed at its initial angle. Thus the mechanical equation was not in-
volved. We tum next to an example involving the mechanical equation.
Example 7.12
Consider the circuit shown in Figure E7.l2( a). Assume that :.,
Xd = 1.0
Xq = 0.6
Xd = 0.2
Tdo =4 sec
Neglect resistances. The generator has just been synchronized to the infinite bus. Then
(a) PM is slowly increased until Pa = 0.5. Efd is not changed. In the (new) steady
state, find V" fa> E" and E;.
(b) Now at t = 0, Efd is suddenly doubled. Assume that 9 = wot + (1T/2) + 8,
8 = constant, and find IE'(t)1 and IE(I)I.
V. = If!l'
v,
;0.1 Figure E7.12(a)
Solution At synchronization
10 = 0 =} E; = Eo = Va = V", = 1 LQ:
Also from (7.75) we get, in the presynchronism steady state, Efd = lEal = 1.0.
(a) At synchronization I) = 0, but as the generator delivers power, I) increases.
Assuming that the power is increased slowly, we can assume a quasi-steady-state tran-
sition with iF = v~/rF = constant. Thus when Pc = 0.5, lEal = 1.0. Considering the
infinite bus to be the machine "terminal," we have
0.5 = ---sml)
1.1
K
1.0 X 1.0. + -1 - -1 ) sm21)
.
2 0.7 1.1
= 0.909 sin I) + 0.260 sin 21)
Solving iteratively, we find that 8 = 21.0°. Thus Ea = 1.0/21.0°. To find I, we can
use Figure 7.11, or we can proceed analytically. Let us use algebra. Recalling that the
machine "terminal" is V~ and using (7.67), we have
Ea = 1.0e jo = Voo + jXdjIde jo + jXiiO
where we are using Id and Iq. Next, mUltiply by e- jo and introduce numerical values.
1.0 = 1 / - 21.0° + 1.n + jO.71q
Id and Iq are real numbers, so it is easy to separate real and imaginary parts. Taking
real parts first and then imaginary parts, we get
1.0 = 0.934 - 1.1Id =} fd = -0.0604
o= -0.358 + O.7fq =} Iq = 0.5120
Thus
fa = (/q + j Id)e jo =0.5155 /14.27°
Va = Voo + jO.lIo = 1.0 + 0.0515 /104.27°
= 0.9886 /2.897°
E; = Ea - j(Xd - X d) j Ide j !
= 1 /21.0° + O.S( -0.0604) /21.0°
= 0.952 /21.0°
Note that all four quantities V" I" Ea, and E; have changed from their values at syn-
chronization. Only lEal has not changed (because we have not yet changed Efd)'
(b) In this part we are assuming that /) = 21.0 = constant. We have

0
IE;(O)I = 0.952, Efd = 2, so, using (7.75),
4 -t +
dlE'1
lEal = 2 IE; (0)1 = 0.952 (7.82)
Next, we express lEal in terms of IE;I, 0, and IV=I. From Figure E7.l2 (b) [or using
(7.67) and (7.73)] we see that
lEal - lVool cos 5 _ XdlI'dl Xd
IE;I - lVool cos 0 - Xdlladl = Xd
I:.',
Figure E7.12(b)
From this we can solve for lEal in terms of IE;I and O.

Xd Xd - Xd
lEal = X-, IE;I + lVool---,- cos 0
(7.83)
d Xd
= 3.6667IE;1 - 2.4895
Substituting in (7.82), we get
4 -t +
dlE'1
3.6667 IE;I = 4.4895 :,;
or
dlE;1
1.0909 dt + IE~I = 1.2244
with solution
IE; (t)1 = 0.9520 + 0.2724(1 - e- r/10909 )
= 1.2244 - 0.2724e-r/L0909
Now we go back and find IE.(t)1 from (7.83):

lEa (t)1 = 2 - e-r/L0909
Note that the steady-state value of lEal checks with the value we get from (7.75).
Sec. 7.12 Generator Connected to Infinite Bus (Linear Modell 2B5
Exercise 5. Suppose that we want to find va(t) during the transient. Indicate how
you would proceed.
7.12 GENERATOR CONNECTED TO INFINITE BUS

(LINEAR MODEL)
In Example 7.12(b) we assumed that 15 = constant. If we had not, 15 would appear in

(7.83) in a nonlinear fashion (cos (5).
In general, since the equations are nonlinear, we need to introduce numerical
values and obtain computer solutions using standard numerical integration algo-
rithms. In many cases, however, linearization of the nonlinear equations is appro-
priate, and in such cases we can gain valuable insights into general behavior over a
variety of operating conditions by the powerful techniques of linear systems analy-
sis. As an example we consider the special case of a generator connected to an infi-
nite bus through a transmission line (Figure 7.12). As in Example 7.12 we will absorb
the transmission line into the generator model, with Voo the "terminal" voltage. As-
sume that both the stator and line resistances are zero. As in Example 7.12, it is most
convenient to express IE) in terms of the state variables IE~I and 15 by using (7.83). As
a preliminary, define
Xd Xd + XL
---=----=-
K3 = -;:;- =
Xd + XL
Xd
Note: Since XL > 0 and Xd < Xd, we have 0 < K3 < 1.
lEal = l.IE~1
K3
+ (1 - l.)lVcol cos 15
K3
Substituting in (7.75) and mUltiplying by K3 , we get
dlE~1
K3Tdo dt + IE~I = K3Efd + (1 - K3) IVcol cos 15 (7.84)
Also, from (7.79), we have

(7.79)
Figure 7.12 System to be linearized.

where from (7.81),

IE~IIV",I.
2
, 1V",1 ( 1 1) .
PG = PG(8, lEal) = X- sm8 + -2- X - X' sm28 (7.85)
d q d
Now assume steady-state operating conditions, in which case 5 = 8°,

IE~I := IE~IO, PG = P~ = Pc(5°, IE~IO), Efd '" EJd, and so on
We call the collection of these constant values the operating point. Now con-
sider small perturbations around the operating point. We let 8 = 8° + M, IE'I =
IE'lo + LlIE'I, and so on.
In the usual way, the increments M, ~IE'I, ~Efd' and ~PM are related by linear
differential and/or algebraic equations. Thus instead of (7.84) and (7.79), we get
, d~IE~1
K3Tda
°
---at + ~IEal, -_ K3 ~Efd - [(1 - K3)lV l sm. 5]M (7.86)
oo
.. . ap. (5° IE'IO) ap. (5° IE'IO)

M M + D ~5 + G , a M + G , a ~ IE'I := AP (7.87)
a8 alE'1a a M
We define K4 = [(1IK3) -1]IV",lsin8°,Kz := ap~/aIE~I, and T:= ap~/a8. If we

plot PG versus 8, with IE~I := IE~lo, then T is the slope of PGat 5 := 5°. We can also find
analytic expressions for T and K2 , by differentiating (7.85).
Suppose that we are at some operating point, and at t = 0 there is an increment
in Efd and/or PM (i.e., we have a ~Efd and/or ~PM)' We can study the transient by
using the Laplace transform. Noting that ~IE'(O-)I := 0, M(O-) = 0, we Laplace
transform (7.86) and (7.87) and get
(K3Tdo S + l)~IE~1 = K3 ~Efd - K3K4 ~6 (7.88)
(MsZ + Ds + T) ~6 := ~PM - Kz ~IE~I (7.89)
where the circumflex indicates the Laplace transform of the increment. 'We express
these relations between inputs ~Efd and ~PM and the (output) vi1Yables ~IE~I and M
in Figure 7.13. The reader should check that the block diagram conforms to (7.88)
and (7.89). We comment briefly on the block diagram. The feedback loop arises
Gj(S)
IlPM Gl(s)
KJ /lIE;1 I
/l5
I + KJT~s Msl +Ds +r
Flux decay Rotor angle
transfer function transfer function
K4
Figure 7.13 Block diagram of linearized system.

Sec. 7.12 Generator Connected to Infinite Bus (Linear Model] 267
arises because of the "natural" coupling between ~IE~I and M; we have not intro-
duced feedback externally. Later, when we consider the operation of the excitation
system and the speed governor, we will show how ~Efd and ~PM depend on the out-
put variables through external feedback loops. From Figure 7.13 we can easily find
the transfer function from any input to any output by using simple rules. For exam-
ple, we can write the transfer function from ~PM to M by inspection:
(7.90)
where Gl (s) and Gis) are defined in Figure 7.13. Similarly, we get, by inspection,
~ IE~I Gl (s)
(7.91)
~Efd == 1 - K2K4Gl (S)G2(s)
The transfer functions from ~PM to ~IE~I, and from ~Efd to 6.8, may also be written
by inspection. We call all these transfer functions closed-loop transfer functions.
Equations (7.90) and (7.91) are examples of closed-loop transfer functions expressed
in terms of the open-loop transfer functions Gl (s) and G2(s).
From the closed-loop transfer functions we can find the responses to a partic-
ular input. Usually, we are more interested in general properties, such as stability
and damping of oscillatory modes. The stability and damping properties depend on
the location of the poles of the closed-loop transfer functions. These poles are the
same for all four closed-loop transfer functions. For our purposes it is most conve-
nient to find, or estimate, the location of these poles by the root-locus method. The
method, which is based on the relation of closed-loop poles to open-loop poles and
zeros and the loop gain, is described in Appendix 4. One obtains the loci of closed-
loop poles as the loop gain varies from zero to infinity. Since various gains in our
model (for example, K2 and K4 ) depend on the operating point, the root-locus method
is particularly appropriate to obtain the range of possible behavior.
We will next apply the method to investigate the general stability and damping
properties of the (linearized) generator model of Figure 7.13. We note that this is a
case of "positive" feedback. We see this as follows: The loop gain, as defined in Ap-
pendix 4,is K == K2K4/TdoM. Tda and M are positive constants. Using (7.95) to eval-
uate K2 and K4 and noting that KJ ==<I Xd/
- -
Xd < 1, we get
Thus K ;::: O. On the other hand, if we look at the two summing points in Figure 7.13,
we subtract twice, so in effect we have positive feedback. Consider then, in Figure
7.14, a positive feedback root locus plotted versus K2K4 • The branches of the root
locus start at the open-loop poles SI, S5' and S3' SI and S2 are the open-loop poles
~ ......•...... '".'
rrr;"i"_~";' it
I
\\
\'
\~Sl
\
\
\
\
Figure 7 .14 Root~ocus

diagram.
corresponding to the lightly damped rotor angle modes; S3 is the pole associated with
the "flux decay" effects.
From this general sketch one can see the beneficial effects ofthe (natural) loop
on the damping of the rotor angle modes. With the loop open (for example, with
K4 = 0), we are stuck with the lightly damped poles of G2(s). But with positive feed-
back the lightly damped poles move deeper into the left half-plane. From a physical
point of view, the changes in field flux linkages (proportional to AIE~I) that accom-
pany the changes in (j are conducive to rotor angle damping. Note, in particular, the
effect of Tdo ' If Tdo = 0, G1(s) = K3 (i.e., we lose the real-axis pole and the root-
locus branches become parallel to the jw axis); we completely lose the beneficial
damping. Thus, the "delays" associated with the buildup and decay of flux in the
field winding are required for good damping!
On the other hand, suppose that Tdo --t 00, Then
KIT' 0
G2(s) = 31 do --t _ ';,(I
IjTdo + K3 s K3 S
which implies zero loop gain, and therefore once again we lose the beneficial damp-
ing. Thus, we can pose a machine design problem. Find Tdo for the best damping,
Note that since the Ki depend on system operating conditions, the design must be a
compromise,
We note also that the main source of rotor angle damping is due to Tdo ' By
comparison the shaft friction damping, D8, is almost negligible! Finally, we note that
while damping of the rotor angle poles improves as the loop gain increases, the real-
axis pole (associated with Tj) becomes less damped. For small loop gains this may
not be a problem but must definitely be considered when the gains are large.
In Chapter 8 we will consider what happens when we connect a voltage control
system that supplies the input Mfd in Figure 7.13. We will see that care must be
taken to avoid losing the beneficial natural damping,
Chap. 7 Problems 289
We now leave the topic of generator modeling. However, we will need some ad-
ditional results, derived in Appendix 5, when we consider nonsymmetric short cir-
cuits in Chapter 12.
A synchronous machine may be modeled by three stator coils and three rotor coils.
The inductance parameters depend on the rotor angle O. Using actual flux linkages,
phase voltages, and currents, we get (7.10) and (7.12) as the mechanical and electri-
cal equations.
The equations may be simplified by introducing the Park transformation of abe
variables into Odq variables. In terms of the new variables, we get new mechanical
and electrical equations, (7.44) and (7.38). The new equations are much simpler. In
particular, we note that if the shaft angular velocity is constant, the electrical equa-
tion is linear and time invariant. In applications it is convenient to separate the elec-
trical equations into zero-sequence, direct -axis, and quadrature-axis sets. This is done
in (7.45) to (7.47). Correspondingly, the equations relating flux linkages to currents
are separated in the same way in (7.48) to (7.50).
The Park equations may be used to investigate behavior under very general
conditions. In the case of steady-state (positive sequence) operation, they reduce to
(7.67), with associated phasor diagram in Figure 7.10; this model was derived on a dif-
ferent basis in Chapter 6.
Another simplified version of the Park equations may be obtained under as-
sumptions of slowly varying amplitude and phase (i.e., a relatively small departure
from steady-state operating conditions); the more precise conditions are given at the
beginning of Section 7.10. Under these conditions we obtain the simplified dynam-
ic model summarized in Section 7.11. This consists of a scalar second-order me-
chanical differential equation, a first -order electrical differential equation, and two
algebraic equations. The variables in these equations are abc variables rather than
Odq variables; no Park transformations are required.
For a single synchronous machine connected through a transmission link to an
infinite bus, application of the simplified dynamic model results, after linearization,
in the block diagram in Figure 7.13. A root-locus analysis of the system shows the ben-
eficial effects of the field flux changes accompanying rotor angle swings. This pro-
vides a strong natural damping of the rotor angle modes.
Problems
7.1. We are given a solenoid with two coils whose inductance parameters depend on the dis-
placement x of a movable iron core. Find the force on the movable core (in the direc-
tion of increasing x) if i1 = 10, i2 = -5, LJI = 0.01/(200x + 1), L22 = 0.01/(3 - 200x),
and L12 = 0.002. Assume that the units are meters, amps, and henrys, in which case the
force will be in newtons. Graph the force for 0 ::s x ::s 0.01 m.
7.2. A generator is rated 10,000 kVA, 13.8 kV line-line. Xd = 0.06 p.u., Xd = 0.15 p.u., and
Xd = Xq = 1.0 p.u. The generator is at no-load and rated voltage when a 3cJ> short oc-
curs. Find the following currents in p.u.
(a) The steady-state short-circuit current.
(b) The initial 60 Hz component of short -circuit current.
(c) The initial 60 Hz component ofshort-circuit current if damper windings are neglected.
(d) In case (c), what is the maximum possible unidirectional component (magnitude)?
(e) Convert the per unit value found in case (b) into actual amperes.
7.3. A generator is operating under open-circuit steady-state conditions with Va = Ea = lLQ:
(Figure P7.3). Use Park's equations to consider the effect of switching on a 3¢
Y-connected set of resistors at t = O. Assume that
1 ott) = wot + 1r/2.

2. iF = i~ = constant (current source).
3. Damper windings are neglected.
4. r = 0.1, R = 0.9, Xd = woLd = 1.0, and Xq = woLq = 0.6.
(a) Show that VOdq = Riodq , where R = diag[ R;J.

(b) Find differential equations for id and iq for t ;:: O.
(c) Write Laplace transforms for id and Iq.
(d) Find Id and iq as t ~ ce.
(e) Find Ia and Va as t ~ ce (i.e., steady-state behavior).
(I) Repeat part (e) using the Ea , Xd , Xq model of Chapter 6, and compare.
Note: The final value theorem of the Laplace transform: If there is a steady-state value,
then lim f(t) = lim sF(s), where F(s) is the Laplace transform of f(t).
(-+00 .1"-+0
Figure P7.3
7.4. A synchronous generator in the steady state is delivering power to an infinite bus.
ott) = wot + ~ til, 0 =~

2 4
A \ 1 . 1. 1
q = "d = V2wo ' lq = V2' ld = - V2
(a) Find the torque TE •

(b) Find va(t), ia(t), and iF'
(c) At t = 0, the generator is suddenly disconnected from the infinite bus. Assume that
VF = constant, iD = iQ = O. Sketch iF(t). Hint: To find iFW), consider the conse-
quencesofthefactthatAd(O") = Ad(O-).
7.5. Neglecting damper circuits and the field resistance rF, the direct-axis equivalent circuit
(Figure 7.4) reduces to that shown in Figure P7.S. Find the Thevenin equivalent circuit
for the network in the box and show that the Thevenin equivalent inductance is
kM )2
L'd -L _( _F_
- d
LF
1------------------ 1
I iF I
i UF OLF F ---Ld--+-.. . . w.----O:

"kM
d
I '*'.
I
I
IL __________________ JI
Figure P7.5
7.6. The shaft of a synchronous machine (motor) is clamped or "blocked" and is thus not
free to turn. A set of (positive-sequence) voltages is applied to the motor terminals.
Assume that
1. Va = IV)LQ:.
2. e(t) = 11'/2.
3. iF = 0 (open-circuited field).
4. Damper windings are neglected.
(a) Find id and iq in the steady state. .

(b) Find an expression for the average torque TEav '
(c) Suppose that r = O. What is TEav?
(d) Do you think that assumption 4 is a realistic assumption?
7.7. Suppose that e(t) = wot + 11'/2 and
ia (t) = Vi cos wot
ib (t) = Vi sin wot
ie(t) = -v2 cos wot
Note that the currents are not a balanced set. Find the frequency components in io(t),
in id(t), and in iq(t). Consider dc to be zero frequency.
7.8. A synchronous machine is in the (positive sequence) sinusoidal steady state.
IJ = wot + (11'/2) + 8and8 = 30°. At its terminals Va = 1LQ:. andIa = 1/-30°.
(a) Findio, id , iq, Va, Vd, and vq'.
In parts (b), (c), and (d), neglect r.
(b) Find Ao, Ad, and Aq .
(c) Find the torque h
(d) Find the 3<jJ power output Pl¢(t) in terms of Odq components.
7.9. Repeat Problem 7.8 with 8 = 20°. Compare with the results in Problem 7.8.
7.10. The tenninal conditions of a synchronous generator are Va = 1LQ:. and Ia = 1122:. The
generator parameters are Xd = 1.0, Xd = 0.2, Xq = 0.6, and r = O. Find 8,Id,Iq, id , iq,
Iad,!aq, lEal, IE~I, and PG'
7.11. Repeat Problem 7.10 with fa = 1/-30'.

7T
8 (t) = wot + '2 + I), I) = constant
Xd = Xq = 0.9
Xd = 0.2
XL = 0.1
Tdo = 2.0 sec
The generator is operating in steady state with Pc = 0.5 and lEal = 1.5. At t = 0 there
is a fault and the circuit breakers open. Use the simplified dynamic model and find an
expression for lVa(t)1 = IE;(t)l, for t ;;:: O. Assume that I) = constant at its prefault value.
v, V.= 1&
Figure P7.12
7.13 Repeat Example 7.12 but with Xd = 1.6, Xq = 0.9, Xd = OJ.
7.14 Refer to Figure P7.14 and assume that
Xd = 1.15
Xq = 0.6
Xd = 0.15
XL = 0.2
r=O
Tdo = 2 sec
'.Jf
The generator is in steady state with Efd = 1 and E~ = 1~. Then at t = 0, Efd is
changed to a new constant value: Efd = 2. Assume that the rotation is still uniform.
Find E~(t) for t ;;:: O. Find va(t) for t ;;:: O.
V. = lit.
Figure P7.14
•
CHAPTER. 8 . -_~ - - ~,-
Generator Voltage Control
8.0 INTRODUCTION
The generator model derived in Chapter 7 shows two inputs, field voltage and me-
chanical power. In this chapter we consider the first of these inputs,
The field voltage (and current) may be supplied by a dc generator driven by
a motor or by the shaft of the turbine generator, Rectifier and thyristor units
converting ac to dc in various ways are also common, In any case, the units are called
exciters, and the complete voltage control system, including an error detector and
various feedback loops, is usually called an excitation system or automatic voltage reg-
ulator (AVR).
For a large synchronous generator the exciter may be required to supply field
currents as large as iF "" 6500 A at VF = 500 V, so the exciter may be a fairly sub-
stantial machine,
An example of an excitation system is shown in Figure 8.1, It typifies a variety
of available excitation systems, A simplified description of the system operation
follows, The ac generator output voltage IV) is compared with a reference voltage
and any error is amplified (transistor and magnetic amplifiers) and fed to the field of
a special high-gain dc generator called an amplidyne. The amplidyne provides in-
cremental changes to the exciter field in a so-called boost-buck scheme. The exciter
output provides the rest of the exciter field excitation in a self-exciting mode. Thus,
even if the amplidyne output is zero (i.e., no correction in 1\1;,1 is needed), the exciter
supplies the required level of voltage VF to the synchronous generator field.
The system is a feedback system that turns out to be unstable unless the stabi-
lizing loop is provided. The purpoS'e of the limiter is to prevent undesirable levels of
excitation. The purpose of the feedback of current IIal is to introduce a voltage drop
proportional to IIal. It turns out that this is required to ensure that reactive power is
properly divided between parallel generators. The purpose of the other inputs will
be discussed in a later section. Finally, we note that if the amplidyne regulator is out
of service, one can use the regulator transfer switches to remove the amplidyne from
the circuit and put the exciter field on manual controL
273
274 Generator Voltage Control Chap. S
Field Current
breaker transformers
CIs
rings
Potential
transformers
PTs
Exciter field I
rheostat A
(manual control) ~
Amplidyne
regulator
1- ------------------ --------- -l
I I
I I
I I
I Stabilizer
I
I I
I I
I I
I Reference I
I and voltage Compensator I
I sensing I
I Magnetic I
I amplifier I
I I
I Limiting
I sensor I
I I
I I
I I
I I
Other Other
I 4----------'--inputs
I sensing
I
I _____________________________________
L I ~-J
Figure 8.1 Excitation system. Excitation control system with dc generator-

commutator exciter. [Adapted from IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus
and Systems, Vol. PAS-SB. "Proposed Excitation System Definitions for Syn-
chronous Machines," IEEE Committee Report, © 1969 IEEE.)
B.1 EXCITER SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
A much-simplified version of the system we have been describing is shown in Figure

8.2. The basic operation can be described as follows. The control input is Yre!' If Yre!
is raised (while the generator terminal voltage IVai initially remains the same), Ve goes
up, VR increases, VF increases, and IVai tends to increase. A new equilibrium is reached
with a higher IV.I. If IV.I changes because of a change in load, we also get a correct-
Sec. B.1 Exciter System Block Diagram 275
Synchronous
Amplifier Exciter generator
Other
signals +
To rest
Vrer
of system
Stabilization network
TTT Potential
transformers
Rectifier L-.r--'
de ac
Figure 8.2 Simplified excitation system.
ing action. Note that there is no boost-buck feature here; all the exciter field excita-
tion comes from the amplifier.
For more quantitative results we need a model. Figure 8.3 shows a typical re-
sult of such modeling. All the variables shown are expressed in per unit. In this case
the gain of the measurement block is unity in the steady state (i.e., a 1% change in
1Y"lleads to a 1% change at the summing point). TR is very small. It is usually ne-
glected. The amplifier gain KA is typically in the range 25 to 400. TA is typically
in the range 0.02 to 0.4 sec. In modeling the amplifier for large-signal behavior, the
r --- -- - - -- - - - - - - - -- - -- ----------l
I I
I I
Other I ~~~ I
signals : I
I Va I
I
I
I
I
Stabilizer I
I
I
I
IL _________________________________ JI
Measurement
Figure 8.3 Block diagram of excitation system and generator.

276 Generator Voltage Control Chap. 8
limits need to be included. Thus we have VRmin ::; VR :5 VRmax ' Within the limits, the
gain in the linear zone is 1. As we will see soon, some form of stabilization is need-
ed. A typical stabilizer is shown. Typical parameter values are KF in the range 0.02
to 0.1, and TF in the range 0.35 to 2.2 sec.
We next turn to the modeling of the exciter. We will consider the case of the
dc generator shown in Figure 8.2. A simplified description follows. The open-circuit
voltage of a dc generator is proportional to the product of speed times air-gap flux
per pole. The flux is a nonlinear function of the dc generator field current because
of saturation effects in the magnetic circuit. Thus, we get the familiar saturation
curve of dc generator open-circuit voltage versus field current. When the loading of
the dc generator by the ac generator field winding is considered, we get a different
curve, the load-saturation curve. We assume that this curve is available and show the
plot of exciter output voltage vF in terms of exciter field current i in Figure 8.4. It will
be simplest in the following development to work with actual voltages, currents, and
flux linkages, not per unit values.
The air-gap line is tangent to the lower, approximately linear portion of the
open-circuit saturation curve. f( Vf) measures the departure of the load-saturation
curve from that simple ideal. In terms off( Vf) we have
i = io + f(Vfl = iVF + f(Vfl (8.1)
where k is the slope of the air-gap line. We next consider the field circuit of the dc
generator and get
. dA
VR = Rl +- (8.2)
dt
where VR is the output of the amplifier and R, i, and A are the resistance, current, and
flux linkages of the dc generator field winding connected across the amplifier terminals.
Figure 8.4 Exciter load-

saturation curve.
Sec. 8.2 Generator Models 277
We next assume that the dc generator output voltage VF is proportional to the

dc generator air-gap flux, which in turn is proportional to A. Making this reasonable
assumption, we have a relation of the form
VF = f3A (8.3)
Substituting (8.1) and'(8.3) in (8.2), we get
1 ) 1 dVF
VR = R ( k VF + f(VF) + ~ dt (8.4)
Multiplying by k/ R, we get
k dVF
- VR = VF + vFS (VF) + T£ -d (8.5)
R t
where T£ ,@, k/ Rf3 and S(VF) ~ kf(VF )/VF' The multiplicative factor S(VF) accounts
for the departure of the load-saturation curve from the air-gap line.
We would now like to replace vFin (8.5) with a scaled version, Efd' defined just
after (7.74). At the same time we can convert (8.5) to the per unit system. The base
for VR can be chosen (relative to that for Efd ) to eliminate unnecessary constants.
Finally (without explicit p.u. notation), we get the per unit version of (8.5):
dEfd
VR = Efd + EfdSE (Efd) + TE dt (8.6)
where SE(Efd) is called the (per unit) saturation function. Equation (8.6) conforms
to the exciter portion of the block diagram in Figure 8.3 with KE = 1.0. KE = 1.0
is appropriate for our exciter model with a separately excited shunt field. Model-
ing a self-excited shunt field, we would get approximately K£ = -0.1. Typical val-
ues of TEare in the range 0.5 to 1.0 sec. Over the allowable values of Efd' typical
values of SE are under 1.3. We turn next to the modeling of the generator with input
Efd and output IVai.
8.2 GENERATOR MODELS
We will consider a few simple cases.
Generator model, case I: open circuit. In this case fa = 0; thus we have

E~ = Ea = Va' In using (7.75), repeated here for convenience:
dlE~1
Tdo -:it + lEal = Efd (7.75)
we can replace lEal by IE~1. By taking the Laplace transform, we get the transfer
function
(8.7)
Generator model, case II: impedance load. We assume an isolated

generator supplying an impedance load Z. In this case Va = ZIa' Also, assume uni-
form rotation, e = Wet + 11'/2 + 0,0 = constant. Again we use (7.75). The problem
of relating IVai to Efd will be solved in three steps. We will first express lEal in terms
of IE~I and the generator and load impedances. Then froni (7.75) we find the trans-
fer function from Efd to IE~1. Finally, we find IVai in terms of IE~1.
Expressing lEal in terms of IE~I is similar to the calculation in Example 7.12
leading to (7.83), except that now we must include resistance. We start with (7.73),
repeated here for convenience.
E'a = Va + rIa
+d J'I eio + J'Xqq
J'X' d I eio (7.73)
With an impedance load, Z = R + j X, and
V. + rIa = (Z + r)Ia= (r + R + jX)(Iq + jld)eiO (8.8)
Thus, substituting (8.8) in (7.73) and multiplying by e- io , we get
IE~I = (r + R)Iq - (Xd + X)Id + H(r + R)Id + (Xq + X)Iq] (8.9)
Equating real and imaginary parts, we get
-(X d + X) r + R ] [Id] = [IE~I] (8.10)

[ r +R Xq + X Iq 0
Solving for Id and Iq ,
A -(X + Xq)
where Kd = - - - , c - - - - ' - - - - (8.11 )
(r + R? + (X + Xd)(X + Xq)
A (r + R)
where K = ---:-------- (8.12)
q (r + R? + (X + Xd)(X + Xq)
Continuing with the analysis, we use another equation from Cha~r 7.
Ea = E~ + j(Xd - Xd)jlde jo (7.72)
Substituting Id from (8.11), we get
lEal = IE~I - (Xd - Xd)KdIE~I
(8.13)
where
1 (r + R)2 + (X + Xd)(X + Xq)
0- = = (8.14)
1 - (Xd - Xd)Kd (r + R)2 + (X + Xd)(X + Xq)
Note: For inductive loads X ;::.: 0, which implies that 0- < 1.
Sec. 8.1 Exciter System Block Diagram 279
We next substitute (8.13) into (7.75) (the first equation in this section) and get
dlE~1
(JT do dt + IE~I = (JEfd (8.15)
Taking the Laplace trq.nsform of (8.15), the transfer function from Efd to IE~I is
IE'I
+= (J (8.16)
Efd 1 + s(JT do
Finally, we express IVai in terms of IE~1.
Vo = ZIa = Z(Iq + jId)e10
(8.17)
= Z(Kq + jKd) IE~lejo
v. = ZKE~ (8.18)
IVai = IZIIKIIE~I = kvlE~1 (8.19)
where kv ~ IZIIKI. Finally, using (8.16) and (7.19), we get the desired transfer function.
kv(J
Gg (s) = -l-+-'s-(J-T- (8.20)
do
Note the differences in the transfer functions of the loaded and unloaded generators.
Example 8.1 Transfer Function of Loaded Generator

Given r = 0, R = 1, X = 0, Xd = 1, Xd = 0.2, Xq = 0.6, and Tdo = 2, find Gg(s).
Solution Using the equations in the preceding section, we find successively
-Xq
Kd = 2 = -0.54
R + XdXq
Kq = 0.89 .
kv = 1 X 1.04 = 1.04
(]' = 0.7
. 0.73
G (s)---
g - 1 + l.4s
Note: For the unloaded generator we would get

1
G,(s) = -+1
o
2s
Exercise 1. Assuming that r is sufficiently small, can you find a value of Z

such that (]' is negative? Suppose that (]' is negative. Suppose that Efd is an arbi-
trarily small step function. Show that IV.I builds up "spontaneously" (self-
excitation). Can you explain the result physically? Hint: Assume that the load is a
capacitor.
Note: We have not yet considered the important case of a generator connected
through a transmission line to an infinite bus. We defer consideration of this model
until Section 8.5.
8.3 STABILITY OF EXCITATION SYSTEM
Now that we have a model for Gis) with an impedance load, we can look at a pos-
sible stability problem for the feedback loop in Figure 8.3. To proceed with lin-
ear analysis we first need to linearize the excitation system around an operating
point. Let us assume that the amplifier is in the linear range and SE is small enough
to be negligible. Suppose that the stabilizer loop in Figure 8.3 is absent. We then
have a feedback loop with no zeros and four real poles. Feedback control theory
tells us that to have a good regulator of voltage magnitude, we need a high dc loop
gain. In this case the steady-state error will be small (provided that the system
is stable!).
Unfortunately, even moderate loop gains make the system unstable, as may be
seen by using a root locus. We consider an example.
Example 8.2 Stability of Basic Excitation System

In Figure 8.3 assume that TA = 0.05, TR = 0.06, KE = 1, and TE = O.B. The generator
is open circuited with Tda = 5. AIl time constants are given in seconds. Assume that
there is no stabilizer. Neglect limiting and the SE function, and draw the root locus.
Solution The open-loop poles are at - 2(}, -16.67, -1.25, and -0.2. There are no
zeros. Using the rules for plotting (negative feedback) root loci supplemented by a few
calculated points, we get the root locus shown in Figure EB.2. We note that the root-
locus gain K = KA/(TATETdaTR) = 416.7 KA.
For KA slightly greater than 11, the closed-loop poles move into the right half-
plane. We would like to be able to maintain stability with a much larger gain; gains of
I: 400 are common in practice.
i
I;
~I
••
Sec. 8.4 Voltage Regulation 281
, \
\
\ I
I
I
I
\ I
\ I
\ I
\~ASymptotes ~I
\ I
\ I
\ I
\ I
\ II
\ I
-20 -16 -12 / \\-8 -4 Exc. Gen.

'\
Amp. Meas. II \
I "-
I \
I \
I \
I \
I \
,, ,
/ \
I \
I \ \
I \
Figure E8.2
The problem of raising the gain while maintaining stability is a classic one in
feedback control theory and an effective solution is to use "rate" feedback stabiliza-
tion, as shown by the inner loop in Figure 8.3. Note that Efd , which is proportional
to VF, is a readily available signal, as may be seen in Figures 8.1 and 8.2. Note that
the stabilizer does not affect the steady-state (dc) behavior, because of the s in the nu-
merator of the stabilizer transfer function.
8.4 VOLTAGE REGULATION
Next, assuming stability, we would like to show the effect of feedback in maintaining
voltage under varying conditions of load. Suppose that we compare the volt-ampere
("regulation") curves, or V-I curves, at the terminals of an isolated generator with
and without a voltage control system.
We can consider an example.
Example 8.3 Steady·State V-I CurveS

Find steady-state V-I curves for:
(a) A generator without a voltage control system.

(b) A generator with a voltage control system.
Assume that
1. The field current is adjusted so that in both cases, (a) and (b), the open-
circuit voltage IVai = 1.
2. Z = R, where R is varied from 00 to O.
3. r = 0, Xq = Xd •
4. Nonlinear limiting and effects due to SE can be ignored.
Note: In both cases IVai = 1 when the generator is open circuited (i.e., R = (0) and
IVai = 0 when the generator is short circuited (i.e., R = 0).
Solution In both cases, with an impedance load, we use (8.20)
kp
Gg (s) = 1
+ S(J'T'da
Since only steady-state behavior is being considered, IVai and Efd are constant values
related by
Using the definitions of kv and (J', [see (8.19) and (8.14)], and the assumptionXd = Xq ,
R
k(J'=--===
v YR2 + X2q
Thus
R
IVai = .~ Efd
V R2 + X~
Alternatively, we may derive this same result from the steady-state (round-rotor) syn-
chronous machine model of Chapter 6.
(a) In this case we are assuming that Efd remains fixed at the vlille giving IVai = 1
when R = 00. This implies Efd = 1. Then as R is varied from 00 to 0,
IVI= R
a YR 2 + X q2
Also,
IVai
111 =-=--===
a R YR2 + X 2 q
Thus both IVai and Iial may be described in terms of the parameter R. We can relate
IVai to IIal more directly by noting that Ivi + X~IIi = 1. Thus the V-I curves lie on
an ellipse in the IVai, IIal plane, as suggested by Figure E8.3(a).
Sec. 8.4 Voltage Regulation 283
I v, I
R decreasing
II, I Figure ES.3(a)
(b) Consider the case with feedback. In the steady state, and neglecting non-
linear effects, Figure 8.3 reduces to the block diagram shown in Figure E8.3(b). Phys-
ically, it is clear from the nature of negative feedback that as IV) drops, Efd will rise,
countering the tendency of IVai to drop. More precisely, using the relationships im-
plied by the block diagram,
KAkveJ KAR
IVai = Vref = , ~ Vref
KE + KAkv eJ V R2 + X~ KE + KAR
Figure E8.3(b)
Since we assume that IVai = 1 when R = DO, we must choose Vref = (KE + KA)/KA-
Thus under more general conditions of loading,
(KE + KA)R
IVI = - - = = = - - -
a YR2 + X~ KE + KAR
We do not attempt to get a closed-form solution for IV.I versus IIal as in case (a). How-
ever, using the preceding expression for IV,!, and lIal = IVaI! R, we note
R~ DO ::} IV.I ~ 1, and IIal ~ 0
. K£ + KA
R ~ 0 ::}IVal ~ 0, and IIal ~ XK
q £
Since the IIal-axis intercept is now increased by the factor (K£ + KA)/ K£ as
compared with case (a), the improvement is clear. A numerical result may be illumi-
nating. Suppose that K£ = 1, KA = 25, and Xq = 0.6; then we can draw the V-I
curves for case (b) and compare with case (a) [Figure ES.3(c)]. The case (a) curve and
part ofthe case (b) curve are shown. The 11.1 intercept for case (b) is at 11,1 = 43.3.
Thus, even with a moderate loop gain, we get a tremendous improvement in voltage
regulation.
(b), with feedback
1.0 t-":---~-~-------'I
0.9 R decreasing
0.8
0.7
(a), without feedback
I V, I 0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
II, I
Figure E8.3(c)
Exercise 2. Sketch the (feedback) V-I curves in Example 8.3. Pick values of R,
and find the corresponding values of IVai and 1101 = IVaI! R.
8.5 GENERATOR CONNECTED TO INFINITE BUS

'.Jf
We now return to the interesting and important case of a generator connected through
a transmission line to an infinite bus and consider the effects of adding a voltage con-
trol system. The system we are considering is shown in Figure 8.5.
In Section 7.12 we considered a linearized generator model for this case. It led
to the block diagram in Figure 7.13. The input was IlEfd , which may now be obtained
from the excitation system block diagram in Figure 8.3. Considering a linearized
version of Figure 8.3, we have IlIVal as an input and IlEfd as an output of the excita-
tion system. To close the loop through the generator, we need IlIVal as an output
from the generator model. In looking at Figure 7.13, we do not see the variable IllVal.
In fact, as we will show,
(8.21)
1
Sec. 8.5 Generator Connected to Infinite Bus 285
V, Voltage
control
system
Figure 8.5 System under consideration.
where Ll8 and LlIE~1 may be seen to be available as outputs of the generator model
and Ks and K6 are parameters depending on the system reactances and operating
condition. Thus we are able to add the voltage regulator loop to Figure 7.13.
We start by showing how (8.21) applies to the case under consideration, that of
a lossless generator connected to an infinite bus through a lossless transmission line.
Following a familiar technique, we absorb the line series reactance into the gen-
erator model (using Xd = Xd + XL, etc.) and consider Voo = W",IL!, as the termi-
nal voltage. Using (7.73) as it applies in the present context, we get
i6 f ei6
E'a = V00 d de + ]'Xqq
+ ]i']'I (7.73)
After mUltiplication by e- i6 , we get
IE~I =
-
IVool cos 8 - j W",I sin 8 - X'ctfd
-
+ jXqIq (8.22)
from which, by equating real and imaginary parts, we get
(8.23)
1V001 sin 8
f q =--_- (8.24)
Xq
Now we are in a position to calculate IV,!. As we note from Figure 8.5,
V. = Voo + jXJa (8.25)

Introducing d and q variables, we get Va = (Vq + jVd)ei6 and fa = (/q + jfd)ei6. Sub-
stituting in (8.25), multiplying by ei5 , and noting that Voo = 1V001L!" we get
Vq + jVd = IV~I cos 8 - jlVool sin 8 + jXL(Iq + jfd ) (8.26)
Now using (8.23) and (8.24) in (8.26) and separating the real and imaginary parts,
we can find ~ and Vd
(8.28)
Next we find IV;?
Thus
IVaI = (V2q + V2)1/2
d (8.29)
We note that (8.29) together with (8.27) and (8.28) gives us the dependence of
IVai on IE~I and 8 in tenns of the system parameters Xd, Xq , and XL' The dependence
is seen to be nonlinear, and we next consider a linearization. We assume steady-state
operation with IE~I = IE~lo, 8 = 8°, IVai = Ivl and then allow small perturbations of
these quantities. Relating the perturbations, we get the linear equation
aIVlo aIVlo
CliVI = _a ClIH _a AIE'I (8.30)
a ao aIE~I a
The superscript 0 in (8.30) refers to the evaluation of the partial derivatives at the
steady-state operating condition. Comparing (8.30) and (8.21), we see that
t:. aIvl 11 BIvl
Kj = a8 K6 = aIE~I
We next calculate Kj • Using (8.29) and the chain rule of differentiation,
alVI = 1 (V2
_a + V2)-1/22 (BV BV)
V _q + V_d
(8.31 )
B8 2 q d q aO d Bo
Evaluating by use of (8.27) and (8.28),
aIvi (Xd v~
Ks = - - = -IV I -_-- sin 8° + -_--cos'oo
Xq v~ ~)
(8.32)
ao 00 X'dIVa10 Xq IVa10
In calculating Ks, we must first find the steady-state operating condition (i.e.,
we must find 8°, IE~IO). Then we can find V~ and V~ using (8.27) and (8.28) and Ivi
from (8.29). Then we use (8.32). It is important to note that Ks can be positive or
negative depending on the steady-state operating condition. This possibility may be
inferred as follows. From (8.27) it may be seen that V~ is positive under normal op-
erating conditions. From (8.28), for a generator, V~ is negative. Thus in (8.32), for
a generator, the two terms on the right side of the equation are opposite in sign.
Typical behavior shows Ks positive for light loads (small Pa) and negative for heavy
loads (large Pa). Thefact that Ks may vary in sign leads to some stability problems
to be discussed in the next section.
We next calculate K6 • Using (8.29), (8.27), and (8.28) again, we get
alVI
__
a = 1
-2 (VZ + V d2)-1/22 (av av )
V --q + Vd _!!.....
alE~1 q q alE~1 a IE~I
(8.33)
_ alVaIO _ XL V~ 10
K6 - a IE~I - Xd IVaIO lEal
Under normal operating conditions this constant is positive.
Using Figure 8.3, we now complete the block diagram shown in Figure 7.13 to
show the effect of adding a voltage control system. This leads to the block diagram
shown in Figure 8.6. In Figure 8.6, G.(s) is the transfer function corresponding to
the (linearized) feedforward part of the excitation system shown within the dashed
outline in Figure 8.3.
The new incremental system inputs are I::. Vref and I::.PM . We may wish to inves-
tigate steady-state and/or transient behavior in response to various inputs. As an ex-
ample we wish to use the model to show what happens to the "natural" damping
(discussed in Section 7.12) when a high-gain fast-acting voltage control system is
used. In the analysis in Section 7.12, we treated Efd as an (independent) input vari-
able. Now with the voltage control loop added, I::.Efd is a function of I::.IE~I and M.
What happens to the damping in this case?
To simplify matters, assume that the voltage control system is very fast com-
pared with the dynamics of the rest of the system. Thus we assume, in Figure 8.6, that
any change in I::.lVal causes an essentially instantaneous change in I::.lvel, that causes
an essentially instantaneous change in I::.Efd • The model implications of these as-
sumptions are the following. In the measurement block we set the time constant
TR = 0; equivalently, we replace the measurement block by its dc gain, 1. Similarly,
we replace G.(s) by its dc gain, Ke ~ Ge(O). We note, from Figure 8.3 that Ke is pos-
itive. Thus if I::. Ve is a (positive) unit step function, I::.Efd is a positive step function of
amplitude Ke. Making these changes in Figure 8.6, we get Figure 8.7. We
KJ
1+ KJr;"s
transferf unction transfer function
~-----------4K4~-------------~
Figure 8.6 Voltage control system added.

A I V,I
KJ (y) A6
1+ KJT/t,s AI £;1 Ms2 + Ds + T (x)

K4
Figure 8.7 Simplification with fast-acting exciter.
note that the approximation is reasonable for a fast-acting solid-state (thyristor) type
of exciter.
To investigate the effect of the fast -acting exciter on the damping of the rotor
angle poles, we will use the root-locus method. To do this we need to reduce Figure
8.7 to a single loop. Suppose that we redraw Figure 8.7, appropriate for finding the
closed-loop transfer function from t:.PM to M. We save that (feedforward) portion
of Figure 8.7 between the points labeled (y) and (x). With t:. V;ef = 0, we can replace
the rest (all the feedback paths) bv a single
A;..J ,
transfer function G£(s) from (x) to (y).
We now calculate G£(s) = IE~I/ Doff. From Figure 8.7,
Collecting terms in AIE~I on the left, we get

K K Tl'6)' - K3(K4 + KeKs) ,
( 1 + 1 +3K3TdoS
en AIE'I =
a
.. DoS
1 + K3TdaS ~
(8.35)
MUltiplying both sides of the equation by 1 + K3TdaS, we then find that

t:.IE~1 - K3(K4 + KeKs)
G£ (s) = - = --.:..:.--'----=.....:::....- (8.36)
A8 1 + K3 K,K6 + K3Tdo S
With this simplification we get the single-loop feedback system shown in Figure 8.8.
The summing point at the left is included to facilitate a comparison with Figure 7.13.
It is not the t:. Vref input.
If we now compare Figure 8.8 with Figure 7.13, we observe that except for dif-
ferent constants, we have the same kind of system. There are still three open-loop
poles. The open-loop rotor angle poles are the same; since K3, Ke, and K6 are all
positive, the real-axis pole associated with Tdo is farther in the left half-plane. Since
K4 is also positive, then if Ks is positive, the overall situation is not qualitatively dif-
Sec. S.5 Generator Connected to Infinite Sus 289
KJ(K 4 + K,Kj)
o
1+ KjK,K6 + KJTdOs
Figure 8.8 Single-loop system.
ferent from the case considered in Section 8.12. Thus, we can expect to preserve the
natural damping.
But consider the common case when Ks is negative. This is the troublesome case
and occurs when the generator is supplying a large active power over a long trans-
mission line. In this case K4 + K,Ks is frequently negative and in effect the feed-
back changes from positive to negative! Thus, we get the root locus shown in Figure
8.9; we can think of K2 as the gain parameter that varies from zero to infinity.
Since the rotor angle poles are so close to the jw axis, we can expect the system
to be unstable with typical loop gains. Thus, we have not only lost the natural (pos-
itive) damping, but the system may now even be unstable! The situation is changed
in detail but not in its general features if a more detailed voltage control system model
is considered.
In solving the problem we would like to retain the fast-acting exciter. The im-
portance of maintaining voltage during faults to improve transient stability will be dis-
cussed in Chapter 14. Reversing the feedback is not a solution (simply done with an
inverter); K4 + K,K5 can also be positive!
The most common means of dealing with the problem is to make the system in-
sensitive to the parameter Ks with an auxiliary loop. The loop provides a signal usu-
ally derived from machine speed (i.e., .6.8), but it can also be derived from terminal
/
/
/
\
\
\
\ Figure 8.9 Root locus with

" K4 + Ke K5 < O.
voltage, power, and so on, or a combination thereof. The "shaping" of this signal is
done in a power system stabilizer (PSS). As a simple example consider the case shown
in Figure 8.10. Assume that the stabilizer gaip. is pgsitive.
We again calculate the gain G£(s) == I::.IE~II 1::.8.
,,
I::.IEa l = 1
K3
T'
[ , (' ',' rs2 A)]
-K4M - Ke KsM + K6 I::.IEa l - -1- 1::.8 (8.37)
+ K3 doS + S1
Collecting terms in I::.IE~I on the left, after some algebra we get
!::.I.E~I rKi - 1(K4 + K,Ks)s - (K4 + KeKs)
G£ (s) == - == K3 ~---':"~--=-~-'----'---"'- (8.38)
1::.8 (1 + K3KeK6 + K3Tdos)(1 + S1)
Compared with (8.36) we have an additional pole (at S == -111) and two zeros.
The location of the zeros depends on Ks. If K4 + K,Ks is positive, we get real-axis
zeros. If K4 + KeKs is negative, we can have either real or complex zeros. Typical-
ly, the zeros are quite close to the origin in either case.
Thus the effect of a negative K4 + KeKs, which previously reversed the sign of
the feedback, now only shifts the location of a pair of zeros in an unimportant way.
Note also that the sign of Gis) in pole-zero form is now positive; thus we plot a neg-
ative feedback root locus. The results of such a plot are shown in Figure 8.11 for val-
ues of M == 3/377, D = 0, T = 1.01, K3 == 0.36, K4 == 1.47, Ks = -0.097,
K6 == 0.417,Ke == 25,r == 10/377, and 1 == 0.05. The root-locus gain is K = 276.5K2•
As the gain K is increased, the rotor angle poles move farther into the left half-plane.
Thus the damping is restored. We show the closed-loop pole location by a square
symbol for a value K2 == 1.15. The system is very well damped.
ao
Power system
stabilizer
Figure 8.10 Power system stabilizer added.

1 24
I \
I \
I
I 16
I
x open-loop poles I
a closed-loop poles I
I
I
I
I
-24 -16 -8
-16
I
I
-24 Figure 8.11 Root locus with
power system stabilizer added.
We conclude this section with the following observations:
1. There are better power system stabilizers than the one shown in Figure 8.10.
The basic idea, however, is nicely illustrated with this very simple type.
2. Earlier, in Figures 8.1 to 8.3, we showed other inputs as inputs to the excitation sys-
tem. Now we can give the PSS output as an example of one of these other inputs.
3. We have been considering the stabilization of a single generator. Suppose that
we have many interconnected generators, each with its own voltage control sys-
tem. In this case, in the PSS realization, we can decide to use only signals avail-
able locally at each generator (decentralized control), or we can consider the use
of shared system measurements (centralized control). If at the ith generator we
only use 8;, this is a case of decentralized control; if we use additional 8IS derived
from other generators, this is a'case of centralized control.
4. The problem addressed in this section belongs to the larger class of dynamic sta-
bility problems, One manifestation of this kind of instability is the spontaneous
buildup of oscillations under certain operating conditions. There may be a va-
riety of causes (not just the voltage control system) and solutions (not just a
PSS). The identification of the source of the instability can be a very chal-
lenging assignment. Once identified, finding a robust solution that will work
under all operating conditions may also be difficult. Fortunately, unlike in the
case of the transient stability problem, the powerful techniques of linear (feed-
back) system theory can be effectively used.
A comment on the modeling in this chapter. In our simple cases only one gen-
erator was involved; we could obtain some analytic results on regulation and stabil-
ity. The general case, with many interacting generators, is much harder.
B.6 SUMMARY
Figure 8.3 shows a simple block diagram of a voltage control system consisting of a
generator and an excitation system. The input to the generator is Efd • The output
of the generator, IVai, is fed back to the exciter, which generates Efd • The model fa-
cilitates the study of steady-state and transient behavior. For an isolated generator,
the voltage regulation is improved by increasing the loop gain. With increased loop
gain, however, care must be taken to avoid instability.
Stability must also be considered when a generator with a fast-acting exciter is
connected to a larger system. Modeling the larger system by an infinite bus, a root-
locus analysis shows the possibility of instability under certain operating conditions.
Stability is restored, for general conditions of operation, by use of a power system
stabilizer.
Problems
8.1. Consider an isolated generator with an inductive load Z = R + jX. Show that Gg (0),
which is the dc gain of the transfer function from Efd to IVai, is always less than 1.
8.2. Refer to Figure PS.2 and assume that
Z = 0.05 - jO.S
r = 0.05
Xd = 1.0, Xd = 0.2, Xq = 0.6
Tda = 4.0 sec
Initially, IVai = O. At t = 0, Efd = 1 is applied. Find IVai as a function of time.
v,
':" Figure PB.2

8.3 For an isolated generator with a local (impedance) load, Z = II jwC = - jO.5,
Xd = Xq = 1, Xd = 0.2, Tdo = 1, and Etd = g, g > 0 arbitrarily small. The system is ini-
tially at rest with tviO)1 = O. Find an expression for IVal(t) for I :::: O.
8.4. Assume the simplified linearized voltage control system model shown in Figure P8.4 and
an isolated generator supplying a local load. We are given the values
Tdo = 4 sec
Xd = 1
Xq = 0.6
Xd = 0.2
r =0
Z = - jOJ
Is there a positive K for which the feedback system is stable? If so, find such a K.
K
k,o ~I V,I
I + O.8Ss I + oTdos
Figure PS.4
8.5. Consider the system in Problem 8.4 with the following change: Z = R. Assume that
K > 0 is large enough for a damped oscillatory response. Do we get more damping with
R large or R small? Hint: Look at the real part of the (complex) closed-loop poles.
S.6. For a generator with a local (impedance) load, plot the steady-state voltage regulation
curves (lVol versus 11,1) for (3) no feedback and (b) feedback. Assume that
1. Z = R, 0 :s R :s 00
2. Xd = Xq = 1
3. KAlKE = 3
4. Open circuit IVAI = 1.0
Note: In (a) pick Etd so that assumption 4 is true: in (b) pick Vref so that assumption 4
is true.
S.7. Repeat Problem 8.6 except assume that Z = jX,O:s X :s 00.
IIf'
I
•
CHAPTER 9
Network Matrices
9.0 INTRODUCTION
In this chapter we introduce two important network descriptions of the intercon-

nected power system. These representations incorporate the various models of the
electrical characteristics of components we have developed in the earlier chapters
and provide the relationships governing the behavior of the node voltages and cur-
rents. The two network descriptions we will provide are the bus admittance matrix,
referred to as the Ybus' and the bus impedance matrix, referred to as the Zbus' These
network representations are widely used in the various power system analysis tools
that will be developed in the following chapters. The Ybus representation finds wide-
spread application in determining the network solution and forms an integral part of
most modern-day power system analysis. The Zbus representation is mainly used in
fault analysis. In this chapter we present the steps in developing the two represen-
tations and discuss the appropriate use of these representations.
9.1 BUS ADMITTANCE MATRIX
In the bus admittance matrix representation, the injected currents at the nodes
of the interconnected network are related to the voltages at the nodes via an admit-
tance representation. The bus admittance representation is obtained in terms of
a primitive representation, which characterizes the electrical behavior of the various
network components. This primitive representation does not take into considera-
tion the interconnection of the components in forming the network. The steady-
state behavior of the interconnected network comprised of the various components
is given by the bus admittance matrix obtained by performing nodal analysis on
the network.
In this section we provide a simple constructive approach to determine the bus
admittance matrix from the primitive description of the network components. The
analytical basis for this approach has its foundation in graph theory and multiport
294
Sec. 9.1 Bus Admittance Matrix 295
representation of networks. For a more detailed presentation of this analytical ap-

proach, the reader is referred to Pai 1979, (Chapter 3).
The bus admittance matrix of an interconnected power system is large and has
a large number of zero entries. This occurs because each bus or node in the physi-
cal power system is connected to at the most three to five other buses. This feature
of the bus admittance matrix is referred to as sparsity. The recognition of this prop-
erty of the matrix and development of special numerical techniques to deal with it
have revolutionized the computer-based analysis of power systems.
We will now develop the per phase representation of the interconnected net-
work using the bus admittance matrix representation. In developing this representa-
tion, we have taken the neutral as the reference node and will relate all the (phase a)
node or bus injected currents to the (line-to-neutral) node or bus voltages. The rela-
tionship between the injected node currents and the node voltages is then given by
(9.1)
where
I = vector of injected node currents
Ybus = bus admittance matrix
V = vector of node voltages
Each component element of the interconnected network is referred to as a branch.
The branch or the component is connected between two nodes of the network, or be-
tween a node and the reference node. For the purpose of modeling, we will repre-
sent a branch by either the branch impedance Z, or the branch admittance y. The
branch impedance z is also referred to as the primitive impedance, and the branch ad-
mittance y is referred to as the primitive admittance. In terms of the primitive ad-
mittances, the steps in developing the bus admittance matrix or Ybus for a given
network are as follows:
Steps in Constructing the Ybus by Inspection
1. The Ybus is symmetric.

2. Yii , the self-admittance (diagonal term), is equal to the sum of the primitive ad-
mittances of all the components connected to the ith node.
3. Yij , the ijth element of the Ybus (off-diagonal element), is equal to the negative
of the primitive admittance of all components connected between nodes i and
j. It is to be noted here that if more than one component is connected in par-
allel between the two nodes, the equivalent primitive admittance of the com-
ponents is first obtained before determining the entry in the Ybus'
We will now consider various examples to demonstrate the application of the simple
rules to construct the Ybus by inspection.
296 Network Matric,es Chap. 9
Example 9.1
Given the 'IT-equivalent model of a transmission line Figure E9.1, between nodes p
and q, determine the Ybus representation for the line.
lp lq
p Z,eries q
~,~, )~,(
+ +
Vp Vq Figure ES.1 'IT-equivalent
model of a transmission
line.
Solution We wish to find Ip and Iq in terms of the voltages Vp and V q. In the 'IT-
equivalent model of the line, Zseries represents the series impedance of the line con-
sisting of the series resistance and inductive reactance, and YshunJ2 is the admittance
corresponding to half the shunt capacitance placed at each node of the line.
Applying the rules to develop the Ybus , we find that
rCS~ries + Ys;unt) -CS~riJ] r

l
Vp
IP] ]
Iq = -C.~riJ C~ri~ + Ys;unt) Vq
Note that in developing the diagonal and the off-diagonal terms of the Ybus ,we have
taken the reciprocal of the appropriate primitive impedances to determine the prim-
itive admittances. We also note that the Ybus provides a relationship between the volt-
ages at the nodes and the injected currents at the nodes. This example serves as a
building block for the examples that follow. We will utilize the Ybus developed for var-
ious components to put together the Ybus for a representative power system.
Example 9.2
Given the model of the transformer in Figure E9.2, obtain t~ Ybus representation of
the transformer. ':.I
lp jx lq
po "Om' oq
+ +
Vp Vq Figure ES.2 Simplified
equivalent circuit model
0 0 of a transformer.
Solution Before we develop the Ybus representation of the transformer, it is impor-

tant to note that we have omitted the shunt branch of the transformer since it draws
negligible current compared to the load current. In addition, the series resistance is ne-
glected, and the series inductance is referred to one side (high-voltage or low-voltage
side) of the transformer. The Ybus representation for the transformer is then given by
If
It
Sec. 9.1 Bus Admittance Matrix 2S7
In the example that follows, we will present a case in which the Ybus representation for
transformers with off-nominal turns ratio (the turns ratio of the transformer is differ-
ent from the ratio of the base voltages on the two sides of the transformer) is devel-
oped. This is usually the case when we have regulating transformers for voltage control
as introduced in Section 5.9. The example also presents the network model for regu-
lating transformers.
Example 9.3
Figure E9.3( a) shows the single-line representation of an off-nominal turns ratio trans-
former connected between nodes p and q. In the representation the transformer turns
ratio is normalized as a: 1, and the nonunity side is calledthe tap side. In the repre-
sentation the series primitive admittance (reciprocal of the series primitive imped-
ance) of the transformer is connected to the unity side.
Figure ES.3(a) Off-nominal

transformer representation.
(a) Find the Ybus relating (terminal) bus voltages and currents.
(b) Show that Figure E9.3(b) is an equivalent circuit model.
lp y/a lq
p q
+ +
Vp
-
I] ,(1;") '(';91] Vq
-
Figure ES.3(b) Off-nominal
transformer equivalent circuit.
Solution. (a) Using the results of Example 9.2 we can write
(9.2a)
By elementary matrix operations we get the following admittance matrix.
(9.2b)
298 Network Matrices • Chap. 9
(b) We can calculate the bus admittance matrix for the circuit given in Figure E9.3(b)
and show it is the same as (9.2b). Alternatively, given (9.2b) we can easily derive the
circuit. Hint: Start by noting that the series bridging element in the circuit must be the
admittance y/a. Then add as shunt elements whatever is needed to end up with self-
impedances y/ a2 and y.
Example 9.4
Consider the five-bus system shown in Figure E9.4. The parameters for the line data
and the transformer data are provided in Table E9.4. The table provides information
regarding the network topology by providing the bus numbers to which the branches
are connected. In addition, the table provides the series impedance and the line charg-
ing susceptance for each line in p.u. on an appropriately chosen base. Determine the
bus admittance matrix Ybus for the given system.
Figure E9.4 Single-line

diagram for Example 9.4.
TABLE E9.4 TRANSFORMER AND

TRANSMISSION LINE DATA
From Bus # To Bus # R (p.u.) x (p.u.) B (p.u.)
2 0.004 0.0533 f"

a
2 3 0.02 0.25 0.22
3 4 0.02 0.25 0.22
2 4 0.01 0.15 0.11
4 5 0.006 0.08 a
Solution Note that the data provided are in terms of the primitive impedances for the
series impedance data. The line charging is provided in terms of the total primitive ad-
mittance B. We model each transmission line using the 1T-equivalent model. Before
assembling the Ybus> we first calculate the primitive admittance of each branch. All the
admittances are in per unit.
1 .
YI2 = 0.004 + jO.0533 = 1.400 - ,18.657 .
1 .
Y23 = 0.02 + jO.25 = 0.318 - ,3.975
Y34 = Y23 = 0.318 - j3.975
Y24 = 0.01 +1 j0.15 = 0.442 - j6.637
1
Y45 = 0.006 + jO.08 = 0.932 - j12.43
Having calculated the primitive admittances, we can now start assembling the ele-
ments of the Ybus ' For the purpose of clarity, we will individually form each element
and then display the elements in matrix form.
¥il = YI2 = 1.400 - j18.657

YI2 = 121 = - Y12 = -1.400 + j 18.657
Yll = YI4 = YI5 = r]1 = Y41 = Y51 = 0
.B2j .Bz4
122 = Y12 + Y23 + Y24 + '2 + '2
= 1.400 - j18.657 + 0.318 - j3.975 + 0.442 - j6.637 + jOll + jO.055

= 2.16 - j29.104
Y23 = Y32 = -Y23 = -0.318 + j3.975

124 = Y42 = - Y24 = -0.442 + j6.637
Y 25 =Y52 =Q
.B23 .B34
Y33 = Y23 + Y34 + '2 + '2
= 0.318 - j3.975 + 0.318 - j3.975 + jO.ll + j0.11 = 0.636 - j7.73
r]4 = Y 43 = - Y34 = -0.318 + j3.975 .
Y 35 =Y53 =0
.B24 .B34
Y 44 = Y24 + Y34 + Y45 +. '2 + '2
= 0.442 - j6.637 + 0.318 - j3.975 + 0.932 - j12.43 + jO.055
+ jO.ll = 1.692 - j22.877
Y45 = Y54 = -Y45 = -0.932 + j12.43
Y 55 = Y45 = 0.932 - j12.43
I
I
11
300 Network Matrices. Chap. 9
Having calculated all the elements of the Ybus, we are now in a position to write the
Ybus in matrix form.
(1.40 - j18.66) (-1.40 +j 18.66) 0 0

(-1.40+ j18.66) (2.16-j29.10) (-0.318+ j3.98) (-0.442+ j6.64) 0
Yb", = 0 (-0.318+ j3.98) (0.636-j7.73) (-0.318+ j3.98) 0
o (-0.442+j6.64) (-0.318+j3.98) (1.692-j 22.88) (-0.932+j12.43)
o 0 0 (-0.932+j12.43) (0.932-j12.43)
'i. In the development of the Ybus described in this section, and in the various ex-
amples presented, we have neglected the effect of mutual coupling between trans-
mission lines that are in close physical proximity. For interested readers, this
material can be found in Grainger and Stevenson (Chapter 7) and Anderson (Chap-
ter 11).
Exercise 1 Consider the Ybus obtained in Example 9.4. Modify this Ybus to re-
flect the effect of the line between buses 2 and 4 being removed.
Example 9.5
For the system given in Figure E9.4, a generator with emf equal to 0.90 LO' p.u. and
a reactance of jl.25 p.u. is connected to bus 1, while a motor with internal voltage
equal to 0.80 L -70' p.u. and a reactance ofj1.25 p.u. is conqe;ted to bus 5. Convert
these voltage sources to appropriate current injections. ~eglect resistances in
Example 9.4, and write the nodal admittance equations of the system in the form
of (9.1).
Solution Before proceeding to obtain the nodal admittance equations, we first pre-
sent the procedure to convert voltage sources to current sources. As depicted in the
earlier chapters, in per phase analysis power system components are represented by
passive impedances or equivalent admittances together with appropriate active volt-
age or current sources. For the purpose of steady-state analysis, in Chapters 5 and
7, we had represented a generator by the circuit shown in Figure E9.5(a). We will
first show that this is equivalent to the current source representation given in Figure
E9.5(b).
jX, 10
+ +
z,
Eo Va Rest of y" Va Rest of
system system
Figure E9.5 Circuits illustrating source transformation.
The circuit in Figure E9.5(a) is governed by the equation
Ea = Iaz, + Va
Dividing both sides of this equation by z, provides the expression for the current source
in Figure E9.5(b):
Ea
I, = - = 10 + Vay,
Zs
where Ys = 1/ Z, the primitive admittance corresponding to the emf source primitive im-
pedance. Hence, the emf Ea and its series impedance z" is converted to an equivalent
current source Is with a shunt admittance y, given by
Eo 1
Is = - and Ys = -
Zs Zs
Applying the preceding transformation to our example, we note that the current source
at bus 1 is given by
0.90 L!
lSI =}1.25 = 0.72/-90 a
The admittance connected between bus 1 and the neutral is given by
1 1
Ys! = - = '125 = - jO.80
Z,j J.
Similarly, the current source and the admittance at bus 5 due to the motor are given by
Is5 = 0.64/-160° and Ys5 = - jO.80

Representing these changes in the system of Figure E9A, we have Figure E9.5(c).
302 Network Matrices ,Chap. 9
Figure E9.5(c) Inclusion of current sources in Example 9.4.
With the resistances neglected, the primitive admittances in Example 9.4 are given by
Y12 = jO.~533 = - j18.76
Y2l = jO\S = - j4.00

YJ4 = Y23 = - j4.00
Yz4 = jO\5 = - j6.67
Y4S = jO~08 = - j12.5

As before, we can now calculate the terms of the admittance matrix using the primi-
tive admittances.
Yll = Y12 + Y,l = - j18.76 - jO.8 = - j19.56
Y12 = Y21 = -Y12 = j18.76
Y1J = Y14 = Y1S = Yl1 = Y41 = YS1 = 0
.B2l .B24
l'22 = Y12 + Yz3 +Y24 + '7: + '7:
= - j18.76 - j4.0 - j6.67 + jO.ll + jO.055
= - j29.27
Y23 = Y32 = - Y23 = j4.0
Y24 = Y42 = -Yz4 = - j6.67
Y2S =YS2 =O
.Bn .B34
Y33 = YzJ + YJ4 + '7: + ]7:
= - j4.0 - j4.0 + jO.ll + jO.ll = - j7.78
Sec. 9.2 Network Solution 303
YJ4 = Y,;J = -YJ4 = j4.0

I)s=YSJ=O
.B24 BJ4
Y44 = Y24 + YJ4 + Y4S + '2 + '2
= - j6.67 - j4.0 - j12.50 + jO.055 + j0.11= - j23.01
Y4S = YS4 = - Y4S = j 12.50
YS5 = Y45 + Ys5 = - j12.50 - jO.80 = - j13.30
Having calculated all the elements of the Ybus> we are now in a position to write the
nodal admittance matrix equations given by (9.1):
l-j~~~;!6 !~~~~~7 j~.o

900 o
i-o
ii, ]If.]
0.72 ] )6.67
= 0 j4.0 - j7.78 j4.0
o 0 j6.67 )4.0 - )23.01
1 0.64 /-160 0 0 0 0 j12.5 - ,13.30 Vs
where Yt, Vz, VJ , V4 , and Vi ,are the node voltages measured with respect to the refer-
ence node, which is the neutral. We also note that there are only two injected currents
at bus 1 and bus 5. All other injected currents are zero.
9.2 NETWORK SOLUTION
In practical applications for large-scale power systems, the nodal admittance equations
are solved for a wide range of operating conditions. In most of these studies, the
network parameters and the configuration remain the same, and the change in oper-
ating conditions is reflected by the change in the external sources (voltage or current)
connected to the nodes. In this situation, the Ybus remains fixed, and different volt-
age solutions are obtained corresponding to different sets of current injection vec-
tors. In finding numerical solutions for the voltages, considerable savings in time and
computational resources can be obtained if the calculations are done efficiently. One
technique that is commonly used is Gaussian elimination coupled with triangular
factorization. In triangular factorization, we express Ybus as the product of
two matrices Land U. These matrices are referred to as the lower triangular and
upper triangular factors of Ybus respectively. The triangular matrices Land U are
obtained from the Ybus using triangular factorization. The matrices Land U are
unique for a given Ybus' As a result, once these factors have been calculated, they
can be stored and reused for other calculations. The analytical basis for the proce-
dure is as follows.
From (9.1), we have
1= Ybu,v = (LU)V (9.3)
304 Network Matrices . Chap. 9
Once the factorization has been obtained, the solution to the voltage vector V is then
found first by solving the system
I = LV (9.4)
and then solving
V=UV (9.5)
Note that Land U are both triangular matrices; as a result, th5! solution of (9.4) con-
sists of only a forward substitution, and once the solution for V is found, the solution
of (9.5) consists of a back substitution to determine V.
We will now give a simple example to illustrate the basic idea behind triang-
ular factorization.
Example 9.6
Suppose we are given a 3 x 3 matrix M and want to find its lower and upper triangu-
lar factors L and U.
Using the standard formulation, we have
1 0 0] [Ull
M=LU=
[ee 1 01 00
21
31 e 32
Notice that L has all 1's on the main diagonal. After matrix manipulation we have
[e:~ll e21UI:l~
I
M= C21 U
I: : U22 U23 ]
e 31 U11 e3l U12 + e32U22 e 31 UlJ + e32U23 + U33

We note that the first row of Mgives us the first row of U, while the first column of M
divided by U11 gives us the first column oil. So we now know U11, U12, UlJ ,e21> e31> from
which we can find U22 and U23' Then we can solve for e32 and fmally U33' The order of
the computation moves diagonally down and to the right.
....
Exercise 2 Given
M= 3 2 1
5 3 2] . find L and U.
[315
Triangular Factorization Method. The technique we described in Example 9.6
is not explicit enough or efficient enough for machine computation. We next turn to
a very efficient method to calculate the Land U matrices given Ybus ' We start with
an n X n matrix Ybus and use an algorithm to calculate new values and overwrite the
original Ii j • We then repeat the process. After n - 1 iterations the resulting n X n
I
matrix has the elements of U in the upper right-hand corner and the element of L
(minus the diagonal of l's) in the lower left corner. The algorithm uses computer
memory very efficiently. For details see Golub (Chapter 4). The alert reader will no-
tice that the algorithm parallels what we did in Example 9.6 but in a more efficient
and orderly fashion. .
Triangular Factorization Algorithm

For k = 1,2, ... , (n - 1)
IfYkk = 0
then
quit
else
where k is the iteration number.

We will now demonstrate this algorithm for a four-bus system of nodal equations.
From (9.1), we can write the system of equations for a four-bus system as follows:
[i: i: i: i:1 r~1 r~:1

131 132 Y33 Y34
Y41 Y42 Y43 Y44
V3
V4
=
13
14
(9.6)
At the first step in the preceding algorithm (where k = 1), the 4 X 4 Ybus given in (9.6)
will have the following elements stored. The superscript in parentheses provides an
index for the step.
r
;~{ ;~~ ;~~ ;~~1 (9.7)
Y (I)
31
y(l)
32
y(l)
33
y(l)
34
Y (I)
41
y(l)
42
y(l)
43
y(l)
44
where
(I) _ Y;1 (9.8)
Y,'j - for i = 2,3,4
Yll
where
for i, j = 2, 3, 4 (9.9)
306 Network Matrices • Chap. 9
At the second step in the algorithm (where k = 2), the 4 X 4 Ybus given in (9.6) will
have the following elements stored.
Yll Y12
Y(I)21 y(l)
22 Y1'13(I)23 y(l)
1'141
24
(I) y(2) (2) y(2) (9.10)
[ Y(I)
31 32
y(2)
Y 33
(2)
34
y(2)
Y41 42 Y 43 44
where
(I)
y(2) = Yi2
(9.11)
i2 y(l)
for i = 3,4
22
and
(I) (I)
y(2) = y(l) _ YiZ
Y
2j
for i, j = 3,4 (9.12)
I} lJ (I)
Y22
At the final step in the algorithm (where k = 3), the 4 X 4 Ybus given in (9.6) will
have the following elements stored.
1'12 1'13
[Y"
yW
y(l)
22
y(l)
23 y~~
y(!)
31
y(2)
32
y(2)
33
Y"1
y(2)
34
(9.13)
y(l)
41
y(2)
42
y(3)
43 y~
where
(2)
y(3) _ Yi3
i3 - y(2) for i = 4 (J (9.14)
33
and
(2) (2)
y(3) = y(2) _ Yi3 Y 3j
I} I} (2) for i, j = 4 (9.15)
Y33
As a result of the factorization given by (9.13), the L and U matrices are then given by
1 0
yW 1
L = y(l) y(2) (9.16)
r
31 32
y(2)
Y(I)
41 42
We then perform the forward substitution and the backward substitution given by
(9.4) and (9.5), respectively, to obtain the final solution for the voitage vector V.
We will now present two examples showing the solution process in obtaining the
voltages from the nodal equations. In the first example, we will obtain the solution
by simply obtaining thl': numerical inverse of the Ybus ' In the next example we will
perform the triangular factorization on the identical Ybus and compare the solutions
obtained.
Example 9.7
For the nodal equations obtained in Example 9.5, determine the vector of voltage so-
lutions by evaluating the inverse of the Ybus and premultiplying the current vector by
the inverse matrix.
Solution The nodal equations obtained in Example 9.5 are given by
- j19.56 j18.76 o o
j18.76 - j29.27 j4.0 j6.67 o ] [VI]
V2 [0.72 C2.Q:
0 l
o j4.0 - j7.78 j4.0 o V) = 0
[ o j6.67 j4.0 - j23.01 jl2.50 V4 0
o 0 o jl2.5 - j13.30 V, 0.64 /-1"" J
which is of the form
YbusV = I
We now obtain the inverse of the Ybus , which is given by
j1.021 j1.012 j1.013 jO.959 jO.90l
j1.012 j1.055 j1.056 jO.999 jO.939
(Ybust l = j1.013 j1.056 j1.2l5 j1.057 jO.994
[ jO.959 jO.999 j1.057 j1.057 jO.993
jO.90l jO.939 jO.994 jO.993 jl.009
The voltage vector V is then given by V = (Ybust 1I.
V= [1:;f~~']
1.087 ! - 33.33'
1.06 ! - 34.89'
Example 9.8
For the nodal equations obtained in Example 9.5, determine the vector of voltage so-
lutions by performing the triangular factorization of the Ybus and using the forward and
backward substitution shown in (9.4) and (9.5).
308 Network Matricliis Chap. 8
Solution The first step in the procedure is to perform the triangular factorization ac-
cording to the algorithm described earlier. In order to facilitate the process, we first
copy the Ybus obtained in Example 9.5.
Ybus
- [-
-
~~::~~ lt~~~~7 !~.O j~~67
0 J4.0
_
J7.78 J4.0
~]
0
o j 6.67 j 4.0 - j23.01 j 12.50
o 0 0 j12.5 - j13,30
We now begin the factorization process. Since the Ybus in this case is a 5 X 5 matrix,
there will be four steps in the factorization process. The elements stored in the Ybus
at the end of each step will be shown.
[--0.959i19~ j18.76
- j11.28
0
j4.0
0
j6.67
y<~~ = 0
0
0
j4.0
j6.67
0
- j7.78 j4.0
j4.0 - j23.01
0 j12.5
iLl
- j13,30
1]
j18.76 0 0
[- i19S6
-0.959 - j11.28 j4.0 j6.67
Y<;~ = 0 -0.355 - j6.36 j6,37
0 -0.591 j6,37 - j19.07
0 0 0 j12.5 - j13.30
'1
j18.76 0 0
[- i19S6
-0.959 - j11.28 j4.0 j6.67 o
o ] '.
Y<;ls = 0
0
-0.355 - j6,36 j6,37
-0.591 -1.001 - j12.70 ." j1~.50
j'
0 0 0 j12.5 - j13,30
1]
j18.76 0 0 (J
[--0.959
il956 - jl1.28 j4.0 j6.67
~~= 0 -0,355 - j6,36 j6,37
0 -0.591 -1.001 - j12.70
0 0 0 -0.984 - j.0994
From the final step in the triangular factori~ation, we obtain the Land U matrices
given by
i
0 0 0 0
!I -0.959 0 0 0
L= 0
l 0
-0.355
-0.591 -1.001
0 0
~.
0
t~t 0 0 0 -0.985
~~,
~,
,0 +\
;1'
Sec. 9.3 Network Reduction [Kron Reduction] 309
[ -j~56 j18.76
- j11.28
0
j4.0
0
j6.67
0
0
U= 0 0 - j6,36 j637 0
0 0 0 - j12.70 j12.S
I
0 0 0 0 - jO.994
We now perform the forward substitution given by (9.4), which gives
-- jO.691
jO.72
- j0.245
- jO.653
-0.601 - jO.862
Using this solution for V, we now solve the backward substitution given by (9.5) to obtain
1.08 ! - 30.16°
1.092 ! - 31.17'
V = 1.12 ! - 32.27°
[ 1.087 ! - 33.33°
1.06 ! - 34.89°
9.3 NETWORK REDUCTION [KRON REDUCTION)
In a power system, the current injection is always zero at buses where there are no
external loads or generators connected. Such nodes may be eliminated. It is very easy
to do this, as shown in the following example.
Example 9.9
We are given
The current injection into node 3 is zero and may be eliminated as follows:
1. Using the third row of the matrix, express VJ in terms of ~ and ~.

2. The dependence of II and 12 on ~, Y2, and V) may now be expressed in terms
of Vi and Y2 alone.
3. Collect the terms into a new 2 x 2 admittance matrix.
310 Network Matrices ' Chap. 9
Carrying out this procedure, we have

1. 0 = Y31 V 1 + Y32V2 + }]3V3 or
}]1 YJ2
\-3=-- V1 - - V2
}]3 }]3
We note that while the matrix is of lower dimension, it may be less sparse. Note also
that after calculating Vi and Vz we may easily determine Vi.
We can generalize the procedure for an n-bus system as follows: For an n-bus system,
if node k has zero current injection (i.e., h = 0 in the nodal equations), then we can
obtain the reduced admittance matrix by eliminating node k by using the formula
YkY ,
k
Y 'I(~ew) = y,'I __'_1 ..
I, ] = 1, 2, ... ,n i, j '* k (9.17)
Ykk
The superscript (new) distinguishes the elements ofthe new (n - 1) X (n - 1) Ybus
from the original n X n Ybus ' The lower dimensional system in which the zero cur-
rent injection bus is eliminated is said to be Kron reduced. Obviously, we can iterate
on this scheme to eliminate as many nodes (with zero current injeOifons) as desired.
Example 9.10
For the nodal equations obtained in Example 9.5, eliminate node 3 using Kron reduc-
tion, and obtain the new Ybu,. .
Solution Using (9.17), the calculations for the second row of the new Ybus are as follows:
y(new) == y _ Y23Y31 == '18.76 _ (j4.0)(O) == '1876

21 21 Y33 J _ j7.78 J.
(new) y Y23Y32 • (j4.0)(j4.0) .

Y22 == 22 - - y == J29.27 - == - J27.21
33 - j7.78
r Sec. 9.5 Bus Impedance Matrix 311
YY ('40)( '40) .
y(new) = Y _~= '667 _ J. J. = '873
24 24 Y33 J. _ j7.78 J .
(new) Y2Jr]5 (j4.0)(0)

Y25 = Yi5 - - - = 0 - - . - =0
. YJJ - J7.78
The new nodal equations are given by
0.72/-90°
o
1r- j19.56
= j 18.76
j18.76
- j27.21
o
j8.73 o
o 0 j8.73 - j20.953 o
j12.5llVi]VV4
2
r0.64/-160° 0 0 j12.5 - j13.30 Vs

When solved for the voltages, these equations give the solution
The solution obtained is the same as the one obtained earlier.
9.4 Ybus STRUCTURE AND MANIPULATION
For large-scale power systems, the Ybus is a highly sparse matrix. As a result, it has a
large number of zeros and relatively few nonzero entries. In order to store and ma-
nipulate the matrix more efficiently in computer applications, highly efficient nu-
merical techniques have been developed. These techniques include methods for
optimally ordering the sparse matrices and efficient methods for solving systems of
sparse matrix equations. The description of these techniques is beyond the scope of
this book. The interested reader is referred to an excellent chapter on the topic of
sparsity in large-scale network computation by Alvarado, Tinney, and Enns.
9.5 BUS IMPEDANCE MATRIX
In Example 9.7, we obtained the solution to the voltage vector V by determining the
numerical inverse of the Ybus ' The inverse is called the bus impedance matrix or Zbus'
The Zbus relates the injected currents at the nodes to the nodes voltages with respect
to the reference node via
(9.18)
The Zbus cannot be written down by inspection like the Ybus ' However, it is very
useful in performing short-circuit calculations and will be used for this purpose in
rr-
'J
,I'
I
312 Network Matrice!s Chap. 9
Chapter 12. The Zbu, is an open-circuit network description. In expanded form, for
an n-node network (9.18) can be written as
Zln] [II
~2~ .~2.
j (9.19)
Znn In
Where the voltages are referred to a common reference and the currents are the in-
jected currents at the nodes. If every current except that injected at node k is zero,
we have from (9.19)
(9.20)
This defines the kth column of the bus impedance matrix since we can solve (9.20)
to compute
(9.21)
Since all impedance elements are defined with all nodes open circuited except one,
the impedance elements are called the open-circuit driving-point and transfer im-
pedances or
Zik = open-circuit driving-point impedance, i = k
= open-circuit transfer impedance, i t- k
The diagonal element of the Zbus matrix provides the Thevenin equivalent impedance
of the system a~ that p~rticular nod~. This fact is particularl~seful in using the ~u,
for fault analysIs, as wIll be shown In Chapter 12. '
We will now provide a computationally attractive method for building or as-
sembling the impedance matrix step by step. As a preliminary we will consider the
following problem. Suppose that we are given the impedance matrix Zbus of a spec-
ified r-bus network and wish to calculate the impedance matrix of a certain modi-
fication of the originally specified network. We will call the new, modified
impedance matrix zgus'
In the following we will consider four types of circuit modifications and give
rules for calculating in Zbu, terms of Zbu,' The justification of the rules may be found
in Appendix 7.
Modification 1. Add a branch with impedance Zb from a new (r + 1)st bus

(node) to the reference node.
r
Sec. 9.5 Bus Impedance Matrix 313
Rule 1. Zbus is given by the following (r + 1) X (r + 1) matrix.
°
Z" == [ZbUS
bus
OJ (9.22)
Zb
Modification 2. Add a branch Zb from a new (r + 1)st node to the ith node.
Rule 2. Suppose that the ith column of Zbus is Zi and the iith element of Zbus
is Zii' Then
. (9.23)
Note: We emphasize that Zi is simply a replication of the ith column of Zbus'
Modification 3. Add a branch with impedance Zb between (existing) ith

node and the reference node.
Rule 3. Suppose that the ith column of Zbus is Z; and the iith element of Zbus
is Zi;' Then we first augment the old Zbus with an extra row and column as shown in
(9.23) to enlarge the size of the matrix to (r + 1) X (r + I). The voltage at the
(r + l)th bus is the voltage at the reference node and is equal to zero. Hence, we
Kron reduce the last row and column as described in Section 9.3 to obtain
(9.24)
Modification 4. Add a branch Zb between (existing) ith and jth nodes.
Rule 4. Suppose that the ith and jth columns of Zbus are Z; and Zj and the iith,
jjth, and ijth elements of Zbus are Z;;, Zij' Z;j' respectively. Then
(9.25)
where b = Zi - Zj and 'Y == (Zb + Zji + Zjj - 2Zijt 1.

Note: By the rules of matrix multiplication,
r
314 Network Matrices Chap, 9
Example 9.11
Suppose that we are given the impedance matrix Zbus for the three-bus network shown
in Figure E9.ll. Assume that
Zl = jl.O
Zz = j1.25
Z) = jO.l
Z4 = jO,2
Zs = jO.l
0.5699 0.5376 0.5591]

Zbus = j 0.5376 0.5780 0.5511
[
0.5591 0.5511 0.6231
Suppose that the network is now modified as follows: Zs is removed, Find Zbus'
Reference node Figure ES.11
Solution The modification is of type 4, If we add an impedance Zb = - jO.l between

nodes 1 and 2, we will have Zb in parallel with Zs (i,e" - jO.l in parallel withjO.l), The
resulting parallel impedance is infinity (i,e" we have an open circuit), This is equiva-
lent to removing zs,
Using rule 4, we first calculate ':.I
'Y = (Zb + Zl1 + Z22 - 2Z12 t 1
= [ - jO.1 + j0.5699 + j0.5780 - 2(j0.5376Jrl
= j36.63
Next we calculate
b = Zl - Z2 = j -0,0404
[
0,0323 j
0.0080
from which we find
0,001043 -0,001305 0,000258]
bb T = j2 -0,001305 0,001632 -0,000323
[
0,000258 -0,000323 0,000064
Sec. 9.5 Bus Impedance Matrix 315
Substituting these results in (9.25), we get

I, Z~us = Zbus - ybb T
0.6081 0.4898 0.5686"
Z~us = j 0.4898 0.6378 0.5393
[
0.5686 0.5393 0.6254
All these operations are nicely automated using computers.
We note that to appreciate the advantages of this method of matrix modifica-

tion over direct inversion of ygus we should consider a matrix of high dimension.
In Example 9.11 we removed Zs. The reader may wish to check the result, and
his or her understanding of the method, by adding it back in to get the original Zbus'
We next return to the problem originally posed, that of finding the impedance
matrix of a given network without (direct) matrix inversion. Following the four rules
governing network modifications, we can start with a simple network and then add
elements until we have the complete network. The process is called Z building, and
the procedure is given as follows.
Z.building procedure. Suppose that we wish to find Zbus for a given network.
Step 0: Number nodes of the given network starting with those nodes at the
ends of branches connected to the reference node.
Step 1: Start with a network composed only of all those branches connected to
the reference node. Correspondingly, we find that Z~Js is diagonal with the im-
pedance values of the branches on the diagonal. This result is consistent with
the repeated use of rule 1.
Step 2: Add a new node to the ith node of the existing network using rule 2.
Continue until all the nodes of the complete network are attached.
Step 3: Add a branch between ith and jth nodes using rule 4. Continue until all
the remaining branches are connected.
In some schemes for building the Zbus, Step 1 may not be the most efficient procedure
to add the data as they are being read. In such situations, a node (not necessarily the
reference node) would have been added, and then there would be a branch from this
node to the reference node. In this situation, we use rule 3.
We conclude with an example:
Example 9.12
Find Zbu, for the three-bus (node) network [shown in Figure E9.l2( a)] using the
Z-building procedure. Assume that
I
I
I:1
316 Network Matrice~ Chap. 9
ZI = jl.O
Z2 = jl.25
ZJ = jO.1
Z4 = j02
Z5 = jO.1
Z3 4
1~2
Reference node Figure E9.12(al

Note: The network is the same as in Example 9.11. Now we will show how to find the
Zbus that was given in Example 9.11.
Solution
Step 0: The nodes connected to the reference node are already correctly num-
bered 1 and 2.
Step 1: We start by considering z~ls for the network composed of all the branch-
es directly connected to the reference node [Figure E9 .12(b)J.
Z~~s = {~ 1.~5J
Step 2: We next attach a new node, node 3, to node 1 through branch ZJ using
rule 2. With Zr =j[l OJ, ZII =[j~ and ~ = Z3 = :OJ.1,;e get
(I) _ . 0 1.25 0
Zbus - ]
... .,. ...
101.1
Step 3: Now all the nodes are in place. All other modifications consist of adding
a branch between existing nodes. We can add Z4 next. Z4 connects nodes 2 and
3, so by rule 4 we calculate
.1
b = Z2 - Z]
o [ 0] [1.0] [-1.0]
= j 1.25 - j 0 = j ~.25
1.1 1.1
Y = (Z4 + Z22 + ZJ3 - 2Z23 t l = (j0.2 + jl.25 + j1.1)-1 = (j2.55t l
= - j0.3922
rI
Sec. 9.6 Inverse Elements to Determine Columns of Zbus 317
Figure E9.12(b)
where the impedance values are derived from Zb~s. Then, using (9.25), we get
-
Z~~ = Z~~s + j0.3922 1.25
[-1.0 1.25
-1.563
-1.1]
1.375
-1.1 1.375 -1.21
0.6078 0.4902 0.5686]
= j 0.4902 0.6372 0.5392
[
0.5686 0.5392 0.6255
Finally, we add Zs between nodes 1 and 2.
0.6078] [0.4902] [ 0.1176 ]

b = Zl - Z2 =j 0.4902 - j 0.6372 =j -0.1471
[
0.5686 0.5392 0.0294
Y = (z; + Zll + Z22 - 2Z12 f 1
= [jO.1 + jO.6078 + jO.6372 - 2(j0.4902)fl = j2.742
where the impedance values are derived from Z~~s. Then

-0.01380.0173 -0.0035]
(3) (2) .
/ Zbu, = Zbus + J2.742
[
0.0173 -0.0216 0.0043
-0.0035 0.0043 -0.0009
0.5699 0.5376 0.5591~
= j 0.5376 0.5780 0.5511
[
0.5591 0.5511 0.6231
This is the desired impedance matrix Zbu, .
We note again that all the operations required in the foregoing are well suited
for computer implementation.
9.S INVERSE ELEMENTS TO DETERMINE COLUMNS OF Zbus
We observed in Section 9.5 that in order to perform fault analysis, in many instances
it is essential to determine only the diagonal element of the Zbus corresponding to
the faulted bus (this provides the Thevenin equivalent impedance at the faulted
bus), or at the most the entire column of the Zbu, corresponding to the faulted bus
in order to calculate the voltages at the other nodes and as a result the various cur-
318 Network Matrices Chap. 9.
rents in the network. Computationally, the individual columns of the Zbus matrix can
be evaluated efficiently from the Ybus without evaluating the entire Zbus matrix. This
provides an attractive computational option and is the approach followed in most
modern fault analysis programs. Having performed the L U decomposition on the
Ybus' the fastest way to compute selected elements of the inverse is by forward and
backward operation on unit vectors (see Alvarado, Tinney, and Enns). For a four -bus
example, having performed the L U decomposition on the Ybus' the second column
of the Zbus matrix, Z~~" can be found by solving the following equation:
I
I
e21
e31
.
1
f32
e41 e42 e43
. .] lUll
1
1
.
.
. : : : : :::~l~::~ l~]
U33 U34
U44
Z32
Z42
=
0
0
(9.26)
'-r-'
(2)
Zbus
More generally, Ybus X Z~Js = I(k), where Zh~s is the kth column of the Zbu" and I(k)
is the kth column of the identity matrix. We can now solve for z~ls in two steps using
a forward and backward substitution as follows:
ll:,e
J~H1]
1
(9.27)
e32
31
e41 e42 e43
"'f"] n
U12 Un
U22 U23 U24 Z22 = Y2

(9.28)
l"" U33 U34
U44
Z32
Z42
Y3
Y4
'-r-'
Z(2) .
bus
The approach presented here will be the method of choice in Chaptifr 12, where we
deal with fault analysis.
Example 9.13
For the system used in Examples 9.11 and 9.12, determine the third column of the Zbu,
matrix using the method described previously..
Solution: For the system shown in Figure E9.11 or Figure E9.12, the Ybus matrix by
inspection is given by
Ybus =- j[~:O ~5~~ ~1~1

-10 -5 15
Sec 9.7 Summary 319
The L U decomposition of the foregoing Ybus using the procedure described in Sec-
tion 9.2 is given by .
1
[-0.~7619
-10
L = ° °0]
1
11.0381
-10
-9.7619
-0.47619 -0.8844 1 1.60485
From (9.27), we get
°
Using (9.28), we obtain
0.5591:
z~ls = j 0.5511
[
0.6231
This result is identical to the column 3of the Zbus given in Examples 9.11 and 9.12.
9.7 SUMMARY _ - ~
. -
In this chapter we have provided an introduction to two important matrices that

playa key role in describing the electrical characteristics of the power system network.
The Ybus matrix is constructed by a simple procedure that involves inspection only.
Ybus relates the node voltages to the injected currents. The network may then be
solved t~nd the node voltages. An efficient technique is to solve the matrix equa-
tions via triangular factorization. The network solution is then obtained by a simple
forward and back substitution procedure.
If there is no current injection at one or more nodes, it is possible to reduce the
dimensions of the network matrices. One simple technique is to apply the Kron re-
duction procedure. It is also important to note that the Ybus is a symmetric matrix,
and this provides an important check during the construction ofthe Ybus' It also al-
lows for the efficient storage of the Ybus in computer memory.
The Zbus is the inverse of the Ybus' In general, it is not practical to take the in-
verse directly. However, there is a simple constructive procedure to modify or build
the Zbus step by step. Another procedure may be used to obtain only specific ele-
ments or columns of the Zbus from the Ybus' This technique is computationally effi-
cient and is used in most modern fault analysis software. The Zbus plays an important
role in the analysis of faults in the power system. This use of the Zbus will be demon-
strated in Chapter 12.
Network Matrices Chap, 9
320
Problems
9.1. For the system given in Example 9.4, obtain the YbllS for the case in which a parallel
transmission line is added between buses 2 and 4 with the same parameters as the orig·
inal line between these two buses,
9.2. For the system shown in Figure P9 .2, construct the Ybus' The parameters for the various
elements are provided in Table P9.2.
6 4 Figure PS.2
TABLE PS.2
Element Series Reactance p.u.
1-2 jO.04
1-6 jO.06
2-4 jO.03
2-3 jO.02
3-4 jO.08
4-5 jO.06
5-6 jO.05
9.3. For the system given in Problem 9.2, modify the Ybu, if a line;th reactance j0.10 p.u. is
added between buses 1 and 5.
9.4 For the system given in Figure P9.4, the line resistances are neglected. The parameters
of the transmission lines are given in Table P9.4.
i
I
I
I
I
l
I Figure PS.4
\
t,
f Chap 9. Problems / 321
Line Series Reactance p.u. Shunt Admittance p.u.
1-2 jO.20 jO.24
2-3 jO.lO jO.l6
1-3 jO.2S jOJO
Bus Capacitor at bus 2: y = jOJO p.u.

Bus Inductor at bus 3: y = - jO.60 p.u.
(a) Determine the Ybu, for the three-bus system.
(b) Determine the Ybu, with bus 2 eliminated.
9.5. A voltage source with an emf of 0.9 p.u is connected at bus 1 in the system given in Prob-
lem 9.4. This voltage source has a source reactance of,1.lS p.u. Augment the Ybu, ob-
tained in Problem 9.4( a) with the new source, and convert the voltage source to a current
source. Write the node voltage equations.
9.6. For the Ybus obtained in Problem 9.5, perform the triangular factorization and obtain
the Land U matrices.
9.7. Using the triangular factorization obtained in Problem 9.6, obtain the voltages at the
three buses in the network.
9.8. For the system given in Example 9.5, construct the Zbu, using the building algorithm.
9.9. Modify the Zbu, obtained in Problem 9.8 for the case in which a parallel line is added be-
tween buses 2 and 4. This line has the same parameters as the existing line between
these buses.
9.10. For the system given in Problem 9.2, construct the Zbu, using the building algorithm with
a reactance of jO.lO p.u. connected to ground at nodes 3 and 6.
9.11. Modify the Zbus obtained in Problem 9.10 for the case in which the line between buses
2 and 4 is removed.
9.12. Design a program using MATLAB to read line impedance data and construct the complex
bus impedance matrix corresponding to the system described by the data: Use the build-
ing algorithm described in Section 9.5.
Specifications
System Size: Up to 20 buses, any number of lines.

Bus Numbers: #0 isreference bus, 1-98 system buses; 99 indicates end of data.
Input: From bus to bus (integers)
Line series impedance R + jX, Shunt Y.
Output: Listing of input line data; print Zbu, with bus numbers of the rep-
resentative rows/columns.
Symmetry: Take advantage of the matrix symmetry by using condensed
storage by calculating Zij (or Zji) only once.
322 Network Matrices Chap. 9
Bus Numbering: Use an internal renumbering scheme to allow bus numbers 1-98
in a matrix up to size 20.
Data Order: Assume lines will be in correct order. Stop execution if they are
not. Allow either the "from" bus or the "to" bus to be the ex-
isting bus or the reference bus.
Test Systems: Calculate the Zbus for the system in Example 9.4.

For the Eagle system introduced in Chapters 4 and 5, you have determined the
generator parameters in Chapter 6. For the parameters determined, construct the
Ybus and the Zbus with all the parameters expressed in p.u. on the common system
base of 100 MVA. The Ybus can be constructed by simple inspection. Use the
program developed in Problem 9.12 to construct the Zbus' Write a report provid-
ing both the matrices.
•
Power Flow Analysis
10.0 INTRODUCTION
We consider next the important problem of power flow. In this analysis the trans-
mission system is modeled by a set of buses or nodes interconnected by transmission
links. Generators and loads, connected to various nodes of the system, inject and re-
move power from the transmission system.
The model is appropriate for solving for the steady-state powers and voltages
of the transmission system. The calculation is analogous to the familiar problem of
solving for the steady-state voltages and currents in a circuit and is just as funda-
mental. It is an integral part of most studies in system planning and operation and
is, in fact, the most common of power system computer calculations.
To suggest the variety of possible studies, consider the system with the one-line
diagram shown in Figure 10.1. The systems considered by power engineers would
usually be larger, with as many as thousands of buses and thousands of transmission
links.
In the figure, the SCi are the injected (complex) generator powers and the
SOi are the (complex) load powers. The Vi are the complex (phasor) bus voltages.
Transformers are assumed to have been absorbed into the generator, load, or
transmission-line models and are not shown explicitly. It should be understood that
we are restricting our attention to the transl\1ission system, which transmits the bulk
power from the generators to the bulk power substations. Thus the load powers
shown in Figure 10.1 represent the bulk power loads supplied to large industrial con-
sumers andlor to a "subtransmission" system for further dispersal to distribution sub-
stations and ultimately a network of distribution feeders. While we are considering
only the top layer of a multilayer system (the backbone of the overall system), it
should be noted that the techniques developed in this chapter are applicable to the
different layers of the system. A figure similar to Figure 10.1 might represent a sub-
transmission system with power injections from the transmission substations, and
possibly some of the older (lower-voltage) generators as well. The reason we con-
centrate on the transmission system is its basic importance and the fact that there
are some interesting and vital problems, such as stability, unique to it.
323
324 Power Flow Analysis Chap. 10
Figure 10.1 System one-line

diagram.
~!:~~oL~"~L~I~~_~~~!y_e"~Jhe,PQ)yfcrJhe.Y·l!~.1Q!!l~~!.~9~~~~",
i!!!~~~L9n d~m;J,.!ldt~l!hill~~tt.PJ~llJ~_'LQlta~e,W!~. !~e.q~,~A9Y..!i~i,t.s,L~n,~J~.~_~
~tU!IJ,Q~£()llomi~manneJ. We are concerned here only with the implications of
this objective on the operation and design of the system at the transmission level.
In the analysis we assume that the load powers 5Di are known constants. This
assumption conforms to the driving nature of the customers' demand, wherein we
may take it to be the input, and to the (usually) slowly varying nature of it, wherein
we may take it to be constant. The effect of the __
actual variations
~""H'~V'.""-'-'-·-·'-- __
in 5Di•.\Y,jth time_
"'_"""'''_''''--~-"''''''' ~.""v,~'''''''''-<--'·''·.'u_.___" -''''_''''''''~''~''<;-
can be studied by considering a nuWtJe!.9J Qi~f~I~!)J.<::~~~,t9r,~a£h~~~s§1ll;lle s.t~i!QJ'.:"

stat~s:Qnaltio~s. Frequently, the cases treated are the ones for which some difficul·
tIes in m'eeting system requirements may be expected. What are some of these
difficulties? It may be that the voltage magnitudes are not within acceptqble limits,
or£~.~9E,mprttJiI1es.a):e.. Q~er~~lh:LQYe.~~~ or that the stability l)I1argin for a
transmission link is too small a:~::Jhe l)o",,~angle acro~~_~!!~~~,i§si6!!.lli!-kjsJo.Q~_
.gre.a1), or that a particular generator is overlofiaea.Ofher studies relate to ~
gencie~ such as the emergency shutdown of a generator, or.t»e loss of one or more
transmIssion links due to equipment failure. With a given 10a(1ing, the system may be
functioning normally, but upon a single (or multiple) contingency outage the system
is overloaded in some sense. In system operation it is desirable to operate the sys-
tem in such a way that it is not overloaded in any way nor will it become so in the event
of a likely emergency; in system planning there is a need to consider alternative plans
to assure that these same objectives are met when the addition goes online.
In system operation and planning it is also extremely important to consider the
economy of operation. For example, we wish to consider among all the possible al-
locations of generation assignments what is optimal in the sense of minimum pro-
duction costs (i.e., the fuel cost per hour to generate all the power needed to supply
the loads). We note in passing that the objectives (i.e., economy of operation and se-
cure operation) frequently give conflicting operating requirements, and compromis-
es are usually required.
Sec. 10.1 Power Flow Equations 325
This list of problems, which is far from complete, gives an idea of the range of
problems in which we are interested . .In considering all these problems we need to
\ •••",0'> "',,",' .• ' .' .,'
know the E~I,a!i(lUships between the SDi' SCi ,ana V;. "The rel~t ionships are given by
~quatlons "
c,a,ljed powerJ1bw eqmitlons.
,."'--'''---..
, , ,
These
arederivedin ihenext section.' -, ,-' " " "
10.1 POWER FLOW EQUATIONS
We restrict attention to three-phase balanced system operation, so that per phase

analysis may be used 1 We have already considered a special case of the p;W;ll1ow .
equaiionsinSectlon 4.6. Just as in the two-bus case, it is convenient to work with the
power at each bus injected into the transmission system. Thus, we define the complex
per phase bus power, Si' as follows:
~
Si;;;; SGi - SDi
Si is what is left of SCi after stripping away the local load SDi' We can visualize Si by
splitting a bus. For example, in Figure 10.1 we may split bus 3 as shown in Figure 10.2.
S3 is the net bus power injected into bus 3. Using conservation of complex power, we
also have for the ith bus,
i = 1,2, ... ,n (10.1 )
where we sum 5,k over all the transmission links connected to the ith bus.
We also define the bus current Ii:
n
Ii ;;;; ICi - IDi;;;; 2: Iik
k=l
i = 1,2, ... ,n
Ii is the total phase a current entering the transmission system. For bus 3 in Figure
10.1 we may visualize 13 as shown in Figure 10.3, where all the currents shown are
phase a currents.
In Section 9.1 we developed the relationship between the injected node currents
and the node voltages given by (9.1). Using I = Ybus V, we get for the ith component,
n
Ii;;;; 2: Y;kVk
k=l
·i = 1,2, ... ,n (10.2)

cance of Sa.

cance of 13 ,
We next calculate the ith bus power. Using (10.2) gives us
Si = VJi
= Vi(±likVk)*
k=l
(10.3)
n
= Vil:Y~Vt i = 1,2, ... ,n
k=l
Suppose we let
v" ~ IVleiL!::1 = IVle, i8,
~
Ojk = OJ - Ok
lik ~ Gik + j Bik
Note that we use a polar representation for (complex) voltage but a rectangular rep-
resentation for (complex) admittance. The Gik are called conductances, and the Bik
are called susceptances. Then (10.3) becomes
n
Sj = l: IViIIVklei8"(Gik - j Bik )
k=l
n
(lOA)
= 2: IViIlVkl (cos 0ik + j sin Oik)(Gik - j Bik ) i = 1,2, ,n
k=l
Equations (10.3) and (lOA) are two equivalent forms of the (complex) power Q~_\V)
( ~q~~~on~._~esolving (lOA) into real and imaginary parts, we obtain . - ---
n
P; = 2: 1V;111tkI(Gik cos 0ik + Bjk sin Oik) !
k=l
n (10.5)
Qi = 2: 1V;IIVkl(Gik sin 8ik - Bik cos 0ik) y
k=l
Exercise 1. Show that (lOA) reduces to (4.29) and (4.30) for the case considered
in Section 4.6.
Sec. 10.2 The Power Flow Problem 327
10.2 THE POWER FLOW PROBLEM
The power flow problem may now be stated with some precision. The formulation
is based on operational considerations of the power industry as well as mathemati-
cal considerations. We will discuss some of these considerations and introduce some
commonly used terminology.
Some buses are supplied by generators. We can call these i9!!2e!ator bu~e§: I
Other buses without generators are called~.c!.bu~es'i In Figure 10.1, buses 1,2, and
3 are generator buses and buses 4 and 5 are load buses.
QI'er~_t!2!!~Lc9_Ilsiderati?~s in~i~_ate thatat .. a generatorbu§Jhe active power.
PGj and the voltage magnitudelViI maybe specified (by varying turbine power and
generator field current). At all buses we assume that the SDj are specified. In terms
of bus power, then, we see that at a generator bus P; = PGj - PDj may be specified,
while at a load bus Sj = -SDj is specified. Thus at some buses P; and IViI may be spec-
ified, at others p; and Qj. One important point must be noted. In general, we can-
not specify all the P;'s independently. There is a constraint imposed by the need to
balance active power. With a lossless transmission system, the sum of the P;'s over all
the buses equals zero. Thus one of the P;'s is determined by specification of the rest.
On the other hand, with a lossy system the sum of the P;'s must equal the 1112 R losses
in the transmission system. A problem arises because these losses are not known ac-
curately in advance of the power flow calculation. The resolution of this problem is
simple and effective and takes care of both cases. For a calculation of steady-state
values, this choice is arbitrary; for convenience we specify P; at all buses but one. The
injected power at this bus is left open "to take up the slack" and balance the active
powers. It is conventional, but completely arbitrary, to number the buses so that the
generator assigned this function is connected to bus 1. For this generator we do not
specify p), or equivalently PGl, but rather specify V) = IVdL1:.l. Choosing L1:.l
amounts to no more than picking a time reference. For a calculation of steady-state
values, this choice is arbitrary; for convenience we ordinarily pick ,0) = L1:.l = O.
In summary, there are three types of sources at the differentouses:
'1. A voltage source. Assume at bus 1.

2. P, IVI sources. At the other generator buses.
3. P; Q sources. At the load buses.
We also note the following terminology. Bus 1 is called a slack bus or swing bus
or voltage reference bus. We prefer not to use the terminology voltage reference bus
to avoid confusion with the designation of the neutral as voltage reference (or datum)
node. Buses with P, IVI sources are called P, lVI, or voltage control buses. Buses with
only P, Q sources are called P, Q, or load buses.
Finally, it should be noted that while ordinarily a bus may be dearly identified
as either generator or load bus, in the case of a load bus with capacitors the bus may
be identified as a P, Q bus if the capacitors supply a fixed reactive power, or it may
be a P, IVI bus if the capacitors are utilized to maintain a specified P (= 0) and IVI.
Sometimes Qrather than IVI is specified at a generator bus. In this case we include
it with the load buses. Unless otherwise indicated, we assume voltage control at gen-
erator buses.
We now state two versions of the power flow problem. In both cases we as-
sume that bus 1is the slack (or swing) bus. In Case I we assume that all the remaining
buses are P, Qbuses.
Case I: Given Yj, S2, S3, ... ,Sn,

findS j , V;,v3, ... ,vn'
In Case II we assume both P, IVI and P, Qbuses. We number the buses so that
buses 2,3, ... ,m are P, IVI buses and m + 1, ... , n are P, Qbuses.
Case II: Given Yj, (Pz, IV21), ... ,(Pm' IVml),Sm+l, ... ,Sn,
findS j ,(Q2,L!1), ... ,(Qm,&),vm+l, ... ,vn.
We now discuss the formulation by noting the following points.
1. The preceding formulations concern bus powers (and voltages). However, the
SDi and SGi are involved since Si £ SGi - SDi' Thus at the P, Q buses Si = -SDi'
while at the P, IVI buses, ~ = PGi - PDi •
2. Case I corresponds to the one-generator case (at bus 1). Case II is the more
typical case. ",
3. In both cases we assume that two out of four variables at each bus are given
(complex 11; specifies 111;1 and L.!i, while complex Si specifies Pi and Qi) and are
asked to find the remaining two variables.
4. From (lOA) we can see that the L!:j appear only in the differences 6ij. Thus,
from these equations we can only solve for the differencel However, since L!i
is assumed specified (= 0), all the L!i can then be calculated. <1-
5. Equation (10.3) or (10.4) is implicit in the Vi, and it turns out that we need to
solve implicit (and nonlinear) equations. Only in the case of solving for Sl do
we have an explicit equation.
6. Once the stated problem has been solved, 'we know all the Vi and can then solve
for power flows or currents on individual transmission links. In particular, we
can check if stability margins and line or transformer thermal ratings are satisfied.
7. In the practical case we may pose the problem differently to take into account
some practical limits on the dependent variables. Thus, in Case II we may spec-
m
ify QF :5 Qi :5 QFax , i = 2, 3, ... ,m. Then in order not to overspecify the
problem, it is the practice to relax the specification on a particular lVii, in the
event that a limit on Qi is reached.
Sec. 10.2 The Power Flow Problem 329
8. Suppose that a particular load is specified by its impedance Zm instead of its

complex power SDi' This fits into the general scheme with the following modi-
fication: SetS m = 0, and add YDi = IjZDi to the ith term on the diagonal ofYbus '
9. The reader may wish to check that, for a normal system, the problem formula-
tion is consistent with the use of IT -equivalent circuits to model the transmission
links (i.e., we do 'not need to model the connection-induced phase shifts of
I1-Y transformer banks).
Before considering the next topic, on solution methods, it is appropriate to

ask about existence and uniqueness of the solutions to the problems we posed in
cases I and II.
We can easily pose problems that have no solutions or multiple solutions. For
example, consider the following example in the Case I category. This example is sim-
ilar to parts of Example 4.8 considered earlier.
Example 10.1
In Figure EIO.l( a) we are given Vl and S2 and are asked to find Sl and Vz. We consider
the solution as a function of PDl for POl ;:: O.
ZL = iO.S
SD2 = PD2 + j1.0 Figure E10.1(a)
Solution The capacitor in this case injects a specified power, while the voltage is not
controlled. Thus bus 2 is a P, Q bus. In fact,
S2 = SC2 - S02 = -PD2
The easiest way to proceed is to use the same approach as in Example 4.8. Noting
that S2 = S21, we draw a receiving-end circle [Figure ElO.l(b)]. From the geometry
of the figure we can see that if there is a solution, 1V21must satisfy
41Vzl4 - 4 IVzl2 + P12 =0
which implies that
IVzl2 = W:!: \)1 - pk)
Thus if P02 > 1, there are no real solutions, and since IVzl is necessarily real, there
are no solutions. If Poz = 1, 1V21= 1/'12 = 0.707. If 0 :s PD2 < 1, there are two
real solutions. In the cases where there are solutions, we may determine L!:1 = -812
from the figure and Sl = S12 from (10.4) or (4.29).
Complex plane
-S21 circle
Figure E10.11bl
In conclusion, we emphasize the possibility that there may be no solution or at

least no unique solution to the mathematical problem posed. Nevertheless, we ex·
pect that most problems that arise in engineering practice have solutions, and even
if nonunique, we can identify the practical solution. Usually, the practical solution is
the one with voltages (in p.u.) closest to 1.0. This more desirable solution corre·
sponds to the one achieved in practice in the actual power system.
For example, suppose that in Example 10.1, Pm = 0.5. We find two solutions
for V; (i.e., V; = 0.97 ! -15° and Vz = 0.26 ! -75°). From an operational point of
view, the first solution is satisfactory, whereas the second is not. Actually, the first is
the one to be expected on the actual power system. The reason has to do with the
way a power system is normally operated; the system operating point evolves slow·
Iy and continuously. If we consider the past history by which the present loading was
achieved, we can expect that initially the received power was zero (thus V; = 1 LQ':);
then as the received power was slowly increased from zero to 0.5, Vzvaried 'Slowly and
continuously from the value 1 LQ': to the nearby value of 0.97 ! -15 ,I 0
•
In some cases the power flow equations can be solved analytically. Example 10.1
is an illustration of that. In most cases, however, the solution cannot be found ana·
lytically, and the use of iterative methods implemented by digital~mputer is indi·
cated. We consider next a simple iterative method called the Gauss iterative method
and a variant called the Gauss-Seidel iterative method.
10.3 SOLUTION BY GAUSS ITERATION
Consider Case I of the power flow problem: given VI, Sz, S3' ... ,Sn, find SI, V;, V3,
... ,Vn • We use a form of (1003) repeated here for convenience,
n
51 = VI L yikVZ (1003a)
k=1
n
5i=V;LY~V: i = 2, ... ,n (1003b)
k= I
Sec. 10.3 Solution by Gauss Iteration 331
Note: If we know VI, V2 , ••• ,Vn we can solvefor SI explicitly using (lOJa). Since
we already do know VI, it only remains to find V2 , V], . . . , Vh • These n - 1 un-
knowns may be found from the n - 1 equations of (lO.3b). Thus, the heart of the
problem is the solution of n - 1 implicit equations in the unknown Vz, V], . . . ,
Vn, where VI and S2, S3, ... ,Sn are known. Equivalently, taking complex conju-
gates, we can replace (10.3) by
n
si = vi 2: Y,kVk i = 2,3, ... ,n (10.6)
k=!
We now rearrange (10.6) in a form in which a solution by iteration may be attempt-

ed. It should be noted that there are alternative ways of setting up the problem.
Dividing (10.6) by vt and separating out the Yji term, we can rewrite (10.6) as
i = 2,3, ... ,n (10.7)
or, rearranging,
i = 2,3, ... ,n (10.8)
Thus, we get n - 1 implicit nonlinear algebraic equations in the unknown complex

Vi in the form
V2 = h2(V2, V], ... , Vn)
V3 = h3(V'i, V;, . . . ,vn) (10.9)
Vn = hn(V'i, V;, ... ,vn)
- -
where the hi are given by (10.8) [e.g., h2 is the right-hand side of the first equation
(with i = 2), etc.]. The numbering in (10.9) is awkward, and we therefore renumber.
Define a complex vector x with components Xl = Vz, Xz = V3, . . . ,xN = Vn • Also
renumber the equations in a similar fashion. We then get N g, n - 1 equations in the
n - 1 unknown variables. In vector notation (10.9) is then in the form
x = h(x) (10.10)
We solve (10.10) by iteration. In the simplest case we use the formula
/I = 0,1, ... (10.11)
where the superscript indicates the iteration number. Thus, starting with an initial
value XO[which we pick by guessing the solution of (10.10)], we generate the sequence
If the sequence converges (i.e., ')( ~ x*), then
x* = h(x*)
332 Power Flow Analysi~ Chap. 10
........
~x· Figure 10.4 Steps in the
iteration.
Thus x* is a solution of (10.10). The procedure can be visualized in a two-dimension

real space as shown in Figure 10.4. The solution x* is also called a fixed point of
h('), which is a good tenninology because while other values of xcause h(x) to be dif-
ferent than x (i.e., h applied to x moves it), h applied to x* leaves it fixed.
In practice we stop the iterations when the changes in XV become very small.
Thus defining axv ~ 1"+1 - xv, we stop when
lIaxvli :5 €
where E is a small positive number (typically on the order of 0.0001 p.u.) and where
11·11 indicates a nonn. Specific examples of nonns are
Mxll = max I(ax)jl
f
called the sup norm, and

N
Mxll = [ ~ 1(~x)iI2
JI /2
called the Euclidean norm.

We next consider a scalar version of (10.11). '..I
Gauss iteration, v = 0, 1, 2, . . . :
XIv+l-h(
- V V V)
1 XI,X2, . • . ,X N
V+l-h(V
X2 -
V
2 Xl,X2,'" ,XN
V)
(10.12)
v+1 _
XN -
hN(V V
XI,X2,
V)
. • . ,XN
In carrying out the computation (normally by digital computer) we process the

equations from top to bottom. We now observe that when we solve for xz+1 we al-
ready know Xl +1. Since xl+ I is (presumably) a better estimate than Xl, it seems rea-
sonable to use the updated value. Similarly, when we solve for X3 + 1 we can use the
values of Xl + I and Xz + I. This line of reasoning leads to the modification called the
Gauss-Seidel iteration.
I
I
Gauss-Seidel iteration, lJ = 0, 1, 2, . . . :
XlV+!-h(V
- v •.. ,XN
I XI,X2, V)
V+ I _ h ( Xv+ I v V)
X2 - 2 l ,Xz,··· 'XN
(10.13)
v+1 _ h (v+1 v+l v V)
Xl - 3 XI , X2 , Xl, . . . ,XN
= h N(xv+1 v 1
XV+!
N I , x 2+ , ••. , xv+1
N-I, XV)
N
Note: Gauss-Seidel is actually easier to program than Gauss and it converges faster.
Example 10.2
In Example 10.1 we found an explicit solution for the power flow equations. Now to
illustrate the technique we would like to use Gauss iteration to solve the same prob-
lem. Suppose that PD2 = 0.5. We show this in Figure ElO.2. The problem can be stat-
ed as follows: given VI = 1 L2: and S2 = SG2 - SD2 = -0.5, find SI and V2 , using
Gauss iteration.
Solution We iterate on Vi using (10.8). With n = 2 there is only one equation.
ZL = ;0.5
SDl = 0.5 +j1.0 Figure E10.2
vv+1 1 [S; Y ~]
2 = Y (Vz)* - 21 I
22
We next calculate the elements ofY bus • ZL = jO.5 implies that
Ybus = [~: ~~ =[ - ~~ _~~]

Thus, putting in the values for S2, VI' Ylb and Y21 , we get
vv+l- _. 0.25 10
2 - J (VZ)* + .
Starting with a guess, V~ =1 L2: ,we get convergence in about six steps. Even with a
very poor guess we get convergence in about eight steps. The results are listed in
Table E10.2. The exact solution from Example 10.1 is
V2 = 0.965926 / -15.000000°
Note: As we showed in Example 10.1, there are two solutions to the equation. The
second is V2 = 0.258819 / -75.000000°. If we try to converge to this solution by
Gauss iteration, we fail. Even with an initial choice as close as V~ = 0.25 /-75°, we
reach the larger of the two solutions. In table ElO.2 we show the iterations for two dif-
ferent starting points.
TABLE E1D.2
Iteration
number Vz Vz
0 1~ 0.1~
1 1.030776 /-14.036243 2.692582 /..-68.198591
2 0.970143 /..-14.036249 0.914443 /..-2.161079
3 0.970261 /..-14.931409 1.026705 /..-15.431731
4 0.966235/-14.931416 0.964213 /..-14.089103
5 0.966236 /..-14.995078 0.970048 /..-15.025221
6 0.965948 /..-14.995072 0.965813/..-14.934752
7 0.966221 /..-15.001783
8 0.965918/..-14.995310
We conclude this section by considering Case II of the power flow problem:

given lit, (h IVzI), ... , (Pm, IVml),5m+b . . • , 5n, find 51, (Q2, &), ... ,
(Qm, &), Vm+1, •.• , Vn. There is a simple modification of the procedures de-
veloped to handle Case I that works for Case II, which will now be described. Equa-
tion (10.8) is the basis for the iteration and we show it here in a form suitable for
Gauss iteration in Case II:
v~+! = 1.11; [p; (Vj)*

I
- jQr - ~.y vv]
k=! Ik k
i = 2,3, ... ,n (10.14)
HI
For the load buses (i.e., i = m + 1, ... , n), Pi and Qi are known ~d the iteration
proceeds just as in Case I [i.e., in (10.14) the superscript on Qi and the tilde on Vi +1
are ignored]. For the generator buses (i.e., i = 2, ... , m), Qi is not specified, but
we can do a side calculation to estimate it on the basis of the vth step voltages, already
calculated. Thus using (10.3b) yields
Qi = Im[ Vi k~ y;t(Vk)* ] i = 2,3, ... , m (10.15)
and this is the value we use in (10.14). We then use (10.14) to calculate Vi+1, a pre-
liminary version of Vi +1. Since IViI is specified for the generator buses, we then re-
place lVi+ 11by IVilspec and obtain Vi+ 1 •
We have been describing Gauss iteration. The extension to Gauss-Seidel iter-
ation in Case II is exactly the same as in Case 1. We simply use the most up-to-date
values of Vi at each stage of the iteration.
Example 10.3
We consider a simple example illustrating Gauss iteration for Case II (see Figure
EI0.3). The problem can be stated as follows: given VI = 1 and P1 = -0.75, IVzI = 1,
find 51, Q1, LJ::l, using Gauss iteration.
SG2 = 0.25 + j QG2

v2 = 121
ZL = jO.5
SDI SOl = 1.0 + jO.S Figure E1 0.3

Solution The iteration formula (10.14) with 1';; = - j2, 1';i = j2 gives
. - ]'Q'1 - '2 ]
1 [-075
V'+I = __
2 j2 (V2)* ]
0.75 + jQ2
= 1+ j2(V2)*
where we estimate Q2 using (10.15), that is,
Q2 = 1m (V2[YiIVi + Yb(V~)*])
= 1m (- j2V z + j21Y]11)
= 2(1 - Re V2)
Starting with a guess, V~ = 1 iQ:, we obtain the iterations shown in Table ElO.3. Con-
vergence is obtained after four iterations. The exact solution may easily be found
without iteration in this simple case using (4.34) and (4.35). The result is
TABLE E10.3
Iteration
number Vz QI VZ+ I
0 liQ: 0 1.0680 !.. - 20.5560°
1 i - 20.5560° 0.1273 1.0003 !.. - 21.9229°
2 1 !.. - 21.9229° 0.1446 1.0000 !..- 22.0169°
3 1 !.. - 22.0169° 0.1459 1.0000 !... - 22.0238°
4 1 !.. - 22.0238° 0.1459
To complete the problem, we can solve for 51 using (10.3):
11
336 Power Flow Ana~sis Chap. 10
SI = V1[YfjVt + Yi2 V n
= 1'2 - j2 /22.0238°
= 0.7641 /11.0119° = 0.7500 + 1'0.1459
which conforms to the expected result.
10.4 MORE GENERAL ITERATION SCHEME
If we use Gauss or Gauss-Seidel, sometimes we get convergence, sometimes not. It

is known that convergence (and existence and uniqueness of solutions) is assured if
the map x ~ h(x) is a so-called contraction mapping. In general, the conditions re-
quired are hard to check and in practice we just try the iterative scheme and hope for
convergence. Still, we would like some control over convergence. This is not avail-
able using the basic Gauss or Gauss-Seidel scheme. We need and will now derive a
more general formula. We will also formulate the problem in a slightly different way.
For the general discussion we will use the notation f(x) , reserving h(x) for the equa-
tions defined in (10.11).
Problem. Solve f(x) = O.
Method. Use the iteration formula x'+ 1 = <p(x') with the function <P still to
be determined. Starting with an initial value XO and assuming convergence, we gen-
erate the sequence xO, Xl, x2, ••• ,x*. We assume that <PO has the property
x* = <P(x*) {:} f(x*) = 0 (10.16)
Suppose we now pick <P so that, for any x, it satisfies
A(x)[ x - <p(x) 1= f(x) :.jf (10.17)
where A(x) is a nonsingular matrix. In this case, noting the nonsingularity of A(x) ,
the reader can check that (10.16) is satisfied for x*. This gives us a prescription for
I <P. Solving (10.17) for <P(x), we get
<p(x) = x - A(xflf(x)
Then the iteration formula is
(10.18)
This is the more general iterative scheme we seek. Note that the flexibility resides
in the choice of A. The nature of the scheme is such that the accuracy of the final re-
sult is independent of the choice of A; we continue to iterate until the mismatch be-
I tween f( XV) and 0 is sufficiently small. Of course, we are assuming that the choice of
A is consistent with convergence of the iterative scheme.
I
Sec. 10.4 More General Iteration Scheme 337
As a special case we consider the solution of f(x) = 0 with A(xt 1 = aI, where
a is a real scalar and 1 is the identity matrix. In this case (1O.18)reduces to
XV+ 1 = XV - af(xV) (10.19)

Noting that the solution of (10.10) is equivalent to
f(x) £ x - h(x) = 0
we can substitute in (10.19) and solve (10.10) by the iteration formula
xv +1 = XV - a(x V
- h(xV)) (10.20)
If a = 1, we get (10.11) [i.e., the Gauss (or Gauss-Seidel) scheme we discussed in
Section 10.3]. Choosing a different a, we get so-called accelerated Gauss (or
Gauss-Seidel) where a, the acceleration factor, can be chosen to improve conver-
gence properties. We note that a can be either positive or negative.
Example 10.4
To get a feeling for the effect of a on convergence, consider a general scalar example
unrelated to power flow. Suppose that we want to solve J(x) = 0, where J(x) is plot-
ted in Figure E10.4(a). Of course, once we plot the graph the zeros ofJ(x) can be read
off directly; however, to observe the effect of a on the behavior of the iteration formula,
we proceed as if we did not know the solution. We will specify the iterations by a
graphical construction. Let us solve J(x) = 0by a scalar version of (10.19), namely,
xv+l = XV - af(xV)
or, equivalently,
1 1
_x v+ l = -XV - J(X V)
a a
[(x)
Figure E10.4[a)
On the graph of f(x) we show an arbitrary abscissa x' and the corresponding or-
dinate fix'); this identifies the point b. Also shown are two lines of slope l/a; one
shown dashed, passes through the point b, the other passes through the origin. Note
point a directly above point b. From the figure it may be seen thatthe line segment
ab, available graphically, is (l/a)xv+! =(1/0:)x' f(x V). This line segment is trans-
lated to the left until it touches the x axis at a point that must be X'+l.
The construction justifies the following graphical procedure fOf obtaining the
iterations.
1. Given xv, move vertically to fix').

2. Return to horizontal axis along a line of slope 1/0:.
3. The horizontal-axis intercept of the line is x'+ 1•
Typically, we get the kinds of behavior demonstrated in Figure El O.4(b). In addition,

we can get oscillatory behavior. The sluggish behavior for a «1 can also be in-
ferred from (10.19); in the limit if a = 0, r =xo, for all v! Clearly, we would like to
avoid a choice of 0: that leads to the extreme modes of behavior shown in Figure
EIO.4(b).
O<a«l
"Sluggish" "Unstable"
Figure E10.4[bJ
Exercise 2. Suppose that in Example 10.4,f(x) =x2 - X - 2.

(a) Find a good value of a and a range of values for XO such that the sequence ofit-
erations converges to the zero at x = 2.
(b) Repeat part (a) to converge to the zero at x = -1.
Exercise 3. Suppose that in Example 10.4, f( x) = x - 1. Find a value of a such

that the sequence of iterations
Sec. 10.5 Newton-Raphson Iteration 339
Figure 10.5 Regarding the

choice of accelerating factor.
(a) Is monotonically convergent.

(b) Converges in one step.
(c) Is oscillatory and convergent.
(d) Is oscillatory and divergent.
(e) Is monotonically divergent.
Exercises 2 and 3 should convince the reader of the advantages of making 1/0:
depend on the slope of f(x) in the neighborhood of the zero of interest. What, then,
would be a good general choice of o:? From the vantage point of knowing the graph,
we can see the advantage of picking 1/0: == f'(X V), where f' is the derivative off It-
erations under this scheme are shown (for two different initial conditions) in Figure
10.5. This graph describes the behavior of the following formula for solving f( x) 0:
(10.21)
10.5 NEWTON-RAPHSON ITERATION
The iterative scheme specified in (10.21) is the well-known Newton-Raphson (N-R)

iteration formula in the one-dimensional case. By analogy we can also easily obtain
the n-dimensional Newton-Raphson iteratiori formula. We replace the scalars x and
jtx) by n-vectors x and f(x). It is also reasonable that the scalar derivative operator
f'(x) must be generalized into an n X n matrix operator.
One way to obtain the generalization is to write appropriate Taylor series ex-
pansions for f(x + Ilx) and f(x + Ilx) and to compare corresponding terms. In the
case of the scalar Taylor series, we get
f(x + Ilx) == f(x) + f'(x)llx + h.o.!. (10.22)
where "h.o.t." stands for "higher-order terms." In the case of the vector Taylor series,
instead of one equation we get n scalar equations.
340 Power Flow Analysis' Chap. 10
where the notation a!;(x)/ax jmeans the partial derivative of!; with respect to Xj eval-
uated at x. Using matrix notation, we get
f(x + LlX) = f(x) + J(X)LlX + h.o.t. (10.24)
where
afl(X) aft(x)
- - ... - -
J(x) ~
aXI aXn
.1x ~
[ax,]
,1;2 (10.25)
afn(x) afix)
--.,.-- !:lxn
ax! aXn
J(X) is called the Jacobian matrix off evaluated at x. Comparing (10.24) and (10.22),
it is reasonably clear that J(x) is the generalization of the scalar derivative f'(x). In
this case, by analogy with the scalar case, (10.21), we get the more general N-R iter-
ation formula,
xv+1 = XV - [J(XV)(£(XV) . (10.26)
We can comment on this equation as follows:
1. Usually rather than J (XV) we will use the simpler notati9U JV. Occasionally, to
leave room for the inverse symbol, we will use the notatfon Jv instead.
2. Equation (10.26) fits into our general scheme (10.18) with A(xV) = J(XV).
3. We do not need to use analogy to derive (10.26). We can use the following rea-
soning. Suppose that we want to solve f(x) = O. Try XV. Suppose that f(xV) 0 *
but is small (i.e., XV is pretty close to the exact solution). How should we pick
the next approximation xv+l? One way: Let xv+1 = XV + .1xv with .1xv to be
determined; we expect !:lxv to be small. Then using Taylor series, f(xv+ 1) ;;
f(x V+ LlXV) = f(xV) + JV LlX" + h.o.t. Neglecting the h.o.t. we can pick .1x" so
that f(xv+ 1) = O. We get .1xv= x"+ 1 - XV = -[ JTlf(xV), which is the same as
(10.26). If the h.o.t. are negligible, we get very fast convergence!
4. The h.o.t. are usually negligible as .1x ~ O. At the beginning, to improve the ini-
tial guess xo, a few steps of Gauss-Seidel iteration may be used before the N-R
iteration is started.
Sec. 10.5 Newton-Raphson Iteration 341
5. A disadvantage of N-R is the need to update J every iteration. Sometimes we

can update less often and still get good results.
6. In practice we do not evaluate the inverse matrix. Taking inverses is compu-
tationally expensive and not really needed. Instead, using
(10.27)
we can write (10.26) as

-JV ilx" = f(xV) (10.28)
and solve for ilx" by Gaussian elimination as discussed in Section 9.2. Of course,
once we know ilx" we can find x"+ 1 = x" + ilx" and proceed to the next itera-
tion. We emphasize that (10.28) is just a rearrangement of (10.26) to suggest
the method of solution for the unknown x" +1.
Example 10.5
Given the direct-current (dc) system shown in Figure EIO.5, use the Newton-Raphson
method to find the (dc) bus voltages VI and Vz and find PGI'
Solution The reader should convince himself or herself that the considerations and
techniques developed for ac systems hold as well for dc systems. For simplicity we
are using the same notation, although all the variables are real quantities. Using the
technique in Section 9.1 for forming Ybus by inspection, we have
Ybus = 100 -1
2 -12-1-1]
[-1 -1 2
In what corresponds to (10.3), we write the power flow equations
PI = 200Vj - 100\li Vz - 100VIV]
P2 = -lOOV2VI + 200V~ - 100VIV] (10.29)
p] = -100V] VI - 100V] VI + 200vl
R =0.01
VI = 1.0
PDi = 0.5
POl = 1.0
PDJ =0.5
Figure E10.5
Bus 1 is the slack bus, with VI known and PI unknown. We (temporarily) strip away
the first equation and solve the remaining two for the unknown Vz and V3 •
In using Newton-Raphson the next step is to put the equations in the form
£(x) = O. The simplest way is to subtract the left sides from the right sides, or vice
versa. It does not matter which we do; the solution algorithm will be identical in either
case.
Subtracting left from right and putting in the known values of Pz = -Pm =
-1.0, P3 = - PDl = -0.5, VI = 1.0, we get
(I(X) ! 1.0 - 100Vz + 200v1- 1001t2V3 = °
f2(X) ! 0.5 - 100Vl - 100V3V2 + 200V~ = 0
The first component of x is 112, the second is V3 ; with that understanding we will not
always use the XI , X2 notation.
Next, we find the Jacobian matrix,
J(x) = r;;:a/ ;;:1

2 a/2
= 100 [-1 + 4V2 - V3
-V;
aXI aX2
In the 2 X 2 case it is so easy to find the inverse that we will solve using (10.26); in
higher-dimensional cases we would almost certainly use (10.28).
Starting with a "flat profile" (i.e., V2 = 1, Vl = 1), we get
.fl = 100[ 2 -lJ (JO)-I = J....[2 1J £( 0) = [1.0J

-1 2 300 1 2 x 0.5
Then, using (10.26) yields
I [lJ
1[2 1J[1.0J = [0.991667J
x=1-3001 2 0.5 0.993333
Continuing to the next iteration gives us
:,
JI = 100 [ 1.973333 -0.991667J (
I -I 1 [1.981667 0.991667J
-0.993333 1.981667 J ) = 292.54 0.993333 1.973333
£(Xl) = [0.00843J
0.00323
Note that Xl is really a very good estimate. We want £(x) =0 and already £(Xl) is al-
most zero! Note the great improvement from f(xO) to f(XI) in just one step. Contin-
uing the iteration, we have
r = [0.991667J _ _1_[ 1.981667 0.991667J[0.00843J _ [0.991599]

0.993333 294.54 -0.993333 1.973333 0.00323 - 0.993283
r
Noting that the change between Xl and is less than 0.0005, we stop the iteration. Al-
ternatively, we can compute f(x2). We get
Sec. 10.6 Application to Power Flow Equations 343
f(xl) = [0.000053]
0.000040
which is suitably small.
Thus the objective of finding the x for which f(x) = 0seems very well met. An
interpretation using the power flow equation$ (10.29) is meaningful. Using the values
Vz = 0.991599 and V] = 0.993283 found after two iterations, the right side of the sec-
ond equation and the given Pz on the left side match very well; the mismatch is only
0.000053. The mismatch in the third equation is only 0.000040.
Finally, to complete the problem, we find PI by using the first equation in (10.29).
We find PI = 1.511800. Note that since POl + POl = 1.5, the fIR loss in the transmis-
sion system is 0.011800.
We tum next to a general formulation of the solution to the (ac) power flow
equations using the N-R method.
10.6 APPLICATION TO POWER FLOW EQUATIONS
We will start by considering the use of (10.28) to solve the power flow equations
Case I. For N-R calculations the real form of the power flow equations is used.
These may be derived from (10.4) by taking the real and imaginary parts. We get
n
1'; = 2; IVilIVkl [G'k cos (8; - 8k) + B;k sin (8; - 8k)] i = 1, 2, 3, . . . , n
k~l
n
Qi = 2;IVillVkl [G;k sin(8i - 8k) - B;k cos (0; - Ok)] i = 1,2,3, ... , n
k~l
(10.30)
LI
where 8; = fll:
Just as in the solution by Gauss iteration discussed in Section 10.3, we strip away
the first equations (involving PI and Ql)' In the remaining equations, this being a
Case I power flow problem, the 1'; and Q; on the left sides of the equations are spec-
ified numbers. The right sides are functions of IViI and 8;. We assume that ,lVll and
81 (= 0) are known. It remains to find the n - 1 unknown IViI and n - 1 unknown 8j
in the equations on the right. It is convenient to define the (n - l)-vectors 8, lVI, and
their composite vector x as follows:
(10.31)
With this definition the right sides of (10030) are functions of the unknown x, and we
wish to introduce notation that makes that dependence explicit. Thus define the
functions P;(x) and Q;(x) by
n
1\(x) ~ 2: IVillVkl [Gik cos (Oi - Ok) + Bik sin (Oi - Ok)]
k=1
i = 1,2,3, ... ,n
n
Qlx) ~ 2: IVillVkl [Gik sin (Oi - Ok) - Bik cos (Oi - Ok)]
k=l
i = 1,2,3, ... ,n
(10.32)
The notation is a natural one since for any given x the right sides are the active and
reactive components of the bus power. We can then replace (10.30) with equivalent
but notationally simpler power flow equations; at the same time we will strip away the
first (active and reactive) equations. We get
1\ = 1\(x) i = 2,3, ... ,n
(10.33)
Qi = Q/x) i = 2,3, ... ,n
In these equations the 1\ and Qi are specified constants, while the 1\(x) and Qi(X) are
specified functions of the unknown x. In the course of the iterations we will be pick·
ing a sequence of values x" in an effort to make the right sides match the given left
sides (Le., to drive the mismatches to zero). We now set up the equations in the form
f(x) = O. We subtract the left sides of (10.33) from the right sides to get
1\(x) - 1\ = 0 i = 2,3, ... ,n
(10.34)
Q/x) - Qi = 0 i = 2,3, ... ,n
Equation (10.34) identifies the 2n - 2 components of f(x). Thus fl (x) = P2(x) - P2 ,
fix) = P3(x) - P3, ••• , f2n -z{x) = Qn(x) - Qn. In matrix notation (10.34)
becomes
(10.35)
We next consider J, the Jacobian of f. It is convenient to partition as follows:
J=[JJ JJ J
11
21
12
22
(10.36)
Each partition of the matrix J is (n - 1) X (n - 1). J11 is made up of terms

aPi(X)/aOk· Ju has the terms a1\(x)/aIVkl, J21 the terms aQi(X)/aeb and J22 the terms
aQi(x)/aIVkl. These terms may be evaluated explicitly using (10.32). But first let us
find the form of the N-R iteration. For convenience we repeat (10.28):
J" Ax" = -f(x") (10.28)
Sec, 10,6 Application to Power Flow Equations 345
J has been partitioned: x, and by extension, Llx, have partitioned forms. It remains
to partition f(x) and at the same time we would like to get rid of the minus sign in
(10.28). Noting (10.35), we define so-called mismatch vectors:
P2 - P2(X)]
AP(x) =. : (10.37)
[
Pn - Pn(x)
and can express f(x) as follows:
f( ) = _[LlP(X)] (10.38)
x LlQ(x)
Using (10.31), (10.36), and (10.38) in (10.28), we finally get
[JrJ21 Jrz]
1 [ AnV] [LlP(XV)]
J 22 A IVIV = Ll Q( XV)
(10.39)
as a form in which the power flow equations may be solved by N-R iteration. Two
comments on (10.39).
1. The right sides are defined by (10.37) and represent the mismatch between the
specified values of P and Qand the corresponding values obtained with the
trial value XV. As the iteration proceeds, we expect these mismatched terms to
go to zero.
2. The components of XV are specified in (10.31). To find xv + 1, we solve (10.39) for
Ax vand use xv+ 1= XV + Llxv. At that point we can update the mismatch vec-
tor and the Jacobian matrix and continue iterating.
We next calculate the elements of the Jacobian submatrices using (10.32), Let
us use the following notation: Let J ~~ designate the pq element of the Jacobian sub-
matrix III , etc.,far all four submatrices. We will also adopt the notation 0pq = 0p - eq•
Then we have the following.
For indices p *q
(10040)
For indices p = q
ap (x)
Jll
PP
= -p
ae - = -QP - BppIVPj2
P
aQ (x)
J21 = -p- = P - G IV 12
PP ae p PP P
P
(10.41 )
app(x) Pp
J I2pp -----+G
- alVpl - IVpl
IVI
pp P
22 aQp(x) Qp
Jpp = BIVpl = IVpl - BpplVpl
where Pp and Qp are given by (10.32).

From these equations we can deduce an important property of the Jacobian
matrix. The off-diagonal terms in each submatrix are seen to involve the bridging el-
ements of the f1-equivalent circuit of the transmission links. If there is no (direct) con-
nection between two buses, the corresponding bridging admittance is zero, and we get
a 0 in the Jacobian matrix. In the five-bus system in Figure 10.1, in YbUSl Y13 , Y15 ,
Y25, Y31, Y34 , Y43 , Y51 , and Y52 are all zero. This is 8 out of the 25 total number of Yjk •
For large systems the sparsity of the nonzero entries is usually much more pro-
nounced. (Typically, at least 50% of the entries are zero; sometimes as many as 95%
of the entries are zero.) Thus J typically is a so-called sparse matrix. There are com-
putational techniques available to take advantage of this sparsity in the computer
solution of (10.39). For a large system (on the order of 8000 buses or more) it is es-
sential to do this! See Section 10.10 for a short discussion of solution techniques.
Another saving in the computation occurs if some of the buses are generator
buses or voltage-controlled buses (i.e., in the Case II problem introducesf earlier).
At these buses, as long as the reactive power generated is within the reactive power
limit specified at the bus, we do not solve for the IV;I, because the IV;I are specified,
and the dimensionality of the problem is reduced. To consider what hfppens in more
detail, we go back to the power flow equations (10.30). Suppose for simplicity that
the only voltage control bus is bus 2. Then IViI is known but Q2 is not. Consider the
equation for Q2' Once we know 6 and IV31, 1V41, . . . ,IVnl (we already know IVj I and
IV21), we can solve for Q2 explicitly and check whether it is within the limits specified
at the bus. The situation encountered is just like that encountered when we treated
the slack bus, where PI and Ql could be found explicitly once the remaining equations
were solved (implicitly) for the unknown IVI and 6. The corresponding changes in
the analysis are straightforward. The first row of the IVI vector is stripped away, as
is the nth row of f(x) and the mismatch vector. Correspondingly, the nth column and
row of the Jacobian matrix are removed. More generally, by exactly the same argu-
ments, corresponding to buses 2, 3, ... ,m being voltage control (or P, IVI) buses,
we strip away the first m - 1 rows in lVI, and rows n, n + 1, ... ,n + m - 2 in
f(x) and the mismatch vector. Correspondingly, the following rows and columns of
lare removed: n, n + 1, ... ,n + m - 2. Note, therefore, that the presence of P,

IVI buses reduces the dimensionality of the problem and thereby simplifies matters.
If during an interation of the N-R method, a P, IVI bus violates the reactive power
limit at the bus, and the solution has not been reached, then the solution process
should be changed. The reactive power generated at the bus is held at the limit that
was violated, and the blis is treated as a P, Q bus. The voltage magnitude at the bus
is now reintroduced as a variable, and the Jacobian and the mismatch vector are ap-
propriately augmented to reflect the change in status of the bus. This change is en-
forced until the reactive power violation is overcome. If a solution is reached with
the reactive limit violation, the output of the power flow should indicate this viola-
tion and the inability to maintain the desired voltage magnitude at that bus.
Example 10.6
Find 82, IY]I, 83 , SGb and QG2 for the system shown in Figure EIO.6. In the transmis-
sion system all the shunt elements are capacitors with an admittance Yc = jO.01, while
all the series elements are inductors with an impedance of ZL = jO.l.
Figure E10.6
Solution The Ybus for the system shown in Figure EIO.6 is given by
- j19.98 jlO jlO]

Ybus = jl0 - j19.98 jl0
[
jlO jl0 - j19.98
Bus I is the slack bus. Bus 2 is a P, IVI bils. Bus 3 is a P, Q bus. We will use the
Newton-Raphson method in the solution, noting that IV21is given, and therefore we can
simplify the computation. The unknown (implicit) variables are e2,e3, and 1V3!. Thus,
the Jacobian will be a 3 X 3 matrix.
We first write (10.32) for tbe case at hand, putting in the known values of
lVII, 1V21, el , and Bij • Thus
PAx) = IYzIIVII B21 sin (e 2 - el ) + 1V211V31 B23 sin (e2 - e3) (1O.42a)
= 10.5 sin e2 + 10.5 1V3 sin (e 2 - e3)
1
P3(x) = 1V31IVII Bli sin (e 3 - el) + IVjl1V21 Bn sin (e 3 - e2) (1O.42b)

= 10.0 1V31sin e3 + 10.5 IV31 sin (e3 - 82)
~
,
Because we know IV21, we can eliminate the equation involving Q2(X). We need the
equation involving QJ(x) to solve for I~I:
QJ(x) = -[IVJII,,!I BJI cos (OJ - 01) + IVJIIV;I BJ2 cos (OJ - O2) + IVJI2 BJJ] (10.42c)
= -[10 IVJI cos OJ + 10.5 IVJI cos (OJ - O2) - 19.98IVl]·
We describe the unknown vector and Jacobian matrix in the present case:
x = [::
I~I
1
aP2 aP2 aP2
a02 ao) al~1 (10.43)
a~ aPJ aPJ
J(x) =
a02 aOJ aIVJI
aQJ aQ) aQJ
a02 aOJ aIV)I
We can find the various partial derivatives from (10.40) and (10.41):
aP2
- = IV211"!1 B2l cos (0 2 - 01) + IV21VJIB2J cos (0 2 - 0))
a0 2
= 10.5 cos O2 + 10.5IVJIcos (0 2 - OJ)
aP
- 2 = -IV21IVJIB2) cos (0 2 - OJ)
ao)
= -10.5 IVJI cos (0 2 - 0))
aP2 •
aIV)I = IV21 B21 sm (0 2 - 0))
= 10.5 sin (02 - 0))
ap)
-0 = -10.5 I~I cos (OJ - O2)
a2
aPJ
-0 = 10.0 IV)I cos OJ + 1O.51VJIcos (OJ - O2)
aJ
ap)
aIVJI = 10 sin OJ + 10.5 sin (OJ -02)
aQJ
ae; = -10 IV 11V 1sin (OJ - O = -10.5 IVJI sin (OJ - O
1 2 2) 2)
aQ)
ae; = 10 I~I sin OJ + 10 IV)IIV;I sin (OJ - O 2)
= 10 IV)I sin OJ + 10.5 IV)I sin (OJ - 82)

aQJ
aI~I = -[10 cos OJ + 10.5 cos (eJ - e2) - 39.96 IV)I]
We are ready to start iterating using (10.39). We note that P2 = PG2 = 0.6661,
p) = -POl = -2.8653, and Q) = -QOl = -1.2244; of course, these quantities remain
constant through the entire iterative process. With an initial guess O~ = e~ = 0,
IV)I = 1.0, (this choice of initial values is usually referred to as a flat start), using (10.37)
and (10.42) we get
tlP2l0 [P2] [P2(XO) [0.6661]

/lP) = p) - p)(XO) = -2.8653 -
[ dQ)
1 [ 0
0
1= [0.6661]
-2.8653
Q) Q)(xo) -1.2244 -0.52 -0.7044
N, expected for such a crude guess, the mismatch is big. Next, we calculate JO; using (10.43)
Ll
21 -10.5
JO = -10.5 20.5 (10.44)
[
o 0
Note that J~2 and J~l are both zero.
We next solve (10.39) by finding the inverse of JO, taking advantage of the block
diagonal structure.
0.0640 0.0328
J~ I] = [ 0.0328 0.0656 (10.45)
22 0 0
tlxo =[ ~:: ]0 = [=~:~~~~ ::~- = [=~:~~~~:]

tllV)1 -0.0362 -0.0362
We now find Xl by using (10.27):
Xl = XO + tlxo = [~] + [=~:~~~~:] [=~:~~~~:]

=
1 -0.0362 0.9638
We note that the exact solution is [- ~~

], so this is pretty good progress for one
. . 0.95
IteratIOn!
We proceed to the next iteration using the new values 01 = -2.9395°,
el = -9.51111°, and lVi = 0.9638. Substituting in (10.42a), we get P2(XI ) = 0.6198,
and thus tlP~ = 0.6661 - 0.6198 = 0.0463. Similarly, using (10.42b) and (10.42c),
we get an updated mismatch vector:
tlP2]1 [0.0463]
/lP) = -0.1145 (10.46)
[ dQ) -0.2251
Note: In one iteration the mismatch vector has been reduced by a factor of about 10.
Calculating J I , we find that
20.5396 -10.0534 1.2017]

t = -10.0534 19.5589 -2.8541 (10.47)
[
1.1582 - 2.7508 +18.2199
The matrix should be compared with JO in (10.44). It has riot changed much. The off-
diagonal matrices are no longer zero, but their elements are small compared to the
terms in the matrix diagonal. The matrix diagonal itself has not changed much. The
same observation is true about the inverses. The updated inverse is
0.0651 0.0336 0.0010]
J11 = 0.0336 0.0696 0.0087 (10.48)
[
0.0009 0.0084 0.0561
Comparing (10.48) with (10.45), we do not see much change. Using (10039) and (10.27),
we find that
82]2 [-3.0023']
x2 = 83 = -9.9924°
[
IVjI 0.9502
This is very close to the correct answer. The largest error is only about 0.08%. Of
course in the usual problem we do not know the answer and would continue into the
next iteration. We would find
[~~]2 [_~:~~~~]
llQ3
=
-0.0031
The mismatch has been reduced from (10.46) by at least a factor of 200 and is small
enough. On that basis we could stop here. Or we could calculate x3 and show con-
vergence by noting how very close x2 and x3 are. So we stop withfhe values
82 = -3.0023°,83 = -9.9924', and IV31 = 0.9502. It remains to calculat~ 5Gl and QG2
using the calculated values of 82,8 3 , and 1V3!. From (10030), for the case at hand, we get
PG1 = PI = IV111VzI Bl2 sin (81 - 82) + IV111V31B13 sin (81 - 83)
= 10.5 sin 3.0023° + 9.502 sin 9.9924' = 2.1987 :J
QG1 = Q1= -[1V11IVzI Bl2 cos (8j - 82) + 1V111Vjl B13 cos (8 1 - 83) + IV/ Bll ]
= -[10.5 cos 3.0023° + 9.502 cos 9.9924° - 19.98]
= 0.1365
QG2 = Q2 = -[1V21IVjl B2l cos (82- 8j) + 1V211V31B23 cos (82- 83) + Ivl Bd
= -[10.5 cos (-3.0023') + 9.977 cos (6.9901 ') - 22.028]
= -1.6395
This completes the example.
Finally, we would like to point out some interesting and important relationships
between the elements of the Jacobian submatrices. From (10.40) we see (for the case
p =1= q) that J~~ and J~~ are similar; the only difference is the absence of the factor IVql
in J~~. Comparing J~~ and J~~, the main difference is the absence of the factor IVql
in J~q; this time there is also a sign difference. Because of the partial derivatives with
respect to the voltage magnitude variables, all the elements of the matrices J 12 and
Jzz are missing the factors IVql.
Suppose we restore these factors. For example, in the Jacobian matrix J~~ we
. replace aPz/alY;1 by IVNaPz/aIV11. We do the same for all similar terms. Since these
terms on the left-hand side of (10.39) will be multiplied by the appropriatelV;I's, the
corresponding terms in the update vectors should be divided by the appropriate
1V;I's in order to maintain the relationship specified by (10.39). This manipulation
for a general term in the submatrix JZ2 would appear as follows:
aQ ~IVI aQ
IVI-' X J -' X ~IVjl
J alVjl ~L alVjI '--r-'
'---v----' .~ '-r-'
Modified Jacobian Modified update Original Jacobian Original update

element term element term
To distinguish between the orginal Jacobian matrix and the modified one, we intro-
duce new notation. Thus, we replace (10.39) by the modified Jacobian matrix, which
we designate by K, and appropriately change the update vector corresponding to the
voltage magnitudes:
~e' l [~P(x')]
[H' N'] [~~:' (10.49)
K = M' L' J =. i1Q(x')
Here H = J 11 , M = JZ1 , N = J 12 [V], L = Jzz [V], and we define

MY;I
IVZI 0 ...
IVzl
~
Il
: IV31 : ~IVIII
[V1 .. .. .. -= (10.50)
[ . . . IVI
i1IVnl
o '"
Vn
The effect of postmultiplying J 1Z (or Jzz) by [V] is to multiply the first column of J 1Z
by IVzl, the second column of J 1Z by 1V31, and so forth. This is exactly what we need
to restore the missing IVql.
. i1IVI'
Fmally, we use (10.49) iteratively to solve for M" and 1'Vf' From these values
we determine
IVI,+l = i1IVI')
IVI" ( 1 + --'
, , IV;I'
and with these new values of the variables, we update the (modified) Jacobian ma-
trix and mismatch vector and repeat the iterations until the tolerance is met.
The main advantage of using the modified Jacobian (10.49) rather than the
original Jacobian (10.39) is that we can use the various matrix symmetries to reduce
the data storage burden in carrying out the N-R iteration. This is the way the
Jacobian is implemented in most commercial power flow packages.
10.7 DECOUPLED POWER FLOW
In Example 10.6 we notice a potentially very useful property of the Jacobian matrix;
The off-diagonal submatrices J12 and J21 were quite small. In the general case, in cal-
culations for power systems under the usual operating conditions, we find a similar
situation. The reason may be seen by considering some typical terms. For example,
referring to (10.40), consider a typical term in J12 :
Since transmission links are mostly reactive, the conductance G23 is quite small. Since
under normal operating conditions the angle e2 e3 is reasonably small (typically
less than about 10°), the term involving B23 is also quite small. The same reasoning
applies to the typical term in J21 ; for example, the term
aQ2 .
--;- = -IV2I1V31[G23 cos (e2 - e3) + Bz3 sm (62 - e3)1
aU3
However, if we look at the typical nonzero terms in the diagonal submatrices J11 and
J22 , they are not small. The implication is that active power flow depends mostly on
the ej (and not very much on the IViI), while reactive power flow depends,Illostly on
the lViI (and not very much on the eil. Stated differently, there is fairly good decou-
piing between the equations for active power and reactive power.
This decoupling feature is used in simplifying the N-:Q; algorithm for solv-
ing the power flow equations. In the general iteration formula (10.39), instead
of picking
I A(x") = [J~l J~2J we will pick

, J21 J22
which, in the light of the previous discussion, should work nearly as well. We re-
mind the reader that changing A(x) changes the rate of convergence, but provided
that numerical stability is maintained, the final answer, which is associated with zero
mismatch, is unaffected. With our new choice we can replace (10.39) with two sets
of equations:
J11 M" llP(x") (lO.Sla)

J22 !;". IVI" = !;".Q(X V
) (10.51b)
Sec. 10.7 Decou pled Power Flow 353
We can simplify matters even further by making approximations for the terms
in J11 and J22 . For example, consider the term aP2/ae2 in (10.41). Assuming small
G2k and e2- ek> and assuming all the (per unit) bus voltage magnitudes approxi.
mately equal, we have
(10.52)
In obtaining this result we make use of the following observations:
1. With all the IVkl approximately equal, 2:~= 1 11121 IVk IB2k "" 111212 2:~ = I B2k •
2. B22 sum of susceptances of all the elements of the n·equivalent circuits inci·
dent to bus 2.
*'
3. For k 2, B2k "" -susceptance of the bridging element from bus 2 to bus k.
4. Because of observations 2 and 3, in 2:~ = 1 Blk , all the bridging elements cancel,
leaving only the sum of (small) shunt element susceptances (capacitive). Thus
we have 12:~=1 B2kl « IB22I.
Observations 1 and 4 justify the final approximation in (10.52). To verify this in a nu·
merical example the reader should check the terms in Ybus in Example 10.6.
Note: If all the (per unit) IV;I are equal, we have a so·called flat profile; under normal
operating conditions this is a reasonable approximation.
In similar fashion, with the same assumptions, we find from (10.41),
n
01\-'21
2: IV lB2k -
k IV21B22 '" -IV21B22 (10.53)
k=l
Equations (10.52) and (10.53) give the pattern for the diagonal terms. For the off·
diagonal terms, from (10.40), we obtain the following approximations:
aP2
ae = -IV211V31B23
3
(10.54)
aQ2 .
iilV31 '" -IV2IB23
from which we may deduce the general term.

To complete this analysis it is cQnvenient to reintroduce vector notation. Let
(10.55)
We can check that B may be obtained from Ybus by stripping away the first row and
column and then taking the imaginary part.
354 Power Flow Analysis Chap, 10
Noting the general terms of Jl1 and J22 as suggested by (10.52) to (10.54), the
reader can check that
Jl1 == -[V]B[V] (10.56a)

J22 ::: -[V]B (10.56b)
where [V) is the diagonal matrix defined in (10.50) while lVI, defined in (10.31), is a
column vector.
We can now replace (10.51a) and (10.51b) by
-[V']B[V"] MY = ilP(x') (10.57a)

-[V"]MIW ::: ilQ(x') (10.57b)
One final approximation: Consistent with the assumption of an approximately

flat voltage profile, we replace the second [V'J in (10.57a) by the identity matrix.
Then premultiplying each equation by [VTl, we get
- B ilOY ::: ~P(x") (10.5Sa)

- B illW ::: ilQ(x") (10.5Sb)
where ~p :; [Vr1ilP and ~Q = [VrlilQ, respectively. Since [V) is diagonal, the

right-hand sides of (10.58a) and (10.58b) are simply scaled versions of ilP and ilQ,
respectively.
An important observation is that B is a constant matrix, independent of
iteration count. The advantage is that if matrix inversion of B is used, only one
inversion is necessary. If LU decomposition of B is used, it also need be done
~~ ,
These equations or slight modifications of them are called fast-decoupled

power flow equations. In one study, convergence was reached in only four to
seven iterations, each iteration taking about as much time a~.5 Gauss-Seidel
iterations but requiring only about 0.2 of the time required for a Newton-Raphson
iteration.
Finally, when voltage conttol buses are present, we modify (lO.5Sb) by deleting
the corresponding terms from ilQ, illVI, al!,d B. In particular, with our numbering sys-
tem we delete the first m - 1 rows of ilQ and illVI, and the first m - 1 rows and
columns of B. We do not change anything in (10.58a).
Example 10.7
Consider the circuit shown in Figure ElO.7, Using the data in Example 10.6, use fast-
decoupled power flow to find 82, 83, and IV3!. For convenience the data of the prob-
lem are summarized below Figure ElO.?:
Sec. 10.7 Decoupled Power Flow 355
Figure E10.7
PG2 0.6661
IV11 1.05
Bij = 10, i *' j
Bu = -19.98
Pz = 0.6661
PJ = -2.8653
QJ == -1.2244
Solution We first find B and then use (10.58).
B [B22 B23 ] [-19.98 10 ]

B32 B33 10 -19.98
Thus (10.58a) becomes
P2
_[-19.98 10 ] [M2] , tJ.
1.05 1,
10 -19.98 M J = M)
[
IV31
and (10.58b), with the Iiii I equation stripped away, becomes
-( ':"19.98) tJ.lVl
. = AQ)'
(wi
In this simple case we can use matrix inversion to get the explicit iteration formulas,
AP
A0 2]
[ Ae)
, , [0,0668 0.0334] [ 1.05 2]' (10.59a)
0,0334 0.0668 AP)
IV)I
(10.59b)
We still need to use (10.37) and (10.42) to calculate the mismatch terms. The results
of the iterations are tabulated in Table EI0.? starting with initial values of 82 = 63 = 0
and IV31 = 1.0. The tabulated values of 82 and 63are in degrees. With such small mis-
matches we stop after three iterations. As compared with the results of Example 10.6,
it has taken three iterations to reduce the mismatches to the levels reached in only
two iterations using Newton-Raphson. Still, the simplification is very great and helps
explain the popularity of the fast-decoupled power flow methods.
TABLE E10.7
Iteration
number 82 83 IVJI !J.P2 !J.P3 !J.Q3
0 0 0 1 0.6344 -2.8653 -0.7044
1 -3.0539' -9.7517' 0.9647 0.0420 -0.0517 -0.2601
2 -2.9908' -9.8721' 0.9517 0.0159 -0.0382 -0.0252
3 - 3.0023' -9.9867' 0.9504 0.0025 -0.0039 -0.0067
10.8 CONTROL IMPLICATIONS
The Jacobian matrix comes up in another connection related to system control. Con-
sider (10.39). What we have at each stage of the iteration process is a relationship be-
tween desired increments in P(x) and Q(x) and the increments in x to bring it about.
We have been using this relationship to solve the power flow equations, bui it is also
directly applicable to the problem of control. .
Suppose that the system is in a particular operating state or condition XO with
corresponding bus powers P(XO) and Q(XO). Suppose we now wish to make a small
change in the bus powers by exercising control at the generatdl'buses (Le., by chang-
ing some of the components of x). We then need to consider how changes in x affect
changes in P(x) and Q(x);for small increments the relationship is linear and is given
by (10.39), where the Jacobian matrix is evaluated at the operating state xO. In using
(10.39) we can simply ignore the notation v.
Just as discussed in Section 10.7, we can take advantage of certain proper-
ties of J(x). In particular, we note that under the usual operating conditions J12
and J21 are small terms. Thus there is reasonably good decoupling between the
control of active and reactive power; to control P we vary 6 and to control Q we
vary IVI. As an approximation we can substitute (10.51) or (10.58) for (10.39), which
makes the decoupling explicit. Again, in using (10.51) or (10.58) we can ignore the
notation v.
In part (d) of the following example we have a control application of (10.58).
Sec. 10.8 Control Implications 357
Example 10.8
Consider the power system in Figure ElO.8. Assume that the series line impedances
are ZL = 'L + j XL = 0.0099 + jO.099 = 0.0995 /84.2894°. Neglect the capacitive
(shunt) impedances.
(a) Verify that a solution of the power flow equations is given by
IVI =[IV4IJ = [1.0J

IVsl 1.0
SDl = 0.2 +jO.1
SD4 = 1.7137 + jO.5983 SDl = I.73SS +jO.S496
Figure E10.8.
(b) Calculate the slack bus power 51 = SGI'
(c) Calculate the total line losses.
(d) Show that the (complex) load demand may be met with lower line losses by
shifting generation to generator 3.
Solution (a) We simply plug the solution into the appropriate power flow equations
and verify that they are satisfied. The appropriate equations are the ones that would
be solved for the unknown (implicit) variables (i.e., the equations with Pz,P3 , P4 , Ps,
Q4, and Qs on the left side). In fact, these are the only equations that can be checked
since PI, QI, Q2, and Q3 are unknown.
We can use either (10JO) or (10.6) as convenient. In either case we need the el-
ements ofYbus (i.e., Ytk = Gik + jBik ). By the method described in Chapter 9 and not-
ing that YL = Z;:I = 10.503 /-84.2894° = 1 - j10, we have
2- j20 -1 + jlO a -1+jl0
_ -1+jlO 3 - j30 -1+jlO -1+jl0
Ybu, - a -1 + jlO 2 - j20 0 (10.60)
[ -1 + jl0 -1 + jlO a 3 - j30
o o -1+ j10 -1+ j10
Using (10.6) for bus 4, for example, we get for the bus power into the network
5
st = vt 2: Y4k Vk
k=1
= 3 - j30 + 1~(-1 + jl0)(I,LQ: + 1/-5° + 1/-15°

= -1.7137 - j 0.4017
Thus
S4 = -1.7137 + jOA017
This checks with the value derived from power terminal constraints:
S4 = SG4 - S04 = j1.0 - (1.7137 + j0.5983)
= -1.7137 + JOA017
Similarly, we verify the complex power balances at bus 5 and the active power bal-
ances at buses 2 and 3.
(b) With all the complex voltages known, we can calculate the slack bus power
using (10.3). We get
4
Sj = VI 2: YikVt
k=1
= 2 + j20 + lLOO( -1 - jlO)(lLSO + lL100)

= 2.6270 - jO.0709
(c) In a lossless transmission system, .L~=1 p; = O. In ourlossy transmission sys-

tem, consideration of conservation of power gives the following formula for the line
losses:
5
PL = 2: p; = 2.6270 + 0.8830 + 0.0076 - 1.7137 - 1.7355
i=l
= 0.0684
This amounts to about 1.8% of the generated power and represents power lost as heat
in the transmission system. We note that we would get exactly the same result if we
summed the individual power losses in the six transmission links. 'J
(d) Since the active power demand at bus 5 is so large, it seems reasonable that
line losses can be reduced by increasing generation at bus 3, which is the closest gen-
erator bus. Let us consider the effect of raising PG3 a small amount, say 0.1, to see if
we can reduce the line losses. If the small increment works, we can try a larger incre-
ment later. Since the increment is relatively small, we can use linearization techniques
to estimate the new operating state. With small (Jib small Gik (compared to the Bik ),
and with a flat voltage (magnitude) profile, the use of (10.58) is justified. Using (10.60),
we strip away the first row and column, and then, taking imaginary parts, we find B di-
rectly and substitute in (1O.58a). We get
[ -~~ -~~
10
o
0
10
(10.61)
Sec. 10.8 Control Implications 359
For the voltage variables we strip away the first two rows and columns of B because
the voltages at buses 2 and 3 are fixed. Substituting in (10.58b), we get
-[-~~ -~~J[~:~::] = [~~:J = m (10.62)
The right side is zero because we are not making any change in the reactive power in-
jections at buses 4 and 5. Equation (10.62) predicts that 1Y41 and IVsl remain unchanged
at their original value l.
Solving (10.61), we get
2
6. = I::.8J] = [0.00545]
1::.8 0.01182 d = [0.312]
0.677 de
8 6.84 0.00455 ra 0.261 g
[
Ll8s 0.00818 0.469
and thus the new bus angles are
-4.688]
-9.323
8 = 8° + 6.8 = deg
[ -9.739
-14.531
We note that the power angle liJ - lis has increased, which shows that more power is
being supplied to bus 5 from generator 3.
To find the new line losses corresponding to these angles, we can recalculate all
the bus powers and take their sum. It is simpler to add the individual line losses directly.
From (4.29) and (4.30) we have for the losses in the link between buses 1 and 2,
Plosses
_Re(512 + 5 _ 'L
- 21 ) - - 2
2
[IV!I + IV21
2
- 2IVIIIVzIcos 81z l
IZLI
= 2(1 - cos 812) = 2(1 - cos 4.6888°) = 0.0067
In this way, adding up the losses for all six lines, we get the total losses
PL = 2(6 - cos 4.688° - cos 4.635° - cos 9.739° - cos 5.051 ° - cos 4.792°
- cos 5.208°)
= 0.0651
The line losses have decreased slightly from the original value of 0.0684. A further in-
crement in PGJ is indicated if reduction of transmission losses is desired.
Ordinarily, minimizing transmission-line losses is not an objective in itself, but

is a consideration in the larger problem of reducing the cost of serving the load de-
mand. Clearly, the cost of producing the power also needs to be considered. If the
cost of producing addi tional power at generator 3 is excessive, it may be cheaper to
produce it elsewhere even though the transmission losses are thereby increased.
These questions will be addressed in Chapter 11.
PD4 = 1.7137 PDS = 1.7355
Figure 10.6
Example 10.8 illustrates a further simplification of (10.58) used in a control ap-

plication. In the example, since the QDi at the load buses (Buses 4 and 5) are constant,
we find from (10.62) that IV41and IV51 also remain constant. Since IY;I, lVii, and IY;I (at
generator buses) are also constant, we have all bus voltage magnitudes constant.
Thus, we do not have to consider (10.62) at all and can limit our consideration to the
active power equations in (10.61).
More generally, the same thing happens in the control applications of (10.58) if
the QDi at the load buses are not changed. In this case we can use (10.58a) (with the
IV;I constant at their original values) to investigate the effect of (small) changes in ac-
tive power injections. On the other hand, if the active power injections are not
changed, we can use (10.58b) to investigate the effect of (small) changes in the QDi
at the load buses. Thus, in these cases we obtain complete decoupling between the
equations involving active and reactive power.
With complete decoupling we can also greatly simplify the system mpdel. Con- .i'
sider the five-bus system in Figure EIO.S. We find, by an exact (complexypower flow
analysis, that 1lt41 = Irsl = 1.0. Thereafter, in determining the effect of (small) changes
in active power injections, all the bus voltage magnitudes r~main (approximately)
constant. In determining the effect of the changes in active p~er injections, we can
therefore use Figure 10.6, in which all the reactive power injections have been left out.
Taking a model such as in Figure 10.6 as a starting point rather than Figure
E10.S is a significant simplification that we will use frequently henceforth. Finally,
we note the use of this (active power) model, as an approximation, even in cases in
which (almost) complete decoupling would not be expected.
10.9 REGULATING TRANSFORMERS IN POWER

FLOW ANALYSIS
In Section 5.9 we saw the importance of regulating transformers in controlling the flow
of real and reactive power. Because they are so important, we consider how we can
include them in power flow calculations. In Examples 10.9 and 10.10 we will show
Sec. 10.9 Regulating Transformers in Power Flow Analysis 381
how to derive the admittance matrix respresentations for the two cases: voltage mag-
nitude control and phase angle control. We then can incorporate these representa-
tions in the Ybus of the larger system.
We proceed with the formulation of the power flow equations as shown in Sec-
tion 10.6. In order to control the reactive power flow in a particular transmission
line, a regulating transformer can be provided at one end of the line (as shown in
Section 5.9) to increase or decrease the reactive power flow. The desired voltage at
the load can be obtained by automatically changing the tap setting of the transformer
in the power flow calculations. In the process, the tap setting n = 1/a appears ex-
plicitly in Ybus and becomes a variable that needs to be determined in the power flow
solution. Two approaches are commonly used to incorporate the tap setting in the
power flow solution:
1. The tap setting n is treated as a parameter with a specified value, and the con-
trolled bus is treated as a P, Qbus, where the voltage magnitude and angle are
to be determined.
2. The voltage magnitude at the controlled bus is specified. In this case, the tap
setting n replaces the voltage magnitude as the variable to be determined along
with the voltage angle at the voltage controlled bus. The Jacobian matrix also
changes accordingly.
The tap setting n can also be treated as an independent control variable. The de-
rivation of the Jacobian matrix and the mismatch equation for each of these cases is
left as an exercise for the reader. A similar discussion holds in the case of the calcu-
lation of regulator phase angle for the control of reactive power.
Example 10.9
Solve Example 5.17 using an admittance matrix model for each of the two parallel
transformers.
Solution The admittance of the transformer Ta is Yl = II jO.2 = - j5.0, and that of
transformer Tb is Y2 = 1/ JOA = - j2.5.
The currents in transformer Ta shown in Figure ElO.9 are an appropriately re-
drawn version of Figure E5.17 to show the injected currents for the admittance matrix
formulation
[~r~ [!~l ~l] [~J ~ [~~~~O !~~~oJ [~J

=
The currents in transformer Tb with n = 1.05 may be found as follows:

f\D) = Y2(V1 - Vzln)
__ ~ lib) _ VI. Vz)
f ib)
2-
(
l-Yz--i'-
n n n2
Ii') YI = -j5.0 12(')

.~
h lib) Y2=-j2.5
."""" .. 1 (b)
2 1.05~
h
+
"9 I :n= 1.05

V2=1&
-
Figure E10.9 Equivalent circuit for Example 10.9.

Thus
Note: Alternatively we could have derived the above result from (9.2b) noting that
n = 1/a and taking into account the required impedance transformation.
The node current contributions through each transformer can now be added to
obtain the total node currents.
[12IIJ = [I\a)I~) ++ I~)

I\b)] [- j7.5
= j7.381
j7.381
- j7.2676
J [V;l
VJ
From the statement of the problem we know that 12 = -LOS/-45° and Vi = 1LQ:;
thus we can solve for V; using
-1.05/-45° = j7.381VI - j7.2676
which gives
j7.2676 -1.0S/-4So 7.2676 + j1.0S/-45°
v:1 -- j7.381
----::-::-::-:--'==
- 7.381 :,
= 0.9846 + 0.1006 + j0.1006 = 1.0852 + j0.1006
Finally, we can solve for Ila) and I~):
I~) = jS.O(VI - Vi)
= jS.0(0.08S2 + j0.1oo6) = - 0.5030 + j0.4260
I~) = j2.381 V; - j2.2676Vi
= - 0.2395 + j0.3163
The complex power output of each transformer is
Sr. = - ViI~a)' = 0.S030 + j0.4260
Sr, = - V2I~)' = 0.2395 + j0.3163
which is the same result as in Example 5.17 modulus roundoff errors.
Sec, 10.9 Regulating Transformers in Power Flow Analysis 363
Example 10.10
Solve the phase shifter problem ofExample 5.18 using the admittance matrix method.
Solution In Example 10.9 we have already developed the admittance matrix equa-
tions for transformer T" and this remains unchanged.
The admittance matrix for the transformer Tb , which is now a phase-shifting
transformer, is considered next. We derive this for a phase shift of 8. Later we will eval-
uatefor 8 = 30 •
I\b) = Y1(V1 - V1e - i 8)
8
I~) = - I~) l = - Y1(V1 - Vie - i )e i8
= Y1(-Vl e + V2)
i9
Thus
Introducing the given values Y2 = - j2.5 and 8 = 3',
I\b)] = [ - j2.5 2.5!J!..]

[I~)
[VI]
2.5L2r - j2.5 V2
The preceding equation can be added to the admittance matrix equation for trans-
former T, obtained in Example 10.9 to obtain
Ill [1\') + I~)] [ - j7.5 ' (0.130839 + j7,496S7)] [VI]

[IJ = I~') + I~) = (-0.130839 + j7,49657) - J7.5 1.0
From the second equation we obtain
11 = 1.05/135 = (-0.130839 + j7,49657)VI -
0
j7.5
Since/1 = -1.05/-45 0 is given, we can solve for VI'

1.05/135 + j7.5
0
0
VI = (-0.130839 + j7,49657) = 1.10378/4.147

We can now determine
I~') = jS.O(Vj - V2) = j5.0(0.10089
+ jO.079826) = -0.39913 + j0.50445
I~) = 2.5L2r X 1.10378(4.147 j2.5 = -0.34333 + jO.238011
0
-
The complex power output of each transformer is then given by
Sr, = - V2I~')' = 0.39913 + jO.50445

Sr, = - V1I~)' = 0.34333 + jO.238011
which is the same result as in Example 5.18 modulus roundoff errors.

F
,',d
10.10 POWER FLOW SOLUTIONS FOR LARGE

POWER SYSTEMS
The Newton-Raphson technique described in Section 10.5 is the method of choice

in most commercial power flow packages. The evaluation of (10.39) requires the so-
lution of a linear system of equations at each iteration. These equations are of the
general form Ax = b, where the square matrix A is the Jacobian, and the vector b
contains the mismatches. The structure of the Jacobian is generally similar to the
network itself (i.e., it has nonzero elements only in those locations where physical
network elements exist). In a typical power system, each node is connected on av-
erage to two other nodes. As a result the Jacobian on average has only about three
nonzero elements per row. This property of the Jacobian matrix is referred to as
sparsity. A matrix is defined to be sparse if most of its elements are zero. A detailed
description of the topic of sparsity and its application to power system problems is pro-
vided in Alvarado, Tinney, and Enns. In this section we will provide some of the im-
portant aspects of sparsity and its application to the Newton-Raphson power flow
solution.
Two issues play an important role in manipulating matrices on a computer: stor-
age requirements and computational requirements. We will address the key com-
ponents of both of these requirements.
Storage Requirements. Traditionally matrices are stored as two-dimensional

arrays. However, this results in large memory requirements when dealing with a
power system with thousands of buses. We would in fact be storing a matrix with
a large number of zeroes. An alternative to two-dimensional arrays i~ to store
~1 sparse matrices as linked lists of elements, one list per row. A linked list structures
l.e, the data in such fashion that in addition to the desired data (Jacobian entry), there
is information about the location (row number, column number) of the element
"1
i and about the next element in the list. This notion of the next element is particu-
1
larly important because it provides a guide to the computatiift! so that it may iden-
tify the next element to be manipulated. The simplest and most important list is the
singly linked list. In this data structure, each element in the matrix is stored as a
record containing three items: the value of the element, the index of the element (el-
ement identifier), and a pointer to the next element in the list. One such list is con-
structed for each row (or column) of the matrix. A special pointer is the null
pointer, which is a pointer that indicates the end of a list. An illustrative example
of the linked list is provided for a 20-node power system in Alvarado, Tinney, and
Enns (Section II.B). A sample linked list is presented in the following equation.
The purpose of the sample is to illustrate the method. In this particular case there
is no saving in storage requirements!
Sec. 10.10 Power Flow Solutions for Large Power Systems 365
Consider the matrix A to be stored using a linked list:
A= [~ ~ ~ ;1
The rows of this matrix are stored in a linked list as follows:
-
Aij CI PNX PRN
-
1 1 1 1
-
1 3 0 3
-
2 2 0 4
-
3 4 0 5
'---
5 4 0
The first entry in the table is interpreted as the element of the matrix with an entry
of 1 in column 1. The pointer to the next element PNX indicates that the next ele-
ment is one line down in the list. Moving one line down to the second line, an entry
of 1 is found and it is in column 3 (since the column index CI = 3). Since PNX = 0,
a null pointer, there are no other elements in the rOW. The other elements of the
linked list can be similarly interpreted. In some computations it is important to
know where the row starts in the list. This is done by using another pointer PRN
that points to where a row starts in the list. Row 1 starts in line 1 (of the list), row 2
in line 3, row 3 in line 4, and row 4 in line 5. As a result, PRN contains 1,3,4,5. To
insert an entry using this sparsity storage algorithm, a new line is added to the linked
list. The linked list is appropriately modified to show the new entry. Thus, insertion
of an entry does not involve reordering elements. The linking established by the
pointer PNX is modified.
This completes a basic description of the key elements of storage requirements
for sparse matrices involved in the power flow solution.
Computational Requirements The main computation step involved in power

flow solution for large systems involves the solution of the linear system of equations
described by (10.39). We have discussed the storage of a sparse Jacobian matrix. We
now point out some important issues in the LV factorization of the Jacobian matrix
and the solution of (10.39) using a forward and backward substitution. The LV fac-
torization has already been discussed in Section 9.2. In sparse matrices the main
computational issue deals with preservation of sparsity in the matrix factors. This de-
pends on the appropriate numbering or ordering of the problem equations and vari-
3B6 Power Flow Analysis Chap, 10
abIes. The equations correspond to the matrix rows and the variables to the matrix
columns. For the power flow solution the matrix rows and columns can be reordered
together. A row-column combination is referred to as an axis. The nonzero struc-
ture of the axes corresponds to the physical connections from the nodes to their
neighbors. The equations and variables are grouped into blocks corresponding to
nodes. The ordering is performed on a nodal basis.
As factorization proceeds, the number of nonzero elements in a row is decreased
by elimination and increased by carrying nonzero elements from previously select-
ed rows. The nonzero elements that are newly created are known as "fills." The
number of nonzero elements in an axis is referred to as the node's valence. The va-
lence varies as elimination and filling proceed. For more details the reader should
refer to Alvarado, Tinney, and Enns. This reference also provides details of three
schemes that are commonly used to order the matrix during factorization. These
schemes have widely become known as Schemes 1, 2, and 3.
Scheme 1: In this scheme the axes are ordered according to their valences be-
fore factorization. This is referred to as static ordering.
Scheme 2: The axes are ordered according to their valences at the point they are
chosen for factorization. However, this requires keeping track of the elimina-
tions and the fill resulting from previously chosen axes.
Scheme 3: The axes are ordered according to the number of fills that would be
produced by elimination of the axis. This requires not only keeping track of
the changing valences, but simulating the effects on the remaining axes not
yet chosen.
Scheme 2 is very widely used and is effective. For Newton-Raphson power flow the
ordering occurs according to the block structure, and factorization and direct solution
are performed on a block basis.
This completes the description of some of the important computational issues
with regard to power flow solutions for large power systems. ':J
10.11 SUMMARY
The power flow equations give the relationships between bus powers and bus volt-
ages in terms of the admittance parameters of the transmission system. Operational
and mathematical considerations lead us to define the following types of buses. There
are load (P, Q) buses, generator (P, IVI) buses, and a slack or swing bus. A bus with
reactive power injections from a capacitor bank is a P, Qbus if the Qinjection is
fixed but is a P, IVI bus if the Qinjection is varied to keep IVI fixed.
At the P, Qbuses we do not know the (complex) voltages (i.e., we do not know
lVi, e). At the P, IVI buses we do not know Q, e. The IVI and evariables are implic-
it variables in the (nonlinear) power flow equations and iterative solution methods
are required.
Chap 10. Problems 367
One method of solution is Gauss iteration or its minor variation, Gauss-Seidel

iteration. The complex form of the power flow equations is used. The iteration for-
mula remains unchanged through the entire calculation. No advantage is taken of the
presence of P, IVI buses (which reduces the number of unknown implicit variables).
Another method of solution uses Newton-Raphson iteration. The real form of
the power flow equations is used. The iteration formula involves a Jacobian matrix
that changes as the iterations proceed. Advantage is taken of the presence of P, IVI
buses; the number of equations that need to be considered is reduced by the number
of P, IVI buses.
Comparing the computational burden of the two methods, it is found that each
Newton-Raphson iteration takes longer than the corresponding Gauss (or Gauss-
Seidel) iteration, but convergence is obtained with fewer iterations so, overall, there
is usually a saving in computation.
For computations involving power systems under the usual operating condi-
tions, some simplifications of the Newton-Raphson scheme are usually possible.
One of these modifications is called decoupled power flow. It still requires the up-
dating of Jacobian matrices for each iteration, but the dimensionality of the compu-
tation is reduced. Another modification is called fast -decoupled power flow. In this
case, the updating of matrices is no longer required and the computational burden
is greatly reduced.
Problems
10.1. Find Ybus for Figure 10.1 assuming that all the transmission links have identical II-
equivalent circuits; the series element impedance is 0.01 + jO.1 and each (of the two)
shunt element admittances is fO.8.
10.2. Write the power flow equations corresponding to Problem 10.1. Write the equations
in the form (10.3).
10.3. In Figure P10J, all the transmission links are the same and each is modeled by the II-
equivalent circuit shown; the element values are impedances. Find Ybus'
iD.1
-il~iID
aT To
Figure P10.3
10.4. Write the power flow equations corresponding to Problem 10.3 in the form (10.3).
10.5 Refer to Figure P10.5.
(a) Find V2 exactly (take the larger of two possible values).
(b) Find Vi by Gauss iteration starting with V~ = 1 ~ If you use hand calculation,
stop after one iteration.
(c) Find SI = SGl - Sm·
S02 = 0.3 + jl.O Figure P10.5

10.6. We are given the system shown in Figure PlO.6 and the following equations for bus
powers:
SI = j19.981V,l- j10V1Vi - j10V,Vj
S2 = - j10ViVi + j19.981V212 - j10ViVj
S3 = - j10Vjvi - j10Vjvi + j19.981Vj12
Do one step of Gauss iteration to find vi and vj. Start with V~ = V~ =1!J::
1 + jO.S ~igure P10.6

10.7. Repeat Problem 10.6 using Gauss-Seidel iteration. Do only one iteration.
10.8. In Figure P10.8, assume that
Figure P10.8
Chap 10. Problems 369
SDl = 1.0 V! = 1LO°

S02 = 1.0 - jO.8 QC2 = -OJ
SDJ = 1.0 + jO.6 Pez = 0.8

ZL = jOA, all lines
Use Gauss iteration to find V2 and V;. Start with V~ = V~ = 1 ~ Do one iteration
only (i.e., calculate vi and vl). Note: Bus 2is a P, Q bus because Qez is specified rather
than IVII.
10.9. Repeat Problem 10.8 with one change. We specify IV21= 1.0 and do not specify QC2'
In this case bus 2 is a P, IVI bus.
10.10. In Figure Pl0.10, assume that
ZL = jO.5 for all lines
Pez = 0.2, IVI! = 1
V!=lLQ:
SDJ = OJ + jO.1
Find LYz, IV)! and & by using small-angle approximation. More specifically, in the
equations
si = vi 2:Y2kVk (1)
S; = V;2:Y)kVk (2)
1. Approximate ejO" by 1 + j6 ik •
2. Equate imaginary parts of (2) to find IV)! (use the larger of the solutions).
3. Then use the real parts of (1) and (2) to find LYz and ~
Do you think the approximation is reasonable in this problem?
Figure P10.10
10.11. Make up a simple (scalar) example showing the graphical solution of f(x) = 0 by use
of the iteration formula
XV+! = XV - af(xV)
Show typical solutions for (a) a = 1, (b) a> 1, (c) a < 1, and (d) a = [f'(xvJr!.
10.12. Use the Newton-Raphson method to solve

Nx) = xi - X2 - 1= °
fz(x) = x~ - Xl - 1= °
x1 = x~ = 1. Do two iterations only. Note: Exact solution is Xl = X2 = 1.618. (An-
other solution is Xl = X2 = -0.618.)
10.13. Repeat Problem 10.12 with initial condition x1 = x~ = -1.
10.14. Use the Newton-Raphson method to solve
Nx) = xI + x~ - 1= °
fz(x) = Xl + X2 = °
with an initial guess x1 = 1 and x~ = 0. Do two iterations. Note: Exact solution is
Xl = -X2 = 1;''12.
10.15. For the system in Example 10.6, assume that PG2 = 0.3,1"21 = 0.95, and SD3 =
0.5 + jO.2. Starting with e~ = e~ = 0 and 1V)l o = 1.0, do one N-R iteration and find
e~, e~, and IVl Evaluate the mismatch vector after this single iteration.
10.16. Use the fast-decoupled power flow method in Problem 10.15. Do two iterations. Tab-
ulate the values of 11 2,(1), IV)I, !:.:A, .lP), and .lQ)) obtained as the iterations proceed.

Phase I. Power Flow Study. This power flow study will be conducted on the test
system presented in Chapters 4 and 5. Any available power flow program can be used.
(a) The power flow program will be first used to study the base case design. The
following two cases should be a n a l y z e d : ' "
Case 1. Base case system with base loads and fixed tap transformers
Case 2. Base case system with base loads and regulating transf011lers
Examine the power flow output and verify the following for the base case design:
1. Satisfactory system operation: All voltages should be in the range from 0.96 to
1.04 p.u., with no overloaded lines or transformers.
2. Loads: From the power flow summary report, determine the total load in the sys-
tem, the losses, and the total generation. What is the generation at the slack bus?
3. Transformers: The transformer tap should be fixed at 1.00 per unit (Tap 1 is 69
kV and Tap 2 is 161 kV) in the power flow for Case 1 (not a regulating trans-
former) and changed to a regulating transformer in Case 2.
4. Regulating Transformers: Set each transformer to regulate the voltage on the 69-
kV bus. Select a scheduled voltage and include it in the bus data. Specify a
tap range of (0.9 to 1.1 per unit) 62.1 kV to 75.9 kYo
'r
Sec, 010,1 Design Exercise 371
(b) Modify the transmission system to supply the new load of40 MW at the steel
mill following the specifications a-j given in Chapter 4, Obtain the parameters
of the transmission lines as needed by the power flow program and include the
data in the power flow input data file. Conduct the power flow for the follow-
r.
ing case,
C~~;3. Modified system with 40-MW steel mill load and base case loads increased
by 30% and with regulating transformers,
Again verify all the items specified in the base case design.
1. Satisfactory system operation: All voltages should be in the range from 0,96 to
1,04 p.u., with no overloaded lines or transformers,
2. Loads: From the power flow summary report, determine the total load in the sys-
tem, the losses, and the total generation. What is the generation at the slack bus?
3. Transformers: The transformer tap should be fixed at 1.00 per unit (Tap 1 is 69
kV and Tap 2 is 161 kV) in the power flow for case 1 (not a regulating trans-
former) and changed to a regulating transformer in case 2,
4. Regulating Transformers: Set each transformer to regulate the voltage on the 69-
kV bus. Select a scheduled voltage and include it in the bus data. Specify a
tap range of (0.9 to 1.1 per unit) 62.1 kV to 75,9 kY.
If any of the criteria are violated, you will need to modify your design and re-do the
analysis until the modified system meets the criteria.
1. Generation: Make OWL (bus 1) the swing bus. For the generation at SWIFT
(bus 2) and at PARROT (bus 3), make Qmin on each-lOO.O MVA, make Qmax
on each 250.0 MVA, and make Pmax on each 430 MW. In cases 1 and 2, Pgen
at each bus (2 and 3) should be 190 MW. In Case 3, change the Pgen at each
bus to appropriate values. Since the voltage is usually highest at generators
and since 1.04 is at the upper limit of acceptable voltages, schedule the voltage
on the three generators at or near 1.04 p. u.
2. Areas: Assign urban buses to a different area than rural buses. Use area inter-
change data for each area (this is needed if your power flow program provides
this option), including the maximum and minimum acceptable voltages.
3. Title: For each power flow case you run, title lines should be llsed to describe
the case.
4. Data Checking: Since data must be in the correct columns in data input to the
power flow program, spend time checking the computer output. Also check to
see that all lines are connected to the correct buses.
Phase I. Power Flow Report The report should be typed. Use of a word proces-
sor would be helpful since portions of the report will need to be updated in other
phases of the design project. This report should include the following:
a. An executive summary. Important information about the project that execu-

tives would want to know without reading the complete report. At least in-
'!
,I clude the total number of lines at each voltage level, total line miles and cost at
each voltage level, total number of transformers and cost, total number of new
substations and cost, and total project cost. Add a brief summary of changes
from the base case system design. Make the executive summary a separate
document from the main report (include project title and the names of all mem-
bers in your group).
h. Title page and table of contents.
c. A map of the system with modifications showing the line routes and voltages.
d. A one-line diagram of the system showing the bus, line, transformer, and load
connections.
e. Specifications of a representative transmission structure for each voltage level
to be used for conductor spacings and impedance calculation for the modified
transmission structures. Include a drawing of each structure. Cite the reference
of the source of the structures.
f. Specifications of each line in the system: location (bus connections), voltage,
length, conductor size, cost estimate, impedance and shunt capacitive suscep-
tance in per unit, and MVA and current ratings. For the modified transmission
system dealing with the addition of the new steel mill load, show a slP-Uple im-
pedance and susceptance calculation in an appendix.
g. Specification of each transformer in the system: location, size, cost.
h. Specification of each added substation: location, cost.
i. Number and title all figures.
j. Number and title all tables.
k. The power flow of each of the three cases showing the voltages ~nd the load- ,
ings. For case 3, the power flow output should show satisfactory voltages and
loading given in the specifications. (Include all of the power flow output for
each case.) '..If
I. Document all changes made in the base case design.
m. The current cost estimate including all system changes.
n. List of references.
o. What is the total power (P) loss in the system as a percentage of the total load
for each case? Compare the MVA in the loads,-the MVA used in the lines and
the transformers, the MVA from line charging, and the MVA from the gener-
ators for each case.
Phase II. Contingency Analysis This design exercise will test the steady-state per-
formance of the system following contingencies. The exercise demonstrates the use
of the power flow programs in analyzing the performance of the system and tests its
ability to perform within specified guidelines following disturbances. This will be an
exhaustive contingency analysis. You will need to consider the failure of each trans-
mission line, transformer, and generatocYOuaISo-neecrioruntnreecases, where'
eacn generator isschedi.lled~t itsmaxim~m generation of430.MW,
1. Loads: The increased load (30%) and the new steel mill load will be used in all
outage cases.
2. Transformers: For all cases, set each transformer to regulate the voltage on the
69-kV bus.
Make full use of the transformer taps before you decide to purchase capacitors.
3. Ger;~;atio-;;:For ~a~es whereY()llJ~mo'ye lines or transformers, set the power
generation at bus 2 and at bus 3 to 270 MW': For the generator outage cases, you
should select the power schecfu.fes"(suggest that the two remaining generators
.' share the load approximately equally). Also for the generator outage cases,
/:"P'ch~i1ge the bus at which you drop a generator to a P, Q bus with zero load. (It
is not sufficient to set P generated to zero; it would continue to regulate volt-
age and output voltamperes reactive). For the cases at which you schedule each
generator at its maximum, lower the generation at the other two buses (sug-
gest that the two share the remaining generation approximately equally).
4. For each case, make sure to change the title so it describes the case.
S. You should check the cases fof\qy~rloads',and for satisfactory\volta es 0.96 to ;,";'
1.04 ).' If your system is not satisfactory, change it so that it wil be satisfactory:
Keep'in mind that a change that solves one problem may create problems in
other cases.
It is suggested that you try all the outage cases before you consider any change
to your system.
Phase II. Contingency Analysis Report The report should be typed. Use of a
word processor would be helpful since portions of the report will need to be up-
dated in other phases of the design project. This report should include the following:
a. An executive summary. Important information about the project that execu-

tives would want to know without reading the complete report. At least in-
clude the total number of lines at each voltage level, total line miles and cost at
each voltage level, total number of transformers and cost, total number of new
substations and cost, total number and size of capacitor banks and cost, and
total project cost. Add a brief summary of changes from the Phase I system
design. Make the executive s~mmary a separate document from the main re-
port (include project title and the names of all members in YOllr group).
b. Title page and table of contents.
c. A map of the system with modifications sh'owing the line routes and voltages.
d. Continue to include impedance and cost data tables.
e. A one-line diagram of the system showing the bus, line, transformer, and load
connections. The diagram should also show the location ofcapacitors.
f. The power flow output of all contingency cases and of the system with no out-
ages. All cases should contain all system changes, although you may choose to
switch capacitors on and off from case to case.
g. Document all changes you made in your Phase I design.
h. Number and title all figures.
i. Number and title all tables.
j. The current cost estimate including all system changes.
k. List of references.
-
•
CHAPTER 11 -~ _
Automatic Generation Control

and the New Market
Environment
11.0 INTRODUCTION
In this chapter we deal with the topics of automatic generation control (AGC) and
issues related to power system operation in the new market environment. AGC is a
generic term used to designate the automatic regulation of the mechanical power
input to the synchronous generators within a predefined control area. The generic
functions of AGC include the following aspects: (1) load frequency control, and (2)
economic dispatch.
The power delivered by a generator is controlled by controlling the mechani-
cal power output of a prime mover such as a steam turbine, or water turbine, or gas
turbine, or diesel engine. In the case of a steam or water turbine, the mechanical
power is controlled by opening or closing valves regulating steam or water flow.
Since the load of a power system is always changing, at least one generator in
a power system must respond to the changing load in order to maintain the power bal-
ance. This is commonly referred to as the unit on regulation. If the load increases,
the generated power must increase. Thus, steam and/or water valves must open wider.
If the load decreases, generation must also decrease, and this requires valve open-
ings to be smaller. The way we sense the power imbalance is through its effect on gen-
erator speeds and/or frequency. Thus, if there is excess generation, the generator sets
will tend to speed up and the frequency will rise. If there is a deficiency of genera-
tion, the generator speeds and frequency will drop. These deviations from nominal
speed and/or frequency are used as control signals to cause appropriate valve action
automatically. The control function in this case is provided by the governor mecha-
nism. This is referred to as primary control.
In addition to maintaining the power balance, we note that the maintenance
of system frequency, close to the nominal value, is also important. The speed
and output of fans and pumps depend on frequency. The speed and accuracy of
375
378 Automatic Generation Control and the New Market Environment Chap. 11
(synchronous) electric clocks depend on frequency. In addition, there is danger that

steam turbine blades may resonate at frequencies off of synchronism. Sustained op-
eration of these frequencies could lead to metal fatigue and failure of the unit. Since
the 1960s the North American Electric Reliability Council (NERC) has established
guidelines for control area performance during normal and disturbed conditions.
These guidelines are primarily known as the minimum performance criteria. The cri-
teria define acceptable control performance as established by the operating perfor-
mance subcommittee. The criteria do not define acceptable or "good" control
performance from an analytical viewpoint. These criteria are defined in terms of the
area control error (ACE). The ACE measures the balance of generation and de-
mand for electricity, and the contract adherence between control areas. The control
strategy based on the minimum performance criteria that has been established in the
North American interconnection is the tie-line bias control. This is referred to as
secondary control and requires each control area to meet its own demand and, as a
result, maintain the nominal frequency in the system.
We also consider the important problem of economic operation of power sys-
tems: how to operate a power system to supply all the (complex) loads at minimum
cost. Here we assume that we have some flexibility in adjusting the power delivered
by each generator. Of course, if we have a peak demand for power that is so large
that all the available generation capacity must be used, there are no options. But usu-
ally the total load is less than the available generator capacity, and there are many pos-
sible generation assignments.
In this case it is important to consider the cost of generating the power and to
pick the PGi to minimize these production cost while satisfying the loads and the loss-
es in the transmission links. When hydrogenerationis not considered, it is reasonable
to choose the PGi on an instantaneous basis (i.e., always to minimize the, present pro-
duction cost rate). With hydro, however, in dry periods, the replenish'inent of the
water supply may be a problem. The water used today may not be available in the"
future, when its use might be more advantageous. Even without the element of pre-
diction involved, the problem of minimizing production cost over time becomes much
more complicated, and we will not consider this problem. ~e will consider the sim-
pler problem of minimization of instantaneous production costs; this is called the
economic dispatch problem.
It should be mentioned that economy of operation is not the only possible con-
sideration. If the optimal economic dispatch requires all the power to be imported
from a neighboring utility through a single transmission link, considerations of sys-
tem security might preclude that solution. When water used for hydrogeneration is
also used for irrigation, nonoptimal releases of water may be required. Under adverse
atmospheric conditions it may be necessary to limit generation at certain fossil-fuel
plants to reduce emiSSIOns.
In general, cost, security, and emissions are all areas of concern in power plant
operation, and in practice the system is operated to effect a compromise between the
frequently conflicting requirements. We will, however, limit ourselves to economic
considerations.
Sec. 11.1 Power Control System Modeling 377
It is important to emphasize that the problem we will be considering is the prob-

lem of minimizing production costs in real time under the assumption that the gen-
erators available to us have been specified (i.e., we know which generators are online
or committed at a given instant). Our optimization then concerns this particular set
of generators.
We will not consider, in detail, the interesting related problem of scheduling
the startup and shutdown of generators to meet the anticipated variations in demand
for power over a 24-hour period. We note that the small variations in power demand
are taken care of by adjusting the generators already online. The larger variations
are accommodated, basically, by starting up generating units when the loads are on
the upswing and shutting them down when the loads decrease. The problem is com-
plicated by the long lead time required (6 to 8 hours) for preparing a "cold" thermal
unit for service, the startup and shutdown costs, and the requirement that enough
spare generating capacity (also called "spinning reserve") be available online in the
event of a random generator failure.
We will also present an overview of the trends in the competitive market struc-
ture, present some of the ideas currently being implemented with regard to the mar-
ket mechanisms being set up to trade electricity as a commodity, and introduce some
of the issues relating to AGe and economic dispatch in the new market environment.
An introduction to the operation of the power system based on the calculation of
available transmission capability will also be provided.
11.1 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM MODELING
We consider next a device called a speed governor, which senses a speed deviation,
or a power change command, and converts it into appropriate valve action. We will
model its dynamics, and later join it with turbine and generator dynamics to describe
the system that controls power output and frequency.
We will describe the basic operation of the classic Watt centrifugal governor.
Since the governor itself does not generate enough force to operate the steam
or water valves, we also consider the operation of a single-stage hydraulic servo-
motor interposed between the governor and the valve. A schematic is shown in
Figure 11.1.
We are looking at a vertical section. The horizontal rotating shaft on the lower
left may be viewed as an extension of the turbine-generator shaft and has a fixed
axis. The vertical shaft above the fly weight mechanism also rotates between fixed
bearings. Although its axis is fixed; it can move up and down, transferring its verti-
cal motion to the pivot point labeled B. Similarly, the motor-driven screw is free to
rotate on a vertical axis and transfers its vertical motion to the pivot point A. The
pivot points A, B, and C are joined by a rigid bar or linkage. Similarly, C, D, and E
are joined by a rigid bar. We assume that the various points of connection between
linkages and vertical attaching members are slotted or otherwise arranged so that
free vertical motion of the pivot points is possible.
-,,~,
Steam
from boiler
Motor
Port
Cylinder
Main piston
(Ram)
High-pressure
oil
Pilot valve
Port
Hydraulic servomotor
Speed governor
Figure 11.1 Servo-assisted speed governor.
The operation is as follows. If the generator speed increases above synchronous

speed, the fly weights will be flung farther apart (by centrifugal f~e), lowering point
B. Assume that point A is fixed so that point Cgoes down. Initially, point E is fixed,
so point D goes down. This uncovers the lower and upper ports of the "pilot" valve,
admitting oil under high pressure under the main piston and at the same time pro-
viding for release of the oil above the piston. Thus, the piston moves up, tending to
close the steam valve. This action, by reducing the mechanical power, will tend to slow
down the generator. However, mainly because of the high moment of inertia of the
turbine-generator set, this process takes a fair amount of time, and there is the dan-
ger of overreacting (i.e., of closing the steam valve too far). This then could cause the
speed in time to drop far below synchronous speed. A continuation of the corrective
process could therefore lead to ever larger swings in speed (i.e., to instability). To pre-
vent this, as point E moves up, it raises point D, tending to close the pivot valve ports.
This anticipates the correct, but delayed, action to come.
We can similarly discuss the action of the command input Pc. This input per-
mits the operator to move the steam valve by using the servomotor. For example, to
r
Sec. 11.1 Power Control System Modeling 37S
shift generation from one unit to another, the operator lowers point A on one unit (by
rotating the speeder motor in one direction) and raises it on the other. When point
A goes down, point Cgoes up, since initially w does not change and hence point B re-
mains fixed. Then point D goes up, allowing oil to enter the top of the cylinder and
escape from the bottom. Thus, the steam valve opens wider and the generator out-
put goes up. By rotating the speeder motor of the other unit in the opposite direc-
tion, point A of that unit goes up and the generator output goes down.
We note that in the steady state, with w constant, and all the pivot points sta-
tionary, the pilot valve ports must be covered (i.e., as shown in Figure 11.1). If this
were not the case, the main piston would be in motion. We note that with the pilot
valve ports closed, the steam valve is locked in position and able to withstand the
considerable forces developed by the high-pressure steam.
We next wish to develop a linearized model of the speed governor operating
near a specified operating point. Suppose that at this specified operating point all the
linkages are in the positions shown in Figure 11.1. We next consider the relation-
ships between the increments LlPc, Llw, LlXA, ... ,Llx£; these increments are shown
in the figure. Since points A, B, and C are on the same straight line, the position of
point C is determined by points A and B. Thus for small deviations there are posi-
tive constants (depending on the operating point) such that the linearized relation-
ships are
Llxc = ksLlxs - kALlxA
(11.1)
= k1Llw - k2LlPc
The geometric factor ks is absorbed into kl together with the sensitivity of the fly
weight mechanism (i.e., Jxsjaw). The geometric factor kA is absorbed in the con-
stant k2 together with the scale factor JxA/aPC '
Since points C, D, and E lie on the same straight line, the position of point D
depends on that of points C and E. Linearizing the geometry, we get a relationship
in the form
(11.2)
where k3 and k4 are positive.
Next, we turn to the servomotor dynamics (i.e., to the relation between input LlxD
and output LlxE)' It is simplest to assume that the linkage between D and E has been
disconnected, say, at point D. Suppose that we depress D a small amount. Then with
the ports (partially) opened, oil flows at a certain rate and the main piston rises at a
certain rate. For simplicity assume that the oil flow rates through the ports of the
pilot valve are proportional to LlXD' Then Llx£ depends on LlXD as follows:
d Llx£
dt = -ks LlXD (11.3)
where the (positive) constant ks depends on the oil pressure and the geometry of the
servomotor.
380 Automatic Generation Control and the New Market Environment Chap, 11
Figure 11.2 Speed governor block diagram
Assume that the transient starts at t = 0 with the system at the operating point.
In that case LlXE(O-) = O. Taking Laplace transforms, we get
, ks,
LlXE = - - LlXD (11.4)
S
where we are using the circumflex to indicate the Laplace transform of the incre-
ments. Equations (11.1), (11.2), and (11.4) may now be combined. The reader may
check that we get the block diagram shown in Figure 11.2.
We can simplify the description. Using the relationships specified by the block
diagram, we obtain
(11.5)
where Ka = k2k3/k4' Ta = 1/k4ks, and R = kz/kJ• The transfer function in (11.5) is

in time-constant form with Ka the gain; TG the time constant, typically around 0.1 sec;
and R the regulation constant or setting. The reason for the terminology regulation
constant will be seen later in the application.
i' ExamplelL1
I
In (11.5) assume that at t = 0 an increment 6.Pc = 1.0 is applied. Assume that the
(servo-assisted) speed governor is on test, operating open loop, so that as an indepen-
dent input, we may assume that 6.w = O. Find the increment in steam valve opening
6.XE(t) and sketch the response.
Solution Using the Laplace transform, we have
, KG KclTG
CUE = s(s + ljTe)
s(l + TG s)
Using the partial fraction expansion, we get, by evaluating the residues,
, KG KG
/lxE = - - - - -
S S + ljTG
Taking the inverse Laplace transform,
This is sketched as shown in Figure Ell.1. The curve has the familiar features of a sin-
gle time-constant response with time constant Tc.
We have found the response for a unit step change in Pc. The response scales
for other step changes, provided that the changes remain small enough to justify the
use of the linear model.
Figure .E11.1
We next propose a highly simplified model for the turbine that relates changes
in mechanical power output to changes in the steam valve position. We will not at-
tempt a detailed physical description but rather attempt to justify the model based
on intuition. Imagine that we conduct an experiment. Suppose that there is a small
step function increase in XE (i.e., 6.XE is a small positive step function). In the steady
state 6.PM will also be (a positive) constant but the change does not occur instanta-
neously.1t takes time before the increased flow of steam penetrates into all the blades
of the turbine. The detailed behavior is complicated, but if the turbine is of the non-
reheating (or nonextracting) type, 6.PMincreases approximately like the step response
Speed Turbine Figure 11.3 Turbine-generator

governor block diagram.
of a single time-constant circuit. Thus we may approximate the transfer function

using experimental data. In particular, we can plot the step response and read off the
gain and time constants for the turbine. In Figure 11.3 we show such a turbine model
in cascade with the speed governor model of (11.5). The time constant Tr is in the
range 0.2 to 2.0 sec.
Suppose that the command increment is APc. Then in the steady state we get
APM= KGKr APc. It makes sense to pick the scale factor aXA/aPC so that
APM= APe. This is equivalent to picking KGKr = 1. Then (suppressing AXE) we
get the simpler description shown in Figure 11.4.
This completes the derivation of an incremental or small-signal model for the
turbine and (servo-assisted) governor. Frequently, the model is adapted for large-
signal use by adding a saturation-type nonlinear element, which introduces the ob-
vious fact that the steam valve must operate between certain limits. The valve can-
not be more open than fully open, nor more closed than fully closed. Other than
this, the linearization derived in this section may be used as an approximation to re-
late the (large-signal) dependence of PM on Pc; we still make the rellsonable as-
sumption that Aw is small. i~' ...•.
The model in Figure 11.4 may also be modified to account for reheat cycles iri'
the turbine and more accurate representation of fluid dynamics in;the steam inlet
pipes or, in the case of hydraulic turbines, in the penstock. For 0ll$i'urposes, however,
the simple model in Figure 11.4 will suffice.
We conclude this section by sketching some static speed-power curves for the
turbine-governor. These curves relate PM and w with Pc as a parameter. The curves
(l + sTG)(1 +sTr)
Figure 11.4 Turbine-governor
GM(s)
block diagram.
......
......
Figure 11.5 Static speed-

power curves.
also relate the quantities if they are slowly varying. From the block diagram, Fig-
ure 11.4, we get the static, algebraic relation
1
f:.?'w = f:.Pc - Ii f:.w (11.6)
from which the local shape of the speed-power curves may be inferred. Assuming
that the local behavior can be extrapolated to a larger domain, we sketch two static
speed-power curves in Figure 11.5. Suppose that we adjust PM by using the speeder
motor in Figure 11.1 until PM = Pg), the desired command power, at synchronous
speed woo Thereafter, with fixed p~) (i.e.,!:.Pc = 0), (11.6) predicts the straight-line
relationship shown, with - R as slope. Suppose now that we wish to get more power,
p~), at synchronous speed. We must then make the adjustment with the speeder
motor. This then puts us on the speed-power curve to the right.
We note that the term regulation as applied in the present context refers to the
variation of w with PM' The less the "droop," the better the regulation. The choice
of the symbol R, for regulation, may then be understood.
We note that the units of R depend on those chosen for PM and w. We often will
use PM in per unit and w in radians per second. Then the units of R are radians per
second/p.u. power. Frequently, the units of R are stated in HzIMW, or, as in the next
example, they may be stated in per unit.
Example 11.2
A standard figure for R is 0.05 p.u. (or 5%). This relates fractional changes in w to frac-
tional (i.e., per unit) changes in PM' Thus we have fj,w/wo = -0.05 fj,PM, where fj,P,w
is in per unit.
(a) Suppose that the frequency changes from 60 Hz to 59 Hz. Find the increase in PM'
(b) What change in frequency would cause PM to change from 0 to 1 (i.e., no load
to full load)?
Solution (a) We have !J.w/wo = !J.f/fo = -1/60 = -0.05 !J.?'w. Thus !J.PM = 0.333
p.u. For example, if the turbine-generator unit is a 100-MW unit, the power output
would be increased by 33.3 MW.
(b) A 5% drop in frequency, from 60 Hz to 57 Hz~ changes the output from 0 to 1.
Note: If all the turbines on our system have the same R in p.u., based on their own
ratings, they operate nicely in parallel in the sense that as the frequency drops, each gen-
erating unit picks up a share of the total power increase proportional to its own rating.
11.2 APPLICATION TO SINGLE MACHINE-INFINITE

BUS SYSTEM
As a first application of the model, we can add the power or frequency control sys-
tem to "close the loop" in Figure 8.6. In that figure we showed tlPM as an indepen-
dent input, but in fact, with a speed governor, tlPM depends on tlw and tlPc . Since
w is the angular velocity of the turbine-generator shaft, we have
w= iJ = Wo + 8=? tlw = tl8 (11.7)
M is available as an output in Figure 8.6 and we can now add the turbine-generator
loop. At the same time we include a PSS loop as in Figure 8.10. This is done in Fig-
ure 11.6.
:\ Flux decay Rotor angle

~--------------~K4r-------------~
Figure 11.6 Block diagram of generator with voltage and power control
loops.
Sec. 11.3 Simplified Analysis of Power Control System 385
Steam
valve
-
Steam
Generator
Servo-assisted
w
speed governor To switchyard,
iF UF --+ transmission line,
and infinite bus
Va
Voltage
Vref control
system
Figure 11.7 Physical arrangement of control elements [schematic].
Figure 11.6 clearly shows the mathematical relationships between incremental

system variables and inputs. It is important also to keep in mind the physical arrange-
ment of the control elements. This is shown schematically in Figure 11.7.
It may be seen that the primary inputs to the generating unit are Pc and V,ef' We
note that, in turn, Pc and V,ef are supplied from a higher level of control. For exam-
ple, Pc is calculated to minimize fuel costs.
Finally, it should be mentioned that in addition to the power and voltage con-
trol system, there is a boiler control system that we have neglected. Clearly, as the
generator load increases, it is necessary, promptly, to increase the rate of steam gen-
eration. For short-duration transients, however, the assumption of constant steam
pressure (and temperature) is a good one, and we can neglect the modeling and dy-
namics of the boiler and its control system.
11.3 SIMPLIFIED ANALYSIS OF POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
Even with simplified modeling of the turbine, governor, and voltage control system,
Figure 11.6 is fairly complicated. And we remind the reader that this is only the sin-
gle machine-infinite bus case. The multimachine case that we usually need to con-
sider would be even more complicated. Although the complications are not
necessarily serious if we intend to reJy on computer simulation, they are a definite dis-
advantage if we want to understand system behavior in general terms.
Fortunately, the system lends itself to simplifications. There are two inputs,
AV,ef and APe. We can take AlVal andlor A8 to be the outputs. Suppose that we are
interested in the step response to AV,ef acting alone (i,e., with APe = 0). It is ob-
served that the transient is usually of such a short duration that p... does not change
appreciably during the interesting part of the transient; the power control loop is too
slow to affect the transient significantly. In that case, as an approximation, we can set
38S Automatic Generation Control and the New Market Environment 'Chap. 11
Figure 11.8 Simplified power control system.
aPM = 0 and ignore the power control loop. We then have the situation considered
in Section 8.5 leading to models such as in Figure 8.10 with aPM = O.
On the other hand, suppose that we are interested in the step response to aPe
acting alone, with aV,ef = O. Once again there is the possibility of a modeling sim-
plification. We can leave out the various loops associated with the voltage control sys-
tem. Thus in Figure 11.6 we are left with a single loop through the rotor angle transfer
function and the power control system. In this simplified model the effect of the
voltage control system may be accounted for by modifying the damping constant D
and the stiffness constant T in the rotor angle transfer function. The justification of
the simplified model is quite involved and will not be undertaken here. With this
simplification, redrawing Figure 11.6, we get Figure 11.8.
Note that we are led to two very different models starting from the same Fig-
ure 11.6. If we are interested in the response to aYref, we neglect the power control
loop. If we are interested in the response to aPe, we suppress the detailed dynam-
ics of the voltage control loop.
The development outlined here, for the single machine-infinite bus case, ex-
tends also to more general interconnections. Henceforth, we will a~ume that in'
modeling the power control system for each generator, the voltage control system'
need not be considered in detail. With reference to the simplified dynamic model in
Section 7.11, we assume that the electrical equation (7.75) is dr~ed while the me-
chanical equation (7.79) suffices. We will not attempt to justify these modifications.
We note that, in general, the rigorous justification of this process of reduced order
modeling (Le., the elimination of some of the system differential equations) is stud-
ied by methods such as the method of singular perturbations.
Returning now to Figure 11.8, we note. that it is easy to investigate the stabili-
ty of the power control loop, and we do so in the following example.
Example 11.3
We wish to estimate the effect of the regulation setting R on dynamic behavior. As-
sume the following parameters in Figure 11.8: Te = 0.1, TT = 0.5, M = H/1TP =
5/6011 = 0.0265, T = 2.0, and D = 0.1.
Sec. 11.3 Simplified Analysis of Power Control System 387
Solution We will use the root-locus method. Starting with the time-constant form and
changing into pole-zero form, we get .
1 s
KG(s)H(s) = - - - - - - - - - - -2. , . - - -
. R (1 + O.ls)(l + s)(0.0265s + O.1s + 2.0)
377
--------------------
R (s + 10)(s + 1)(s2 + 3.77s + 75.5)
377
=}/~(s-+-1~0)~(s-+-1)~(s-+-1-.8~8-+-j8-.4~8)~(s-+-1~.88~-~j8-.~~)
The root-locus diagram is shown in Figure E11.3. For a gain K = 377/ R = 1001, two
root-locus branches cross the jw axis; the two other corresponding root-locus locations
shown by a square are also indicated. For K < 1001 the system is stable. In terms of
R, the stability condition is R > 0.377.
The units of R are in radians per second/p.u. power. If we consider the open-
loop turbine-generator, like that shown in Figure 11.4, this means that a drop of only
,
I
-12 -10 -8 -4 -1
-4
,, Figure E11.3
0.377 rad/sec, or only 0.06 Hz, drives the generating unit from no load to full load.
This much sensitivity is highly destabilizing! The more common figure of R = 0.05 p.u.
translates to a value of 0.05 Wo = 18.85 rad/sec/p.u. power, a figure large enough to be
well within the stability boundary. Thus for the system under consideration with a
reasonable value of R, stability does not appear to be a problem.
Exercise 1. Assume that the system in Figure 11.8 (i.e., generator connected to
an infinite bus) is stable. Suppose that we change Pc. Show that in the steady state
the frequency does not change at all.
11.4 POWER CONTROL, MULTIGENERATOR CASE
We wish to apply the power control model derived in Section 11.1 to the case of a
number of generating units connected by a transmission system, with local loads at
each generator bus. For example, we can consider the three-bus system in Figure
11.9. We are interested in active power flows and assume that we can use the active
power model discussed in Section 10.8 with all voltages set equal to their nominal
values. Not shown, but to be considered later, are the turbine-governor systems sim-
ilar to Figure 11.4, which can be used to control the power supplied by each gener-
ating unit. The objective of the analysis is to obtain an incremental model relating
power commands, electrical and mechanical power outputs, and power angles for the
different generators. We note that the analysis may be easily extended to include
pure load buses in the model; however, we will be assuming that every pus is a gen-
erator bus. ,~
M~~ }
(11.8)
,~:
·'··.. 1·
Figure 11.9 Power flow for

three generators.
Sec. 11.4 Power Control, Multigenerator Case 389
where Pi is the bus power (i.e., the total active power from the ith bus into the trans-
mission system). Assume an operating point
(11.9)
and then with PCi = P~i + !:lPc;, PDi = P~i + I1PDi , and P; = P~ + 11P;, we get the
relationship between increments:
(11.10)
For each generator we use the linearized version of (7.79). Thus, we consider
(11.11)
where 8i is the angle of the internal voltage of the ith generator. We will number the
generators so that the ith generator is connected to the ith bus.
We next consider the behavior of Pm. In general'PDi depends on both the volt-
age magnitude and frequency. In our active power model we assume that the volt-
age magnitudes are fixed at their nominal values, and we therefore need not consider
the voltage magnitude dependence. Concerning the frequency dependence, we as-
sume that PDi increases with frequency. This assumption is in accord with observed
behavior. We would also like to be able to introduce changes in load as external (dis-
turbance) inputs. Thus, we can imagine the sudden increase in load due to the switch-
ing of an electrical device that "draws" a specified power. In accordance with this
description, for small changes in frequency, we assume that
PDi
°
= PDi +
aPDi(Wo)
-0- D.Wi + D.Pu (11.12)
uWi
where the first two terms describe the linearization of the frequency dependence of
the load and I1P u is the change of load input, by switching, referred to previously.
Note that the operating-point frequency is wo, which is expected to be close to but not
necessarily equal to the nominal system frequency Wo = 21r60. In defining the fre-
quency at each bus, we note that the instantaneous (phase a) voltage is
Vi(t) = Y21V;1 cos [wet + e~ + M;(t)] (11.13)
Thus, by taking the time derivative of the argument of the cosine function, we get
(11.14)
and thus
(11.15)
Defining Du = JPDi (WO)/dWi, and using (11.15), we can replace (11.12) with
(11.16)
Next we use (11.16) and (11.10) in (11.11). We get

Mi D.8i + DiD.8i + Du6.0i + 6.Pu + 6.p; = 6.PMi (11.17)
We next calculate I1Pi in (11.17). Assume that the line admittance parameters
are purely imaginary, and using (10.5) we get (in the general n-bus case)
n
~= 2: 1V;llVklBik sin (Oi - Ok)
k= I
(11.18)
where ei = ~. In our model the IV;I are constant. In this case the 1V;IIVkIBik are
constants.
Next we linearize (11.18) around the operating point. Thus we replace Pi by
P~ + 11P; and ei by e~ + /1e;. For variety, instead of using Taylor series, we can pro-
ceed as follows, using trigonometric identities.
n
~ = P~ + t:.~ = 2: 1V;IIVkIB;k sin (O~ + t:.e; - O~ -
k=\
t:.e k)
n
= 2: 1V;llVkIBik [sin (91 - 9~) cos (t:.ei - t:.e
k=\
k) (11.19)
+ cos (e~ - e~) sin (M; - M k )]
This result is exact. As we let the increments go to zero, we get

n
I1Pi = L [1V;llVkIBik cos (e~ - 9~)l(l1ei -
k=l
/1ek) (11.20)
which is the same as the linearization result found by using Taylor series. Defin-
ing T;k = 1V;lllVklBik cos (e~ - en, we get
11
11P; = L 1';k( l1ei - /1ek) (11.21)

k=!
The constants Tik are called stiffness or synchronizing power coefficients. The larg-
er the Tik the greater the exchange of power for a given change in b4sphase anglel
We are now in a position to substitute (11.21) into (11.17). ' ,
First, however, we will make a further approximation. We assume coherency be-
tween the internal and terminal voltage phase angles of each g~rator so that these
angles tend to "swing together." Stated differently, we assume that the increments I1fJ i
and Mi are equal. The assumption that Mi = /1ei significantly simplifies the analy-
sis and gives results that are qualitatively correct.
Making the assumption, and substituting (11.21) into (11.17), we get for i = 1,
2, ... ,n,
(11.22)
where D; = Di + Du and 11P; = 2:~=! 1';k(l1fJ; - I1fJ k). From the way DLi adds to
D;, we expect the (positive) load dependence on frequency to contribute to sys-
tem damping.
The preceding relations are shown in block diagram form in Figure 11.10. The
reader is invited to check that with Kp I ~ l/DI and Tp I ~ M/D
I f'
Figure 1110 repre- I
sents (11.22) in block diagram form. In Figure 11.10 we have I1w; as an output and
Sec. 11.5 Special Case: Two Generating Units 391
K pi
1 + sTpi
Figure 11.10 Generator block

tJ.Pi diagram.
A?'Wi as an input and can close the power control loop by introducing the turbine-
governor block diagram shown in Figure 1l.4. Thus for generating unit l, for exam-
ple, we get Figure 11.1l. All the other generating units, i = 2,3, ... ,n, have simi-
lar block diagrams. In the figure, in accordance with our coherency assumption, we
have replaced the dependence of APi on the Mik by a dependence on the AOik .
11.5 SPECIAL CASE: TWO GENERATING UNITS
In this case we have two synchronizing coefficients to consider, T12 and T21 •
TI2 = 1VIIIVzIBI2 cos (e~ - e~)
T21 = 1V211V1IB21 cos (e~ - e~)

Since T2J = T12 , the block diagram for the two units may be combined and simpli-
fied as shown in Figure 11.12.
Figure 11.11 Power control of generating unit 1.

I,
I"
Figure 11.12 Power control of two generating units,
We can describe the operation of the system in qualitative terms as follows.

Starting in the steady state (/lw1 = /lwz = 0), suppose that addjtjonal load, is
switched onto bus 2 (i.e., /lPL2 is positive). Initially, the mechanical power input to
generator 2 does not change; the power imbalance is supplied from the rotating ki-
netic energy. Thus Wz begins to drop (i.e., /lwz goes negatif,l). As a consequence, IlO z
decreases and the phase angle 81 - 8z across the connecting transmission line in-
creases. Thus the transferred power P12 increases. The sending-end power P12 and
the receiving-end power - P21 both increase. Unit 1 sees an increased power de-
mand and WI begins to drop. Each governor senses a frequency (speed) drop and
acts to increase the mechanical power output from its turbine. In the steady state
there is a new (lower) system frequency and an increased P12 • The frequency may
then be restored and P12 adjusted, if desired, by operator action (i.e., by adjustment
of PC! and Pez).
We next consider an example in which we calculate the steady-state change in
frequency by automatic (governor) control and see the benefit of the interconnec-
tion in quantitative terms, We will consider the more general case when both PL1 and
PL2 change.
Sec. 11.5 Special Case: Two Generating Units 393
Example 11.4
Consider two turbine-generator units connected by a tie line (i.e., a transmission line)
operating in the steady state (with Wo = 27T60). Suppose that IJ.PLl = alu(t) and
IJ.PLz = azu(t), where u(t) is the unit step function. Calculate and compare the steady-
state change in frequency (speed) in two cases:
(a) T1Z = 0 (tie line open)

(b) Tlz > 0 (tie line in operation)
Solution From Figure 11.12, using the block diagram relations, we get the follow-
ing equations:
Defining the closed-loop transfer functions,
H(s) ~ Gp;(s) i = 1,2

, 1 + Gpi(s)GMi(s)/Ri
and introducing them into the equations, we get
(a) Tlz = O. Using the final value theorem of the Laplace transform [i.e.,
lim f(t) = lim sF(s)

l--'!OO S""'1'O
where F(s) is the Laplace transform of f(t)], we get IJ.wlss = -HI(O)al and
IJ.W2ss = - Hz(O)az. Evaluating HI (0) and Hz(O), we get
-Kplal -al
(11.23)
IJ.wIss = 1 + KpJ/R I Dl + DLl + l/RI
where,81 ~ DI + DLJ + 1/RI • Similarly,
(11.24)
where,8z £ D2 + DLZ + 1/ R2 • Equations (11.23) and (11.24) imply (static) frequen-

cy "droop" characteristics as shown in Figure Ell.4 in the case of (11.23).
Figure E11.4
(b) T12 > O. We need to solve for IlWj and Ilwz before using the final value the-
orem. In matrix form,
Solving for IlWj using Cramer's rule, we get

, 1 Hjaj(s + H2T12 ) + HZa2HjTlz
Ilwl = - ......:.....:.:.....-...::.....::::....---.::....::....:....:.::.
S S + (HI + Hz)T12
Then, using the final value theorem, we get

(aj + azlHI(O)Hz(O) aj + az al + az
(11.25)
IlWlss = HI(O) + Hz(O) = - 1/ Hj(O) + 1/H2(O) = - -{31-+-{3z
where the {3; are the frequency droop characteristics for the individual units. Based on
physical reasoning or direct calculation,
Ilwlss
L-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ =_IlWlss
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-+i7·___ ~ }
'I'
Exercise 2. Do you think the formula (11.25) generalizes to n:Fachines?
The advantages of the interconnection may be seen by comparing (11.25) to

(11.23) and (11.24). If we connect to a system with a large~, we benefit. The bene-
fit is mutual if there is diversity in the load. For example, if al > 0 and a2 < 0, there
is a smaller change in frequency than for isolated units. Of course, there are other
advantages to the connection as well. Therds also more flexibility in operating an
interconnected system in terms of having enough available generating capacity to
accommodate scheduled and/or emergency shutdowns with minimum loss of load.
Exercise 3. Suppose that in Figure 11.12, generating unit 2 has a very, very large
moment of inertia. Approximate it by an infinite bus (i.e., A~2 = 0) and show that
the block diagram for generating unit 1 reduces to the same form as the block dia-
gram as Figure 11.8.
Sec. 11.6 Division of Power System into Control Areas 395
11.6 DIVISION OF POWER SYSTEM INTO CONTROL AREAS
For an interconnected system with a large number of generating units, in the order
of, say, 1000, modeling the power control system of each individual generator
as suggested by Figure 11.11 is far too complex to be useful. Simpler models
of lower dimension give more understandable results. Fortunately, in many cases,
we can identify groups of generators that are closely coupled internally but relatively
weakly coupled between groups. We can use aggregation techniques to obtain
a simplified approximate model. The accuracy of the model and its usefulness
are enhanced when the boundaries of the coherent groups of generators coincide
with those of an operating company or utility. In this case, under a single operat-
ing jurisdiction, the generators are frequently controlled as a single unit and
in such cases the groups are called control areas. The model using control areas
is very useful in describing the exchange of power between neighboring power
companies.
The result of the process of aggregation is a system model with block diagram
just like Figure 11.11, or Figure 11.12 in the case of a two-area system, with the blocks
representing control areas instead of individual machines. For example, in Figure
11.12, !J.PC1 is to be interpreted as the increase in command power from the area en-
ergy control (dispatch) center. !J.P12 is the increase in power transferred from area 1
to area 2 (through all the connecting tie lines), in response to an increase in the cen-
ter of angle difference M1 - !J.82. We can think of T12 as determined either analyt-
ically or experimentally.
We can also determine other elements in the model experimentally. For
example, in the case of a two-area system, suppose that area 1 is supplying a small
(positive) power P12 to area 2 through a tie line (or tie lines). Suppose that these
connections are removed. The ensuing transient will be followed by a new steady
state, assuming each "island" is stable. Since !J.P12 = - P12 , in accordance with the
results of Example 11.4, LlW1ss = P12/ f31 and LlW2ss = - P12/ f32. Thus, by measuring
the change in frequency, we find the area frequency characteristics f31 and f32. With
these and other measurements and calculations, we may specify all the elements in
Figure 11.12.
Suppose that we have developed the control area model. Let us now consider
some applications related to so-called pool operation. A power pool is an intercon-
nection of the power systems of individual utilities. Each company operates inde-
pendently within its own jurisdiction, but there are contractual agreements regarding
intercompany exchanges of power through the tie lines and other agreements deal-
ing with operating procedures to maintain system frequency. There are also agree-
ments relating to operating procedures to be followed in the event of major faults or
emergencies that we will not consider.
The basic principle of pool operation is that in the normal steady state,
1. Scheduled interchanges of tie-line power are maintained.

2. Each area absorbs its own load changes.
We note that these objectives cannot be satisfied during transients; nor, to obtain the
benefits of pool operation, would this be desirable. Consider, for example, the case
of a sudden step increase in PLZ , in Figure 11.12. If the tie-line power is not allowed
to change, then with respect to incremental changes the two systems are effectively
isolated, From the results in Example 11.4, Llwz = - !J.PLZ/ f32 and !J.w] = O. If we
allow the tie-line power to change naturally, we get the better result, !J.w] = !J.W2 =
Llw = - !J.PL2 /(f3] + f32). The tie-line power will also have increased, These changes
take place automatically in only a few seconds, We may then think of restoring the
system frequency and the scheduled tie-line power by adjustment of PC! and PC2 ; in
doing so, we are guided by the basic principle of pool operation.
In practice the adjustment of Po and PC2 is done automatically by the tie-line bias
control or secondary controL The control loops drive the so-called area control er-
rors (ACEs) to zero, As applied to the two-area system, the two ACEs are given by
ACE] = U l2 + BJLlw (11.26)

ACE z = !J.P2] + Bz!1w (11.27)
where I::.P12 and !J.PZJ are the departures from scheduled interchanges. Note that
I::.P12 = - I::.P21 . The constants Bj and B2 are called frequency bias settings and are
positive. In order to obtain the correct adjustment of Po and PC2 , we note that the
frequency bias settings should be
B] = f3] = (DLJ + ~J and B2 = f32 = (Du + ~J (11.28)
if load damping is included. Otherwise, the frequency bias settings are given by
1 1
BJ = f3] =- and Bz = f32 = - (11.29Ji
R] R2
In our example, with !J.PLl positive, p]Z tends to increase above its scheduled value.
Thus !J.p]Z is positive while !J.P21 is negative. With frequei«:y dropping, !J.w is nega-
tive and thus ACE zis the sum of two negative quantities, ACE 1, on the other hand,
is the sum of a positive and negative quantity with some tendency for cancellation,
Since, in accordance with the basic principle of pool operation, we want PC2 to in-
I crease while PC! should not change, use of area control errors as actuating signals to
'I
effect change in PC! and PC2 seems highly effective in this case.
Arepresentation of the implementation of tie-line bias control in the case of two
areas is shown in Figure 11.13. It consists of Figure 11.12 augmented by additional
loops showing the generation of the ACE! and their use in changing the area command
powers. The Ki are positive constants; the associated negative sign is needed since
we want negative ACE! to increase Pc;. The transfer function is that of an integra-
tor. From a hardware point of view we can understand the presence of the integra-
tor by considering (suitably adjusted versions of) the ACE voltages distributed to
the (dc) speeder motors of the individual generator units that participate in supple-
r
r
Figure 11.13 Tie-line bias control added.
mentary control within a given area. These motors turn at a rate of iJ proportional
to the ACE voltage and continue to turn until they are driven to zero. This hard-
ware implies an integrator in the block diagram.
From a control theory point of view the integrator has the merit that it drives
the ACE; to zero in the steady state. Of course, we are implicitly assuming the sys-
tem is stable, so the steady state is achievable. Thus, in the steady state
ACE! = ACE z = D, and also tJ.w= D.
Applying (11.26) and (11.27) in this case, we find tJ.P12 = tJ. P2! = O. Thus, there
is return to nominal frequency and the scheduled interchanges. Furthermore, since
both areas are in energy balance (with scheduled interchanges), any load changes
must have been absorbed within each area. Thus, the requirements for proper pool
operation are met.
The recommended NERC criteria for control performance require that
1. Area control error must equal zero at least one time in aUlD-minute periods.
2. Average deviation of area control error from zero for aUlD-minute periods
must be within specified limits based on a percentage of system generation.
, The performance criteria also apply to disturbance conditions and require that
1. Area control error must be returned to zero within 10 minutes.

2. Corrective action must be forthcoming within one minute of a disturbance.
Example 11.5
Consider the two-area system shown in Figure E11.5(a). Area A initially has a total
load of 1000 MW, which is equal to its total generation. Area A has an effective reg-
ulating characteristic of RA = 0.Q15 rad per sec/MW. Area B initially has a total load
of 10,000 MW, which is equal to its total generation. Area B has an effective regulat-
ing characteristic of 0.0015 rad per seclMW. As a result, the scheduled tie-line flow be-
tween the two areas is 0 MW. A sudden change in load of 10 MW occurs in area A.
Determine the ACE in each area, the change in frequency, and the appropriate con-
trol signals that will be provided to the supplementary control.
01
P~ =pto =1000 MW
RA = 0.015 rad per sec/MW
18
p&= plo= 10,000 MW
RB = 0.0015 rad per secfMW
M't = 10MW
Figure E11.15(a) Two-area system.
Solution: We first calculate the change in frequency due to the load cbange in area }
A. From (11.25) and (11.29), this is given by .; ,
i !
-l:J.pt -l:J.Pt 10 .~
I:J.w =- - = - - - =- - - - - = -O.013rrrad per sec
~A + ~B -1+ -
1 1 1
--+--
RA R8 0.015 0.0015
We note that due to the increase in load in area A, the frequency of the system has
dropped as a result of the natural response of the system. This drop in frequency is ac-
companied by an associated change in generation in each area, based on the natural
regUlating characteristic of the area given by (11.6).
A All
I.l.PG = - RA I:J.w = - 0.015 X (-0.0136) = 0.9091 MW
I:J.pB 1 1
G = - R8 I:J.w = - 0.0015 X (-0.0136) = 9.091 MW
The change in tie-line flow is given by

MAB = - MBA = 6.P~ - Mt = 0.9091 - 10.00 = -9.091 MW
This analysis shows that 9.091 MW of power is being supplied from area B to area A
to meet the 10 MW load increase in area A. On the other hand, area A produces only
0.9091 MW because of its natural response to meet this load change.
Figure Ell.5(b) depicts the changes in each area due to the natural response of
the system.
Area A AreaB
I
I
I I
: I
-+lLV'B4--
I I
I I
I I
p&
Power output (MW) Power output (MW)
Figure E11.5Ib) Natural regulation characteristic of each area.
We observe from Figure E11.S(b) that the frequency drops and the genera-
tion in each area increases to meet the increase in load in area A. The principles of
pool operation call for each area to pick up its own change in load. We will now cal-
culate the ACE signals in each area and check whether the principles of pool oper-
ation are followed.
ACE A = 6.PAB + ~A 6.w = -9.091 +(0.~15) X (-0.0136)

= -9.091 - 0.909 = -10 MW
ACE B = 6.PBA + ~B 6.w = 9.091 + (0.b~15) X (-0.0136)

= 9.091 - 9.091 = 0 MW
The values of the ACE signals clearly indicate that each area will correct its genera-
tion appropriately, and are'a A will meet its increase in load by 10 MW. We also note
that when the generation in area A increases by 10 MW, the frequency will increase by
exactly the same amount it had dropped when the load in area A increased by 10 MW.
As a result the tie-line flow will return to zero. There will be no change in generation
in area B,and area A will pick up all the increase in the load. Figure l1.5(c) shows the
situation in terms of the regulating characteristics.
Area A AreaB
\ ./ Post supplementary
(' control
'jj' \
~ 0 \ Final
S>.N~ i - - - - - , \ - - F - - -
<J I
~ Initial I
o I
l ~
I
:M'A
I
L.-\
\
\
I I \
I I \
pcb Pt =pcb +M'l PcJiJ

Power output (MW) Power output (MW)
Figure E11.5(cl Regulating characteristics after supplementary

control action.
We can easily extend tie-line bias control to the n-area case. The definition of the area
control error becomes
n
ACE j = ~ /).P;j + B /).w
j (11.30)
j=l
where we sum over all the deviations from scheduled interchanges from area i to ob-
tain the net interchange error. The ACE j are then used to adjust the area command
powers just as in the two-area case. We note that our model predicts that in steady state
the system frequency returns to its nominal value and the interchange powers return
to their scheduled values modulo possible circulating power exchanges not sensed by
the control algorithm. The reader can gain appreciation for the problem.by consider-
ing a three-area system with arbitrary circulating component of power Il1it sensed by.
(11.30), i = 1,2,3. We will not consider the auxiliary control action n~ped to elimi-;'
nate this problem. I ,.
We will now introduce the problem of economic di~atch. Usually, this is the
responsibility of individual generating companies rather than the pool. When the
area generation must be changed, the individual generations are assigned, taking eco-
nomic operation into account. Economic considerations also enter when schedul-
ing future tie-line transfers between areas.
11.7 FORMULATION OF THE ECONOMIC

DISPATCH PROBLEM
The total cost of operation includes fuel labor and maintenance costs but for sim-
plicity we will assume that the only variable co;ts we need to consider ~re fuel costs.
For the fuel costs we assume that we are given the fuel-cost curves for each generat-
ing unit, specifying the cost of the fuel used per hour as a function of the generator
Sec. 11.7 Formulation of the Economic Dispatch Problem 401
/
/
PGj , three-phase power output (MW) Figure 11.14 Fuel·cost curve,
power output. For simplicity we assume that each generating unit consists of a gen·
erator, turbine, steam generating unit (boiler furnace), and associated auxiliary equip.
ment. An approximation to a typical fuel·cost curve is shown in Figure 11.14. Note
the use of the symbol PG; for 3</1 power output instead of Pit. For most of the rna·
terial (until Section 11.11) only 3</1 power is considered and the less burdensome no·
tation is preferable.
The shape of the fuel·cost curve (concave upward) may be understood in terms
of the heat·rate curve, which is determined by field testing the generating units. The
approximate shape of this curve is given in Figure 11.15. The curve gives H;(PG;), the
MBtu (Btu is British thermal units) of heat energy supplied by burning the fuel, per
MWh of electric energy. At the minimum point the generating unit is most efficient.
The curve reflects the typical drop in efficiency of most energy conversion machines
at the low and high ends. At peak efficiency the heat rates of modern fossil·fuel
plants are in the range 8.6 to 10 MBtulMWh. If the conversion from chemical ener·
gy in the fuel to electrical energy were 100% efficient, the heat rate would be ap-
proximately 3.41 MBtu/MWh. Thus, we are obtaining typical maximum overall
efficiencies in the range 34 to 39 %.
From the heat-rate curve we can determine the input energy rate as a function
of output power. For example, suppose that in Figure 11.15, PG; = 100 MW. From
the figure we see that Hi(PGi ), the corresponding heat rate, is 12. This means that
there is 12 MBtu of heat energy required for each 1 MWh of electrical energy out-
put. In an hour the electrical energy output would be 100 MWh while the heat en-
ergy required would be 100 X 12 MBtu ~ 1200 MBtu. Thus, a heat input energy
12~_ I
100
Figure 11.15 Heat·rate curve.
rate of 1200 MBtu/hr is required to sustain a power output of 100 MW; we get the fig-
ure by multiplying PCi (3¢ power) by the corresponding heat rate Hi(Pc;). More
generally, the heat input energy rate, Fi(PCi ), is found by the formula
(11.31)
where PGi is 3¢ power in MW, Hi is the heat rate in MBtu/MWh, and F, is in MBtu/hr.
The graph of F;(Pc;) is called an input-output curve.
Suppose now that it is specified that the cost of the fuel is K dollarslMBtu. Then
(11.32)
is the fuel cost in dollars per hour to supply PGi MW of electrical power.
The general shape of the fuel-cost curve may thus be inferred from the shape
of the heat-rate curve. It is found that the heat-rate curves may be approximated in
the form H(Pc) = (a'/ Pc) + f3' + y'Pc with all coefficients positive. Then using
(11.31) and (11.32), we find that the corresponding C(Pc ) is a quadratic expression
with positive coefficients in the form
C(Pc) = a + f3Pc + yP~ dollars/hr (11.33)
where Pc is expressed in MW.
Example 11.6
Assume that the heat rate of a 50-MW gas-fired generator unit is measured as follows:
25% ofrating: 14.26 MBtulMWh

40% of rating: 12.94 MBtuIMWh
100% of rating: 11.70 MBtulMW
i, / ./
Assume that the cost of gas is $5 per MBtu.
(a) Find c(PGl in the form (11.33).

(b) Find the fuel cost in centslkWh when 100% loaded.
(c) Find the fuel cost when 50% loaded.
(d) Find the fuel cost when 25% loaded.
Solution (a) The assumed polynomial form of c(Pal is equivalent to a heat-rate

curve of the form
,
H(PGl = ~ + W+ y' PG
PG
The three test measurements give us three points on the curve, and hence we can solve
for the three unknown coefficients, a', ~', and y'.
Sec. 11.7 Formulation of the Economic Dispatch Problem 403
(X' I I
12.5 + f3 + y 12.5 = 14.26
a'
20 + f3' + y'20 = 12.94
a'
50 + f3' + 1'50 = 11.70
The solution is a' = 44.89, f3' = 10.62, and y' = 0.0036. Thus
44.89
H(PG) = fa + 10.62 + 0.0036PG MBtu/MWh
If we multiply by PG , we get the fuel input rate in MBtu/hr. Multiplying by $5, the
cost of fuel per MBtu, we get
C( PG) = 224.5 + 53.1PG + 0.0180P~ dollars/hr
(b) When fully loaded
C(PG) = $2924.5/hr (for 50 MW)
= 5.85 cents/hr (for 1 kW)
This is usually expressed as 5.85 cents/k Wh.
(c) At 40% load
C(PG) = $1293.7/hr (for 20 MW)
= 6.47 cents/kWH
(d) At 25% load
C(PG) = $891.1/hr (for 12.5 MW)
= 7.13 cents/kWH
Exercise 4. What shape of heat-rate curve would yield a linear fuel-cost curve?
Assume henceforth that the C;(PeJ curves are given. We may then formulate
a general problem of optimum economic dispatch, or optimum power flow,
General Problem Formulation Given a system with m generators committed

and all the SDi given, pick the Pm and lVii, i = 1,2,3, ... ,m, to minimize the total
cost
m
Cr ~ 2: c;(Pd
i=l
subject to the satisfaction of the power flow equations and to the following inequal-
ity constraints on generator power, line power flow, and voltage magnitude.
1. p~:n s PGi S p~iX, i = 1,2, ... , m

2. I~jl s p~ax, all lines
3. IVilmin s IViI s IVilmax , i = 1,2, ... , m, ... , n
We next comment briefly on the formulation.
1. The power flow equations must be satisfied (i.e., they are an equality constraint
on the optimization).
2. The upper limit on PGi is set by thermal limits on the turbine generator unit,
while the lower limit is set by boiler and/or other thermodynamic considerations.
A certain minimum flow of water andlor steam is required in the boiler to pre-
vent "hot spots" from developing. The fuel burning rate must also be sufficient
to keep the flame from going out ("flame out").
3. The constraints on voltage keep the system voltages from varying too far from
their rated or nominal values. The objective is to help maintain the consumer's
voltage; the voltage should neither be too high nor too low.
4. The reasons for constraints on the transmission-line powers relate to thermal
and stability limits and have been discussed in Section 4.9.
5. The formulation of the problem is consistent with the availability of injected ac-
tive power and bus voltage magnitude as control variables at each generator. It
can be extended to deal with other control variables, such as the phase angles
across phase-shifting transformers, the turns ratios of tap-changing transform-
ers, and the admittances of variable (and controllable) shunt and series induc-
tors and capacitors.
6. The minimization of a cost function subject to equality and in!(quality con-
straints is a problem in optimization that is treated by a branch of applied math-,
ematics called nonlinear programming. . [
To help fix ideas, consider next the formulation as applied to the simple system
in Figure 11.16. Assume that the system is specified; in pa!oticular, all the bus admit-
Figure 11.16 System to be op-

timized.
r
Sec, 11,8 Classical Economic Dispatch (Line Losses Neglected) 405
tance parameters are given, the reference voltage angle is given, and all the SDi are
given. We can pick a particular set of IV!I, PG2 , lVii, PG3 , and 1V3i (within the constraint
set) and by power flow analysis find Pm and the transmission-line power angles. If
PG! and the transmission-line powers satisfy the inequality constraints, our choice is
feasible and we calculate the total cost Cr. The problem is to minimize Cr over the
set of feasible independent control variables IV!I, PC2 , lVii, PG3 , and I~I.
The general nonlinear programming methods for solving this problem are com-
putationally expensive, and they do not easily give insights into the nature of the op-
timal solutions. We therefore make some approximations that simplify the
calculations and give physical insights into the problem of economic dispatch.
11.8 CLASSICAL ECONOMIC DISPATCH (LINE

LOSSES NEGLECTED)
As shown in Section 10.7, under normal operating conditions there is relatively little
coupling between active power flows and power angles on the one hand, and reactive
power flows and voltage magnitudes on the other. Thus, in the general problem for-
mulation in Section 11.7, we expect that the cost Cr will be critically dependent on
the PCi and P Di but only marginally dependent on the IV;I and QDj' For this reason
we reformulate the problem entirely in terms of active power flows, setting the IV,I at
their nominal values.
Suppose that, in addition, we neglect the line power flow constraints and for
the moment neglect line losses as well. We can then replace the general problem
formulation with a much simplified version.
Simplified Problem Formulation Pick the PGi to minimize

m
Cr = 2: Cj(Pd
i~!
(11.34)
such that
m n
2:
j~!
PGi
'
= PD'~ 2:
i~!
P Di (11.35)
and
PG,min <- P"G,, <- p,0'ma , i = 1,2, ... ,m (11.36)

Note that in (11.35), the equality constraint is simply a statement of conservation of
active power in the case of a lossless transmission system. It takes the place of the
power flow equations, as an equality constraint, in the previous formulation. Note that
the (active) power flow equations might still be needed if the line power flow con-
straints were to be checked, but in the simplified problem formulation there is no
need whatsoever to consider the power flow equations.
The formulation may be considered as a first approximation; we will soon be

considering modifications that permit line losses to be considered, and in this case we
will need to consider the power flow equations.
Returning to the simplified problem formulation, we note that there is a sim-
ple and elegant solution in terms of so-called incremental costs (ICs). First we need
a definition:
dC/Pa;)
IC i = -d- = slope of fuel-cost curve (11.37)
PCi
If the units of C,.(Pa,-) are dollarslhr, the units of the ICi are dollarslhrlMW or dol-
larslMWh. The ICi figure represents the increase in cost rate per increase in MW
output or equivalently the increase in cost per increase in MWh.
If as in (11.33) we assume that the fuel-cost curves are quadratic (with positive
coefficients), the incremental cost curves are linear (with positive coefficients):
(11.38)
We note that the curves are strictly monotonically increasing, a property we will be
assuming even if we do not use the linear form of (11.38).
ExamplelL7
With the data of Example 11.6,
(a) Find an expression for IC = dC/dPc .

(b) Find the incremental cost when 100% loaded.
(c) Find the incremental cost when 25% loaded.
Solution We use (11.38) in Example 11.6.

.! :'
i
(a) IC = 53.1 + 0.0360Pc.

(b) At 100% loading,IC = $54.90jMWh.
(c) At 25% loading,IC = $53.55/MWh.
Note: In this example there is very little change in incremental costs as a func-
tion of loading.
We now return to the solution of the simplified optimization problem posed in

(11.34) to (11.36). It is convenient to consider first the case without the inequality con-
straints [i.e., without the generator limits given in (11.36)]. In this special case we
get the following simple rule.
Optimal Dispatch Rule {No Losses-No Generator Limits}, Oper-

ate every generator at the same incremental cost.
Sec. 11.8 Classical Economic Dispatch [Line Losses Neglected) 407
I
I
I
/
100 50
Figure 11.17 Two generators operating at different incremental costs.
Note 1: The rule gives only a property of the solution. But with this property
we reduce an m-dimensional search (for the best PGI ,Pez, ... ,PGm) to a one-
dimensional search for the common incremental cost.
Note 2: In the statement of the rule there is an implicit assumption that it is pos-
sible to operate every generator at the same incremental cost.
Intuitively, it is clear why it cannot possibly be optimal to operate generators at

different res. Suppose that we have two generators with, say, PGI = 100 MW and
PG2 = 50 MW and the corresponding rei (i.e., the slopes of the cost curves) are not
equal. The situation is shown in Figure 11.17. As shown in the figure, Ie) is greater
than Ie 2• Since leI is greater than Ie 2, we notice the desirability of the following ad-
justment of generator powers. If we reduce POl by (say) 10 MW, we save quite a lot
of cost per hour (because the slope of the cost curve is large). If we add the 10 MW
to PG2 , the cost goes up less (because the slope is smaller). Thus, we can deliver the
same total power (150 MW) at less cost. In general, it pays to reduce the power out-
put of the generator with the higher incremental cost. The slope of the curves (strict-
ly monotonically increasing slope) is such that a continuation of this process ultimately
leads to equal incremental costs.
This line of reasoning obviously extends to any number of generators, consid-
ering them in pairs, and leads to the conclusion that all the Ies must be equal at the
minimum cost point. A more formal proof will be offered later in this section.
Exercise 5. To understand better why the foregoing procedure leads to a mini-

mum, consider some fictitious cost curves: for example, concave upward but with neg-
ative slope or concave downward with positive (or negative) slope. Do we get
convergence? If so, do we get a minimum or a maximum cost when the two Ies are
equal?
40S Automatic Generation Control and the New Market Environment Chap. 11
Example 11.8
The fuel-cost curves of two generators are given as follows:
CI(PGl ) = 900 + 45PGl
+ o.olpbl
C2(Pd = 2500 + 43Pez + 0.003pb2
The totalload to be supplied is Po = POl + PD2 =700 MW. Use the optimal dispatch
rule (special case) to find PGl and Pm.
Solution The incremental costs are
dCI
Ie! = -p. = 45 + 0.02Po!
d 01
dC2
Ie2 =-d- = 43 + 0.006Pez
Pm
It is instructive to plot the Ie curves (Figure E1l.S). We see that ICz is below lCI>
which implies that generator 2will carry more load than generator 1. Invoking the con-
dition ICI = IC2, we can see graphically that G2will carry almost all the load. We can
find the exact division iteratively by guessing a valuefor Ie! = IC 2, solving for PGl and
Pm, checking if PGl + Pm = Po = 700 MW, and increasing (decreasing) the incre-
mental cost if PGl + Pm is too low (high). This method works even if the lei curves
are not linear. Alternatively, in the present case we can easily solve for the exact val-
ues analytically.
t) 5.5
~
u
';
C
u
E
1) 4.5
--
.s 4.3
o 200 400 600 800

PG (MW) Figure E11.S
IC 1 = 45 + 0.02Po! = IC 2 = 43 + 0.006(700 - Pd
Solving, we get
POI = S4.6 MW Pez = 615.4 MW Ie) = IC2 = $46.69/hr/MW
Note that if Po is raised from 700 MW to 701 MW (Le., increased by 1 MW), the fuel
cost rate will go up (approximately) $46.69/hr (i.e., by $46.69/MWh or 4.669 centsIkWh).
This incremental cost is to be contrasted with the average cost of producing the 700
MW. Plugging the optimal values of PGl and Pm into C1(POl ) and C2(Pm), we get
a total cost Cr = $34,877/hr. This translates into an average cost of
(34877 X 100)/(700 X 1000) = 4.98 cents/kWh.
Sec. 11.8 Classical Economic Dispatch (Line Losses Neglected) 409
Exercise 6. Consider some alternative generator assignments or dispatches in

Example 11.8 and convince yourself that the cost of producing 700 MW goes up.
We turn next to a formal proof of the result on equal incremental costs.

Proof of Optimal Dispatch Rule (Special Case). Referring to the simplified
problem formulation (without inequality constraints), the problem is to pick the m
values of PGi to minimize CT = Cl(PGl ) + C2(PG2 ) + . .. + Cm(PGm ) subject to the
constraint PGl + PC2 + ... + PCm = PD' The constraint permits us to express one
of the variables, say PGm' in terms of the rest; in this case PGm = PD-
PGl - . . . - pc. m-1' Thus the problem reduces to the following: Pick the m - 1
independent variables PG1 , PG2 , ... ,PC.m- 1to minimize
CT = C1(PGl ) + CZ(Pd + ... + Cm-l(PG.m-l)
(11.39)
In this way we have converted the constrained problem to an unconstrained problem

of lower dimension.
The solution to the unconstrained problem may be found in the usual way by
the differential calculus. The necessary condition for a stationary point is that the
m - 1 partial derivatives, aCr/aPGi , are zero. Thus from (11.39), by using the chain
rule of differentiation, we get
aCT dC,
m - Gm dC aP
-=-+-- -
aPG, dPG, dPGm aPc,
(11.40)
= dCi_ dCm = 0 i = 1,2, ... , m - 1
dPGi dPcm
The result is that all the incremental costs must be equal to the incremental cost of
the mth generating unit (i.e., that they are all equal). We note (without proof) that
the shape of the Ci curves is such (concave upward) that the stationary point defined
by (11.40) is a minimum. Also, the assumption that the IC curves are strictly mo-
notonic implies a unique solution for the corresponding Pc;. Thus, to summarize,
there is only one possible set of PGi that satisfies the equal IC condition, and thus the
corresponding cost function must be at a global minimum. Stated differently, the
equal IC condition is both a necessary and a sufficient condition for optimization.
There is an alternative approach to the foregoing one that is frequently more
convenient to use. It is the classical method using Lagrange multipliers, for mini-
mizing (or maximizing) a function with equality constraints as side conditions. For
a brief introduction to the method, the reader is referred to Appendix 3.
Usi~g the method, we replace the cost function CT by an augmented cost
function CT'
(11.41)
where Ais the Lagrange multiplier. We then find the stationary points of CT with re-
spect to Aand the PGi as variables. If we satisfy
aCT
-=0 i = 1, 2, 3, . . . ,m
aPGi
dCT = 0
aA
then we satisfy the equality constraint, 2:r=1 PGi - PD = 0, and simultaneously find
a stationary point of Cr taking the constraint into consideration.
Applied to our problem, with concave-upward cost curves, we get a single sta-
tionary point (a minimum), and
dC,(Pd = A
i = 1,2, ... ,m (11.42a)
dPGi
m
LPGi - PD = 0 (11.42b)
i=1
Note that the result in (11.42) is the same as implied by (11.40), with Athe common
value of incremental cost. For this reason we refer to Aas the system incremental cost,
or system A.
Just as in Example 11.8, A, which is the common value of incremental cost, re-
lates increased fuel cost rate (in dollars/hr) to increased demand (in MW). It is in-
structive to derive this result formally. Suppose that with a given demand P~, we
find an optimal set of P~i and the corresponding cost is C~. Suppose that now the load
increases (incrementally) to PD = P~ + tJ.PD and we wish to find the new cost Cr. We
may use a two-term Taylor series:
(11.43)
Relating increments, we get
tJ.CT = Lm dC(PO) tJ.PGi

_ i_G_i (11.44)
i=1 dPGi
Using (11.42a), we get
m
tJ.Cr = A L tJ.P
i=1
Gi = AtJ.PD (11.45)
Thus Ais the constant of proportionality relating cost-rate increase (in dollars/hr) to
increase in system power demand (in MW). Equivalently, Agives us the additional
cost of additional (incremental) energy in dollars/MWh.
Finally, we consider how to find Ain the present case. If the cost curves
are quadratic, the lei curves are straight lines and the problem reduces to a linear
Sec. 11.9 Generator Limits Included 411
Figure 11.18 Use of incremen-

tal cost curves.
problem. The solution is considered in a homework problem. In more general cases,

the problem of finding Acan be determined by an iterative process, The procedure
may be explained by considering Figure 11.18, where the incremental costs are given
graphically, The basic iterative procedure is as follows:
1. Pick an initial A.
2. Find the corresponding PG1 (A), PdA), and PdA),
3. If 2:;=1 PdA) - PD < 0, increaseA and go to 2. If 2:;= 1PdA) - PD > 0, de-
crease Aand go to 2, If 2:;=1 PdA) - PD = 0, stop.
11.9 GENERATOR LIMITS INCLUOED
The case we have been considering is only an introduction to the more practical case
in which there are generator limits. Returning to the simplified problem formulation,
we now add the inequality constraints (11.36). Consider, then, the case with genera-
tor limits. We can show these constraints on the IC curves, as is done in Figure 11.19.
'4
'l
IC l
'2
. Upper
limit
'I IC l
Figure 11.19 Incremental

cost curves with constraints.
Consider the optimal dispatch in this case. Suppose that for a given PD the sys-
tem Ais AI' All three generators are operating in accordance with the optimal dis-
patch rule and the question of generator limits is moot since each generator is
operating away from any limit. Now suppose that PD increases and we increase Ato
provide more generation. Continuing the process in 'this way we reach A2• What if
PD increases further? PG3 has reached a limit and cannot be increased further. The
increased load must be taken by PGI and Pm. Clearly, they should operate at equal
IC, say A3. Further increases in load can be taken by PGl and PG2 operating at equal
IC until Pm reaches its upper limit, and A= A4• Beyond this point, only PGl is avail-
able to take an increased load. Considerations of this type lead to the more general
rule that follows.
Optimal Dispatch Rule {No Losses]. Operate all generators, not at their
limits, at equal incremental cost I.
Procedure for Finding A. Pick an initial Asuch that all the generators operate
at equal incremental cost and within their constraints. If this choice of Ais not con-
sistent with satisfaction of the load demand, adjust Ajust as in the nonconstrained
cases. If in this process a generating unit reaches a maximum or minimum value, fix
the unit at the limit and continue the process of adjustment of Awith the remaining
units.
Note 1: In applying the rule it is helpful to proceed graphically, at least to de-

termine which generators will not be at their limits.
Note 2: We remind the reader that we are considering a given set of committed
generators. This set of generators once specified is always kept on-line. We
do not shut down a particular generator that may be operating at its lower limit.
Note 3: We can interpret the rule as a requirement that we operate as closely as
possible to equality in the incremental costs.
Outline of Proof It should be clear from the uncPllstrained problem that gen-
erators not at their limits should operate at the same A.~uppose, then, that we have
a case such as that in Figure 11.19, with unit 3 at its upper limit (with incremental
cost A2) and units 1 and 2 operating at equal incremental costs A3. We will show that
we cannot lower the cost by backing away from the limit on unit 3 and making up for
it by increasing the output on units 1 and 2. Assume that ilPG3 = -e, where 8 > 0
(i.e., we decrease PGJ). Then using Taylor's series as in (11.43), we get
~ 8 8
6.Cr = .t..J Ai 6.PGi = - A28 + A3 - + A3 - = 8(A3 - A2) > 0
1=1 2 2
Here we assume that PGl and Pm have each been increased by 8/2, but it does not mat-
ter how the small increment 8 is distributed. Since A3 > A2, the result is that the cost
goes up. The same thing happens if we consider the case of backing away from a
lower limit; the cost goes up. Although we have considered the special case of three
machines, the result in the general case is the same. Since no improvement results by
any perturbation, the dispatch rule is optimal. It is easy to check that (11.45) still
gives the sensitivity of cost rate increase to increase in power demand, where the
summation is only over the units not at their limits and the ,\ is the common value for
these units. We stilI call ,\ the system '\, or system incremental cost.
Example 11.9
Suppose that in Example 11.8 the generator limits are
50 MW ~ PCI ~ 200 MW
50 MW ~ PC2 ~ 600 MW
Find the optimal dispatch for Po = 700 MW. Find the system incremental cost and
compare with the result in Example 11.8.
Solution Following the suggested procedure for finding A, we can use the graph of Ies
in Example 11.8. With A = 45.1, say, both generators operate within their constraints
but the total generation is less than the required 700 MW. Raising A, we find that gen-
erator 2 reaches its upper limit (600 MW) before the total generation has reached 700
MW. Fixing PG2 '" 600 MW, we immediately get PCI == 700 - PC2 == 100 MW.
In this example there is a simpler alternative solution. First, solve the problem
without the limits; this was done in Example 11.8 with the result PCI = 84.6 MW and
PC2 = 615.4 MW. Second, noting that PG2 has exceeded its upper limit (600 MW), we
set PC2 = 600 MW. Then, it immediately follows that PCI == 100 MW.
We note that we can extend the alternative solution method to more general
problems, but occasionally errors may result in those cases where both upper and lower
limits are violated simultaneously. If only upper limits, or only lower limits, are violated,
the alternative method works fine.
Finally, we can calculate the system incremental cost. This is the (common) A
for the units not at their limits. In our case generator 1 is the only such unit. From Ex-
ample 11.8 we have lei = 45 + 0.02PCI ' Evaluated for PCI = 100 MW, we get
A = 47. This is higher than the value (46.69) found in Example 11.8.
Example 11.10
For the generating units in Example 11.8 subject to the limits in Example 11.9, consider
a range of possible values for Po. rather than the single fixed value 700 MW.
(a) Plot PGI and PC2 versus Po for optimal dispatch.

(b) Find the system incremental cost Aas a function of total generator output,
Po = PCI + Pc2 • .
Solution (a) We plot the Ie curves as in Example 11.8 but this time showing the lim-
its [Figure E11.l0 (a)]. For values of A up to 46, PCI = 50 MW (at its lower limit),
while PG2 = Po - 50 MW supplies the remainder of the load. For values of
46 < A < 46.6, neither unit is limited and we can find PCi by using the Ie formulas
in Example 11.8. For values of A greater than 46.6, PCl == 600 (at its upper limit)
and PCI '" Po - 600. The results are shown in the curves in Figure 11.10(b). As
:;;0"""
expected, since the incremental costs of unit 1 are so high, it does not come away from
its lower limit until unit 2 is heavily loaded (500 MW).
49
:2 48
~
::E
~'0 46.6
47
I
-----1--------------------
.
:::,
1;:
46 +-----~--------------- :
..::
0
u I I I
45
I I I
•E I I I
I I I
fl 44 I I
.: I I
I
I
I
50 300
Pci(MW)
Figure E11.10(a) Generator incremental costs.
600 ---------------------------""7""--""1
mo ----------------------
~ 400
e.
•
;;'"
o 300
Se
."
v
" 200
100
50
o 100 200 300 400 500 550 600 700 800
Figure E11.10(b) Division of load between generators.

(b) While unit 1 is at its lower limit (i.e., for A < 46), A. '= 43 + 0.006PC2 '=
43 + 0.006(Po - 50) = 42.7 + 0.006Po.While unit 2 is at its upper limit (i.e., for
A > 46.6), A '= 45 + 0.02PCI = 45 + 0.02(Po - 600) '= 33 + 0.02PD. When both
generators are away from their limits, A = 43.46 + 0.0046PD• The resulting system A
is shown in FigureEl1.10(c).
50
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Figure E11.10(c) Incremental fuel costs.
We can interpret the curve of Aversus PD as that of an equivalent generator

supplying the power PCI + PG2 . This viewpoint finds some advantages when con-
sidering all the (online) generators at a given location (i.e., at a power plant). A curve
such as Figure E11.l0(c) adequately characterizes the plant for fmding the econom-
ic dispatch with respect to the rest of the system. Of course, the plant operator needs
to be aware of the optimal division of generation among the various local generat-
ing units. This is obtained from curves such as Fig. El1.l0(b).
Finally, we consider a case with a particularly simple solution. Suppose that
the Ie curves look as shown in Figure 11.20. We can easily show that the following
procedure for loading up the units is optimal. We first load up unit 1 until it reach-
es its upper limit, then load up unit 2 similarly, and finally unit 3. We do not operate
~ICI
Figure 11.20 Order-of-merit
dispatch.
I
I
m
at equal Ie because only one generator at a time is not at a limit. We need only de-
cide in which order to load the generators. Unit 1 is "best," so it is first on our list,
followed by unit 2, and then unit 3. This is the order of merit method of dispatch.
Exercise 7. For a case similar to Figure 11.20, sketch the system Aas a function
of PD PGl + Paz + PG3 .
11.10 LINE LOSSES CONSIDERED
If all the generators are located in one plant or are otherwise very close geographi-
cally, it is physically reasonable to neglect line losses in calculating the optimal dis-
patch. On the other hand, if the power stations are spread out geographically, the
transmission-line (link) losses must usually be considered, and this will modify the op-
timal generation assignments as determined in the preceding section.
To take a simple case, suppose that all the generating units on the system are
identical. Then, considering line losses, we expect it will be cheaper to draw most
heavily from the generators closest to the loads, and this expectation is confirmed in
analyses that include the line losses.
The standard approach to the problem of considering line losses can be un·
derstood by assuming that we have an expression for the total line losses, PL , in terms
of generator outputs. We next consider the form of such an expression. From the law
of conservation of power we know that
(11.46)
where PL is the total line loss and the P; are the bus powers. We assume that the n
Pm are specified and fixed but the PGi are variables. With the PDifixed, it can be
seen from (11.46) that PL depends only on the PGi• In fatt, however, only m 10f
the PGi are independent variables. As discussed in Chapter 10, bus 1 is a slack or
swing bus and the bus power PI (and hence PG! PI + PD!) is a dependent variable
found by solving the power flow equations. Thus, for a given system and a given
base case (i.e., specific choice of SDi :::. PDi + jQDi at all buses and rV;1 specified at
buses 1,2,3, ... ,m), the functional dependence of PL on the generator outputs
may be written
(11.47)
Two points should be noted. The first is that the function in (11.47) depends on the
choice of base case. The second is that (11.47) is not an explicit formula but depends
on the solution of implicit equations (Le., the power flow equations).
We now can state a version of the optimization problem involving line losses.
Sec, 11.10 Line Losses Considered 417
Problem Statement. Pick the PGi to minimize

m
Cr 2: C,(PaJ
i=1
subject to
m
2: PCi - P (P L G2 , , , , , PCm) - PD = 0
i=1
and
i::: 1,2, ' , , ,m
Note: The equality constraint is simply a rearrangement of (11.46) and is once

again a statement of conservation of (active) power,
Just as in the lossless case, we will first consider the case without the generator
limits, To obtain at least a formal solution, we can use the method of Lagrange mul-
tipliers, Define the augmented cost function
Cr == i~C;(Pc;) - '\(~PCi - PL(PC2 , ' , , ,PCm) - PD)
We next find a stationary point of Cr with respect to ,\ and the PCi :

dCT m
- = 2: PCi - PL - PD = 0 (11.48)
d'\ i=1
,\ 0 (11.49)
dPC1 dPc1
dCT == dC;(PCi ) _ \
1\
(1 _aP L) == 0 i == 2"", m (11,50)
dPCi dPCi aPCi
An alternative expression for (1150) is
1 dC;(Pc;)
-_.--=,\ i == 2, , ' , ,m
1 aPL dPCi (11,51 )
aPGi
Next define the penalty factor L; for the ith generator,
LI = l' (11.52a)
i == 2,3, . , , ,m (11,52b)
Substituting (11.52b) in (1151) and (11.52a) in (11.49), the necessary condi-

tions for optimization given in (11.49) and (11.50) may be replaced by
dC l dCz dCm
Ll dP. = Lz dP.GZ = =L - = A
m dF
(11.53)
Gl Gm
Recalling that dC/ dFG; are the incremental costs, we now get the following rule.
Optimal Dispatch Rule (Line Losses Considered-No Generator Limits).

Operate all generators so that the product L; X Ie; = Afor every generator.
We see that it is no longer optimal to operate each generator at the same in-
cremental cost. The les now must be weighted by the penalty factors Li; a large
penalty factor makes the corresponding plant less attractive and a smaller Ie from
that plant is required.
If we now reintroduce the generator limits we find a rule analogous to the one
in the lossless case.
Optimal Dispatch Rule (Line Losses Considered). Operate all generators, not
at their limits, such as to satisfy
L; X Ie; = A (11.54)
We deal with the limits just as we did in Section 11.9.
We next illustrate the use of the optimal dispatch rule with a simple two-bus ex-
ample in which an explicit expression for h(FGZ ) is given. We defer the important
question of how to obtain such an expression for the losses.
Example 11.11
Consider a system without generator limits (Figure El1.11). Assume that
IC! = 0.007PG! + 4.1 dollars/MWh
IC 2 = 0.007PG2 + 4.1 dolIars/MWh
PL = 0.001(PG2 - 50? MW
:,;
Find the optimal generation for each plant and the power loss in the transmission link.
PDl = 300 MW
PDl = 50MW Figure E11.11
Solution We first calculate

aP
ap.L = 0.002(PGl - 50) = 0.002PGl - 0.1
G2
Sec. 11.10 Line Losses Considered 419
Using (11.52), we find the penalty factors

1
Lz = - - - -
1.1 - 0.002Pcz
Applying the appropriate optimal dispatch rule, we get two equations:
dCI
LI dP = 0.007 PCI + 4.1 = A
CI
dCz 1
Lz dPcz = 1.1 _ 0.002P (0.007Pcz + 4.1)
cz
= A
We next need to pick an initial value of Aand solve for PGl and Pcz. For this purpose
a more convenient form of the equations is
A- 4.1
PGI = 0.007
1.1A - 4.1
Pcz = 0.007 + 0.002A
Starting with A = 5.0, we calculate

PCI = 128.6 MW Pcz = 82.4 MW
Since PGl + PGZ - PL = 210 MW is less than Po = 350 MW, we need to increase A.
A= 6 turns out to be too large. After a few iterations we find A= 5.694, which gives
PGI = 227.72, Pcz = 117.65, PL = 4.58, and Pel + Pcz - PL = 349.9. This last value
is close enough to Po = 350.
Example 11.12
Consider the same system as in Example 11.11. Suppose that we wish to supply the
same load (i.e., Po = 350 MW) but neglect line losses in carrying out the optimization.
Find PGl> PGZ, PL , and the increased cost per hour in delivering the load under the
nonoptimal condition.
Solution Since the generator IC curves are identical, if we neglect line losses, we
should pick PCI = Pcz· Then PCI + Pm - PL = 2Pcz - O,OOl(PGZ - 50? ;= 350.
Solving the quadratic, we get two solutions. The physically reasonable value is
PCI = Pm = 183.97 MW. Then PL = 17.95 MW. Note how much higher the losses
are compared with Example 11.11.
To calculate the increased cost, we note that the given IC characteristic implies
the following fuel-cost curve: .
C;(Pc;) = a + 4.1PGi + 0.0035P~; dollars/hr
The constant term a is not specified nor is it needed in calculating the increased
cost. When PCI = PGZ = 183.97 MW.
CT = C1(PCI ) = Cz(Pczl = 2a + 1745.47 dollars/hr
With the optimal dispatch (from Example 11.11), PG1 = 227.71 MW and
PG2 = 117.65 MW. We get
Cr = C1(PGl ) + CiPd = 20' + 1645.90 dollars/hr
The increased cost is therefore $99.571hr.
!
Exercise 7. In Example 11.11, aPd aPG2 = 0.002(PG2 - 50) can be a positive or
negative number depending on whether PG2 is greater or less than 50 Mw: In this case
the penalty factor L2 can be less than or greater than 1.0. Consider the effect on the
optimal dispatch and decide whether the result seems physically reasonable. Hint:
Note that PD2 = 50 MW, so PG2 - 50 represents active power transmitted down
the line.
Finally, we consider the physical significance of Ain the present case. In the
lossless case we found that Arelated increase in cost rate (dollars/hr) to increase in
power demand (MW). Is this still true with losses?
Suppose that for a given set of P~i' we find the optimal set of P~i and the cor-
responding C~. Now increase the total load incrementally from P~ to
PD = P~ + APD ; it does not matter how the increment of increased demand is dis-
tributed. We wish to find the new cost CT' Using a two-term Taylor series as in
(11.43), we get the same result:
O
dC(P
ACT = 2: -
m
'_c, APCi )
(11.55)
i~l dPe;
The increments in generator powers must satisfy a power balance equation,
m
2: APe; -
i~l
APL = APD (11.56)
Now we also have, for the new line losses, using a two-teQil Taylor series,
PL = PL(P~ + APG2 , P~3 + APC3 , ... 'P~m + APcm )
m ap (pO) (11.57)
=P~ + 2:~APGi
i~2 aPGi
Then
(11.58)
Using (11.58) in (11.56), we get
(11.59)
Sec. 11.11 Calculation of Penalty Factors 421
We note that the quantities in brackets are the reciprocals of the penalty fac-
tors L i• Using also the definition Ll = 1, we may replace (11.59) by
m
2: Li- 1
l:.PCi = l:.PD (11.60)
i=1
Since we have been assuming optimal dispatch, Li X IC i = A, i = 1,2, ... ,m.

Then from (11.55) and (11.60), we find
m
l:.Cr = A 2: Li 1
l:.PCi = At:.PD (11.61)
i=1
The end result is exactly the same as in (11.45). Just as previously, if some genera-
tors are at their limits, we exclude them and sum only over the generators associ-
ated with the common value A.
11.11 CALCULATION OF PENALTY FACTORS
In Example 11.11 we were given an explicit expression for PL in terms of PC2 from
which L2 could be found. Suppose that the expression is not given. How can we
find the penalty factors? We turn next to this question.
We will need to consider the transmission network in more detail. For this pur-
pose it is convenient to go back to the per unit system. We can rewrite (11.33) using
PCi = PCip .u X s1¢ with Slj in MW.
C; = Cli + f3iSljPCiPU. + "I;(Slj?P~iP,U. dollars/hr (11.62)
We can replace (11.38) by
_ dC; _ 3¢
IC i - dP - f3i + 2"1;(S B JPCipu. dollars/MWh (11.63)
ci
Thus, the conversion to the p.u. system is very simple. In (11.63) instead of "Ii we
have "IiSlj; in (11.62) we have f3i s1¢ instead of f3i and "Ii (S1¢j2 instead of "Ii' We end
up with the same expressions but with different numerical values for the constants.
For the rest of the chapter except in specific instances that will be identified, we will
be using the per unit system and it is usually unambiguous and simpler to drop the p.u.
notation. Also, it is to be noted that, in a sense, the units do the talking; in dealing with
a practical system, if we indicate PCi = 1, it is almost a certainty that it is 1 p.u.
We return now to the problem of calculating penalty factors and consider an ex-
ample that suggests how they may be found in general.
Example 11.13
Consider a system similar to the one in Example 11.11, but without an explicit formu-
la for PL in terms of PG2 (Figure E11.13). Assume that the generator ICs are the same
as in Example 11.11. Assume that s1~ = 100 MW. Then, using (11.63),
IC I = 4.1 + 0.7 PGlp.ll doliars/MWh (11.64 )

IC 2 = 4.1 + 0.7 PG2pll dollars/MWh (11.65)
To check, note that if PGl = 100 MW, then PGl p.ll. = 1 and IC I = 4.8 dollars/MWh,
just as in the previous fonnula. In (11.64) and (11.65) tbe per unit notation was retained
but in the rest of the example we will simplify and drop the p.u. subscript.
ZL =0.D2 +;0.08 p.u. Figure E11.13

Next we calculate YL = zL: l = 2.94 - j11.76. Fromthis the admittance pa-
rameters are seen to be
Gll = G22 = 2.94 G12 =G21 = - 2.94
Bll = B22 = -11.76 B12 = B2l = 11.76
From (10.30) we get
PGl - POl = P = 2.94(1 - cos 012 ) + 11.76 sin 012
J (11.66)
PG2 = P2 = 2.94(1 - cos 012 ) - 11.76 sin 012 (11.67)
By the law of conservation of power, we then get
PL = P + P2 = 5.88(1 - cos 012 )
J
(11.68)
Note that this very simple expression for power loss is explicit in tenns of 012 , Note that
PG2 is also an explicit function of 012 , This suggests using 012 as an intennediary to
avoid the problem of the non explicit dependence of PL on PG2' Following this lead we
get, by the chain rule of differentiation, ':.Ii
dPL = dPL dPG2
(11.69)
dO l2 dPG2 d0 12
We remind the reader that consistent with our fonnulation, PL depends only on PG2;
PGl, specified by the slack variable PI, is not an independent variable. Using (11.68),
we get
(11.70)
Using (11.67) yields

dPG2 dP .
de = -de2 = 2.94 sm e12 - 11.76 cos e12 (11.71)
12 12
Inserting (11.70) and (11.71) in (11.69), we get

dPL 5.88 sin BIZ
(11.72)
dPGZ 2.94 sin BIZ - 11.76 cos BIZ
Thus we can calculate the required penalty factor:
1 11.76 cos BIZ - 2.94 sin BIZ 1 - 0.25 tan BIZ
L, = (11.73)
- 1 - dPd dPaz 11.76 cos BIZ + 2.94 sin BIZ 1 + 0.25 tan BIZ
Note that L z is an explicit function of elz even though, through (11.67), it is an implic-
it function of PGl' We next need to choose POI so that we can proceed numerically.
Suppose that we choose POI = 3.0 p.u. (which corresponds to 300 MW). We next wish
to illustrate the technique of finding the optimal dispatch.
The basic underlying technique is to pick PG2 , and in succession, find BIZ, PGl> Lz,
and check (11.54). If (11.54) is not satisfied, we pick a better PG2 and continue to it-
erate until convergence is obtained. In fact, it is much simpler to iterate on the choice
of elz illustrated as follows. Initial guess: ell = -5°. Then we calculate,
PI = -1.0138 => PGI = 1.9862 from (11.66)
Pz = 1.0361 => PG2 = 1.0361 from (11.67)
rC I = 5.4903 rc z = 4.8253 from (11.64) and (11.65)
L\ = 1.0 Lz = 1.0447 from (11.73)
Lz X rc z = 5.0410
We see that (11.54) is not satisfied and Pcz should be increased. If Pcz is in-
creased, IC zand Lz will increase while PCI will decrease, causing rC I to drop. A few
steps of the iteration bring us to the value BIZ = -6.325° and
PI = -1.2777 => PGI = 1.7223
Pz = 1.3135 => PGZ = 1.3135
rC I = 5.3056 rc z = 5.0194
LI = 1.0 L z = 1.0570
This satisfies (11.54) close enough and we stop here. Converting to MW values, we get
PCI = 172.23 MW = 131.35 MW
Pcz
POI == 300.00 MW PL = 3.58 MW
Note: Neglecting line losses, we would have picked PCI = Pcz.
Exercise 8. From (11.62) we can deduce that Ci in Example 11.13 has the form
Ci = Ui + 410PGipu. + 35P~iP.U'
I
I
I,
Thus we can calculate CT to within a constant. Convince yourself that the values of
PGl and Pez corresponding to 012 = -6.325° are optimal. (Try other values of 0l2, find
the corresponding PGl and PG2 , and calculate CT')
The example offers a clue to a general method for finding the penalty factors.
The clue is to use the system 0iS as the intermediaries. This is bound to be helpful
since we can calculate the apm/ao k explicitly from the power flow equations. We
have, fIrst of all,
n m n
PL= ~p; = ~Pm - ~PDi (11.46)
i=l ;=1 ;=1
where the 1'; are the bus powers. Using (11.46), we can calculate (using PL = 2:7= 1 P;)
aPL aP1 aPm aP + aP

- =- + " . +- +- m1 + " . +- n k = 2,3, ... ,n (11.74)
aO k aOk aOk OOk aO k
Since 01 = constant (= 0°), we don't include k = 1.
Note that we sum contributions from all n buses, not just the m generator buses.
Since we are including load buses (without voltage support), the load voltage mag-
nitudes may vary with 0, and strictly speaking, this dependence should be included in
evaluating the ap/oo k• For simplicity, however, we will assume the IViI are constant
at all buses. The assumption is not an unreasonable approximation. The reader may
recognize this as an application of the active power model discussed in Section 10.8.
Now, with any given 8, with components O2 , .•. , On, we can calculate the
aP;j aO k explicitly from the power flow equations (10.30). Taking account of the re-
lation Pm = P; - PDi' we note also that with load powers fixed,aP;jaO k = aPG/aOkfor
i = 1,2, ... ,m.
Equation (11.74) gives one expression for aPdao k ; we next derive an alterna-
tive expression using (11.47) that involves quantities we need in calculating the penal-
ty factors. Thus, using the chain rule differentiation, .:"
aPL apL(p G) ap
z ... + - - - apL(pG) aPm
-=---+ k = 2, 3, . . . , n (11.75)
OOk apez aOk aPGm aOk
In (11.75) we made use of the fact that at generator buses aPGjaO k = aP;jao k. We also
used the notation PL(P G) to emphasize that the partial derivatives were of the func-
tion PL in (11.47). Since the function PL does not include PGl among its arguments,
aPd aPGl = 0 and is not included in (11.75).
We can proceed as follows. Subtract (11.75) from (11.74) to get
... + aPm(1 _ aPL ) + aPm+1 + ... + oPn = 0

aOk aPGm aO k aO k
k = 2,3, ... ,n (11.76)
In matrix form we can replace (11.76) by
_aP2 ... -aPm ... -aPn

a0 2 a0 2 a0 2 L aP
1-- (11.77)
aPCm
_aP2 ... aPm ... -aPn
- 1
aO n aO n aO n
Since the terms in the matrix in (11.77) relate the bus powers Pi to the angles Ok> it is
not surprising that the matrix is just the transpose of J II found in Section 10.6.
Since Jll is used in a similar manner in the iterative solution of power flow equa-
tions by the Newton-Raphson method, computer programs for the solution of (11.77)
are readily available. We can then obtain the m - 1 unknown values of 1 - aPd aPCi '
An expression for aN aOi on the right side of (11.77) is needed and may easily
be found from (10.30). It is
aP
ae.
1
,
= IVjIIV;1 [G
•
li sm (0 1 - oa - Bli cos (0 1 - OJ] i = 2,3, ... ,n (11.78)
We next consider in outline the solution for the optimal dispatch. For simplic-
ity assume that none of the generators are at their limits (i.e., all the committed gen-
erators are available for adjustment). Figure 11.21 is a flowchart that describes the
solution, where
1. The single lines represent scalars. The double lines represent vectors with
components over the index set i = 2, 3,. . . ,n, except in the case of the vec-
tors involving the PGi and Li , which have components over the index set i = 2,
3, ... ,m.
2. F generates corrections to PGi in the event that (11.54) is not satisfied. If
Li X IC i is too low (high) compared with LI X IC I , the corresponding PCi
should be raised (lowered).
3. The equation numbers in the blocks describe the operation.
The steps in the solution are the following.
1. Starting with a set of POi' i = 1, 2, ... ,n and an initial set of P~;, i = 2,

3, ... ,m, we calculate ~ = PCi - POi' i = 2,3, ... ,n, and enter the power
flow program and compute Oi' i = 2,3, ... ,n. Since we are using the active
power model (all the IV;I assumed known), it is appropriate to use (10.51a).
2. We can now calculate the slack bus power PI using (10.30) and then
PGl = PI + PD!'
3. Using (11.78), we also calculate aNao;, i = 2, 3, ... , m, and with J I1 (O) in

(11.77) solve for 1 - aPd aPGil i = 2,3, ... , m. Taking reciprocals, we have
the L i, i = 2, 3, . . . , m.
4. Since L1 = 1, we now have all the Li. We also have all the PGi, so we can cal-
culate the lei' Multiplying, we get the products Li X lei' If they are all equal,
we have the optimal dispatch. If not, we need to change the PGi , i = 2,
3, ... ,m, and iterate. If a particular product is too low (high) compared with
L1 X Ie 1 , the corresponding PGi should be raised (lowered).
This outline concludes the various solution steps. Although the outline does not
constitute an algorithm, it is perhaps easier to follow because it is divorced from de-
tailed computational considerations.
It is important to note that in Figure 11.21 the basic input is the set of PDil i = 1,
2, ... , n, while the output is the set of optimal PGi , i = 1, 2, ... , m. In practice,
since the load varies, it is desirable to recalculate the PGi' This is done "online" at 3-
to 5-minute intervals at least during times of variable load.
We consider next a very simple example which illustrates the calculation out-
lined in Figure 11.21.
pDi i = 2, 3, ... , n
!
Figure 11.21 Solution outline of optimal dispatch.

Example 11.14
Consider the system shown in Figure E11.14. Assume that
lei = 4.1 + 0.7 PCi i = 1,2
ZL\ = 0.0099 + jO.099

ZLl = 0.0198 + jO.l98
For simplicity we have picked values such that ZL2 = 2zL\' Although the gen-
erators are identical, line 2 has more resistance than line 1 and we expect more of the
load will be carried by unit 1. We next find
YLi = zLI = 1 - j10

YL2 = zLi = 0.5 - jS.O
and assemble Ybu,
PDl = 3.0
Figure E11.14
-1 - jlO 0 0-1 + j10'

Ybu , = 0 -0.5 - jS.O -0.5 + j5.0
[
-1 + jlO -0.5 + j5.0 -1.5 - j15
From Ybu, we get the values of Y;k = Gik + j Bik • From (10.30) we get
p\(O) = 1 - cos 8ll + 10 sin 8ll (11.79)
Pz(O) = 0.5 - 05 cos e Zl + 5 sin ell (11.80)
PM) = 1.5 - cos 83\ + 10 sin 83\ - 0.5 cos e lZ + 5 sin 832 (11.81)
We can also find

3
PL = ~ ~(O) = 3 - 2 cos ell - cos 8n (11.82)
i=i
and note as a check that with 0 = 0, PL = U, as expected.

To find J\\ we take the required partial derivatives aP;jae j , i, j = 2,3.
apz .
-8 = 0.5 sm 823 + 5 cos 8Zl
az
apz
ae = -0.5 sin eZl - 5 cos 823
3
(11.83)
aP •
-a8 3 = -0.5 sm 632 - 5 cos 83Z
2
aP • •
-a8 3 = sm 831 + 10 cos 831 + 0.5 sm 832 + 5 cos 832
3
Using (11.78), we calculate

aP1
-=0
alh
(11.84)
aP1
- = -sin 813 - 10 cos 813
a8 3
In this case (11.77) reduces to the form
[:: :~1 [1-

apz a~
- -
aOl ae3
:::z1 = _[ aP0
1 - 1
afh
j
and it is easy to solve for 1 - apd apGZ by using Cramer's rule. We get
Substituting from (11.83) and (11.84), we get

r- 1 _ 10 cos 8ll + sin 813 10 cos 823 - sin 823
2 - 10 cos 913 - sin 813 10 cos 923 + sin 923
Thus
1 - 0.1 tan 913 1 + 0.1 tan 823

L2 = (11.85)
1 + 0.1 tan 813 1 - 0.1 tan 823
which is a very nice closed-form solution in this particular example.
Sec. 11 .12 Economic Issues and Mechanisms 429
We next need to calculate the ajj corresponding to a particular PG2 . For the ini-
tial choice we pick PG2 = 1.5. Then P1 = 1.5. We now do a simple power flow calcu-
lation. From (11.80) we solve (iteratively) for 813 = 17.19°. From (11.81), with
Pl = - POl = -3.0, we solve for 8ll = -811 = 8.956". From (11.79) we find
PI = PG1 = 1.569. Now we find
leI = 5.198
1e z = 5.150
Using the angles 8ll = 8.956° and 82] = 17.19° in (11.85),

L z = 1.0309
LI is always 1, so
LI X leI = 5.198
L z x Ie z = 5.309
The second product is too large relative to the fIrst, so we need to decrease PGz .
Pick Pcz = 1.4 and repeat the iteration. We find successively 813 = 16.028°,
all = 9.513°, PCI = 1.667, leI = 5.267, IC 2 = 5.080, and Lz = 1.0242. Then
LI x leI = 5.269
L2 x 1e 2 = 5.203
We need to bring up the second product. In this manner we can continue the iterations
and soon reach the values PG2 = 1.4365,8lJ = 16.451°,8 13 = 9.309°, PCI = 1.6308,
leI = 5.2415, Ie 2 = 5.1056, and L z = 1.0266. Then
LI X leI = 5.2415
L2 x Ie 2 = 5.2416
This is certainly close enough, so we stop here. In fact, in practice we would have
stopped before this point because the accuracy of the source data and the intended ap-
plication do not warrant the precision in the calculation. As a check of the calculation
we can calculate the variable part of the total cost Cr and verify that the last iteration
gives the smallest Cr among the various trials. .
11.12 ECONOMIC ISSUES AND MECHANISMS IN THE NEW

MARKET ENVIRONMENT
Most modern-day power systems have interconnections with all the neighboring sys-
tems. This allows the flexibility for any system to buy or sell interchange power si-
multaneously with several neighboring systems. The price for the interchange is set
taking into account all the other interchanges. For instance, if an electric company
sells interchange power to two neighbors, and if one sale is made after the other, the
electric company would in all probability quote a higher price for the second sale,
since the first sale would have caused the incremental cost to increase. Alternately,
if the utility selling the power was a member of a power pool, the price would include
the power and energy pricing portions of the pool agreement, and the seller would
receive the cost of the generation for the sale together with some fraction of the total
savings of all the purchasers. In this case, the sale prices would be computed by the
pool control center and would be different from the prices under multiple inter-
change contracts. The order in which the interchange transaction agreements are
made is of importance in costing the interchange when a central pool dispatching
office does not exist.
With the advent of competition and open access, an electric supplier not in a
neighboring system could wheel power across an intermediate system or systems to
a customer. In this situation, the intermediate system's transmission system is used
to transmit power from the supplier to the customer. The AGC in the intermediate
system will keep net interchange at a specified value. Wheeling would result in trans-
mission losses in the intermediate system. Hence, wheeling charges will be assessed
for such an interchange. Engineering constraints and economics would be included
in determining the wheeling charges.
There are other types of interchanges that could be set up between utilities.
These include capacity interchange, diversity interchange, energy banking, and in-
advertent power exchange. For a discussion of these topics, the reader is referred to
Wood and Wollenberg.
Interchange of power between systems can lead to economic benefits. To max-
imize these benefits, several utilities in the United States have formed power pools
that incorporate a common dispatch center. This entity administers the power pool
and sets up the interchange between members. In addition to providing greater
economies in operation, the pools provide increased reliability by allowing members
to draw energy during emergencies and cover each others' fI~~erves during mainte-
nance or forced outages. Further details of pool operation fre provided in Wood
and Wollenberg (Chapter 10).
In the new environment of competition, it is envisioned that operations will
move from a cost-based market to a price-based market. An auction market mech-
anism (described in Kumar and Sheble) is one of the various ways to perform price-
based operation. In what follows, the operation of the brokerage system is assumed
to be on an hourly basis. The auction market structure can be thought of as a com-
puterized market. Each market player has a terminal (PC, workstation, etc.) con-
nected to an auctioneer (auction mechanism) and a contract evaluator. Players
generate bids (buy and sell) and submit the quotation to the auctioneer. A bid con-
sists of a specified amount of electricity at a given price. The auctioneer matches the
buy and sell bids subject to approval of the contract evaluator. The contract evalu-
ator verifies that the network can remain in operation with the new bid in place. If
Sec. 11.12 Economic Issues and Mechanisms 431
the network cannot operate reliably, then the match is denied. The role of the con-
tract evaluator is played by the independent system operator (ISO).
The framework for the auction mechanism just described allows for cash (spot
and forward), futures, and planning markets. In the spot market structure, spot con-
tracts reflect the current price of the transaction. A seller and a buyer agree (either
bilaterally or through an exchange) upon a price for a certain number of MWs to be
delivered sometime in the new future (e.g., 50 MW from 2:00 P.M. to 5:00 P.M. tomor-
row). The buyer has need for the electricity, and the seller has electricity to sell, and
an arrangement is made for the energy to be delivered through the electrical trans-
mission system. A forward contract is a binding agreement in which the seller agrees
to deliver an amount of a particular product with a specified quality at a specified time
to the buyer. The forward contract is further into the future than is the spot market.
In both the forward and spot contracts, the buyer and seller want to exchange the
physical commodity (e.g., the energy). Afutures contract is primarily a financial in-
strument that allows traders to lock in a price for a commodity in some future month.
This helps the traders to manage their risk by limiting potential losses or gains. A fu-
tures option contract is a form of insurance that gives the option purchaser the right,
but not the obligation, to buy (sell) futures contract at a given price. For each options
contract, in return for a premium, there is an obligation to sell (buy) at the strike
price. Both the options and futures contracts are financial instruments designed to
minimize risk. Although provisions for delivery exist, they are not convenient. The
trader ultimately cancels his or her position in the futures market with either a prof-
it or a loss. The physical commodity is then purchased on the spot market to meet
demand, with the profit or loss having been locked in via the futures contract. The
growth of the transmission grid requires transmission companies to make contracts
based on the expected usage to finance projects. The planning market would un-
derwrite the usage of equipment subject to long-term commitments to which distri-
butions and generation companies are bound by the rules of network expansion to
maintain a fair market price.
An auction is a method of matching buyer(s) and seller(s) through bids and of-
fers. A double auction has both seller(s) and buyer(s) submitting bids and offers,
while in a single-sided auction only one of these is allowed to submit prices. The
electric system in the United Kingdom uses single-sided auctions in which the elec-
tricity generators submit generator unit commitment schedules with their offer. The
buyers do not submit any bids. The sellers are in competition with each other. In ad-
dition to double- and single-sided auction methods, two companies could also contract
with each other bilaterally outside of an organized exchange. Bilateral agreements
could be considered to be special cases of double auctions in which there is only one
buyer and one seller.
The auction is the pricing mechanism for the markets described previously. In
each of the markets, bids and offers are sorted into descending and ascending order
respectively, similar to the Florida Coordination Group approach described in
Wood and Wollenberg. The average of the bid and offer price of each pair of valid
matches (weighted by the number of megawatts) is used to determine one overall

equilibrium price. This is similar to the power pool split savings approach used in
many regions of North America except that each of the valid contracts will have the
same price. If a sufficient number of valid matches do not occur, then price discov-
ery has not taken place. The auctioneer then reports that price discovery did not
occur and will ask for bids and offers again. The buyers and sellers adjust their bids
and offers and another cycle of the auction is played. The cycle continues until price
discovery occurs, or until the auctioneer decides to match whatever valid matches
exist and continue to the next round or hour of bidding. After price discovery, the
auctioneer asks if another round of bidding is requested. If the market participants
have more energy to sell or buy, they request another round. Allowing multiple
rounds of bidding for each time period allows the participants to use the latest pric-
ing information in forming their present bid. The process is continued until no more
requests are received or until the auctioneer decides that enough rounds have taken
place.
In the competitive environment, when vertically integrated electric companies
are organizationally separated into independent GENCOs, TRANSCOs, and
DISTCOs, several new implications will arise with respect to the traditional concepts
of economic dispatch and load frequency control described earlier in this chapter.
With the advent of independent generation companies, circumstances could exist
whereby generation entities would have only one generator, or existing generation
could be sold (in which case there could be two separate generation companies in an
area that was previously served by a single vertically integrated electric utility). In
the first case of a generation company having only one generator, the need to perform
economic dispatch in a competitive market place does not exist. In the second case,
with each generation company supplying a certain load pattern, the economic dis-
patch will have to be reformulated to match the load supplied by each company and
thus becomes a little more involved.
In terms of load frequency control, if customers in a different control area con-
tract a supplier for load following, then several new issues arise. One solution to this
need is given by performing dynamic scheduling. D¥'hamic scheduling (NERC
Interconnected Operations Services Working Group Final Report, March 1997) ser-
vice provides the metering, telemetering, computer software, hardware, communica-
tions, engineering, and administration required electronically to move a transmission
customer's generation or demand out of the control area to which it is physically con-
nected and into a different control area. This would greatly increase the need for
metering as the number of such customers increases. A brief description of the con-
cept of dynamic scheduling is provided here. In order to illustrate this idea, we first
introduce the notion of host and metered control areas. The host control area for a
load serving entity (LSE) or for a generator is the control area for the transmission
system to which the LSE's load or the generator is physically connected. If the trans-
mission system to which the LSE is connected is physically within several control
areas, these control areas are the host control areas for portions of that LSE's load.
The host control area of LSE never changes so long as the LSE continues to be di-
Sec. 11.13 Transmission Issues and Effects 433
LSE's or generator's
metered or electronic
control area
Figure 11.22 Host and
metered control area concepts
rectly connected to the control area's transmission system. Using dynamic schedul-
ing, an LSE or generator may change its metered control area from its host control
area to a new control area, as shown in Figure 11.22. The new control area then be-
comes the LSE's or generator's metered control area. To clarify this explanation,
consider a large steel plant that is connected to the transmission system in control area
A (new control area). In the new market environment, this steel plant contracts to
obtain its electricity and load-following capability from an electric utility in control
area B (host control area). As a result, the utility in control area B has to adjust its
generation to meet the load demand of the steel plant. If not, the steel plant will
lean on control area A and inadvertently draw power. Dynamic scheduling allows the
existing schedule of interchange between control area A and control area B to be
adjusted dynamically by monitoring the steel mill load and adjusting the ACE be-
tween the two areas.
11.13 TRANSMISSION ISSUES AND EFFECTS IN THE NEW

MARKET ENVIRONMENT
With the advent of the competitive market structure and the flexibility to wheel
power across the transmission network, several technical issues dealing with the
network's capability to transfer power arise. These issues involve the physical ca-
pacity of the network to handle power flows reliably or securely. The Federal En-
ergy Regulatory Commission (FERC) issued orders 888 and 889, which specified
the role of available transmission capability (ATC) in using the transmission sys-
tem open access for effective competition and established the Open Access Same
Time Information System (OASIS). The OASIS started operation on January 3,

1997, with postings of the required ATC information. FERC's clear intent is for the
transmission providers to make available commercially useful and applicable in-
formation, It is clear from this initiative that the transmission service is the most
critical element in making competitive markets work. Transmission systems are
currently being used in a manner for which they were not planned or designed.
The number of transmission transactions has increased. Transmission constraints
are being reached with a higher frequency, and there is an increase in the reserva-
tions made for firm transactions, Following the FERC order, the North American
Reliability Council (NERC) brought together the industry to establish a frame-
work for ATC definition and evaluation. NERC formulated key principles of ATe
evaluation that require compliance by all systems, power pools, subregions, and re-
gions. These concepts are presented in several NERC reports that are available at
the following Web site: http://www.nerc.com/. The essential features of these con-
cepts are discussed next.
The transfer capability is a network number. It measures the ability of the in-
terconnected electric systems to move or transfer power reliably from one location
to another taking into consideration all the transmission lines or paths between the
two locations under specified conditions. This number is defined for a given send-
ing area (source) and a given receiving area (sink), for a specific time, and is depen-
dent on the parameters of the state of the system. In order to calculate ATC, the
following components need to be defined and evaluated:
Total transfer capability (TIC) determines the amount of electric power that can
be transferred over the interconnected transmission network in a reliable man-
ner based on all of the following conditions:
1. For the existing or planned system configuration, and with normal (pre-
contingency) operating procedures in effect, all facility loadings are with-
in normal ratings and all voltages are within normal limits.
2. The electric systems are capable of absorbing the dyifamic power swings,
and remain stable, following a disturbance that results in the loss of any
single electric system element, such as a transmission line, transformer, or
generating unit.
3. After dynamic power swings subside following a disturbance that results
in the loss of any single electric system element, as described in condition
2, and after the operation of any automatic operating systems, but before
any postcontingency operator-initiated system adjustments are imple-
mented, all transmission facility loadings are within emergency ratings
and all voltages are within emergency limits,
4. With reference to condition 1, when precontingency facility loadings reach
normal thermal ratings at a transfer level below that at which any first
contingency transfer limits are reached, the transfer capability is defined
as the transfer level at which such normal ratings are reached.
1
Sec. 11.13 Transmission Issues and Effects 435
S. In some cases depending on the geographical area, specified multiple con-

tingencies may be required to determine the transfer capability limits. If
these limits are more restrictive than the single contingency limits, they
should be used.
With this very general definition, we note that the TTC is a function of system
thermal, voltage, and transient stability limits and is given by
TTC = min (thermal limits, voltage limits, transient stability limits}
Transmission reliability margin (TRM) is the amount of transfer capability nec-

essary to ensure that the interconnected transmission network is secure under
a reasonable range of system conditions. This measure reflects the effect of
various sources of uncertainty in the system and in system operating conditions.
It also captures the need for operational flexibility in ensuring reliable/secure
system operations.
Capacity benefit margin (CEM) is the amount of transfer capability reserved by
load-serving entities to ensure access to generation from interconnected neigh-
boring systems to meet generation reliability requirements.
ATC then is defined to be a measure of the transfer capability remaining in the

physical transmission network for further commercial activity over and above al-
ready committed uses. It is given by the relationship
ATC = TTC - TRM - CBM - existing transmission commitments
FERC requirements call for the calculation and posting (on the OASIS) of continu-
ous ATC information for the next hour, month, and for the following 12 months.
Several regions have already started calculating and posting ATCs. However,
there are certain inconsistencies in their calculation that need to be addressed:
1. Use of real-time conditions for ATC calculation.

2. Use of accurate power flow methods to calculate ATC rather than dc power
flows or linear interpolation techniques.
3. Power system flows are not independent.
4. Individual users do not coordinate their transmission system use.
S. Limiting effects on a transmission system are nonlinear functions of the
power flow. .
We will now address some of these issues and provide an illustrative example ob-
tained from Wollenberg ("Privatization and Energy Management Systems," Pro-
ceedings of the Power System Operators Short Course). The ATe measures the
capability of the transmission system to deliver power from one location to another.
The flow from the production point to the purchase point uses every available trans-
436 Automatic Generation Control and the New Market Envircmment Chap. 11
mission path. The flow on each intermediate transmission facility is determined by

its impedance. As a result, the transmission path cannot be fixed a priori. If any
path is carrying power beyond thermal, voltage, and transient stability limits, the en-
tire transaction must be reduced. The total transfer capability of the transmission sys-
tem is the maximum transfer up to the point where one transmission line in the system
reaches a limit and can be reduced by another transaction.
Example 11.15
In this example we consider a power system consisting of 11 zones and four regions.
The ATC from Zone 1 to Zone 11 is first calculated. This is done by running power
flows and increasing the power injected at Zone 1 and the power obtained at Zone 11
until a limit is reached. In this case, the double circuit line from Zone 10 to Zone 11
reaches a maximum limit of 500 MW when the power injected at Zone 1 is 2070.8 MW.
The power flow pattern is shown in Figure El1.15(a).
From the description just given, we note that the ATC should be calcu-
lated taking into account the thermal, voltage, and transient stability limits. The
system considered in this example has a steady-state contingency limitation. This lim-
itation arises as the result of the outage of anyone circuit between Zone 10
and Zone 11. If anyone of the lines between Zone 10 and Zone 11 is lost, the
flow on the remaining line will be 275 MW. This flow leaves the remaining circuit
at 10% overload (which is allowable as an emergency rating for a short period of
time). This postcontingency situation occurs when tJij!maximum transfer between
Zone 1 and Zone 11 is 1608.5 MW. The flow patterns with both lines in service and
the flow from Zone 1 to Zone 11 at 1608.5 MW are shown in Figure E11.15(b).
The ATC should also take into account other simultaneous transactions. For the
system being considered, the ATC is calculated between Zone 1 and Zone 11, togeth-
er with a second transaction of 3000 MW between Zone 4 and Zone 6. In this case the
limiting contingency is one circuit from Zone 4 to Zone 6. With this simultaneous
transaction, we note that some of the transmission system capability is used up and
the ATC from Zone 1 to Zone 11 is reduced to 1020.7 MW. The power flows in the
system are depicted in Figure El1.l5(c).
Figure E11.15(a) ATC calculation for normal system with Zone 1-Zone 11
flow at 2070.8 MW.
437
REGIONC
Capacity of each
L----/,'--_ _--< circuit is 250 MW.
With loss of one circuit
the remaining circuit
flow is 275 MW.
Figure E11.15(b) ATC calculation taking into account contingencies with

Zone 1-Zone 11 flow at 1608.5 MW.
438
REGIONC
With loss of one

circuit of four on
interface 4 to 6 the
capacity of the
interface drops to
1500 MW and the
flow goes to 1650
MW. REGIOND
Figure E11.1S(c) ATC calculation taking into account contingencies and

additional transaction from Zone 4 to Zone 6 with Zone 1-Zone 11 flow at
1020.7 MW.
439
The ATC for all zone-to-zone transactions as seen on the four Regional OASIS
sites is shown in Table E1Ll5.
TABLE E11.1S ATC FOR ALL ZONE·TO·ZONE TRANSACTIONS

RegionA ATC RegionB ATC RegionC ATC RegionD ATC
From-To MaxMW From-To MaxMW From-To MaxMW From-To MaxMW
1-2 2070.8 4-5 3408.7 8-9 1467.2 11-6 2230.8

2-1 2070.8 5-4 3408.7 9-8 1467.2 11-7 2223.1
1-3 1761.2 4-6 3547.5 8-10 1926.7 11-10 660.8
3-1 1761.2 6-4 3547.5 10-8 1926.7
2-3 1390.6 4-7 4830.3 9-10 1147.3
3-2 1390.6 7-4 4830.3 10-9 1147.3
2-4 3259.0 5-7 3332.1 8-3 1402.7
2-5 2388.1 7-5 3332.1 9-3 974.2
3-8 1402.7 6-7 3334.8 10-11 660.8
3-9 974.2 7-6 3334.8
4-2 3259.0
5-2 2388.1
6-11 2230.8
7-11 2223.1
From the results shown in Table E1Ll5, we would like to depict one important
aspect of the ATC calculations. Given the results posted on the OASIS for the ATC
calculations, in order to determine the ATC from Zone 1 to Zone 11, one cannot sim-
ply connect the dots in the table to obtain the ATC. We note that from Table E11.5
we have the following information:
From To PathATC (from Table E1LlS)
1 2 2070.8MW
2 4 3259.0MWI
4 6 3547.5MW
6 11 2230.8MW
Therefore, the ATC from Zone 1 to Zone 11 is the minimum along the Zonal path
1-2-4-6-11, or ATC from Zone 1 to Zone 11 = 2070.8 MW However, at the flow
level of 2070.8 MW,if one circuit from the Zone 10 to Zone 11 interface is lost, the re-
maining circuit will overload to 141 % of the rating of2S0 MW, which is unacceptable.
As a result, the ATC from Zone 1 to Zone 11 is actually 1608.5 MW without any other
transaction. If one had simply added up all the flows by connecting the dots, the re-
sulting operating condition would be insecure.
The brief deSCription of the ATC calculation provided here shows the important
role power flow calculation will play in the competitive market environment. The
concepts presented here also indicate that a greater emphasis on analysis will be need-
ed to maintain the reliability and security of the system.
Chap.11 Problems 441
In this chapter we considered the two components of automatic generation control:

load frequency contro!.and economic dispatch. In load frequency control, we consid-
ered the modeling of the servo-assisted speed governor and turbine. This led to the
block diagram shown in Figure 11.4. This may be used to complete the block diagram
of the single machine-infinite bus system previously described, and is shown in Figure
11.6. The model now includes both voltage and power control loops. In analyzing the
power control function, we frequently use the much simpler block diagram in Figure
11.8, in which the loops associated with the voltage control system are suppressed.
Similar simplifications are made in dealing with power control in the multima-
chine case. Figure 11.11 shows the resulting block diagram in the case of generating
unit 1. The utility of the model is illustrated by its use in calculating frequency changes
following increases in load as a function of the frequency droop characteristics of the
individual generating units.
We may also use the model to describe pool operation in terms of the behavior
of individual control areas. As an application, in the two-area case it is shown how
tie-line bias control is successful in meeting the basic objectives of pool operation.
Economic dispatch deals with the important problem of minimizing fuel costs
in supplying a given load. This constitutes the second part of AGe. We assume that
fuel-cost curves are available for all the (committed) generating units. In the classic
economic dispatch problem, neglecting losses in the transmission links, we find a sim-
ple optimal dispatch rule: Operate all generators that are not at their limits at equal
incremental cost A.
With transmission-line (link) losses considered, the rule is modified as follows:
Operate all generators that are not at their limits such that for each generator the
product of penalty factor and incremental cost is A. In calculating the penalty factors
(and the optimal dispatch), we use iterative techniques as described in Section 11.11.
The importance of controlling generator output to reduce fuel costs is also discussed.
We introduce some emerging concepts with regard to economic issues and mech-
anisms in a competitive electricity market. We present some concepts of pool opera-
tion and introduce the mechanism of the auction market. The potential effect of these
changes on economic dispatch and load frequency control are also presented.
Finally, the impact of the new market environment on the power system network
related to operations is presented. Concepts dealing with transfer capability are pre-
sented. The various components involved in calculating ATC are described, and the
role of power flow analysis in meeting NERC requirements in the competitive envi-
ronment is highlighted.
Problems
11.1. A turbine-generator set is operating open loop (i.e., the generator speed wis not fed back
to the governor). The turbine output is 500 MW at 3600 rpm. System parameters are
'-'
R = 0.01 rad/MW-sec, h = 0.001 sec, and Tr = 0.1 sec. Suppose now that the output
increases to 600 MW. Find the new turbine speed.
11.2. For the isolated generating station with local load shown in Figure PI 1.2, it is observed
that APL = 0.1 brings about Aw = -0.2 in the steady state.
(a) Find 1/ R.
(b) Specify APe to bring Aw back to zero (i.e., back to the frequency w = wo).
Aw Figure P11.2
11.3. Assume an isolated generating station with a local load and with Tc = 0,
Tr = 1, Tp = 20, jj = 10-2, R = 2.5, APL = u(t), and APe = O. These constants are
appropriate for calculating Aw in rad/sec. Determine Aw(t).
11.4. Suppose that the generator in Problem 11.3 is connected to a large system through a tie
line with Tl2 = 10. Assume that the large system is approximated by an infinite bus.
Making reasonable approximations, solve for Aw(t) and compare the results with those
in Problem 11.3.
11.5. Two machines on speed-governor control are interconnected and supplying the same
load, when the load suddenly increases such that the steady-state frequency deviation
is 0.015 Hz. If both machines have a droop of 5% (R = 0.05), and machine A is rated
at 250 MW while machine B is rated at 400 MW, compute the steady-state deviation in
power for each machine.
11.6 You are given two system areas connected by a tie line with the following characteristics:
Area 1 Area 2
R = O.Olp.u. R -- 0.02p.u. 'oJ
D = 0.8p.u. D = 1.0p.u.
Base MYA = 500 Base MYA = 500
A load change of 100 MW occurs in area 1. Assume both areas were at nominal fre-
quency (60 Hz) to begin.
(a) What is the new steady-state frequency in Hz?
(b) What is the change in tie-line flow in MW?
11.7. The fuel input rate of a gas-fired generating unit is approximated as follows:
fuel input rate = 175 + 8.7 Pc + 0.0022P~ MBtu/hr
where Pc is the 3rjJ power output in MW. If the cost of gas is $5 per MBtu, find
(a) The fuel input rate when the unit is delivering 100 MW
(b) The corresponding fuel cost in dollarslhr

(c) The incremental cost in dollars/MWh
(d) The approximate cost in dollars/hr to deliver 101 MW
11.S. Assume that we have the following fuel-cost curves for three generating units:
C1(PC1 ) = 300 + 8.0PC1 + 0.0015P81
C2(PC2 ) = 450 + 8.0PC2 + 0.0005P82
C](Pd = 700 + 7.5Pc] + 0.0010P8]
Neglecting line losses and generator limits, find the optimal dispatch and the total cost
in dollars/hr when the total load, Po, is (a) 500 MW, (b) 1000 MW, and (c) 2000 MW.
11.9. Suppose that instead of operating optimally, the three generators in Problem 11.8 share
the load equally. Find the additional cost per hour in cases (a), (b), and (c).
11.10. Repeat Problem 11.8, but this time introduce the following generator limits (in MW):
50 :0; Pct :0; 400
50 :o;Pc2 :o;800
50 :0; PGl :0; 1000
11.11 The three generating units in Problem 11.8 (subject to the generator constraints in
Problem 11.10) are connected to the same plant bus. Plot the graph of plant incre-
mental cost versus total load Po when the generators are sharing the load optimally. Plot
the graph for 150 :0; Po:O; 2200.
11.12. For the system in Problem 11.10 suppose that PD = 1800 MW and calculate the ap-
proximate additional cost per hour of supplying one additional megawatt (i.e., 1801 MW).
11.13. Two generating units supply a system.
G1: IC t = 0.012Pct + 8.0 dollars/MWh
G2: IC 2 = 0.018Pc2 + 7.0 dollars/MWh
Gt : 100 MW:o; PGt :0; 650 MW
G2: 50 MW :0; PC2 :0; 500 MW
(a) Find the system Afor optimal operation when PG1 + PG2 = Po = 600 MW. Find
PGl andP(;2'
(b) Suppose that Po increases by 1 MW (to 601 MW). Find the extra cost in dollarslhr.
11.14. Suppose that there are n generating units on economic dispatch supplying a total load
PD' The incremental cost of each generating unit is IC i = f3i + 2Ylci' Neglecting line
losses and generator limits, show that the relationship between system Aand PD is lin-
ear, in fact,
A= ( Po
f3)j
+ 2:n -'- 2:n -1
i=1 2Yi i=t 2Yi
Hint: Operating on economic dispatch, f3j + 2y;PCj = A, for i = 1,2, ... , n. Solve
for Pc;, i = 1,2, ... , n and add to get PD in terms of Aand the f3i and Yi parameters.
11.15. Jack and Jill are dispatchers at the Ideal Power Company, which has lossless lines and
three generating units. Jack claims that the system is on economic dispatch. In the
444 Automatic Generation Control and the New Market Envirom;nent Chap. 11
next few minutes Jill observes the following sets of data representing incremental
changes in generator MW outputs and total production cost rates:.
o 1 1 -2
30 1 1 1
-20 -3 1 1
After the third reading she says, "Jack you're wrong." How does she know?
11.16. Consider a short transmission line with (per phase) series impedance z = r + j x. Show
that if 1\tIi = IVll, r «x, and Oil is small (so that 1 - cos 012 '" 012/2, and
sin 012 '" 012 ), then, as an approximation, the line losses vary quadratically with the
transmitted (active) power. In fact,
P _ _r_p2
L - 1\tII2 12
11.17. Repeat Example 11.11 but assume that IC i = 0.002PGi + 7.0, PL =0.0008(PG2 - 100f,
PDl = 300 MW and POl = 100 MW. Suppose that PD increases from 400 MW to
401 MW. Find the increased cost per hour to supply the additional 1MW.
11.18. Suppose that in Problem 11.17 line losses were ignored in calculating the optimal dis-
patch. In this case we would pick PG1 = PG2 • With this assignment, calculate PL and the
increased cost of supplying the total load power PD = 400 MW.
11.19. In Example 11.13 suppose that IC i = 7.0 + 0.02PGi . Do a few iterations to estimate
the optimal Pa" PG2 , and the resulting PL'

In the design problem in Chapter 10, the power flow analysis was conducted on the
transmission system designed to serve the new steel mill load and to account for the
normal load growth in the system. For the design completed in Chapter 10, determine
the ATC for supplying the steel mill load from the Parrot~us 3) generator using the
guidelines provided in Section 11.13. In determining the ATC, use the transmission
limitation determined in the contingency analyis performed in Phase II of the design
in Chapter 10. Voltage stablility limits and transient stability limits need not be in-
cluded in the calculation of ATC.
•
CHAPTER 12 - _ > • • -._
Unbalanced System
Operation
12.0 INTRODUCTION
Normally, a power system operates under balanced conditions. Efforts are made to
ensure this desirable state of affairs. Unfortunately, under abnormal (i.e., fault) con-
ditions, the system may become unbalanced.
Some typical nonsymmetric transmission-line faults are shown in Figure 12.1.
We show the faults with zero impedance, but in general, nonzero impedances must
also be considered. In addition, there are faults on generators and other equipment.
Line faults are the most common because lines are exposed to the elements.
Usually, faults are triggered by lightning strokes, which may cause the insulators to
flash over. Occasionally, high winds topple towers. Wind and ice loading may cause
insulator strings to fail mechanically. A tree may fall across a line. Fog or salt spray
on dirty insulators may provide conduction paths associated with insulation failure.
The most common type of fault by far is the single line-to-ground (SLG) fault,
followed in frequency of occurrence by line-to-line (LL) faults, double line-to-ground
(DLG) faults, and balanced three-phase (3</J) faults.
Much less common are faults on cables, circuit breakers, generators, motors,
and transformers. A generator, motor, or transformer may fail if thermal ratings
have been exceeded for long periods of time; the insulation may then have deterio-
rated sufficiently so that mechanical vibration and expansion and contraction due to
thermal cycling may bring about a total failure of the insulation at some point.
It is important to study· the system under fault conditions, in order to provide
for system protection. We need to confirm that the ratings of the circuit breakers
and the settings of relays that trip them are correct. Using the techniques demon-
strated in this chapter for determining the currents and voltages in different parts of
the network under faulted conditions, the short-circuit MVA is calculated. These
techniques are used to select appropriate circuit breaker ratings. In addition, in the
design phase, the transformer connections and the grounding schemes are specified
with concern for the same abnormal conditions.
445
446 Unbalanced System Operation Chap. 12
TI
Single line-ground Line-line Double line-ground Open
(SLG) (LL) (DLG) conductor
Figure 12.1 Some nonsymmetric transmission-line faults.
Initially, we are going to consider only steady-state behavior. This will help fix
the fundamental ideas. Later we will modify the analysis to give an estimate of the
more extreme conditions during the initial few cycles of the transient.
For the steady -state analysis of unbalanced systems, we are going to use the
method of symmetrical components due to Fortesque. As will be seen, it not only sim-
plifies the problem numerically, but, more important, its use definitely improves our
understanding of system behavior during fault conditions.
We will next describe symmetrical components and illustrate their use.
12.1 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
Suppose that we are given an arbitrary set of three phasors, say la, h, and Ie. We
emphasize that the set is perfectly arbitrary. We claim that we can represent la, Ib,
and Ie in terms of nine symmetrical components- I~, I: , I; , I~, h+ , f; , I~, I: , I;
-as follows:
Ia = I~ + I: + I;
h = I~ + It + I; (12.1)
Ie = I~ + I: + I;
where I~, I~, I~ are a zero-sequence set, I:, It, I: are a positive-sequence set, and
I; , I; , I; are a negative-sequence set.
By now we are familiar with (balanced) positive (abc)-sequence and (bal-
anced) negative (acb)-sequence sets. A zero-sequence set I~, I~, and I~ has the fol-
lowing property:
I~ = I~ = I~
Thus, like positive- and negative-sequence sets, all the magnitudes are the same. But
here the phases of the a, b, and c components are also identical. Although I~, I~,
and I~ are not a b~lanced set, the set has a useful symmetry.
We can reWrIte (12.1) as a matrix equation:
Sec. 12.1 Symmetrical Components 447
Ia] [I~] [I:] [I;]

[~ = ~~ + ~~ + ~~ (12.2)
defining I as the (current) vector with components la, I b , and I" and 1°, 1+, and r as
the zero-, positive-, and negative-sequence (current) vectors whose components are,
respectively, the zero-sequence set, the positive-sequence set, and the negative-
sequence set. We can write (12.2) using vector notation:
I=JD+J++r (12.3)
We now will show how to find the nine symmetrical components. As a nota-
tional convenience we first introduce the complex number a == ej21T /3 = 1/120°. Just
as in the case of the complex number j = ei1r/2, it is helpful to think of a as an oper-
ator. Multiplication of a complex number I by a leaves the magnitude unchanged and
increases the angle by 120° (i.e., it rotates I by a positive angle of 120°).
It is clear that only three of the nine symmetrical components may be chosen
independently. The common convention is that I:, I;, and I~ are chosen as the in-
dependent (lead) variables and the remainder are then expressed in terms of the lead
variables. Applied to (12.2), we get
(12.4)
which is equivalent to
(12.5)
Define the symmetrical components (current) vectorI, with components I~, I; , and
I;. Also define
1 1 1]
[
A= 1 ci a
1 a a2
(12.6)
A is called the symmetrical components transformation matrix. Now we can use ma-
trix notation in (12.5).
I == AI, (12.7)
where I is the phase (current) vector and I, is the symmetrical components (cur-
rent) vector.
'*
The reader can confirm that det A = 3( a - ( 2 ). Since det A 0, the inverse
exists. In fact,
448 Unbalanced System Operatjon Chap. 12
(12.8)
Thus we have a formula for calculating Is from I:

I,=A-II (12.9)
or more explicitly, in terms of components,
[:1]
Ia
~ [~ c?! ~l [~:]Ie
=
1 a
Once we know Is (which gives us the leading symmetrical components I~, I: , I; ), we

can calculate the remaining six components by using the properties of the positive-,
negative-, and zero-sequence sets which they represent.
Note the following points.
1. Usually, we leave out the subscript a when writing the components of Is. The
subscript a is understood, just as in per phase analysis, where we write, say, VI
and V2, reserving the subscript to designate bus number for example.
2. In all the algebra that we need to do, we use the identities a2 = a*,
,; = 1,1 + a + a2 = 0, where a* = e- j21r/3 is the complex conjugate of a.
3. In many texts the notation 0, 1, 2 is used instead of 0, +, -.
4. Any set of three phasors (not just Ia, Ib , Ie) can be represented by symmetrical
components and we will take (12.1) to (12.9) to apply in general.
5. In (7.16), together with id and iq we defined the zero-sequence variable io. In
the examples the zero-sequence variables always turned out to be zero because
we assumed balanced conditions. Under unbalancedlonditions io is not neces-
sarily zero.
We next consider an example.
Example n.1. Finding Symmetrical Components

Given fa = 1~, fb = 1/-90O,and Ie = 2/135° ,find I~, I:, and I;.
Solution Using (12.9), we have
1] [1~ 1
(i
a
1/-90°
2/135°
Sec. 12.1 Symmetrical Components 449
Carrying out the complex arithmetic, we get
I~ = ~(1LQ:. + 1/-90° + 2/13SO)::: 0.195/135°
It = ~ (1LQ:. + 1~ + 2/375°) = l.311L!r
I; = ~ (1LQ:. + 1/150° + 2/255') = 0.494/-105°

As a check we can use the calculated values and find thatla = I~ + I~ + I~ = lL.Q:.
Exercise 1. Using the results of Example 12.1, sketch in the complex plane and
label the three symmetrical components that make up 1°. Repeat for It and r. Using
all nine symmetrical components, as in (12.1), show graphically that the (appropriate)
symmetrical components add up to give 1a,lb' and Ie.
Exercise 2. Suppose that we have a set of unbalanced line-line voltages, v;,b, Vbe ,
and Vca. Show that the corresponding zero-sequence voltage is always zero.
The results of the next example will be used in explaining how symmetrical
components are used in fault analysis.
Example 12.2. Finding Symmetrical Components of Single Line-to-Ground (SLG)

Fault Currents
Suppose that we are given an SLG fault current If on phase a. By that we mean the
phase a fault current Iaf = If and the phase b and phase c fault currents,/bfand Ief,re-
spectively, are zero. The situation is shown in Figure E12.2( a). Even though the cur-
rents hf ::: Ief = 0, it is useful to define a hypothetical three-phase "stub" with currents
I af , I bf , and Ie!, We then define a vector fault current
laf = If lef =0
g Ibf = 0
Figure E12.21al
450 Unbalanced System Operation • Chap. 12
With this general introduction we next wish to find the symmetrical components of I~
and interpret the result.
Solution From (12.9),
[ /~l- ![1
laf - 3 1
I~ 1
Thus I:f = I;f = I~f = I f13. With these three leading symmetrical components we
can easily [md the remaining six.
By way of interpretation we can consider (12.4) as it applies in this example. We get
Thus the (actual) fault current vector If may be seen to be the sum of a zero-
sequence fault vector IJ, a positive-sequence fault vector It, and a negative-sequence
fault vector If .
We can check the result graphically. For simplicity we pick If real and show all
nine symmetrical components [Fig. E12.2(b)]. We note that
Iaf =I:f + I;f + I~f = If

Ibf = I tf + I bf + I~f = 0
let = 1"1 + 1« + I~t = 0
which checks.
l~
l;{
Figure E12.2(b)
Exercise 3. Convince yourself by doing the algebra that if IIa,lb' Icl is a positive-
sequence set, then I; = f., I; = f~ = O. Consider what happens for negative-
sequence and zero-sequence sets.
Sec. 12.2 Use of Symmetrical Components for Fault Analysis 451
12.2 USE OF SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS FOR FAULT

ANALYSIS
To introduce the method of symmetrical components for finding voltages and
I currents in faulted systems, consider the circuit in Figure 12.2, consisting of impedances
and ideal voltage sources. For numerical simplicity we will assume the "bridging"
impedances that connect the voltage sources to the "load" impedances have the same
numerical value Z. The use of such a simple circuit is only to introduce the method.
Later, we will introduce a realistic power system model.
I In Figure 12.2 suppose we wish to find the fault current If. It is clear that we
cannot solve the problem by per phase analysis because the faulted network does
not have the required three-phase symmetry. We could solve the network by gener-
al circuit analysis techniques, but this approach is too complicated and provides lit-
tle in the way of physical insights.
I We now make an important observation. Except for the fault, the network is
symmetrical. This suggests the following approach. Suppose we remove the net-
work branch in which the fault current I J flows and replace it by a source current of
the same value. In this way the network symmetry is restored!
It would seem that we have only exchanged one difficulty (unsymmetrical net-
work) for another (unbalanced source). However, by using the symmetrical com-
ponents introduced in Section 12.1, we can replace the unbalanced (three-phase)
fault current by the sum of a (three-phase) zero-sequence source, a (three-phase)
positive-sequence source, and a (three-phase) negative-sequence source. Using the
principle of superposition, the problem becomes quite amenable to solution, as we
will soon show.
Before proceeding however, let us try to justify the substitution of source (of cur-
rent If) for the impedance element ZJ (carrying the current If).
For the rest of the network it does not matter how If is generated. All the net- ! .~
I
work "knows" is that a current If is being extracted from the node labeled a'. Thus
Z a'
Zf Z
If n'
g
+
Z b'
Z c'
Figure 12.2 System with single line-ground fault.

452 Unbalanced System Ope ratjon Chap. 12
if we replace the branch in which the current If flows, by a current source of value If,
nothing will change in the solution of the rest of the network. In circuit theory text-
books, a more general version is offered under the title of the substitution theorem.
Note that the replacement of If at this stage is at the conceptual level; we do not yet
know its numerical value. Note also that the process works in reverse; we can re-
place a current source by a branch, provided that the branch impedance is chosen so
that the current does not change.
Following the plan discussed earlier, let us replace the SLG fault current on
phase a by symmetrical components. Repeating the result in Example 12.2., we have
Iaf = I;f + 1~ + I~I = I I
Ibl = Itl + Ibl + I~I = 0
leI = 1:1 + I~ + I~I = 0
The preceding components are specified in Figure E12.2(b). In particular, note that
1;1 = 1;1 = I~I = 11/3.
We are thus led to the situation in Figure 12.3.
Although Figure 12.3 looks more complicated than Figure 12.2, we have in fact
made the problem more tractable. We now use superposition. We first find the re-
sponses due to the positive-sequence sources (setting all other sources equal to zero).
Then we find the responses for the negative-sequence sources and, finally, for the
zero-sequence sources.
Consider the network with only positive-sequence sources. (In Figure 12.3
cover up all sources not positive sequence.) We note that the voltage sources are
positive sequence. The network is symmetrical and we can use per phase analysis to
find the phase a variables. We note that under balanced conditions the current in Zg
is zero and hence n, n', and g are all at the same potential. The resulting per phase
circuit called, in this context, a positive-sequence network, is shown on the left in
Figure 12.5.
Consider next the network in Figure 12.3 with on~ the negative-sequence
sources. Once again the network is balanced and the phas~ variables may be found
by using per phase analysis. The resulting per phase network is called a negative-
sequence network and is shown in the middle of Figure 12.5.
Finally, we consider the zero-sequence set of sources acting alone. It is easy to
prove and intuitively clear that zero-sequence sources applied to a symmetric net-
work must produce only zero-sequence responses. In particular, in the network in
Figure 12.4, I~ = I~ = I~. On the other hand, applying KCL at node n,
I~ + I~ + I~ = O. Thus I~ = l~ = I~ = 0 (i.e., looking from the fault to the left, we
see an open circuit). (In fact, whenever we look into an ungrounded wye connection
or a delta connection, we see an open circuit since there is no path to ground for the
zero-sequence currents.)
Looking from the fault to the right, and noting that I~, = I~. = l~" we get
(12.10)
Sec. 12.2 Use of Symmetrical Components for Fault Analysis 453
Z a'
n'
':' ':' ..,.

far far fa~
Z b'
f bt = 0
f~
Z c'
":'" ":'"
lei ler I~
Figure 12.3 Replacement of fault current by symmetrical components.
with V~'g == V~'g == V~'g. Equation (12.10) implies that we can calculate V~'g from the
single-phase zero-sequence network shown at the bottom in Figure 12.4. Since the
current from n' to g is I~, instead of 3I~" it is necessary to substitute 3Zg for Zg in order
to preserve the equivalence, Note that n, n', and g in Figure 12.4 and in the zero-
sequence network in Figure 12.5 are not necessarily at the same potentiaL
It is easy to solve for If using the sequence networks in Figure 12.5. In outline,
we find Va'g = V:g + V;g + V~'g in terms of If. This gives us one relation between
Va'g and If. Another, from Figure 12.2, is v;,'g = ZI If. With these two equations we
can solve for II. We will not carry out this calculation in detail, since there is a bet-
ter way to do it. This better way will be introduced in the next section. .
From this example we can see an advantage of the symmetrical components
method. We replace the given faulted (nonsymmetrical) network with three sym-
metrical three-phase networks, each of which may be analyzed by considering a
454 Unbalanced System Operation , Chap. 12
I' Z a' V,~g

" ""
',j Z
n n'
":"
g
.,.
Z b' vg'g ,g.
"b
Ib!
":"
Z c' Vc~
" c
I',c
'~f
-;-
Figure 12.4 Zero-sequence network (three-phase).
Z
, Z
a a a'
+ ]I
laf= "3
raf=3If Z
n' n n'
Positive-sequence network. Negative-sequence network.
Z [0
a a' a'
t
Z
n
3Zg
Zero-sequence network.
Figure 12.5 Sequence networks (with current sources attached).

Sec. 12.3 Sequence Network Connections for Different Types of Faults 455
single-phase circuit called a sequence network. The simplifications of per phase analy-
sis for balanced three-phase circuits are preserved. In this connection we point out
that once we are convinced that the method of analysis is legitimate, we can skip the
preliminary stages and go directly to the sequence networks (i.e., skip Figure 12.3
and go directly to Figure 12.5).
There is an additional reason for our interest in the symmetrical components
method. Our circuits example can be solved by traditional methods of circuit analy-
sis, but as will be seen in later sections, many of the impedances that arise in model-
ing elements of power systems are sequence dependent. For example, the Thevenin
equivalent generator impedances in the positive-, negative-, and zero-sequence net-
works are all different. Thus, the traditional methods of circuit analysis are not even
available as options.
We next consider a development that makes the use of the sequence networks
even more attractive.
12.3 SEQUENCE NETWORK CONNECTIONS FOR DIFFERENT

TYPES OF FAULTS
A. Sequence Network for Single Line·to·Ground Fault. If in the case of the

SLG fault considered in Section 12.2, we consider the consequences of the relations
(12.11)
and
r
f
(12.12)
r-
It is clear that Va'g is the voltage across the series connection of the positive-, nega-
tive-, and zero-sequence networks when 11/3 flows in the series connection. In ad-
dition, the terminal constraint
II
V,ag = ZIIt = 3Zt -3 (12.13)
can be introduced by placing an impedance 3Zt across the series connection. Thus
we are led to Figure 12.6.
We now can easily solve for the fault current If. The easiest way is to replace
the positive-sequence network in Figure 12.6 with a Thevenin equivalent circuit. We
get an open-circuit voltage of 1/2 in series with Z/2. Thus we get a voltage of 1/2 in
series with Z/2 + Z/2 + Z + 3Zg + 3Zf . Thus
1
If = 2
~ Z + Zg + ZI
456 Unbalanced System OperaFion Chap. 12
la~ = If/3
Z a'
+ +
Positive-
If
1M v,tg Z sequence
network
3 -
g
- 1
la} = lat = If/3
Z a'
+
Negative-
Va~ Z sequence
network
Va', 3Zf }
-
g
laj =I~ ~ If/3
Z a'
+
Z
Zero-
n V,q, n' sequence
network
3Z,
-
g
I~f • If/3
Figure 12.6 Sequence-network connection for line-ground fault.
Note: The development that began with the problem posed in Figure 12.2
ends here. We hope the reader has gained some understanding of the method's basic
rationale. In the future given a SLG fault from a' to g, we can simply use the se-
quence networks and connect them as shown in Figure 1~.
Exercise 4. Suppose that in Figure 12.2 the SLG fault of impedance Zf occurs
between points a and g (rather than a' and g). Show how Figure 12.6 must be mod-
ified in this case, and that If is given by
If = 1
i Z + Zg + Zf
Exercise 5. Suppose that in Figure 12.2, (a) the load is not grounded, or (b) the
source is grounded. How would this affect Figure 12.6 and the magnitude of the fault
current If. Does it make sense physically?
Let us now consider other types of faults. To illustrate this development we

might as well continue to use the circuit in Figure 12.2 but with a different type of fault
at location a' , b', c'.
We are led to consider the very same sequence networks in Figure 12.5, but dif-
ferently connected.
B.Sequence Network Connections for Double Line-Ground Fault. Con-

sider the case of a double line-ground (DLG) fault shown in Figure 12.7.
We need to look at the constraints on V;'g' V~g, V~'g and on 1;/, 1;/, 1;/ imposed
by the DLG fault shown in Figure 12.7. We note that Vb'g == ~'g == 0 and lar == O.
From (12.9), as applied to the fault voltages, we get
and therefore
Vo - V+a'g -- V-a'g
a'g - (12.14)
We also have, from (12.1) and Figure 12.7,

(12.15)
Z a'
n'
Z b'
c'
Figure 12.7 Double line-ground fault.

f,i f,r f,}

, , Z ,
a Z a a Z a a a
+ + +
Z
E, V,tg Z V,~g Z n V,9g n'
3Zg
- - -
g g g
Figure 12.8 Connection of sequence networks for double line-

ground fault.
Equations (12.14) and (12.15) imply that the positive-, negative-, and zero-
sequence networks should be put in parallel. Thus we get Figure 12.8.
With the network in Figure 12.8 we can calculate any desired current or volt-
age in Figure 12.7. Suppose we want to calculate Va'g, I bf , and Ief .
Since
we first find V;'g. V;'g is easily found by combining impedances and using the voltage
divider law.
To calculate Ibf and I ef , we first calculate I~f' I:f , and I;f. Since the three se-
quence currents sum to zero, calculating any two determines the third. Then we find
the a, b, and c currents by use of (12.5).
Exercise 6. In Figure 12.8 consider the modification of the fault as shown in Fig-
ure Ex6(a). Show that Figure 12.8 changes to Figure Ex6(b).
b'
Zf
Zf
e' Figure Ex6(a)

il
far far fJr

Zl zr Zl
Z , Z , Z ,
a a a a a a
+ + +
z
Ea Va~l Z Va~l Z n Vaqg n'
- - -
g g g
Figure Ex6(b)
C. Sequence Network Connections for Line-Line Fault. Suppose that in-

stead of the DLG fault we have the line-line (LL) fault shown in Figure 12.9. Every-
thing else is the same as in Figure 12.8. It is clear that we will get the same sequence f
networks found in Figure 12.5. The remaining question is how to "hook them up."
We look for relations between the sequence fault voltages and currents that will give I
the clue. Thus from the fact that Vb'g = v".g and using (12.9), we get
which implies that

(12.16)
Also, again using (12.9),
which implies that I ..

1
I~/ =0 1;/ = -1;/ (12.17)
with 1;1 = !(a - (i)II = jif/Vi. This implies that
\
.! If = - jY3I;r (12.18)
I
460 Unbalanced System Ope~ation Chap. 12
Z a'
n'
Z b'
c'
Figure 12.9 Line-line fault.
Equations (12.16) and (12.17) imply that the positive- and negative-sequence
networks are in parallel. Equation (12.21) also tells us that I~f = O. In that case
V~'g = O. Thus, the zero-sequence network is "dead" and has no influence on any of
the fault variables. Since there is no ground connection at the fault, it is clear phys-
ically why I~f = O.
Thus, we are led to consider the circuit in Figure 12.10. We solve the circuit for
any of the variables of interest, always taking into account the fact that the zero-
sequence network is dead. To solve for If we can use (12.18).
~
Ia} Iar I~f =0
Z , Z Z ,
a a a a a
+ + +
Z
Ea Vatg Z v.~g Z n v,9g =0 n'
3Z,
- -
g g
Figure 12.10 Connection of sequence networks for line-line fault.

Sec. 12.4 More General Fault Circuit Analysis 461
Exercise 7. Suppose that instead of a solid connection there is an impedance Zf

between b' and c' in Figure 12.9. Show that Figure 12.10 will then have an imped-
ance Zf in the branch connecting the positive- and negative-sequence networks (a'
to a').
12.4 MORE GENERAL FAULT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
In the examples considered so far, the single phase-to-ground fault occurred on phase
a, and the line-line faults occurred between phases band c. These choices were not
arbitrary; it is simpler to deal with these "canonical" cases. Suppose then that we
have a phase-to-ground fault on, say, phase b. The easiest way to handle this varia-
tion is to relabel the phases so that phase b is now labeled a, phase c is now labeled
b, and phase a is now labeled c. A similar relabeling holds for the other possible faults
to reduce them to the canonical cases. Of course, care is required so that (original-
ly) positive-sequence sources remain positive-sequence after relabeling; this is en-
sured if the wires labeled abc end up being labeled either bca Or cab (i.e., in the same
cyclic order). With this change we can reduce to the canonical cases, and henceforth
we will assume that this has been done.
Suppose now that we are given a network more general than the one we have
been using as a running example. The network in general will include multiple
(positive-sequence) three-phase sources. Relying on basic principles, we can justify
the following procedure.
General procedure
1. Find the positive-, negative-, and zero-sequence networks.
2. Attach terminal pairs at g and the point of fault.
3. Connect the networks in accordance with the type of fault (consult Figures 12.6,
12.8, Ex 6(b), and 12.10 for the most important cases.
4. Using circuit analysis, find the required aphase symmetrical components; using
(12.5), we find the corresponding triples of phase a, b, c variables.
A few comments on the general procedure follow.

a. Regarding item 1, we still need to introduce realistic models for generators,
transformer, and transmission lines. This will be done starting in Section 12.7.
b. Regarding item 3, our catalog of faults covers the most important cases but is
I not extensive. More complete listings, including the case of open conductors,
I may be found in standard references.
I
,
462 Unbalanced System Operation €hap. 12
c. Regarding item 4, for all but the simplest cases, circuit analysis will involve the
use of the sequence network Z matrices. The technique will be discussed in
Section 12.12.
d. In practice, certain simplifying assumptions are usually made. These will be
discussed in Section 12.11.
12.5 POWER FROM SEQUENCE VARIABLES
Consider the complex power delivered to the network shown in Figure 12.11. We are
j'
not restricted to balanced conditions. By the method discussed in Chapter 2, partic-
,
ularly Example 2.4, we can pick any node as a datum node; it is convenient to pick g
as the datum node. Then, following Example 2.4,
S34> = VagI: +Vbglt +Vegl: (12.19)
In the balanced case with Vag = Van, we get
S3'" = 3Van I: (12.20)
In the unbalanced case (12.19) may be used, or its replacement in terms of sequence
variables. In considering the transformation it is convenient to use matrix nota-
tion. Thus let
Then we may replace (12.19) by

(12.21)
f,
Figure 12.11 Four-wire net-

work.
Sec. 12.6 Sequence Representation of Y- and A-Connected Circuits 463
We are using 1* to denote the complex-conjugate transpose of I. Using (12.7) to ex-

press I and V in terms of symmetrical components, .
S3~ '" (A1s)* AV,
'" I;A*AV, (12.22)
'" 3I;V,
-- 3Voog1°*
0
+ 3V+I+*
og "
+ 3V-I-'
og 0
In going from the first to the second line we have used the fact that (AB)* '" B*A *.
The third line follows from the second because A*A = 31, where 1 is the identity
matrix. Equation (12.22) shows that if we have been working with the sequence vari-
ables or networks we can calculate S3~ without converting back to phase variables.
We conclude this section by noting that the impedance network in Figure 12.11
can be replaced by a more general power network, including sinusoidal sources.
Equation (12.22) holds for the more general case. "
12.6 SEQUENCE REPRESENTATION OF Y·CONNECTED

AND Ll·CONNECTED CIRCUITS
Consider the symmetric Ll- and Y-connected circuits shown in Figure 12.12. In this
figure the circuit elements are equal impedances, but the relationships that will be de-
rived between the symmetrical component variables of the Y and Ll voltages and cur-
rents can be applied to any other type of circuit component. We will choose the
quantities associated with the branch a-b as the reference for the Ll circuit variables.
This choice of reference is arbitrary and does not effect the results that are derived.
The line currents in terms of the Ll-circuit currents are given by
10 '" lab - lea
Ib = Ibe - lab (12.23)

Ie'" lea - Ibe
Adding the three equations, and using the definition of the zero sequence component
from (12.9), we have I~ = ~(Ia + Ib + Icl = O. This implies that the line currents into
(
a0------,
- +
Zy
fb
+ Vbe
_ [e + Vbc
_ fe Figure 12.12 Three-phase sym-
C 0--__- - - - - - - - ' C 0-----------' metrical circuits: (a) A-Gonnected,
(a) (b) (b J Y-connected.
a symmetrical A-connected circuit do not contain any zero-sequence currents. In

fact, the result extends to any £l-connected circuit. Using (12.5) and substituting the
sequence components of the currents in the equation for Ia gives
I:
Ia =12+ +1;=1:+ r;= (lgb +l:b+l;b) - (l~ +Ita +I~)
=(la~ - I~a) +(lab - I~) +(I;;b - I~) (12.24)
'-----.---'
o
This shows that the line currents alone cannot be used to determine a zero-sequence
current I~b that circulates in the £l circuit. Since the sequence components consti-
tute a set of balanced phasors, we have I:' = a1:band C = a2I;b' As a result, we
rewrite (12.24) as
(12.25)
In a similar fashion we can also obtain
It + It; = (1 - a)Itc + (1 - ~)It;c (12.26)
n
Noting that It = ~I:, It; = aI;, = ~I:b' and Ibc = aI;b, we can solve for the
following relationship using (12.25) and (12.26):
I: = (1 - a)I:b = v'3/-30° x I:b

(12.27)
I; = (1 - a2)I;b = v'3/30° x l;b
Similarly, for aY-connected system, the line-to-line voltages can be expressed in terms
of the line-to-neutral voltages. Following steps similar to that described previously,
we can show that
V:b = (1 - a2)V:n = v'3/300V:n

(12.28)
V;b = (1 - a)V;n = v'3/-300V~ fI
Exercise B. Derive the relationship given in (12.28) by expressing the line-to-line

voltages in terms of the line-to-neutral voltages and invoking the expression for the
zero-sequence component of the line-to-line voltage Vab for a Y-connected system.
Also, show that the line-to-line voltages ina Y-connected system have no zero-
sequence components.
Consider the Y-connected circuit shown in Figure 12.l2(b). An impedance Zn

is now connected between the neutral of the Y-connected circuit and the ground as
shown in Figure 12.13. In this case, the line currents sum up to the current In in the
return path through the neutral. The line currents can be expressed in terms of the
symmetrical components to obtain
Sec. 12.6 Sequence Representation of Y- and /l-Connected Circuits 465
fa
a~-+-- __--~--------~+
Zy
-
~ +
g -
Figure 12.13 V-connected
circuit with neutral grounded.
In =Ia +Ib +Ie =(Ig+ 1;+ I;) +(Ig+ It+ It;) + (I~+ 1;+ I;)
=(IaO+ Ig+ I~) +.(I:+ I: +I;) +(I; +1;+1;)
'-----,-----' (12.29)
o 0
This analysis shows that the current in the connection between neutral and ground
only contains zero-sequence currents irrespective of the value of the impedance Zn.
In addition, the zero-sequence currents that add up together at n result in a voltage
drop of 3I~Zn between the neutral point n and the ground. We can now express the
voltage of phase a with respect to ground as Va = Van + Vng , where Vng = 31~Zn'
From Figure 12.13 we can apply Kirchoffs voltage law and determine the voltage to
ground for each phase a, b, and c as
[
Va]
Vb = [Van]
Vbn + [Vng]
Vng = [ZY1a] [31~Zn]'
Zyh + 3I~Zn = Zy [Ia]
h + 3I~Zn [1]
1 (12.30)
v" v"n Vng ZyIe 3I':,2n Ie 1
The phase voltage and currents in the preceding equation can be expressed in terms
of the symmetrical components using (12.5):
(12.31)
Premultiplying both sides of the above equation by A-1 yields
V:] -_ [ZYI:]
Va' Zy1a + [3Znl~]
0 (12.32)
[ V; . ZyI; 0
Expanding the preceding matrix equation, we get
V~ = (Zy + 3Zn)I~ = ZOI~
V+a = (12.33)
r J r- J
Z'3~
l
I { : I Z, I Z,
Zero-sequence circuit Positive-sequence circuit Negative-sequence circuit
Figure 12.14 Sequence circuits for neutral grounded Y-

connected circuit.
Observe that these equations are decoupled. The voltage drop in each sequence
component is caused by a current of the same sequence component. This allows us
to develop three single-phase sequence circuits as shown in Figure 12.14. Note that
when an impedance is connected between the neutral and ground, the zero-sequence
circuit has to be appropriately configured to include the impedance 3Zn to account
for the voltage drop in the return path. This has to be done for all circuits connect-
ed in Y with the neutral ground through an impedance.
In Figure 12.2 we also considered a set ofY-connected impedances (to the right
of the points a', b', c') and found the same sequence network representations as in
Figure 12.14.
12.7 GENERATOR MODELS FOR SEQUENCE NETWORKS
For simplicity in explaining the method of symmetrical components we have used

ideal voltage sources in our examples. We wish now to consider the modeling of syn-
chronous machines (motors and generators) for use in the sequence networks; for
simplicity we will refer to these as generators. We assume that the angular velocity
of the generator rotor is a constant. Then the electrical equations (7.45) to (7.47)
are linear and we can use superposition. Thus, the method of symIfittrical compo-
nents based on the principle of superposition will work!
Positive-Sequence Generator Model. In accordance with the basic symmetri-

cal components procedure, as discussed in Section 12.2, we set all negative- and zero-
sequence sources to zero. We then have a model with only positive-sequence sources.
We have already considered this case in Chapter 7. The steady-state model is de-
scribed by (7.67). If the machine is round rotor, Xq = Xd , and we get the circuit
model in Figure 12.15. Usually, as an approximation, we neglect r. The model in
Figure 12.15 is also used (as an approximation), even in the case Xq *" Xd • The jus-
tification is based on the following grounds. We are usually interested in the voltages
and currents at or near the fault. These depend strongly on the generators nearest the
fault. It turns out that for a generator near the fault, I:, the positive-sequence cur-
rent component lags Ea by approximately 90° (i.e., I: "" I:d and we can ignore the
J'lr'
I
I Sec. 12.7 Generator Models for Sequence Networks 487
I
Figure 12.15 Positive-
sequence circuit model (steady
state).
quadrature component jXqI:q); this leads to the model in Figure 12.15 as a good ap-
proximation. On the other hand, if a generator is far from the fault, it need not be
modeled accurately because its contribution to the fault currents and voltages is small.
The model in Figure 12.15 is appropriate for calculating steady-state behavior.
We are even more interested, however, in calculating the short-circuit currents and/or
voltages at the very beginning of the fault period. In Example 7.4 (Application 2) we
calculated the currents for a symmetric short circuit; they were much greater than
the steady-state values (in the order of 10 times greater). We would like a positive-
sequence generator model that at least approximates that kind of behavior.
A model that is frequently used for this purpose is suggested by the simplified
dynamic model in Section 7.11. Suppose that we calculate E~ prior to the fault. The
differential equation (7.75) implies that E~ cannot change instantaneously upon ap-
plication of the fault. Then initially as an approximation we can treat E~ as a constant
in (7.73). In this case we obtain the circuit model shown in Figure 12.16 (using the
justification for neglecting the quadrature component previously discussed). This
model, sometimes called the E~, Xd model, is used to predict the initial transient ac
fault currents and voltages. Similarly, we can use a so-called E~, X'd model to find the
sub transient ac currents and voltages.
Negative-Sequence Generator Model. In this case we set all zero-sequence

and positive-sequence sources to zero. Since the generator field voltage v F is asso-
ciated with the positive-sequence variables, it is set equal to zero. To find the rela-
tionship between negative-sequence terminal voltages and currents, we can conduct
an experiment or test in which we apply negative-sequence currents to the genera-
tor terminals and measure the resulting voltages. As an alternative we can calculate
the anticipated results by using the Park equations. The interested reader is referred
to Appendix 5 for the calculation of the steady-state relations. Physically, the
negative-sequence stator currents set up a flux in the air gap whose rotation is opposite
r jX d
Ea' 9_,---IVM,----'lrr'~I: v;t_:
Figure 12.18 Positive-

sequence circuit model
I
'--------------.< (transient]. I
II
;. iii
468 Unbalanced System Operation. Chap. 12
to that of the rotor. In this case the damper circuits, or circuits that model the solid-
iron rotor, are the dominant elements and their inclusion in the calculations leads to
the result that the generator impedance jX- = jX'd.
Zero-Sequence Generator Model. Using the same approach as before, we con-

duct a test or a calculation using the Park equations. The calculation is given in
Appendix 5. If we consider the physical test with (identical) zero-sequence currents
applied to the generator terminals, then the air-gap flux would be zero if the
spatial mmf distribution for each phase were exactly sinusoidal. In this case the
generator impedance would be jXO = jXf, with XI the leakage reactance; this
result is approximately true in practice and explains the very small values of XO.
We note, finally, that if the generator neutral is grounded through an impedance Zg,
then in the zero-sequence network we have an impedance 3Zg just as described ear-
lier for loads.
We conclude this discussion with some average numerical values (in per unit)
shown in Table 12.1. X+ may be taken as Xd, X d, or X:;, depending on the interval
of interest following the imposition of the fault.
TABLE 12.1 TYPICAL SYNCHRONOUS

MACHINE REACTANCES
Turbine-generators (two-pole)
Salient-pole
Conventionally Conductor generators
cooled* cooled with dampers
Xd 1.20 1.80 1.25

Xq 1.16 1.75 0.70
Xd 0.15 0.30 0.30
X'd 0.09 0.22 0.20
X- 0.09 0.22 0.20,
XO 0.03 0.12 0.18
*Reactances are representative of smaller air-cooled and

hydrogen-cooled machines.
Exercise S. Suppose that there is an SLG fault close to the generator. Suppose
that the generator neutral is solidly grounded (Zg = 0) and the fault is also a solid
ground. Can you justify the approximation discussed earlier-that the positive-
sequence component of generator current, I;, lags Ea by approximately 90°? Hint:
Take a simple case, something similar to Figure 12.2 (with the ideal voltage sources
replaced by a realistic generator model). Assume that IZI is large compared with the
generator sequence reactances.
TI
Sec. 12.8 Transformer Models for Sequence Networks 469
12.8 TRANSFORMER MODELS FOR SEQUENCE NETWORKS
In Chapter 5 we discussed the per phase equivalent circuit for a three-phase trans-
former bank operating under balanced positive- or negative-sequence conditions.
Neglecting magnetizing inductances, we get the per phase per unit circuit model
shown in Figure 12.17 for .l-.l and Y-Y connections. In the case of the .l-Y or Y-.l
connections, it was shown that the simplified circuit in Figure 12.17 may also be used
if the system is normal.
a iXI a'
0~----~1mr~------0
+ +
v1 Figure 12.17 Positive- or
negative-sequence simplified
circuit of three-phase trans-
0 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--10 former bank.
In short-circuit studies more complete models showing connection-induced

phase shifts may also be required, and these are shown in Figure 12.18.
Here we show the standard phase shift with the positive-sequence voltage on
the high-voltage side advanced 30° from the voltage on the low-voltage side. Corre-
spondingly, the negative-sequence voltage on the high-voltage side is retarded by 30°.
a II iXI 12 a
~
+ + + +
VI e-jw /6 V1
- -
Figure 12.18 More complete circuit models.
For all but the simplest systems the representation shown in Figure 12.18 is too
cumbersome, and as an alternative we propose the simpler representation shown in
Figure 12.19. The symbol(/) represents a phase increase in voltage and current in
going from left to right or decrease in going from right to left. The slant of the line
defmes whether there is an increase or decrease in a natural way. Thus, with the sym-
bol (l) there is a decrease in phase when going from left to right. While the magni-
tude of the phase shift is not explicitly shown, as it is in Figure 12.18, we will assume
that it is the standard 30°.
We next turn to the zero-sequence equivalent circuits for different transformer
connections. Here the situation is more variable, with very notable differences for var-
ious connections. On the assumption that magnetizing reactances can be neglected
(i.e., replaced by open circuits), we get the most common transformer connections as
tabulated in Figure 12.20 on page 472.
o~----------~------o O~------------4-----~O
Positive-sequence circuit of Negative-sequence circuit of

A-Y or Y-A connection A-Y or Y-A connection
Figure 12.19 More complete circuit models.
It is easy to check the entries in the table. Apply a set of zero-sequence currents
to the primary (or secondary) and calculate the resulting secondary (or primary) cur-
rents and the primary and secondary voltages. We recall that a set of zero-sequence
currents are all identical sinusoids. It is helpful in understanding the circuits to notice
that we get an open circuit on the primary (secondary) side if there is no ground re-
turn for primary (secondary) currents or if there is no path for the secondary (prima-
ry) zero-sequence currents. Thus in the top circuit there is a ground return for the
primary zero-sequence currents, but this is not enough because there is no path for the
resulting secondary currents. In the third circuit the primary currents can flow because
there is a ground return and paths for the resulting secondary circuits. On the other
hand, looking into the secondary circuit we see an open circuit (no ground return).
We can verify these intuitive results by calculation. For example, we consider
the third circuit in more detail in the following.
Example 12.3 Zero-Sequence Equivalent Circuit

Using the single-phase transformer model in Figure 5.4, verify the third entry in
Figure 12.20 on page 472.
Solution Using Figure 5.4 (and leaving in the magnetizing indu..£tances), we get Fig-
ure E12.3 for the grounded wye-delta connection. First we migi« note that by sym-
metry the secondary voltages are all identical and to satisfy KVL they must in fact be
zero. Thus we also get zero volts (a short circuit) on the primary sides of the ideal
transformers. From this it follows that Va = j X/I~. Alternatively, we can proceed
more cautiously as follows. From the figure
. 0 nl
Ve = ,X/Ie + - V2c
n2
V~ #, ~ (Va + Vb + V;) = jX/l~

Sec. 12.9 Sequence Representation ofTransmission Lines 471
o
+
Figure E12.3
I
I We have used the facts l~ = I~ = I~, and \.Sa + V2b + V2c = O. Thus "looking in" from
the left, the zero-sequence impedance is ZO = JXI • On the other hand, "looking in"
from the right, we see an open circuit because there is no return path for the zero-
sequence currents. This verifies the third entry in Figure 12.20.
I
Exercise 10 In Example 12.3, in modeling the single-phase transformers, Xm was

left in; it did not matter because Xm was, effectively, shorted out. Using the more
complete single-phase model (withXm left in), derive the first zero-sequence circuit
and compare with the result in the table.
12.9 SEQUENCE REPRESENTATION OF TRANSMISSION

LINES
In Section 3.6 we developed expressions for the series impedance of a three-phase

transmission line including the effect of ground return. We will now develop the se-
F"·
I
Zercrsequence circuit
Symbols Connection diagram Zo '" Z,
a'
lo
a-JlW'- -a
,
-1~
y
f b'
c'
a'
Zo
a~a'
-i~
f1 b'
c'
a' lo
-i~
t /:;
b'
c'
'l'
_-------a
-a'
>-----b'
I<::...-------c'
_-----a'
1-..J15i1W>--..----b'
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ ·
c
Figure 12.20 Zero-sequence equivalent circuits. [Adapted from W. D.

Stevenson, Jr., Elements of Power Systems Analysis, 4th ed., McGraw-Hili
Book Company, New York, 1982.)
472
T Sec. 12.9 Sequence Representation ofTransmission Lines
quence component representation. From (3.40) repeated here

473
V.] [Z~a Z~b

Vb = Zba Zbb
[Yc Z;a Z;b
(3.40)
Transforming the phase variables into symmetrical components using (12.7), we have
AV, = Zab,AI, (12.34)
Premultiplying both sides by A-1, we have
V, = A-IZ abc AI, (12.35)
The preceding equation can be written in the form
(12.36)
where we define
(12.37)
The new matrix can be found directly by performing the matrix multiplication shown
in (12.37). It has the form given by
[
(Z~ + 2Z~) (Z; - ZM) . (zt - zt) ]
Z, = (zt - zt) (Z~ - Z~) (Z; + 2Z M) (12.38)
(Z; - ZM) (zt + 2Zt) (Z~ - Z~)
where we define
Z~ = t(Z~a + Zbb + Z;c)

Zr = t(Z~a + aZbb + a Z;,)
2
(12.39)
Z; = t(Z~a + a2Zbb + aZ;,)
and
Z~ = ~(Zb' + Z;a + Z~b)

zt = K~'b' + aZ~a + a2Z~b) (12.40)
ZM = t(Z/,c + a2Z;a + aZ~b)
In these definitions we have assumed that the mutual impedances of passive net-
works are reciprocal (i.e., Zab = Zba, Za, = Zca> Zbc = Z,b)'
The preceding expressions represent the most general case. A special case is
one in which the self- or mutual impedances are symmetric with respect to phase a.
In this case we have
474 Unbalanced System Operation •Chap. 12
(12.41)
The self- and mutual impedances for the sequence components are then given by
z~ = ~(Z~a + 2Zbb )
(12.42)
+ - Z-s-3"
Zs- - I(Z'aa- Z'bb )
(12.43)
Example U.4. For the transmission line given in Example 3.6, calculate the sequence
components of the impedance.
Solution From the solution to Example 3.6 we have
Zabe
(17.304 + j83.562)
= (5.717 + j37.81)
(5.717 + j37.81) (5.717 + j32.76)
(17.304 + j83.562) (5.717 + j37.81)
1n
[
(5.717 + j32.76) (5.717 + j37.81) (17.304 + j83.562)
From (12.37) we have Zs = A-IZabcA:
_ [(28.74 + j1.55.82) (1.46 - jO.84)

Zs - (-1.46 - ,0.84) (11.59 + j47.44)
(-1.46 - jO.84)
(-2.92+ j1.68)
1n
(1.46 - jO.84) (2.92 + j1.68) (11.59 + j47.44)
Example 12.4 illustrates the following:
1. While Zabe is always symmetric, Zs need not be!

2. There is coupling between the sequence voltages and the currents of other se-
quences. Thus Vo, V+, and V- each depend on [0, and r. r,
3. In the example, if we look at Zs, we see that the terms on the diagonal are much
larger than the off-diagonal terms. This means that the coupling between se-
quence variables is relatively small, and it might be reasonable to neglect the off-
diagonal terms. If we do this, then, as an approximation, the different sets of
sequence variables will be decoupled (Le., yo = ZOlo, V+ = Z+I+
V- = ZT. This is a very nice result since it allows us to continue using sim-
ple sequence networks.
4. In the example, we note that ZOis approximately three times Z+ = Z-. This ratio
is a generally accepted estimate and has been validated by field measurements.
Sec. 12.10 Assembly of Sequence Networks 475
y 6.
Line 1
t I~ ~
Bus 1 Bus 2
f
Line 2
f S ~
Figure 12.21 System one-line diagram.
12.10 ASSEMBLY OF SEQUENCE NETWORKS
With the generator, transformer, and transmission-line models proposed in Sections

12.7 to 12.9, we are now in a position to consider more realistic sequence networks
than in the introductory examples in Sections 12.2 and 12.3.
As an example, let us consider the one-line system diagram shown in Figure
12.21. There are two synchronous machines, two lines, and four transformers. The
transformer and synchronous machine connections and grounding are shown. The
points LMNOPQRSTU are identified.
We show the positive-sequence network in Figure 12.22. We will always as-
sume that the sources are balanced and positive-sequence; hence they are included in
this network. In the absence of contrary information we will also assume all the A- Y
transformer banks are connected so that the (connection-induced) positive-sequence
voltage on the high-voltage side is advanced by 30° with respect to the low-voltage side.
p u
Figure 12.22 Positive-sequence network.

~r'-
'(
476 Unbalanced System Operatiol'l Chap. 12
p u
iXi
Figure 12.23 Negative-sequence network.
This is implied by the phase shifters shown in Figure 12.22. We show the generator
reactances in general terms. For steady-state calculations Xd would be used. To get
results for the first few cycles, Xd or Xd would be used. The unlabeled four reac-
tances are the transformer leakage reactances of the four transformer banks.
In accordance with the discussion following Example 12.4, we have simplified
the modeling of the transmission lines so that we get decoupling between the variables
of different sequence. The positive and negative reactances are XLI and XL2 • The
zero-sequence reactances are xL and X~2'
We next consider the negative-sequence network shown in Figure 12.23. This
network differs in three ways from the positive-sequence network. There are no
voltage sources; the generator reactances have negative-sequence values; the (con-
nection-induced) phase shift from the low- to the high-voltage side of each trans-
former is the negative of the phase shift for the positive-sequence case.
Finally, we find the zero-sequence network by using Fig. 12.20 to look up the two
kinds of transformer connections.
We can check the validity of the network shown in Figure 12.24 by "looking
I left and right" from the labeled points in Figures 12.21 a, 12.24. For example,
L 0
p u
iX! iX~
T
3Z,
Figure 12.24 Zero-sequence network.

Sec. 12.11 Fault Analysis for Realistic Power System Model 477
referring to Figure 12.21, looking to the left at point P, we have a ,neutral grounded
through Zg; in this case we have the zero-sequence impedance of the generator, jX~,
in series with 3Zg ; this checks with Figure 12.24. Looking from P to the right, we see
open circuits in Figure 12.21 for the zero-sequence currents; these open circuits are
also shown in Figure 12.24. Looking to the left from point M in Figure 12.21, we see
the third transformer connection in Figure 12.20, and this is shown to the left of point
M in Figure 12.24. Similarly, we can check all the connections in Figure 12.24.
12.11 FAULT ANALYSIS FOR REALISTIC POWER

SYSTEM MODEL
We are now in a position to reexamine the use of symmetrical components for a re-
alistic power system problem. At the same time we will introduce some simplifying
assumptions.
As discussed in Chapter 10, a power system under normal (prefault) operating
conditions is specified by complex load power at the P, Qbuses, voltage at the slack
bus, and active power injections and voltage magnitudes at the remaining generator
buses. All the unknown (complex) bus voltages may then be found by a power flow
study, and from these as many line, load, and generator currents as desired may be cal-
culated. In principle we can also calculate the required internal (complex) genera-
tor voltages Ea, E~, or E; behind the appropriate generator impedances. For the
given and calculated Vs we can also calculate "equivalent" impedance loads to replace
the specified 5Di ; this can be done by using ZDi = VJIDi = VrV/VtIDi = IVI 2/Sjji'
Thus we get one kind of model for the loads. By this means, in principle, we can ob-
tain two things: (1) a circuit model with voltage sources, and (2) a specification of the
prefault voltages and currents. Thus we are in a position to use the General proce-
dure outlined in Section 12.4.
In practice this is not done; certain simplifications are made that significantly re-
duce the computational effort without seriously degrading accuracy.
1. The prefault voltage at the fault point is usually close to its nominal value (i.e.,
it can be taken to be 1L!r).
2. Load impedances show up as "shunt" elements in the sequence networks. Gen-
erators also show up as shunt elements and usually have much lower imped-
ances. It is also true that the load impedances are (usually) mostly resistive,
whereas the generator impedances are almost purely reactive. In calculating the
fault currents It and I;t, I;t, and I~t, we need the equivalent (parallel) imped-
ance of each sequence network and, for the two reasons mentioned previous-
ly, we find that the loads do not appreciably affect the result. Thus, at least for
calculating these fault currents, we leave them out (i.e., remove the loads).
3. In solving for the other currents in the faulted system it is found that the pre-
fault currents are much smaller than the currents of interest under faulted con-
dition; they are also largely out of phase. Thus it is not a bad assumption to ne-
glect the prefault currents (i.e., assume that they are zero). We have been dis-
cussing currents; an analogous situation holds for voltages. Consistent with the
neglect of prefault currents, we can neglect all prefau!t series voltage drops (due
to the line currents) and set all prefault voltage magnitudes to 1.0. This is com-
monly called a flat profile. Note: the connection-induced phase shift cannot be
left out.
This discussion motivates the adoption of the simplifying assumptions 1 and 4

below. The two additional assumptions are offered in the same spirit; they simplify
the calculation without degrading the accuracy.
Assumption 1: Load impedances can be ignored.

Assumption 2: All other shunt elements in line and transformer models can
be ignored.
Assumption 3: All series resistances in lines, transformers, and generators can
be ignored.
Assumption 4: The prefault system is unloaded, with zero currents, with a phase
a voltage at the fault point equal to 1 Lr, and with a flat voltage profile.
A few additional comments follow.
1. In defining the prefault flat voltage profile, we do take into account the
connection-induced phase shifts in 6.-Y transformer banks.
2. We recall that in modeling the transformers the shunt magnetizing reactances
were neglected. In modeling the transmission lines the shunt capacitances were
neglected. Since these are relatively high shunt impedances, their neglect is
certainly justifiable in light of the preceding discussion.
3. It is very nice that assumptions 1 and 4 are physically reas~able. It not only
simplifies each calculation but greatly reduces the number of cases to be
considered. We do not have to calculate for a variety of load conditions. It
suffices to calculate for a variety of system configurations and fault locations
and types.
4. In accordance with the discussion following Example 12.4, we have simplified
the modeling of the transmission line.
5. We have ended up with a circuit model consisting only of sources, phase
shifters, and pure reactances (inductances); sometimes the circuit is called a re-
actance diagram.
We continue with an example using these simplifications and the models of

power system elements discussed in Sections 12.7 to 12.9.
Sec, 12,11 Fault Analysis for Realistic Power System Model 479
Example U.S Fault Calculation

The one-line diagram is given in Figure E12,5(a) with a single line-to-ground (SLG)
fault shown at the point a' at the left end of the transmission line, Assume that the pre-
fault voltage Va'n 1 LQ::, Calculate If, la' h, fc, la" h" Ie" Vb'g, and V;'g, using gener-
ator transient reactances, This information is useful in designing a protective relaying
scheme to protect the equipment in the event of an SLG fault at point a',
Figure E12.5(a)
Solution We follow the general procedure described in Section 12.4, the models de-
scribed in Sections 12.7 to 12,9, and the simplifying assumptions just described, The
individual sequence networks are assembled as described in Section 12.10, In fact,
the one-line diagram in Figure E12.S(a) is the same as the lower part of the one-line
diagram in Figure 12.21. Because this is an SLG fault, we connect the sequence net-
works in series. This is shown in Figure E12.5(b) together with the assumed values of
the reactances. In the figure we also show the generator voltages found by "working
back" from the given prefault voltage Va'n := Va'g := 1LQ::.
We next fmd If /3 by replacing the positive-sequence network with a Thevenin
equivalent. V~g = V~ 1 LQ:, The Thevenin equivalent impedance is found by set-
ting the voltage sources equal to zero and measuring the driving-point impedance at
the terminals a' g, In this connection, as shown in Section 5.4, the connection-induced
transformer phase shifts can be ignored. Thus, for the calculation of impedances, we
can ignore the phase shifter symbols (}) or <D in Figure E12.5(b),
Using the rule for combining parallel impedances, we find the following driving-
point impedances:
Zdg = Z"d g = jO.1714 , Z~'g = jQ,0800
Then
If 1 LQ:: '
-3 = /.1
'0 7.14 + jO.l 714+ /'00800
' = - J2.365
Thus If = - j7,095, Next we can c~lculate Vdg, Vdg , and V~'g'

V~'g := j2.365· jO,0800 = -0.1892
V;'g = j2.365 , jO.l714 = -0.4054
V;g 1 + j2.365 , j0.1714 =0.5946
In calculating V;g we have added the contributions of the voltage sources and the
known current!:t = If /3.
Positive-
sequence
network
1/-30'
.
/0.1 jO.l jO.!
a"
+
Negative-
If jO.2
jO.2 VQ~g sequence
"3 network
jO.l jO.3 jO.l

a"
Zero-
fll·06 sequence
network
Figure E12.5(b)
Now we can calculate Vb'g and Ve'g using (12.5).
[ ~::;l [~ ~2 !1[~;:l = [~ ~2 !1[-~:~~!~l =

VC' K
=
1 a (i V;'g 1 a al -0.4054
[0.9113 ;-108.1°]
0.9113/108.1 0
As a check we note the physically obvious fact that Va'g = O.
Sec. 12.11 Fault Analysis for Realistic Power System Model 481
Next we find I,·,h· and Ie'. First we calculate

-Va.
10. = ~ = 1.892 /-900
a jO.1
-V;'g
I~. =- = 1.351 /-90 0
jOJ
To calculate I;' , use the positive-sequence network:
1 /-300 - V~ /-30 0
1+ = ag = 1.351 /-1200
a jOJ
Then
and
I , = [11
10']
[b
Ie' 1
We note that 10 , + Ib, + Ie' = 3I~. = 5.679 /-90 0 is the current in the grounded
neutral of transformer T,. (Certainly, this is an indicator of a fault condition and could
be used as a signal to initiate protective action.)
We next consider the calculation of la, Ib , and Ie. We will need to consider the
connection-induced phase shifts. It is important to note that the phase shifts are dif-
ferent for the positive- and negative-sequence components. Thus, referring to the ap-
propriate sequence networks,
I; = I;'e- i1r/6 = 1.351 /-120 0
I; = I;.e M6 = 1.351 /-60 0
I~ = 0
Thus
Ia = I~ + I; + I; = 2.340 /-90 0
Ib = l~ + ,if; + r;r.I; = 2.340 ~

Ie = I~ + aI: + aZI; = 0
These are very different from the currents Ia·, lb" and Ie' on the secondary side of the
transformer bank! In particular, it should be noted that the corresponding currents
are not related by a simple phase shift as in the balanced case; the magnitudes are also
very different.
As a check we note that Ia + Ib + Ie = O. This is consistent with the lack of a
return path for the primary currents into the transformer bank. The reader may wish
to check further the consistency of the results regarding primary and secondary cur-
rents by considering the currents in the actual/::,.-Y transformer connection in more de-
tail; the connection is shown in Figure 5.10.
We conclude this section with a few additional observations and comments.
1. The important case of a symmetrical three-phase faults can be analyzed by per

phase methods as discussed in Chapters 2 and 5. Alternatively, we can use the
positive-sequence network introduced in this chapter. To illustrate, suppose that
in Example 12.5 the fault in Figure E12.5(a) is a (solid) symmetric three-phase
fault. Then, using the positive-sequence network in Figure E12.5(b), we get
1~
If = - - = - j5.834
jO.l714
2. We have ignored the unidirectional component of generator current; this com-
ponent was discussed in Example 7.4 (application 2) on generator short circuits.
The effect of this component is to increase the maximum instantaneous current
seen by bus structures, circuit breakers, and other equipment immediately fol-
lowing a short circuit. In designing circuit breakers to withstand the associated
large mechanical forces, it is considered adequate to multiply the calculated sub-
transient current by a certain factor. These unidirectional components decay
very rapidly but may still be present in high-speed circuit breakers at the time
the breaker contacts open. Similarly, design factors may be used when specify-
ing the interrupting capacity of circuit breakers.
3. Another factor that tends to increase the initial short-circuit current is the pres-
ence of synchronous and induction motors. Due to inertia these machines con-
tinue to turn, and, under short-circuit conditions, can act as generators, at least
momentarily. It is conventional to model the larger of these machines in short-
circuit studies.
12.12 MATRIX METHODS
As noted in Section 12.4, for all but the simplest networks, computer s~tions are nec-
essary in solving for currents and voltages of the faulted network. In this case we use
matrix methods. The principles are based on the techniques developed in Chapter 9.
Central to the method is the calculation of the appropriate terms of the bus im-
pedance matrix corresponding to the three sequence networks. In this connection,
the technique to obtain the appropriate columns of the bus impedance matrix from
the admittance matrix is the technique of choice in most modern fault analysis pack-
ages. The admittance matrix for each sequence network is generated knowing the in-
terconnection structure of the network elements. This is commonly specified in terms
of the node numbers or names between which specific branches are connected. The
branches here refer to network elements like transmission lines transformers gen-
erators, etc. The primitive impedances of the components are 'also specified: For
constructing the admittance matrix of the zero-sequence network, the connections of
Il-Y three-phase transformers and those of generator neutrals are also specified. The
r Sec. 12.12 Matrix Methods 483
C C ra
Z- +
Va-
-
]0
a
tJ' +
VaO
-
Positive sequence Negative sequence Zero sequence
Figure 12.25 Sequence network representation for fault analysis.
fault location is usually a user-specified option. This information is used to obtain the
columns of the impedance matrix at the faulted bus for each sequence network. It
is important to note that the admittance matrices are usually generated without tak-
ing into account the phase shift in the !::.-Y transformers. The phase shifts are intro-
duced when the currents in various branches of the sequence component networks
are calculated.
To find the sequence currents that flow into the fault we need the (matrix)
Thevenin equivalent sequence impedances looking into the system at the fault loca-
tion. As we have shown in Chapter 9, this is given by the diagonal entry corresponding
to the faulted node of each sequence network. The power system is then represent-
ed by its sequence networks at the fault location, as shown in Figure 12.25. The
Z+, Z-, and ZO components shown in the figure are the diagonal entries of the ap-
propriate impedance matrices corresponding to the faulted bus.
Given the type of the fault (single line-to-ground, line-to-line, or double line-to-
ground), the three equivalent sequence representations obtained in Figure 12.25 are
then connected in the same manner as those shown in Section 12.3. For example, in
the case of a single line-to-ground fault, the three networks are connected in series
as shown in Figure 12.26.
VI
z- +
v-a ]+
a
]0
a
ZO +
vaa Figure 12.26 Sequence net-
work connection diagram for sin-
gle line-ground fault.
484 Unbalanced System Operation . Chap. 12
The basic equation describing the relationships between the voltage and the
currents in Figure 12.25 is given by the following matrix equation:
[ ~J]
V;
= [~/]
0
- [ZO Z+
Z-
] [:J]
I;
(12.44)
Vs = V{ - ZsIs
Equation (12.44) is used to calculate the sequence components of the voltages at the
fault location knowing the sequence components of the fault current. The sequence
components of the fault currents are obtained using the appropriate connection of the
sequence component networks. For example, in the case of the single line-ground
fault at node k, the sequence components of the fault current are given by
rak -- rak -- 1°ak -- Ztk + Zkk VI+ Z~k + 3Z1 (12 45)
.
The voltages at all the other nodes i are computed knowing the components of the
fault current and the appropriate elements of the impedance matrix for the sequence
networks. The other elements of the column of the impedance matrix evaluated at the
faulted bus are used for this purpose. For the negative- and zero-sequence compo-
nents, we may write
V~ = -Z~kI~k> Vi = -ZiiJ;k (12.46)
In the positive-sequence network the voltage VI must be added as follows:
vt = VI - ZM:k (12.47)
Knowing the voltages at all the other nodes, the sequence components of the branch
currents between any pair of nodes i and j are computed knowing the primitive im-
pedance Zij of the branch between nodes i and j as
(12.48)
where s denotes the appropriate sequence. The needed phase shifts are then ac-
counted for before calculating the phase components of the currents and voltages.
The aforementioned procedure described will now be demonstrated on the sys-
tem and fault condition considered in Example 12.5.
Example U.6 Fault Calculation Using Matrix Methods

For the system considered in Example 12.5, and the same fault, calculate I~ Ia> lb' I"
la" h" Ie" Vb'g, and Ve'g using the matrix method just presented.
Solution We first generate the appropriate terms of the bus impedance matrices for
each sequence component network shown in Figure E12.5(b), Note that the phase
Sec. 12.12 Matrix Methods 485
shifts are not included in generating the impedance matrix terms. For the sake of com-
pleteness, we provide the entire bus impedance matrix rather than the needed ele-
ments. The bus impedance matrices for the component networks with a, ai, and a" as
the three nodes are given by
j0.1429 j0.1143 jO.0571] jO.06 ]

z+ = z- = j0.1143 j0.1714 jO.0857 ZO = jO.OS
[ [
jO.0571 jO.OS57 j0.1429 jO.60
The single line-ground fault is applied at node a'. As a result the Thevenin
equivalent impedances for the sequence component networks looking into the system
at node a' are given by Z;a' = Z;a' = j0.1714 and Z~'a' = jO,OS. Note that these are
identical to the equivalent impedances calculated in Example 12.5. These impedances
are also the impedances to be used in the component networks shown in Figure 12.25.
We proceed to calculate the sequence component currents for the single line-ground
fault as before:
If 1~
3 -jO-.1-71-4-+-,-='0.=17=-14-+-jO'-.0-S = - j2365
Thus If = - j7.095. Next we calculate: V~g, V;g, and V~'g using (12.44):
[ V~,g] =
Vjg
[0] [jO.OS
1 - j0.1714
1[- j2365]
-j2.365 = [-0.1892]
0.5946
V;g 0 j0.1714 - j2.365 -0.4054
We again note that these are identical to the values calculated in Example 12.5. We
can now transform the sequence components into phase components using (12.5):
v.,g] [1
Vb'g = 1
[ Vca'
1 1]
ri a
[-0.1892]
0.5946 = [ 0.9113 /-108.1
0 ]
0
g 1 a i -0.4054 0.9113 /108.1 0
These values again agree with those in Example 12.5

The voltages at node a are calculated next using (12.46) and (12.47), It is im-
portant to note that these calculations are made without accounting for the phase shifts
in the Ll-Y transformers. Hence the voltages calculated do not account for the phase
shift due to the transformers. As a result, the currents calculated from these voltages
also do not account for the phase shifts. The phase shifts are introduced after the cur-
rents are calculated. '
V~g = -Z~a,J~, = -(0) X - j2.365 = 0

V~g = Vf - Z~a,J~ = 1.0 - j0.1143 x - j2.365 = 0.7297
V;g = -Z;"'/; = - j0.1143 x - j2.365 = -0.2702

Using these voltages, we can now calculate the currents I~., I;, and 1;' from (12.48):
o V~ g - V~'g 0 - (-0.1892) .
1,. = 0 = . = - ]1.892
Zaa' ,0.1
0.7297 - 0.5946 = ~ '1.351

jO.1 '
-0.2702 + 0.4054 = _ '1.351
jO.l '
Note that these are again identical to those evaluated in Example 12.5. We now evalu-
ate the currents ,; and 1; by applying phase shifts to I; and 1;' , respectively, as follows:
I; = I;e-j~/6 = 1.351/-120°
I; = F;e M6 = 1.351/-60°
1~ = 0
Transforming these into phase variables, we obtain the identical values of currents I"
Ib , and Ie on the Aside of the transformer as those obtained in Example 12.5.
We can also obtain the actual voltages at node a, by applying the same phase
shifts to the voltages calculated previously. We then obtain
V;g = 0.7297e- M6 = 0.7297 /-30°
V; g = -0.2702eM6 = 0.2702/-150°
V~g = 0
We now calculate the voltages at node a from Example 12.5 to demonstrate that we
get the same values.
V;g = 1/-30° - jO.2 X 1;= 1/-30° - jO.2 X 1.351/-120° = 0.7297/-30°
V;g = 0 - jO.2 X I; = 0 - jO.2 X 1.351/-60° = 0,2702/-150°
In Example 12.6 matrix methods were used to solve a very sI$ll system. The
intent was to display the various steps and show the potential of the technique for ar-
bitrarily large systems.
12.13 SUMMARY
Faults are responsible for unbalanced conditions in power systems. Normal power
flow may be interrupted, and possible destructive currents may flow. To design and
monitor a system protection scheme, it is necessary to analyze a power system oper-
ating under unbalanced conditions.
The method of symmetrical components provides such a method. Every vec-
tor of phase voltages Va, Vb, and ~, or line currents la, h, or Ie. is resolved into the
sum of three vectors: a zero-sequence vector, a positive-sequence vector, and a

negative-sequence vector. Only at the fault point is there coupling between the three
sequence systems, and this fact may be exploited to simplify the analysis problem.
We are led to consider a single-phase version of the three-phase problem with three
different sequence networks connected in various ways depending on the type of
fault. This generalizes 'the use of the per phase analysis of balanced three phase.
In fact, one of the networks, the positive-sequence network, is the same as used
previously in per phase analysis. The negative-sequence network has the same topol-
ogy but differs as follows. The positive-sequence voltage sources that model the gen-
erator internal voltages are absent, the generator reactances are negative sequence,
and the transformer phase shifts are different. However, the zero-sequence network
looks very different because of the variety of transformer connections.
The sequence networks help in understanding how the currents and voltages in
the faulted network depend on the system parameters, the location of the fault, the
type of fault, the type of grounding, and the type of transformer connection. This
understanding is more important in design than the purely computational aspects.
For computations in systems of realistic size, computer methods are essential. These
are again based on the method of symmetrical components.
Problems
12.1. (a) Find the (leading) symmetrical components I~, I;, and I ~ for Ia = 1, Ib = 10, and
Ie = -10.
(b) Check by sketching Ia'!b' and Ie as the sum of appropriate symmetrical components.
12.2. Find the symmetrical components of Ea = 1 LQ:" Eb = 1 /-90°,and Ee = 2 /135°.
12.3. Refer to Figure P123 and assume that
Ea =1
Eb = -1
Ee = jl
jl
Figure P12.3
4SS Unbalanced System Operation Chap. 12
(a) Describe how you would use the method of symmetrical components to find [,,1b ,
1" and V. g •
(b) Carry out the procedure.
12.4. In Figure P12A, the source voltages are positive-sequence sets and all imped-
ances = Z. Using an appropriate interconnection of sequence networks, find 11 (in
terms of Z) and Va'g'
Z a' Z a"
If
Zf = Z
g
.,.
b
Z Z
Z Z
Figure P12.4
12.5. In Figure P12.5, the source voltages are in positive-sequence sets. All impedances are
Z = jO.l. Find [1,Ibh and [b1'
a'
h'
If
c'
Figure P12.5
12.6. Suppose that the fault is as shown in Figure P12.6(a). Show that the proper connection
of sequence networks is as shown in Figure P12.6(b). Hint: Start by calculating Vjg - V~'g.
I,}
lar la! 3Zf
, ,
--~-
+
--oL-
+
--~-
+
a'
•
b' V/g Va~ Va?g
c'
--.----
g
--~-
g --~-
g
Zf
Positive· Negative· Zero·
sequence sequence sequence
~ network network network
(a) (b)
Figure P12.&
12.7. In Figure P12. 7, voltages are positive sequence, all Z are equal, and Zf '" O. Of the fol·
lowing, which fault current magnitude is biggest?
(a) a' to ground
(b) b'toe' .
(c) b' to c' to ground (Find Ibf')
(d) 3<jJ ground
a'
b'
c'
Figure P12.7
Z'" jO.1 load impedances
Z+ = j1.0
Z- = jO.1
1 generator
impedances
zo", jO.005
iI
490 Unbalanced System Operation Chap. 12 1
I
The generator neutral is not grounded. Before the fault occurs, the generator is sup-
plying positive-sequence voltages and currents. Va'g = lLQ:. Find thefault currentlf.
a'
If z
b'
c'
Figure P12.B
12.9. In Figure P12.9, a solid phase a-to-ground fault occurs at bus 1 (i.e., the switch closes
on phase a).
(a) Show the complete sequence network connection for this fault. Neglect all resis-
tances but show (and label) all the impedances.
(b) Assume that Z+ = j1.0, Z- = jO.1, and Zo = jO.OOS for the generators and that
all the remaining impedances have the (same) value jO.1. Assume that the pre-
fault voltage Va'n = Va'g = 1 LQ: at bus 1. Find If.
Short
transmission
line
~mr~I ~/ ~~m~
r:r z\
____ ____
t 6
1
Figure P12.9
{;
12.10. Draw the zero-sequence network for the one-line diagram shown in Figure P12.10. Ne-
glect transmission-line reactances, but show transformer leakage reactances and gen-
erator sequence impedances. Identify the points P, Q, and R on your diagram.
y
~~ -f'~ ~
r" TI Tl
Gl
~
Q
Tl T,
Y
~y ~~
fj,
r fj,
Figure P12.10
rI
1 Chap. 12 Problems
491
I
12.11. Repeat Problem 12.10 using Figure P12.11. Show points P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, and Won
your diagram.
y
s r 1. cl
r; I U
~~ O~
f 6
~
T
6
~~
6
0
cJ
Y
Figure P12.11
12.12. A line-line fault occurs at the point shown in Figure P12.12. Find the steady-state fault
current If. Z = jO.05 for all impedances, and all sources are positive sequence. Note:
The fault occurs between phases a and b.
z z
b'
Z Z
Figure P12.12
12.13. Refer to Figure P12.13( a) and assume that.

Z+ = jl.O
Z- = jO.5
ZO = jO.1
Z = jl.O
Z, = jO.1
The generator neutral is not grounded. Before the fault Va = V.n =1~
(a) Calculate If with the breaker open.
(b) Calculate If with the breaker closed.
Use Figure P12.13(b) to model each phase of the transformer.
492 Unbalanced System Operation. Chap. 12
If
T
:Jt 1:1
ideal
Transformer (b)
(a)
Figure P12.13
12.14. Refer to Figure P12.14 and assume the following:

Generators: X+ = X- =0.2, XU = 0.05
Transformers: XI 0.05
Lines: X+ '" X- = 0.1, XO '" OJ
Prefault (line-neutral) voltage v~t = vgt = 1 ~ at bus 3. Ft# a phase a-to-ground
fault at bus 3, find I,f,lbf,lcf' v"g, Vbg,and v"g (all at bus 3).
Figure P12.14
Sec. 012.1 Design Exercise: Fault Analysis 493
12.15. Refer to Figure P12.15 and assume the following:

Generator: X+ '" X- 0.2, XO 0.05
,
Transformer: XI 0.05
Lines: r X- 0.2, XO 3X+ 0.6
At point a at the near end of the (radial) transmission line, we measure the impedance
of each phase of the line (i.e., l, Vag/I", lb = v"g/ h, l, V,g/ Ie). Plot Ilol, Ilbl, Il,1
versus Afor
(a) 3<jJ fault
(b) Single line-to-ground fault
(c) Line-to-line fault
(d) Double line-to-ground fault
Note: If III 00, simply note thefact.
Figure P12.1S
12.16. Repeat Example 12.5 if there is an SLG (phase a) fault in the middle of the transmis-
sion line. Assume that the prefault (phase a) voltage at the fault point is 11.9:..
12.17. Repeat Example 12.5 if there is a DLG fault (between phases b and c) at the terminals
of G!. Assume that the prefault (phase a) voltage at the fault point is 1 1.9:.. Find the
fault currents fbi and I,t.
D12.1 DESIGN EXERCISE: FAULT ANALYSIS

The activity in this phase will be to determine the fault currents at each bus in the sys-
tem that you have designed and tested in Chapter 10. The instructor may opt to
choose any available short-circuit analysis software to perform the study. However,
it is suggested that the student use the procedure developed in Chapter 9 to create
the Ybus for each sequence network, and appropriately obtain only the desired col-
umn of the Zbus matrix. This can be used to write a very simple fault calculation pro-
gram using MATLAB. In the study the following simplifications should be made:
1. Loads: Loads are not considered in the fault study.

2. Transformers: For purposes of this study, assume the transformers are 161 kV
delta, 69 kV wye grounded. The zero-sequence impedance is assumed to be
the same as the positive-sequence impedance.
3. Lines: The series R + j X in per unit are used. Capacitance is not considered.
You will need to calculate the zero-sequence impedance in per unit for your
lines as described in the Section 12.9.
494 Unbalanced System Operation ,Chap. 12
4. Generation: Neglect resistance. Assume that the subtransient reactance of each

generator is 0.02664 p.u., and the zero sequence reactance is 0.01025 p.u. on a
100-MVA base. The generators are connected wye grounded.
5. Your program should calculate the following quantities:
a. Report the magnitude of the phase a current for a three-phase fault and for
a single line-to-ground fault at each bus (in per unit).
b. Select two buses, one with the three-phase fault current larger than the SLG
fault, and one with the SLG fault current larger. For each bus
I ': 1.\2 'c
(1) Compare current magnitudes in the faulted phases for three-phase,

LL, DLG, and SLG faults. Rank the fault types from highest to low-
est fault current.
(2) For the SLG fault, find the sequence voltages at the fault bus (polar
form) in per unit.
(3) Find the Thevenin equivalent positive and zero sequence impedances
(rectangular form) in per unit.
(4) For the SLG fault, find the ~ line current in each line connected
to the faulted bus (polar form). Do they sum to the total fault current?
(5) For the three-phase fault, find the effect on the fault current of line out-
ages of lines connected to the fault bus. (Oufage one line at a time.)
c. Select a rural 161-kV line.
(1) For a fault at one end of the line, find the apparent impedance seen by
a relay at the other end of the line looking toward the fault. Do this for
phase a, with three-phase and SLG faults, and for phases band c with
LL and DLG faults.
Report The report should include the following:
a. The map and one-line diagram of your system.

b. The table of positive-sequence impedances of your lines from Chapter 10.
c. A new table of zero-sequence line impedances.
d. A listing of transformer and generator impedances on the system base.
e. The printer output files listing of bus data.
f. The printer output file listings of line data.
g. Tables showing the required fault currents and impedances.
h. List of the bus with the highest and the bus with the lowest fault current magnitude.
•
CHAPTER 13 ' ',' .'.'
System Protection
13.0 INTRODUCTION
In this chapter we consider the problem of power system protection. Good design,
maintenance, and proper operating procedures can reduce the probability of occur-
rence of faults, but cannot eliminate them, Given that faults will inevitably occur, the
objective of protective system design is to minimize their impact.
Faults may have very serious consequences. At the fault point itsel~ there may
be arcing, accompanied by high temperatures and, possibly, fire and explosion. There
may be destructive mechanical forces due to very high currents. Overvoltages may
stress insulation beyond the breakdown value. Even in the case of less severe faults,
high currents in the faulted system may overheat equipment; sustained overheating
may reduce the useful life of the equipment. Clearly, faults must be removed from
the system as rapidly as possible, In carrying out this objective an important, but sec-
ondary, objective is to remove no more of the system than absolutely necessary, in
order to continue to supply as much of the load as possible. In this connection, we
note that temporary loss of lighting or water pumping or air-conditioning load is not
usually serious, but loss of service to some industrial loads can have serious conse-
quences. Consider, for example, the problem of repair of an electric arc furnace in
which the molten iron has solidified because of loss of power.
Faults are removed from a system by opening or "tripping" circuit breakers,
These are the same circuit breakers used in normal system operation for connecting
or disconnecting generators, lines, and loads. For emergency operation the breakers
are tripped automatically when a fault condition is detected. Ideally, the operation
is highly selective; only those breakers closest to the fault operate to remove or "clear"
the fault. The rest of the system remains intact.
Fault conditions are detected by monitoring voltages and currents at various
critical points in the system. Abnormal values individually or in combination cause
relays to operate, energizing tripping circuits in the circuit breakers. A simple ex-
ample is shown in Figure 13.1.
A description of the operation is as follows. The primary current in the current
transformer is the line current II' The secondary current I; is passed through the
495
496 System Protection Chap. 13
•
r
Current
transfanner
Movable
contacts I
~
l~ line
/1
Circuit
breaker
Overcurren t
relay
Battery -=- Trip coil
Manual Figure 13.1 Schematic of

trip overcurrent protection.
operating coil of an overcurrent relay. When 1111 exceeds a specified pickup value, the
normally open relay contacts close. If the relay is of the plunger type, like that de-
scribed in Appendix 2, the contacts close instantaneously. Other types of relays have
an intentional and adjustable time delay. When the relay contacts close, the trip coil
circuit is energized and the circuit breaker trips open. We can think of the trip coil
as a solenoid whose movable core releases a latch, permitting the stored energy in a
spring or compressed air tank to mechanically force open the movable contacts of the
circuit breaker. We note in passing that the arc that forms between the circuit-break-
er contacts when they open is extinguished by blowing away the ionized medium be-
tween the contacts using a blast of air or a transverse magnetic field; since the ac arc
current is zero twice each cycle, the arc goes out arlce the insulating properties of the
medium are restored. ':I
In more general cases than the one we have been describing, potential (voltage)
transformers (PTs or VTs) as well as current transformers (CTs) are used. Collec-
tively these transformers are known as instrument transformers. We note that these
transformers are used for measurements (instrumentation) as well as in protective
schemes. In either application the instrument transformers isolate the dangerous
I
line voltages and currents (in the kilovolt and kiloampere range) from the secondary
circuits. A very wide range of rated primary voltages and currents are commercial-
ly available. The secondary voltages are typically standardized to 115 V or 120 V in
the case of line-line voltages and to 115/\13 V or 120/v3 V in the case of line-
neutral voltages; the standard secondary current rating is 5 A.
We will be assuming that the instrument transformers are ideal so that the sec·
ondary voltages and currents are simply scaled-down versions oftheir primary coun-
..
Sec. 13.1 Protection of Radial Systems 497
terparts. We will also assume, except where noted, that the measurement point for
voltage or current is at the circuit-breaker location. This being the case, we will fre-
quently describe relay action in breaker terms.
We note that it is not practical to use potential transformers at the very high line
voltages frequently encountered. Instead, a portion of the line voltage is used, derived
from a voltage-divider circuit composed of series capacitors. The output is then fed
through a series inductance to a potential transformer, where the voltage is reduced
further. The series inductance can be picked so that, together with the leakage in-
ductance of the potential transformer, the capacitance is "tuned" out and the Th6venin
equivalent impedance of the overall capacitor-coupled voltage transformer (CCVT)
is practically zero in the sinusoidal steady state. For simplicity we will not distinguish
between the low-voltage PT (or VT) measuring device and this high-voltage realiza-
tion since we assume ideal operation for both.
Before continuing, choose the better relay scheme.
Exercise 1. We are given the two alternative arrangements of circuit breakers

shown in Figure Ex 1. Which breaker scheme is preferable from the point of view of
minimizing the loss of load in the event of faults on buses andlor lines? Note: Three
breakers are employed in either case.
SDl Figure Ex 1
13.1 PROTECTION OF RADIAL SYSTEMS'
We start by considering the simplest case, that of protecting a radial system, as shown
in Figure 13.2. The protection scheme specified should satisfy some general criteria
assuring selectivity and redundancy. More specifically in this particular case, we wish
to satisfy the following criteria:
498 System Protection Ch~p. 13
SD3 Figure 13.2 Radial system.
1. Under normal load conditions the circuit breakers Bo, B1,and B2 do not operate.
2. Under fault conditions only the closest breaker to the left of the fault should op-
erate; this protects the system by clearing (and deenergizing) the fault while
maintaining serVice to as much of the system as possible.
3. In the event that the closest-breaker fails to operate, the next breaker closer to
the power source should operate. This provision is called backup protection.
Suppose that there is a 3cf> fault to the right of B2• The current 12, at B2 , will in-
crease from its prefault value to a, presumably, much larger fault value. The presence
of this large current can be detected by an overcurrent relay at the breaker location
and used to initiate the triggering of B2 • Stated more simply and directly in breaker
terms, we can trip B2 when its fault current magnitude exceeds a specified preset
pickup value of current. If we set the pickup value of current low enough to trip B2
for a fault at bus 3, then B2 will certainly trip for the larger current accompanying a
"closer in" fault anywhere on the transmission line to the right of B2. Thus B2 pro-
tects the line and bus to its right, or stated differently, the transmission line and bus
are in the protection zone of B2 .
What if B2 fails to operate for a fault in its protection zone? We note that the
fault current at B1 is essentially the same as the fault current at B2, since the load
current (supplying SD2) is small compared with the fault current. We could there-
fore set B1 for the same pickup current value as B2 but introduce a time delay so that
B2 would normally operate first; this deliberately introduced time delay is called a co-
ordination time delay. Would this method of setting the pickup curilnt value of BJ
interfere with its primary function in protecting against faults in its protection zone
(line and bus between B1 and B2)? Fortunately not, since faults within its protec-
tion zone are closer to the source and produce larger fault currents. If B1 is set to trip
for remote faults (in the protection zone of B2), it certainly can be expected to trip
for faults within its own protection zone. The preceding discussion for the two break-
ers B1 and B2 extends pairwise to any number of breakers in a radial system. A dif-
ficulty in extending the number of breakers, however, is the possibly excessive trip
time for the breakers nearest the source because of the summation of coordination
time delays. Later, we will introduce a relaying method without this disadvantage.
While for simplicity we have been discussing a symmetric 3cf> fault, we certain-
ly will want to protect our system against the more common general faults. The ex-
tension is simple enough. For example, for B2, the pickup current for each phase
should be low enough that tripping occurs for any type fault of interest in its zone of
protection. The implementation will require three overcurrent relays with their con-
tacts in parallel in the trip circuit of the 3</1 circuit breaker. Thus; a fault on any phase
trips the breaker. This practice of tripping all three phases is common in the United
States. In some other countries single-pole switching may be used for some types of
faults.
In implementing the protection scheme described in connection with Figure
13.2, we need overcurrent relays with adjustable current pickup values and adjustable
time delays. Historically this has been accomplished using electromechanical
relays. Since the early 1990s, however, these relays are rapidly being replaced by
microprocessor-based relays, particularly in the case of new installations. We will
return to this development in Section 13.10.
We believe that electromechanical relays may still be used to advantage in in-
troducing the principles of system protection. For the most part, the principles and
even modes of relay behavior remain unchanged; rather it is the physical implemen-
tations that are so different. In that case, we will take advantage of the simpler (and
more physically intuitive) descriptions of electromechanical devices.
Returning to the problem of protecting a radial system, we note that the plunger-
type relay described in Appendix 2 can be used as an overcurrent relay with ad-
justable pickup current. It can also be fitted with an oil dash pot or air bellows to
provide an adjustable time delay. In practice, however, the time-delay adjustment is
not accurate enough. To obtain a more accurate time delay, a relay of the induction-
disk type is usually used. The basic torque generating principle is that of the com-
mon household watthour meter. In a watthour meter the angular velocity of the
rotating disk is proportional to the average power supplied; in this way by counting
the number of revolutions we measure the energy (i.e., the integral of power). The
desired characteristic is achieved by designing the watthour meter so that the torque
that drives the disk is proportional to the average power supplied:
T =klVlIlI cos ¢ (13.1)
where ¢ is the phase angle between V and l. There are also damping or braking
magnets across the disk that cause an opposing torque proportional to the speed.
Thus, in equilibrium we get the desired proportionality between angular velocity and
average power.
Although the actual construction of an induction-disk relay differs in detail, we
can think of using a modified watthour meter element with the voltage and current
coils connected extemally to give a torque proportional to 1112 alone. If the disk is then
restrained by a spiral spring, it will not turn until the current exceeds a certain pick-
up value. Beyond that value the higher the current magnitude, the faster the disk
rotates and the less time it takes to rotate through a given angle. By having a mov-
ing contact that rotates with the disk "makeup" with a stationary contact, an "in-
verse" time-current characteristic may be obtained. By adjusting the position of the
stationary contact, the time delay may be varied and a family of time-current char-
acteristics is obtained.
SOD System Protection Chap. 13
2 4 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20
Current as a multiple of tap setting
Figure 13.3 C0-7 time-delay overcurrent relay characteristics.

[Courtesy of Westinghouse Electric Corporation.)
To obtain an adjustable pickup current value, one might m~e the spiral spring
tension adjustable. In fact, the adjustment is obtained by varying the number of turns
in the current coil of the relay by means of "taps."
A typical set of overcurrent relay characteristics is shown in Figure 13.3. The
two adjustable settings are labeled "current tap setting" and "time dial setting." The
current tap setting designates the relay pickup current. For example, with a tap set-
ting of 7, the relay will pick up when the current is 7A.
Note that for a given time dial setting, the relay operating time varies inverse-
ly with relay current. The curves are asymptotic to the vertical axis; thus when the
relay current equals the pickup current, it takes an indefinitely long time for actual
pickup. In the example to follow we will show how to compensate for this peculiar
feature when choosing the value of pickup current.
•
Example 13.1
Consider the radial system shown in Figure E13.1(a), which represents a portion of a
larger system. Bulk power is fed from a substation represented by the source on the
left. We make the following assumptions:
jlO
j8
Figure E13.1(a)
1. The source is an infinite bus; the voltage on the low (right) side of the trans-
former is 34.5 kV (line-line).
2. Prefault currents are negligible compared with fault currents. The prefault
voltage profile is flat.
3. The model shows actual impedances in ohms; positive-, negative-, and zero-
sequence impedances are assumed equal. Resistances are neglected.
4. The transformer impedance is j5 referred to the 34.5-kV side.
S. Faults may occur anywhere to the right of BI • Faults maybe 3<,6,SLG,LL,and
DLG. We assume a solid fault (i.e., Z f = 0).
6. For each breaker there are three overcurrent relays (one for each phase).
We wish to trip the (3<,6) breaker if a fault condition is detected on any phase.
A schematic of the setup is shown in Figure E13.1(b). Note that the break-
er trip circuit is activated if any overcurrent relay operates.
The objective is to pick CTs and relay settings to protect the lines and buses 2,3,4,5.
We also want B2 to back up BJ and BI to back up B2. Suppose that the coordination
time delay is specified to be OJ sec.
Solution With a flat prefault voltage profile the prefault Thevenin equivalent
voltage at any fault point can be taken to be 34.5/\/3 kV. Consider first setting
RJ. the relay that trips BJ•
Setting of RJ • We want the relay to operate for any type (solid) fault to the right of
BJ. We therefore need to know the smallest line current at location BJ under any
fault condition. Using the sequence networks and considering all the alternatives, it
becomes apparent that a line-line fault at bus 4 (the electrically most remote location)
gives the smallest currents. If the fault is between phases band c, we get, by a very
502 System Protection qhap. 13
T
CTs
Breaker
I
OC relays
Operating
coils
Relay
contacts
Battery -=- ..,..

Manual
Breaker
trip coil
trip
Figure E13.1(b)
simple calculation, using (12.18) and the appropriate connection of networks shown in
Figure 12.10, .
134 = 0
34,500/V3 .
1~4 = - jV3 I:, = - jV3 2 X j35 = -492.86 ~
[54 = 492.86 A
Thus with a fault between any two phases, two of the line currents will have magnitude
492.86, and we would like to trip reliably for those currents. In fact, we would like to
initiate tripping action at a much lower value of current. In this way we have a safe-
ty factor with respect to reasonable modeling errors and also compensate for the pe-
CUliarity of the CO-7 characteristic mentioned earlier (i.e., wherein it would take an
indefinitely long time to trip if we picked 492.86 as the tripping current).
Taking a safety factor of 3, we therefore wish to initiate tripping when
11341 2! 165A "" 492.86

3
Of course, in practice we should check that the expected norrnalline currents are sig-
nificantly less than this value; we assume this to be the case. Picking a CT ratio of
r Sec. 13.1 Protection of Radial Systems 503
I 150:5* we get the corresponding desired relay pickup value of 5.M. Looking at the
CO-7 characteristic, we cannot choose 5.5; we can choose a tap setting of 5.0 A, which
will improve the safety margin; 5.0 A corresponds to a line current of 150 A It re-
mains to choose the time dial setting. For fastest action pick the value~. When
IIJ41 = 492.86A, the relay current is 492.86 x 5/150 = 16.43, which is 3.29 times the
tap setting. For the characteristic curves we trip in approximately 0.2 sec. Note that
the safety factor of 3 has biased us nicely into the central region of the characteristic.
We next consider the setting of Rz.
Setting of Rz. Since Rz must provide backup protection for RJ , pickUp is required
under the same current conditions as for RJ • It is convenient therefore to pick the
same CT ratio and tap setting. The time dial setting must provide for a OJ-sec time
delay for coordination with RJ ; we do not want the Rz contacts to close until BJ has
had a chance to trip into the open position. Since with a current of 492.86 A, RJ
picks up in 0.2 sec, we wish Rz to pick up in 0.2 + OJ = 0.5 sec. The characteristic
curves show that a time dial setting of approximately 1 would suffice. However,
looking at the curves we see that for higher currents the time delay would be too
short and the coordination time delay would be less than OJ sec. Because the curves
are closer together at the right, it is clear that to maintain the coordination time
delay the time dial setting will need to be determined by considering the largest cur-
rent value.
In the backup mode the largest current occurs for a 3¢ fault just to the right of
BJ and has the value
34,500/v'3
I~ = I~4 = . = - j796.74
J25 .
Thus in Rz and RJ we get relay currents of 796.74 x 5/150 = 26.56, which are 5Jl
times the tap settings. From the curves, R) operates in 0.15 sec and we thus want Rz
to operate in 0.15 + OJ = 0.45 sec. Interpolating the curves, we get a time dial setting
of approximately 1.5, which is realizable since the settings are continuously adjustable.
In this manner, from considerations of backup protection, we have specified Rz,
but it will certainly also pick up for all faults within its primary zone of protection.
The smallest current will be for a line-line fault at bus 3 and that current will have
magnitude 492.86 x 35/25 = 690 A. This is 4.6 times the pickup value and Rz will
trip in about 0.5 sec.
Setting of R I • Again, we pick the settings of R\ based on the requirement of backup

for Rz. In this mode, the smallest current that R\ will see, together with Rz, is 690 A
Again, introducing the safe\y factor of 3, we wish to initiate tripping for breaker cur-
rents greater than 690/3 = 230 A, Picking at CT ratio of 200: 5, for example, we get
a corresponding relay pickup value of 5.75 A Looking at the CO-7 characteristic, we
can pick a tap setting of 5.0 A or 6.0 A Suppose that we pick 6,0 A This corresponds
to a line current of 6.0 X 200/5 = 240 A, which is close enough to 230 A To find the
'Standard primary ratings are 50, 100, 150,200,250,300,400,450,500,600,800,900,1000, and 120QA,

Secondary ratings are always 5A.
504 System Protection . Chap. 13
time dial setting, consider the largest short-circuit current seen by R2 and R! (in its
backup mode). This is a 3rjJ short just to the right of B2• The current is
34,500jV3
112 = 123 = . 5 = - j1327.91
J1 .
Thus in R! we get a relay current of 1327.91 X 5/200 = 33.20, which is 33.20/6 =
5.53 times the tap setting for R!. For R2 we get a relay current of 1327.91 X
5/150 = 44.2, which is 44.2/5 = 8.847 times the tap setting for R2. Relay R2 oper-
ates in 0.45 sec for the time dial setting of 1.5, which we have already picked.
Considering the coordination time delay, we wish R! to operate in 0.45 + 0.3 =
0.75 sec. From the curves we find that for a current 5.53 times the tap setting, the time
dial setting is approximately 2.2 sec.
This completes the selection of cr ratios and relay settings of R!, R2 , and R3
associated with breakers B!, B2, and B3 , respectively.
13.2 SYSTEM WITH TWO SOURCES
Let us consider what happens if we modify the system in Figure 13.2 by adding a
source to bus 3. The advantage of the modified system compared with a radial sys-
tem is improved continuity of service because the power can be supplied from either
end. Additional circuit breakers are needed as shown in Figure 13.4.
Note that a fault on bus 1, or the line between bus 1 and bus 2, need no longer
interrupt service to buses 2 and 3. This, of course, presumes correct operation by the
breakers.
Correct operation cannot be accomplished by the method discussed in the pre-
ceding section. To see this, suppose that there is a solid 34> fault at point (x) in Fig-
ure 13.4. We want Bn and Bl2 to open to clear the fault. We do not want B12 and/or
B21 to operate and interrupt service to bus 2. Suppose that we attempt to use the
method of the preceding section. We would set B2l to trip faster than B21 (and B21
to trip faster than B12)' which would imply correct action for aJjult at point (x). But
suppose that the fault were at point (y) instead. With relays ~t as described previ-
ously, B2l would trip before B 21 , which would isolate bus 2 unnecessarily. When the
fault may be fed from either left or right, there is no way to coordinate the relay time
delays properly.
Figure 13.4 System with two sources.

Sec. 13.2 System with Two Sources 505
To remove faulted lines correctly, we require relays to respond only to faults oc-
curring on their forward or line sides. The relays must therefore be directional. In
this case B2l would not operate for a fault at location (x); B 23 and Bl2 could be coor-
dinated so that B23 would operate first. On the other hand, with a fault at location
(y), B 23 would not operate and Bll and B32 could be coordinated so that B2l would
operate first. In fact, with this directional feature, and for a system like that in Fig-
ure 13.4 (i.e., with a string of lines and buses fed from both ends), the coordination
may be successfully accomplished just as in the case of a radial system, and the two
breakers closest to the fault would be expected to operate first. Note that these two
breakers would not generally operate simultaneously since the short-circuit currents
and coordination time delays would be different for the breakers to the left and the
right of the fault point.
Note, finally, that with directional relays the buses themselves are still protect-
ed. A fault at bus 2, for example, is on the line sides of B12 and B32 and would be
"seen" by these breakers.
We next consider how this directional feature may be obtained. It is easiest to
explain the basic idea by considering only solid 34> faults. Suppose that in Figure 13.4
at B23 , using instrument transformers, we can measure the following phase a
quantities: Vz, the phase-neutral voltage, and 123 , the line current flowing from bus 2
to bus 3.
Suppose that there is a symmetric 34> fault on the line to the right of B23 [i.e., in
the forward direction at some point such as (x)]. Then 123 will be in the form
Vz
123 = - (13.2)
AZ
where l is the total series impedance of the line between buses 2 and 3 and Ais the
fraction of the total line between the breaker and the fault (i.e., a number between 0
and 1). l = IllE is mostly reactive with E = 6z in the range 80 to 88°. Thus in
practice, 123 lags V2 by a large angle of almost 90°.
On the other hand, suppose that there is a solid 34> fault in the line to the left
of B23 [i.e., in the reverse direction, say at point (y)]. In this case, neglecting the rel-
atively small load current supplying SD2' we find that
(13.3)
where l' is the total series impedance of the line between buses 1 and 2, and A has
the same meaning as before. ~ wiU be in the same range as E (i.e., in the range
80 to 88°); thus from (13.3) we see that in this case I2J leads Vz by an angle between
92 and 100°. Thus the phase of 123 relative to that of Vz is a distinctive feature that
can be used to determine the fault direction.
The physical implementation uses an induction disk element. While differ-
ing in construction detail, we can understand the basic idea if we think of an
implementation using a watthour meter element. Without loss of generality, suppose

that V2 is real (i.e., V2 = IV21) and 123 = 11231ei<l>n, where CP23 = /123 , Suppose that we
pass Vz through a phase-shifting network that retards the phase of Vz by Oz = !!:... In
this way we obtain IVzle- j9z• If 123 and the phase-shifted version of Vz are applied to
a watthour meter element, then, from (13.1), we get
(13.4)
We get positive torque if -11'/2 < CP23 + Oz < 11'/2, zero torque if c/Jn + Oz =±11'/2,
and negative torque if 11'/2 < cfJz3 + Oz < 31l'/2. If 123 is the short-circuit current for
a fault in theforward direction, then from (13.2), we find that CP23 = -Oz. Then,from
(13.4), we get the maximum possible positive torque. This result, of course, is inten-
tional. Using the phase-shifting network, we "tune" the relay for maximum positive
torque. On the other hand, if 12 corresponds to a fault in the reverse direction, we get
a strong negative torque. These results can be presented graphically as shown in Fig-
ure 13.5.
The zero-torque line divides the complex plane into two parts. In the lower
half-plane we get positive torque; the disk will rotate so as to close contacts consis-
tent with tripping the associated circuit breaker. In the upper half-plane we get neg-
ative torque (the watthour meter would try to tum backward); the contacts remain
open, consistent with blocking the tripping of the circuit breaker.
Also shown in Figure 13.5 are the phasors V2 and 123 , corresponding to short cir-
cuits in the forward and reverse directions. The discrimination between these two ex-
treme cases is excellent. It is also necessary to consider cases when the fault
impedance is not zero, or when the bus load currents are not completely negligible,
or when the fault occurs in a more remote section of line (not the one adjacent to the
Complex
plane
113 , fault at (y)
fl·
Negative torque 90' - 8,
(block) Zero-torque
line
Vl
Positive torque 8,
(trip)
/ 113 , fault at ex)
Maximum
i torque
direction
Figure 13.5 Operating characteristic of directional relay.

Sec. 13.2 System with Two Sources 507
CIs
Fl
, ,
b 0;0
---,-----f*T-------<h--- } prote~t~d line
I I
I
IF1 I (forward direction)
I
I
I
I I
-~---~~~-------olo_---
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I D is directional relay
PI D OC I OC is over current relay
I
I
Phase b ... Breaker

contacts trip coil
Phase c ...
contacts
Figure 13.6 Directional relay application.
observation point). More general nonsymmetric faults also need to be considered.

The result of such a study is that in general, directional relays tend to operate for
faults in their forward direction and block for faults in their reverse direction.
In this way at each breaker we can discriminate on the basis of the direction of
the fault and trip the breaker if we get the conjunction of (1) the fault is in the for-
ward (line) direction and (2) the fault current is greater than the pickup value.
A simplified schematic version of a physical implementation is shown in Figure
13.6. Only phase a is shown in detail; the phase b and phase c relay contacts are also
shown to indicate the breaker tripping logic..
It should be noted that there are a number of variations and useful refinements
in the practical realizations, which have not been discussed. For more information
on these and related matters, the reader is referred to the book by Blackburn and the
book by Elmore.
Exercise 2. Redraw the loop system shown in Figure Ex 2 in the configuration of

Figure 13.4 (with the ideal source at both ends). Then, in the light of the previous dis-
cussion, show that the loop system can be protected by directional and time-delay
overcurrent relays.
508 System Protection. Chap. 13
Figure Ex 2
13.3 IMPEDANCE (DISTANCE] RELAYS
There are some problems with coordinating time-delay overcurrent relays even in
the case of radial systems. If the string of lines and buses is too long, the time for op-
eration of breakers close to the source becomes too large. To overcome this problem
a different principle can be employed. It is true that overcurrent is a characteristic fea-
ture indicating a fault condition. An even more distinctive feature, however, is the ratio
of voltage to current magnitudes. When there is a symmetric 3¢ fault, the voltage
drops and the current rises. Suppose that the voltage drops to 50% of its normal
value while the current increases to 200% of its normal value. Then there is a 4:1
change in the voltage-to-current ratio compared with only a 2: 1 change in the current.
A relay that operates on the basis of a voltage-to-current ratio is naturally called
a ratio or impedance relay. It is also called a distance relay; the reason will be seen
when we describe its operation. ':I
Consider Figure 13.4 again and suppose that there is a solid 3¢ fault at point (x).
Assume again that at B23 we measure the phase-neutral voltage Vi and the current 123 ,
In this case the ratio V2/123 is the driving-point impedance of the portion of the line
between B23 and the fault point (x):
Vi .
-=~ ~~
lz3
where Z is the total line impedance and Ais the fraction of the line between B23 and
the fault. In general, Vi/123 is not a driving-point impedance and it is probably less
confusing to consider it simply as a measured quantity at the observation point.
The relay is designed to operate if 1Vz/1231 is small enough. Suppose that we
wish SO% of the line to be in the zone of protection; then the relay would be de-
signed to operate if IVz/1231 :s Rc ~ O.SIZI. The relay would then operate for any
Sec. 13.3 Impedance [Distance) Relays 509
, Typical line
I-- impedance
I locus
Complex
plane
Block ([).
Figure 13.7 Zone of operation

of impedance relay.
(solid 3cP) fault located within the nearest 80% of the line (i.e., within the distance
80% of the length of the line). This explains the designation "distance" relay. We
also speak of the reach of the relay; in this case the reach of the relay is 80% of the
length of the line.
The region of operation of the relay is seen to be any complex value of Y,./I23
that lies within a radius R, of the origin of the complex plane. In Figure 13.7 we show
several possible outcomes (i.e., values of VJ 123 under different conditions); the con-
ditions refer to the fault points labeled in Figure 13.8. These points may be described
as follows:
(a) Fault on line at 60% point (trip)

(b) Fault on line at 80% point (marginal trip)
(c) Fault on line at 100% point (block)
(d) Fault on system just beyond protected line (block)
/-------~-------------------,
1 4 :
3 B14
I (b) 1(c)
1 Zone I 1
1'-------./ 1 (e)
1 Zone2 1 1----4'-
1'-------------_./ I
1 Zone 3 )
~-------------------------
Figure 13.8 Fault points and protected zones.
(e) Fault on system much beyond protected line (block)

(f) Typical normal operating condition (block)
(g) Fault on line to the left of protected line (trip)
(h) More distant fault in same line as (g) (block)
To avoid an undesired trip under condition (g) we can include a directional
relay, just as we did previously in the case of overcurrent relays. Also, as with the over-
current relays, we can provide backup protection. Consider a section of the trans-
mission system as shown in Figure 13.8. We are considering only the relaying at the
B 23 location for the purpose of tripping B 23 • We note that the other breakers (for
example, B34 ) are similarly equipped.
Assuming the use of directional relays, we need only consider the system to the
right of B 23 • At B 23 we install three impedance relays. The first, already described,
has a reach out to, say, 80% of the line and is set to trip instantaneously if IVJ 1231 :5 RI •
This protected region is designated zone 1; it is also described as the primary, or in-
stantaneous trip, zone. The second impedance relay has a longer reach; it includes all
of zone 2 (which contains zone 1). If there is a fault at point (d), for example, then
after a time delay T2 the breaker B23 will open. Presumably, point (d) is in the pri-
mary protection zone of breaker B34 and therefore B34 should open instantaneously
before B 23 has opened. However, in the event B34 does not open, B23 will provide
backup protection. Similarly, there is the action of the third impedance relay. After
an even longer time delay T3 , B23 provides backup protection for a zone 3 fault [for
example, at point (e) just beyond the next set of downstream breakers].
We have been discussing only the backup protection afforded by B23 • There is,
of course, the backup protection by other breakers afforded to B23 • We note that
directional-impedance relaying has the flexibility to protect effectively general trans-
mission systems, not just radial ones. Although the overall transmission system may
be very complex, including many loops, the impedance relaying principle allows us
to limit our attention to a much smaller domain. The system, locally, may be as sim-
ple as the one shown in Figure 13.8.
The reader may wonder why zone 1 in Figure 13.8 was not speClied to include
the entire transmission line (i.e., 100% of the line). The reason may be explained as
follows. The impedance seen by the impedance relay for a fault at a point (c) just to
the left of bus 3 and at a point (d) just to the right of the bus is essentially the same;
the impedance of the closed breakers and the bus structure is negligible. Thus if
point (c) were included in zone 1 (instantaneous trip), a fault at point (d) would also
cause the instantaneous trip of B23 . This would be an undesirable trip since B34 should
be allowed to clear the fault. The advantage of not tripping B23 when the fault is at
(d) more than compensates for the disadvantage of not tripping instantaneously when
the fault is at (c). Note that a fault at (c) still causes (delayed) tripping of B23 •
Exercise 3 Justify the use of directional-impedance relaying in the case shown in

Figure Ex 3. Is the line between buses 1 and 6 in the forward direction of the direc-
tional relay at BJ2?
...
Sec. 13.3 Impedance (Distance) Relays 511
Figure Ex 3
We consider next a possible physical implementation of an impedance relay

with instantaneous trip. The working principle is suggested schematically in Fig-
ure 13.9. The relay is of a type called a balanced-beam movement. In the absence of
voltage and currents inputs, the beam is balanced. The voltage applied to the sole-
noid on the left causes a proportional current to flow and exerts a downward pull on
the left side of the beam. The current applied to the right side solenoid exerts a
downward pull on the right side. If the voltage pull is greater than the current pun,
the relay contacts are open. If the reverse is true, the relay contacts close. The so-
lenoid action is described in Appendix 2, where it is seen that the average forces ex-
erted are proportional to the squares of the phasor current magnitudes. Thus the
relay tripping condition is
(13.6)
where kl and k2 depend on the design parameters discussed in Appendix 2, and in
addition kl depends on the impedance of the voltage solenoid. As indicated in
(13.6), it is convenient to assume that the relay trips when the current and voltage
pulls are equal.
Equivalent to (13.6), the relay trips if
. (13.7)
By adjustment of the number of turns (by taps) and the air gap (core screw), the crit-
ical value R, may easily be changed.
Finally, we remind the reader that, for simplicity, we have been considering only
II
the case of symmetric 3cp faults. When we consider the variety of nonsymmetric
I
II
I I
i
Figure 13.9 Balanced-beam I

movement. I
I
:.
Ili'
['
faults there are additional complications. Even for a single zone application we note
that we need three (11/» impedance relays for each circuit breaker, one per phase.
Breaker trip should occur for impedance below critical on any phase. Then we ob-
serve that the reach of each relay depends on the type of fault. For example, if we
set the relays for a reach of 80% of the length of line for a symmetric 31/> fault, they
may only protect, say, 50% of the line for an SLG fault or 10% of the line for an LL
fault. On the other hand, i~ for example, we set the reach for correct action for an
LL fault, the relays may overreach for other types of faults.
The impedance relays we have been considering are called ground relays and
work with phase-neutral voltages and line currents. They are very effective in re-
sponding to 31/>, SLG, and DLG faults. The relative insensitivity of ground relays in
responding to LL faults has led to a modification called phase relays, where the same
impedance relays are used, but their voltage inputs are line-line voltages (Vab instead
of Van, for example) and the line current differences Ia - Ib, Ib - Ie, and Ie - Ia.
With these voltages and current the impedance relays are quite sensitive for LL faults
but relatively insensitive for SLG faults. In general, therefore, both ground and phase
impedance relays need to be used. We note that the use of phase relays to supple-
ment ground relays applies to other types of relays as well.
13.4 MODIFIED IMPEDANCE RELAYS
In the preceding section we considered the use of impedance relays in conjunc-

tion with directional relays. We turn next to a simple modification of the basic
impedance relay design that gives them a directional characteristic and permits stand-
alone operation.
The balanced-beam movement of Figure 13.9 may be modified by coupling the
voltage and current circuits as in Figure 13.10. For simplicity we will neglect the
(small) current in the (high-impedance) voltage solenoid in calculating the voltage
across Z¢. In this case the voltage across Z", is V", = Z¢ I an~ at the voltage coil
we have r;
v, = V - Z",I (13.8)
Figure 13.10 Modified

impedance relay schematic.
Sec. 13.4 Modified-lmepedance Relays 513
Complex Circle of
plane radius
Rc
Figure 13.11 Operating zone

of modified relay.
Using (13.7), the relay will trip if
(13.9)
The region of operation is easy to show in the complex plane. In Figure 13.11 we show
2~, V j I, and their difference.
The condition (13.9) is satisfied, and the relay will trip,ifVjI is inside the cir-
cle with center Z</> and radius Re. Compared with the operating zone of the imped-
ance relay (see Figure 13.7), we have the flexibility of shifting the center. We can
pick 2</> and Rc to make the center of the circle fall on the line impedance locus, and
the circle go through the origin. The resulting modified operating characteristic, also
known as an offset mho characteristic, is highly directional. Just as in the case of
impedance relays, we can provide three-zone protection by introducing three differ-
ent reaches and appropriate operating delays. In Figure 13.12 we compare the
I.. Line impedance locus .{
Boundary of zone 3
Boundary of zone 2
Boundary of zone I
(0
Impedance relay with Modified impedance

directional feature relay
Figure 13.12 Comparison of operating zones.

514 System Protection Ch~p. 13
operating zones for a three-zone impedance relay scheme operating in conjunction

with a directional relay and the three-zone modified impedance relay scheme we
have just described. The three zones have been drawn so that the corresponding
reaches are the same. The difference, then, is in the "skirts," and here the modified
impedance relay offers advantages. Loads in general have higher power factors than
faults. Note then, in Figure 13.12, the much improved selectivity of the modified im-
pedance relay with respect to high power factor loads. In particular, compare their
behavior with respect to the load impedance (f) in Figure 13.12.
13.5 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION OF GENERATORS
We consider next a very reliable method of protecting generators, transformer banks,

buses, and transmission lines from internal faults. The basic idea as applied to gen-
erator protection may be seen in Figure 13.13. Only the protection of phase a is
shown. The scheme is repeated for the other phases. Using the dot convention, the
reader may check that the reference directions for primary and secondary current in
the CTs is consistent.
If there is no internal fault, 12 = II, and with identical current transformers,
12 = Ii. Since the CTs are connected in series, the current flows from one secondary
to the other, and there is no current in the operating winding of the relay. Now sup-
*'
pose that there is a ground in the winding, or a phase-phase short. Then 12 II, and
*'
thus 12 Ii and a differential current Ii - 12 flows in the operating winding. It is
natural to call such a relay a differential relay.
It would seem reasonable to detect the differential current with an overcurrent
relay, but in practice this is not done. The reason is the difficulty in matching the
current transformer characteristics; they obviously cannot be identical. Even very
small mismatches in, say, the turns ratio might cause significant differential current
Current
transformer
I'1
Generator
1;- I;
H;..JWVv-"; Restraining
windings windings'
Operating
winding
~ _ _ _.....J
I;
Neutral
breaker
Figure 13.13 Generator pro-
tection by differential relaying.
Sec. 13.5 Differential Protection of Generators 515
under full-load conditions or in the case of high currents due to fault conditions else-
where. On the other hand, raising the pickup value for the overcurrent relay to pre-
vent improper operation at high generator currents would degrade the protection of
the generator under light-load conditions.
A solution to the problem is achieved by using a proportional or percentage
type of differential relay, where the differential current required for tripping is pro-
portional to the generator current. A balanced-beam movement with a center-tapped
restraining winding can be used to obtain this behavior. The general idea is shown
in Figure 13.14.
As in previous cases, the relay closes if the downward pull on the right side ex-
ceeds the downward pull on the left. The average downward pull on the right is pro-
portional to the square of the differential current (i.e., to II] - 1212). The
average downward pull on the left (the restraining force) is proportional to II; + 1;12;
this result is shown in Appendix 2. Thus the condition for operation can be stated as
II] - /21 ;::: kT

+
II' 1'1
= klI~veragel (13.10)
and has the desired proportional property. k is a constant that is adjustable by tap
and air-gap (core screw) adjustments. Notice that as k is increased the relay becomes
less sensitive.
Assuming that I] and I; are in phase, it is easy to find the region of operation
given by (13.10). This is shown in Figure 13.15 for a value of k = 0.1. We note that
the characteristic can be easily modified to give an unambiguous block zone in the
neighborhood of the origin. We also note that as an,alternative to the balanced-beam
relay we have been describing, there are induction-type relays that also operate on
differential currents and have restraining windings. They have similar characteristics
to Figure 13.15.
We have been considering the differential protection of phase a of the generator
winding; phases band c are similarly protected. When anyone of the three relays op-
erates, the 34> line (main) circuit breaker and the neutral breaker open, isolating the gen-
erator from the rest of the system. The breakers, but not the tripping circuits, are shown
in Figure 13.13. In addition, the generator field breaker (not shown) would be tripped
to deenergize the stator windings. This protects the generator in the event of (inter-
nal) phase-phase shorts, which would not be isolated with the opening of the main and
neutral breakers. Since we need to open three different circuit breakers (main, neu-
tral, and field), three sets of contacts must be available on each differential relay.
Beam
<>~I~;~~==~~====~--~~
f f
Contacts
2
"
Center-tapped Operating
restraining winding Figure 13.14 Proportional
winding differential relay.
11; I
Figure 13.15 Operating region

I I; I of differential relay.
For additional information on the differential protection of generator stator

windings as well as different methods of stator protection, the reader is referred to
the IEEE Tutorial on the Protection of Synchronous Generators.
13.6 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION OF TRANSFORMERS
To protect a 3cp transformer bank is somewhat more complicated because we must

take into account the change in current magnitude and phase in going from the low-
voltage to the high-voltage side. The differences must be canceled out before being
applied to a differential relay. Consider first the case ofY-Y or !:J.-!:J. connections. In
this case, for practical purposes, the primary and secondary currents are in phase in
the steady state (exactly so if the magnetizing inductances are infinite) and only the
current ratio changes need to be canceled out. A possible realization for a Y-Y con-
nection is shown in Figure 13.16. Only one phase of the 3cp relay protection is shown;
the protection for phases band c would be the same.
Also shown in the figure are the phase a transformer bank currents 11 and 12,
which are related by the current gain a = l/n, where n is the voltage gain. If, under
normal, nontrip conditions we want the CTsecondary currents to be equal (Le.,
12 = 11) while the primary CT currents are related by Iz = afl, we need to satisfy
the following condition:
(13.11)
Since az ~ I2/Iz and a1 ~ III 11 are the current gains of CT2 and CT1, respectively,
we get the following simple relation between current gains:
(13.12)
From (13.12) the desired CT ratings may be selected. For example, suppose
that the voltage gain or step up ratio n = 10. Then a = a1/ az = 0.1. We might pick
the primary rating of CTl to be 500; thus a1 = 5/500 = 0.01. Picking the primary
rating of CT2 to be 50, we get az = 5/50 = 0.1. Thus ad a2 = 0.1, as required. The
Sec. 13.6 Differential Protection of Transformers 517
CBI 1:11 CB2

B
CTI CT2
(x) • (y)
l'I 1;
l'I l'1
Figure 13.16 Differential protection of Y-Y transformer bank.
selection of CT ratings is natural; we need a higher rating (10 times higher) in the
high-current side of the 3c/J transformer bank than in the low-current side.
In other cases there may be difficulty in finding standard CTs with the neces-
sary ratios. Other methods for accomplishing the same purpose include the use of
autotransformers connected to the CTs with multiple taps that provide additional
flexibility. Taps may also be provided in the differential relay itself.
There is an interpretation of the condition (13.12) implying zero differential
current, which will be helpful in considering the next case: the differential protection
of !l-Y transformer banks. Consider the current gain in going from point (x) to point
(y) in Figure 13.16. There are two possible paths. If we go through the 3c/J trans-
former bank, the gain is 12/11 = a. If we go through the CTs, the gain is
(11/ 11)(12/ 12) = ad a2' Thus to get zero differential current, (13.12) says that the cur-
rent gain must be the same for the two parallel paths. It is easy to show this condi-
tion must be true even if the current gains are complex numbers. The reader may note
the connection with "normal" systems. Equi\tion (13.12) says that the CT ratios and
phase shifts should be in accordance with that of a normal system.
In Figure 13.17 we show the differential protection of a /l-Y transformer bank.
The basic idea can best be understood from a one-line diagram.
The point to note is that the secondaries of CT2 are connected in /l. Thus when
we consider the phase a (per phase) current gain az' we get a phase shift just as we do
in the case of the /l-Y power transformer bank; (13.12) requires that the phase shifts
be the same from the!l to the Y sides. By wiring the sets of /l-Y transformers identi-
cally, we get the same (connection-induced) phase shifts in going from the!l to the Y
sides. Of course, the current-gain magnitudes must also be equal, as required by (13.12).
The differential protection of transformers is beset by two problems we will
touch upon briefly. The first is the problem of transformer "in-rush" current. This
T
£:,
y CTI
1- CT2 Y
Y A
l'I I'2
I; -I;
Figure 13.17 Differential pro-
tection of !J.-Y transformer bank.
is a transient phenomenon in which the transformer magnetizing current may reach

values several times fulI-load current when a transformer is first energized. Since, as
shown in Chapter 5, the magnetizing current flows in a shunt path, it looks exactly like
a ground fault to the differential relay.
To prevent improper operation during normal switching transients, a number
of methods may be used. These include desensitizing the relay [increasing the con-
stant k in (13.11)], and using relays in which the unidirection component and the
strong harmonic content of the in-rush current inhibit tripping.
The second problem concerns regulating transformers used to control complex
power flows by varying voltage ratios and phase angles. These were discussed in
Section 5.9. Clearly, the differential relays must not operate for the entire range of
voltage ratios and phase angles associated with normal operation. One way this can
be accomplished is by desensitizing the differential relay. In this way we compro-
mise between the need to trip the relay when there is an internal fault and the need
not to trip when there is not a fault.
13.7 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION OF BUSES AND LINES

f#
The differential protection of buses may be ilIustrated by the one-line diagram shown
in Figure 13.18. Assume that alI the current transformers have the same ratio and are
ideal. The secondaries of CTl and CT2 are in parallel; hence their currents add as
II CTI
CT3 I)
12
eT2
I;
Ii + I;
Figure 13.18 Differential

protection of buses.
Sec. 13.8 Overlapping Zones of Protection 519
shown in the figure. If there is no bus fault, II + 12 == 13 , and because all the CTs
have the same ratio, 11 + 11 == 13, Then the differential relays do not operate. As
with the previous applications, identical CTs are not required because of the
restraining windings. The actual implementation would require three differential
relays, one for each phase. Operation of any of the three relays would activate the
trip coils of all three CBs, thereby isolating the bus.
This technique extends naturally to a larger number of lines. Some care is re-
quired in grouping the lines associated with each restraining coil in order not to lose
the restraining action. In an extreme case the currents, while individually large, might
sum to zero in each restraining coil. This would be the case if in Figure 13 .18,13 == 0
(line out of service?). Then the restraining action is lost even though I) and 12 may
individually be large. This problem, and others involving magnetic saturation of CTs,
has been addressed by some alternative differential relaying schemes.
As we have seen in the last few sections, the differential relayings of generators,
transformers, and buses all have their own special features but are fundamentally the
same. One feature in common is the physical proximity of the current measurement
points (location of CTs). This physical proximity is lost if one attempts to apply dif-
ferential relay protection to transmission lines (and underground cables). Differen-
tial protection of lines has many desirable features. Simultaneous and rapid operation
of circuit breakers (in approximately one cycle), unconstrained by 'problems of co-
ordination with other relays, would be very desirable.
Differential protection of lines can be provided through the use of auxiliary
communication channels that link the two ends of each line. These channels can take
the form of telephone or other wires (pilot wires), microwave links, or a system known
as power-line carrier. In the latter system the power lines themselves carry the sig-
nals in the form of modulated carriers in the frequency range 30 to 200 kHz (i.e., ap-
proximately the radio AM band). It is to be noted that the communication channels
are also used for system communication, telemetering, remote control, and relaying
schemes other than differential protection.
13.8 OVERLAPPING ZONES OF PROTECTION
In Section 13.3, in connection with transmission-line protection, we introduced the no-

tion of the reach of a relay and its primary zone of protection. We also discussed the
backup protection afforded by a relay to another relay's primary zone of protection.
Thus, necessarily, there is overlap between backup protection zones and primary pro-
tection zones.
It is also very desirable to have overlaps between the primary zones of pro-
tection. In this way every point in the system lies within the primary protection zone
of some relay. We consider next an example of such an arrangement, shown in Fig-
ure 13.19.
The protection zones are defined by the locations of the CTs associated with the
particular protected element. The location of the CTs with respect to the circuit
520 System Protection , Chap. 13
(xl (y) (z)

Line 2
Line I protection zone
r--------i--
protection zone r - - - - - -
~--
-.., 1
1
4 __ -1 __
-- -+----, I L---- r -----

:--1'--Q! ~I
I
I
I
I
r---~----- -
L--- ---I----1
L ____ ----j--f--
___ _
7 Transformer Bus
y Line 3
protection zone protection zone protection zone
Figure 13.19 Overlapping protection zones.
breakers is the same as those shown in Figure 13.6 for lines, Figure 13.16 for trans-
formers, and Figure 13.18 for buses. In these cases the order of arrangement is always
the same: first the element to be protected, then the circuit breaker, and then the CT.
Since the circuit breakers link the different elements, this guarantees that the pro-
tection zones overlap. Note also that each circuit breaker then falls into two zones
and is efficiently used. Note that a fault at point (x) in Figure 13.19, which lies with-
in two overlapping zones, trips all the bus and transformer breakers. A fault at point
(y) trips only the bus breakers. A fault at point (z) trips the bus breakers (one of
which doubles as a line breaker), and if the line is protected by differential relaying,
also trips the line breaker at the other end of line 2 (not shown).
13.9 SEQUENCE FILTERS
We will conclude our discussion of relay types by considering those that operate on
the basis of abnormal negative-sequence and/or zero-sequenc>1 currents and volt-
ages. Negative- and zero-sequence quantities individually and ft combination are a
strong distinguishing feature, or discriminating feature, associated with a nonsym-
metric fault. In addition to indicating a (nonsymmetric) fault,it may be important to
recognize the existence of negative- and zero-sequence currents for their own sakes.
For example, consider the consequences of negative-sequence generator currents due
to unbalanced loads or nonsymmetric faults. These negative-sequence currents set
up a flux that rotates in the air gap at an angular velocity Wo (for a two-pole machine)
and in a direction opposite to that of the rotor rotation. Thus the rotor experiences
rapid flux variations that cause large currents to flow on the rotor surface. Even rel-
atively small negative-sequence currents, if allowed to continue, will cause excessive
heating of the generator rotor. To a lesser extent there is a similar problem with
zero-sequence stator currents.
The detection of negative-sequence or zero-sequence currents and voltages is
done in sequence filters. We will consider two simple examples. A zero-sequence cur-
Sec. 13.9 Sequence Filters 521
rent filter is easily made using three CTs. Suppose that the primary currents are la,
Ib , and Ie. If we put their secondaries in parallel across a (low) resistance, we get a
voltage across the resistance proportional to 1° = ~(Ia + Ib + Icl- Note that the fil-
ter does not respond to positive- and negative-sequence currents. In some cases we
can also read the neutral current of a grounded generator or Y-connected transformer
bank that will be proportional to 1°.
To measure the negative-sequence voltage, the circuit shown in Figure 13.20
may be used. Assume that the transformers are ideal, with the secondary of the right-
hand transformer center-tapped. We find that
1 =V- -
e•a•
(13.13)
R + jX
1 R (13.14)
V = 7: Vb•e· + R + jX y';'a'
Using the specification X = V3 R, we get

V = ~ (V/N + y';'a' e- i1T/3) (13.15)
Now suppose that the line voltages are a negative-sequence set. Then
V(a' = V;'e·e i21T/ 3 and
from which we find that
(13.16)
Thus IVI is proportional to the negative-sequence secondary voltage. To find the

corresponding primary values, we multiply by the PT ratio.
If the line voltages are a positive-sequence set, V:a• = V:'e•e- j21T/3 and
(13.17)
R X=V3R
Figure 13.20 Negative-

sequence voltage filter.
The response to zero-sequence line voltages need not be considered, since these volt-
ages are necessarily zero. We can see this as follows. For zero-sequence voltages
V~n = V~n = V~n' Then V~b = V~n - V~n = O. Similarly, V~c = V~a = O. Thus the
filter responds only to negative-sequence voltages, or to the negative-sequence com-
ponent in the nonsymmetric 3¢ voltage.
Exercise 4. Show a circuit using PTs for obtaining a voltage proportional to the
zero-sequence voltage of a 3¢ line.
13.10 COMPUTER RELAYING
The electromechanical relays we have been discussing are rapidly being replaced by
microprocessor-based relays. This is particularly the case in new installations. For
the most part the new relays replicate the functions and operating characteristics of
the old relays. Thus the protection techniques we have discussed involving zones of
protection, overlapping zones, backup protection and relay (time) coordination, etc.,
carry over unchanged. The physical implementation, however, is very much changed.
Some of the advantages of microprocessor-based relays include the following:
• Low cost.
• Low inventory. A few standard products may be variously and easily configured.
• Low maintenance.
• Very flexible tripping characteristics that can be changed with software and
from a remote location.
• Self-monitoring with the ability to report relay failure automatically.
• A single relay with a single set of inputs can be programmed to carry out a num-
ber of functions (e.g., distance protection for multiple zones). Instead of, say,
three impedance relays, each with a different reach, to cover @fee different
zones, we can combine the three functions into a single unit.
• Reduced panel space and station power.
• Additional functions. In addition to their primary function of providing pro-
tection, microprocessor relay packages can also provide communications and
recordkeeping. Voltage and current readings and relay and apparatus status
can be transmitted to system operators. Detailed fault operating records (in-
cluding oscillographs of fault currents and voltages) can be stored and displayed.
Line relays can calculate and display fault locations. Line relays can have a
revenue metering capability.
For a more detailed account the reader is referred to Phadke and Thorpe and to the
IEEE Tutorial Course: Advancements in Microprocessor Based Protection and
Communication.
Sec. 13.10 Computer Relaying 523
Microprocessors require digital inputs. In our application we start with analog

voltages and currents (suitably transformed and isolated from the line quantities)
and convert into digital form by analog to digital (AID) conversion. There are un-
avoidable errors in the representation of the analog signal because of the digital (i.e.,
numerical) nature of the AID output and the fact that the output may only change
at discrete times. At best the output of the AID converter is a "staircase" approxi-
mation of the analog signal, with stairs that are spaced Tseconds apart and each with
a quantized height in the form rnA. Here T is the sampling interval (the reciprocal
of the sampling frequency in samples per second), m is an integer, and A is the quan-
tization leveL
The quantization level A depends on the number of bits available in the digital
output of the AID converter and on the dynamic range of the input analog signal to
be represented.
Suppose we have a 12-bit AID converter (i.e., the output has 12 binary digits)
to represent a 20V signaL Then there are z!2 = 4096 discrete binary levels to repre-
sent the 20-V analog input. The least significant bit can represent 20/4096 = 4.883 X
10-3 volts = 4.883 millivolts. Thus A = 4.883 mV. With a 16-bit AID converter we
get four additional bits, and Acan be reduced by an additional factor of 24 = 16.
We now consider how sampling frequency (or rate) affects accuracy. To simplify
our discussion we neglect any quantization errors.
Nyquist Sampling Frequency. Given a band-limited signal x(t) [i.e., one whose
Fourier transform X( jw) is zero for all frequencies w outside of the band ± wm],
then the frequency Wn = 2wm (i.e., twice the highest frequency in the band-limited
signal) is called the Nyquist sampling frequency. If we sample at a rate equal to or
above W,,, it can be shown that the original analog signal can be reconstructed ex-
acty from all the samples. In other words, the samples contain all the information
contained in the original signaL To obtain this result (perfect signal recovery) we re-
quire the complete sampled-data record (past, present, and future), which precludes
its use in real-time applications.
In the practical case, with the spectrum of x(t) not strictly limited to a band
± wm , but still largely confined to such a band, we would pick some multiple of Wm as
the sampling rate.
Turning to a new subject, suppose we have a sequence of samples (numbers)
representing the analog signal over a finite interval. How do we process the numer-
ical sequence to recover useful information? An important technique is described
next. Again, for simplicity, we will neglect quantization errors.
Discrete Fourier Transform. Many relaying techniques rely on measurements

of sinusoidal steady-state quantities such as voltage and current phasors. We note that
in some cases we may also need to measure higher harmonics. For example, to re-
strain a transformer protective relay from improperly tripping during so-called mag-
netic in-rush, we may use the harmonic content of the in-rush current. The discrete
Fourier transform provides tools to address these needs.
r
I
524 System Protection, Chap. 13
Usually we use phasors to describe the sinusoidal steady state. In protective re-
laying, however, we are dealing with transients. Furthermore, we must make relay-
ing decisions in real time based on a relatively narrow observation window.
Let us start then with the realistic assumption that we have obtained a wave-
form,x(t), of only limited duration; let us suppose x(t) is defined only in the interval
[0, P). We may think of x(t) as equal to zero outside the interval. How then do we
obtain steady-state quantities? The answer is to consider the periodic extension of
x(t). By that we mean that we (conceptually) "tack on" time-shifted sections of x(t)
until we have a periodic waveform xp(t) with the property xp(t + nP) = xp(t) for
any t and integer n. We distinguish between the limited duration x(t) and its period-
ic extension xp(t).
Consider next the sampled version of x(t). Suppose in the interval [0, P) we
have N samples. Then we have x(O), x(T), x(2T), ... ,x((N - 1)T). We can define
a type of Fourier transform of this numerical sequence.
Fourier Transform
N-J
X(jw) = 2: x(nT)e- jwnT
n=O
If we now consider the Fourier transform of the sampled version of xp(t), because
xp(t) is periodic with period P, we get a Fourier transform with a fundamental (radi-
an) frequency il = 21r/ P = 21r/NT, and harmonics kil, k = 0,1,2, ... ,(N - 1).
It can be shown we can get discrete Fourier transform pairs:
Discrete Fourier Transform

N-J
X(jkfl) = 2: x(nT)e-jknOr k = 0, 1,2, ... , N - 1
n=O
Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform

1 N-J . ':I
x(nT) =- 2:X(jkfl)elnkOT n = 0, 1, 2, ... , N - 1
N k=O
Note that there are N samples in each domain. In the time domain the samples
are spaced at intervals of T seconds. In the frequency domain the samples are spaced
at intervals n = h/ P = 21r/NT.
We next consider an example illustrating the use of the transforms.
Example 13.2
S~ppose we sample one period (or cycle) of the voltage v(t) = v21V1( cos wt + tp),
WIth N samples per period. In this case P = 21T/W = NT, and fl =21T/P = w. From
these N samples v(nT), n = 0,1,2, ... ,N - 1, we would like to determine the
phasor representing v(t). We remind the reader that the phasor representation of v(t)
is V = IVle N •
We have
v(nT) = Y2IVI cos (wnT + 'P)
= Y21V1 cos (27Tnj N + 'P), n = 0, 1, 2, ... , N - 1
Substituting in the discrete Fourier transform with k = 1 (to extract the fundamental
frequency component), we get
N-j
V(j!l) = l: v(nT)e- inllT
n=O
N-j
= Y2IVIl: cos (27TnjN + '{!)e-i2~nIN
n=O
Y2 N-j
= -IV1l: (ei2~nfNei~ + e-i2~nINe-N)e-i2~nIN
2 n=O
where we have used the exponential form of the cosine function. Carrying out the
summation, we get Nel~. This is because the left-hand part of the summation gives
the constant ei~ summed N times, while the right-hand part (for N > 2) sums to zero.
We note that N > 2 is the practical case. The final result is
N . N
VU!l) = Y2IVlel~ = Y2 V
where N is the number of samples used in the calculation. Thus we can calculate the
phasor V from the N samples v(nT), n = 0, 1,2, '" ,N - 1. This concludes the
example.
The example illustrates how to reconstruct the (original) voltage phasor from
the voltage samples. The same can be done for current phasors. With these phasor
quantities we can implement the various protection schemes discussed in the previ-
ous sections. As an additional plus, we can combine a digital signal processing chip
(DSP) with the logical microprocessor architecture. The DSP excels at fast execution
of algorithms such as the discrete Fourier transform, among others. Thus we can
convert sample values to relaying decisions using a single combined package. This
greatly reduces the cost to the user.
We mention a few useful modifications of the basic scheme presented in Ex-
ample 13.2. By sliding the observation window to the right (as time progresses), we
can obtain updates of the phasor as time progresses. We can also use recursive meth-
ods to update the phasor with less work. We can use narrower (or wider) observa-
tion windows. We can also calCulate )J.igher-order harmonics.
If we reintroduce a consideration of the quantization errors, the sequence of
samples is not that of a pure sinusoid, but rather that of a pure sinusoid plus noise.
In this case the phasor we calculate from the samples is an estimate of the "true"
phasor. We can still use this (noisy) phasor in the protection schemes discussed in ear-
lier sections.
There are other methods to estimate p4asors as well as methods that do not rely
on phasor estimates at all. To investigate all these matters further, see Phadke and
1
Thorp or the IEEE Tutorial Course: Advancements in Microprocessor Based Pro-
tection and Communication.
I
13.11 SUMMARY
The function of power system protection is to detect and remove faults from the
system as rapidly as possible while minimizing the disruption of service. To further
this objective the system is designed to incorporate some desirable general features,
such as zones of protection, overlapping protection zones, backup protection, and
relay (time) coordination. The relays used to detect faults in their zones of protec-
tion have traditionally been electromechanical devices of the plunger, induction-
disk, and balanced-beam types. Using these devices, the following types of functions
could be obtained: instantaneous overcurrent, time-delay overcurrent, directional
relaying, impedance, modified impedance, and differential relaying. Important relay
characteristics are their operating characteristics (trip or block regions) and their
time delays.
These electromechanical relays are rapidly being replaced by microprocessor-
based relays. These may be used to implement the same effective protection strate-
gies of traditional relaying schemes and/or to provide the same relay functions.
However, microprocessor-based relays have many advantages over their electro-
mechanical forbears: They are cheaper, communicate better, may have their relay
characteristics set by software (and from remote locations), and can perform multi-
ple functions within a single package.
Problems
13.1. In Example 13.1 it is stated that the smallest fault .current seen at breaker BJ is an LL
fault at bus 4. Verify the statement by checking the alternatives. r.
13.2. Suppose that in Example 13.1, an SLG fault occurs at the midpoint o~he line between
buses 3 and 4. Which breaker should operate, and how long should it take to clear the
fault? If the breaker does not operate, how long does it take the backup breaker to op-
erate?
13.3. In Example 13.1, recalculate the settings of relays RJ and R2 under the assumption that
the zero-sequence line impedances are three times that of the positive (and negative)-
sequence line impedances. Note: In this case the smallest fault current seen at breaker
BJ may occur for a different type of fault.
13.4. Repeat Problem 13.3, but assume that the positive (and negative) line impedances are
j2 ohms (instead ofjl0 ohms).
13.5. Suppose that for the system and settings found in Problem 13.4, there is a 31> short at
the midpoint of the line between buses 2and 3. Find the time it takes to clear the fault.
13.6. Verify that Figure 13.15 shows the correct tripping and blocking regions [i.e., in accor-
dance with (13.10)) for k = 0.1. Show the regions for k = 0.2.
r D13. 1 Design Exercise 527
D13.1 DESIGN EXERCISE

I In D12.1, fault analysis was performed on the Eagle System. This design is now con-
tinued with the following: Select a rural 161-kV line.
(1) For a fault at one end of the line, find the apparent impedance seen by a relay
at the other end of the line looking toward the fault. Do this for phase a with
three-phase and SLG faults, and for phases band c with LL and DLG faults.
(2) Compare the apparent impedance with the zone 1, zone 2, and zone 3 of an im-
pedance relay based on positive-sequence line impedances and the method of
Section 13.3. Also compare to a load impedance corresponding to the rated
load on the line.
(3) Draw a figure showing the impedance relay zones and the apparent and load
impedances from item (2).
•
CHAPTER 14
Power System Stability
I
:i
14.0 INTRODUCTION
In Chapter 6 we derived simple round-rotor and salient-pole generator models. Al-

though strictly speaking, these models are limited to (positive-sequence) steady-state
applications, it turns out they can also be used in cases where the (positive-sequence)
generator and bus phasor voltages are slowly varying. Provided that the variation in
amplitude and/or phase is slow enough, we get almost exact results by substituting the
variable amplitudes and/or phases in the steady-state expressions; this intuitively rea-
sonable approach is called pseudo-steady-state analysis. As applied to (6.35), for ex-
ample, we would replace the constants PG , lEal, IV.!, and om by (slowly varying)
functions oftime Pa(t), IE.(t)l, IVa(t)l, and om(t).
We are going to consider the application of pseudo-steady-state analysis to
problems involving electromechanical transients. Because of the high moments of in-
ertia of turbine-generator sets, the key requirement of slowly varying phase can be
justified. The most important problem we will consider is called the problem of tran-
sient stability. It concerns the maintenance of synchronism between generators fol-
.1 lowing a severe disturbance. fJ
A typical case is the following. A lightning stroke hits a transmission line,
"breaking down" the air between a pair of conductors, or from line to ground and cre-
ating an ionized path. Sixty-Hertz line currents also flow through this ionized path,
maintaining the ionization even after the lightning stroke energy has been dissipat-
ed. This constitutes a short circuit or "fault" as real as if the conductors were in phys-
ical contact. To remove the fault, relays detect the short circuit and cause circuit
breakers to open at both ends of the line. The line is de energized and the air deion-
izes, reestablishing its insulating properties. We say that the fault "clears." The cir-
cuit breakers are set to rec10se automatically after a preset interval of time,
reestablishing the original circuit. This sequence of events (called a fault sequence)
constitutes a shock to the power system and is accompanied by a transient.
The key question of transient stability is this: After a transient period, will the
system lock back into a steady-state condition, maintaining synchronism? If it does,
528
T
Sec. 14.1 Models 529
the system is said to be transient stable. If it does not, it is unstable and the system
I may break up into disconnected subsystems or "islands," which in turn may experi-
ence further instability.
In what has been called the Great Blackout of 1965, improper action of a pro-
tective relay initiated a sequence of events that caused a cascade of circuit breaker
openings (or trippings), which broke the interconnected Northeast power system
into separate parts. Eventually, 30 million people were affected, service was inter-
rupted for up to 17~ hours, and a generator in New York City was severely damaged.
Most power interruptions are not as severe. Still, there are about 35 such events a
year, on average, in the United States, which are considered serious interruptions of
service. We see, then, that the problem of transients and in particular, stability, is an
important one.
In general, one must resort to computer simulation to describe these transients
quantitatively. In this chapter, however, we will consider a simple case for which
there is an elegant and simple solution. The method of solution is called the equal-
area method. The insights one gets by using this method extend in a qualitative way
to more general cases.
14.1 MODEL
We consider a system initially operating in a steady-state or equilibrium state desig-

nated by xo. In this case we assume that
1. All generators are rotating at synchronous speed corresponding to 60 Hz.

2. All ac voltages and currents are sinusoids.
3. All field currents iF are constants.
4. All loads are constants.
5. All mechanical power inputs to the generators are constants.
In particular we note that the system is in the sinusoidal steady state. In the gen-
eral case we now disturb this equilibrium state by a sudden change in input, or load,
or structure, or a sequence of such changes, and consider the transient that occurs.
We will be considering a structural change. In Figure 14.1 we show a single
generator connected through 'a single transmission line to a very large system ap-
proximated by an infinite bus. There are circuit breakers (CBs) at each end of the
line. The fault location is identified by an X. For our present purposes the details re-
garding the fault are unimportant. We simply assume that the fault is severe enough
so that relays (not shown) detect and locate the fault and cause the CBs to open (to
trip). For simplicity we ignore any transformers or assume that they have been ab-
sorbed into the generator or line models.
Consider the following example of a fault sequence.
530
Speed
control Excitation
Power System Stability CIlap. 14
1
system system
Generator
Transmission
line
CB I---.--t--' CB
v.
v,
Generator x Infinite
bus Fault bus
Figure 14.1 Generator connected through transmission line to infinite bus.
Fault Sequence
Stage 1: System is in a prefault steady-state condition, or equilibrium state, xo.

Stage 2: Fault occurs at t = 0, followed by instantaneous openings of CBs.
Fault clears before circuit breakers attempt to reclose.
Stage 3: Circuit breakers rec10se at time t = T and remain closed. Typically,
T is less than 1 second.
Question. Does the system return to the equilibrium state xo?
Definition. System is said to be transient stable (for the given~ult sequence)
if it returns to the equilibrium state xo.
Note 1: We will find that there is a Tcritical' For T < Tcritical system is transient
stable. For T ~ Tcritical it is not.
Note 2: There are many possible modifications of this basic fault sequence. We
will consider some simple modifications later in this chapter.
Before we can proceed, we need to develop suitable system models for the
three stages of the fault sequence. Note that a steady-state model is appropriate for
stage 1, but dynamic models are required for stages 2 and 3.
The dynamic models must describe what is observed in practice-that the tran-
sients are basically electromechanical in nature, involving what is termed rotor angle
Sec. 14.1 Model 531
swings. The terminology may be explained as follows. In the steady state, as we dis-
cussed in Chapter 6, the rotor angle 8 increases uniformly with time (i.e., 8 == wot + 80 );
as measured with respect to a synchronous rotating reference frame (at an angle wot),
the rotor angle 80 is a constant. During electromechanical transients the rotor angle
no longer increases uniformly. We can describe the motion as follows:
8(t) == wot + 80 + M(t) (14.1)
In this description there is an increment M(t) superimposed on the uniform rota-
tion. As measured from a synchronous rotating reference frame (at an angle wot), the
rotor angle is 80 + t.8(t). In one mode of behavior M(t) is observed to oscillate
around the mean angle 80, and this is described as a rotor angle swing. The reference,
of course, is to the rotor angle measured with respect to the synchronous rotating
reference frame.
The very large moments of inertia of the coupled rotors of turbine-generator
sets justify the notion that M(t) is slowly varying [i.e., that t.O(t) is relatively small at
least in the interval under consideration]. Then, as an approximation,
(14.2)
We next consider the internal (open-circuit) generator voltage. In Chapter 6 we
found the open-circuit voltage associated with uniform rotation. From (6.8) the volt-
age magnitude is constant (proportional to iF) and the phase angle is 80 - 11'/2. We
will make use of something similar in the present case.
Assume for now that during electromechanical transients, the field current iFre-
mains constant. With iF constant, going back to the fundamental relationship given
by (6.2), we have the flux linking coil aa',
(6.2)
Now if 8(t) == wot + 80 + t.8(t) and <P links all N turns of the phase a winding, then
Aaa,(t) == N<Pm.x cos [wot + 80 + t.8(t)] (14.3)
dA ,
eaa,(t) == -""""itaa (14.4)
== (wo + t.O)N<Pmax sin [wot + 80 + t.8(t) 1
Using the approximation (14.2), we then have the internal (open-circuit) voltage
eaa,(t) == Emax cos [ wot + 80 + t.8(t)- %] (14.5)
where Em•x == WoN <Pmax is the same value as calculated in Chapter 6. Defining 8 as
the phase angle of the phase a internal voltage, we have from (14.5),
11'
8 == 80 + M - - (14.6)
2
532 Power System Stability, Chap. 14
If t:.e :; 0, (14.5) reduces to (6.6),5 is a constant. If, on the other hand, t:.e
varies, then 5 also varies and at the same rate. Equation (14.6) gives the vital con-
nection between 5, the (electrical) internal voltage phase angle, and eo + M, the (me-
chanical) rotor angle (with respect to the synchronous rotating reference frame).
In our modeling of the configuration shown in Figure 14.1, we will assume a
lossless generator (r = 0) and a short lossless transmission line (RL = 0), which can
be absorbed into the generator model as described at the end of Section 6.5. Thus
the generator has augmented reactances.Kd = Xd + XL,.Kq = Xq + XL, and a ter-
minal voltage Voo; to simplify the notation we will assume that & = O.
If 5 is constant, we can use (6.45) to find the per phase active (average) pOWEr
deliv~red by the, generator. In (6.45) we would replace IVai by lVool, Xd and Xq by Xd
and Xq , and 8m by 8 (because & = 0). With these changes we rewrite (6.45) and
at the same time we indicate the equivalence, for balanced systems, between instan-
taneous three-phase and per phase active power in the per unit system. The reader
should check that (2.38), after per unit normalization, does in fact give that result.
Thus we are led to the following expression for (p.u.) instantaneous generator power
for the system in Figure 14.1:
2
IEaliVool lVool ( 1 1).
.,
"
P3q, (t) = PG(5) =-_ -sinS + - -;:;-- - -;:;-- sm28 (14.7)
Xd 2 Xq Xd
Suppose now that we have a transient where t:.8(t) is slowly varying. From (14.6)
this translates into a slowly varying 8(t). Nevertheless, in accordance with pseudo-
steady-state analysis, as long as 8(t) varies slowly, we assume that we may still use
(14.7).
To simplify (14.7) somewhat, we note that it is in the form
P3q,(t) = a sin 8(t) + b sin 28(t) (14.8)
where a and b are constants. We remind the reader that for a round-rotor model,
Xq = Xd and therefore b = O.
I In Chapter 8 we derived a more complete and accurate g,erator model. We
i removed the restriction that the field current iF is constant. We end up with a more
i accurate expression, in the form (14.8), but with different constants a and b.
For the rest of this chapter, however, we will continue to use (14.7). Its great
II simplicity, and the value of its qualitative results, justify its use even if there are some
quantitative errors.
Equation (14.7) is an electrical equation. We next turn to the mechanical equation.
14.2 ENERGY BALANCE
We continue with the modeling of the turbine-generator. Initially, consider the

turbine-generator as an ideallossless converter of mechanical to electrical energy.
In describing the conversion process it is convenient to use actual units. Thus we
T Sec. 14.2 Energy Balance 533
will not be using the per unit system until further notice. Neglecting losses, in the pre-
fault steady state
(14.9)
where PG (0°) is the actual per phase power and P~ is the mechanical power supplied
by the turbine. The superscript 0 designates the prefault equilibrium value. Pc( 00)
can be found from (14.7), where we substitute actual values of voltage and reactance.
During a transient, the shaft of the coupled turbine-generator unit accelerates
and the kinetic energy stored in the rotating inertia changes. Neglecting all losses and
noting that P3",(t) = 3Pc(ll(t)), we have
° = 3Pc(ll) + dtd Wkinetic

PM (14.10)
We are assuming that PM remains constant at its prefault value during the very short
interval under consideration. Note that in (14.10) the power angle Il is a variable
(i.e., it is no longer fixed at its equilibrium value 00).
Next, to improve the realism of the model it is desirable to add a small me-
chanical power loss term in (14.10). In particular, we include the mechanical friction
in the bearings. Then, we get
d
P~ = 3Pc(o) + dt Wkinetic + Pfriction (14.11)
Equation (14.11) is an expression of conservation of instantaneous power; the me-

chanical power developed by the turbine minus the mechanical friction losses, minus the
three-phase electrical power out, equals the rate of change of (stored) kinetic energy.
We next consider the term dWkinetiJ dt in more detail. We would like to express
it in terms of Il. From basic mechanics
1 '2
Wkinetic = 218 (14.12)
where 8 is the actual rotor angle and 1 is the moment of inertia of the coupled tur-
bine and generator rotors. Thus, using (14.1), (14.2), and (14.6),
dWkinetic .... .. ..
-d-t- = 188"" lwoAB = 1woo (14.13)
Note that the constant,lwo, is the (actual) angular momentum of the coupled gener-
ator and turbine rotors, at synchronous speed. It will be convenient later to nor-
malize (14.13) with respect to sl1', the MVA rating of the generator. In this case
instead of 1wo we get
(14.14)
534 Power System Stability Ch,ap. 14
where fo = 60 Hz. The normalized kinetic energy in (14.14) has physical signifi-
cance. Let
H g, W~inetic (14.15)
megajoules/MVA
s11>
be the per unit inertia constant. The units of H are also seconds. Typically, H ranges
between 1 and 10 seconds, depending on the size and type of machine. The range of
values is small considering the enormous variation in J for different machines.
Consider next the term Pfriction' Assume linear friction (i.e., friction torque pro-
portional to angular velocity). Then using (14.1), (14.2), and (14.6), we have
_ '2 _ •2
Pfriction - k8 - k(wo t t:..8)
= kW6 t 2kwo6.0 t k(6.0)2 (14.16)
'" kW6 t 2kwo6.0
2 .
= kwO t 2kwoo
In accordance with (14.2) we have neglected (6.0? compared with 2wo flO. We note
that the constant term kW6 is the power lost in friction when the generator shaft is ro-
tating at synchronous speed. It is convenient in doing the bookkeeping of power bal-
ance to associate this term with the turbine. Thus if we subtract kW6 from P~, we get
;;napo
1M = M - kWo
2 (14.17)
which may be called the turbine power after synchronous speed losses. The term
kW6 is negligible compared with P~ and for our numerical work it will not be neces-
sary to make a distinction between P~, and P~ in what follows.
We now return to (14.11) and normalize with respect to the generator rating.
Using (14.13) to (14.17), we get
P~ H.. 2kwo. 3Pc(o)
-=-Ilt-Ilt-- (14.18)
S1 'Trfo S1 s1q,
Concerning (14.18), we observe the following:
1. We have replaced P~ by P~.

2. P~/S~1> = P~(p.u.).
3. It is notationally convenient to define M g, H/ 'Trfo.
4. We will define a very small constant D g, 2kwo/ s11>.
5. 3Pc(Il)js11> = PG(Il)/SB = PG(Il)(p.u). .
6. Pa(Il)(p.u.) is given by (14.7), with voltages and impedances expressed in p.u.
Finally, we have from (14.18) the following equation involving per unit quantities:
'"
Mil t DO t Pc(Il) = PM0 (14.19)
This is a nonlinear differential equation, called the swing equation because it describes
swings in the power angle 8 during transients. With this differential equation we can
Sec. 14.2 Energy Balance 535
p O
M Figure 14.2 Spring-mass
~Wlll,Wlll,~~~~~~ analog.
~.
discuss stability in a quantitative way. We note that (14.19) marks our return to the
per unit system; to simplify the notation, however, we will suppress the p.u. notation.
First, we note the analogy between (14.19) and a spring-mass system. If we let
8 be a displacement, PG( 8) a nonlinear spring force, and P~ an applied force, we get
the analogy in Figure 14.2.
The equilibrium position 8° of the mass satisfies Pa(80) = P~. When P~ = 0,
°
then 8° '" (i.e., the spring is in its relaxed position). From the mechanical analogy,
and with small D, we expect lightly damped oscillatory responses when the equilib-
rium state is disturbed. Because the spring is nonlinear, the response will depend
critically on the nature of the disturbance.
We can also review the physical connection between the rotor position and 8,
which will help us interpret (14.19) more directly, in rotor terms. From (14.6) we see
that 8 = eo + tle(t) - 'Tr12, where eo + tle(t) is the rotor angle with respect to the
synchronous rotating reference frame. To find 8 we simply subtract 90° from this
rotor angle. Thus if we are "riding" the synchronous reference frame we can easily
observe 8, as a mechanical angle. Alternating, we can try to visualize the behavior
of 8 from the outside (i.e., from a stationary reference frame). Noting that wot =
(mod 360°) every 1160 sec, the synchronous reference frame appears stationary if we
°
only consider the instants t = 0,1/60,2/60, .... Thus 8, at those instants, can
be measured with respect to a stationary reference frame. The situation is shown in
Figure 14.3.
Synchronous reference frame at
t = 0, ~,fa, ... seconds
Figure 14.3 Strobed rotor po-

sition in terms of o.
536 Power System Stability • Chap. 14
Figure 14.4 Rotor swing transient.
We may imagine the rotor to be illuminated by a stroboscope so that we only

see the rotor at t = 0, 1/60, 2/60, . . . . During stage 1 of the fault sequence
~ = ~o = constant. (Our strobed rotor stands still.) During stage 2 the circuit
breakers are open, so PG = 0, while PM = P~ remains constant. The rotor acceler-
ates and thus ~ increases. Finally, during stage 3, the circuit breakers close and remain
closed. The graph of ~ during the three stages is shown in Figure 14.4, which shows
a stable lightly damped oscillation for t ~ T.
We note that unstable behavior is also possible. Curve (b) in Figure 14.11 il-
lustrates that possibility.
Exercise 1. Consider the mechanical analog in Figure 14.2. What is the physical
significance of stages 1,2, and 3 in terms of the mechanical model?
14.3 LINEARIZATION OF SWING EQUATION
In stage 1, P~ = Pd~O), and the system is in a state of equilibrium with

~ = 80 = constant (and thus 6 = 0). In stage 2 there is accelerilng power that dri-
ves the state (~, 6) away from equilibrium. If the departure from the equilibrium
state is small, we may be able to investigate behavior in stage 3 by the method of lin-
earization.
To linearize (14.19), let ~ = ~o + Il~ with M small, and do the usual two-term
Taylor series expansion of PG(~O + 1l8). After canceling the constant terms
Pd~O) = P~, we get
M 118 + D 116 + 9J Il~ =0 (14.20)

where 9J ~ dPG( &)/ d8 is called a synchronizing power coefficient or stiffness coeffi-
cient. 9J is the slope of the power output curve at the operating point ~o. Its value can
be determined by differentiating (14.7). 9J is seen to be a maximum at no load
0
(8 = 0). As the load (and 8°) increase 9J decreases monotonically and for some
° '
value of ~ less than or equal to 7r/2, goes to zero and then negative.
,
Sec. 14.3 Linearization of Swing Equation 537
The consequences of this with respect to system behavior may be seen by solv-
ing (14.20) for small arbitrary initial conditions or may be inferred (with less work)
by finding the roots of the characteristic polynomial corresponding to (14.20).
The characteristic equation is
MS2 + Ds + ?T = 0 (14.21)
with roots (natural frequencies)
(14.22)
For normal operating conditions M?T »D2 and we get s1,2 = ex ± jw, where
ex < 0 and w "" W /M)1/2. With D very small we get lightly damped oscillatory be-
havior with the amplitude of the oscillations in LlIl, decaying to zero exponentially.
Thus 0 = 0° + LlO returns to 0°. However, with a negative?T, one of the natural fre-
quencies is positive and the linear model predicts "runaway" exponentially increas-
ing behavior for almost all initial conditions.
Example 14.1 Small Power Angle Oscillations

In Figure 14.1 assume a round-rotor generator delivering power in the steady state to
an infinite bus through a transmission line with reactance XL = 0.4. Assume that
lEal = 1.8, IV=I = 1.0, H = 5 sec, and Xd = Xq = 1.0. There is a small disturbance
that causes a transient. For example, the breakers open and then quickly close. Ne-
glect damping and find the frequency of the power angle oscillations for
P~ = 0.05, 0.5, and 1.2.
Solution Using (14.7), we can find the steady-state power angle a.
Then we can find the synchronizing power coefficient 5':
Using M ~ H/,rr/o, the frequency of oscillations is given by
The results for the three cases are tabulated in Table E14.1. We note that as PG in-
creases, the synchronizing power coefficient drops, and this decreases the oscillatory
frequency. The result is physically reasonable, as can be checked from the spring-
mass analogy in Figure 14.2; the "softer" the spring, the lower the oscillatory fre-
quency we expect.
2'!!
I
538 Power System Stability Chap. 14
TABLE E14.1
P~ 8° (deg) ~ w (rad/sec) f(Hz)
0.05 2.23° 1.285 6.96 1.11

0.5 22.89° 1.184 6.68 1.06
1.2 68.96° 0.462 4.17 0.66
We observe that the oscillations are fairly low in frequency, on the order of 1 Hz.
Thus we expec.t A£j = 8 to be small compared with wo, as assumed in (14.2). Assume
that for P~ = 0.5 we have an oscillation in IlS of amplitude 0.25 rad (14.32°). Then
8(t) = SO + 0.25 sin (5.89t + 4», and lliJ(t) = c5(t) = 1.47 cos (5.89t + 4». Thus
IIlOI :s 1.47, which is certainly small compared with Wo = 377.
14.4 SOLUTION OF NONLINEAR SWING EQUATION
We will be concerned mainly with caseS in which the departures from the equilibri-
um state are large. Thus the method of linearization is inapplicable, and we need to
develop an appropriate method. Of course, numerical integration using digital com-
puters is always possible, but we seek a simpler, more portable, method that enhances
understanding.
We will start by neglecting the very small mechanical damping. Thus for now
assume that D = O. Later we will consider its effect qualitatively. Now consider
the behavior in the three stages of the fault sequence.
Stage 2. With the transmission!iiJ.e open, and with D = 0,114.19) reduces to

M8' = P~ 0 :s: t < T (14.23)
with solution, found directly by integration,
. P~ . 7rfoP~
8(t) = M t + 8(0) = "}{" t rad/sec
(14.24)
P~ 7rfoP~ 2
8(t) =- t2 + 8° =- - t + 80 rad
2M 2H
This behavior is observed in Figure 14.4 as a function of t. We will find a state-space
description in the 8,8 plane more useful. Thus using (14.24), we note that
8 - 80 =P~ t2 = M (P~ t)2 =..!!£. 82 (14.25)

2M ll1\M 2P~
Sec. 14.4 Solution of Nonlinear Swing Equation 539
(6(T), 8(T)) = o(T)
Figure 14.5 Trajectory in

phase plane (0 ,,;; t,,;; T).
Thus in the state space (or phase plane) we get a parabola in which only the branch
in the first quadrant applies to our problem and is shown in Figure 14.5. In the fig-
ure, the arrow shows the direction of the motion along the trajectory in the phase
plane from the initial state 0° to the state Or reached after T seconds. We calculate
or using (14.24) and use it as an initial state for stage 3. Note: If we had included D,
the numerical results would have been indistinguishable from the preceding for typ-
ical (small) values of T.
Stage 3. The transmission line is reconnected att = T. From (14.19), with

D = 0, we get for t 2: T
(14.26)
with initial conditions ~(T) = ~r and 8(T) = 8r determined from (14.24). Defining
P(~) = Pc(~) - P~ we get an equivalent, but notationally simpler, version of (14.26):
M8' + P(~) = 0 (14.27)

We are interested in the properties of the solution of (14.27) relating to transient sta-
bility. In this connection energy techniques have proved to be useful. Consider the
spring-mass analog in Figure 14.2 as applied to (14.27). Since we have effectively
absorbed P~ into the spring force characteristic P(~), we now have an isolated sys-
tem with a mass and a nonlinear spring and, with D = 0, no friction. In fact, we now
have a conservative system, and know, from basic mechanics, that the sum of poten-
tial energy (P.E.) and kinetic energy (K.E.) for such a system is constant. Thus using
well-known formulas for K.E. and P.E., we have an expression for the total energy of
the system in terms of the state 0 = (~, 8):
V(o) = ~Mb2 + J6 P(u) du (14.28)

6'
We note that at equilibrium (i.e., with ~ = 8° and b = 0), both the kinetic energy and
the potential energy are zero. We will also use the terminology K.E. and P.E. when
discussing our power system model. Although the ter~inology is very convenient,
it can be misleading. Certainly, at equilibrium, with 8 = 0, the K.E. of the actual
turbine-generator is not zero; it is Jw6!2.
540 Power System Stability. Chap. 14
At the beginning of stage 3, 8 = 8r and {) = 8r . Thus, using (14.28), there is an

initial total energy V(or) in the system. Thereafter, the motion of 8 and 8is con-
strained by the requirement that the total energy of our conservative system remain
constant in value. Thus, for t ;::: T, we have
8(l) fOT
V(o(t)) = ~M8(t)2 + f P(u) du = ~M8} + P(u) du = V(Or) (14.29)
.0 .0
We will now show how (14.29) provides useful information about the dynamic be-
havior of 8 and 6.
The key factor determining behavior is the potential energy curve. We will use
the notation
W(8) = (O P(u) du (14.30)

Joo
for the potential energy. The reader should check that with a linear spring force [Le.,
P(8) = k(8 - 8°)]' W(8) = k(8 - 80?/2. Thus we get a quadratic function with a
minimum (zero) at 8°. With a nonlinear force we get a more interesting potential
well. In Figure 14.6 we show a representative P(8) at the top of the figure, a corre-
sponding W( 8) below it, and for a given initial condition, a phase plane trajectory at
the bottom of the figure. By checking the slopes of the W(8) curve against the cor-
responding values of the P( 8) curve, the reader may check that the W( 8) curve has
the right shape. In particular, note that W has a local minimum at 8 = 8°, where
W(80) = 0, and has two neighboring local maxima at 8" and 8'. Let
(14.31)
In the case shown in Figure 14.6, with P~ > 0, Wmax = W(8").

Let us consider now how we can determine the phase plane trajectory from the
potential energy curve. Given 8°, or equivalently, P~ and Pc(8), and the reclosure
time T, we can calculate fir = (8 r , 8r ) using (14.24). We show t11l point Dr in Figure
14.6; it is the initial condition for the stage 3 phase plane trajectory. We also calcu-
late the initial store of total energy V(or) using (14.28). This is shown as a horizon-
tal line above the W(8) curve in Figure 14.6, for the case V(or) < Wmax • Also, since
we know or, we can read off the initial potential energy part of V(Dr) directly from
the W( 8) curve; then the initial kinetic energy part is V( Dr) - W( 8r ). These two com-
ponents are shown in Figure 14.6.
What happens next? Since 8r is positive, 0 must increase. Say that 8 increases
to a value a' < 8max . From the W(a) curve we can measure the new K.E. and there-
fore the new value of 8'. Thus we can find 8as a function of 8 and plot a trajectory.
Notice wh~t happens when 8 reaches amax • At that point the K.E. = O. This corre-
sponds to a= O. From the mass-spring analogy we deduce that this corresponds to
a maximum extension of the spring and a reversal of phase velocity. Thus 8 decreases
until at 8 = aO the K.E. is a maximum with 8negative. 8 decreases further until it
Sec. 14.4 Solution of Nonlinear Swing Equation
541
P(o) P(o) ~ PG(li) - P~

\
0"1 0-
I'
I \
I \
I ,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
\
\
0min I 10" 0 -
I
I I
I
I
I
Phase plane
Figure 14.6 Phase plane trajectory from potential energy curve.
reaches a minimum value Omin' 0 then increases until it reaches the value 0max and the
process repeats indefinitely with swings between Omin and omax.
Note that any value of 0 < Omin' or 0 > omax is clearly impossible since it
would imply a negative K.E. Thus, we can think of W(o) as a potential barrier.
542 Power System Stability Qhap. 14
*
Suppose that we do not neglect friction (i.e., D 0). In that case it is no longer
true that V(D(t)) == V(Dr). Physically, in terms of the spring-mass analogy, the ener-
gy must be slowly draining away, being converted into heat. It is simple to confirm
this mathematically. Using (14.28), consider the time rate of change of V(D). Using
the chain rule of differentiation, we have
V(D(t)) = a~ d8 + av do
ao dt ao dt (14.32)
= M 8~ + P(0)8 = [M~ + P(0))8
With D = 0, (14.27)confirms that V(o(t)) == 0; thus V(o(t)) must be a constant. But
when we add the D8 term to the left side of (14.27), we get M8 + P(o) = - D8. Thus
(14.32) reduces to
V(o(t)) = -D82 $ 0 (14.33)
As long as the mass is moving the energy is being dissipated and V(o(t)) is decreas-
ing from swing to swing. In Figure 14.6, instead of a constant level V( &r) we have a
slowly dropping level, and consequently the swings in 0 decrease in amplitude. Thus
instead of the closed curve in Figure 14.6, we have a trajectory that spirals inward
toward ff! = (0 0,0). This same conclusion is drawn from the linearization analysis.
Thus, in the case just described, and including (qualitatively) the effect of damping,
we conclude that the system is transient stable; we eventually return to the equilib-
rium point D°.
The case just considered corresponds to a particular choice of rec10sure time T.
With longer reclosure times, Dr will be a point farther out on the parabola in Figure
14.5. This corresponds to a bigger value for V(Dr)' As we consider increasing val-
ues of V(Dr), we come to unstable behavior.
In Figure 14.7 are shown four reclosure times, TI , T2, T3, and T4• Using (14.24),
we calculate the corresponding Dn, On, Dn, and Dr4' Using (14.28), we calculate the
corresponding VI, V2 , V3 and V4• .
By the same reasoning used in describing Figure 14.5, we ge~e trajectories
shown in the phase plane part of Figure 14.7. Note that T3 is the critical reclosure
time, Tcritical' For any T > Tcritical> 8( t) is always positive; in fact, the trend is for 8( t)
to increase with t (on the average); o(t) increases monotonically with t. Thus we
never return to ff! and the system is not transient stable. The phenomenon is called
pull-out or loss of synchronism. The generator will have to be resynchronized before
it can deliver power to the system again. For those familiar with the terminology, we
note that {)o is a stable equilibrium point, while 8/1 = (8",0) and 81 = (01,0) are un-
stable (saddle) points.
We notice that for our one-machine-infinite bus model the question of stabili-
ty is settled on the basis of the first swing. In the case we have been considering, if,
after reaching a maximum value, 0 starts to decrease, stability is assured. It may
therefore be seen that the effect of including the small damping term D8 is not crit-
10'
I
I
I
\
\ ,,
0-
I
I
,,
"
/
/
/
,
" '':::
Figure 14.7 Illustrating instability.
ical since it has little effect over the short term. Usually, in deciding on stability the
small mechanical damping term, DB is neglected. The results then are slightly con-
servative (i.e., on the safe side).
We note next that the question of stability reduces to the question: Is
V(OT) < Wmax ? This question can be answered without drawing the trajectories in
the phase plane. In fact, as we will now show, it is not even necessary to draw the
graph of W(6). Assume the usual case, with the generator delivering power [that is,
assume that P~ > 0, in which case Wmax = W(6 u)]. From (14.28) and the definition
ofWmax , V(OT) < Wmaximpliesthat
ilr J~u
!MB} + P(u) du < P(u) du (14.34)
J
~o ff'
or
f
~U
~M6} < P(o) do (14.35)

~T
Next we note from (14.25) that

zMo'2T = IM(8
1 nO °
T - 8 ) (14.36)
Substituting (14.36) into (14.35), the condition for stability is
f
~U
P~(8T - 8°) < P(8) d8 (14.37)

~
Suppose that using (14.24) we calculate 8T = (PM/2M)T 2 + ffJ. Knowing 8T, we can
check (1437) by comparing areas as in the construction shown in Figure 14.8. The
left side of (14.37) is the area Aa and the right side is the area Adm,x'
Since, as sketched, Aa < Admax , the system is transient stable in this case.
Note: It is convenient to call Aa the acceleration area because during this stage
;5 > O. Similarly, we call Admax a deceleration area because here PG( 8) > P~ implies
that ;5 < 0; in terms of the spring-mass analogy the spring re-
straining force is greater than the applied force PM'
The equal-area stability criterion as it applies to this problem can be stated
as follows.
Equal-Area Stability Criterion. If Aa < Adm,x> the system is transient stable.
In words, if the accelerating area is less than the maximum decelerating area, the sys-
tem is transient stable.
Figure 14.8 Test for stability.

Assuming that the equal-area stability criterion is satisfied, our basic construc-
tion can also be used to give information about omax and Omin' Thus from Figure 14.6
we see that omax satisfies
m
. V(OT) = W(omax) = fo " P(o) do (14.38)

0°
Repeating the calculations (14.34) to (14.37), we get
P~(OT - 0°) = t"

5r
P(o) do (14.39)
We can draw a figure similar to Figure 14.8 to show satisfaction of the condi-
tion (14.39). For a given OT this is shown in Figure 14.9, where the deceleration
area Ad is also defined. Figure 14.9 shows in very graphic terms that om.x is the 0
for which Aa = Ad'
Using Figure 14.9, we can see what happens as the reclosure time Tis increased.
As T increases, so does aT and Aa. For small increases, we can still find an Ad to bal-
ance A a, but we finally reach a value of T = Teritieal where Aa is just critically balanced
by Ad = A dmax and beyond this point we go unstable.
Now consider the calculation of Omin' From Figure 14.6 we see W(Omin) =
W(omax); hence
C' P(o) do = t" P(o) do (14.40)
Figure 14.9 Calculation of <Smax.

Figure 14.10 Calculation of Omin.
r"
Equivalently, subtracting the left side from the right,
P(O) do = 0 (14.41)
°min
Once again we can use a graphical interpretation involving areas (Fi~re 14.10).
Once again the accelerating area (in the -0 direction) and the decelerating
area are equal. Note: With D = 0, 0 swings between Dmin and omox forever. With
D > 0, the swings are attenuated and 0 tends to 0°.
Exercise 2. Consider the case of pt < 0 (Le., the case of a synchronous motor
driving a pump or a fan, for example). Sketch figures analogous to Figures 14.6,14.7,
14.9, and 14.10. J:lint: While the breakers are open, the rotating machines are slow-
ing down. Thus 0T will be negative.
Example 14.2
Consider the same generator and line as in Example 14.1. Thus H = 5 sec and
Pc(8) = 1.286 sin o. Assume that P~ = 0.5.
r Sec. 14.4 Solution of Nonlinear Swing Equation 547
1
(a) Find the critical clearing time Teritical'

(b) For a dearing time T = 0.9Tcritical' find omax and Omin'
I, Solution (a) WithPdoO) = 1.286 sin 0° = 0.5, we find that 8° = 22.89° = OAOOrad.
We next find the critical clearing angle are corresponding to Tcritical, such that
Aa = Admax , as suggested in Figure E14.2.
Pdo) = 1.286 sin 0
0.5~"Bl\ 00 = 22.89°
= 0.400 rad
Figure E14.2
OTc is the largest value Or for which we can balance the accelerating area Aa with
a deceleration area. This area is Adm,,' The calculation is simplified if we add the
area Ac shown in Figure E14.2 to both sides of the equation. Then carrying out the in-
dicated operations, we get in succession.
A, + Ae = Adm" + Ac
0.5( 1T - 28°) = ra"
Or,
(1.286 sin 0) do
1.1708 = 1.286(cos orc + 0.9211)

orc = 90.61° = 1.581 rad
Note that we do not need to consider the stage 2 dynamics in calculating Ore' Next we
calculate Tcritical using (14.24) (i.e., stage 2 dynamics).
1T x 60 X 0.5 2
Orc = 1.581 = 2 X 5 Tcritical + OAOO (14.24)
Thus Tcritical = 0.354 sec.

(b) With T = 0.9Tcritical = 0.319 sec, we find, using (14.24),
1T X 60 x 0.5
OT = 5 (0.319j2 + OAOO = 1.357 rad = 77.75°
2x
Then A, = PO: (I>r - 00) = 0.5(1.357 x OAOO) = 0.478. Thus
Ad = OA78 = r"Or
(1.286 sin 0 - 0.5) do
= 1.286( cos Or - cos omax) - 0.5( omax - or)

Putting in the value aT = 77.75° = 1.357 rad, we get

1.286 cos om.x + O.5.5max = 0.4734
Solving for omax by iteration, we get om.x = 113.86° = 1.987 Tad. To find Omin we use
(14.41). Then
5m•
(1.286 sin .5 - 0.5) do = 1.286(cos Omin - cos 0m.x) - 0.5( om.x - 0min) =0
f
5~.
Then we get
1.286 cos am in + 0.50min = 1.286 cos am" + O.SOm.x = 0.4734
Noting 0min < 0° we solve for Omin by iteration. We get
Omin = -46.74° = -0.816 Tad
It is instructive in the preceding example to plot the swing curves in two different
cases. This is done in Figure 14.11 assuming D = O.1M = O.1HI'flfo = 0.00265. We
consider two values of T: T = 0.9Tcritie.1 = 0.319 sec and T = 0.356 sec. The smaller
value is the value used in part (b) and corresponds to stable behavior; the larger
value, T = 0.356, is slightly larger than Teritie.l and corresponds to unstable behavior.
We comment briefly on a few points.
1. The curves were obtained by numerical integration of (14.19) using a fourth-

order Runge-Kutta formula, with a step size h = 0.5 sec. The initial values of
8T,aT were found from (14.24).
2. The effect of the damping constant D is seen to be small. In curve (a) there is
a slight decrease in swing amplitude, cycle to cycle. The maximum 8 is 1.977 rad
as compared with 8m•x = 1.987 rad calculated using equal-area methods, ne-
glecting D. Similarly, the minimum 8 is found to be -0.777 rad compared with
I'~j.,'.' ,~ 8min = -0.816 rad. Thus the effect of D on the first swing is seen to be relatively
minor. In the long term, however, the effect is major, cau$tg the oscillation to
disappear and 8 to return to its equilibrium value. '
,
3. The stage 2 quadratic behavior of 8(t), is also shown in the figure. Att = T, the
~l! stage 3 curves peel smoothly off from the quadratic. We show the extrapolation
of the stage 2 quadratic behavior to emphasize the ever-increasing rate of
buildup of 8Tand aT as T increases.
4. It is instructive to compare the curves in Figure 14.11 (time behavior) with the
curves in Figure 14.7. Thus with T < Teritie.!> 8T and aT are small enough to give
an initial total energy Vi < Wm., and we get the bounded behavior seen in curve
(a). With T > Teritic.!> 8r and aT have increased sufficiently to give an initial en-
ergy typified by V4 > Wmax and we get the unbounded behavior seen in curve (b).
Note that in this case Figure 14.7 predicts that, at the beginning, awill decrease
from its initi~l (positive value) but will not decrease to zero. Thereafter, the ten-
dency is for 8 to rapidly increase. This same behavior is observed in curve (b).
~.. ,.'
T
!
Sec. 14.5 Other Applications 549
I
I
I Curve (a): T = 0.319
Curve (b): T = 0,356
Torili,,1 = 0.354
0.4
-I I - Seconds
Figure 14.11
5. Figure 14.7 confirms what Figure 14.11 seems to imply-namely, if on the up-
swing 8remains positive, synchronism will be lost, while if after the initial up-
swing, 8goes at all negative, synchronism will be preserved. Thus, at least for
the case under consideration, the question of stability is determined on the first
swing.
14.5 OTHER APPLICATIONS
The equal-area construction and stability criterion can be used for other problems.
In all of these applications we start in an equilibrium state with Pc( 80) = P~. Then
there is a change to a new P'G( 8), or 'a new PM, which upsets the balance. In deter-
mining behavior during the initial part of the transient, the spring-mass mechanical
analogy is very helpfuL Thus, for example, if PM > Pc( 80 ), the spring-mass analogy
correctly suggests we get acceleration in the positive direction and 8 increases from
the value fl If PM < Pc( 80), we get acceleration in the negative direction and 8 de-
creases from the value 80. The ensuing motion is bounded (amax , 8min , can be deter-
mined) if the accelerating area A. can be balanced by the decelerating area Ad' In
P;(,
P~
Figure 14.12 Effect of change

in PM'
this case, taking damping into account, the rotor angle swings attenuate and 0 tends
to a new equilibrium value On. On the other hand, if Admax < Aa synchronism is lost.
Application 1. The system is given in Figure 14.1. No fault occurs. From an ini-
tial steady-state value with PM = P~ we suddenly set PM = P'M. Using the tech-
niques previously discussed it is easy to show that the construction in Figure 14.12
specifies Omin and omax.
With the new P'M the equilibrium 0is 8n. The way we get to 8n is as follows. Ini-
tially, o = lP and PM > PGUfJ), so there is acceleration in the positive direction. The
acceleration continues [P'M > PG(0) Juntil we pass on with positive velocity (we over-
shoot). Then we decelerate [PG(o) > P'M Juntil a maximum 0is reached (i.e., omax)·
The acceleration and deceleration areas are equal. The swing between omax and
Omin = rf would continue indefinitely if there were no damping. With damping the
swings attenuate and 0 tends to the new equilibrium value on.
Ex~rcis~ 3. Make up an example (i.e., pick values of P~ and PM) to convince

yourself, by using the equal-area method, that it is possible to change from P~ to P'M
slowly enough (in small steps) to cause 00 simply to shift to 8n in a stable way, while
if the change is made suddenly it causes instability.
Application 2. Consider the system of Figure 14.1 but with two parallel transmis-
sion lines. A fault occurs on one of the lines (Figure 14.13). Assume that the fault
is removed instantaneously by opening the breakers of the faulted line. The fault is
~r------l*!---~ v. Fault Figure 14.13 Loss of one line.

PG(~) - 2 lines
Figure 14.14 Swing accompa-

nying loss of line.
not transitory and the breakers "lock out" in the open position. We consider Pc( 0)
in the two cases, with the two lines in parallel and with only one line present.
In Figure 14.14 we show the swing accompanying the loss of the line. Synchronism
is not lost, and with damping taken into account, 0 tends to the new equilibrium
value on.
Suppose now that the faulted line is repaired and we close the breakers to re-
store the line to service. For purposes of comparison, suppose that PM = P~ (i.e.,
the same value as before). Figure 14.15 shows the swing accompanying the regain-
ing of the line. With damping taken into account, 0 eventually settles down to its orig-
inal value 0°.
Exercise 4. Provide a sketch, similar to Figure 14.14, illustrating instability on

loss of a line, although the remaining line is capable of carrying the power P~ in the
steady state.
Application 3. Consider the system of Figure 14.1 but with two parallel transmission
lines and assume that a fault occurs but is not cleared instantaneously by the breakers.
In this case we show three PG( 0) curves. In the prefault steady state with two
lines in parallel, the power angle is 0°. When the fault occurs it is not removed in-
stantaneously. With the fault in place, Pc( 0) is given by the lowest of the three curves
in Figure 14.16. By the time the breakers on the faulted line open, 0 has increased
rr
Pc; (6) - 2 lines
Figure 14.15 Swing accompa-

nying regaining of line.
il
6 _ {I good line
c; ( ) I faulted line
Figure 14.16 Upward swing with fault.

552
to the angle 8c and an acceleration area Aa has been accumulated. With these break-
ers open, there is one good line in place, and Pd 8) is given by the iniddle curve. 8 in-
creases to a value of 8max corresponding to Ad = Aa. Here we are assuming that the
fault is not cleared and the breakers on the faulted line remain open. To find 8min we
consider the downwar~ swing just as in the case of Figure 14.10. Taking damping
into account, 8 tends toward a new equilibrium value corresponding to operating
with a single line.
Exercise 5. Suppose that on the upward swing the fault is cleared and the break-
ers reclose with 8r < 8max • Then for the remainder of the upward swing we have
two good lines in place. Redraw Figure 14.16 to show this case.
Figure 14.16, as drawn, implies that the presence of a faulted line in parallel
with a good line reduces the power-transferring capability of the good line. In the next
example we would like to offer some supporting evidence.
Example 14.3
We wish to obtain an expression for PG (8) with a solid (zero impedance) 3rt> fault in
place, as shown in Figure 14.13. For simplicity assume a round-rotor generator. We
can replace the one-line diagram by the (per phase) circuit diagram shown in Figure
E14.3. In the figure XL2 is the total reactance of the faulted line. Ais the fraction of
the line to the left of the fault. If A= 0, the fault is at the generator bus. A= 0.5 puts
the fault in the middle of the line, and so on. Find an expression for PG( 8) as a func-
tion of A.
iX,
Ea ~ I Ea I 1.1
Figure E14.3
Solution It is simplest to replac~ the network to the right of the "terminals" a-a' by
a Thevenin equivalent circuit. Thus we find, by the voltage-divider law and the rule
for finding parallel impedances,
554 Power System Stability Ghap. 14
and then
IEaIVThev . •
PG(t5) = smt5=Ksmt5
Xs + XThev
where, after substituting for VThev and XThev> we find
A lEal IV", I
K=------~=-----
X, + XLI + (X,XLI/AXd
We note that with a fault at the generator bus, A = 0 and K= O. Thus the generator
delivers zero power and the runaway acceleration is maximum. In other cases, as the
fault is shifted to the right, away from the generator, Kincreases monotonically but
never gets as big as IEaIIV",I/(X, + XLI), the gain constant defming power flow in the
case of the single line (faulted line removed). Thus we see the importance of remov-
ing the faulted line as quickly as possible.
14.6 EXTENSION TO TWO-MACHINE CASE
Suppose that we replace the infinite bus in Figure 14.1 by a synchronous motor dri-
ving a mechanical load. Then we have two synchronous machines, each with its own
dynamics, coupled to each other electrically by the transmission line. We can easily
extend the results of the previous analysis to this case. Instead of (14.19) we have the
pair of equations
(14.42a)
(14.42b)
where a! and a2 are the phase angles of the internal voltages of the two synchronous
machines. Assuming a lossless electrical system (i.e., purely reactive line and gener-
ator internal impedances), we get
(14.43)
by considering conservation of power. In this case, in the prefault steady state, with
a! = lff and a2 = a~, we require, and assume, that
p~! + P~2 = 0 (14.44)
Physically, we are assuming that the mechanical power demand at the load is matched
by the mechanical power provided by the turbine. Substituting (14.43) and (14.44)
in (14.42b), we get
... _ 0
M2a2 + Dza2 - PG!(a! - a2 ) - -PM! (14.45)
It is convenient now to assume a condition known as uniform damping,
D! D2
-::- (14.46)
.~
Sec. 14.6 Extension to Two-Machine Case 555
in which case, for stability evaluation, the two equations (14.42a) and (14.45) may be
replaced by a single equation in the internodal angle 012 = 01 - 02' We simply di-
vide (14.42a) by Ml and (14.45) by M2 and subtract the latter equation from the for-
mer. We get
(14.47)
Equivalently,
(14.48)
where Mo ~ MIM2/(Ml + M2) and Do ~ DIM2/(Ml + M2)' Equation (14.48) in the

variable 012 has the same form as (14.19) in the variable O. In fact, if we, in effect, con-
vert the second synchronous machine into an infinite bus by letting M2 tend to infinity,
then, with 02 = o~ = 0, (14.48) reduces to (14.19).
We can apply the equal-area criterion to investigate the stability of (14.48),
under various system perturbations, just as we did previously in Sections (14.4) and
(14.5). Satisfaction of the stability criterion means that 012 returns to a constant post-
fault value. Thus synchronism is maintained. It is to be noted that even in cases
where the postfault 012 returns to its prefault value 0~2' in general, 01 and 02 do not re-
turn to their prefault values o~ and o~. This type of behavior may be more fully un-
derstood by considering the spring-mass analogy for (14.42a) and(14.42b); the analogy
in this case has two masses coupled by the spring and no wall.
Finally, a brief comment on the assumption of uniform damping. Since the
(first swing) stability does not depend significantly on the very small damping con-
stants Dl and D2, a convenient choice is justified. In fact, in using the equal-area sta-
bility criterion, we neglect Dl and Dz entirely. We note that Dl = D2 = 0 formally
satisfies the definition of uniform damping. We note also that if stability is preserved,
the eventual (i.e., steady-state) value of 012 will also be independent of DI and D2 , al-
though this is not the case for 01 and 02 individually. The main reason we include
damping in our present discussion of stability is to preserve the qualitative feature that
the oscillations eventually damp out and we return to equilibrium; uniform damping
is the simplest assumption that preserves that feature.
Example 14.4
Consider an example similar to Example 14.2. Suppose that the generator is round
rotor. with IEII = 1.8, H = 5 sec, 'and Xd = Xq = 1.0. The motor is specified by
IE21 = 1.215, H = 2 sec, and Xd = Xq = 1.2. The line reactance is assumed to be 0.4.
Assume that P~ = 0.5. Find Tcritical' I
1..~
Solution We first find the expression for PCl(~12)'
.) 1.8 X 1.215 . . c.1
PCI (012 = 1.0 + 1.2 + 0.4 sm 012 = 1.287 sm 012 I
~I
I
I
556 Power System Stabi~ty Chap. 14
Intheprefaultsteadystate,withPd(j~2) = 0.5,wefind8~2 = 22.870= 0.339rad. The

data were picked so that these numbers are practically the same as in Example 14.2 and,
therefore, we may use a result of that example: namely, the critical clearing angle is
90.610 = 1.581 rad. We can next find the dynamic behavior during the open-breaker
period using (14.24):
1/' X 60 X 0.5 2 {f,
81(1=
) 2x5 t+ 1
1/' X 60 X 0.5 .2 + oil

ait) = 2 X 2 .- 02
Therefore,
8dt) = 81(t) - 82(t) = 32.9912 + (j~2
Putting in the critical clearing angle and the initial angle, we get
1.581 = 32.99T.:ntical + 0.399
Thus Tcritical = 0.189 sec.
As compared with the result in Example 14.2, where the critical switching time
was 0.354 sec, we have much less time to reclose the breakers if stability is to be main-
tained. Physically, considering that the generator is speeding up while the motor is
slowing down, it is clear why it takes a smaller time to reach the critical clearing angle.
14.7 MULTIMACHINE APPLICATION
Among many possible extensions of the previous results to the general m-machine
case, we consider next one that is quite similar to the two-machine case. Suppose that
we have a power system with a special structure. The generators may be separated into
two groups. Within each group the generators are tied together by a strong network
of transmission lines. On the other hand, the two groups of gtterators are linked to
each other by a comparatively weak set of tie lines. This situation sometimes occurs
when two geographically distant metropolitan areas are weakly interconnected.
The situation described previously is suggested in Figure 14.17, where the two
groups of generators are shown linked by two tie lines. It will be convenient to de-
fine the index set fA as the set of indices (subscripts) for all the generators, lines,
buses, and loads in network A. A similar definition holds for the index set f B relative
to network B. We also define f c as the set of indices corresponding to tie lines link-
ing the two networks.
It is observed that during electromechanical transients the rotor angles in each
subnetwork tend to "swing together" more or less coherently. This phenomenon
may be better understood in terms of the spring-mass analogy, extended to m mass-
es, by imagining strong coupling (stiff springs) within each group of masses and weak
Sec.14.7 Multimachine Application 557
Network A Network B
Figure 14.17 m-Machine network.
coupling between the two groups. Another way of stating the observed condition is
that during transients the voltage angles differences within each network change rel-
atively little compared with the change in the voltage angles across the tie lines be-
tween the two networks.
In describing this condition quantitatively, it will be convenient to define the
so-called center of angle for each of the two networks. This is defined to be a weight-
ed sum of angles as follows:
(14.49)
where MA ~ 2:;€/A M; (i.e., we sum all the M; in network A). Similarly, we define
(14.50)
where M8 ~ 2:;€/B Mi' In the spring-mass analogy, 15 A is the center of mass of the
masses belonging to network A. 8B is the center of mass for the masses in network B.
Suppose now that for each of the generators in network A we write the me-
chanical equation corresponding to (14.19). We get
(14.51)
As discussed in Section 14.6, to simplify the analysis, we can assume uniform damp-
ing. Then if we sum (14.51) for all the generators in network A, we get, using (14.49),
MA8A +DA8A + 2: PG;= 2:P~i (14.52)

i~/A ie/A
558 Power System Stability Ci'lap. 14
where DA = LiEiA Di. Assuming a lossless transmission network, and using the law
of conservation of power, we get an expression for PAB , the power transferred from
network A to network B:
PAB = ~PGi - ~P~i (14.53)

iEi A lEi A
In words, the excess of generator power over load in the (lossless) network A is the
power transferred to network B. The power is transferred through the lines joining
the two networks. Thus
(14.54)
Here Pk is the power from bus i in network A to bus j in network B through line k,
which connects the two buses. Equation (14.54) is the familiar expression for active
power transferred down the lossless (short) transmission line with reactance Xk •
It is also convenient to introduce notation for the excess of mechanical power
over load power for network A. Let
P~ £ ~P~j - ~P~j (14.55)

iEiA iE/A
Using (14.53) and (14.55) in (14.52), we then get

(14.56)
Note that under our assumptions the excess power, P~, is a constant just like the me-
chanical power, P~, (14.19).
Our objective is to write (14.56) in a form analogous to (14.42a). As the re-
maining step in this process we need to express PAB in terms of IiA and liB' Howev-
er, in (14.54),PABis expressed in terms of the angles OJ - OJ across the lines joining the
two networks. We next show how this conversion may be obtained" In the process
we make an approximation consistent with the assumption of coheitncy previously
described. We start with the identity
OJ - OJ = (0; - Ii A) + (IiA - liB) - (OJ - liB) (14.57)
where ie/A andjeIB •
Consider (14.57) in the prefault steady state. We get
O~ - O~ = (O~ - Ii~) + (Ii~ - Ii~) - (9~ - Ii~) (14.58)
Now think of (14.57) as describing the angles at some time during the transient. If we
now subtract (14.58) from (14.57), we can relate the changes in these angle differences.
(14.59)
Here !J.8 jj = (OJ - OJ) - (e~ - e~), MAB = (IiA -liB) - (Ii~ -li~). We note that
/1(6 j - IiA) and /1(e j - 0B) are the changes, over time, in the angles within each
Sec. 14.7 Multimachine Application 559
network. The notion of coherence is that these changes are small compared to the
changes in the angles between the networks. We therefore neglect these changes as
compared with M AS and from (14.59), we get
(14.60)
We can now use (14.60) in (14.54). At the same time let us introduce the notation
IVIIVI
__ '_1
bk - (14.61)
Xk
Per our previous description, IViI and IVjI are the voltages at the buses termi-
nating line k. If we now assume that these voltage magnitudes are constant during
each stage of the fault, the bk are also constant and (14.54) will be in the required
form to apply the equal-area stability criterion. We note that we may assume changes
in the lVii, lVii, and Xk as we go from one stage of the fault to another but we assume
constancy of the bk within each stage. We then get, using (14.60) and (14.61) in (14.54),
PAS = 2: b sin (8~i + LlOAS)

kElc
k (14.62)
We can further simplify (14.62) by replacing the sum of sinusoids by a single si-
nusoid. Using complex arithmetic in the usual way, we have
PAS = 2: bk 1m ei(8P,+MABl
k,Ic
= 1m ( 2: bkei8,~ eitJ.li") (14.63)

kElc
= 1m b,ei8~ eiMAB
= b,sin(8~ + M AB )
where
b,ei8~ = 2: bkei8?, (14.64)

kEic
That is, b, and 8~ are the magnitUde and phase of the sum of the complex numbers
that individually have magnitude bk and phase e~i'
Using (14.63) in (14.56), and defining LlOA = OA - o~, we get
MA Ll8 A + DALlO'A + b,sin(tf, + LlOAB) = FA (14.65)
which is analogous to (14.42). Similarly for network B, carrying out the steps that led
to (14.56), we get
(14.66)
where LloB = OB - o~. Because the lines are assumed lossless, PBA = - PAS' As-
suming power balance in the prefault steady state, and with a lossless transmission
560 Power System Stabilitt Chap. 14
system and loss less generators, we have P~ = - P~. Thus we may replace
(14.66) with
(14.67)
which is analogous to (14.45). Our assumption of uniform damping for all the gen-
erators implies that DA/ MA = DB/Ms. We get,in a parallel development to the two-
machine case,
.. • . 0 0
M, MAB + D,MAB + b, sm (IJ, + M AB ) = PA (14.68)
where M, g, MAMB/(MA + MB), and D, g, DAMB/(MA + MB). Equation (14.68) is
analogous to (14.48) and may be used similarly in the investigation of stability of two
coherent groupings of generators.
Example 14.5
Consider a case of the type described in Application 2 in Section 14.5. In the prefault
steady state we have three connecting lines between networks A and B. Assume that
there is a fault on one line, removed instantaneously by the opening of its breakers, and
the faulted line is then locked out, leaving two lines in service. The data for the three
lines in the prefault steady state are tabulated in Table E14.5. We also show the pre-
fault transmitted power calculated using 11 = bk sin (Jfj. Note that P~ = 2:~=1 Pk =
3.738. Assume coherent groupings of generators in networks A and B and use the
analysis method of Section 14.7 to answer the following questions.
TABLE E14.S
Line 1 Line 2 Line 3

45° 30° 17°
2.5 1.6 4.0
1.768 0.800 1.170
----------------------~
Does the equal-area stability criterion predict stability if
(a) Line 3 is lost?

(b) Line 1 is lost?
Assume that the bk do not change when a line is lost.

Solution We assume that just after a line is lost the ()jj do not change appreciably
from th~ir prefault values (J~ This is because the centers of angles <5A and 58 cannot
change mstantaneously and the angular differences L\(Oj - 5A ) and L\(Oj - 58) are as-
sumed to be small. We next find an expression for PA8 .
i (a) With line 3 out we find from (14.64),
il!
,II b, ~ = 2.5 Lir. + 1.6 flQ: = 4.067 /39.16"
Sec. 14.7 Multimachine Application 561
Then using (14.63),

PAS = 4.067 sin (39.W + ~IlAS)
Next we sketch P~ and PAS' We can think of network A as a single generator with me-
chanical power P~ and electrical output PAS' Initially, the power supplied down the
remaining lines is 1.768 + 0.800 = 2.568. This is less than P~ = 3.603, so, initially, 5A
increases. At the same time network B is a net consumer of power, so 5B decreases.
Hence 5AB initially increases, as does the angle 0, !l, O~ + MAS' A power balance is
reached when Os = O~ = 66.8° = 1.166 rad. The acceleration and maximum deceler-
ation areas are shown in Figure E14.5(a). We can calculate the areas.
6
Aa = 1 (3.738 - 4.067 sin u) du = 1.804 - 1.551 = 0.2526
:'
9~
Admax = Irr/2 (4.067

6,"
sin u - 3.738) du = 0.1781
A,
p1 = 3.738
PAB = 4.067.sin Os
as
Of=39.16'
Figure E14.51al
Since Aa > A dmax , the criterion predicts instability. In this case networks A and B
pull apart (i.e.,lose synchronism and form separate "islands" each with generation and
load imbalances). In network A there would be an excess of generation and in network
B there would be a deficiency of generation. Corrective action would need to be taken
to prevent further deterioration. .
(b) With line lout we find, from (14.64),
bs !!1 = 1.6 ~ + 4.0 ~ = 5.571 /20.7°

Thus, using (14.63),
PAB = 5.571 sin (20.7° + ~Il AB)

562 Power System Stability Ohap. 14
The sketch of P~ and PAB is shown in Figure E14.5(b). Clearly, Aa < Admax and the
equal-area criterion predicts stability. In the sketch we show the balancing decelera-
tion area Ad = Aa.
What makes this case so different from part (a) is the presence of a relatively
strong line (b3 = 4) which is initially lightly loaded. Thus, the line is capable of mak-
ing a strong contribution to the deceleration area.
PAS = 5.571 sin 0,
P~ = 3.738
4
8,
e? = 20.7' Figure E14.5(b)
Exercise 6. Suppose for the case under consideration in this section (i.e., two co-
herent groups of generators) that we lose all the lines connecting a hypothetical net-
work A to network B at t = 0, and then all the breakers reclose after T seconds. All
other factors being equal (or disregarded), what is the most favorable grouping of the
M; to minimize M AB after a fixed time T? More specifically, if Mf# the sum of all
the M; and MA = AMy, M8 = (1 - A)My, how would you pick A? Ais a number be-
tween 0 and 1.
In concluding this section we make a few general comments.

Although the assumption of coherency is not expected to be fully realized in
practice, we can obtain useful qualitative results, nevertheless, which help in think-
ing about stability problems in the system; these results canthen be checked by more
precise models andlor by simulation. Thus we can consider the effects of increasing
(or decreasing) moments of inertia. We can consider the effects of readjusting gen-
eration versus load distributions (this will change P~ and the e~j across the lines join-
ing the two networks A and B), the effect of losing particular lines between the two
networks A and B (thereby changing b, and e~), and the effect of low voltages dur-
ing fault-on periods.
Sec. 14.8 Multimachine Stability Studies 563
Using even our very simple system models and stability analysis techniques, we
can appreciate certain transient stability enhancement techniques that are used in
practice. The basic objective, whether we have two generators or two coherent groups
of generators, is to reduce the acceleration area and increase the maximum available
deceleration area. The importance of rapid removal of faulty lines to allow- the re-
maining paraUelline(s) to deliver more power is seen in Figure 14.16. This figure
also illustrates the importance of maintaining voltage during fault-on conditions. Dur-
ing a fault, voltages tend to drop throughout the system; this is one of the reasons for
the low P0(8) during the fault. Fast-acting voltage control systems at generator buses
counter this drop by increasing generator excitation. One of the effects is to increase
the transferred power during the fault. This then tends to decrease the acceleration
area. In other cases, when the fault is temporary, the importance of rapid reclosing
of circuit breakers may be inferred from the very simple case considered in Figure 14.8.
Fast-closing turbine steam valves actuated during faults can help reduce the
mechanical input PM and thereby both decrease the accelerating area and increase the
decelerating area. It may also be possible to use up some of the excess accelerating
power by momentarily activating resistance loads (braking resistances) when fault
conditions are detected. Switchable series capacitors to cancel some of the series
line inductance and thereby increase the transferred power is another possibility.
In the design phase the importance of paralleling lines to strengthen weak trans-
mission links is clear. It would also be desirable to increase the inertia constants, H,
and decrease the internal impedances of the generating units. Unfortunately, current
manufacturing practice runs contrary to this need.
We note that there are many natural extensions of the technique we have been
describing to more general systems with more general assumptions. One powerful
technique, the so-called second method of Liapunov, is a generalization of the ener-
gy technique we used in Section 14.4. In fact, (14.28) is an example of a so-called
Liapunov junction, and its use is demonstrated in the material through (14.33). With
a more general Liapunov function we can undertake the investigation of the stabili-
ty of multimachine systems without the coherency restriction. There are other re-
strictions however, and in any case, we never achieve the simplicity and intuitive
understanding that we get with the equal area criterion.
For a description of the application of the second method of Liapunov to mul-
timachine power system stability using more advanced models, the interested read-
er is referred to Pai (1981), and Fouad and Vitta!. We turn next to the investigation
of stability by solving the power system differential and algebraic equations directly.
In so doing, we eliminate the many restrictions of the preceding methods.
14.8 MULTIMACHINE STABILITY STUDIES
In North America, the electric power network is operated and designed based on re- I
liability criteria set by the North American Electric Reliability Council (NERC). For II
more information about NERC see http://www.nerc.coml. Current NERC planning I
Ii
I
,l
and operating standards call for strict compliance with a wide range of guidelines to
ensure the reliability of the interconnected system. An important component of the
standards deals with transient stability assessment of the interconnected system and
the associated modeling requirements. This analysis ensures that following a large
disturbance the synchronous machines remain in synchronism in the transition fol-
lowing the disturbance, and the system is able to achieve a satisfactory steady-state op-
erating condition after the protection system has operated to isolate the disturbance.
As compared to the previous sections, we turn to more realistic and complete
generator models and also include in the power system model, the associated ex-
citers, governors, stabilizers, high-voltage dc links, etc. The loads are also modeled
more realistically.
The synchronous generators are represented in varying levels of detail de-
pending on the phenomena being studied. These models range from representation
of the rotor cicuits, damper circuits, and stator circuits using the Park's transforma-
tion and associated differential equations describing the behavior of flux linkages,
or induced electromotive forces, or currents, to the simplest model that represents the
electromechanical characteristics of the synchronous generators. In addition, a wide
range of models exist for various control components like exciters, governors, high-
voltage dc links, etc.
The synchronous generators are interconnected by the transmission network.
For transient stability studies dealing with the electromechanical behavior of the
power system, the electrical transients in the network involving the inductances and
capacitances are neglected, and the network is assumed to be in a quasi steady state.
As a result, the network is represented by a system of algebraic equations that gov-
ern the relationship between the injected complex power at the generator buses and
the complex voltages at all other buses based on the fundamental principles of the
power flow analysis presented in Chapter 10. The important difference in stability
studies is that at each instant in time during the transient the complex power inject-
ed into the network by the synchronous generators varies. As a result, a new solu-
tion of the voltages at all other buses has to be determined.
f.,i' Load modeling is another important feature of transie~stability studies. A
!ti'
I
I variety of load models is used. These range from static nonlinear loads that repre-
~j sent the overall behavior of a load as a combination of constant impedance, constant
I current, and constant power, to detailed dynamic models for induction motors.
We are led to consider a coupled set of differential and algebraic equations.
These are solved numerically to obtain the condition of the system at each instant in
time. Various important quantities like relative rotor angles, voltages at key buses,
and power flows on critical transmission lines are plotted and observed. The be-
havior of these variables is then used to judge stability or instability. The starting
point for any transient stability simulation is the predisturbance power flow solution
of the kind obtained in Chapter 10. The system is always assumed to be in a steady
state when the initiating disturbance occurs. As a result, using the predisturbance
power flow solution, all the initial values of the state variables that govern the dif-
ferential equations are calculated. After these are obtained, the disturbance is sim-
T Sec. 14.8 Multimachine Stability Studies 565
I ulated. Different disturbances can occur on the system. These can be short circuits,
outages of critical components like transmission lines or generators, or sudden ap-
plication or loss of large loads. The simulation of the disturbance causes a mismatch
between the mechanical power input to the generators and the electrical power out-
put of the generators. Hence, the equilibrium is upset, and the state variables gov-
erned by the various differential equations coupled with algebraic equations change
their values. The change in behavior is tracked by numerically integrating the cou-
pled set of differential and algebraic equations. Two broad categories of numerical
techniques are commonly used to integrate the coupled set of equations: implicit in-
tegration techniques and explicit integration techniques. The time evolution of the
state variables and other system variables is observed to determine the behavior of
the system. For a detailed description of the formulation of these equations and their
solution, the interested reader is referred to Anderson and Fouad, Kundur, and Sauer
andPai.
We will now deal with a much simpler representation of the power system,
which is commonly referred to as the classical model. The classical model is used to
study the transient stability of a power system for a period of time during which the
dynamic behavior of the system is dependent largely on the stored energy in the ro-
tating inertias. This is the simplest model used in stability studies and requires a min-
imum amount of data. The assumptions made in developing the classical model are
as follows (Anderson and Fouad, Chapter 2):
1. The mechanical power input to each synchronous machine is constant.

2. Damping or asynchronous power is negligible.
3. The synchronous machines are represented electrically, by constant-voltage-
behind-transient-reactance models.
4. The motion of each synchronous machine rotor (relative to a synchronously
rotating reference frame) is at a fixed angle relative to the angle of the voltage
behind the transient reactance.
S. Loads are represented by constant impedances.
While assumptions 1-4 look similar to those used in Section 14.7, there are some im-
portant differences; the number of generators in arbitrary (with no coherency re-
striction), and the generators are connected to an arbitrary transmission network.
The model is useful for stability analysis but is limited to the study of transient
for periods on the order of one second. This type of analysis is usually called first
swing analysis. Assumption 2 can be relaxed by assuming a linear damping charac-
teristic. A damping torque D8 is included in the swing equation. Note that this was
also considered in the one-machine-infinite bus case in (14.19). In assumption 3, the
steady-state model of the synchronous machine given in Figure 6.5 is modified as
shown in Figure 14.18 for the purpose of transient stability analysis. The reactance
Xd is the direct axis transient reactance. The constant voltage source IEI~ is deter-
mined from the initial conditions (i.e., pre disturbance power flow conditions).
566 Power System Stability r!::hap. 14
,Ia+
lEILa
C +
-
}Jd
. Va
-
Figure 14.18 Representation
of a synchronous machine by can-
stant voltage behind transient re-
actance.
During the transient the magnitude lEI is held constant, while the variation of angle
8 is governed by (14.19).
Assumption 5, dealing with the representation of loads as constant impedances,
is usually made for simplicity. This assumption allows us to eliminate the algebraic
network equations and reduce the system of equations for the multimachine system
to a system consisting of only differential equations. It is important to note, how-
ever, that loads have their own dynamic behavior. In many studies loads are mod-
eled as a combination of constant impedance, constant current, and constant MVA,
together with several critical loads modeled in detail using induction motor models.
Load representation can have a marked effect on stability results.
Considering these assumptions, we will now derive the equations governing
the motion of the multimachine power system. The assumptions provide a repre-
sentation of the power system shown in Figure 14.19 for an n-generator system.
Nodes 1,2, ... ,n are referred to as the internal machine nodes. These are the
nodes or buses to which the voltages behind transient reactances are applied. The
transmission network, together with transformers modeled as impedances, connects
the various nodes. The loads, modeled as impedances, also connect the load buses
to the reference node.
n·Generator system
m-Constant
impedance
loads
---- +
:,IE2 1& Transmission network _ -,
I I
~----- :
I I
I I
I I
I I
: + :
liE
I n
1& --1
I
I I
I I
r----- I
I I
I Reference node I
I------------------------------------~ Figure 14.19 Multimachine
system representation (classi-
cal mOdel).
To prepare the system data for a stability study, the following preliminary cal-
culations are made:
1. The system data are converted to a common system base; a system base of 100
MVA is conventionally chosen. The procedure to perform this transformation
has been described in Chapter 5.
2.The load data from the prefault power flow are converted to equivalent im-
pedances or admittances. This procedure was described in Example 2.3. The
necessary information for this step is obtained from the result of the power
flow. If a certain load bus has a voltage solution VLi and complex power demand
SLi = Pu t jQu, then using Su = Vun (which implies Iu = Stjvt), we get
Iu st Pu - jQu
(14.69)
Yu = Vu = IVj = IVul2
where Yu = gu t j bu is the equivalent shunt load admittance.

3. The internal voltages of the generators IE;I i!J.. are calculated from the power
flow data using the pre disturbance terminal voltages lVa;l~ as follows. We
will temporarily use the terminal voltage as reference as shown in Figure 14.20.
(14.70)
Expressing I; in terms of SGi and Va;' we have
X'S* x' .(P. . - "Q .J
lEI If/ = IVI .~ = IVI t" dl CI CI
,~ at t , IVI
m
at' IVIm
(14.71)
= (IVatl t QCixdJIY.il) t j(PcixdJIVa;l)
Thus, the angle difference between internal and terminal voltage in Figure 14.20
is 0;. Since the actual terminal voltage angle is f3iJ we obtain the initial gener-
ator angle o~ by adding the predisturbance voltage angle f3i to 0;, or
(14.72)
4. The Ybus matrices for the prefault, faulted, and postfault network conditions
are calculated. In obtaining these matrices, the following steps are involved:
a. The equivalent load admittances calculated in step 2 are connected between
the load buses and the reference node. Additional nodes are provided for
the internal generator nodes·(nodes 1,2, ... , n in Figure 14.19) and the
+
+
IEilL§{ IvaY£E Figure 14.20 Generator repre-
sentation for computing initial
angle.
appropriate values of admittances corresponding to Xd are connected be-

tween these nodes and the generator terminal nodes. The procedure to aug-
ment new nodes in the Ybus has been described in Chapter 9.
'r
'I b. In order to obtain the Ybus corresponding to the faulted system, we usually
only consider three-phase to ground faults. The faulted Ybus is then
obtained by setting the row and column corresponding to the faulted node
to zero.
c. The postfault Ybus is obtained by removing the line that would have been
switched following the protective relay operation.
5. In the final step we eliminate all the nodes except the internal generator nodes
using Kron reduction. The procedure for performing Kron reduction was de-
scribed in Chapter 9. Aftp Kron reduction we obtain the reduced Ybus matrix,
which we will denote by Y. The reduced matrix can also be derived as follows.
The system Ybus for each network condition provides the following relation-
ship between the voltages and currents:
(14.73)
where the current vector I is given by the injected currents at each bus. In the
classical model considered, injected currents exist only at the n-internal gener-
ator buses. All other currents are zero. As a result, the injected current vector
has the form
We now partition the matrices Ybus and V appropriately to obtain
[ ~.~]o =[~.~n : ~~][~~1

Y sn Y" Vs'
(14.74)
The SUbscript n is used to denote the internal generator nodes, and the sub-
script s is used for all the remaining nodes. Note that the voltage at the inter-
nal generator nodes are given by the internal emf's. Expanding (14.74), we get
o= YsnEn + YssV,
from which we eliminate V, to determine
In = (Ynn - y n,y;;lY,n)En = YEn (14.75)

The matrix Yis the desired reduced admittance matrix. It has dimensions
(n X n), where n is the number of the generators. From (14.75) we also observe
that the reduced admittance matrix provides us a complete description of all the in-
jected currents in terms of the internal generator bus voltages. We will now use this
relationship to derive an expression for the (active) electrical power output of each
generator and hence obtain the differential equations governing the dynamics of
the system.
The power injectl;Od into the network at node i, which is the electrical power
output of machine i, is given by PCi = Re EJt The expression for the injected cur-
rent at each generator bus Ii in terms of the reduced admittance matrix parameters
is given by (14.75). From (14.75), (10.3), and (10.5), we have
"n" "
PCi = IElG ii + 2; IEiIlE) [Bij sin (Oi - OJ) + GijCOS(Oi - OJ)]
. j=l .
j*i
i = 1,2, ... ,n (14.76)
Substituting the preceding expression for h into the differential equation (14.19)
governing the dynamics of the synchronous machine, and neglecting the damping co-
efficient, we have for a multimachine system
.. _ 0
Mio i - PMi - PCi i = 1,2, ... , n (14.77)
Substituting (14.76) for PCi in (14.77), we obtain
n
MJ5; = P~i -IE;1 2 G;i - 2; IE;I lEA B;j sin (0; - OJ) + GijCOS(Oi - OJ)]
j=l
i*i
i = 1,2, ... ,n (14.78)
In the preceding equations, the value of the mechanical power for each machine is
determined from the prefault conditions. The mechanical power is set equal to the
(active) electrical power output of each generator at the prefault conditions. This
provides the equilibrium conditions and the initial angles for each generator as given
by o~ calculated in step 3 in the preceding calculations. The equations given in
(14.78) are second-order differential equations. In order to perform numerical in-
tegration, we convert these equations into a set of coupled first -order differential
equations given by
" ! n.... ...
Miwi = P~i -IEiI2G;i - '2;IE;IIEABij sin(oi - OJ) + G;i cos (Oi - OJ)]
j=l
j*i (14.79)
i = 1,2, ... ,n
Several numerical techniques are available to solve the preceding set of differential
equations. For a detailed description of the numerical techniques, students are re-
ferred to Kundur, and Sauer and Pai. Standard techniques to solve these equations
are available in numerical packages like MATLAR An example that describes the ap-
plication of such a package is provided next.
Example 14.6
The one-line diagram of the system being analyzed is shown in Figure E14.6(a). For
the transmission lines in the system, all the shunt elements are capacitors with an ad-
mittance of y, = j 0.01 p.u., while all the series elements are inductors with an im-
pedance ZL = j 0.1 p.u. The desired voltages, generation levels, and load levels are
indicated in the figure.
2 PG2 =0.6661
SDg = 1.4 +jO.4
Sm =2.8653 +j1.2244
Figure E14.S(al System one-line diagram.
The generator dynamic data on a 100-MVA base are given in Table E14.6(a).
TABLE E14.S(AI
GENERATOR DATA
Gen. # Xd H
1 j 0.08 lOs
2 j 0.18 3.01 s
3 j 0.12 6.4 s
The power flow solution for the sample system is as follows:
V4] 1.04-L2".]
Vs [ 1.02/ 3.SSO PG1 1.9991 QGl 0.8134
V6 = 1.05/-2.90
0
, [PG2] = [0.6661], [QG2] = [0.2049]
[V7 0.9911/-7.48 0 PG3 1.6000 QG3 1.051
Vg 1.0135/-7.05 0
T
I Sec. 14.8 Multimachine Stability Studies 571
For a three-phase to ground fault at Bus 7, with line 7-6 removed' at 0.10 s, simulate
the differential equations for the classical model of the system. Plot all the rotor an-
gles versus time. Also, obtain the relative rotor angles with respect to Generator 1.
Solution Step 1: In this example, all the load data are provided on a 100-MVA base;
as a result, no conversion of base is required.
Step 2: Knowing the voltages at the load buses, and the complex power demand,
the admittances corresponding to the loads are given by
= PL7 _ • QL7 = 2.8653 _ . 1.2244 = 29170 _ '12 6

Y77 1V7lz ] IV71z (0.9911)2 ] (0.991lj2· ] .45
Similarly, Y88 = 1.3630 - j0.3894.

Step 3: The internal generator voltages are calculated. The details of the calcu-
lation are shown for Generator 2.
Pz + jQz = 0.6661 + jO.2049
Xd2 = j0.18
From (14.71), we have
IE21~ = (1.02 + 0.2049 X 0.18/1.02) + j (0.6661 X 0.18/1.02)
= 1.0562 + j0.1175 = 1.0627 /6.3507°
From (14.72),
8~ = 6.3507 - 3.55 = 2.8006°
We can similarly calculate the other two internal voltages to be
IEII~ = 1.1132/7.9399°, IE31~ = 1.1844/5.9813°

Step 4: We now form the prefault, faulted, and postfault admittance matrices, with the
augmented internal generator buses 1,2, and 3.
- j12.5 j12.5
0 - j5.556 j5.556
0 0 - j8.333 0 j8.333
yprefaull_ j12.5 0 - j32.48 jl0.0 0 jl0.0
b", -
0 j5.556 jIO.O - j35.526 jlo.o jlo.o
0 j8.333 0 0 - j28 jIO.O jlO.O
0 0 jlo.o jIO.O jIO.O 2.917 - j31.217 0
0 jIO.O jIO.O 0 1.363 - j20.369
- j12.5 j12.5
0 - j5.556 o. j5.556 0
0 - j8.333 0 j8.333 0
yfaul!ed_ j12.5 0 - j32.48 jlO.O 0 0
bus -:
0 j5.556 jIO.O - j35.526 0 jlO.O
0 j8.333 0 0 - j28.313 jlO.O
0 0 0 0 0 0
jlO.O 110.0 1.363 - j20.369
572 Power System Stability' Chap. 14
Observe that in the faulted admittance matrix the row and column corresponding to
the faulted Bus 7 contain only zeroes.
- j12.5 0 j12.5 0 0 0
0 - j5.556 0 j5.556 0
0 0 - j8.333 0 j8.333
yPOslfault _ j12.5 0 0 - j32.48 jlO.0 0 j10.0
b" -
0 j5.556 j10.0 - j35.526 j10.0 jlO.0
0 j8.333 0 0 - j18.313 0 j10.0
0 j10.0 j10.0 0 2.917 - j21.217 0
0 j10.0 j10.0 0 1.363 - j20.369
In the postfault admittance matrix the line between buses 7-fJ is removed. Hence we
suitably alter element 1'66, Y77, Y67 , and 17 6'
Step 5: We now perlo~ Kr~n reduction on the three admittance matrices given
previously and obtain the reduced admittance matrices at the internal generator buses.
For the example considered, these matrices are given by
[0.5595 - i4.8499 0.3250 + j1.997 0.4799 + ij3573]

Yf;d~~~ = 0.3250 + j1.997 0.1954 - j3.7709 0.2913 + j1.2535
0.4799 + j 1.9573 0.2913 + j1.2535 0.4352 - j 3.9822
[ 0.01 - i7.1316 0.0145 + jO.8052 0.0249 + i02513]

V:~~~~~d = 0.0145 + jO.8052 0.0209 - j 4.3933 0.0359 + jO.3628
0.0249 + jO.2513 0.0359 + j 0.3628 0.0618 - j 5.257
[0.7849 - i4.4002 0.4147 + j2.1410 0.3326 + i1.1458]

yP;J~;~t = 0.4147 + j2.1410 0.2300 - j3.7254 0.2165 + jO.9857
0.3326 + j1.1458 0.2165 + jO.9857 0.2930 - j2.6377
We can now formulate the differential equation given by (14.79) and numeri-
cally integrate them. The fault is applied at t = 0 sec. Hence, for the period from
osec to 0.10 sec, we use the faulted reduced admittance ma~ elements with the
initial angles at fJ~, i =1,2,3. The initial speeds w~ = 0, i = 1,2,3. Since the system
is at equilibrium prior to the fault, the angles and speeds cannot change instanta-
neously. We solve this initial value problem, until t = 0.1 sec. At this time the fault
is cleared, and we integrate the system beyond this time with the reduced postfault
admittance matrix.
The plots of the absolute rotor angles obtained by integrating the equations
using the numerical integration technique available in MATLAB are shown in Figure
E14.6(b).
We note from the plot of the absolute rotor angles that we cannot make any
judgment regarding transient stability. We observe that all the machines angles
remain together but increase monotonically. As a result, we plot the relative rotor
angles with respect to Generator 1. Typically, we choose the generator with the largest
inertia to obtain the relative rotor angle plot. This plot is shown in Figure E14.6(c).
We observe from the figure that the generators remain in synchronism, and the rela-
500
- - - Generator 1
h
.I
400 - - - - - Generator 2
- , - • - Generator3
:l
"...
OJ)
300
"
'0
.5
~
~
§ 200
£0
Il<i
100
0
a 0.5 1.5
Time in seconds
Figure E14.S(b) Plot of absolute rotor angles.
tive rotor angles oscillate. We assume here that the inherent damping in the system
will bring the machine back to its equilibrium position eventually.
15 ,-, ,-
I \ I \
I \ I \
I \ I \
I \ I \ I
I \ I
~
10 I
I \ I
"~
OJ)
I
I
I
I \
\ I
I
I \
"
'0 I \
I
I \
\ I
I
.5 5 I
I
~
~
I
I
§ I
... I
~ a
I
>"
'~
'il
Il<i
-5
-10
a 0.5 1.5
Time in seconds
Figure E14.S(c) Plot of relative rotor angles.

We finally show a plot of the rotor speeds in per unit in Figure E14.6(d).
1.025
.-.~
1.02
," \ / I
...... ..-i- "": .L
/7\,_I/
I
S
11 ;~ ~.1
I f--"<:""1
\
\
I
J'....
l lX
II 1.015 \ .''f''-.-/ '
\ / I
:;'"'" \
".
/~_I
~ 1.01
:{ '-'
~
.S
'tl
"& 1.005
~
'"
B --Omegal
~ ----- Omega2 -
----- Omega3
0.995
o 0.5 1.5
Time in seconds
Figure E14.61dJ Plot of rotor speeds.
14.9 SUMMARY
In this chapter we consider the problem of power system stability, in particular the
problem of transient stability. For this purpose a dynamic mOd$ of the turbine-
generator unit is required. Since it is observed in practice that the rotor angle (mea-
sured with respect to a synchronous rotating reference frame) undergoes relatively
slow variations during these transients, we can derive a very simple generator model.
In this model the internal voltage magnitude is assumed to be constant while the
phase angle 0 is variable. Using the method of pseudo-steady-state analysis, the
power output of the generator is found by using the steady-state formula derived in
Chapter 6; in this formula we allow 0 to be slowly varying. For the case of a turbine-
generator unit connected through a lossless transmission link to an infinite bus, the
end result is (14.19), a second-order nonlinear differential equation in the power
angle o. We note that the same equation describes an analogous spring-mass system
with a nonlinear spring characteristic.
For the transient stability problem, linearization is not usually suitable; we can
use an energy method, however, as suggested by the spring-mass analogy. We find that
the sum of kinetic energy and potential energy decreases with tim~ and use this prop-
erty to infer the system behavior.
Once we understand the principles involved, we may simplify the determination
of stability by using the equal-area criterion. If the system is stable, we can also use
the equal-area construction to determine the extent of the swings of the power angle.
We note that the question of stability is settled in the first swing; if the power angle
is initially increasing but reaches a maximum value and then starts to decrease, sta-
bility is assured.
The analysis can also be extended to the case of two machines connected
through a lossless transmission line. Another extension to the case of two groupings
of generators is possible if the machines are closely coupled within each group and
weakly coupled between groups.
Although the equal-area criterion is based on a model too simple to give accu-
rate quantitative results, its simplicity enhances understanding and helps explain the
measures taken in industry practice to improve stability.
Multimachine transient stability studies are routinely carried out to design
systems and also to obtain operating limits to satisfy reliability criteria. In these
studies the synchronous generators with the associated controls are modeled ap-
propriately using a system of differential equations. The transmission network that
interconnects the synchronous generators is modeled by a system of algebraic equa-
tions. As a result, the system is represented by a coupled set of differential and al-
gebraic equations. For the classical model representation of the system, the loads
are represented as constant impedances. This allows the algebraic equations to
be eliminated, and we obtain a set of coupled differential equations that represent
the dynamics of the system. Knowing the initial operating condition, the states of
the system can be evaluated, and for a given fault, the differential equations can
be numerically integrated to obtain the time evolution of the state variables. The
plots of the relative rotor angles can then be used to determine the transient sta-
bility of the system.
Problems
14.1. Given a turbine-generator unit rated 100 MVA with a per unit inertiaconstant,H = 5 sec.
(a) Calculate the kinetic energy stored at synchronous speed (3600 rpm).
(b) Compare this figure with the kinetic energy of a lO-ton truck going at 60 mph.
(c) Suppose that the generator is delivering 100 MW and then, at t = 0, the line circuit
breakers open. Calculate the shaft acceleration in rad/sec2•
(d) At this rate, how long does it take for 5 to increase from 5° to 5° + 211 radians?
14.2. In the model used to study the stability of the single generator connected to an infinite
bus, we assumed that PM = P~ was constant. Consider steam governor action such
that the mechanical power input to the generator is given by (Figure P14.2)
PM = P~ - k( W - wo)
576 Power System Stability, Chap. 14
where k is positive and wis the angular velocity of the (two-pole) turbogenerator shaft.
Show how this feedback, in effect, changes the mechanical friction constant D. Is this
a stabilizing factor? What happens if the constant k is negative?
Wo w__ Figure P14.2
14.3. Consider the spring-mass system shown in Figure P14.3 and described by the differen-
tial equation
d2x dx .
m 2 +a-+ smx=f(l)
dl dl
M
o
f
Figure P14.3
(a) For 1 < 0, f(l) = 0.5. Find the steady state xo.
(b) For 0 :;:; t, f(t) = 0.5 + I::.f(t), where I::.f(t) is small. Find a linear differential
equation that describes I::.x = x - xo in terms of I::.f(t).
(c) Find the natural frequencies of the linearized system foundilpart (b) with m =: 1.0
and a = 0.01. Suppose that I::.f(t) = O.1U(I), where U(I) is the unit step function.
Can you roughly sketch X(I) for 1 ;;:: 0, showing the initial value, final value, fre-
quency, and decay of the lightly damped oscillatory component?
14.4. Consider a round-rotor generator delivering a steady-state power Pc = 0.5 to an infi-
nite bus through a transmission line with reactance XL = 004. Assume that IE.I = 1.8,
Voo = 1 LQ:, H = 5 sec, and Xd = Xq = 1.0. 'Neglect resistance.
(a) Find the two possible steady-state (equilibrium) values of power angle
o= !.b - ~ that lie in the interval [0, 21l'].
(b) Which of these two equilibrium values are we likely to observe in practice? Hint:
Linearize around the equilibrium value and consider the natural frequencies found
from the linear differential equation in 1::.0.
14.5. Suppose that in Prob!em 14.4 att = 0, the line circuit breakers open. P~ = 0.5 remains
constant. Calculate 5 and iJ at the end of 1 sec under two assumptions and compare:
(a) D = 0 and (b) D = 0.001.
14.6. A round-rotor generator is delivering a steady-state power, PG =; 0.4, to an infinite bus

through a transmission line with reactance XL = OJ. Assume that lEal = 2.0, Voo =
Ii!, H = 0.4 sec,and Xd = Xq = 1.2. At t = 0 the circuit breakers open and reclose
T seconds later.
(a) Find the critical clearing angle 0TC'
(b) Find the corresponding critical clearing time, Teriti"l'
(c) Using T = 0.9Teritica" find omax and Omia'
M = 1.0
PM = 0.5
= 1.5
lEal
Xd = Xq = 1.0
(a) At t = 0 the circuit breakers open and reclose Tseconds later. Find Teritical'
(b) Assume that T = 0.7 Teritical' Find the bounds on the swing of 0 (i.e., find Om"
and 8min ).
v. = lLQ'
Figure P14.7

PM = 1.0
lEal = 1.5
Xd = Xq = 0.9
(a) At I = 0 the circuit breakers open and remain open. Determine if the tran-
sient is stable.
(b) Repeat if Xd = 1.0, Xq = 0.6.
v. = lLQ'
Figure P14.S
578 Power System Stability Ch1lp. 14
14.9. Refer to Figure 14.9 and assume that

PM = 1.0
lEal = 1.8
Xd = Xq = 0.9
M = 1.0
The system is operating in the steady state. At t = 0 a solid 3r/J symmetric fault occurs
as shown, and the fault is not cleared until t], when ott]) = Tr/2. At t] the breakers open
and remain open until a time 12 when 8(t2) = 2Tr/3. By t2 thefault has deenergized,and
at t2 the breakers close and remain closed. Is the system transient stable with respect
to the fault sequence described previously?
V~=I!J.°
I Figure P14.9
14.10. Jack and Jill are asked to check for possible transient stability problems for a remote
salient-pole generator delivering power through a transmission line to the main part
of the system, which is modeled by an infinite bus. They collect the following data
(converted to per unit): Pc = 0.8, V", = 112:, Xd + XL = 1.0, Xq flX L = 0.6, and
power factor = 0.8. When they are back in the office they notice that they did not check
on whether the power factor was positive or negative. Jack says: "Let's check the lead-
ing power factor possibility. If that one gives enough margin of stability, the lagging
case will certainly be okay." Do you agree?

For the Eagle Power System used in the design exercises, the parameters for the gen-
erators were determined in D6.1. Using these data, and any available transient sta-
bility program, conduct a transient stability study on the Eagle system using the
classical model. The faults to be simulated are three-phase to ground faults at the low-
voltage end and the high-voltage end of all the transformers connecting the genera-
tors to the transmission system. Assume that the breakers clear the faults in 0.1 sec.
Plot the relative rotor angles and determine if the system is stable for all the cases an-
alyzed. If the system is not stable, assume you can use faster breakers to clear the fault
in 0.067 sec and determine if the system is stable. If the system is still unstable for any
fault, you can then lower the generation at the unstable generator in small steps until
the system is stable forall faults.
1
•
Appendices
APPENDIX 1: RELUCTANCE
In Example 3.1 the flux in the core, cP, is found to be proportional to the mrnf, Ni.
We can write the relationship as
(AU)
where Fis the mrnf and I!ll. = II ILA is defined to be the reluctance of the magnetic cir-
cuit. There is an analogy to Ohm's law for a simple resistive circuit, where i = viR.
In fact, since for a conductor of uniform cross section A, length I, and conductivity 0',
the resistance R = II00A, the analogy extends to the geometry as well.
Consider the same toroid as in Example 3.1 but with a small air gap cut in the
core. IL as in Example 3.1, we now apply Ampere's circuital law to this case, we get
F = Ni = fH· dl = H111 + H212 (A1.2)

r
where H1 and H2 are the scalar magnetic intensities and II and 12 are the path lengths
in the iron core and air gap, respectively. Since the flux in the ailgap and the core is
the same, cP = BIA = B,.A; as an approximation, we are assuming no "fringing" of
the flux in the air gap. We also have BI = IL1H1 and B2 = IL2H2' We can now rewrite
(A1.2) in terms of cP as follows:
F = Ni = l!L +l i (Al.3)
IL1A IL2A
Defining the core reluctance 1!ll.1 = IdIL1A and the air-gap reluctance 1!ll.2 = 121 p.zA,
we get
F
cP = - (AlA)
I!ll.
where I!ll. = 1!ll.1 + 1!ll.2 is the total reluctance of the series magnetic circuit. More gen-
erally, for any series magnetic circuit (with the same cP in each section) we can use
580
(Al.4) with t!!l, = 2: t!!l,i as the total reluctance and F = 2: ~ as the total mmf for the
series circuit. The analogy to a series circuit containing resistances and voltage sources
is clear. It can be shown that the analogy extends in a natural way to more compli-
cated magnetic structures, including series and parallel magnetic paths and mmfs in
the different "legs."
Our understanding of magnetic circuits may be greatly enhanced by using re-
luctance and its resistance analogy in a qualitative way. As an example of this use of
reluctance, consider the circuit shown in Figure AU, in which some of the flux lines
are sketched. Neglecting the leakage flux, we have a series circuit composed of four
reluctances corresponding to two iron path sections and two air gaps. Since the per-
meability of the iron is on the order of 1000 times that of the air, the iron reluctances
may be negligible compared with the air-gap reluctances. The air-gap reluctances
depend on e. The minimum reluctance occurs when the average air-gap distance is
a minimum (i.e., for e = 0, 11'); this corresponds to a maximum cpo
Suppose that we consider the leakage flux. Then, noting the figure, we have
the reluctance from a to b (mainly the sum of air-gap reluctances) in parallel with the
much greater reluctances of the relatively long leakage paths in air. As an approxi-
mation these leakage reluctances may therefore be neglected.
Finally, we note that unlike the variable reluctances of iron sections (because }L
is not constant), those of circuits in the air are constant. In a series circuit with reluc-
tance dominated by an air-gap term, we can therefore expect a fairly linear cp-F rela-
tionship, at least until the iron saturates and its reluctance increases significantly.
APPENDIX 2: FORCE GENERATION IN A SOLENOID
One type of electromagnet, or solenoid, is shown in Figure A2.l. The current in the
coil produces a force on the plunger, or movable core. There are applications in "step-
per" motors, brakes, clutches, releases, and so on. With the addition of electrical
Centerline of
flux ¢
I
I
I
\
---a....
Leakage
flux
+ Figure A1.1
582 Appendices
~/2 ~/2
Iron shell
Coil
[::::~ffi--r--t-- (concentric with
plunger)
Plunger
(movable
iron core) Figure A2.1 Solenoid.
contacts on the plunger, we get a relay or contactor whose contacts close (or open)
when the current is sufficiently large. In Chapter 13 we consider some relay applica-
tions to the problem of power system protection.
We can calculate the force on the plunger by using the following modification
of (7.9):
loT dL (y) •
f £=2 1 Tyl (A2.l)
In fact, in the case of Figure A2.l, all the quantities in (A2.l) are scalars.
In calculating the inductance L(y), it is convenient to use the notion of re-
luctance. Thus using the result in Appendix 1, we find that the reluctance of the air
gap is
y
1!Jl.=- (A2.2)
/LoA
We will not calculate the reluctance of the (series) iron path; we a:Jume that it is
negligible compared with the value from (A2.2). Then, using (A2.2), we have
Ni /LoANi
4>=-m=-y- (A2.3)
Assuming that the flux links all the turns, we have
A NrfJ /Lo AN2

L=-=-=-- (A2.4)
i i y
Thus
dL = _/LoAN2
(A2.5)
dy i
and using (A2.1), we get
(A2.6)
The negative sign means that the force on the plunger is opposite to the direction of
increasing y (i.e., is upward). Physically, we have a manifestation of the attraction of
opposite magnetic poles.
Equation (A2.6) gives the instantaneous values off£. The average value for a
sinusoidal current is
,uoAN 2II12
fEav = - 21 (A2.7)
where III is the effective or root-mean-square (rms) value of i.

To get some idea of reasonable values of force, assume that the plunger is 1 in.
in diameter, y = 1/8 in., N = 1000, III = 1 A. Then
41T X 10- 7 X 5.07 X 10- 4 X 106 X 12
hav = - 2 X (3.175 X 10-3)2
= -31.58 newtons = -7.10 pounds
Suppose now that the coil in Figure A2.1 has a "tap," so that schematically we
have the electrical circuit shown in Figure A2.2. This time in using (A2.1), i has two
components, i l and i2 , and L(y) is a 2 X 2 matrix. We can find L by using superposi-
tion as follows. If 4>11 is the flux in coil 1 when only i l flows, then
Nli
l Nl4>l1 Ni
4>11 = -=}L 11 = -.- =- (A2.8)
9Jt II 9Jt
Similarly, L12 = L2l = N1N219Jt, L22 = NY9Jt. Thus
1 [Nt N1N2]
L(y) = 9Jt(y) Nl Nz N~ (A2.9)
Then from (A2.2), using 9Jt(y) = yl,uoA, we get
fE = - ,uo~ (N1i 1+ Nzii (A2.l0)

2y
Figure A2.2 Tapped coil.

584 Appendices
Suppose that N1 = N2 (i.e., the coil in Figure A2.2 is center tapped). Then (A2.l0)
reduces to
AN2
r _~('
JE -2 11
+ 12')2 (A2.l1)
2y
and for sinusoidal currents,
iLoANi 2
[Eav = - --2-111 + 121 (A2.l2)
2y
where 11 and 12 are the (effective) phasor representations of i1 and i2, respectively.
APPENDIX 3: METHOD OF LAGRANGE MULTIPLIERS
Consider the following geometric problem: Find the rectangle of largest area in-
scribed in an ellipse given by
(A3.I)
Since the area of the rectangle is 4xy, the problem may be restated as follows:
maximize [(x, y) = 4xy (A3.2)
with (x, y) satisfying (A3.I).
In dealing with the constraint, or "side condition" (A3.I), it is convenient to in-
troduce notation and replace it by
x2 l
g(x, y) = a2 + b2 - I = 0 (A3.3)
A geometric approach to the solution reveals a useful prop~rty of the optimal

solution. Suppose that we plot the con.straint g( x, y) = 0 in the (x, y) plane along
with the plots of [(x, y) = Il for different (constant) Il. In Figure A3.1 we see that
for [(x, y) = III there are two solutions that satisfy the constraint. [(x, y) = 113 is not
feasible because it does not meet the constraint. It is clear geometrically that
[(x, y) = 112 is the optimal or largest value of [(x, y) consistent with meeting the con-
straint, and that (xo,/) is the corresponding optimal value of (x, y).
The useful property we alluded to earlier is that at the optimal point (xD,l) the
curve [(x, y) = 112 and the ellipse g(x, y) = 0 are tangent. Equivalently, and more
computationally convenient, at (XO, l) the gradient vectors of {(x, y) and g(x, y)
point in the same direction.
Using 'I to indicate the gradient operator, this tangency condition can be re-
stated as follows:
'If = A'Ig (A3.4)

Appendix 3: Method of Lagrange Multipliers 585
[(x, Y)=(Xl
[(x, y) = (Xl
[(X'Y)=(X1
X-+
Figure A3.1 Geometric proper-

ty of optimal solution.
where Ais a real scalar, not yet known. In tenns of components, for the present prob-
lem, we get the following two scalar equations:
a[ ag
-=A-
ax ax
(A3.5)
a[ = Aag
ay ay
Using (A3.2) and (A3.3) , we calculate the following terms:

a[ a[ ag 2y
-=4y -= 4x
ax ay ay b2
Substituting in (A3.5), we get
Ux A4y
4y =- 4x=-
2 (A3.6)
a2 b
Equations (A3.6) and (A3.3) give three equations in the three unknowns x, y, and A.
Equation (A3.6) yields A= 2ab as the only possible solution for Acorresponding to
nonzero solutions for x and y. Then substituting y = bx/a in (A3.3), we get
x = a/Yz. Finally, y = b(V2. This defines the optimal rectangle. We note that
with these values of x and y, j(x, y). = 4xy = 2ab. Thus the maximum area is 2ab.
These useful notions extend to more general problems. An appropriate version
for our purposes is the following. Suppose that we wish to find the critical or sta-
tionary points of a scalar cost function [(Xl' XZ, ... ,xn) subject to a single scalar
equality constraint or side condition g(XI' Xz, ... , Xn) = O. Weform an augment-
ed cost function or Lagrangian:
- A
[(Xl, XZ, ... ,Xn, A) = f(XI, Xz, ... ,Xn) - Ag(XI' XZ' ... ,Xn) (A3.7)
586 Appendices
where the real scalar Ais known as a Lagrange multiplier. Then we set all the partial
derivatives of the Lagrangian function equal to zero, exactly as we do for an uncon-
strained problem. We get
at at
-=--1.-=0
ag (A3.8)
i = 1,2, ... ,n
ax; ax; ax;
Equation (A3.8) is the same as (A3.4), so it leads to the same geometric interpre-
tation in terms of tangents. In addition to (A3.8), we still need to satisfy the side
condition. Thus we have n + 1 equations to solve for the n + 1 unknowns Xl,
X2' • • • ,Xn , A. A nice refinement is to state the satisfaction of the side condition as
follows: Satisfy
(A3.9)
Thus a necessary condition for optimality is that all the partial derivatives of t with
respect to the X; and with respect to Amust be zero.
APPENDIX 4: ROOT·LOCUS METHOD
The root-locus method is useful in characterizing the transient behavior of a closed-

loop linear time-invariant system in terms of the transfer functions of the open-loop
subsystems. The method is particularly useful if the effect of loop gain as a parame-
ter is of interest. We assume that the reader is familiar with the basics of the Laplace
transform, transfer functions, poles and zeros, block diagrams, and the notion of feed-
back.
To motivate our discussion of the root-locus method, consider the negative-
feedback system shown in Figure A4.1. Suppose that we want to know the poles of
the closed-loop transfer function as a function of the loop gain K. Wy the standard
calculation the closed-loop transfer function
G (s) ~ y(s) = K/(s(s + 2)) K

c Yis) 1 + K/(s(s + 2)) S2 + 2s + K (A4.l)
We can easily find the poles of G/s) by factoring the denominator polynomial; the
pole locations will depend on K. It is instructive to plot the loci of pole locations as
K varies from zero to infinity, as shown in Figure A4.2.
~
e K
Yd - - 1--__- Y
-~
K ~0 Figure A4.1 Simple negative-
feedback system.
Complex
plane
-2 o
Root-locus
branch
Figure A4.2 Root locus.
This plot of closed-loop poles as K goes from zero to infinity is called a

(negative-feedback) root-locus plot. The plot consists of branches along which the
poles shift as continuous functions of K. The arrows indicate the direction of motion
as K increases. The two loci originate on the open-loop poles (at 0 and -2), and as
K increases the poles move along the negative real axis until they meet. Further in-
creases in K cause the poles to become complex (in complex-conjugate pairs) with
an increasing imaginary component. We can infer from the diagram that the transient
behavior (e.g., step response) becomes ever more oscillatory as K increases but never
reaches the point of instability.
We next turn to the more general feedback case shown in Figure A4.3. In terms
of the open-loop transfer functions, we find the closed-loop transfer function
y(s) KG(s)
G,(s) = Yd(S) = 1 + KG(s)H(s) (A4.2)
We are still interested in the root-locus plot as K varies from zero to infinity but
wish to avoid the task of factoring the denominator polynomial for each K. The root-
locus method offers an alternative. The basic idea is developed by making the fol-
lowing observations.
1. The poles ofG,(s) are the zeros of 1 + KG(s)H(s). [For simplicity, we assume
that no zero of H(s) cancels a pole of G(s).]
2. In this case the poles of G,(s) are the values of s such that
1
G(s)H(s) = -K
r----t'--y
Figure A4.3 Negative-feedback

configuration.
IW'!
if. ,
588 Appendices
3. This condition, in turn, implies two conditions:

1
IG(s)H(s)1 = K (A4.3)
/G(s)H(s) = 180° (mod 360°) (A4.4)

4. Suppose now that G(s)H(s) may be expressed in the following pole-zero form
and consider any specific value of s, such as shown in Figure A4.4. We get
G(s)H(s) = (s - ZI)(S - zz)' .. (s - zm) (A4.5)

(s - Pl)(S - pz)' .. (s - Pn)
Ilej8'lzei8, . . ·lmej8m
(A4.6)
dleN'd2eN, . .. dne i4>m
where liej8; is the polar representation of s - Zi and die i4>; is the polar represen-
tation of s - Pi' The connection between the two representations in (A4.5)
and (A4.6) is shown in Figure A4.4.
In terms of the polar representation, the magnitude condition (A4.3) may be re-
placed by
11/2 , • ·Im 1
(A4.7)
d1d2 • •• dn K
while the angle condition (A4.4) translates into
81 + 82 + ... + 8m- (4)1 + 4>2 + ... + 4>n) = 180 0 (mod 360°) (A4.8)
For our purposes the angle condition is the more important one. We can check
whether a particular test point s lies on the root locus by checking whether (A4.8) is
satisfied [i.e., the sum of the angles from the open-loop zeros to the test point s, minus
':J
I; •
i
Figure A4.4 Polar form.

the sum of the angles from the open-loop poles to the point s is 180° (mod 360°)]. The
reader may verify that this calculation applied to the system in Figure A4.l yields
the root locus in Figure A4.2. If a point s lies on the root locus, the value of K that
puts it there may be found from the magnitude condition (A4.7).
There is no need to resort to trial and error in seeking the values of s that sat-
isfy (A4.8). Certain rules may be derived on the basis of (A4.7) and (A4.8) that help
locate the curves at least approximately. Some of the most important rules are given
next for the negative-feedback configuration of Figure A4.3, with G(s)H(s) in the
form (A4.5) and K ~ O. We also assume more poles than zeros (i.e., n > m).
Rules for plotting negative-feedback root locus

1. K ~O. Each open-loop pole is the origin of a root-locus branch.
2. K ~ 00. Each open-loop zero is a terminating point for a particular root-locus
branch. The remaining branches tend to infinity.
3. A point on the real axis lies on a branch of the (negative-feedback) root locus
if and only if it lies to the left of an odd number of real-axis poles and zeros.
4. Suppose that G(s)H(s) has n poles,PI ,P2, ... ,Pn, and m zeros, Zl, Z2, ... ,
Zm' Then there are n root-locus branches, of which m tend to the m zeros and
n - m tend to infinity along certain asymptotes. Concerning these asymptotes,
a. They originate at
(center-of-gravity rule)
b. One asymptote is at an angle of180° /(n - m).

c. The angle between any two neighboring asymptotes is 360 0 /(n - m).
5. The angle of departure of a root -locus branch from a pole (or arrival at a zero)
is found by applying the angle condition iii + li2 + ... + lim -
(tPl + 1>2 + ... + tPn) = 180° mod (360°) to a point s arbitrarily close to the
appropriate pole (orzero). All the angles but one (the angle sought) are known.
Thus that angle may easily be found.
These five rules are sufficient for our purposes.
Example A4.1
Find the root locus for the system shown in Figure EA4.l(a).
+ K(s + 2) I-----..--y
s(s + 3)(s2 + 2s + 2)J
K?: 0
Figure EA4.1(a)
590 Appendices
Solution We note that we have a negative-feedback configuration with K ;::: 0, with

G(s)H(s) in the form (A4.5), and with three more poles than zeros. We can then use
the five rules provided.
The first step is to locate the poles and zeros in the .complex plane [Figure
EA4.l(b)]. There will be fourroot-Iocus branches. One (on the real axis) tends to the
zero. The remaining three locus tend to infinity along asymptotes originating at
(-1-1-3)-(-2)
So = = -1
3
-I + jJ
¥--- Complex
I
plane
I
I
-3 -2 I
I
I
~--
-I - jJ
Figure EA4.1(b)
and at angles of ±60° and 180°. In finding the angle of departure from the pole at
-1 + jl, it helps to draw a sketch showing the angles to a test point s near the pole
[Figure EA4.l(c)]. The points should really be very close to the pole at -1 + jl but
is shown more distant to make the drawing clear. The numerical values of the angles,
however, are evaluated for s arbitrarily close to -1 + j 1. Thus, applying rule 5, we
have
45° - (135° + 26.6° + 90° + <1>4) = 180° mod (360°)
Complex
plane
-3 -2
~l
-I - jl
Figure EA4.1 (e)

Solving for <P4, we get

<P4 = - 386.6° mod (360°)
= -26.6°
We now can. draw the fourroot-Iocus branches shown in Figure E4.1(d). In this
case we see that as K increases, at a certain value the system goes unstable.
s-plane
60·
-3 -2
Figure EA4.1(d)
So far we have been dealing with the negative-feedback case. We will have oc-
casion to consider positive feedback as in Figure A4.5. In this case the calculation of
Gc(s) yields
y(s) KG(s)
Gc(s) = Yd(S) = 1 - KG(s)H(s) (A4.9)
Aside from this change in configuration, we will make the same assumptions as for
the negative-feedback configuration [i.e., G(s)H(s) in the form (A4.5) with n > m,
and also K ;;:: 0]. In this case (A4.8) changes to
OJ + O2 + ... + Om -. (cpJ + CP2 + ... + CPn) = 0° mod (360°) (A4.l0)
Figure A4.5 Positive-feedback

configuration.
592 4ppendices
but (A4.7) is unchanged. Compared with the negative-feedback rules, we have the
following changes:
Rules for plotting positive-feedback root locus
1. Same as for negative feedback.

2. Same as for negative feedback.
3. A point on the real axis lies on a branch of the (positive-feedback) root locus
if and only if it lies to the right of an odd number of real-axis poles and zeros.
4. (a) and (c) are the same. Replace (b) by the following: One asymptote is at an
angle of 180 /(n - m) + 180°.
0
5. Same except the angle condition is (8 1 + O2 + ... + Om) -

(<PI + <P2 +... + <Pn) = 0° mod (360°).
Example A4.2
Repeat Example A4.1 but with a positive-feedback configuration, as in Figure A4.S.
Solution Applying the rules for positive feedback, we get the root locus shown in
Figure EA4.2.
s-plane
60' \ So
-3 -2/-1
/
I
ASymptole--./
I
!.
b
Figure EA4.2
Note 1: As K increases from zero, the system goes unstable immediately.
Note 2: Consider Example A4.1, with negative K instead of positive K. The
poles of Gc(s), which are the zeros of 1 + KG(s)H(s) = 1 - IKIG(s)H(s), are
therefore the same as in Example A4.2. In other words, the negative-feedback
configuration with negative K gives the same root locus as the standard positive-
Appendix 5: Negative- and Zero-Sequence Impedances 593
feedback configuration with positive K. Similarly, the positive feedback

configuration with negative K gives the same root locus as the standard
negative-feedback configuration with positive K.
Note 3: Along these lines we may view Figure EA4.2 as the smooth continuation
of the graph. in Figure EA4.1( d) for -00 < K < 00. Only the arrows on the
branches need to be reversed.
We conclude by considering the following question: How do we know if we

have negative or positive feedback? If the system is in the negative-feedback con-
figuration (like Figure A4.3), with G(s)H(s) in the pole-zero form (A4.5) and K 2: 0,
then we have a negative-feedback system. Change only the negative-feedback con-
figuration to a positive-feedback configuration (like Figure A4.5); then we have pos-
itive feedback.
All the cases may be reduced to one or the other of the foregoing. In some
cases it may be helpful to make the determination after carrying out the following
steps.
1. If not already single loop, reduce the feedback system to a single-loop system.
2. Ignoring the summing points, write the open-loop gain KG(s)H(s) with
G(s)H(s) in pole-zero form (A4.5). Determine if K is positive or negative.
3. Let}J., be the number of sign reversais in the loop summing points. If (-1)1'K
is negative, we have negative feedback. If (-1)1'K is positive, we have positive
feedback.
APPENDIX 5: NEGATIVE· AND ZERQ.SEQUENCE

IMPEDANCES OF SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES
As discussed in Section 12.7, in deriving the negative- and zero-sequence impedances,

it is useful to think of tests in which negative- or zero-sequence sources are applied
to the generator terminals and the steady-state response is determined. We will use
the Park equations in this determination.
Negative·Sequence Test. In Figure A5.l we show the generator prepared for

the test. The field voltage VF = D. We use the generator convention on the reference
direction for stator currents. The reader may wish to review the description and no-
tation in Section 7.2 and the transformation technique outlined in Section 7.8. We
make the following assumptions regarding rotor angle eand the currents.
1. e = (}Jot + (1r/2) + 0,0 = constant

2. ia , ib , and i, are a set of negative-sequence sinusoids,
594 Appendices
iF
i,
I
\" ib
~ L i,
Figure A5.1 Synchronous ma-

chine under test.
i. = YzIIl cos (wot + cp)

ib = YzIIl cos ( wot + cp + 2;)
ic = YzIIl cos ( wot + cp _ 2;)
3. Neglect the damper currents iD and iQ.
The reader who did Exercise 3 in Section 6.4 knows that a negative-sequence
set of sinusoidal currents generates an armature reaction flux that rotates clockwise
with angular velocity woo Thus since the rotor is turning counterclockwise with an-
gular velocity wo, the flux linkages AD and AQ are changing rapidly (at a 2wo rate),
which implies large damper currents iD and i Q • Thus assumption 3 is not a good one
but is made to facilitate the analysis. Later we will discuss the effect of induding the
neglected terms.
Applying the Park transformation (7.16), we get
io = 0
id = V3 III cos (2wot + %+ 0 + cp ) (A5.1)
iq = V3 III sin (2wot + %+ 0 + cp )

To simplify the notation, let 'Y £ 7T/2 + 0 + cpo Using (7.31), (7.32), and(A5.l),
we get
_. . did diF
Vd - -rid - WOLqlq - Lddt - kMFdt
=-rid - woLq V31I1 sin (2wot + 'Y)
+ LN31112wosin (2wot + 'Y) - kMF diF (A5.2)

dt
. diF ,~ .
VF = 0 = rFIF + LFdt - kMF v31I12wosm (2wot + y) (AS.3)
Vq = -riq + WO(Ld V3 III cos (2w eI + y) + kMFi F) (AS.4)

- Lq V3 III 2wo cos (2wot + y)
We may now solve (AS.3) for the steady-state iF using phasors. We note that (AS.3)
describes a series RL circuit with a voltage source v(t) = v2 K sin (2wot + y), where
K ~ kMF V31I1 Y2wo. The circuit is shown in Figure AS.2. The (effective) pha-
sor representation of v(t) is V = - j Ke iY . Thus (noting that the frequency is 2wo) we
get for the phasor representation of iF
j kMF V31I1 v2woeiY

(AS.5)
rF + j 2w oLF
Since 'F« 2woL F,we can neglect it. Then
and converting back to instantaneous quantities,
, ~kMF
iF = - v3-III cos (2wot + y) (AS.6)
LF .
Using (AS.6) in (AS.2) and neglecting r, we get
Vd = -woLq V31I1 sin (2wot + y)

+ 2woLd V31I1 sin (2wot + y)
k2M2
- V3 __F2woLd III sin (2wot + y) (AS.7)
LF
= -[ woLq - 2Wo( Ld - (k~:)2)] V31I1 sin (2wot + y)

= -[Xq - 2Xd]V3II1 sin (2wot + y)
In (AS.7) we have used the definition of Xd first seen in Example 7.4.
v(t) = Vi K sin(2wol + 1)
Figure AS.2 Calculation of IF in
steady state.
596 Appendices
Next we find Vq by using (AS.6) in (ASA) and neglecting r. We get

(kMd
Vq = WOLd v3111 cos (2wot + y) - Wo - - v3111 cos (2wot + y)
LF
- 2woLqv3III cos (2wot + y) (AS.8)
4
= [ Wo ( Ld - (kMd) - 2WoLq ] v3111 cos (2wot + y)
= [Xd - 2Xq]v3111 cos (2wot + y)
The fact that the Park variables have a frequency 2wo is understandable in terms of
the transformation to rotor-based coordinates.
We next go back to abc variables using the inverse Park transformation (7.20).
To simplify the notation, let Ad k: -(Xq - 2X d) v3111, Aq k: (Xd - 2Xq) v3 III;
then Vd = Ad sin (2wot + y) and Vq = Aq cos (2wot + y). Thus
Va = ~ [cos 8· Ad sin (2%t + y) +sin 8· Aq cos (2%t + y))

(AS.9)
(i [Ad + Aq Ad - Aq ]
= ~"3 2 sin (2wot + y + 8) + 2 sin (2wot + y - 8)
Substituting for Ad, Aq, and ,,/, we get

< r: Xq - Xd
Va = 3 V 2 III 2 sin (3wot + 28 + if!)
(AS.lO)
V2 Xq + X d . .
+ 2111 2 sin (waf + t/J)
Notice that we get a 3wo term. Neglecting this term, we find a relationship between
the phasor voltage and current. Thus, using associated reference directions for im-
pedances and noting that the current into the impedance is - la' we have
_ ~ Va [(Xq + X d)/2)III (- jei<l» . Xq +~
Z = - = =] (AS.ll)
- Ia -llIei<!> 2
The negative-sequence impedance Z- has an interesting physical interpreta-
tion. The mmf due to the negative-sequence currents is rotating clockwise while the
rotor is rotating counterclockwise. Thus the magnetic circuit is rapidly changing from
one extreme in which the mmf and the direct axis of the rotor are aligned to the other
extreme where they are orthogonal. If we consider the case where they are aligned,
then in the steady state we might expect the phasor voltage and current to be relat-
ed by the impedance jXd • As usual we get Xd rather than Xd if we have the con-
straint AF = constant. We note that AF = constant is consistent with our assumption
of VF = 0 and rF = O.
On the other hand, when the mmf is aligned with the q axis, we expect the pha-
SOT voltage and current to be related by the impedance jXq • Thus the actual result
predicted by the analysis (that the impedance is the average of the two extremes) is
a reasonable result.
We have gone into some detail on this because we now want to make the fol-
lowing extension. When we include the damper D, Qcircuits in the analysis we get
a result similar to (A5.ll) but with different reactances. Instead of Xd we get X d, and
instead of Xq we get X~. Xd and X~ are subtransient reactances that depend most
heavily on the rotor damper circuits. But these are quite symmetrical from d to q axis
(i.e., X;; "" X~). In this case in (A5.l0) the 3wo term is really negligible, and instead
of (A5.ll) we get
X"+Xd ·X"
Z- .
= J
q
"" J d (A5.l2)
2
Consider next Vb' Altering (A5.9) appropriately and paralleling the steps that
led to (A5.l0), we get
Vb = ~ [ cos (e - 2;). Ad sin (2wot + "I)

+ sin(e - 2;)-AqCOS(2wot + "I)
(A5.l3)
= 3Vz III (Xq ~ Xd) sin ( 3wot + 28 + <p _ 2;)
v21I1 (Xq +
+ ,r.:; 21T)
2 Xd) sin ( wot + <p + 3"
Neglecting the 3wo term as before, we get from the Wo term

Vb = v;,e j21T/ 3
and similarly, after algebra,
Thus the voltages form a negative-sequence set. Note that the 3wo voltages do not
form a negative-sequence set. This may be .attributed to the lack of symmetry be-
tween the direct and quadrature axes magnetic circuits in the generator. Fortunate-
ly, at the subtransient level the symmetry is restored.
Zero·Sequence Test. If the generator neutral is not grounded, the zero-sequence

equivalent circuit of the generator is an open circuit and need not be considered fur-
ther. (We exclude from consideration the case of a short circuit at some intermedi-
ate point in the stator winding.)
Consider then the case of a generator whose neutral is grounded through an
impedance Zg. Setting all independent sources except zero-sequence sources equal
to zero, we consider the following experiment. We apply zero-sequence sinusoidal
598 Appendices
currents to the generator as shown in Figure A5.3 and measure the steady-state
zero-sequence voltages. In more detail, assume that
1. e = wot + (7r/2) + 8,8 = constant

2. ia , ib , and i, are zero-sequence sinusoids:
ia = ib = i, = V2III cos (wot + cf»'
Applying the Park transformation, we get
id = iq == 0 (AS.14)
io = ~~3V2III cos (wot + cf» = V61I1 cos (wot + cf» (A5.l5)
Looking at (7.31) and (7.32), we see there is no coupling between the zero se-
quence and direct axis or quadrature axis circuits. Thus, because VF = 0, and using
(AS.l4), we find that in the steady state
Vd = Vq == 0 (A5.l6)
We next find Vo using (7.31) and (AS.l5):
dio • r; • r;
Vo = -rio - Lo dt = - V 6r III cos (wot + cf» + V 6 woLo III sin (wot + cf»
(AS.l7)
We now go back to abc variables. Using the inverse Park transformation (7.20) and
noting (A5.l6), we get
Va = Vb = V, = - V2r III COS (wof + cf» + V2 woLo III sin (wot + cf» (A5.l8)
Switching to phasors, we find the zero-sequence impedance Zo:
V. = r + ]woLo
zo =II --Ia . "" ]woLo
'. = ]X
. 0 (A5.l9)
What we have found is the zero-sequence impedance from phase to neutral. The
notation Va is a shorthand notation for v;" = v~n' In the zero-sequence network we
need a different impedance, one from phase to ground. As shown in Section 12.6, this
leads to the circuit model in Figure AS.4.
' v - - t - - - + - i,
1 - - + 1 - - -__ ib
-+t----i,
Figure A5.3 Zero-sequence

test.
Appendix 6: Inversion Formula 599
Figure A5.4 Zero-sequence

model for generator.
The zero-sequence reactance usually turns out to be quite small. This can be
most easily understood physically by considering the air-gap fluxes set up by the three
identical zero-sequence currents; we considered a similar problem in Section 6.4 ex-
cept that the currents were positive sequence. For the simplest case, assume a round
rotor and an air-gap mmf for each phase winding that is sinusoidally distributed in
space with maximum magnitude at the center of each winding. Since the currents are
in phase and the windings are displaced by 120° angles, the air-gap mmfs sum to zero.
In this case the only voltage produced is in the leakage reactance, which is very small.
Thus woLo must be very small. In practice, without the idealization of total can-
cellation, woLo is larger.
APPENDIX S: INVERSION FORMULA
Suppose that we have an n X n symmetrical matrix M whose inverse, M- I , is known

and we wish to find the inverse of M + p,aaT, where p, is a scalar and a is an
n-vector. We note that by the rules of matrix mUltiplication
a;a2 ... alan]

aa
T all
a2
== : [a a2'" an] ==
[aia2a
:
l a2 ... azan
(A6.l)
l ·· ..
[an anal
·
ana2 ...
.,
a~
We use the following inversion formula:

[M + p,aaTr l == WI - ybb T (A6.2)
where
b == M-Ia (A6.3a)
y == (p,-l + aTbtl (A6.3b)
Since M- I is assumed known, the vector b and the scalar yare easily obtained. The
matrix bb T may easily be evaluated by noting the form of (A6.l). We note that the J
result in (A6.2) is a special case of a more general result commonly known as the
Householder formula. I
i
I
600 , Appendices
Proof of Inllersion formula. We simply multiply the modified matrix and

its inverse together and show that we get the identity matrix, 1.
[M + J.LaaT][M- 1 - 'YbbT] = MM- 1 - 'YMbb T + J.LaaTM- 1 - J.L'YaaTbbT
= 1 + remainder
We now show the remainder = O. To start, divide the remainder by 'Y. We get
remainder 1
--- = -MbbT + J.La-aTM- 1 - J.LaaTbb T
'Y 'Y
= -abT+ J.La(J.L- 1 + aTb)bT - J.LaaTbbT
=0
In line 2 of the preceding equation we have used Mb = a [from (A6.3a)],
'Y- 1 = J.L- 1 + aTb [from (A6.3b)], and (A6.3a).
Example A6.1
Suppose that we are given
M= [l 1 0]
2 1
1 1
M- 1 = -1
1 -1
2-2
[ 1 -2
1]
3
and wish to evaluate the inverse of M with m22 increased from 2 to 4. We then have
M= [ II !] {no =M + 1 01
in which we identify }.t = 2 and aT = [01 OJ.

Solution First find b and then 'I.
Substituting in the inversion formula, (A6.2), we get
M- 1
=
[ 1-1 1] [-1]
-1 2 -2 -0.4 2 [-1 2 -2]
1 -2 3 -2
0.6 -0.2 0.2]

= -0.2 0.4 -0.4
[ 0.2 -0.4 1.4
The correctness of the result may be checked by direct calculation.
Appendix 7: Modification of Impedance Matrices S01
APPENDIX 7: MODIFICATION OF IMPEDANCE MATRICES
Suppose that we have Ybus for a given network. Suppose now that the value of one
of the elements in the network is changed and we wish to find Ybus , the new admit-
tance matrix. Consider an example. Suppose that in Figure A7.l, Yl changes to
Y3 + AY3' It is easy to find the new admittance matrix. Using the rules in Section
6.1, we find (by inspection)
n _ (Yl + (Y3 + AY3) + Ys - Ys

Ybus - -Y5 Yz + Y4 + Y5
-(Y3+ AY3) -Y4
(A7.l)
10 -1)
= Ybus + AY3
(0 0
-1 0
0
1
where Ybus is the original admittance matrix (with AY3 = 0). Using the rules of ma-
trix multiplication, the reader may check that (A7.1) may also be written as follows:
Y:. ~ V". +A~[ J}1 0-I] (A7.2)
Changes in other branches may be described in similar terms. We note that in the case
of a branch connected to the reference node there is only a single nonzero entry in
the vectors in (A7.2).
For a more general network, suppose that the admittance of the kth branch
connecting nodes i and j is changed from Yk to Yk + AYk' Then
(A7.3)
where ak is a column vector. There are two cases to consider.
Case 1: Neither node i nor j is the reference node. Then in ak we can put a 1 in
the ith row and a -1 in the jth row. All other entries are zero.
Case 2: The kth branch connects the ith node to the reference node. Then we
can put a 1 in the ith row of ak' All other entries are zero. We note in passing
Ys
Reference
node
Figure A7.1 Example network.
602 Appendices
that in the network formulation using reference directions for branches and the
reduced incidence matrix, we can take the kth column of the node-branch re-
duced incidence matrix as 8k'
Now if we consider the corresponding changes in Zbus, some of this simplicity
is lost. In general, a change in a branch impedance causes changes in all the elements
of Zbus' Nevertheless, noting that (A7.3) is in the required form, it is still quite sim-
ple to find the new impedance matrix by application of the inversion formula de-
rived in Appendix 6. We get
Z~us = [Y~usrl = [Ybus + IlYk 8k8rJ- 1 (A7.4)
= Zbus - 'Ykbkbk
where
(A7.5)
and
1
'Yk = [ IlYk + 8kbk
]-1 (A7.6)
We can evaluate bk and 'Yk more explicitly. Suppose that the ith andjth columns of
Zbus are Zj and Zj respectively, and the iith,jjth, and ijth elements are Zjj, Zjj and Zjj'
respectively. Noting the specification of 8k> in place of (A7.5) and (A7.6), we get
Case 1:
(A7.7)
(A7.8)
Case 2:
bk = Zj ;:; (A7.9)
'Yk
1
= ( IlYk + Zii
)-1 (A7.l0)
Equation (A7.4) , together with (A7.7) and (A7.8) or (A7.9) and (A7.l0), gives a pre-
scription for calculating Z~us in terms of Zbus when a branch value is changed.
Example A7.1
Suppose that for a given network we are given Zbus:
j [0.200 0.100 0.100]

Zbus ="3 0.100 0.500 0.200
0.100 0.200 0.200
'1
Appendix 7: Modification of Impedance Matrices 603
Now the admittance of branch 2, located between nodes 1 and 2, is changed from - jS
to - j1S. Find Zbu,'
Solution We have ~Yz = - j15 - (- j5) = - jlO. Since the branch is connected
between nodes 1 and 2., to find bzwe use (A7.7) and get
bz = ZI - Zz = 1[_~:!~~]
3 -0.100
From (A7.8) we get
12
l'
±
= [ _ jlO + (0.2 + 0.5 - 0.2)
]-1 = - j3.750
Using (A7.4), we get
Zbus = Zbu, + j3.75 l . [ -0.4

0.1].
[0.1 ± -0.4 -0.1]
3 -0.1
Om -0.04 -0.01]
1.25
= Zbu, - j -3- -0.04 0.16 0.04
[ -0.01 0.04 0.01
. [0.1875 0.150 0.1125]
= ± 0.150 0.300 0.150
0.1125 0.150 0.1875
We will now consider an important special case of a change in element value.

Suppose that we add a branch k, between nodes i and j, where previously there was
no element. Suppose that this branch has admittance Yb and impedance Zb = l/Yb'
ThenLlYk = Ybandl/LlYk = Zb' In (A7.6),(A7.8),and(A7.l0), therefore, we may re-
place 1/ LlYk by Zb' For example, in (A7.8), we get
(A7.11)
The modification considered is an important part of the Z-building technique

discussed in Section 9.5. Another important modification used in the Z-building
technique consists of adding a node to the given network by attaching only one side
of a branch. The other side (the dangling side) defines a new node. We wish now to
consider how this modification changes Zbus' Assuming that Zbus is an r X r matrix,
let the new node be numbered r + 1. Assume that the branch has admittance Yb and
impedance Zb = l/Yb'
If the new branch is connected to the reference node, we have by the rules for
forming Ybus>
yn =
bus
[Ybus
Or
0]
Yb
604 <Appendices
and it immediately follows that
znbus -_ [ZbUS
OT
0]
Zb
(A7.l2)
The correctness of the result can be checked by matrix multiplication.

If, instead, the new branch is connected to the ith node [i.e., we have a connec-
tion between the ith node and the (r + 1)st node J, then
yn
bus = [Ybus
OT 00] + Yb3k3Tk (A7.l3)
where 3k has the following nonzero entries: 1 in the ith row and -1 in the (r + 1)st
row. This looks similar to the case treated earlier, with one exception; the foregoing
matrix, involving Ybus , does not have an inverse, so we cannot use the inversion for-
mula directly. The problem can be bypassed in typical engineering fashion by re-
placing the zero in the r + 1, r + 1 place by an admittance of e (with the intention
of letting € ~ 0 later). Thus instead of (A7.l3), consider
Ynbus =
[Ybus
Or
0] T
e + Yb 3k3k (A7.14)
with inverse now given by the inversion formula.
(A7.lS)
where
[~
bk = 0]
o -1
T e
0
"[ ~]
0
-1
and
Appendix 8: Data for Transmission-Line Parameters 605
Ziis the ith column of Zbus, and li' is its iith element. Substituting these results in
(A7.15), we get .
o
~
1 Z,Zi
T
-E-
-
Zi
1
1 - Zb + lii + liE -Z; 1..
r E E2 (A7.l6)
Now as we let 8 -7 0, we get
znbus -_ [ZbUS
zT (A7.l7)
It is a simple matter to border Zbus as shown in (A7.17).

Given a network whose impedance matrix is sought, we may start with a very
simple version of the network whose impedance matrix may easily be determined
(by inspection) and then, using (A7.l2), (A7.l7), and (A7.4) , determine the new im-
pedance matrices that accompany the adding of nodes and branches until the given
network is "built." This technique, called l building, is discussed in Section 9.5.
APPENDIX 8: DATA FOR TRANSMISSION·LINE PARAMETERS
TABLE AS.1. BARE. ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS: STEEL REINFORCED (ACSR]

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MULTILAYER SIZES
Resistance Phase-to-Neutral,
60 Hz Reactance
ac-60 Hz at One It Spacing
Number dc
of 20'C 25'C 50'C 75'C Inductive Capacitive
Code Size Stranding Aluminum (Ohmsl (Ohmsl (Ohmsl (Ohmsl GMR Ohmsl Megohm-Miles
Word (kcmil) ,AL/St. Layers Mile) Mile) Mile) Mile) (It) Mile X, X~
Waxwin 266.8 18/1 2 0.3398 0.347 0.382 0.416 0.0197 0.477 0.109
I3 rtridgeJ 266.8 2617 2 0.3364 0.344 0.377 0.411 0.0217 0.465 0.107
Ostrich 300. 2617 2 0.29Q3 0.306 0.336 0.366 0.0230 0.458 0.106
Merlin 336.4 18/1 2 02693 0.276 0.303 0.330 0.0221 0.463 0.106
Linnet 336.4 2617 2 0.2671 0.273 0.300 0.327 0.0244 0.451 0.104
Oriole 336.4 3017 2 0.2650 0.271 0.297 0.324 0.0255 0.445 0.103
Chickadee 397.5 1811 2 0.2279 0.234 0.257 0.279 0.0240 0.452 0.103
Ibis 397.5 2617 2 0.2260 0.231 0.254 0.277 0.0265 0.441 0.102
Lark 397.5 3017 2 0.2243 0.229 0.252 0.274 0.0277 0.435 0.101
Pelican 477 18/1 2 0.1899 0.195 0.214 0.233 0.0263 0.441 0.100
(continued)
606 Appentiices
60 Hz Reactance
ac-60 Hz at One It Spacing
Number dc
Code Size Stranding Aluminum (Ohmsl (Ohms! (Ohmsl (Ohms! GMR Ohmsl Megohm-Miles
Word (kcmiJ) Al./St. Layers Mile) Mile) Mile) Mile) (It) Mile X, X;
Flicker 477 2417 0.1889 0.194 0.213 0.232 0.0283 0.432 0.0992
(Ha';kj 477 2617 0.1883 0.193 0.212 0.231 0.0290 0.430 0.0988
\H~-" 477 3017 0.1869 0.191 0.210 0.229 0.0304 0.424 0.0980
Osprey 556.5 18/1 0.1629 0.168 0.184 0.200 0.0284 0.432 0.0981
Parakeet 556.5 2417 0.1620 0.166 0.183 0.199 0.0306 0.423 0.0969
~
,.",,<,"~-
556.5 2617 0.1613 0.166 0.182 0.198 0.0313 0.420 0.0965
. Eagle 556.5 3017 0.1602 0.164 0.180 0.196 0.0328 0.415 0.0957
Peacock 605 2417 0.1490 0.153 0.168 0.183 0.0319 0.418 0.0957
Squab 605 2617 0.1485 0.153 0.167 0.182 0.0327 0.415 0.0953
Teal 605 30/19 0.1475 0.151 0.166 0.181 0.0342 0.410 0.0944
Kingbird 636 1811 0.1420 0.147 0.162 0.175 0.0301 0.425 0.0951
Rook 636 2417 0.1417 0.146 0.160 0.174 0.0327 0.415 0.0950
Grosbeak 636 2617 0.1411 0.145 0.159 0.173 0.0335 0.412 0.0946
Swift 636 36/1 0.1410 0.148 0.162 0.176 0.0300 0.426 0.0964
Egret 636 30/19 0.1403 0.144 0.158 0.172 0.0351 0.406 0.0937
Flamingo 666.6 2417 2 0.1352 0.139 0.153 0.166 0.0335 0.412 0.0943
Crow 715.5 5417 3 0.1248 0.128 0.141 0.153 0.0372 0.399 0.0920
Starling 715.5 2617 2 0.1254 0.129 0.142 0.154 0.0355 0.405 0.0928
Redwing 715.5 30/19 0.1248 0.128 0.141 0.153 0.0372 0.399 0.0920
Coot 795 36/1 0.1146 0.119 0.130 0.142 0.0335 0.412 0.0932
Cuckoo 795 2417 0.1135 0.118 0.128 0.140 0.0361 0.403 0.0917
r§ 795 2617 0.1129 0.117 0.128 0.139 0.0375 0.399 0.0912
Mallard 795 30/19 0.1122 0.116 0.127 0.138 0.0392 0.393 0.0904
Tern 795 4517 0.1143 0.119 0.130 0.141 0.0352 0.406 0.0925
I' Condor 795 5417 0.1135 0.117 0.129 0.140 0.0368 0.401 0.0917
Crane 874.5 5417 0.1030 0.107 0.117 0.127 0.0387 0.395 0.0902
Ruddy 900 4517 0.1008 0.106 0.115 0.125 0.0374 0.399 0.0907
Canary 900 5417 0.1002 0.104 0.114 0.124 0.0392 0.393 0.0898
Corncrake 954 2017 0.0950 0.099 0.109 0.118 0.0378 0.396 0.0898
Rail 954 4517 0.09526 0.0994 0.109 0.118 0.0385 0.395 0.0897
Towhee 954 4817 0.0950 0.099 0.108 0.118 0.0391 0.393 0.0896
954 2417 0.0945 0.098 0.108 0.117 0.0396 0.392 0.0890
954 5417 0.09452 0.0983 0.108 0.117 0.0404 0.389 0.0890
Ortolan 1033.5 4517 0.08798 0.0922 0.101 0.110 0.0401 0.390 0.0886
Curlew 1033.5 5417 0.08728 0.0910 0.0996 0.108 0.0420 0.385 0.0878
Bluejay 1113 4517 0.08161 0.0859 0.0939 0.102 0.0416 0.386 0.0874
Finch 1113 54119 0.08138 0.0851 0.0931 0.101 0.0436 0.380 0.0867
Bunting 1192.5 4517 0.07619 0.0805 0.0880 0.0954 0.0431 0.382 0.0864
Grackle 1192.5 54119 0.07600 0.0798 0.0872 0.0947 0.0451 0.376 0.0856
(continued)
[
Appendix B: Data for Transmission-Line Parameters 607
TABLE AS.1. BARE ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS, STEEL REINFORCED (~C~RJ

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MULTltAYER SIZES (Cant'd) - '.
60 Hz Reactance
ac-60 Hz
at One ft Spacing
Number dc
Code Size Stranding Aluminum (Ohms/ (Ohms! (Ohms/ (Ohms/ GMR Ohms/ Megohm-Miles
Word (kcmil) Al.ISt. Layers Mile) Mile) Mile) Mile) (ft) Mile X, X;
Bittern 1272 4517 3 0.07146 0.0759 0.0828 0.0898 0.0445 0.378 0.0855
Pheasant 1272 54/19 3 0.07122 0.0751 0.0820 0.0890 0.0466 0.372 0.0847
Dipper 1351.5 4517 3 0.06724 0.0717 0.0783 0.0848 0.0459 0.374 0.0846
Martin 1351.5 54/19 3 0.06706 0.0710 0.0775 0.0840 0.0480 0.368 0.0838
Bobolink 1431 4517 3 0.06352 0.0681 0.0742 0.0804 0.0472 0.371 0.0837
Plover 1431 54/19 3 0.06332 0.0673 0.0734 0.0796 0.0495 0.365 0.0829
Nuthatch 1510.5 4517 3 0.06017 0.0649 0.0706 0.0765 0.0485 0.367 0.0829
Parrot 1510.5 54/19 3 0.06003 0.0641 0.0699 0.0757 0.0508 0.362 0.0821
Lapwing 1590 4517 3 0.05714 0.0620 0.0674 0.0729 0.0498 0.364 0.0822
Falcon
Chukar
1590
1790
54/19
84/19
3
4
0.05699
0.05119
0.0611
0.0561
0.0666
0.0609
0.0721
0.0658
0.0521
0.0534
0.358
0.355
0.0814
0.0803 r
Mocking-
bird 2034.5 7217 4 0.04488 0.0507 0.0549 0.0591 0.0553 0.348 0.0788
Bluebird 2156 84119 4 0.04229 0.0477 0.0516 0.0555 0.0588 0.344 0.0775
Kiwi 2167 7217 4 0.04228 0.0484 0.0522 0.0562 0.0570 0.348 0.0779
Thrasher 2312 76/19 4 0.03960 0.0454 0.0486 0.0528 0.0600 0.343 0.0767
Joree 2515 76/19 4 0.03643 0.0428 0.0459 0.0491 0.0621 0.338 0.0756
[
1. Direct current (de) resistance is based on 16.946 ohm-cmillft (61.2% lACS) at 20'C for nominal aluminum area of the con-
ductors, and 129.64 ohm-cmiUft. (8% lACS) at 20'C for the nominal steel area, with standard increments for stranding. ASTM r_.
B 232.
2. Alternating current (ac) resistance is based on the resistance corrected for temperature using 0.00404 as temperature coeffi-
cient of resistivity per degree C for aluminum and 0.0029 per degree C for steel, and for skin effect. [
3. The effective ac resistance of three-layer ACSR increases with current density due to core magnetization.
4. For ampacity ratings of bare conductors, see Figures 3.13 and 3.i4. in Aluminum Electrical Conductor Handbook. [
S. Data by permission from Aluminum Association, Aluminum Elecrrical Conductor Handbook, 3rd ed., Washington, DC, 1989.
f
I
!J
I
TABLE AB.2 INDUCTIVE REACTANCE SPACING FACTOR Xd AT 60 HZ
(OHMS PER MILE PER CONDUCTOR]
Separation
Inches
Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0 ... " .. -0.3015 -0.2174 -0.1682 -0.1333 -0.1062 -0.0841 -0.0654 -0.0492 -0.0349 -0.0221 -0.0106
1 0 0.0097 0.0187 0.0271 0.0349 0.0423 0.0492 0.0558 0.0620 0.0679 0.0735 0.0789
2 0.0841 0.0891 0.0938 0.0984 0.1028 0.1071 0.1112 0.1152 0.1190 0.1227 0.1264 0.1299
3 0.1333 0.1366 0.1399 0.1430 0.1461 0.1491 0.1520 0.1549 0.1577 0.1604 0.1631 0.1657
4 0.1682 0.1707 0.1732 0.1756 0.1779 0.1802 0.1825 0.1847 0.1869 0.1891 0.1912 0.1933
5 0.1953 0.1973 0.1993 0.2012 0.2031 0.2050 0.2069 0.2087 0.2105 0.2123 0.2140 0.2157
6 0.2174 0.2191 0.2207 0.2224 0.2240 0.2256 0.2271 0.2287 0.2302 0.2317 0.2332 02347
7 0.2361 0.2376 0.2390 0.2404 0.2418 0.2431 0.2445 0.2458 0.2472 0.2485 0.2498 0.2511
8 0.2523
9 0.2666
10 0.2794
11 0.2910
12 0.3015
13 0.3112
14 0.3202
15 0.3286
16 0.3364
17 0.3438
18 0.3507
19 0.3573
20 0.3635
21 0.3694
22 0.3751
23 0.3805
24 0.3856
25 0.3906
26 0.3953 At 60 Hz, in !1/mi per conductor
27 0.3999 Xd = 0.2794 log d
28 0.4043
29 0.4086
d = separation, ft
30 0.4127 For three-phase lines
31 0.4167 d = D,q
32 0.4205
33 0.4243
Note: For 8-49 feet use interpolation
34 0.4279
35
36
37
38
0.4314
0.4348
0.4382
0.4414
"
39 0.4445
40 0.4476
41 0.4506
42 0.4535
43 0.4564
44 0.4592
45 0.4619
46 0.4646
47 0.4672
48 0.4697
49 0.4722
From Electrical Transmission and Distribution Reference Book, by permission of the ABB Power T & D Com-
pany, Inc.
TABLE A8.3 SHUNT: "CAPACITANCE-REACTANCE SPACING EIl:CTORXdAT 61D HZ" , : "
[MEGOHM-MILES PEFtCONDUCTOR" -
."
'"','
"'.~~;
- " , , ' ~," ~ ~ -' ,
Separation
Inches
Feet 1 5 6 7 8 9
° 2 3 4
....... -0,0737 -0,0532 -0,0411 -0,0326 -0,0260 -0,0206 -0,0160

10 11
-0,0120 -0,0085 -0,0054 -0,0026

° °
1
2 0,0206
0,0024 0,0046 0,0066 0,0085 0,0103 0,0120 0,0136
0,0218 0,0229 0,0241 0,0251 0,0262 0,0272 0,0282
0,0152 0,0166 0,0180 0,0193
0,0291 0,0300 0,0309 0,0318
3 0,0326 0,0334 0,0342 0,0350 0,0357 0,0365 0,0372 00379 0,0385 0,0392 0,0399 0,0405
4 0,0411 0,0417 0,0423 0,0429 0,0435 0,0441 0,0446 0,0452 0,0457 0,0462 0,0467 0,0473
5 0,0478 0,0482 0,0487 0,0492 0,0497 0,0501 0,0506 0,0510 0,0515 0,0519 0,0523 0,0527
6 0,0532 0,0536 0,0540 0,0544 0,0548 0,0552 0,0555 0,0559 0,0563 0,0567 0,0570 0,0574
7 0,0577 0,0581 0,0584 0,0588 0,0591 0,0594 0,0598 0,0601 0,0604 0,0608 0,0611 0,0614
8 0,0617
9 0,0652
10 0,0683
11 0,0711
12 0,0737
13 0,0761
14 0,0783
15 0,0803
16 0,0823
17 0,0841
18 0,0858
19 0,0874
20 0,0889
21 0,0903
22 0,0917
23 0,0930
24 0,0943
25 0,0955
26 0,0967 At 60 Hz, in MD,mi per conductor
27 0,0978 Xi = Q,06831 log d
28 0,0989 d = separation, ft
29 0,0999
30 0.1009 For three'phase lines
31 0,1019 d = D,q
32 0.1028 Note: For 8-49 feet use interpolation
33 0.1037
34 0.1046
35 0.1055
36 0.1063
37 0.1071
38 0.1079
39 0.1087
40 0.1094
41 0.1102
42 0.1109
43 0.1116
44 0.1123
45 0,1129
46 0,1136
47 0,1142
48 0.1149
49 0.1155
From Electrical Transmission and Distribution Reference Book, by permission of the ABB Power T & D Com-
pany, Inc.
609
•
Selected Bibliography
ALUMINUM ELECTRIC CONDUCTOR HANDBOOK, 3,d ed., Washington, DC, 1989.

ALVARADO, F. 1., 'TINNEY, W. F., and ENNS, M. K., Sparsity in Large·Scale Network Computa-
tion, Control and Dynamic Systems, Advances in Theory and Applications, Volume 41:
Analysis and Control System Techniques for Electric Power Systems Part 1of 3, pp. 207-272,
Academic Press, San Diego, CA, 1991, C. 1. Leondes, editor.
ANDERSON, P. M., Analysis of Faulted Power Systems, IEEE Press, Piscataway, NJ, 1995.
ANDERSON, P. M., and FOUAD,AA, Power System Control and Stability, IEEE Press, Piscat-
away, NJ, 1994.
BLACKBURN, 1. 1., Protective Relaying Principles and Applications, 2nd ed. Marcel Dekker,
New York, 1998.
CARSON, 1. R., Wave Propagation in Overhead Wires with Ground Return, Bell System Tech. J.
5: 539-554, 1926.
ELGERD, O. 1., Electric Energy Systems Theory:An Introduction, 2nd ed., McGraw-Hill, New
York, 1982.
ELMORE, W. A., Protective Relaying Theory and Applications, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1994.
FOUAD, A A, and VITIAL, v., Power System Transient Stability Analysis i!lng the Transient
Energy Function Method, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1992.
GOLUB, G. H., and VAN LOAN, C. F., Matrix Computations, The Johns Hopkins University Press,
Baltimore, MD, 1983.
GRAINGER, J. J., and STEVENSON, W. D., JR., Power System Analysis, McGraw-Hill, New York,
1994.
GROSS, C. A, Power System Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1979.
HOROWITZ, S. H., and PHADKE, A G., Power System Relaying, 2nd ed., Research Studies Press,
Ltd., London, and John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1995.
IEEE Tutorial on the Protection of Synchronous Generators, IEEE 95 TP 102.
IEEE Tutorial Course on Advancements in Microprocessor Based Protection and Communi-
cation, New York, IEEE rn TP 120-0.
KIMBARK, E. w., Power System Stability: Synchronous Machines, Dover reprint edition of the
original John Wiley &Sons book, Dover Publications, New York, 1968.
810
[
Selected Bibliography 611
['
KUMAR, 1. and SHEBLE, G. B., Auction Market Simulator for Price Based Operation, IEEE r-
Transactions on Power Systems, 13 (1): 250-255, 1998.
KUNDUR, P., Power System Stability and Control, McGraw-Hili, New York, 1994,
McGraw-Hill Encyclopedia of Energy, 2nd ed" McGraw-Hill, New York, 1981.
NEUENSWANDER,J. R, Mo¢em Power Systems, Intext Educational Publishers, New York, 1971.
NORTH AMERICAN ELECTRIC RELIABILITY COUNCIL (NERC) Defining Interconnected Opera-
tions Under Open Access, Interconnected Operations Services Working Group Final Re-
port, March 1997. (See http://www.nerc.coml) .
PAl, M, A, Computer Techniques in Power System Analysis, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, India, 1979.
PAl, M, A" Power System Stability-Analysis by the Direct Method of Lyapuhov, North Hol-
land, Amsterdam, 1981.
PHADKE,A G., and THORP,l S" Computer Relaying for Power Systems, Research Studies Press,
Ltd., London, and John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY, 1988.
SAUER, P. w., and PAl, M. A., Power System Dynamics and Stability, Prentice Hall, Upper
Saddle River, NJ, 1998.
STEVENSON, W. D., JR., Elements of Power System Analysis, 4th ed., McGraw-Hill, New York,
1982. [,
WEEDY, B. M., Electric Power Systems, 3rd ed., John Wiley & Sons, London, 1979.
WESTINGHOUSE ELECTRIC CORPORATION, Electric Transmission and Distribution Reference
Book, 4th ed., East Pittsburgh, PA, 1964.
WOLLENBERG, B. F., Privatization and Energy Management Systems, Proceedings of the Power
System Operators Short Course, Iowa State University, April 27-May 1, 1998.
WOOD, A 1., and WOLLENBERG, B. E, Power Generation Operation and Control, 2nd ed., John
Wiley and Sons, New York, 1996.
[
Index
A Bus:
definition, 14
ABCD constants, 98, 130-31, 155-56 generator bus, 327
Acceleration and deceleration areas, 544-46 slack or swing bus, 327
Acceleration factors, 337 voltage control bus, 327
Active power (see Power) infinite bus, 208
Admittance matrices (see Bus admittance matrices) load bus, 327
Alternative and other energy sources, 12-13 Bus admittance matrices, 294-303
Analog to digital conversion, 523 writing by inspection, 295
Ancillary services, 21 Bus impedance matrices, 311,317
Ancillary services company (ANCILCO), 19 modification of, 601-05
Alternator (see Synchronous machines) Z-building algorithm, 312-17
Apparent power (see Power)
Area control error (ACE), 376,396-400
Area frequency characteristic, 395
Armature reaction, 189,193-96,199
c
Attenuation constant (a), 97 Capacitance (per phase) of three-phase lines:
Auction market, 430 with equilateral spacing, 79-80
Automatic generation control (AGC), 375 with bundling and transposition, 80, 86
Automatic load-frequency control (see Power control Capacitors as sources of reactive power, 32
system) Capacity benefit margin (CBM), 435
Automatic reclosing of circuit breakers, 530, Center of angle, 557
Autotransformers, 175-77 Characteristic or surge impedence (2,),92,96,100
Automatic voltage regulator (AVR) (see Voltage Circle diagram (see Power circle diagram)
control system) Circuit breakers. 14,495-97,519-20,529
Available transmission capability (ATC), 433-35 Classical model (see Synchronous machines)
Average power (see Power) Coal-fired power plant, 5-9
Cogeneration, 9
Coherency, 390, 556
B Complex power (see Power)
Computer relaying, (see Relaying)
Back substitution, 304, 307 Conservation of complex power, 30-35
Backup protection, 498,501-04 Control:
Balanced three phase, 35-43 of P and Q over transmission lines, 106-07, 173-75,
Balanced three-phase theorem, 43 356,360-63
Base values in per unit system (see Per unit system) of generator active power (see Power control
Blackout, 529 system)
Breaker (see Circuit breakers) of generator reactive power, 211-12
Bundled conductors: of generator voltage (see Voltage control system)
capacitance of, 80, 86 Control area, 395, 432-33
inductance of, 6~7, 85 Control valve, 6, 377
813
614 , Index
Convergence, rate o~ 336-39 Energy services company (ESCO), 19

Coordination time delay, 498-99 Equal area method, 544-49
Critical clearing angle (drcl, 547-48 Equal-area stability criterion, 544
Critical clearing time (Tcritical ), 530, 547-48 Exempt wholesale generator (EWG), 18
Current transformers (ers), (see Transformers) Excitation system (see Voltage control system
Cylindrical rotor, 188
F
D Factorization (see Triangular factorization)
Damping: Fast decoupled power flow, 354
generator natural damping, 267'-{)9 Fault:
torque, 565 double line-to-ground (DLG), 457-59
voltage control system, effect on damping, 287-91 general procedure, 461'-{)2
Dc (or offset or unidirectional) current, 243, 244-45, justification of basic analysis method, 451-55
482 line-to-line (1L),459'-{)0
Decoupled power flow, 136-37,139 matrix methods, 482-86
Delta-delta (A-A) transformer bank, 136-37, 139, simplifying assumptions, 477-78
144-45 single line-to-ground (SLG), 455-57
per-phase equivalent circuit, 145 symmetrical components, 446-50
impedance diagram, 160 three-phase, 482
Delta-wye (A-Y) transformer bank, 136-37, 139, types o~ 445-46
145-46 use of sequence networks, 455'-{)1, 475-77
impedance diagram. 160 Fault, sequence of events, 529-30
per-phase equivalent circuit, 146 Faults, effect on transient stability, 553-54
protection o~ 517-518 Federal energy regulatory commission (FERC), 18
Delta-wye load transformation, 40-41 Field, synchronous machine, 188
Demand side management (DSM), 18 Filters, sequence, 520-21
Deregulation and electric power industry, 18-21 Fills or fill-ins, 366
Direct axis: First swing stability, 549
geometric significance, 199 Flat voltage profile, 478, 501
reactance, 201, 255 Flux in single-phase transformer, 128
subtransient reactance, 245 Flux linkages:
transient reactance, 242 of one straight wire alone, 57...{)O
Discrete Fourier transform, 523, 524 of one straight wire among many, 60...{)3
Distance relay (see Relays) of simple coil,55-56
Distribution company (DISTCO), 19 Flux linkages in single-phase transformers, 131-32
Distribution system (see Transmission and Distribution) Flux linkages of stator coil, 196-97,200
Double line-to-ground (DLG) fault, 457-58 Flux wave in synchronous machines:
Droop characteristic, 382-83, 393-94 (see also air gap, 196 "-
Regulation) armature reaction, 196, 199 rj
Dynamic stability, 291 due to field current alone. 189
seen from synchronously rotating reference frame,
195
E Forward contract, 431
Forward substitution, 304, 307
Economic dispatch: Fossil-fuel plant (see Coal-fired plant)
classical economic dispatch, 405-18 Fourier transform, 524
general problem formulation, 403-D5 Frequency bias parameters or settin~ 396
incremental (fuel) cost, (IC), 406 Fuel cost curve, 401-D2
Lagrange multiplier~ use o~ 409-10, 417 Futures contrac~ 431
optimal dispatch rules:
lossless cases, 406-D7, 412
lossy case~ 418
order of merit dispatch, 415 G
penalty factors, 417 Gain, loop (K), 586
calculation using power !low program, 421-26 Gaussian elimination, 303
Effective phasor representation, 23 Gaussian surface, 54, 75, 190
Electric energy sources, 1-13 Gauss-Seidel iteration, 330-33, 337
[
Index 615 [
Generation company (GENCO), 18-19 K

Generator (see Synchronous machine)
Generator bus, 327 Kinetic energy:
Geometric mean distance (GMD), 65 of coupled turbine-generator rotors, 533
Geometnc mean radius (GMR), 65 spring-mass analogy used in equal area criterion,
GMR of stranded conductors 605-07 539
Governor (see Speed governor) . Kron reduction, 309-11, 568
Ground versus phase relay connections, 512
Grounding impedance (Zg), 451. 453, 456, 457,460,
462 L
Lagrange multipliers, use of, 409-10, 417-18, 584-86
Liapunov function, 563
H Lightning stroke, transient due to, 528
Heat-rate curve, 401-02 Line (see Transmission lines)
H constant (see Inertia constant) Linearization of equations, 339-40, 266-67, 286-87,
Hydraulic servomotor, 377-78 379-80
Hydroelectric power plant, 11-12 Line loss function (P L ), 416
Line-to-line fault (see Fault)
Linked list, 364
Load:
bus, 327
Ideal transformer (see Transformers) flow (see Power flow)
Imaginary power (see Power) frequency dependence, 389
Impedance: impedance, 28-29, 164-70, 565
base (see Per-unit normalization) in transmission and distribution, 14
characteristic, 92, 96, 100 serving entity (LSE), 432
generator, line, transformer impedances (see Long line equations, 90-92
Reactances) Loop gain (K), 586
load,28-29 Lower triangular factors, 303
modified by transformers, 130-31 LV factorization (see Triangular factorization)
three-phase transmission line with ground return,
71-73
sequence impedances (see Fault: use of sequence M
networks)
Impedance diagrams, 160, 164-70 Machine reference frame, 253
Impedance matrices (see Bus impedance matrices) Magnetizing current (see Transformers)
Impedance relay, 508-10 Matrix inversion formula, 599-{i00
Incident and reflected waves, 97 Matrix reduction, 178,309-11,568
Incremental (fuel) cost, 406 Maximum deceleration area, 544
Independent contract administrator (ICA), 19 Medium-length line, 102
Independent system operator, (ISO), 19 Microprocessor-based relays (see Relays)
Inductance (per phase) of three-phase line: Minimum performance criteria, 376, 397-98
with bundling and transposition, 64-71, 85-86 Mismatch in power flow calculation, 344-45
with equilateral spacing, 63 Modified impedance relay, 512-14
Induction disk relay, 499-500 Moment of inertia (1),533 r
Inductive reactance at 1 ft spacing, 82 Multimachine stability studies, 563-{i9
Inductive reactance spacing factor, 82,608
Inertia constant (H), 534 I
Infinite bus, 208 N
Input -output curve, 402 National energy policy act (NEPA), 18
Instantaneous power (see Power) Natural damping, of generators, 267-{i8
Integrated. resource planning (IRP), 18 Natural frequencies, 537
Inverse discrete Fourier transform, 524 Negative feedback root locus, 586-93
Inverse elements of Ybu" 317 Negative sequence reactances of generators, 467,
593-97
Negative sequence variables (see Symmetrical
components)
Jacobian matrix, 340
616 Index
Newton-Raphson iteration, 339-52 Power (cont'd)

Nonsymmetrical fault (see Fault) average,25,28
Normalization (see Per-unit normalization) complex, 26, 28
Normal system, 150--57 control of power flow by transformers,170--75,
definition, 154 360--63
North American electric reliability council (NERC), decoupling of active and re'active flow, 356,360
20,376,432,563 flow down a short transmission line,103--111
Notice of proposed rulemaking (NOPR), 18--19 imaginary (see Power, reactive)
Nuclear power plant, 10--11 instantaneous, 24, 26--27
Nyquist sampling frequency, 523 reactive, 25-28
real,28
single phase, 23--30
o supplied by generator,209
in terms of symmetrical components, 462-63
One-line diagram, 13, 15, 16--17, 33,164, 298,324 in three-phase circuits, 35, 46-47
One-machine connected to infinite bus: Power angle,104,198
model of linearized system, 265-69 Power-angle curve, 207
power control system added, 384--85 Power circle diagram,103-07,112-13
voltage control system added,284--92 Power control system:
Operating point (or condition), 266 multigenerator system, 388-400
Optimal dispatch (see Economic dispatch) area control error (ACE), 395-400
Option contract, 431 area frequency response characteristic (AFRC), 395
Overcurrent relay, 496, 499-500 pool operation, 395, 430
tie-line bias control, 396--97
p two-area system, 391-94
single turbine generator model, 377--88
Park's transformation, 226--27 speed governor model, 377--84
Park's equations, 229-31 stability, 385-87
Penalty factor, 417 static performance, 382-83
Permeability of free space, (lI1o), 58 Power exchange,19
Permittivity of free space, ('t), 76 Power factor, 25
Per-phase analysis, 43-46, 142 Power flow:
Per-unit analysis of normal systems,164--70 control o~ 103-07, 356
Per-unit normalization,157-70 discussion of problem, 327-30
advantages of,170 equations, 325--26, 341
change of base,163 solution by:
definition of,1 57 decoupled power flow, 352-54
impedance diagram of transformer,160 fast decoupled power flow, 354
use of three-phase quantities,160--63 Gauss-Seidel iteration, 330--33, 337
Per-unit reactances of synchronous machines, table Newton-Raphson iteratiqn, 339-52
o~201, 468 Power system stabilizer (PSS~90--92
Per-unit system (see per-unit normalization) Power wheeling, 430
Phase constant (b), 97 Propagation constant (g), 91,97
Phase plane trajectory, 541 Price discovery, 432
Phase sequence, 36 Primitive admittance, 295
Phasor representation, 22-23 Primitive impedance, 295
ll-equivalent circuit, 99-101 Protection (see also Relays)
Planning market, 431 backup, 498
Pointer, 364 of buses, 518--19
Pool operation, 395 of generators, 514--16
Positive feedback root locus, 591-93 of radial lines, 497-504
Positive sequence reactances of generators 466-67 of transformers, 516--18
Positive sequence variables (see Symmetri~al of transmission lines, 519
components) overlapping zones, 519-20
Potential transformer, PT's (seeTransfonners) zones,508-D9
Power: Protective relays (see Relays)
active, 28 Pseudo steady state analysis, 254, 528, 564
apparent, 28 Pumped storage,l1
Index 617
Q Relays (com'd)
time delay characteristic, 500
Quadrature axis,199 Reluctance, 57, 218-21,580-81
Quadrature axis reactance, 201, 255 Root locus method, 586-93
Quantization, 523 Root-mean-square (rms) value, 25
Quasi steady state analysis (see Pseudo steady state Rotating reference frame (see Synchronously rotating
analysis) reference frame)
Rotor angle:
actual, 188, 189-90,22
R relative to synchronously rotating reference frame,
195,535
Reactances:
Rotor angle transient, 536, 549, 573-74
of sYnchronous machines:
Round rotor, 188
direct-axis (synchronous), 201, 255
direct-axis transient, 242
direct -axis sub transient, 245
negative sequence, 467
positive sequence, 466-67
s
quadrature-axis, 201,255 Salient poles, 11,189
table of, 201, 468 Second method of Liapunov, 563
zero sequence. 468 Sequence impedances (see Reactances)
of transformers: Sequence networks (see Fault)
leakage, 133 Short circuit (see Fault)
magnetizing, 133 Short transmission line, 102-03
negative sequence, 469-71 power flow down, 103-11
positive sequence, 469-71 Simplified circuit diagram, 157
zero sequence, 472 Single-line diagram (see One-line diagram)
of transmission lines: Single line-to ground fault (see Fault)
from tables, 81-83 Single-phase power, 23-30
induding ground return, 71-73 Slack or swing bus, 327-28
negative sequence, 474 Sources of electricity, 1-13
positive sequence, 474 Sparse matrix, 311, 346, 364
zero sequence, 473-74 Speeder motor or speed changer, 379, 383
Reactive power (see Power) Speed governor, 377-80
Real power (see Power) Speed voltage (vs. "transformer voltage"), 216, 230
Reclosure time (T), 530 Spot market, 431
Reference bus (see Slack bus) Stability:
Regional transmission group (RTG), 19 conservative (steady state) limit, 114-16
Regulating transformers (see Transformers) dynamic, 291
Regulation: effect of power system stabilizer, 290-92
speed,383 effect of voltage control system, 286-89
voltage, 281-84 first swing, 549
Relays (see also Protection) transient, 528-29, 562--63, 563-74
balanced beam, 511 ultimate (steady state) limit, 105
coordination of, 498 Stabilizer, power system, 290-92
computer, 522-25 Stiffness coefficients (see Synchronizing power
differential, 514-16 coefficients)
direCtional, 504--08 Storage requirements, 364--65
distance, 508-12 Subtransient component, 245-48
electromagnetic, 496, 581-84 Surge impedance, 96
impedance, 508-12 Surge impedance loading (SIL), 85, 96, 114-15
induction disk, 499-500 Swing curves, 535-36,549,573-74
mho,513 Swing equation, 534, 539
microprocessor, 522 Swing or slack bus, 327-328
modified impedance, 512-14 Symmetrical components:
overcurrent, 496, 498-500 definition of, 446-47
percent differential, 515 examples illustrating, 448-50
ratio, 508-11 power in terms of, 462-63
reach of,510 transformation matrix, 447
618 Index
Symmetrical three-phase network, 35 (see also Transformers (conl'd)

Balanced three phase) regulating, 127,170-75,360-63
Synchronism, loss of, 106, 549, 564 short-circuit test 134-35
Synchronizing power coefficients, 389, 536 simplified per phase diagram, 157
Synchronous condenser, 211 wye-delta connection, 139, 146-51
Synchronously rotating (or synchronous) reference wye-wye-connection, 139, 143
frame, 195, 535 zero sequence equivalent circuits, 432
Synchronous machines: Transient reactance (see Direct axis, reactance)
armature reaction, 189, 193-96, 199 Transient stability, 528-29,562-63,563-74
buildup of voltage in, 236-38 Transmission and distribution system, 13-17
circuit model, 232-34 Transmission company (TRANSCO), 19
description oL 187-89,221-22 Transmission lines:
electrical differential equations. 231, 233 bundled conductors, 64-67
mechanical differential equations, 232 capacitance oL 76-79, 86
nonsynchronous operation, 248-50 inductance oL 60-75, 85
one machine connected to infinite bus, 208, 265-69 long-line model, 90-93, 99-101
open-circuit voltage, 190-92,236-38,260-61 medium-length line model, 101-{)2
power formulas, 205-07 short-line model, 102..{)3
pullout power, 207 stability limit, 114-16
reactances, 201, 468 surge impedance loading (SIL), 85, 96, 114-15
round rotor (steady-state) model, 197 table of typical data for high voltage lines, 85
salient pole (steady-state) model, 201 tables of conductor parameters, 605-611
short-circuit transient in, 238-48, 261-62 thermallirnitations.113-14
simpliJied dynamic model, 256-60 transposition of lines, 67-70
synchronizing to infinite bus, 208-10 Transmission matrix, 98-99
two-reaction (steady state) model, 201, 255-56 Transmission reliability margin (TRM),435
System protection (see Protection) Triangular factorization, 30~7
Turbine-generator operation, 6-9
Turbine-generator model, 385-86
Two-reaction theory (see Synchronous machines)
T
Thermal limitations (see Transmission lines)
Three-phase circuits: u
power in, 35, 46-47 Upper triangular factors, 303
balanced, 35-38 Ultimate (steady state) stability, 105
voltage and current in balanced, 43 Unidirectional component (see Dc current)
Tie-line bias control, 400 Uniform damping, 554
Time delay, coordination, 498-99, 501 Unsymmetrical fault (see Fault)
Torque angle (see Power angle)
Total transfer capability (TIC), 434-35
Transfer function, 586
Transformers:
v
Auto, 175-77 Valence of nodes, 366
circulating current, 152-54 Voltage:
complex ideal, 141-42 collapse, 111
connection induced phase shift and voltage gain, control bus, 327
146-47 effect of capacitors on, 108-09, 111
core losses, 132 generator internal (source) voltage:
delta-delta connection, 139, 144-45 proportional to field current, 191, 197, 257
delta-wye connection, 139, 145-46 proportional to field flux linkages, 258
description of, 127-28, 136-39 line-to-line related to line-neutral, 41-42
ideal, 129-30 Voltage control system:
impedance diagram for, 160 excitation system, 273-77
impedance transformation in, 130-31, 141 generator damping:
leakage reactance of, 133 effect of power system stabilizer, 290-92
magnetizing current in, 132 effect of voltage control system, 286-89
open-circuit test, 134-35 generator models, 361-63
protection of, 516-18 stability of isolated system, 277-79
Index 619
Voltage control &ystem (cont'd) y

stability of one machine connected to infinite
bus, 284-89 Ybus (see Bus admittance matrices)
static performance, 281-84
Voltage regulation, 281-84
z
w Zbu, (see Bus impedance matrices)
Zero-sequence reactance:
Wave, incident and reflected, 97-98 of generator, 468, 597-99
Wave, rotating flux, 195-96 . of transmission line, 473
Wye-delta (Y-a) transformer bank, 136, 139, 146-51 Zero-sequence networks:
impedance diagram, 160 of delta and wye-connected loads, 463-66
per-phase equivalent circuit, 146 of transformer banks, 472
Wye-wye (Y-Y) transformer bank, 136, 139, 143 Zones of protection, 508-09, 519-20
impedance diagram, 133
per-phase equivalent circuit, 143

Bergen PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bergen PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bergen PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the book about based on the table of contents?

What is the book about based on the table of contents?

What topics are covered in Chapter 3 based on its title?

What topics are covered in Chapter 3 based on its title?

M3nd

~,-~ ;'(',,: . :.'~ . ~ ~~:~~/~~j ~d~:'~;{~~

Power Systems Analysis

Department of Electrical Engineering

University of California, Berkeley

Iowa State University,Ames

Publisher: Tom Robbins

©1986, 2000 by Prentice·Hall, Inc.

Printed in the United States of America

PRENTICE·HALL INTERNATIONAL (UK) LIMITED, London TRADEMARK INFORMATION

5 TRANSFORMER MODELING AND THE PER UNIT

6 GENERATOR MODELING I (MACHINE VIEWPOINT) 187

7 GENERATOR MODELING II (CIRCUIT VIEWPOINT) 215

7.0 Introduction 215

8.0 Introduction 273 ,-

9 NETWORK MATRICES 294

10 POWER FLOW ANALYSIS 323

11 AUTOMATIC GENERATION CONTROL AND THE NEW

12 UNBALANCED SYSTEM OPERATION 445

13 SYSTEM PROTECTION 495

14 POWER SYSTEM STABILITY 528

SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY 612

1.1 ELECTRIC ENERGY

Conversion Plant use T & D

Bllion kilowatthours BlIion kilowatthours

1000 Conventional steam 1000

Figure 1.2 Electric utility energy production (United States]. (From

Million kilowatts Million kilowatts

700 Internal combustion, 700

'55 '60 '65 '70 '75 '80 '85 '90 '96

In meeting the varying load requirements, economic considerations make it de-

Figure 1.4 Daily load output

approximately 265 million. Thus, there was a generating capability of approximate-

1.2 FOSSIL·FUEL PLANT

Figure 1.5 Coal-fired power station (schematic).

Figure 1.6 Thermodynamic cycle diagram. (Adapted from McGraw-Hili

Cooling water connections Stator housing

View is partially sectional

Figure 1.7 An 18OG-MVA four-pole (operating at 1800 rpm) synchro-

1.3 NUCLEAR POWER PLANT

Figure 1.8 Pressurized-water reactor. (Courtesy of Atomic In-

1.4 HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANT

Hydroelectric generation is an important source of power in the United States, ac-

Figure 1.9 Cross section through powerhouse and dam. Grand

1.5 OTHER ENERGY SOURCES

magnetohydrodynainic generation, generators driven by diesel engines, fuel cells,

1.6 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

Figure 1.10 One-line diagram.

Figure 1.11 One-line diagram of 69-bus system. [Courtesy of

To Vancllver Stations Owned

Partial representation of cities,

Figure 1.12 Major transmission facilities in service. (Courtesy of the De-

1.7 THE DEREGULATED ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY

• GENCO (generation company). The GENCOs are responsible for provid-

auxiliary or so-called ancillary services, which enhance reliability and quality of

~,-~ ;'(',,: . :.'~ . ~ :/~~j ~d~:'~;{~~